14 files changed, 43427 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6833f05
--- /dev/null
+++ b/.gitattributes
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+* text=auto
+*.txt text
+*.md text
diff --git a/22595-8.txt b/22595-8.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bec73cb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22595-8.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,12394 @@
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of At the Point of the Sword, by Herbert Hayens
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: At the Point of the Sword
+
+Author: Herbert Hayens
+
+Release Date: September 14, 2007 [EBook #22595]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK AT THE POINT OF THE SWORD ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Al Haines
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+[Frontispiece: "In a short time they had bound our arms tightly with
+strips of hide."]
+
+[Transcriber's note: frontispiece missing from book.]
+
+
+
+
+
+
+At the Point of the Sword
+
+
+A Story for Boys
+
+
+By
+
+HERBERT HAYENS
+
+
+
+  Author of "Ye Mariners of England," "Under the Lone Star,"
+  "For the Colours," "A Captain of Irregulars,"
+  "In the Grip of the Spaniard,"
+  &c., &c.
+
+
+
+
+THOMAS NELSON & SONS, LTD.
+
+LONDON, EDINBURGH, AND NEW YORK
+
+1903
+
+
+
+
+CONTENTS.
+
+
+      I.  A BIRTHDAY EVE
+     II.  AN EXCITING VOYAGE
+    III.  THE END OF THE "AGUILA"
+     IV.  THE SILVER KEY
+      V.  IN THE HIDDEN VALLEY
+     VI.  WE LEAVE THE HIDDEN VALLEY
+    VII.  WHOM THE GODS LOVE DIE YOUNG
+   VIII.  A FRIENDLY OPPONENT
+     IX.  A GLEAM OF HOPE
+      X.  A STORMY INTERVIEW
+     XI.  A NARROW ESCAPE
+    XII.  A STERN PURSUIT
+   XIII.  HOME AGAIN
+    XIV.  FRIEND OR FOE?
+     XV.  WE CATCH A TARTAR
+    XVI.  GLORIOUS NEWS
+   XVII.  DUTY FIRST
+  XVIII.  DARK DAYS
+    XIX.  FALSE PLAY, OR NOT?
+     XX.  "SAVE HIM, JUAN, SAVE HIM!"
+    XXI.  ROUGH JUSTICE
+   XXII.  THE "SILVER KEY" AGAIN
+  XXIII.  AN OPEN-AIR PRISON
+   XXIV.  A DANGEROUS JOURNEY
+    XXV.  BACK TO DUTY
+   XXVI.  THE HUSSARS OF JUNIN
+  XXVII.  A DISASTROUS RETREAT
+ XXVIII.  THE BATTLE OF THE GENERALS
+   XXIX.  HOME AGAIN
+
+
+
+
+LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS.
+
+
+"IN A SHORT TIME THEY HAD BOUND OUR ARMS TIGHTLY
+  WITH STRIPS OF HIDE" . . . . . . _Frontispiece_
+
+"'HELP, HELP!' I EXCLAIMED FAINTLY; BUT HE HEARD ME,
+  AND I KNEW I WAS SAVED."
+
+"PUSHING OFF HIS SANDY BED-CLOTHES AT OUR APPROACH,
+  HE STRUGGLED TO HIS FEET."
+
+"'SAVE HIM, JUAN, SAVE HIM!'"
+
+"HE GLANCED CONTEMPTUOUSLY AT THE GIGANTIC SORILLO."
+
+"'A SOLDIER FROM AYACUCHO!  HERE IS ONE OF OUR BRAVE
+  DELIVERERS!'"
+
+
+
+
+AT THE POINT OF THE SWORD.
+
+
+CHAPTER I.
+
+A BIRTHDAY EVE.
+
+In spite of my English name--Jack Crawford--and my English blood, I
+have never set foot on that famous little island in the North Sea, and
+now it is quite unlikely that I ever shall do so.
+
+I was born in Peru, on the outskirts of beautiful Lima, where, until
+the year 1819, on the very eve of my fourteenth birthday, the days of
+my childhood were passed.
+
+I expect you know that in ancient days Peru was called the "Land of the
+Sun," because the sun was worshipped by the natives.  Their great city
+was Cuzco, built, it is said, in 1043 A.D., by Manco Capac, the first
+of the Incas, or Emperors of Peru.
+
+The natives believed Manco to be a child of the sun; but I have heard
+an old story that his father was a shipwrecked Englishman, who married
+the daughter of a Peruvian chief.  I do not think this tale correct,
+but it is full of interest.
+
+Most of the Incas ruled very wisely, and the remains of palaces,
+temples, and aqueducts show that the people were highly civilized; but
+in 1534 the Spaniards, under Pizarro, invaded the country, and swept
+away the glorious empire of the Incas.
+
+After that Peru became a part of Spanish America, and Pizarro founded
+the city of Lima, which he made the capital.
+
+My father, who settled in the country when quite a young man, married a
+Peruvian lady of wealthy and influential family.  The estate near Lima
+formed part of her marriage portion, and a beautiful place it was, with
+a fine park, and a lake which served me both for boating and bathing.
+I had several friends, chiefly Spaniards, but two English boys, whose
+fathers were merchants in Callao, often visited me, and many a pleasant
+game we had together.
+
+At this time Peru was a Spanish colony, but some people, among whom was
+my father, wanted to make it an independent country, having its own
+ruler.  Being still a boy, I did not hear much of these things, though,
+from certain talk, I understood that the country was in a most
+unsettled state, and that the Spanish governor had thrown many good men
+into prison for urging the people to free themselves.
+
+One evening, in March 1819, I was busy in my workshop painting a small
+boat.  My father had been absent for nearly a week, but he had promised
+to return for my birthday, and every moment I expected to see him
+crossing the courtyard.
+
+Presently, hearing old Antonio unfasten the wicket-gate, I put down my
+brush, wiped my hands, and ran out joyously.
+
+The happy welcome died on my lips.  It was not my father who had
+entered, but Rosa Montilla, the young daughter of a famous Spanish
+officer.  She was nearly a year younger than myself, and a frequent
+visitor at our house.  Often we had gone together for a row on the
+lake, or for a gallop on our ponies round the park.
+
+She was very pretty, with deep blue eyes and fair hair, quite unlike
+most Spanish girls, and generally full of fun and good spirits.  Now,
+however, she was very pale and looked frightened.  I noticed, too, that
+she had no covering on her head or shoulders, and that she had not
+changed the thin slippers worn in the house.
+
+These things made me curious and uneasy.  I feared some evil had
+befallen her father, and knew not how to act.  On seeing me she made a
+little run forward, and, bursting into tears, cried, "O Juan, Juan!"
+using, as also did my mother, the Spanish form of my name.
+
+Now, being only a boy, and being brought up for the most part among
+boys, I was but a clumsy comforter, though I would have done anything
+to lessen her grief.
+
+"What is it, Rosa?" I asked; "what has happened?"  But for answer she
+could only wring her hands and cry, "O Juan, Juan!"
+
+"Do not cry, Rosa!" I said, and then doing what I should have done in
+the first place, led her toward the drawing-room, where my mother was.
+"Mother will comfort you.  Tell her all about it," I said confidently,
+for it was to my mother I always turned when things went wrong.
+
+On this her tears fell faster, but she came with me, and together we
+entered the room.
+
+"Juan!" cried my mother.--"Rosa! what is the matter?  Why are you
+crying?  But come to me, darling;" and in another moment she was
+pressing the girl to her bosom.
+
+At a sign from her I left the room, but did not go far away.  Rosa's
+action was so odd that I waited with impatience to hear the reason.
+She must have left her home hurriedly and unobserved, since it was an
+unheard-of thing that the daughter of Don Felipe Montilla should be out
+on foot and unattended.  I was sure that should her father discover it
+he would be greatly annoyed.  The whole affair was so mysterious that I
+could make nothing of it.  The girl's sobs were more under control now,
+and she began to speak.  As she might not wish me to hear her story, I
+walked away, meaning to chat with Antonio at the gate, and to await my
+father's return.
+
+He might not come for hours yet, as it was still early evening, but I
+hoped he would, and the more so now on Rosa's account.  She might need
+help which I was not old enough to give; while, as it chanced, Joseph
+Craig, my father's trusty English servant, had gone that afternoon into
+Callao.  However, he also might be back at any moment now, and would
+not, in any case, be late.
+
+Half an hour had perhaps passed, and I was turning from the gate, when
+two horsemen dashed up at full speed.  One was Joseph Craig, or Jos� as
+the Spaniards called him, and my feeling of uneasiness returned as I
+noticed that his face, too, wore a strange and startled look.
+
+Jos�, as I have said, was my father's servant; but we all regarded him
+more as a friend, and treated him as one of ourselves.  He was a
+well-built man of medium height, with good features and keen gray eyes.
+He spoke English and Spanish fluently, and could make himself
+understood in several Indian dialects.  He kept the accounts of the
+estate, and might easily have obtained a more lucrative situation in
+any counting-house in Callao.  He excelled, too, in outdoor sports, and
+had taught me to fence, to shoot, and to ride straight.
+
+The second man I did not know.  He seemed to be an Indian of the
+mountains, and was of gigantic stature.  His dress was altogether
+different from that of the Spaniards, and in his cap he wore a plume of
+feathers.  His face was scarred by more than one sword-cut, his brows
+were lowering, and his massive jaw told of great animal strength.
+Jos�'s horse had galloped fast, but the one ridden by the stranger was
+flaked with foam.
+
+Antonio would have opened the big gate without question: but I,
+thinking of Rosa, forbade him, saying to Jos� in English, "Does he mean
+harm to the girl?"
+
+You see, my head was full of the one idea, and I could think of nothing
+else.  I imagined that Rosa had run away from some peril, and that this
+man with the savage face and cruel eyes had tracked her to our gate.
+So I put the question to Jos�, who looked at me wonderingly.
+
+"The girl?" he repeated slowly; "what girl?"
+
+"Rosa Montilla," I answered.
+
+We spoke in English; but at the mention of Rosa's name the mountaineer
+scowled savagely, and leaned forward as if to take part in the
+conversation.
+
+"The man has come from the mountains with a message for your mother,"
+said Jos�; "I met him at the entrance to the park.  But if Rosa
+Montilla is here, the news is known already."
+
+His face was very pale, and he spoke haltingly, as if his words were
+burdensome, and there was a look in his eyes which I had never seen
+before.
+
+I motioned to Antonio, and the two passed through.  What message did
+they bring?  What news could link dainty little Rosa with this wild
+outlaw of the hills?
+
+Jos� jumped to the ground and walked with me, laying a hand on my
+shoulder.  Until then I had no thought of the truth, but the touch of
+his fingers sent a shiver of fear through me, and I looked at his face
+in alarm.
+
+"What is it, Jos�?" I asked; "what has happened?  Why did Rosa steal
+here alone and sob in my mother's arms as if her heart would break?"
+
+"The little maid has heard bad news," he answered quietly, "though how
+I do not know."
+
+"And as she had no mother, she came to mine for comfort," I said.  "It
+was a happy thought: mother will make her forget her trouble."
+
+Jos� stopped, and looked searchingly in my face.
+
+"Poor boy!" he said.  "You have no idea of the truth, and how can I
+tell you?  The little maid did not weep for her own sorrow, but for
+yours and your mother's."
+
+At that I understood without further words, though I was to learn more
+soon.  The reason of it I guessed, though not the matter; but I knew
+that somewhere my dear father lay dead--killed by order of the Spanish
+viceroy.
+
+Jos� saw from my face that I knew, and there was sympathy in the very
+touch of his hand.
+
+"It is true," he whispered.  "The Spaniards trapped him in the
+mountains, whither he had gone to meet the Indians.  They wished to
+rise against the government; but he knew it was madness just now, and
+thought to keep them quiet till his own plans were ready."
+
+"And the Spaniards slew him?"
+
+"Yes," replied Jos� simply.  "Here," pointing to the mountaineer, "is
+our witness."
+
+"But how did Rosa hear of it? she was not in the mountains.  Ah, I
+forgot!  Her father stands high in the viceroy's favour.  And so my
+father is dead!"
+
+The thought unnerved me, and I could have cried aloud in my sorrow.
+
+"Hold up your head, boy!" exclaimed the harsh voice of the mountaineer.
+"Tears are for women and girls.  Years ago my father's head was cut
+off, but I did not cry.  I took my gun and went to the mountains," and
+he finished with a bitter laugh.
+
+"But my mother!" I said.  "The news will break her heart."
+
+"The world will not know it," he answered, and he spoke truly.
+
+"I am glad the little maid has told her," remarked Jos�, giving his
+horse and that of the stranger to a serving-man.  "Jack, do you go in
+and prepare her for our coming."
+
+A single glance showed that Rosa had indeed told her story.  She sat on
+a lounge, looking very miserable.  My mother rose and came toward me.
+Taking my hands, she clasped them in her own.  She was a very beautiful
+woman, famous for her beauty even among the ladies of Lima.  She was
+tall and slightly built, with black hair and glorious dark eyes that
+shone like stars.  I have heard that at one time she was called the
+"Lady of the Stars," and I am not surprised.  They shone now, but all
+gentleness had gone from them, and was replaced by a hard, fierce
+glitter which half frightened me.  Her cheeks were white, and her lips
+bloodless; but as far as could be seen, she had not shed a tear.
+
+Still holding my hands, and looking into my face, she said, "You have
+heard the news, Juan?  You know that your father lies dead on the
+mountains, slain while carrying a message of peace to the fierce men
+who live there?"
+
+I bowed my head, but could utter no sound save the anguished cry of
+"Mother, mother!"
+
+"Hush!" she exclaimed; "it is no time for tears now.  I shall weep
+later in my own room, but not before the world, Juan.  Our grief is our
+own, my son, not the country's.  And there is little Rosa, brave little
+Rosa, who came to bring me the news; she must go back.  Let Miguel
+bring round the carriage, and see that half a dozen of the men ride in
+attendance.  Don Felipe's daughter must have an escort befitting her
+father's rank."
+
+I began to speak of the strange visitor outside; but Rosa was her first
+care, and she would see no one until Rosa had been attended to.  So I
+hurried Miguel, the coachman, and the men who were to ride on either
+side of the carriage, returning to the room only when all was ready.
+
+Mother had wrapped Rosa up warmly, and now, kissing her, she said,
+"Good-bye, my child.  You were very good to think of me, and I shall
+not forget.  Tell your father the truth; he will not mind now."
+
+Rosa kissed my mother in reply, and walked unsteadily to the coach.
+She was still sobbing, and the sight of her white face added to my
+misery.
+
+"Don't cry, Rosa," said I, as I helped her into the carriage and wished
+her good-bye, neither of us having any idea of the strange events which
+would happen before we met again.
+
+As soon as the carriage had gone, my mother directed that the stranger
+should be admitted, and he came in accompanied by Jos�.  I would have
+left the room, but my mother stopped me, saying,--
+
+"No, Juan; your place is here.  An hour ago you were but a thoughtless
+boy; now you must learn to be a man.--Se�or, you have brought news?
+You have come to announce the death of my husband; is it not so?"
+
+The mountaineer bowed almost to the ground.
+
+"It is a sad story, se�ora, but it will not take long to tell.  The
+Spaniards pretended he was stirring up our people to revolt; they
+waited for him in the passes, and shot him down like a dog."
+
+"Did you see him fall?"
+
+The fellow's eyes flashed with savage rage.  "Had I been there," he
+cried, "not a soldier of them all would have returned to his quarters!
+But they shall yet pay for it, se�ora.  My people are mad to rise.
+Only say the word, and send the son of the dead man to ride at their
+head, and Lima shall be in flames to-morrow."
+
+My mother made a gesture of dissent.
+
+"Don Eduardo liked not cruelty," she exclaimed; "and it would be but a
+poor revenge to slay the innocent.  But Juan shall take his father's
+place, and work for his country's freedom.  When the time comes to
+strike he shall be ready."
+
+"Before the time comes he will have disappeared," cried the
+mountaineer, with a harsh laugh.  "Do you think Don Eduardo's son will
+be allowed to live?  Accidents, se�ora, are common in Peru!"
+
+"It is true," remarked Jos�; "Juan will never be out of danger."
+
+"But the country is not ready for revolt, and only harm can come from a
+rising now.  Should the Indians leave their mountain homes, the trained
+soldiers will annihilate them."
+
+"But Juan must be saved!"
+
+"Yes," assented my mother; "we must save Juan to take his father's
+place."
+
+After this there was silence for a time.  Then Jos� spoke, "There is
+one way," said he slowly.  "He can find a refuge in Chili till San
+Martin is ready; but he must go at once."
+
+A spasm of fresh pain shot across my mother's face, but it disappeared
+instantly; even with this added grief she would not let people know how
+she suffered.  Only as her hand rested on mine I felt it tremble.
+
+"Let it be so, Jos�," she said simply.  "I leave it to you."
+
+Then she thanked the mountaineer who had ridden so far to break the
+terrible news to her, and the two men went away, leaving us two
+together.
+
+"Mother," I said, "must I really leave you?"
+
+For answer she clasped me in her arms and kissed my face passionately.
+
+"But you will come back, my boy!" she cried; "you will come back.  Now
+that your father is no more, you are my only hope, the only joy of my
+life.  O Juan, Juan! it is hard to let you go; but Jos� is right--there
+is no other way.  I will be brave, dear, and wait patiently for your
+return.  Follow in your father's footsteps.  Do the right, and fear not
+whatever may happen; be brave and gentle, and filled with love for your
+country, even as he was.  Keep his memory green in your heart, and you
+cannot stray from the path of honour."
+
+"I will try, mother."
+
+"And if--if we never meet again, my boy, I will try to be brave too."
+
+She wiped away the tears which veiled like a mist the brilliance of her
+starry eyes, and we sat quietly in the darkening room, while outside
+Jos� was making preparations for our immediate departure.
+
+At last he knocked at the door, and without a tremor in her voice she
+bade him enter.
+
+"The horses are saddled, se�ora."
+
+"Yes; and your plan, what is it?" she asked.
+
+"It is very simple, se�ora.  Juan and I will ride straight to Mr.
+Warren at Callao.  He may have a vessel bound for Valparaiso; if not,
+he will find us one for my master's sake.  Once at sea, we shall be out
+of danger.  General San Martin will give us welcome, and there are many
+Peruvians in his army."
+
+Once my mother's wonderful nerve nearly failed her.  "You will take
+care of him, Jos�," she said brokenly.
+
+"I will guard him with my life, se�ora!"
+
+"I know it, I am sure of it; and some day yon will bring him back to
+me.  God will reward you, Jos�.--Good-bye, Juan, my boy.  Oh how
+reluctant I am to let you go!"
+
+I will not dwell on the sadness of that parting.  The horses were
+waiting in the courtyard, and after the last fond embrace I mounted.
+
+"Good-bye, mother!"
+
+"Farewell, my boy.  God keep you!" and as we moved away I saw her white
+handkerchief fluttering through the gloom.
+
+At the gate the Indian waited for us, and he followed a few paces in
+the rear.
+
+I thought this strange, and asked Jos� about it.
+
+"It may be well to have a friend to guard our backs," he replied.
+
+So in the gathering darkness I stole away from my home, with my heart
+sore for my father's death and my mother's suffering.  And it was the
+eve of my birthday--the eve of the day to which I had looked forward
+with such delight!
+
+Being so young, I did not really understand the peril that surrounded
+me; but my faith in Jos� was strong, and I felt confident that in
+taking me away he was acting for the best.
+
+Our path through the park led us near the lake, and I glanced
+sorrowfully at its calm waters and fern-fringed border.  I would have
+liked to linger a moment at its margin, dwelling on past joys; but Jos�
+hurried me on, remarking there was no time to waste.
+
+Only, as the great gates swung open, he let me stop, so that I might
+bid a silent adieu to the beautiful home where my happy days of
+childhood had been passed.
+
+"Keep a brave heart," said he kindly; "we shall be back some day.  And
+now for a word of advice.  Ride carefully and keep your eyes open.  I
+don't want to frighten you, but the sooner we're clear of Lima the
+better I shall be pleased."
+
+With that he put spurs to his horse, and with the clanging of the gate
+in our ears we rode off on the road to Callao, while the gigantic
+Indian followed about twenty paces behind.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II.
+
+AN EXCITING VOYAGE.
+
+It may be that Jos�'s fears on my account had exaggerated the danger,
+as we reached Callao without interruption, and dismounted outside Mr.
+Warren's villa.  Here the Indian took leave of us, but before going he
+unfastened a silver key from the chain round his neck, and pressed it
+into my hand.
+
+"It may happen," said he, "that at some time or other you will need
+help.  That key and the name of Raymon Sorillo will obtain it for you
+from every patriot in the mountains of Peru.  For the present,
+farewell.  When you return from Chili we shall meet again."
+
+Without waiting for my thanks he bade adieu to Jos� and then, spurring
+his horse into a gallop, he disappeared.
+
+From the man who opened the gate in answer to our summons we learned
+that my father's friend was at home, and leaving our horses, we went
+immediately into the house.  This English merchant had often been our
+guest, and it was soon abundantly evident that we had done right in
+trusting him.  He was a short, round-faced man, with a florid
+complexion, twinkling eyes, and sandy hair.  He was very restless and
+irritable, and had a queer habit of twiddling his thumbs backward and
+forward whenever his hands were unoccupied.
+
+"How do, Joseph?" exclaimed he, jumping up.  "Come to take that berth I
+offered you?  No?  Well, well, what a fool a man can be if he tries!
+Why, bless me, this is young Jack Crawford!  Eight miles from home, and
+at this time of night too!  Anything the matter?  Get it out, Joseph,
+and don't waste time."
+
+While Joseph was explaining the circumstances, the choleric little man
+danced about the room, exclaiming at intervals, "Ted Crawford gone?
+Dear, dear!  Not a better fellow in South America!  I'd shoot 'em all
+or string 'em up!  The country's going to the dogs, and a man isn't
+safe in his own house!  Eh?  What?  Hurt the boy?  What's the boy to do
+with it?  They can't punish him if his father had been fifty times a
+rebel!"
+
+"That is so, sir," remarked Jos�; "but he might meet with an
+unfortunate accident, or vanish mysteriously, or something of that
+kind.  What's the use of making believe?  Those who have got rid of the
+father won't spare the son, should he happen to stand in their way."
+
+"Which he will," interrupted Mr. Warren.  "My poor friend was hand in
+glove with the Indians, and they'll rally round the boy."
+
+"There are other things, too, which need not be gone into now,
+however," said Jos�; "but the long and the short of it is that Jack
+must be got out of the way at present."
+
+"And his mother?"
+
+"She has sent him to you."
+
+"But he can't be hidden here.  The rascally Dons will have him in the
+casemates before one can say 'Jack Robinson!'"
+
+"We don't mean to stay here, sir," replied Jos�.  "Our idea is to go to
+Valparaiso, and we thought if you had a ship--"
+
+"The very thing, Joseph," and the thumbs went backward and forward
+taster than ever.  "Maxwell has a schooner leaving in the morning.  You
+can go on board to-night if you choose, but you had better have some
+supper first."
+
+As it happened, both Jos� and I had been some time without food, so we
+were glad to have something to eat; after which Mr. Warren took us to
+the quay, where the schooner _Aguila_ lay moored.
+
+"There she is," he remarked; "let us go aboard.  Most likely we shall
+find Maxwell there.--Hi, you fellows, show a light!--Lazy dogs, aren't
+they?  Mind your foot there, and don't tumble into the harbour; you
+won't get to Valparaiso that way.--That you, Maxwell?  I have brought a
+couple of friends who are so charmed with your boat that they want to
+make a trip in her.  Where do you keep your cabin?  Let's go down
+there; we can't talk on deck."
+
+Mr. Maxwell was another English merchant at Callao, and as soon as he
+heard what had happened, he readily agreed to give us a passage in the
+_Aguila_.  We must be prepared to rough it, he said.  The schooner had
+no accommodation for passengers, but she was a sound boat, and the
+Chilian skipper was a trustworthy sailor.  Then he sent to his
+warehouse for some extra provisions, and afterwards introduced us to
+the captain, whose name was Montevo.
+
+As the schooner was to sail at daylight, our friends remained with us,
+and, sitting in the dingy cabin, chatted with Jos� about the state of
+the country.  By listening to the talk I learned that General San
+Martin was a great soldier from Buenos Ayres, who, having overthrown
+the Spanish power in Chili, was collecting an army with which to drive
+the Spanish rulers from Peru.  At the same time another leader, General
+Bolivar, was freeing the northern provinces, and it was thought that
+the two generals, joining their forces, would sweep Peru from north to
+south.
+
+"And a good thing, too!" exclaimed Mr. Warren.  "Perhaps we shall have
+a little peace then!"
+
+"Pooh! stuff!" said his friend; "things will be worse than ever!  These
+people can't rule themselves.  They're like disorderly schoolboys, and
+need a firm master who knows how to use the birch.  I am all for a
+stern master."
+
+"So am I," agreed Jos�, "if he's just, which the Spaniards aren't."
+
+"That is so," cried Mr. Warren.  "What would our property be worth if
+it wasn't for the British frigate lying in the harbour?  Tell me that,
+Maxwell; tell me that, sir!  They'd confiscate the whole lot, and clap
+us into prison for being paupers," and the thumbs revolved like the
+sails of a windmill.
+
+So the talk continued until daybreak, when the skipper, knocking at the
+cabin door, informed us that the schooner was ready to sail; so we all
+went on deck, where the kindly merchants bade us good-bye, and hoped we
+should have a pleasant voyage.
+
+"Keep the youngster out of mischief, Joseph.  There's plenty of food
+for powder without using him," were Mr. Warren's last words as he
+stepped ashore, followed by his friend.
+
+It was the first time I had been on board a ship, and I knew absolutely
+nothing of what the sailors were doing; but presently the boat began to
+move, the merchants, waving their hands, shouted a last good-bye, and
+very quickly we passed to the outer harbour.
+
+I have been in many dangers and suffered numerous hardships since then,
+some of which are narrated in this book, but I have never felt quite so
+wretched and miserable as on the morning of our departure from Callao.
+
+Wishing to divert my thoughts, Jos� pointed out the beauties of the bay
+and the shore; but my gaze went far inland--to the lonely home where my
+mother sat with her grief, to the mighty cordillera where my father lay
+dead.  Time softened the pain, and brought back the pleasures of life,
+but just then it seemed as if I should never laugh or sing or be merry
+again.
+
+The first day or two on the _Aguila_ did not tend to make me more
+cheerful, though the skipper did what he could to make us comfortable.
+We slept in a dirty little box, which was really the mate's cabin, and
+had our meals, or at least Jos� had, at the captain's table.
+
+By degrees, however, my sickness wore off, and on the fourth morning I
+began to take an interest in things.  By this time the land was out of
+sight; for miles and miles the blue water lay around us--an
+interminable stretch.  There was not a sail to be seen, and the utter
+loneliness impressed me with a feeling of awe.
+
+Jos� was as ignorant of seafaring matters as myself; but the captain
+said we were making a good voyage, and with that we were content.  A
+stiff breeze blew the schooner along merrily, the blue sky was flecked
+only by the softest white clouds, and the swish, swish of the water
+against the vessel's sides sounded pleasantly in our ears.  I began to
+think there were worse ways of earning a living than by going to sea.
+
+That same evening I turned in early, leaving Jos� on deck, but I was
+still awake when he entered the cabin.
+
+"There's an ugly storm brewing," said he, kicking off his boots, "and I
+don't think the skipper much likes the prospect of it.  He has all
+hands at work taking in the sails and getting things ready generally.
+Rather a lucky thing for us that the _Aguila_ is a stout boat.  Listen!
+That's the first blast!" as the schooner staggered and reeled.
+
+Above us we heard the captain shouting orders, the answering cries of
+the sailors, and the groaning of the timbers, as if the ship were a
+living being stretched on a rack.  Slipping out of my bunk and dressing
+quickly, I held on to a bar to steady myself.
+
+"Let us go on deck before they batten down the hatches," said Jos�,
+putting on his boots again.  "I've no mind to stay in this hole.  If
+the ship sinks, we shall be drowned like rats in a trap."
+
+He climbed the steps, and I followed, shuddering at the picture his
+words had conjured up.  The scene was grand, but wild and awful in the
+extreme.  I hardly dared to watch the great waves thundering along as
+if seeking to devour our tiny craft.  Now the schooner hung poised for
+a moment on the edge of a mountainous wave; the next instant it seemed
+to be dashing headlong into a fathomless, black abyss.  The wind tore
+on with a fierce shriek, and we scudded before it under bare poles,
+flying for life.
+
+Two men were at the wheel; the captain, lashed aft, was yelling out
+orders which no one could understand, or, understanding, obey.  The
+night, as yet, was not particularly dark, and I shivered at sight of
+the white, scared faces of the crew.  They could do nothing more; in
+the face of such a gale they were helpless as babies; those at the
+wheel kept the ship's head straight by great effort, but beyond that,
+everything was unavailing.  Our fate was in the hands of God; He alone
+could determine whether it should be life or death.
+
+Once, above the fury of the storm, the howling of the wind, the
+straining of the timber, there rose an awful shriek; and though the
+tragedy was hidden from my sight, I knew it to be the cry of an unhappy
+sailor in his death-agony.  A huge wave, leaping like some ravenous
+animal to the deck, had caught him and was gone; while the spirit of
+the wind laughed in demoniacal glee as he was tossed from crest to
+crest, the sport of the cruel billows.
+
+The captain had seen, but was powerless to help.  The schooner was but
+the plaything of the waves, while to launch a boat--ah, how the
+storm-fiends would have laughed at the attempt!  So leaving the hapless
+sailor to his fate, we drove on through a blinding wall of rain into
+the dark night, waiting for the end.  No sky was visible, nor the light
+of any star, but the great cloud walls stood up thick on every side,
+and it seemed as if the boat were plunging through a dark and dreary
+tunnel.
+
+Close to me, where a lantern not yet douted [Transcriber's note:
+doused?] cast its fitful light, a man lay grovelling on the deck.  He
+was praying aloud in an agony of fear, but no sound could be heard from
+his moving lips.  Suddenly there came a crash as of a falling body, the
+light went out, and I saw the man no more.  How long the night lasted I
+cannot tell; to me it seemed an age, and no second of it was free from
+fear.  Whether we were driving north, south, east, or west no one knew,
+while the fury of the storm would have drowned the thunder of waves on
+a surf-beaten shore.  But the _Aguila_ was an English boat, built by
+honest English workmen, and her planks held firmly together despite the
+raging storm.
+
+For long hours, as I have said, we were swallowed up in darkness,
+feeling ourselves in the presence of death; but the light broke through
+at last, a cold gray light, and cheerless withal, which exactly suited
+our unhappy condition.  The wind, too, as though satisfied with its
+night's work, sank to rest, while by degrees the tossing of the angry
+billows subsided into a peaceful ripple.
+
+We looked at each other and at the schooner.  One man had been washed
+overboard; another, struck by a falling spar, still lay insensible; the
+rest were weary and exhausted.  Thanks to the skipper's foresight, the
+_Aguila_ had suffered less than we had expected, and he exclaimed
+cheerfully that the damage could soon be repaired.  But though our good
+ship remained sound, the storm had wrought a fearful calamity, which
+dazed the bravest, and blanched every face among us.
+
+The skipper brought the news when he joined us at breakfast, and his
+lips could scarcely frame the words.
+
+"The water-casks are stove in," he exclaimed, "and we have hardly a
+gallon of fresh water aboard!"
+
+"Then we must run for the nearest port," said Jos�, trying to speak
+cheerily.
+
+The captain spread out his hands dramatically.
+
+"There is no port," he replied, in something of a hopeless tone, "and
+there is no wind.  The schooner lies like a log on the water."
+
+We went on deck, forgetting past dangers in the more terrifying one
+before us.  The captain had spoken truly: not a breath of air stirred,
+and the sea lay beneath us like a sheet of glass.  The dark clouds had
+rolled away, and though the sun was not visible, the thin haze between
+us and the sky was tinged blood-red.  It was such a sight as no man on
+board had seen, and the sailors gazed at it in awestruck silence.
+
+Hour after hour through the livelong day the _Aguila_ lay motionless,
+as if held by some invisible cable.  No ripple broke the glassy
+surface, no breath of wind fanned the idle sails, and the air we
+breathed was hot and stifling, as if proceeding from a furnace.
+
+The men lounged about listlessly, unable to forget their distress even
+in sleep.  The captain scanned the horizon eagerly, looking in vain for
+the tiniest cloud that might promise a break-up of the hideous weather.
+Jos� and I lay under an awning, though this was no protection from the
+stifling atmosphere.
+
+Every one hoped that evening would bring relief, that a breeze might
+spring up, or that we might have a downpour of rain.  Evening came, but
+the situation was unchanged, and a great fear entered our hearts.  How
+long could we live like this--how long before death would release us
+from our misery? for misery it was now in downright, cruel earnest.
+
+Once Jos� rose and walked to the vessel's side, but, returning shortly,
+lay face downward on the deck.
+
+"I must shut out the sight of the sea," he said, "or I shall go mad.
+What an awful thing to perish of thirst with water everywhere around
+us!"
+
+This was our second night of horror, but very different in its nature
+from the first.  Then, for long hours, we went in fear of the storm;
+now, we would have welcomed the most terrible tempest that ever blew,
+if only it brought us rain.
+
+Very slowly the night crept by, and again we were confronted by the
+gray haze, with its curious blood-red tint.  We could not escape from
+the vessel, as our boats had been smashed in the hurricane; we could
+only wait for what might happen in this sea of the dead.
+
+"Rain or death, it is one or the other!" remarked Jos�, as, rising to
+our feet, we staggered across to the skipper.
+
+Rain or death!  Which would come first, I wondered.
+
+The captain could do nothing, though I must say he played his part like
+a man--encouraging the crew, foretelling a storm which should rise
+later in the day, and asserting that we were right in the track of
+ships.  We had only to hold on patiently, he said, and all would come
+right.
+
+Jos� also spoke to the me cheerfully, trying to keep alive a glimmer of
+hope; but as the morning hours dragged wearily along, they were fain to
+give way to utter despair.  No ships could reach us, they said, while
+the calm lasted, and not the slightest sign of change could be seen.
+Our throats were parched, our lips cracked, our eyes bloodshot and
+staring.  One of the crew, a plump, chubby, round-faced man, began
+talking aloud in a rambling manner, and presently, with a scream of
+excitement, he sprang into the rigging.
+
+"Sail ho!" he cried, "sail ho!" and forgetting our weakness, we all
+jumped up to peer eagerly through the gauzy mist.
+
+"Where away?" exclaimed the captain.
+
+The sailor laughed in glee.  "Oho!  Here she comes!" cried he; "here
+she comes!" and, tearing off his shirt, waved it frantically.
+
+The action was so natural, the man seemed so much in earnest, that we
+hung over the schooner's side, anxiously scanning the horizon for our
+rescuer.  Again the fellow shouted, "Here she comes!" and then, with a
+frenzied laugh, flung himself into the glassy sea.
+
+A groan of despair burst from the crew, and for several seconds no one
+moved.  Then Jos�, crying, "Throw me a rope!" jumped overboard, and
+swam to the spot where the man had gone down.
+
+"Come back!" cried the skipper hoarsely; "you will be drowned!  The
+poor fellow has lost his senses."  But Jos�, unheeding the warning,
+clutched the man as he came to the surface a second time.
+
+We heard the demented laugh of the drowning sailor, and then the two
+disappeared--down, down into the depths together.
+
+"He has thrown his life away for a madman!" said the captain, and his
+words brought me to my senses.
+
+With a prayer in my heart I leaped into the sea, hoping that I might
+yet save the brave fellow.
+
+A cry from the schooner told me that he had reappeared, and soon I saw
+him alone, and well-nigh exhausted.  A dozen strokes took me to his
+side, and then, half supporting him, I turned toward the vessel.  The
+men flung us a rope, and willing hands hauled first Jos� and then me
+aboard.
+
+"A brave act," said the skipper gruffly, "but foolhardy!"
+
+Jos� smiled, and, still leaning on me, went below to the cabin, where,
+removing our wet things, we had a good rub down.
+
+"Thanks, my boy!" said Jos�, "but for your help I doubt if I could have
+got back.  The poor beggar nearly throttled me, down under!" and I
+noticed on his throat the marks of fingers that must have pressed him
+like a vice.
+
+"Do you feel it now?" I asked.
+
+"Only here," touching his throat; "but for that, I should be all the
+better for the dip.  Let us go on deck again; I am stifling here.  And
+keep up your spirits, Jack.  Don't give way the least bit, or it will
+be all over with you.  We are in a fearful plight, but help may yet
+come."  And I promised him solemnly that I would do my best.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II.
+
+THE END OF THE "AGUILA."
+
+The drowning of the crazy sailor had a bad effect on the rest of the
+crew, and it became evident that they had abandoned all hope.  They
+hung about so listlessly that even the captain could not rouse them,
+and indeed there was nothing they could do.
+
+This utter inability to help ourselves was the worst evil of the case.
+Even I, though only a boy, wanted to do something, no matter what, if
+it would help in the struggle for life; but I, like the rest, could
+only wait--wait with throat like a furnace, peeling lips, smarting
+eyes, and aching head, till death or rain put an end to the misery.
+
+I tried not to think of it, tried to shut out the horrible end so close
+at hand; but in vain.  Jos� sat beside me, endeavouring to rouse me.
+It must rain, he said, or the wind would spring up, and we should meet
+with a ship; but in his heart I think he had no hope.
+
+The day crawled on, afternoon came, and I fell into a troubled sleep.
+The pain of my throat directed my wandering thoughts perhaps, and
+conjured up horrible visions.  I was lashed to the wheel of the
+_Aguila_, and the schooner went drifting, drifting far away into an
+unknown sea.  All was still around me, though I was not alone.  Sailors
+walked the deck or huddled in the forecastle--sailors with skin of
+wrinkled parchment, with deep-set, burning yet unseeing eyes, with
+moving lips from which no sound came; and as we sailed away ever
+further and further into the darkness, the horror of it maddened me.  I
+struggled desperately to free myself, calling aloud to Jos� to save me.
+Then a hand was laid softly on my forehead, and a kind, familiar voice
+whispered,--
+
+"Jack!  Jack!  Wake up.  You are dreaming!"  Opening my eyes I saw Jos�
+bending over me, his face stricken with fear.  My head burned, but my
+face and limbs were wet as if I had just come from the sea.  "Get up,"
+said Jos� sharply, "and walk about with me.  You must not dream again."
+
+It seems that in my sleep I had screamed aloud; but the sailors took no
+notice of me either then or afterwards.  They had troubles enough of
+their own, and were totally indifferent to those of others.
+
+The red tinge had now gone from the haze, leaving it cold and gray; the
+sea was dull and lifeless, no ripple breaking the stillness of its
+surface.
+
+"Is there any hope, Jos�?" I asked in a whisper, and from his face,
+though not from his speech, learned there was none.
+
+The captain had stored two bottles of liquor in the cabin for his own
+use.  These he shared amongst us; but it was fiery stuff, and even at
+the first increased rather than allayed our thirst.  Most of the crew
+were lying down now; but one had climbed to the roof of the forecastle,
+and stood there singing in a weak, quavering voice.  Jos� spoke to him
+soothingly; but he only laughed, and continued his weird song.  His
+face haunted me; even when darkness closed like a pall around us I
+could still see it.  He sang on and on in the gloom, and it appeared to
+me that he was wailing our death-chant.  Presently there was silence,
+followed by a slight shuffling sound as the man moved to another part
+of the deck; then the song began again, and was followed by a burst of
+uncanny laughter.  Suddenly it seemed as if the poor fellow realized
+his position, as he broke into a sob and called on God to save him.
+
+Making our way to the other side of the vessel, we found him sitting
+disconsolately on a coil of rope, and did our best to cheer him.  The
+skipper joined us, but no other man stirred hand or foot.  Apparently
+their terrible suffering had overpowered all feeling of sympathy.
+
+"Don't give way," said Jos� brightly, laying a hand on his shoulder;
+"bear up, there's a good fellow.  Rain may fall at any moment now, and
+then we shall be saved."
+
+"Ah, se�or," cried the poor fellow huskily, "my throat is parched,
+parched; my head is like a burning coal! but I will be quiet now and
+brave--if I can."
+
+"This is terrible," exclaimed the captain piteously, as after a time we
+turned away.
+
+"Hope must be our sheet-anchor," said Jos�.  "Once cut ourselves adrift
+from that, and we shall go to ruin headlong."
+
+He spoke bravely, but his words came from the lips only, and this we
+all knew.  Sitting down on a coil of rope, we waited for the night to
+pass, longing for yet dreading the appearance of another dawn.  It was
+dreadfully silent, except when some poor fellow broke the stillness
+with his groans and cries of anguish.
+
+It was, as nearly as I could judge, about one o'clock in the morning,
+when Jos� suddenly sprang to his feet with a cry of joy.
+
+"What is it?" I asked; and he, clapping his hands, exclaimed,--
+
+"Lightning!  See, there is another flash.--Get up, my hearties; the
+wind's rising.  There's a beautiful clap of thunder.  We shall have a
+fine storm presently!"
+
+One by one the men staggered to their feet.  They heard the crash of
+the thunder, and a broad sheet of lightning showed them banks of cloud
+gathering thick and black overhead.  Directed by the captain and helped
+by Jos�, they spread every sail and awning that could be used,
+collected buckets and a spare cask, and awaited the rain eagerly and
+expectantly.  Would it come?  Fiery snakes played about the tops of the
+masts or leaped from sky to sea; the thunder pealed and pealed again
+through the air; the wind rose, the sails filled, the schooner moved
+through the water, but no rain fell.
+
+I cannot tell you a tithe of the hopes and fears which passed through
+our hearts during the next half-hour.  Now we exulted in the certainty
+of relief; again we were thrown into the abyss of despair.  We stood
+looking at the darkness, hoping, praying that the life-giving rain
+might fall speedily upon our upturned faces.
+
+Another terrific crash, and then--ah, how earnestly we gave thanks to
+God for His mercy--the raindrops came pattering to the deck, lightly at
+first, lightly and softly, like scouts sent forward to spy out the
+land, and afterwards the main body in a crowd beating fiercely, heavily
+upon us.  How we laughed as, making cups of our hands, we lapped the
+welcome water greedily!  What cries of delight ascended heavenward as
+we filled our spare cask and every vessel that would hold water!  The
+rain came down in a steady torrent, soaking us through; but we felt no
+discomfort, for it fed us with new life.
+
+Presently the captain got some of the men to work, while the others ate
+the food which had lain all day untasted, and then, doubly refreshed,
+they relieved their comrades.  Jos� and I, too, ate sparingly of some
+food; but even this little, with the water, made new beings of us.
+
+As yet the wind was no more than a fair breeze, but by degrees it
+became boisterous, and the crew, still weak and now short of three men,
+could barely manage the schooner.  Jos� and I knew nothing of
+seamanship, but we bore a hand here and there, straining at this rope
+or that as we were bidden, and encouraging the crew to the best of our
+ability.
+
+As yet we gave little thought to the new danger that menaced us, being
+full of thanks for our escape from a horrible death; but the fury of
+the storm increased, the wind battered against the schooner in howling
+gusts, and presently the topgallant mast fell with a crash to the deck.
+Fortunately no one was hurt, and we quickly cut the wreckage clear; but
+misfortune followed misfortune, and at length, with white, scared face,
+the carpenter announced that water was fast rising in the hold.
+
+Here, at least, Jos� and I were of service.  Taking our places at the
+pumps, we toiled with might and main to keep the water down.  Thus the
+remainder of the night passed with every one working at the pumps or
+assisting the captain to manage the vessel.
+
+Morning brought no abatement of the storm, but the light enabled us to
+realize more clearly how near we were, a second time, to death.  The
+rain still poured down in torrents, the wind leaped at us with
+hurricane fury, the schooner tossed, a helpless wreck, in the midst of
+a mountainous sea.  The carpenter reported that, in spite of all our
+labours, the water was fast gaining on us.  The sailors now lost heart,
+and one of them left his post, saying sullenly they might as well drown
+first as last.  It was a dangerous example, but the skipper checked the
+mischief.  Running forward with loaded pistol, he shouted,--
+
+"Go back to the pumps, you coward, or I will shoot you down like a dog!
+Call yourself a man?  Why, that youngster there is worth fifty of you!"
+
+The fellow returned to his work; but as the hours passed we became more
+and more certain that no amount of pumping would save the ship.  Even
+now she was but a floating wreck, and soon she would be engulfed by the
+raging sea.
+
+While Jos� and I were taking a rest, the captain told us that, even
+should the storm cease, the _Aguila_ must go down in less than
+twenty-four hours, and that he knew not whether we were close to the
+shore or a hundred leagues from it.  Jos� received the news coolly.  He
+came of a race that does not believe in whimpering, and his only care
+was on my account.
+
+"I am sorry for your mother, Jack," said he, "and for you too.  We're
+in a fair hole, and I don't see any way of getting out; but for all
+that we will keep our heads cool.  Never go under without a fight for
+it--that's as good a motto as any other.  You heard the skipper say the
+schooner is bound to go down, and you know we have no boats--they
+wouldn't be any good if we had, while this storm lasts; but if the sea
+calms, a plank will keep you afloat a long time, and maybe a ship will
+come along handy.  Anyhow, make a fight for it, my boy.  Now we'll have
+a snack of something to eat, and then for another spell at the pumps."
+
+By this time a feeling of despair had seized the crew, and but for fear
+of the captain's pistol they would have stopped work in a body.
+However, he kept them at it, and towards noon the tempest ceased almost
+as suddenly as it had begun.  The gale dropped to a steady breeze, and
+the surface of the ocean became comparatively calm.
+
+The change cheered us; we looked on it as a good omen, and toiled at
+the pumps even harder than before.  We could not lessen the quantity of
+water, but for a time we kept it from gaining, and a germ of hope crept
+back into our hearts.  Every hour now was likely to be in our favour,
+as the captain judged the wind was blowing us to some part of the
+coast, where we might either fall in with a vessel or effect a landing.
+Thus, between hope and fear, the afternoon passed, and then we saw that
+the captain's judgment was correct.
+
+Straight before us, though far off as yet, appeared the dark line of
+coast with a barrier of mountains in the background, and in front a
+broad band of snow-white foam.
+
+Would the schooner cover the distance?  If so, would she escape being
+dashed to pieces in the thundering surf?  These were the questions
+which agitated our minds as, impelled by the breeze, she drove through
+the water.  We of ourselves could do nothing save work at the pumps and
+wait for what might happen.
+
+Afternoon merged into evening, and evening into night.  A few stars
+peeped forth in the sky, but were soon veiled by grayish clouds.  The
+broad white band along the shore was startlingly distinct, and still
+the issue was undecided.
+
+The end came with such unexpected suddenness that the men hardly had
+time to cry out.  Jos� and I were resting at the moment, when the
+schooner lurched heavily, tried to right herself and failed, filled
+with water, and sank like a stone.
+
+I often think of that shipwreck as a horrible dream.  Down, down I
+went, holding my breath till it seemed impossible to stay longer
+without opening my mouth and swallowing the salt water.  By an effort I
+restrained myself till my head shot above the surface and once more I
+was free to breathe.
+
+The ship had disappeared entirely, and it was too dark to see such a
+small object as a man's head.  By great good fortune I managed to seize
+a floating spar, and, resting on it, called aloud for Jos�.  The only
+answer was the anguished cry of a drowning man across the waste of
+waters.  Twice again it came, and then all was silent, though in
+imagination I still could hear that anguished cry.  The sea rolled in
+long surges, carrying me forward without effort and at a great rate
+toward the clear white line.  Live or die, I could not help myself now,
+but was entirely at the mercy of the waves.  I thought of Jos�'s advice
+to make a fight for it, but there was nothing to be done.  Clinging to
+my spar, I was tossed from crest to depth like a ball bandied about by
+boys.
+
+And now my ears were filled with a great roaring as I approached nearer
+to the crested foam; then feeling that the end was very near, I prayed
+silently yet fervently that God would comfort my mother in this her new
+trial, and prepared myself to die.
+
+From the top of a high wave I went down into the depths, rose again to
+the crest of a second huge roller, and then was flung with the velocity
+of lightning into the midst of the great sea-horses with their snowy
+manes.
+
+Of this part of the adventure I remember but little, only that for a
+moment I lay bruised and battered at the foot of a high rock.
+
+Once more Jos�'s advice sounded in my ear, and loosing my spar, I
+clambered, dizzy and half blind, to the top.  The ramping white horses
+raced after as if to drag me back, but finding that impossible, retired
+sullenly to spring yet once again.  Shrieking and hissing, the great
+white monsters tore along, dashing in fury and breaking in impotence
+against the immovable rocks.  The wild, weird scene, too, frightened
+me; for I was but a boy, remember, who up to this had never met with a
+more stirring adventure, perhaps, than a tussle with a high-spirited
+pony.  I was worn out, too, by hard toil, faint from loss of blood,
+saddened by the loss of my faithful Jos�, and by the awful calamity
+that had overtaken the crew of the schooner.  Yet, in spite of all, so
+strong was the instinct to live, that, almost without thought, I
+clambered along the rocky ridge which jutted out from the mainland,
+while the baffled waves raced hungrily on either side of me, as if even
+now loath to abandon their expected prey.
+
+At length the line of white foam was at my back.  I found myself on a
+boulder-strewn beach, and for the time safe!  Although half dead with
+privation and exposure, I wandered some way along the beach, calling
+aloud on Jos� and the sailors, forgetful that the roar of the surf
+drowned my voice.
+
+Presently I could go no further, the beach in that direction being
+walled in by a rocky cliff, steep and high, and but for a narrow
+fissure upon which I happily came, insurmountable.
+
+I say happily, for at the summit of the cliff I fancied I saw the flash
+of a lantern.  A lantern meant human beings, who on hearing my story
+would search the shore, and find, perhaps, that others besides myself
+had escaped from the wreck.  With this idea in my head, I began to
+climb, going very steadily; for, as I have said, the track was little
+more than a fissure in the rock, and my head was far from clear.  I
+toiled on, cutting my hands and legs with the jagged rocks, but making
+some progress, till at length I had covered the greater part of the
+distance; then I could do no more.  A tiny crevice gave me foothold,
+and I was able to rest my arms on a wide ledge, but had no strength to
+draw myself up to it.  Twice I tried and failed; then fearful lest my
+strength should give way, I strove no more, but, raising my voice,
+shouted loudly for help.  Very mournful the cry sounded in the silent
+night, as I hung there utterly helpless on the face of the cliff.
+
+Again and again I shouted with all my might, to be answered at first
+only by the roar of the surf below.  Presently, on the summit of the
+cliff, not far above me, a lantern flashed, then another, and another,
+and a voice hailed me through the darkness.
+
+"Help!" I cried, "help!" and my voice was full of despair, for my
+strength was fast ebbing.  I must soon lose my hold, and be dashed to
+pieces at the foot of the cliff.
+
+The lanterns flashed to and fro above me.  Would they never come
+nearer?  What was that?  A big stone bounding and bouncing from rock to
+rock whizzed past my head, and disappeared in the gloom below.
+Collecting all my strength, I shouted again, fearing that it must be
+for the last time.
+
+But now--oh, how sincerely I gave thanks to God!--a light had come over
+the edge of the cliff, and though moving slowly, it certainly advanced
+in my direction.  Yes, I saw a man's outline.  In one hand he carried a
+lantern, in the other a noosed rope, and he felt his way carefully.
+
+"Help! help!" I exclaimed, faintly enough now; but he heard me, and I
+knew I was saved.  Putting the lantern on the ledge and grasping the
+collar of my coat, he got the noose round my body under the arms, and
+those above drew me up.
+
+[Illustration: "Help! help!" I exclaimed, faintly; but he heard me, and
+I knew I was saved.]
+
+The lanterns showed a group of men in uniform, who crowded around me as
+I reached the top; but being uncertain how long my strength would last,
+I cried,--
+
+"A wreck!  Search the beach.  There may have been others washed ashore."
+
+Upon this there was much talking, and then two men carried me away,
+leaving their companions, as I hoped, to search for any chance
+survivors.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV.
+
+THE SILVER KEY.
+
+It would be hard for me to tell just what happened during the next day
+or two.  I did not lose consciousness altogether, but my nerves were so
+shattered that I mixed up fact and fancy, and could hardly separate my
+dreams from events which actually took place.
+
+On the third or fourth day my senses became clearer I lay on a bed in a
+small cell-like apartment.  In the opposite corner was a mattress, with
+a blanket and rug rolled neatly at the head; above it, on the wall,
+hung a sword and various military articles, as if the room belonged to
+a soldier.
+
+Presently, as I lay trying to recall things, the door was pushed open,
+and a man entered.  He was young; his face was frank and open, and he
+had fine dark eyes.  He was in undress uniform, and I judged, rightly
+as it turned out, that he was a Spanish officer.  Seeing me looking at
+him, he crossed to the bed, and exclaimed in the Spanish tongue, "Are
+you better this morning?"
+
+I nodded and smiled, but could not speak--my throat hurt me so.
+
+"All right!" he cried gaily.  "Don't worry; I understand," and at that
+he went out, coming back presently with the military doctor.
+
+Now I had no cause, then or afterwards, to love the Spaniards; but I
+hold it fair to give even an enemy his due, and it is only just to say
+that this young officer, Captain Santiago Mariano, treated me royally.
+In a sense I owed my life to him, and I have never forgotten his
+kindness.
+
+As my strength returned he often sat with me, talking of the wreck,
+from which I was apparently the only one rescued.  Three men, he said,
+had been washed ashore, but they were all dead.  Two were ordinary
+sailors, and from his description I easily recognized the third as
+Montevo, the skipper.
+
+There was a rumour, the young officer continued, that a man had been
+picked up by some Indians further along the coast; but no one really
+knew anything about it, and for his part he looked on it as an idle
+tale.
+
+There was small comfort in tills; yet, against my better judgment, I
+began to hope that Jos� had somehow escaped from the sea.  He was a
+strong man and a stout swimmer, while for dogged courage I have rarely
+met his equal.
+
+One morning Santiago came into my room--or rather his--with a troubled
+expression on his face.  I was able to walk by this time, and stood by
+the little window, watching the soldiers at exercise in the courtyard.
+
+"Crawford," said he abruptly, "have you any reason to be afraid of
+General Barejo?"
+
+Now, until that moment I had not given a thought to the fact that in
+escaping one danger I had tumbled headlong into another; but this
+question made me uneasy.  As far as safety went, I might as well have
+stayed at my mother's side in Lima as have blundered into a far-off
+fortress garrisoned by Spanish soldiers.
+
+"I ought not to speak of this," continued Santiago, "but the warning
+may help you.  Did you hear the guns last night?"
+
+"Yes," said I, wondering.
+
+"It was the salute to the general, who is inspecting the forts along
+the coast."
+
+"I have heard my father speak of General Barejo."
+
+"Well, after dinner last evening the commandant happened to speak of
+your shipwreck, and the general was greatly interested.  'A boy named
+Crawford?' said he thoughtfully; 'is he in the fort now?' and on
+hearing you were, told the commandant he would see you in the morning.
+This is he crossing the courtyard.  He is coming here, I believe."
+
+I had only time to thank Santiago for his kindness when the general
+entered the room.  He was a short, spare man, with closely-cropped gray
+hair and a grizzled beard.  His face was tanned and wrinkled, but he
+held himself erect as a youth; and his profession was most pronounced.
+
+The young captain saluted, and, at a sign from the general, left the
+room.
+
+Barejo eyed me critically, and with a grim smile exclaimed, "By St.
+Philip, there's no need to ask.  You're the son of the Englishman
+Crawford, right enough."
+
+"Who was murdered by Spanish soldiers," said I, for his cool and
+somewhat contemptuous tone roused me to anger.
+
+He smiled at this outburst, and spread out his hands as if to say, "The
+boy's crazy;" but when he spoke, it was to ask why I had left Lima.
+
+"Because I had no wish to meet with my father's fate," I answered
+brusquely; and he laughed again.
+
+"Faith," he muttered, "the young cockerel ruffles his feathers early!"
+and then, again addressing me, he asked, "And where were you going?"
+
+"On a sea voyage, for the benefit of my health--and to be out of the
+way."
+
+To this he made no reply, but his brows puckered up as if he were in
+deep thought.  I stood by the window watching him, and wondering what
+would be the outcome of this visit.
+
+After a short time he said, slowly and deliberately, so that I might
+lose nothing of his speech, "Listen to me, young sir.  Though you are
+young, there are some things you can understand.  Your father tried,
+and tried hard, to wrest this country from its proper ruler, our
+honoured master, the King of Spain.  He failed; but others have taken
+his place, and though you are only a boy, they will endeavour to make
+use of you.  We shall crush the rebellion, and the leaders will lose
+their lives.  I am going to save you from their fate."
+
+I thought this display of kindness rather strange, but made no remark.
+
+"In this fortress," he continued, "you will be out of mischief, and
+here I intend you shall stay till the troubles are at an end."
+
+"That sounds very much as if you mean to keep me a prisoner!" I
+exclaimed hotly.
+
+"Exactly," said he; then turning on his heel he walked out.
+
+From the window I watched him cross the courtyard and enter the
+commandant's quarters.  Ten minutes afterwards Santiago appeared with a
+file of soldiers.
+
+"Very sorry, my boy," said the young captain, coming into the room,
+"but a soldier must obey orders.  You are my prisoner."
+
+"I couldn't wish for a better jailer," said I, laughing.
+
+"I'm glad you take it like that, but unfortunately you won't be under
+my care.  Have you all your things?  This way, then."
+
+We marched very solemnly side by side along the corridor, the soldiers
+a few paces in the rear.  At the end stood a half-dressed Indian,
+holding open the door of a cell.
+
+"Oh, come," said I, looking in, "it's not so bad."
+
+The cell was, indeed, almost a counterpart of Santiago's room, only the
+window was high up and heavily barred.  The furniture consisted of
+bedstead and rugs, a chair, small table, and one or two other articles.
+The floor was of earth, but quite dry; and altogether I was fairly
+satisfied with my new home.
+
+"You'll have decent food and sufficient exercise," said the captain,
+who had entered with me; "but"--and here he lowered his voice to a
+whisper--"don't be foolish and try to escape.  Barejo's orders are
+strict, and though it may not appear so, you will be closely guarded."
+
+"Thanks for the hint," said I as he turned away.
+
+The Indian shut the door, the bolts were shot, the footsteps of the
+soldiers grew fainter, and I was alone.
+
+I shall not dwell long on my prison life.  I had ample food, and twice
+a day was allowed to wander unmolested about the courtyard.  The
+general had gone, and most of the officers, including Santiago, showed
+me many acts of kindness, which, though trifling in themselves, did
+much towards keeping me cheerful.
+
+Several weeks passed without incident, and I began to get very tired of
+doing nothing.  There seemed to be little chance of escape, however.
+Every outlet was guarded by an armed sentry, and I was carefully
+watched.  One day I dragged my bedstead under the window, and making a
+ladder of the table and chair, climbed to the bars.  A single glance
+showed the folly of trying to escape that way without the aid of wings.
+That part of the fort stood on the brink of a frightful precipice which
+fell sheer away for hundreds of feet to the rocky coast.
+
+Of course I had no weapon of any kind, but the Spaniards had allowed me
+to keep the silver key, which hung around my neck by a thin, stout cord.
+
+I had almost forgotten the mountaineer's strange words, when a trifling
+incident brought them vividly to my mind.  One morning the Indian, as
+usual, brought in my breakfast, and was turning to go, when he suddenly
+stopped and stared at me with a look of intense surprise.  He was a
+short, stout, beardless man, with a bright brown complexion and rather
+intelligent features.
+
+"Well," I exclaimed, "what is it?  Have I altered much since yesterday?"
+
+The man bent one knee, and bowing low, exclaimed in great excitement,
+"It is the key!"
+
+Then I discovered that, my shirt collar being unfastened, the silver
+key had slipped outside, where it hung in full view.
+
+"Yes," said I, "it is the key right enough.  What of it?"
+
+His eyes were flashing now, and the glow in them lit up his whole face.
+
+"What is the master's name?" he whispered eagerly.
+
+Now this was an awkward question for me to answer.  In the first place,
+the man might or might not be trustworthy; and in the second, the only
+name I knew was that of the bandit chief.  However, I concluded the
+venture was worth making, and said, "Men call the owner of the key
+Raymon Sorillo."
+
+"Ah!" exclaimed the Indian, with a sigh of satisfaction, "he is a great
+chief.  Hide the key, se�or, and wait.  A dog's kennel is no place for
+the friend of our chief."
+
+With that he went out, and the door clanged after him, while I stood
+lost in astonishment.  What did he mean?  Was it possible that he
+intended to help me?  Thrusting the mysterious key out of sight, I sat
+down to breakfast with what appetite I could muster.  All that day I
+was in a state of great excitement, though at exercise I took care to
+appear calm.  I waited with impatience for the evening meal, which, to
+my disgust, was brought by a strange soldier.
+
+"Hullo!" I exclaimed, "a change of jailers?  What has become of the
+other fellow?"
+
+"The dog of an Indian is ill," answered the man, who was evidently in a
+very bad temper, "and I have his work to do."
+
+Placing the things on the table, he went out, slamming the door behind
+him, and shooting the bolts viciously.  The next morning he came again,
+and indeed for four days in succession performed the sick man's duties.
+
+Now you may be sure I felt greatly interested in this sudden illness.
+It filled me with curiosity, and to a certain extent strengthened my
+hope that the Indian intended to help me to escape from the fort.  What
+his plans were, of course I could not conjecture.
+
+On the fifth night I undressed and lay down as usual.  It was quite
+dark in the cell, and the only sound that reached me was the periodical
+"All's well!" of the sentry stationed at the end of the corridor.  For
+a long time I lay puzzling over the strange situation, but at length
+dropped into a light sleep.
+
+Suddenly I was awakened by a queer sensation, and sat up in bed.  It
+was too dark to see anything, but I felt that some one was creeping
+stealthily across the floor.  Presently I heard a faint sound, and knew
+that the object, whatever it might be, was approaching nearer.  At the
+side of the bed it stopped, and a muffled voice whispered, "Se�or, are
+you awake?"
+
+"Yes," said I.  "Who's there?"
+
+"A friend of the silver key.  Dress quickly and come with me; the way
+is open."
+
+"Where is the sentry?" I asked.
+
+"Gagged and insensible," replied the voice.  "Quick, while there is yet
+time."
+
+Perhaps it was rather venturesome thus to trust myself in the hands of
+an unknown man, but I slipped on my clothes, and keeping touch of his
+arm, accompanied him into the dimly-lighted corridor.
+
+Turning to the left, we glided along close to the wall.  At the end of
+this passage the body of the sentry lay on the ground, while near at
+hand crouched an Indian, keeping watch.
+
+This man joined us, and my guide immediately led the way into an empty
+room, the door of which was open.  As soon as we were inside he closed
+it softly.
+
+"Keep close to me," he whispered, and then said something to an unseen
+person in a patois I did not understand.
+
+Presently he stopped, and I could just distinguish the figure of a
+third man, who, grasping my hand, whispered, "The silver key has
+unlocked the door, se�or."
+
+Before I could recover from my astonishment--for the man who spoke was
+the sick jailer--my guide let himself down through a trap-door, and
+called to me to follow.  I found myself on a flight of steep steps in a
+kind of shaft, very narrow, and so foul that breathing was difficult.
+At the bottom was a fair-sized chamber, with a lofty roof--at least I
+judged it so by the greater purity of the air--and here the guide
+stopped until his companion caught up with us.  The jailer, to my
+surprise, had remained in the fort, but there was no time for
+explanation.
+
+The exit from the chamber was by means of an aperture so low that we
+had to lie flat on the ground, and so narrow that even I found it hard
+work to wriggle through.
+
+Of all my adventures, this one impressed itself most strongly on my
+mind.  People are apt to smile when I speak of what one man called
+"crawling along a passage;" yet had the terrors of the journey been
+known beforehand, I think I could hardly have summoned the courage to
+face them.
+
+We went in Indian file, I being second, and my shoulders brushed the
+sides of what was apparently a stonework tube.  There was not a glimmer
+of light, and the foul air threatened suffocation at every yard.  I
+could breathe only with great difficulty, my throat seemed choked, I
+was bathed in perspiration, while loathsome creatures crawled or
+scampered over every part of me.
+
+Before half the distance was covered--and I make the confession without
+shame--I was truly and horribly afraid.  However, there was no turning
+back--indeed there was no turning at all--so I crawled on, hoping and
+praying for light and air.
+
+Presently I caught sight of a dull red glow like that from a burning
+torch, my breath came more easily, and at the end of another hundred
+yards the guide, rising to his feet, stood upright: we had arrived at
+the exit from the tunnel.  Clambering up, I once more found myself in
+the open air, and was instantly followed by the second Indian.  Two
+other men waited for us, and the four, with some difficulty, rearranged
+a huge boulder which effectually blocked the aperture.
+
+Then the light from the torch was quenched, and I was hurried off in
+the darkness.  For an hour perhaps we travelled, but in what direction
+I had no idea.  At first we had the roar of the thundering sea in our
+ears, but presently that grew faint, until the sound was completely
+lost.  The route was rocky, and I should say dangerous; for the guide
+clutched my arm tightly, and from time to time whispered a warning.
+
+At last he stopped and whistled softly.  The signal was heard and
+answered, and very soon I became aware of several dusky figures,
+including both men and horses.  No time was wasted in talk; a man
+brought me a horse, and a loose cloak with a hood in which to muffle my
+head.  I mounted, the others sprang to their cumbrous saddles, and at a
+word from the guide we set off.
+
+The route now lay over a desert of loose sand, in which the animals
+sank almost to their fetlocks; every puff of wind blew it around us in
+clouds, and but for the hood I think I must have been both blinded and
+choked.
+
+I have not the faintest idea how the leader found his way, unless it
+was by the direction of the wind, as there were no stars, and it was
+impossible to see beyond a few yards.
+
+Hour after hour passed; dawn broke cold and gray.  The choking sand was
+left behind, and we approached a narrow valley shut in by two gigantic
+ranges of hills.  Here a voice hailed us from the rocks, the guide
+answered the challenge, and the whole party passed through the defile
+to the valley beyond.
+
+It was now light enough to observe a number of Indian huts dotted about
+on both slopes; and the horsemen who had formed my escort quickly
+dispersed, leaving me with the guide.
+
+"We are home," said he, "and the dogs have lost their prey."
+
+Dismounting and leading the horses, we approached a hut set somewhat
+apart from the rest.  An Indian boy standing at the entrance took our
+animals away while we entered the hut.
+
+"Will you eat, se�or, or sleep?" asked my rescuer.
+
+"Sleep," said I, "as soon as you have answered a question or two."
+
+I cannot repeat exactly what the man told me, as his Spanish was none
+of the best, and he mixed it up with a patois which I only half
+understood.  However, the outline of the story was plain enough, and
+will take but little telling.
+
+My late jailer belonged to the Order of the Silver Key, a powerful
+Indian society, acting under the leadership of Raymon Sorillo.  He had
+been placed in the fort both as a spy on the garrison and to assist
+comrades if at any time they endeavoured to capture the stronghold by
+way of the secret passage.  Only the commandant and his chief officer
+were supposed to know of its existence, but a strange accident had
+revealed it to the Indians some years previously.
+
+The jailer, of course, could have set me free, but in that case he must
+have joined in my flight.  The plan he adopted was to communicate with
+his friends, and then, by feigning illness, to divert suspicion from
+himself.  As soon as we descended the steps, he replaced the trap-door,
+removed all signs of disturbance, and crept cautiously back to his room.
+
+When the Indian had finished his explanation, I asked him to what place
+he had brought me.
+
+"The Hidden Valley," he replied, "where no Spaniard has ever set foot.
+Here you are quite safe, for all the armies of Peru could not tear you
+from this spot."
+
+"Does Sorillo ever come here?" I asked.
+
+"Rarely; but his messengers come and go at their pleasure."
+
+"That is good news," I remarked, thinking of my mother.  "I shall be
+able to get a message through to Lima.  And now, if you please, I will
+go to sleep."
+
+He spread a rug on the earth floor, covered me with another, and in a
+few minutes I was fast asleep, forgetful even of the dismal tunnel and
+its horrible associations.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V.
+
+IN THE HIDDEN VALLEY.
+
+Perhaps my Indian host overstated the case, but he could not have been
+far wrong in saying that no stranger had ever succeeded in finding the
+Hidden Valley.
+
+Let me describe the coast of Peru, and then you may be able to form
+some idea of the district between the Spanish fortress and my new home.
+The coast is a sandy desert studded with hills, and having in the
+background stupendous ranges of towering mountains.  From north to
+south the desert is cut at intervals by streams, which in the rainy
+season are converted into roaring rivers.  Little villages dot the
+banks of these streams, and here and there are patches of cultivated
+land.
+
+From one river to another the country is for the most part a dreary
+desert of sand, where rain never falls nor vegetation grows--a dead
+land, where the song of a bird is a thing unknown.  Sometimes after a
+sandstorm a cluster of dry bones may be seen--the sole remains of lost
+travellers and their animals.  At times even the most experienced
+guides lose the track, and then they are seen no more.  Over such a
+desert I had ridden from the fort, and the Indians assured me that,
+even in broad daylight, I could not go back safely without a guide.
+
+As for the valley itself, it was comparatively nothing but a slit in
+the mass of mountains.  A river ran through it, and the water was used
+by the Indians to irrigate the surrounding land.  Their live stock
+consisted chiefly of oxen and horses, and the principal vegetables
+cultivated were maize and coca.  You may not know that this coca is a
+plant something like the vine, and it grows to a height of six or eight
+feet.  The leaves are very carefully gathered one by one.  They are
+bitter to the taste, however, and as a rule strangers do not take
+kindly to coca.  The Indian is never without it.  It is the first thing
+he puts into his mouth in the morning, and the last thing that he takes
+out at night.  He carries a supply in a leathern pouch hung round his
+neck, and with this and a handful of roasted maize he will go a long
+day's journey.  I had never chewed coca before, but soon got into the
+habit of doing so, much to the delight of my new friends.
+
+My stay in the Hidden Valley, although lasting nearly two years, had
+little of interest in it.  The Indians treated me with every respect.
+I was lodged in the best house, and was given the best fare the valley
+produced.  Within the valley I was master, but I was not allowed to
+join any of their expeditions, and without their help it was
+impossible, as I have explained, to get away.
+
+Their advice to stay quietly in my hiding-place was indeed the best
+they could give.  I was quite safe, the Spanish soldiers in the fort
+being unable to follow me, and indeed, as we gathered from the spy,
+quite at a loss to account for my escape.  Away from the valley, too, I
+should be utterly helpless.  I could not return to Lima, and without
+money there was little chance of making my way into Chili.
+
+The two things that troubled me most were Jos�'s fate and my mother's
+unhappiness.  At first I had ventured to hope that my friend still
+lived; but as the weeks and months passed without any tidings, I began
+to look upon him as dead.  The Indians thought it certain I should
+never see him again.
+
+As to my mother, she would be in no particular uneasiness until the
+time came for the return of the _Aguila_; but I dreaded what would
+happen when Mr. Maxwell had to confess the schooner was overdue, and
+that nothing had been heard of her.  Many miserable hours I spent
+wandering about the valley, and thinking how my mother would watch and
+wait, hoping against hope for some tidings of the missing ship.
+
+One night--it was in the December of 1819--I had gone to bed early,
+when an unusual commotion in the valley caused me to get up.  My Indian
+host had already gone out, so, putting on my things, I followed.
+
+Naturally my first thought was of the Spaniards; but the natives,
+though flocking towards the entrance to the valley, did not appear
+alarmed.  Several of them carried torches, and a strange picture was
+revealed by the lurid flames.
+
+On the ground lay a horse so weak and exhausted that it could barely
+struggle for breath.  Close by, supported in the arms of two Indians,
+was the rider, a short, rather stout man of brown complexion.  His eyes
+were glazed as if in death.  Blood gushed from his ears and nostrils,
+his head hung limply down: it was hard to believe that he lived.
+
+The natives gabbled to each other, and I heard the words frequently
+repeated, "Sorillo's messenger!"  Then an old, old woman--the _mother_
+of the village--tottered feebly down the path.  In one hand she carried
+a small pitcher, and in the other a funnel, whose slender stem they
+inserted between the man's teeth.  In this way a little liquid was
+forced into his mouth, and presently his bared breast heaved
+slightly--so slightly that the motion was almost imperceptible.
+
+However, the old woman appeared satisfied, and at a sign from her the
+stricken man was carried slowly up the path.  One native attended to
+the horse, and the rest returned to their huts, talking excitedly of
+what had happened.
+
+"Is that a messenger from Raymon Sorillo, Quilca?" I asked my host.
+
+"Yes," said he, "and he has had a very narrow escape.  He has been
+caught in a sandstorm.  Perhaps he lost the track.  Perhaps the
+soldiers gave chase, and he went further round to baffle them.  Who
+knows?  But we shall hear to-morrow."
+
+"Then he is likely to recover?"
+
+"Yes; the medicine saved him.  Didn't you see his chest move?"
+
+"Yes," I replied, thinking that but a small thing to go on.
+
+"That showed the medicine was in time," returned Quilca.  "It has begun
+its work, and all will be well."
+
+Quilca spoke so confidently that, had I been the patient, I should have
+started on the road to recovery at once.
+
+"Will he stay here long?" I asked.
+
+"Who knows?" replied Quilca.  "The chief gives orders; the servants
+obey."
+
+"But he will return at some time?"
+
+"It is likely."
+
+"And will he take a message to my mother, do you think?"
+
+"Oh yes," said the Indian; "I had forgotten.  Besides"--and he touched
+the cord supporting the silver key--"he is your servant, as I am."
+
+For three days the messenger was too weak to explain his errand; but
+the medicine worked wonders, and at the end of a week he sent for
+Quilca and the other leading men of the tribe.
+
+What orders he brought I did not learn; only my host told me that the
+rising to which they looked forward had been put off.  The Chilians
+were not ready, and could not be in Peru for at least another six
+months.
+
+Quilca was dreadfully disappointed; but the chief had spoken, and his
+word was law.  Indeed, it was most extraordinary to see with what
+reverence his commands were treated.  Had it been his pleasure, I am
+sure his followers would have willingly gone to certain death.
+
+On the day following this I visited the messenger, who, on seeing the
+silver key, bowed low before me.
+
+"What are my lord's commands?" asked he humbly.
+
+"They are very simple," I replied.  "In a short time you are returning
+to your chief.  Say to him that Juan Crawford is safe in the Hidden
+Valley, and ask him to tell Se�ora Maria Dolores Crawford at Lima so.
+Can you remember that?"
+
+The blood mounted into the man's face as he said, "I will remember."
+Then he added in quick, eager tones, "Are you the son of Don Eduardo?"
+
+"He was my father."
+
+At that the man bent again and kissed my hand, saying,--
+
+"Se�or, he was our best friend.  He loved our people, and when he was
+killed there was much weeping in the villages of the Indians."
+
+"He gave his life for you," said I slowly.
+
+"As we will give ours for his son," answered the man; and no one
+hearing him could have doubted the sincerity of his words.
+
+At the end of a fortnight he was strong enough to travel, and his last
+words as he struck into the narrow pass were, "I shall not forget,
+se�or."
+
+After his departure I felt much easier.  True, there was a terrible
+journey before him, which hardly one man in a thousand could hope to
+accomplish successfully; but he was a daring and plucky rider, used
+alike to desert and mountain.  Then, too, any Indian on the route would
+give him food and shelter, and warn him of any lurking soldiers.
+
+He would relate my story to Raymon Sorillo, and I knew that the
+gigantic chief would carry the news to my mother.  I no longer fretted
+at being shut up in the valley, but passed my time merrily with the
+boys and younger men of the tribe, learning their patois, riding, and
+practising shooting with the musket, and with bow and arrow.
+
+On my fifteenth birthday Quilca organized some sports, and though not
+gaining a first prize in any event, I performed so creditably that the
+Indians were delighted with my prowess.
+
+"The young chief will make a warrior," said they, and I felt proud of
+their praise.
+
+Let me try to give you a picture of myself at that time.  I was tall
+for my age, standing five feet five inches in height.  I had curly dark
+hair, cut rather short, and brown eyes.  My face was tanned through
+exposure to the weather and regular exercise had made my muscles hard
+as iron.  Like my companions, I wore a short woollen jacket, dark in
+colour, and breeches open at the knees, and caught up with strips of
+coloured cotton.  My cap was of wool gorgeously embroidered; dark
+woollen stockings without feet covered my legs, and in place of boots I
+had a pair of goatskin sandals.  Thrown over my left shoulder was a
+small poncho, which dangled like the cloak worn by some of our cavalry
+soldiers.
+
+Some time during the month of April Sorillo's messenger returned,
+bringing me two letters--one from my mother, the other from the chief.
+
+I need not say how eagerly I opened the first.  It was very long,
+consisting of several closely-written pages, but it did not contain a
+word too much.  I read it over and over again, until I could almost say
+it by heart.  No word had reached Lima of the wreck of the _Aguila_;
+but the British merchants, though bidding my mother be of good cheer,
+had put the schooner down for lost.  My message had shown their fears
+to be well grounded, but at the same time it had carried joy and
+thankfulness to my mother's breast.
+
+"I grieve for poor Jos�," she wrote, "but I thank God every hour for
+your safety."
+
+The letter from Sorillo was brief.  After saying how glad he was to get
+my message, he went on,--
+
+"For the present, stay in the Hidden Valley; there is no safer place in
+Peru.  The fruit ripens slowly, and even yet is not ready for plucking.
+San Martin has not left Valparaiso, and little beyond skirmishing will
+be done this year."
+
+Apparently, however, he had sent definite orders to the tribe, as from
+this date I noticed a great difference in our hitherto peaceful abode.
+Every man went armed day and night, scouts were posted on the
+mountains, and swift riders scoured the desert for miles.
+
+Once, too, a band of horsemen, twenty strong, led by Quilca, left the
+valley at night.  I could not learn their business, because Quilca said
+they were acting under the secret orders of the great chief.  They were
+absent three days, and when, in the gray dawn of the fourth morning,
+they rode back up the valley, three were missing.  The leader had a
+bloodstained bandage round his head, and several men bore signs of a
+fierce conflict.
+
+"You are hurt?" said I, as Quilca dismounted.
+
+"It is nothing," replied he carelessly.
+
+"And three of your followers have not returned!"
+
+"It cost six lives to kill them," he answered, with fierce
+satisfaction, passing into the hut.
+
+This expedition was followed by others, and from the talk in the valley
+I gathered that Sorillo had started the Indians on the war-trail.
+Already the Spaniards were safe only in large numbers, for on every
+weak and isolated detachment the fierce mountaineers swept down like
+hawks on their prey.
+
+Now and again they were beaten off; but this did not happen often,
+because they knew the number of their enemy almost to a man, and had
+learned the most effective method of attack.  Generally speaking, the
+little body of Spanish soldiers had no chance whatever, either of
+flight or of victory.
+
+From time to time strange and startling rumours reached us.  In
+September we heard that the Chilian army had landed on the coast, and
+soon afterwards that the Englishman Cochrane had swept the Spanish
+fleet from the seas.  Jos� had often spoken of this daring sailor, who,
+after performing many glorious deeds in the British navy, had taken
+command of the Chilian fleet, and had done much to make Chili
+independent of Spain.  Now, with his ships and sailors, he was helping
+to do the same for Peru.
+
+On hearing these things I became impatient, not wishing to remain
+cooped up in the valley while the Liberating Army was marching on Lima.
+
+However, my deliverance, though slow in coming, came at length, but
+before that time I had a most startling surprise.  One morning, in the
+last week of January 1821, I had gone out very early, half expecting to
+see Quilca returning from one of his excursions.  Most of the Indians
+were astir, when suddenly a man came running from the mouth of the pass.
+
+"Here they are!" he cried; "here they are!"
+
+We pushed down quickly to meet them, I in the very front.  Quilca
+appeared first, riding slowly, as if his horse were tired out.  His
+men, lolling on their animals, followed, some of them with closed eyes
+and half asleep.
+
+Presently I caught sight of Sorillo's messenger, nearly at the end of
+the line; and then I opened my eyes wide, thinking they had played me
+false.  Was I awake, or was I dreaming?  Was I--
+
+"Jack!"
+
+That settled it!  The Indians stared in astonishment, as with a
+startled cry I ran past them to where in the rear a man had jumped from
+his horse to the ground.
+
+"Jos�!" I cried, "Jos�!" and for the life of me could say no more, but
+stood staring at him as if he had been some strange, unnatural animal.
+
+Had I the skill of an artist, I should love to draw his face as he
+looked into mine.  It was strong and firm and purposeful, but the gray
+eyes softened into almost womanly tenderness.
+
+"Why, Jack," said he, shifting the reins and laying a hand on my
+shoulder, "you're quite a man!  Your mother would be proud of you!"
+
+"Have you seen her?" I asked.
+
+"Yes; all's well at home.  But we'll talk of that later on.  So you've
+turned Indian, eh?"
+
+"It's better than living in a cell!"
+
+"So it is; and you didn't go down in the ship, after all?"
+
+"No; but I must tell you the story when you've had something to eat.
+Give your horse to this youngster, and now come on to Quilca's hut; you
+must be tired."
+
+"I was," replied he, "but the sight of you woke me up.  I wondered if
+you'd be waiting to see the braves come home.  That Quilca of yours is
+a born soldier.  He'd make a good general if they didn't train him!"
+
+He rattled on, and I listened, glad just to hear the sound of his
+voice, without reference to what he said.
+
+Quilca bade us welcome to the hut, and his womenfolk brought in the
+food and drink they had prepared.
+
+Jos�, as I have said, knew the Indian patois, which during the meal, he
+used for the benefit of our host, whose Spanish was rather halting.  He
+talked of the war, and told how the Chilians had landed, and how the
+Royalists were broken up and in full retreat.  The campaign, he said,
+was as good as over, and San Martin could be President of Peru any day
+he chose.
+
+At that I was much astonished, for knowing the Spanish leaders, I had
+expected them to fight to the death; but it was pleasing news, all the
+same, and I began to speculate on how soon we should be in Lima.
+
+After breakfast Jos� had a long nap, and then I took him for a stroll
+in the valley, where we could talk without interruption.
+
+I was anxious to hear about my mother, but first I told my own
+story--the rescue by the Spanish soldiers, the coming of General
+Barejo, and the power of the silver key, as also the escape by the
+underground passage, just as I have related it here.
+
+"Barejo's a dangerous man," remarked Jos� thoughtfully.  "He'll spend
+the last drop of blood in his body to keep this country for Spain.
+He's Loyalist and Royalist to the core.  It's a pity, too, because he
+is fighting for a lost cause."
+
+"The more honour to him!" I answered warmly.
+
+"Just so," exclaimed Jos�, with a queer smile; "but, all the same, he
+makes things more difficult for us."
+
+"Well, put him on one side now.  Tell me your own adventures, and where
+you were when my message reached Lima."
+
+"On the way there.  When the schooner foundered, I reckoned it was all
+over.  I went down to a great depth, but, as luck would have it, came
+up just clear of a broken mast.  One of the sailors was holding to it,
+and I joined him, though without any hope of being saved.  You know I'm
+pretty strong, but I was helpless in that wild sea.  The waves just
+flung me about anyhow.  The other chap lasted an hour or two, when down
+he went with a scream, and I heard no more of him.  But I needn't dwell
+on the horrors of that night; you had a strong taste of them yourself.
+About daybreak I was flung like a spent ball on to a sandy beach.  I
+had just strength to crawl a few yards further up, and then collapsed.
+It seems some Indians carried me away, and nursed me back to health,
+but for weeks I was wild as a loon.  They searched the coast, but found
+nothing, and I concluded you were at the bottom of the sea.  Then I got
+a passage to Pisco in a coasting brig, and from there made my way
+overland to Callao."
+
+"Where you heard I was alive?"
+
+"Yes; I hardly know whether I stood on my head or my heels when I was
+told.  It was old Mr. Warren who informed me.  I went to him because I
+dared not go to your mother.  I was afraid that--"
+
+"All right; I understand."
+
+"So I went to Warren, and he began a long yarn; but as soon as he said
+you were alive, I was off like a shot to Lima."
+
+Then he talked of my mother, repeating the messages she had given him,
+and I could have listened for hours.  As it was, I plied him with
+questions, asking this and that--if my pony was well; had he seen Rosa
+Montilla; was my mother less sad; and a hundred other things, many of
+them trivial enough, yet full of interest to me.
+
+At the end I asked how he had found his way to the Hidden Valley.
+
+"Oh!" replied he with a jolly laugh, "that was simple.  I hunted up
+your black-browed bandit, who passed me on to one of his band.  How he
+found the way I can't tell you, but he brought me along all right."
+
+"And now what are we going to do?"
+
+"Well, that depends.  If the Spaniards give in, we can just go quietly
+back home."
+
+"And if they don't?"
+
+"Well, in that case--"
+
+"We must join General San Martin!" I exclaimed.
+
+"I suppose so," he said, half reluctantly.  "You're only a boy, but
+there are many youngsters of your age with the army, and you've a big
+stake in the country.  But we can afford to let that matter stand for a
+day or two longer."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI.
+
+WE LEAVE THE HIDDEN VALLEY
+
+Now, before proceeding with my story, it will be well to mention here one
+piece of information which Jos�, not caring, perhaps, to add to my
+troubles, did not give me.  Indeed, very little was said about it at any
+time, for reasons which will be clear to any one who makes himself
+acquainted with this narrative.
+
+On the very morning after my flight from Lima, a servant of the
+government paid my mother a visit of official importance.  He brought
+with him a notable document full of curious legal phrases, which, put in
+simple language, meant that all my father's vast estates had been
+confiscated and given over to that loyal and worthy Spaniard Don Felipe
+Montilla.  As an act of mercy, my mother was permitted to retain the
+house and grounds at Lima during her lifetime.
+
+In presenting this famous letter, the messenger was, of course, only
+doing his duty, but it is certain that in some way he failed in the
+respect due to a noble lady.  He may have been one of those mean-spirited
+people who delight in trampling on the fallen.  There are, strange to
+say, many such in the world.
+
+My mother never alluded to the incident, which was related to me by Tomas
+Peraza, an old and faithful servant, next in importance to Jos� himself.
+
+"The man had been with my lady nearly an hour," said he, in describing
+the event, "when her bell rang, and I went into the room.  She stood in
+the centre of the apartment, her cheeks very red, and her eyes flashing
+like summer stars.
+
+"'Peraza,' she exclaimed, 'our house has fallen very low, but even so its
+members brook insolence from no man.  Bid my servants bring stout sticks
+and chastise this rude fellow back to the place from which he came!'
+
+"You may be sure that I lost no time in obeying.  The fellow drew his
+sword even in the presence of a lady; but it was knocked from his grasp,
+and we drove him from the grounds with blows and buffets.  It was a
+strange spectacle, and the people came flocking to us in crowds.  At
+first they would have interfered, but on hearing me cry, 'This for
+insulting the Donna Maria Crawford!' they desisted.  And in this way we
+pursued him right to the Government House, where he flung himself upon
+the protection of the soldiers."
+
+It was a harsh measure, perhaps; but then no man should be wanting in
+respect to a woman, and the fellow had but himself to blame.
+
+Jos�, as I have said, withheld the news, or I should have gone at all
+risks to Lima.  As it was, I stayed contentedly in the valley, waiting
+until the Indians received the signal to move.
+
+From that time we heard rumours of hard fighting in various parts of the
+country, and about the middle of March 1821 a messenger arrived from
+Raymon Sorillo.  He brought the order for thirty men to march to Pisco,
+on the sea-coast, where a small patriot detachment had landed under the
+command of Colonel Miller.
+
+"A countryman of ours, Jack," remarked Jos�, "and, from what I hear, one
+of the finest fellows in South America.  The patriots think almost as
+much of him as they do of the famous Lord Cochrane."
+
+"What is he like?"
+
+"I haven't seen him; but he is quite young--not twenty-four yet--though
+he has been soldiering for the last eight years.  He served under
+Wellington in Spain, fought all through the Chilian War, was Cochrane's
+right-hand man at the capture of Valdivia, and now he has come to help
+us.  He has been shipwrecked, taken prisoner, wounded times out of
+number, blown up by a powder explosion--after which he was confined for
+six weeks in a dark room and fed through a plaster mask--and nearly
+killed by fever.  I should say he has crowded as much excitement into his
+life as any man in the world."
+
+"He seems to be a lively customer!"
+
+"He is," laughed Jos�; "and nothing will ever kill him, in my opinion!"
+
+"Don't you think we might join him?" I asked, my blood being fired by
+Jos�'s description.
+
+"Well," said my companion, after a pause, "that's what I was about to
+suggest.  You must throw in somewhere, and I'm not over anxious for
+Sorillo to get hold of you.  He's a cruel fellow, though kind enough to
+us, and all the cut-throats in the country are likely to flock to him.
+I'm sorry for the Spaniards who fall into his hands!"
+
+Quilca was rather opposed to our plans, but finding us determined, he at
+last agreed that we should accompany him on the next expedition.
+
+Day had but just broken when we rode from the valley and I turned to take
+a farewell glance at the place which had been my home so long.  I had not
+been altogether unhappy there, yet I was glad to go into the world again,
+to take the first step on the road to Lima and my mother.
+
+The march to Pisco passed without incident.  We suffered horribly, it is
+true, from thirst, and from choking, blinding sandstorms; but there were
+no Spaniards in that desolate district to bar our way.
+
+A few hours' march from the town we fell in with some Indian scouts, and
+learned from them that the Patriots lay encamped in the Chincha Baja, a
+beautiful valley.  Our joy at these tidings was, however, soon dashed by
+the report that they were in a deplorable condition--suffering from fever
+and ague, and unable to move.
+
+The gloomy picture was not overdrawn.  The valley was a hospital, but
+almost destitute of doctors and medicine.  The sentries, selected from
+the strongest of the troops, could barely stand, staggering even under
+the weight of their muskets.  Privates and officers alike were prostrate,
+and a score of strong men could have killed them all without effort.
+
+As it chanced, the enemy, stationed in an adjoining valley, though
+suffering less severely, were in no condition to make an attack, and the
+two parties could do no more than idly watch each other.
+
+Ordering his men to dismount, Quilca went to find an officer, and soon
+returned with the startling intelligence that the colonel himself lay
+dangerously ill in one of the huts.
+
+"Not an encouraging start!" I remarked.
+
+"A bad beginning often makes a good ending," answered Jos� cheerfully.
+"Let us go to see him."
+
+The doctor, a Spaniard, was attending his patient when we entered the
+hut, and he beckoned us toward the bed.
+
+I could not repress a start at the sight which met our eyes.  The colonel
+was turning restlessly but feebly from side to side; his eyes were
+unnaturally bright; his cheek bones stood out sharp and prominent.  He
+mumbled to himself in short snatches, but so faintly that only a word
+here and there reached us.
+
+Once he smiled pleasantly, saying, "Yes, I see the steeple!  Dear old
+Wingham!"
+
+I did not at that time understand the allusion, but afterwards it became
+plain that he referred to his home, the home of his childhood, a place
+called Wingham, in Kent.
+
+"Do you know," said Jos� sharply, turning to the doctor, "that your
+patient is dying?"
+
+"Perfectly; but what can I do?" replied he.  "He is suffering from the
+tertian ague; the valley is permeated with it."
+
+"We must get him out of it," said Jos�, with decision.
+
+"But where will you take him? the town is as bad."
+
+"On shipboard, and give him a sea-breeze."
+
+"The Chilian squadron is absent, cruising."
+
+"Then we must beg, borrow, or steal a trading-vessel; for go he must and
+shall."
+
+It was wonderful how the doctor brightened up at these words, and still
+more wonderful how he allowed himself to be commanded by a stranger.  But
+Jos� was a strong man though not often exerting his strength, and there
+was that in his face which made most men chary of coming to handgrips
+with him.
+
+"Come, Jack," said he, "let us go to the bay and find a ship, if we wish
+to save the colonel's life.  Another week of this pestilence and he will
+be dead, and Peru can't afford to lose him just yet."
+
+"But suppose," said I, as we rode away from the valley, "that the
+authorities won't allow him to be moved?"
+
+"Why, we'll move him in spite of them.  Quilca's men can be trusted to
+help us.  'Twill be a little campaign on our own account!" said he, with
+a jovial laugh.
+
+Even Jos�, however, could not impress a vessel that had no existence, and
+the bay was empty.  A few boats only lay peacefully resting on the placid
+waters, but of a ship there was no sign.  We stood for an hour staring
+seaward, as if our will could conjure up a vessel, and then returned to
+the town.  We paid a visit to the governor, but he could not help us.  It
+was unlikely there would be a vessel, he said, until Lord Cochrane
+returned with the squadron from Callao.
+
+"When will that be?" I asked.
+
+The governor gave his shoulders an expressive shrug.
+
+"The gallant Englishman does not confide in me," he replied.  "He may
+come to-day; he may not come for a twelvemonth."
+
+It was getting late now, and nothing further could be done till the
+following morning.  Jos� was disappointed, but in no way disheartened.
+
+"If we can't get what we want," said he, "we must be satisfied with what
+we can get.  There's a fine bit of philosophy for you!"
+
+"And what can we get?"
+
+"A house at the seaside.  We'll look for a sheltered place on the beach
+to-morrow, bring down some men to build a hut, and have the colonel
+removed to it.  With the sea air filling his lungs, he may yet have a
+chance of recovery."
+
+Instead of returning to camp, we slept that night at Pisco, and after an
+early breakfast went again to the beach.  Jos� had just selected an
+admirable spot for the hut, when we suddenly heard a shout of "Sail ho!
+sail ho! There's another--and another!  Why, it must be Cochrane's
+squadron!"
+
+In an instant we were gazing seaward, and there, sure enough, rounding
+the corner of the bay, were several vessels, led by a stately ship.
+
+By this time a number of people had assembled, and more were coming in
+hot haste from the town.  They talked and gesticulated violently--the
+majority, I observed being doubtful if the incoming vessels were friends
+or foes.
+
+As they drew nearer, however, all misgiving vanished, every one agreeing
+that the leading ship was the _San Martin_, so named in honour of the
+great general.
+
+"The luck's with us!" cried Jos� joyfully.  "Before nightfall we'll have
+the colonel on board one of those craft.  How beautifully the admiral's
+ship is handled! she comes sweeping in like a great sea-bird."
+
+"Hadn't we better get a couple of men to pull us out to her? she'll
+anchor soon."
+
+"The very thing! we can't afford to lose time."
+
+Our arrangements did not take long to make, and we were soon speeding
+across the bay, our crazy boat being propelled by two wiry Indians.  The
+whole squadron was now well within the bay, the smaller craft lying close
+in, and flying the Chilian colours; but Jos� directed the boatmen to pull
+for the flagship.
+
+"_San Martin_ ahoy!" he yelled, standing up in the stern and hailing the
+ship in what he believed to be sailor fashion.
+
+"Hullo!  Who are you?" came the answer.
+
+"Is Admiral Cochrane on board?"
+
+"Well, he was a minute ago."
+
+"Throw a rope, will you? we're coming up."
+
+This conversation was carried on in English, for many officers in the
+Chilian navy were Englishmen; and now the man on the _San Martin_
+exclaimed, "Well, you're a cool customer anyhow!  Walt a bit while I tell
+the captain."
+
+"Hang the captain!" roared Jos�; "it's a matter of life and death."  And
+those on deck, seeing how terribly in earnest he was, flung over a rope,
+and we scrambled up the ship's side.
+
+"Now, my man," exclaimed a sharp voice, "what is it you are in such a
+tremendous hurry about?"
+
+"I want to see Lord Cochrane immediately," said Jos�.
+
+"His lordship is engaged in his cabin.  Give your message to me."
+
+"I prefer to manage my own business, thank you," replied Jos� coolly.
+"Tell the admiral I have come from Colonel Miller."
+
+As he finished speaking, a distinguished-looking officer, accompanied by
+several others, appeared on deck, and I knew instinctively that we were
+in the presence of the famous Admiral Cochrane, whose marvellous exploits
+had gained for him the admiration of the world.
+
+Hearing the name of Miller, he stopped, and looking at us, said, "What is
+that about Colonel Miller?"
+
+"He is dying, sir!" exclaimed Jos�, as much at ease with an admiral as
+with a private sailor.  "His men are all down with ague, and the colonel
+will be dead inside a week unless you remove him at once."
+
+"Mr. Welsh," remarked the admiral to a handsome young fellow standing
+near, "this is your affair.  Do whatever you think best; but remember, I
+would rather lose a ship than Miller.  He's the one man we can rely upon
+ashore."  Then looking at us, he added, "You are not soldiers?"
+
+
+"This lad," replied Jos�, pointing to me, "is Jack Crawford.  His father
+was one of the largest landowners in Peru, and a great patriot.  The
+Spaniards shot him some time ago, and the boy has been hiding ever since.
+Yesterday we arrived at Pisco to join the detachment there, as
+volunteers, and found the colonel delirious with fever.  A few days
+longer in camp will finish him."
+
+"He shall be removed at once," exclaimed the Admiral.--"Captain
+Wilkinson, will you order a boat to be lowered!" and then he began to
+question Jos� further concerning the condition of the troops.
+
+Very quickly the boat was got ready, Mr. Welsh took his seat, and at his
+suggestion we followed, giving instructions to our own men to return to
+shore.
+
+"Are you a doctor?" asked Jos� of our companion.
+
+"Yes; I am Lord Cochrane's private surgeon, though, fortunately, he gives
+me but little work to do," and he laughed merrily.  I have said that he
+was a handsome fellow, with a boyish, fresh-coloured face, and bright,
+sparkling eyes.  He talked to us cheerfully about the campaign, and would
+not allow that Colonel Miller was in danger of dying.
+
+"You don't know him as well as we do," he said, with a laugh.  "Most men
+who had been through what he has would be dead already; but Miller stands
+alone.  The last time we brought him from Pisco he had a ball in the
+right arm, another had smashed his left hand, while a third had gone
+through his chest, fractured a rib, and passed out at the back.  Of
+course we gave him up, but he pulled through comfortably."
+
+"Well, he is pretty bad now," said Jos� significantly.
+
+"He'll be leading a bayonet charge in a month," laughed the young
+surgeon, "if the war lasts as long.  For my part, I expect it to be over
+sooner."
+
+"I had no idea," said I, "that the Spaniards would be beaten so easily."
+
+"The odds are all against them, you see.  Lord Cochrane has scooped up
+their navy, San Martin is waiting to pounce on Lima, they have to watch
+General Bolivar in the north, and most of the people are in favour of the
+revolution.  Hullo! here we are!  I suppose you'll come with me to the
+camp?"
+
+"Yes," said Jos�, "and back to the ship if you will let us.  We can do no
+good here."
+
+"All right.  I daresay we can find you a berth."
+
+The young surgeon came near to losing his self-possession when he saw the
+actual state of things.
+
+"Whew!" exclaimed he, "this will have to be altered.  Why, the men are
+dying on their feet!  And I suppose it's the same old story--not enough
+doctors, no proper attendants, and musty drugs.  Well, we'll clear the
+colonel out of it first, and then see what can be done for the others."
+
+While he attended to his patient, we had a litter made ready, in which
+the colonel was placed and carried to the water's edge, where the ship's
+boat was in waiting.  The sailors rowed steadily and well, and we soon
+had the satisfaction of seeing the sick man comfortably installed in one
+of the ship's cabins.
+
+Lord Cochrane showed the greatest concern at his old friend's shocking
+condition, and did everything possible to help forward his recovery.
+
+As it chanced, I was much in the sick man's cabin; the doctor, to whom I
+had taken a singular liking, using me as a sort of assistant.  In the
+early evening he went ashore with the admiral, who also took Jos� with
+him, and together they visited the sick camp.  It was late when they
+returned, but our patient had suffered no hurt during their absence.
+Indeed he lay very still and quiet, while from time to time I wiped the
+sweat from his brow and gave him cooling drinks.
+
+Jos� did not come into the cabin again, but I heard from the doctor that
+it had been decided to bring the soldiers on board, in the hope that a
+sea voyage would set up their strength.  Our own particular Indians
+returned to the Hidden Valley, but in the course of a day or two the rest
+of the troops were embarked on the flagship.  Then we stood out to sea,
+bearing southward, the other vessels of the squadron taking the opposite
+direction.
+
+Thanks partly to the young surgeon's skill, but chiefly, perhaps, to his
+own marvellous constitution, the colonel began to mend slowly.  The fever
+abated, he was able to take some nourishing food, and at last a day came
+when we carried him on deck.
+
+It was extraordinary to behold the joy with which his appearance was
+greeted, not only by his own troops, but by every man on board.  Some of
+them knew him only by report, but most of the sailors had witnessed his
+daring deeds, while the marines had taken part in them.
+
+The officers, too, from the admiral downward, came about him, and though
+too weak as yet for much talk, he acknowledged their kindness by a
+charming and fascinating smile.
+
+At the end of an hour the doctor gave orders that he should be carried
+back to his cabin, saying with a laugh, "That's enough excitement for the
+first day, colonel.  Mustn't overdo it, you know."
+
+Whether it was the bracing effect of the fresh sea air, or the sight of
+his men's most obvious improvement, I know not, but from that day his
+strength increased with astonishing rapidity.
+
+During this period of convalescence he talked with me a good deal, and in
+the kindest manner, so that shortly I became as ardent a hero-worshipper
+as the others.  He sent for Jos�, too, thanked him for his prompt action,
+and declared that in a sense he was indebted to him for his life.
+
+"But," said he, smiling, "I don't know yet who you are, or how you came
+to turn up at Pisco just at the right moment!"  Whereupon Jos� gave him
+an outline of our story.
+
+He listened attentively, and at the end said, "I have heard of your
+father, my boy, through General San Martin, who will be glad to make your
+acquaintance.  Meanwhile I shall charge myself with your welfare--that
+is, if you care to share my fortunes."
+
+"I ask for nothing better, sir," I replied, flushing with pleasure.
+"There is no leader I would rather choose to follow."
+
+"Then you shall have your wish," said he, "unless the general finds other
+work for you."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VII.
+
+WHOM THE GODS LOVE DIE YOUNG.
+
+It was, I believe, Lord Cochrane's desire to land his troops close to
+the port of Arica; but two unsuccessful attempts having been made, the
+plan was abandoned.
+
+Colonel Miller, who had by this time resumed his duties, next
+transferred his men to two small schooners captured from the enemy, and
+having taken on board food and water sufficient for twenty-four hours,
+set sail for the Morro de Sama, a miserable port ten leagues north of
+Arica.
+
+Jos� and I accompanied him, as did also, to my great delight, the young
+doctor.  Our two vessels were crazy craft: they had only temporary
+rudders, and it was impossible to steer with any degree of accuracy.
+Owing to this the trip occupied just double the calculated time, so
+that on landing we were half dead with hunger and thirst.  The soldiers
+still suffered somewhat from the effects of the ague: their legs
+tottered under them, and at first they could not march longer than half
+an hour at a time without lying down to rest.
+
+You must not, however, suppose that we were at all downhearted on this
+account.  The men had the greatest confidence in their leader, while
+the gaiety and high spirits of the young doctor acted as a fine tonic.
+He was full of quips and cranks, and his merry sayings brought a smile
+to the faces of even the most wearied.
+
+A winding path three miles in length brought us to the summit of a
+steep mountain, where we stopped awhile to rest, and to enjoy the
+refreshing breeze.
+
+"Well, Crawford," exclaimed the doctor cheerfully, when we once more
+resumed the march, "how do you like being on active service?  A
+pleasant change, isn't it, from being cooped up on board ship?"
+
+At the moment I hardly agreed with him, but I made an effort to reply
+to his banter.
+
+Only to a few of us was the really desperate nature of our expedition
+known.  Of the Spaniards we entertained no manner of fear; the sole
+terror lay in the route to be traversed.  We were already parched by
+thirst, and more than twenty miles of sandy desert lay between us and
+water.
+
+Nor was this all.  Only one man knew the route, and years had gone by
+since he had last travelled over it.  If his strength or memory failed,
+it might well happen that the dreary desert would be our burial-place
+and the loose sand our winding-sheet.  It was not exactly a cheering
+prospect, but we made the best of it.
+
+The colonel marched at the head of his men, the doctor at the rear, so
+that he might assist any unfortunate stragglers, while Jos� and I went
+forward with the guide.
+
+With frequent halts for rest we ploughed our way through the shifting
+sand, our eyes aching and our throats terribly dry.
+
+About midnight, as near as I could judge, the guide stopped
+irresolutely.
+
+"What is it?" asked Jos�, in an excited whisper; "what is wrong?"
+
+We could not see the fellow's face, but he seemed very agitated, and
+there was a break in his voice as he answered,--
+
+"I don't know--I am not sure--but I can't be certain that we are on the
+right track."
+
+The words sounded like a sentence of death, and I could hardly repress
+a cry of horror.
+
+"Be still!" whispered Jos�; "the men must not know.  Stay here a minute
+while I ask the colonel to halt.  That will give us a little
+breathing-space."
+
+He was soon back, and taking the guide's arm, he exclaimed,--
+
+"Now come, get your wits about you, and let us see what can be done.
+Where do you think we ought to be?"
+
+"I don't know," replied the guide helplessly.  "The saints preserve us,
+or we are lost!"
+
+"Now look here," said Jos� sternly: "you are giving way, and that won't
+do.  Pluck up your courage, man, and remember that all our lives are in
+your hands."
+
+I think, perhaps, this awful responsibility had much to do with
+breaking the guide down.  He wrung his hands and groaned, saying aloud
+that he had brought us to death.
+
+"But we aren't dead yet," I remarked, "and needn't be if only you will
+collect your wits.  Come, let us cast about a bit; maybe you'll find
+some landmark that will help you."
+
+"No, no," he cried; "we may be right now, and if we stray away we shall
+certainly be lost.  May the saints preserve us!"
+
+I think the fellow would be there yet, but for the click of Jos�'s
+pistol and the stern ring in his voice as he said sharply,--
+
+"This nonsense has to stop.--Take his arm, Jack.--Now go on without a
+word, until you can make up your mind one way or other about the route."
+
+The next quarter of an hour was one of the worst in my life.  The man
+stumbled this way and that, now going in a straight line, again turning
+to right or left, and all the time the troops in our rear were resting
+in fancied security.  I shuddered to think what would happen if the
+guide failed to locate the track.  Suddenly he ran forward quickly,
+dragging me with him, and then uttered a joyful cry.  We were at the
+foot of a sandy hillock of peculiar shape, much like, as far as I could
+tell, a truncated cone.
+
+It was not high, but apparently of considerable circumference.
+
+The guide laughed and wept like a man bereft of his senses, and then
+crying, "We are saved!" he straightway fell on his knees and offered up
+a prayer of thanksgiving.  The strangely-shaped hillock showed him that
+thus far he had led us correctly; and although during the night he had
+several further twinges of alarm, he did not lose his nerve again.
+
+As mile after mile was traversed our thirst became excruciatingly
+painful, and there was no chance of relief.  Between us and the valley
+of Sama no drop of water would be found.  Still we plodded on, parched
+and weary, until in the eastern sky the dawn rose slowly.  For just a
+brief period we felt the cold, damp, but refreshing breath of morning,
+and then the hot sun added to our misery.  Our heads were scorched by
+its burning rays, and we were almost blinded by the glare reflected
+from the deep, loose sand.
+
+It was nearly nine o'clock when the guide, extending his arm,
+exclaimed, "Sama--water!"  And looking ahead, we caught a glimpse of
+the cool green vegetation in the Sama valley.
+
+Under other circumstances it would have been laughable to watch the
+effect produced by our near approach to the valley.  What semblance of
+order the colonel had kept on the march vanished.  Breaking their
+ranks, the men rushed forward eagerly in search of the welcome water.
+One who for the last mile had been crawling along, supported by the
+doctor, darted off like a champion runner, though he fell exhausted
+before covering half the distance.  On reaching the sparkling stream,
+we all, without exception, flung ourselves down by the margin, and
+lapped the water like thirsty dogs.
+
+Here we remained till the next day, being supplied with food by the
+people from Sama, who also procured for us about a dozen horses, two of
+which, I am thankful to say, fell to Jos� and myself.
+
+Most of the men, after eating and drinking, stretched themselves out on
+the grass, and were fast asleep in a moment; but our leader had much to
+do, and the cheery young doctor spent half his time in attending on the
+sick.  In this Jos� helped him.  I wished to do so, but in truth the
+long march, and the want of food and water, had worn me out.
+
+"Lie down and get some rest," said the doctor, "or you will be left
+behind to-morrow.  We have another twelve leagues or so before us yet."
+
+"Where are we going?" I asked.
+
+"To a village called Tacna."
+
+"We call it a town," laughed Jos�.  "Why, there are more than four
+thousand people living in it."
+
+"Dear me," exclaimed the doctor good-humouredly, "what a considerable
+place!"
+
+Attended by Jos�, he passed on laughing, and I curled up in the
+sheltered nook which I had selected as bed and bedchamber in one.  I
+know nothing of what happened after that until Jos�, shaking my arm,
+told me to rise.
+
+It was scarcely light; but the troops were already preparing their
+simple breakfast, for they had another long and tedious march before
+them.
+
+"How do you feel, Jack?" asked Jos�.
+
+"All right, thank you," said I, giving myself a shake, "but
+tremendously hungry.  I could eat a horse!"
+
+At that he laughed, saying, "Before the campaign's over I daresay you
+will be glad to eat part of one"--a prophecy that was more than
+fulfilled.
+
+Directly after breakfast the men were assembled, the colonel addressed
+them in a few stirring words, and the march began.  We did not
+anticipate an attack, but a few sturdy and well-mounted peasants from
+Sama rode ahead to make sure that the route was clear.
+
+Outside Tacna we were met by the inhabitants, who escorted us, with
+much noise and cheering, in triumph to the town.
+
+"These worthy people are good patriots, Crawford," said the doctor, who
+was riding next me.  "Hark how they cry 'Down with the Spaniards!'  It
+is lucky for them that we are not part of the Spanish army."
+
+"As to that," I answered, "it is as easy to shout for one side as for
+the other.  It is only a matter of words, after all."
+
+"Well," he laughed, "if cheers were bullets, we need not go short of
+ammunition."
+
+We remained several days in Tacna, where I had the luck to be quartered
+on a wealthy Spanish merchant.  It was most amusing to be in his
+company, as he hated us like poison, and, in spite of himself, could
+hardly prevent his real sentiments from popping out at inconvenient
+times.  However, either from fear or from policy, he treated me well,
+and during our stay in the town I lived on the best of everything.
+This was an agreeable interlude in the making of war, and suited me
+admirably.
+
+Like all good things, it came to an end much too soon, and very
+suddenly.  Jos�, the doctor, and I had been spending an evening with
+one of the principal inhabitants, and on coming away met the colonel.
+
+"I am pleased that you keep good hours," said he, with a smile.  "We
+march at dawn.  The Spaniards are moving in three detachments to
+intercept us; we must crush them one by one."
+
+"Well," exclaimed the doctor pleasantly, "we can't grumble; we have had
+a pleasant breathing-space."
+
+During our stay at Tacna we had received reinforcements, bringing our
+adventurous party up to four hundred and fifty, of which about a third
+part consisted of cavalry.  The few days' rest had recruited our
+strength, and we set out in high spirits for Buena Vista, a tiny hamlet
+at the foot of the Cordillera.
+
+As yet we had obtained no definite news of the enemy; but while we lay
+at Buena Vista, a native scout brought word that a strong Spanish force
+was stationed at Mirabe, a village some forty miles distant.  The
+colonel's resolution was instantly taken, and as soon as day broke we
+were once more moving.
+
+After we had left the valley, our route lay across a region where no
+blade of grass had ever grown.  As far as the eye reached, the scene
+was one of utter desolation.  The horses picked their steps gingerly,
+and the foot-soldiers stumbled along as best they could, tripping now
+and then over the stones and boulders that strewed the path.  All day
+long, with intervals for rest, we tramped, and the coming of night
+still found us pursuing the tedious journey.
+
+The last part was worse than the first.  For six miles the road
+descended amidst steep rocks and mighty precipices.  The pass was so
+narrow that we had to march in single file, each horseman on foot and
+leading his animal.  Had the Spaniards caught us there, not a man would
+have escaped.
+
+Slowly and carefully we descended in one long line, until at midnight
+we reached the rugged bank of the river which rushes through the Mirabe
+valley.  In a hollow on the opposite side lay the village, and behind
+the mud walls surrounding the cultivated grounds were the Spaniards,
+little dreaming of our proximity.
+
+"Now," exclaimed the colonel softly, "we have them in our power.  We
+have but to cross the river and fall upon their camp."
+
+He had already begun to give his orders, when the report of a
+pistol--fired, whether by accident or design, by one of our men--rang
+out, and all chance of a surprise vanished.  The Spaniards, in alarm,
+began firing rapidly, though they could not see us, a thick wood
+stretching between them and the river.
+
+"I'd hang that fellow," growled Jos�.  "He's either a fool or a rogue,
+and has completely spoiled the colonel's plans."
+
+"Never mind," said the colonel cheerfully; "we must make new ones," and
+he immediately dispatched two rocket parties--one to the right, the
+other to the left--in order to engage the enemy's attention.
+
+Meanwhile each mounted man, taking up a foot-soldier behind him,
+crossed the river, and then returned for another, until in a short time
+all had safely effected a passage.  Then, unable to do more in the
+darkness, we lay down to wait for the coming of dawn.
+
+Many of the men fell fast asleep in spite of the random firing, but my
+mind was busy with thoughts of the approaching fight.
+
+About two o'clock, Dr. Welsh, who had been assisting the regular army
+surgeons, came and lay down beside me.
+
+"Well, Crawford," said he, finding I was awake, "how do you like the
+music?  Rather alarming at first, eh?  But you'll get used to it.
+After hearing the bullets swish round your ears a time or two you'll
+think nothing of it."
+
+"That may be," I replied, "but it is distinctly unpleasant just now."
+
+He laughed, saying the fight would be only a skirmish at the most, and
+not worth considering.
+
+"Are you going to stay with us?" I asked.
+
+"Oh no," said he; "this is only a run ashore, just to stretch my legs a
+bit, you know.  They get cramped on board ship.  By George, those
+fellows intend serenading us till daybreak.  Who's that on the other
+side of you--Craig?"
+
+"Yes--sound asleep and snoring.  I wish I were."
+
+"Ah, no doubt he has a clear conscience.  Take pattern by him, my boy."
+
+"Thanks for the advice," said I, laughing; "it's very kind of you to
+offer it."
+
+"It costs nothing," he answered banteringly; "which explains why so
+many people are willing to give it."
+
+After a time I fell asleep, and did not waken till, at the first streak
+of dawn, an order was quietly passed through the lines for every man to
+hold himself in readiness.
+
+Jos� sat up, rubbed his eyes lazily, and declared that he could sleep
+another twenty-four hours.
+
+"There's too much hurry and bustle about this kind of warfare," said
+he.  "Why don't both sides agree to meet at a certain place, and to
+fight it out?"
+
+"A famous plan, upon my word!" cried the doctor; "it would save no end
+of trouble."
+
+"And get the business over quickly," said Jos�, who was saddling up.
+"Hullo, there goes the colonel!  I wonder if he ever gets tired?"
+
+"No," laughed the doctor merrily; "he's made of iron."
+
+The dawn was broadening now; and moving from the shelter of the wood,
+we saw the Spaniards on a level piece of ground about half a mile wide.
+
+"They're trying to gain the ridge on the left," cried Jos�; "that will
+give them the advantage."
+
+But the colonel had seen the manoeuvre also, and flung his small body
+of cavalry at them with such force that they drew back, trying to
+retreat by the winding track through the mountains.  Again they were
+intercepted, this time being forced to the edge of a precipitous cliff.
+
+"By George," exclaimed the doctor, "they're in it now!  It's neck or
+nothing with them."
+
+All this time I had quietly sat on my horse, watching the phases of the
+fight.  The scene was to me so extraordinary that I had no sense of
+fear.  I was not upset even by the strange, wailing sounds made by the
+rushing bullets.
+
+Jos� and I were with the reserve cavalry; Welsh was at the colonel's
+side.  The Spaniards fought with desperate courage, I could see that,
+and they pushed our men hard.  Fallen soldiers dotted the level tract
+of ground.  Some, raising themselves painfully, began to crawl back.
+
+I make no pretence of giving an accurate description of the combat.  To
+me it was a confused medley of men and horses inextricably mixed; of
+shining swords, of blinding red flashes; and my ears were deafened with
+the fierce cries and shouts of men spending their lives recklessly
+under the rising sun.
+
+At last I saw the colonel raise his sword.  Then he shouted something
+in Spanish, whereat, gathering up the reins in my left hand, I spurred
+my horse, to keep company with the rest.
+
+"A firm seat, Jack; keep a firm seat!" cried a familiar voice in my
+ear; and there was Jos�, riding as coolly as if taking a canter over
+the grounds of our park at home!
+
+We were riding at no great pace, but all well together, when again the
+colonel's voice rang out, and we broke instantly into a gallop.  Then
+in a flash I saw a body of Spanish cavalry drawn up to receive us,
+while from our left came a stinging hail of bullets.
+
+A man close to me dropped his sword with a cry of pain, and the next
+moment his horse, taking the bit between its teeth, rushed madly to the
+front.  I watched its progress with queer fascination.  On it went,
+right through the Spaniards, who edged aside to let it pass, straight
+to the brink of the precipice, over which it fell, still carrying its
+hapless rider.  It seemed to me that I heard his shriek, though that
+must have been fancy, as it could not have risen above the tumult of
+the fight.
+
+"Forward!" roared the colonel, waving his sword, and the next instant
+we were in the midst of the throng.  The young doctor was just in front
+of me, Jos� on my right hand, and the men pressing close behind.  I saw
+nothing of the fight save that part only which concerned myself.  Again
+and again the shining steel was within a hair's-breadth of me--now at
+my head, now at my heart--while I was almost suffocated in the press.
+
+Inch by inch, by sheer force of steel, we threaded our way through,
+re-formed on the further side, and, still headed by the colonel, dashed
+once more into the fray.  This time the resistance was less obstinate.
+The Spaniards began to weary--to fall back, as if unable to hold their
+ground.
+
+"Hurrah!" cried the young doctor, "hurrah! they're done for!"
+
+I shall not easily forget the picture he made.  His handsome face was
+flushed with excitement, his beautiful eyes were ablaze with light; he
+sat his horse erect as a young sapling.  A handsomer or finer man could
+not have been.
+
+I saw the tragedy from beginning to end, but could do nothing to
+prevent it.  It was over quick as a flash of summer lightning.  Before
+us rode a Spanish officer, calling fiercely on his men to come back.
+At the sound of the doctor's triumphant note he turned, and I saw his
+face black with anger.
+
+"Ah, Englishman!" he cried savagely; and even as he spoke his left arm
+rose, there was a flash, a report, and the doctor fell forward on his
+horse's neck.
+
+"See to him, Crawford!" cried the colonel huskily; and as I clutched
+the animal's bridle, the troopers swept on in hurricane fury, while
+from all parts of the battlefield there rose a cry of triumph.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VIII.
+
+A FRIENDLY OPPONENT.
+
+I had known the young English doctor only a short time, but I had
+learned to love him as a dear friend.  In the fight he had shown
+himself brave and fearless, but quite apart from this, his qualities
+endeared him to every one.  He was always cheery and full of hope, even
+in our worst straits; he was tender-hearted as a child, and every sick
+or wounded soldier worshipped him for his unvarying attention and
+kindness.
+
+He was not dead when, slipping from my horse, I placed my arm round him
+as well as I could to support him.  I saw that his eyes were open, and
+that a beautiful smile lit up his face.  For a second or two he
+recognized me and tried to speak, but this was beyond his powers.  Then
+a change came swiftly and suddenly; the light faded from his eyes, his
+cheeks grew ashen gray, and though quite unfamiliar with death, I knew
+that his spirit had fled.
+
+Some wounded Indians, staggering from the fight, helped me to place the
+lifeless body on the ground; and these poor, simple natives filled the
+air with their lamentations.  The death of the brilliant young surgeon
+had deprived them of a good friend, and they were quick to show their
+grief.
+
+The fight was now over.  The majority of the Spaniards were either
+killed or captured; but no one took much pleasure in the well-earned
+little victory.  From the chief to the meanest soldier in the
+detachment, every one mourned sincerely the loss of a trusty comrade.
+
+On active service, however, one has not much time to spend in grieving.
+There were the dead to be buried, the wounded to be seen to, the
+prisoners to be secured, and then, after a short space for food and
+rest, we were marching in hot pursuit of the scanty remnant that had
+escaped.
+
+"It's lucky," observed Jos�, with a laugh, "that the colonel managed to
+procure a few horses."
+
+"His command would have been one short without them," I replied.
+
+We were by no means a smart-looking detachment.  The officers rode on
+horseback, and a number of mules had been obtained for the men, who
+followed the system of _ride and tie_.  Our clothes began to show signs
+of hard wear, we suffered much from hunger and thirst, and most of all
+from loss of sleep.  This last was really a terrible hardship, and I
+noticed more than one poor fellow fall from his mule in a kind of
+stupor as I rode along.
+
+However, by dint of pegging away, we arrived at the town of Moquegua
+just in time to capture most of the runaways, and then, utterly worn
+out and exhausted, gladly settled down for a few days' rest.
+
+Jos� and I were billeted in a house near the colonel's quarters, and
+the people gave us a warm welcome.  They spread a good meal, to which
+we did ample justice, and then, although barely noon, we went straight
+to bed.
+
+"I hope," exclaimed Jos� as he lay down, "that we shan't be disturbed
+for a month.  I can easily do with a month's sleep."
+
+"The chances are," said I gloomily, "that the colonel will be knocking
+us up before we have fairly begun to dream."  At which dismal prophecy
+Jos� threatened me with all sorts of pains and penalties unless I held
+my peace.
+
+As it happened, the colonel did not need us, and we actually slept
+without waking until nine o'clock the next morning, when, having made a
+hearty breakfast, we went to call upon the chief.
+
+"Why, Crawford," exclaimed the colonel, smiling, "I thought you were
+lost!"
+
+"Only in dreams, sir," I replied.  "We've been catching up a little of
+our lost sleep.  We did not know how soon we might be on the march
+again."
+
+"So you made the most of your opportunity?  Well, I don't blame you;
+but it is possible we shall make a long halt here."
+
+"Possible," remarked Jos� to me afterwards, "but not probable;" and
+events proved that, as far as we were concerned, he was right.
+
+That evening the colonel invited us to dinner; but we had scarcely sat
+down when he was called away to speak to a messenger who had brought
+important news.  He returned looking rather thoughtful, and, catching
+sight of Jos�, exclaimed,--
+
+"Craig, you are pretty well acquainted with the Indian dialects, I
+believe?"
+
+"Yes, sir," answered Jos� readily; "I can manage to talk with most of
+the natives."
+
+"Then you are the very man I want.  I'll tell you all about it after
+dinner.  Mustn't send you off without satisfying the inner man, eh?"
+
+Jos� glanced at me with a smile, as much as to say, "I wasn't very far
+out this morning;" while I was all curiosity as to what the business
+might be.
+
+As soon as we had finished, the colonel and Jos� had a very earnest and
+confidential talk, after which my companion rejoined me, and together
+we left the room.
+
+"What is it?" I asked anxiously; "anything of importance?"
+
+"Rather, unless the Indian has made a mistake.  La Hera is hiding with
+a few wounded men in the mountains, not a dozen miles away."
+
+This was the Spanish leader whom we had defeated at Mirabe.  He was a
+bold, dashing soldier, and a firm Loyalist, whose capture would deal
+the enemy a heavy blow.
+
+"Get the horses ready," said Jos�, "while I pick out a few men.  We
+mustn't make a mess of this affair, or the colonel won't trust us
+again.  And don't mention where we are going, up at the house.  I
+daresay the folks are all right, but what they don't know they can't
+tell."
+
+"Where shall I meet you?"
+
+"Outside the colonel's quarters.  Now, off with you, we've no time to
+waste."
+
+The horses had benefited by their unusually long rest, and having
+saddled them with the help of one of our host's servants, I led them
+into the street.  Jos� soon appeared with a dozen mounted men, wild,
+fierce-looking fellows, and all natives.
+
+Presently the guide came out, and directly afterwards the colonel, who
+spoke a few words, telling us that we were bound on an important
+errand, which he trusted we should accomplish successfully.  Then the
+guide placed himself, on foot, beside Jos�'s horse, and we moved off.
+
+He led us at first, purposely, in a wrong direction, in case of prying
+eyes, turning back at the end of a mile or so, and then steering across
+a wild and lonely desert track.  Having covered nearly a dozen miles,
+we came to a tiny hamlet at the foot of the mountains.  Halting here,
+we left our horses in charge of two men and pressed forward on foot.
+
+Fortunately, in one way though not in another, it was a moonlight
+night, and we could see where to step.  All around us towered huge
+mountains, grim and forbidding.  We marched in single file by the edge
+of steep precipices, so close sometimes that we seemed to hang over the
+awful abyss.  Further and further we penetrated into the dreary
+recesses.  We seemed to be a body of ghosts traversing a dreary world.
+No man spoke; we heard the cry neither of bird nor of animal.  The only
+sound to break the eerie silence was the occasional clatter of a stone,
+which, loosened by our passage, rolled over into the unknown depths.
+
+I looked neither to right nor to left, but kept my gaze fixed on Jos�,
+who walked before me.  The track narrowed down so that it hardly
+afforded footing for one, and I prayed in my heart that we might soon
+come to a better vantage-ground.
+
+I was no coward, and since leaving home had met with more than one
+adventure, but this was the most perilous of all.  Despite every effort
+to keep firm, my limbs trembled, my head grew dizzy; I was seized by a
+strong temptation to launch myself into space.  The fit passed as
+suddenly as it had come, but I felt the sweat trickling down my face.
+
+Presently we emerged on to a broad platform, and Jos�, stopping, seized
+my hand.  He was trembling now, but it was at the thought of danger
+past.  One by one the men stole cautiously along while we waited,
+watching with fascinated eyes, and drawing a deep breath of relief as
+each stepped safely from the perilous path.  Whether they had also felt
+fearful I could not tell; their faces were wonderfully impassive, and,
+except when roused by savage anger, quite expressionless.
+
+At a sign from Jos� they dropped to the ground behind a group of
+boulders, and he, addressing them in some Indian dialect, issued his
+instructions.  I gathered very little from his speech; but presently
+the men disappeared, gliding like serpents along the side of the
+cliffs, and leaving me with Jos� and the guide.
+
+"I don't much like this, Jack," said Jos�.  "I almost wish you had
+stayed behind.  I hope the colonel can depend on this fellow."
+
+"What is it?" I asked.  "I suppose we didn't come out just for the
+pleasure of exercising ourselves on that goat-track?"
+
+"No," said he; "though, to be sure, that was an uncommon diversion.
+The real thing is just about to begin, and this is the way of it.
+According to the guide, La Hera is in a cave close at hand."
+
+"All the more chance of trapping him."
+
+"I'm not so sure of that.  The entrance to the cave is some sixty feet
+from the ground, in the side of a steep cliff."
+
+"Well, we've had some experience in mountain-climbing."
+
+"Yes, but not this sort.  The face of the cliff is as perpendicular as
+the side of a house."
+
+"The other fellows got up."
+
+"So they did, but it was in the daylight, and there was no one at the
+top waiting to pop them off with a bullet.  It seems the bandits have
+been in the habit of using this cave as a depot, and one of them guided
+La Hera there with the real object of betraying him."
+
+"Ugh!" said I; "these traitors make me sick."
+
+"Just so; but they are very useful.  Without the help of this one, for
+instance, we can't capture La Hera, unless we starve him out."
+
+"What does he propose to do?"
+
+"Well, there is a stout rope fixed in the cave which he will let down
+at the right moment.  Up this we shall have to climb by help of the
+niches that have been cut in the cliff."
+
+"Suppose La Hera finds it out, and is waiting to receive us?"
+
+"That," replied Jos�, with a shrug of the shoulders, "is just what is
+bothering me.  However, we shall soon discover.  Our men have had time
+to hide themselves, and the guide is getting fidgety.  But I say, Jack,
+I wish I hadn't brought you."
+
+"I'm rather pleased now that you have, though I wasn't half an hour
+ago."
+
+"No; I thought you breathed too hard to be enjoying yourself."
+
+With that he ordered the native to proceed; and we all three crept
+along, keeping well in the shadow, though the enemy, feeling secure in
+possession of the rope, were hardly likely to have set a watch.
+
+Coming to a halt, the guide pointed to a towering cliff, which, on that
+face at least, was in truth steep and smooth as the wall of a house.
+Our men lay close at hand, but completely concealed, watching for the
+lowering of the rope.
+
+Now it seemed to me that we were running great risk when our object
+might have been gained with none at all.  Why not, as Jos� had remarked
+a short time previously, starve the inmates out?
+
+"No good," answered he, when I asked the question.  "The guide says
+there are stores in the cave sufficient to last a small party for
+months.  The war would be over before they had finished their
+provisions.  No; we must get them by surprise or not at all.  I should
+like to see that rope dangling."
+
+It was weary waiting, and a great strain on our nerves too, as every
+moment's delay gave us more time to appreciate the danger.  The longer
+I pondered the more I disliked the business, and doubted what would be
+the end of it.  La Hera was a bold man, and if he got an inkling of the
+truth, we should meet with an unpleasant reception.  He might not
+approve of such an unceremonious intrusion into his dwelling-place.
+
+I was still thinking of these things when the Indian guide drew our
+attention to the cliff.  The time had come.  There, distinguishable in
+the pale moonlight, dangled the rope, and as we watched it descended
+lower and lower, very steadily, until the end of it was not higher than
+a man could grasp.
+
+It was the signal agreed upon to show that the enemy were asleep.
+
+Calling softly to one of his men, Jos� said, "Stay here and watch.  If
+we are betrayed, take this man back to Colonel Miller.  If he tries to
+escape, kill him."
+
+The Indian moved not a muscle, while his guard took his place beside
+him with drawn sword, for no muskets had been brought on the
+expedition.  Then word was quietly passed round to the others, and one
+by one we gathered close to the hanging rope.
+
+We could not communicate with the man at the top, lest we should be
+heard by the Spaniards, and we dared not make a sound.  Holding a knife
+between his teeth, Jos� clutched the rope firmly, planted one foot in a
+niche, and began to mount.  When he had reached half-way up, I began
+the ascent, bidding the men be ready to follow me.
+
+I did not mind this part of the enterprise, dangerous though it was.
+The niches cut in the rock afforded decent foothold, while the rope was
+knotted at intervals.  The peril lay not so much in the climbing as in
+the chance of discovery.  If the Spaniards learned what was going
+forward, nothing could save us from certain death.  This was an
+unpleasant thought, which I hastened to put as far from me as possible.
+
+Meanwhile Jos�'s head was on a level with the cave, and I felt that the
+best or the worst of the business would soon be known.  If the enemy
+were awake, it would go hard with him.  His foot left the last niche,
+he swung on the rope, and as I watched breathlessly he disappeared.
+
+Casting a glance downward, I called softly to the troopers to hurry,
+and then went up hand over hand at a breakneck pace.  In a short time I
+was gazing at as strange a spectacle as I have ever seen.  The cavern
+was an immense apartment, with steep walls and exceedingly lofty roof.
+Near the centre was a fire, on which some one had hastily thrown a
+fresh supply of dry fuel, and the red flames were leaping high in long,
+thin tongues.
+
+Just inside the entrance Jos� and the traitorous Indian stood over the
+windlass, by means of which the rope was worked, and as I ran to their
+side, one of the Spanish soldiers uttered a cry of alarm.  Instantly
+all was tumult and confusion.  Shots were fired at random, men shouted
+wildly, "We are betrayed!" while, above all, Jos�'s voice rang out high
+and clear, "Surrender! you are my prisoners."
+
+With a rush the Spaniards sprang at us, fighting with the fury of wild
+animals, while we had to guard not only ourselves but the rope up which
+our men were swarming.  If that were cut or loosened, our opponents
+would hold us at their mercy.  We fought against long odds, but for a
+time held our own, though once I was stricken almost to my knees, and
+felt the graze of a sharp blade across my cheeks.
+
+Fortunately help came soon, or it would have gone badly with us.  With
+a wild shout a burly trooper sprang into the fray, and another soon
+joined him.  A third and a fourth followed quickly, and the issue was
+placed beyond doubt.
+
+Now, although our Indians made splendid soldiers, they hated the
+Spaniards so much that it was difficult to restrain their passions.
+Some excuse may be found for them in the long years of misery and
+oppression they had endured; but, of course, Jos� set his face sternly
+against cruelties.
+
+Thus it was in our enemies' own interest that I raised my voice,
+crying, "Surrender, and we will spare your lives!  You cannot escape!"
+And Jos� echoed my appeal.  He, too, dreaded the slaughter that must
+ensue if our Indians got out of hand.  Perhaps the Spaniards guessed
+our motive; at least they must have seen the futility of continuing the
+contest.  One by one they flung their weapons sullenly to the ground,
+and yielded themselves prisoners.
+
+"Torches!" cried Jos� quickly, "and let us examine our capture.  Where
+is Colonel La Hera?"
+
+No one spoke, but several Indians plucked blazing brands from the fire
+and brought them to us.  By their light we saw one man lying dead near
+the windlass, and three wounded.  Six others, disarmed, stood round,
+for the most part black-browed and scowling.
+
+Jos� repeated his question.  "Where is Colonel La Hera?" he asked.
+
+"Gone to get reinforcements to drive you into the sea," answered a calm
+voice.
+
+"Then he is not in this cave?" asked Jos� bluntly, but with a certain
+ring of admiration in his tone.
+
+Now all this time I had been taking particular notice of this Spaniard.
+His uniform showed him to be a major, though he was quite young.  His
+face was frank and open; he had dark, expressive eyes, and a pleasant,
+musical voice, which somehow seemed familiar to me.  Where had I met
+this man before?  In a moment or two he himself supplied the answer.
+
+"Who is in command here?" asked Jos�.
+
+"I have the honour, and, as it seems, the misfortune also, of
+commanding these brave fellows.  I am Major Santiago Mariano, in the
+service of His Spanish Majesty, whom may God preserve!"
+
+"I wish him no harm," replied Jos�; "only for the future he must not
+reckon Peru among his dominions.  Now, how am I to know that La Hera is
+not here?"
+
+"Ask the man who betrayed us," said the major scornfully; and on
+questioning the Indian, it appeared he had mistaken Santiago for the
+famous colonel.
+
+"Well," muttered Jos�, "it's a disappointment; but it can't be helped.
+What are we to do with the wounded?  They can't go down the rope."
+
+"Let me stay with them," I suggested, "and you can send a doctor back."
+
+"Meanwhile," interrupted the major, "I have some little skill in
+surgery, and, with your permission, I will remain also.  You need not
+fear that I shall run away.  I will give my parole to come to Moquegua.
+After that, matters must shape their own course."
+
+"Very well," exclaimed Jos�; "the plan has its advantages.  I'll hurry
+along the first doctor I come across, Jack.  But you are hurt!"
+
+"It's only a scratch; nothing serious at all."
+
+Jos� sent half a dozen of his men down the rope; then the dead Spaniard
+was lowered, the prisoners followed, and Jos� himself descended with
+the remainder of the troopers.
+
+"Haul up the rope, Jack," he cried in farewell, "and make sure of your
+visitors before dropping it again."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IX.
+
+A GLEAM OF HOPE.
+
+As soon as the party had disappeared, I turned to the major and said
+with a smile,--
+
+"Now, my dear Santiago, let us attend to the needs of these poor
+fellows."
+
+I was now standing full in the firelight, and he glanced at my face
+with a puzzled expression.  Then a half gleam of recognition shone in
+his eyes, and he exclaimed doubtfully--
+
+"Surely you can't be the boy Crawford who vanished so mysteriously from
+the fort?"
+
+"I am, though!" said I, laughing at his amazement.  "But we shall have
+time for a talk presently; let us do what we can for these poor fellows
+first.  Is there any water in the cave?"
+
+"Yes; there is a spring at the far end.  I will fetch some.  Put some
+more wood on the fire; it smokes if allowed to go down."
+
+Of the three wounded men only one was seriously hurt, and he, I feared,
+was beyond the aid of the most skilled surgeon.  However, we did our
+best for all the sufferers, gave them water to drink, arranged them
+comfortably on beds of straw, and bathed and bandaged their wounds.
+Then I washed the cut in my cheek, and Santiago smeared it with a
+native ointment, which he said possessed wonderful healing properties.
+
+"Now," said he, "I judge you are ready for late supper or early
+breakfast, whichever you may prefer to call it.  The provisions are
+homely, and I am an indifferent cook, but I can at least give you
+enough to eat.  Those brigands of yours have stored sufficient food
+here for an army."
+
+Carrying a torch, I accompanied him round the cavern, gazing in wonder
+at the piles of Indian corn, the heaps of potatoes, and the strings of
+charqui, the last suspended from the walls.
+
+"Come," said I, "there is no need to starve in the midst of plenty.
+What shall we have?  Roast potatoes and jerked beef?  The potatoes will
+require the least attention."
+
+"And they are not bad if you are downright hungry, as I was when we
+crept in here after the affair at Mirabe.  There's a smart soldier
+leading your men, Crawford."
+
+"Yes; he is an Englishman named Miller, and a very fine fellow.  But
+how come you to be here?"
+
+"We'll talk over these things presently.  Meanwhile, let us cook the
+potatoes.  Bring another handful; I daresay two of the men will be able
+to eat a little breakfast."
+
+"If it is breakfast!"
+
+"It must be for us, because we had our supper before you paid us so
+unceremonious a visit.  Of course we were betrayed."
+
+"Well, as to that," I replied, "you must ask the colonel; I only acted
+under orders."
+
+"Just so.  Well, I am very pleased to see you, though I dislike the way
+in which you introduced yourself.  Cut this piece of beef up finely
+while I fetch some salt."
+
+"Have you any?" I asked, in some surprise.
+
+"Oh yes.  Your amiable brigands know how to stock a larder."
+
+Two of the wounded men were able to eat, and they were very grateful
+for the food we took them.  Then we returned to the fire, piled up some
+sacks to serve as seats, and began our meal.
+
+It was all most strange to me and very delightful; it might have been a
+chapter lifted bodily from one of my favourite story-books.  There
+seemed to be a piratical flavour about the whole business.
+
+"Perhaps it is as well that I gave my parole," exclaimed the major
+thoughtfully, taking off another potato.
+
+"Why?" I asked.
+
+"I might have felt tempted to escape," he replied, looking at the coil
+of rope.
+
+"You forget your jailer carries a pistol," I remarked, laughing.
+
+"An empty one," he suggested, shrugging his shoulders.  "No, no, my
+boy; my parole is your only safeguard."
+
+"It is a sufficient one, at any rate."
+
+"Yes," said he, rather dreamily, I thought.  "The honour of a Mariano
+is sacred; my father taught me that.  And yet--and yet, do you know,
+Crawford," he added, in a sharper tone, "I doubt if a parole given to
+brigands should be held to."
+
+I did not at all like this turn in the conversation, the more
+especially as my pistol was really empty.  I had not dreamed of taking
+any precautions, trusting wholly in the Spanish officer's honour.
+
+I looked up at him, and felt reassured; there could be no treachery
+hidden behind that frank, open countenance.
+
+"It seems to me you are talking nonsense, Santiago," I said cheerfully.
+"A man's word is his bond in any case--that is, if he be a man."
+
+He took no notice of my remark, but sat musing, leaving half his food
+untouched.  As for me, I helped myself to some more beef, though I must
+confess the major's wild talk nearly destroyed my appetite.  His manner
+had changed so suddenly and abruptly that I knew not what to make of
+it.  I might perhaps have reloaded my pistol without his knowledge, but
+this would be a confession that I had lost faith in him.
+
+"Come," said I jocularly, pointing to his food, "you pay your cooking a
+poor compliment."
+
+To this he made no reply, but looking up after a time exclaimed,--
+
+"I have news for you.  I had almost forgotten, but I must tell you
+before going."
+
+"Going?" I cried; "we cannot go before the doctor arrives."
+
+"You cannot, but I can, and must.  My mind is made up.  Do not try to
+thwart me; I should be sorry if you got hurt.  Sit still, my boy; don't
+stir a finger, or I will kill you!"
+
+I looked at him in amazement.  His face was flushed, his eyes shone
+wildly; he spoke with a rapid and angry vehemence.
+
+"By St. Philip," he cried, "I should be a cur to place honour before
+loyalty!  My duty is to my king, do you hear?  Shall I help a parcel of
+bandits to set the king at naught?  Shall I bring disgrace on a family
+that has stood by the throne for untold centuries?  My father died on
+the battlefield with the king's banner above his head, as did his
+father before him.  And I am to stay in a cage when the door is open!
+I am to let these upstarts trample on the king's rights!"
+
+The words swept from his lips in a sweeping, tempestuous torrent, and
+when they were done he leaped to his feet with an angry cry.  I sat in
+my place looking at him steadily, but making no movement.
+
+"I tell you it is monstrous!" he continued.  "I care nothing for
+myself, but I cannot desert the king!"
+
+"His Majesty must be greatly in need of friends," I remarked dryly, "to
+accept the aid of a perjured soldier."
+
+It was strong language.  I knew it would hurt him cruelly; but a
+desperate disease requires a desperate remedy.  I thought at first he
+would kill me.  His eyes blazed fiercely, and he sprang forward with
+uplifted hands.  Suddenly he paused, and returned abruptly to his seat.
+
+Thinking it best not to disturb him, I rose and made the round of the
+wounded men.  I felt awfully sorry for the young major, and almost
+wished he had not passed his word to Jos�.  Having done so, he must, of
+course, abide by it, unless he cared to live with tarnished honour.
+
+Presently, returning to the fire, I threw some more fuel on, and sat
+down again on my heap of sacks.  Santiago had covered his face with his
+hands, and was rocking himself gently to and fro, like a child in pain.
+Evidently the wild fit had passed, and he had overcome the temptation
+which had tried him so sorely.
+
+For nearly an hour we sat there, speaking no word, then looking me
+straight in the face, he said suddenly,--
+
+"Crawford, I have acted like a madman, but there is nothing to be
+feared now."
+
+"Nor before," I answered cheerfully.  "You would not have gone a
+hundred yards.  Come, let us now dismiss the subject.  After all, it
+was no more than a bad dream."
+
+"By St. Philip," he exclaimed, "it was a very ugly one.  However, I am
+in my right mind now, and as soon as we arrive at Moquegua I will
+withdraw my parole.  Then if a chance to escape comes, I can avail
+myself of it with an easy conscience.  You have not reloaded your
+pistol?"
+
+"No.  Why should I? there is no need of it."
+
+"Not now," he said.  "I am master of myself now," and he actually
+smiled.
+
+"You were going to tell me some news," I observed, after a pause.  "Now
+that you have roused my curiosity, I hope you will satisfy it."
+
+I spoke half jestingly, and more for the sake of keeping up the
+conversation than in the expectation of hearing any particular
+information.  It was unlikely, I considered, that Santiago could tell
+me anything of real interest.  In this I was much mistaken, as you will
+find.
+
+"I don't know," said he thoughtfully, "that it will be doing you any
+real kindness, yet it is only right that you should know.  Of course,
+you will understand that your escape occasioned some little stir among
+the garrison of the fort."
+
+"I am quite ready to believe it," I replied, chuckling at the
+remembrance.  "I have often laughed to think of your astonishment in
+the morning."
+
+"It was no laughing matter to us, I can assure you.  The commandant was
+furious, and went about vowing vengeance against everybody.
+Search-parties scoured the neighbourhood in all directions, but with no
+result, and we at last concluded that by some means you had been taken
+off by ship."
+
+"Quite a wrong conclusion," I interposed.
+
+"We could think of no other.  However, to get on with the story.  In
+the midst of the confusion Barejo turned up on his way back to Lima.
+He was simply furious, and threatened to put us all in irons, the
+commandant included; which, by the way, was absurd."
+
+"It was paying me a very high compliment."
+
+"Don't be puffed up, or imagine the general was afraid of you," laughed
+Santiago.
+
+"Oh!" I exclaimed, affecting to feel disappointed, "that alters the
+case.  But why should he be angry at my escape?"
+
+"Because he really wished to keep you out of mischief."
+
+"Then I have sadly misjudged him."
+
+"I think you have.  Of course, I don't profess to understand the
+matter, but it seems to be something in this way.  When we have crushed
+this rebellion, the estates of those who have borne arms against the
+king will be confiscated."
+
+"Spoils to the victors!" I laughed; "an old-fashioned principle."
+
+"And, of course," continued Santiago, not heeding the interruption,
+"your father's estates will be among them.  Now, as far as I can
+gather, Barejo thought that by preventing you from joining the rebels
+something might be saved from the wreck."
+
+"That was very kind of the general," I remarked.  "I had no idea that
+he took any interest in my affairs.  But isn't it possible, major, that
+you are going a trifle too fast?  Suppose, for instance, that the
+rebels, as you call us, should win?"
+
+The major tossed his head scornfully.
+
+"That is utterly impossible!" he answered, with a short, quick snap.
+
+"But let us suppose it, just for argument," I urged.
+
+"Well in that case," said he, "of which there is no possible
+likelihood, your father will keep his property."
+
+At first I thought he had forgotten, but something in his face held my
+attention, and brought the blood to my head with a rush.
+
+"Do you mean--  What is it?  Tell me quickly!  Is my father--"
+
+"Alive!  That is my news; but you must not build on it too greatly.  I
+can only tell you he was not slain that day in the mountains.  He was
+dangerously wounded, but was still living when the soldiers carried him
+away."
+
+"Where did they take him?"
+
+"That I do not know; neither, I think, does Barejo.  Perhaps, and in my
+opinion most likely, to the forts at Callao."
+
+The major's news, as you may imagine, filled me with the liveliest
+astonishment and excitement.  My father alive!  I could hardly credit
+the statement.  What would my mother say?  How would she receive the
+startling information?  I rose from my seat and walked about the
+cavern, trying to think it over coolly.
+
+Then it dawned upon me why Santiago had said he would not be doing me
+any real kindness in talking of the discovery.  After all, his
+information only reopened the old wounds.  More than two years had
+passed since my father's disappearance, and many things had happened in
+that time.  Not every one who entered the casemates of Callao came out
+alive.
+
+"But," said I aloud, "some one must know the truth.  A man can't be
+shut up without authority, even in Peru."
+
+"I wish I could help you," replied the major.  "As soon as I escape
+from Moquegua I will make inquiries."
+
+"Thank you; but I fear it will be a long time to wait," I answered
+gloomily.
+
+"Not at all!  La Hera will return in a week or two, and your Miller
+will be too busy running away to look after prisoners.  Imitate me, my
+boy, and make Hope your best friend."
+
+In trying to cheer me he forgot his own distress.  The light returned
+to his eyes, the smile to his face, and he seemed to have banished all
+memory of his recent despair.
+
+"Come," said he cheerfully, "put your doubts and fears aside for the
+present.  Our wounded want attention; we must not neglect them."
+
+I tried hard to act upon his advice, but all the time continued to
+wonder whether my father was alive or dead.  That was the one question
+that racked my brain, and to it I could give no answer.
+
+We had just made our patients comfortable, with the exception of one
+who was dying fast, when a shrill whistle sounded outside.
+
+"The surgeon!" I exclaimed, running to the entrance.  "Yes, there he is
+with the guide and two soldiers."
+
+"Two bandits!" said Santiago banteringly.  "Give the men their proper
+name."
+
+"Soldiers or bandits, they know how to fight.  Help me to uncoil the
+rope, will you?"
+
+"That's almost as bad as asking a man to make the noose he is to hang
+in.  You forget that on leaving here I shall go straight to prison."
+
+"I had forgotten, major, and sorry enough I am to remember it.  Still,
+as La Hera returns so soon, it will be only a temporary inconvenience,
+and I'm sure Colonel Miller will treat you well."
+
+Santiago laughed.
+
+"You will make me fancy soon that imprisonment is a privilege worth
+paying for," he exclaimed.
+
+"Hardly that," I replied; "but, as Barejo said, it keeps one out of
+mischief."
+
+We lowered the rope, the guide attached the surgeon's instruments, and
+at a signal we hauled up.  Then the rope went down again, the two
+soldiers climbed to the cave, and the doctor followed unsteadily.  It
+was evident that this novel method of visiting patients found no favour
+in his eyes; he was obviously nervous, and twice during the ascent I
+quite expected to see him go headlong.
+
+He was a citizen of Moquegua, very young, and utterly unsuited for his
+present errand.  So great was his agitation that when he had planted
+his feet firmly on the floor of the cave his hands still clung like
+grim death to the rope.
+
+"You're all right now," I said, leading him away from the mouth of the
+cave.  "Rather a queer way of getting into a house, isn't it?"
+
+"The saints preserve me!" he exclaimed, while his teeth chattered like
+castanets, "this is horrible.  A dozen times, coming up that rope, I
+wished I'd never been born.  But it's the last time I'll practise
+doctoring outside Moquegua."
+
+"You did very creditably, I assure you, doctor," observed Santiago,
+whose eyes gleamed with fun; "such grace, such agility, is given to
+few.  I should have thought your life had been spent in scaling
+mountains."
+
+The doctor looked from Santiago to me, hardly knowing what to make of
+such flattery.
+
+"Faith," exclaimed he at last, "I hope there is an easier way of
+getting down than of coming up."
+
+"There is," said the major, "and much more expeditious.  You have but
+to step outside the cave, and there you are.  Most people, however,
+prefer to go down by the rope."
+
+The doctor groaned.
+
+"I shall never do it," said he, "never!  I shall be shut up in this
+place for the rest of my life."
+
+"There will be one advantage in that," remarked Santiago pleasantly:
+"your patients will always be able to find you.  Now I fear we must
+tear ourselves from your side."
+
+"Do your best with these poor fellows," I said.  "The one in the corner
+yonder will not trouble you long; the others are getting on nicely.
+You will find this cavern quite a comfortable dwelling-place.  There is
+plenty of food, a spring of clear water, and enough fuel to keep a fire
+going for weeks."
+
+"Meanwhile," observed Santiago, "we will ask the good folks of Moquegua
+to make a nice long ladder, so that you can get down without trouble."
+
+It was really very laughable to watch the doctor's face as the major
+prepared to descend.
+
+"He will be killed," said he dolefully.  "It is a clear case of
+suicide.  Look, he has missed his foothold, and will be dashed to
+pieces!"
+
+"Nonsense," I said, with a laugh; "there is no danger if you don't
+think about it.  See, it is nothing but going down a flight of steps
+backwards."  But he covered his face with his hands and shuddered.
+
+When the major had reached the ground, I grasped the rope, saying,--
+
+"Farewell, doctor; I hope you will have a comfortable time.  And don't
+worry about coming down; you'll find it an easy matter enough."
+
+"Good-bye," answered he gloomily; "I shall never see you or any one
+else again.  I shall die up here for certain."
+
+The fellow was so genuinely frightened that I assured him we would
+devise some plan to rescue him; on which he brightened up considerably,
+and I began the descent.  I asked the guide where he had left the
+horses.
+
+"At the village, se�or," he replied, "on the other side of the
+mountain."
+
+In answer to a further question, he told us that the doctor would not
+cross the narrow track, and that they had, in consequence, been
+compelled to travel many miles out of their way.
+
+"I think he was right," exclaimed Santiago, when we reached the spot.
+"This is a far worse venture than climbing to the cavern by the rope."
+
+And indeed, seen in broad daylight, with every rock standing out
+pitilessly clear, and every chasm yawning wide, the place was enough to
+daunt the spirit of the bravest.
+
+Familiarity had rendered the guide indifferent to the danger, but I
+felt as nervous as when crossing the previous evening.  However, I
+could not make a parade of my anxiety, so I set foot on the narrow path
+with a jaunty air but quaking heart.  Santiago smiled too, but I fancy
+he was by no means sorry when we gained the farther side without
+accident.  Then we jested about the past danger, talking lightly and as
+if it were an affair of no moment.  Nevertheless, I was thankful the
+heat of the sun provided an excuse for the perspiration that streamed
+down my face.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER X.
+
+A STORMY INTERVIEW.
+
+On our march to the town, Santiago assumed a light-hearted carelessness
+that was far from his real feelings.  He laughed merrily, made joking
+remarks, and behaved generally as if the prospect of a spell of prison
+life was most agreeable.  This was, of course, mere outside show.  He
+was too proud to let his captors see his real distress; but his acting
+did not deceive me.
+
+We had reached the market-place, and I was wondering at the absence of
+the soldiers, when Jos� suddenly appeared, coming from the governor's
+house.  On seeing us, he approached, saying, "You have been a long
+time.  I began to think you had missed your way."
+
+"The guide was late in the first place, as the doctor would not take
+the nearest way, and we did not hurry.  But where are the troops?"
+
+"Off again!" said he, his eyes twinkling: "the colonel has gone for a
+little jaunt of ninety miles or so to intercept a Spanish column.
+Thank goodness, we have missed that!--How did you leave your men,
+major?"
+
+"One is dying, I fear," replied Santiago; "but the others will soon be
+all right, unless your doctor kills them!"
+
+"I was sorry to send him," said Jos�, "but I had no choice.  He was the
+only one in the place available.  He didn't offer his services, I can
+assure you."
+
+"I can well believe it," laughed the major.  "The poor fellow was half
+dead with fright when he reached us, and vows he will never risk the
+danger of getting down again."
+
+"We must have him tied to the rope, and lowered like a sack of
+potatoes.  Meanwhile, what is to be done with you?"
+
+"The only suggestion I can make is that you set me free!"
+
+"Perhaps I had better report to the governor," observed Jos�
+thoughtfully.  "He is Colonel Miller's representative.  I daresay he
+will parole you till the chief comes."
+
+"No, no!" cried the major hastily; "I've done with paroles!  From this
+moment I consider myself free to escape."
+
+"To _try_," corrected Jos�.  "Well, the effort will fill up your time,
+and keep you from being idle.  Of course," he added, "it will change
+the position a little.  We can still remain on friendly terms, only I
+must not forget to load my pistol.  And now let us interview the
+governor."
+
+A sentry stood at the outside gate, and several soldiers were in the
+courtyard; but passing through, we entered the house, and found
+ourselves in the governor's presence.  He was a military-looking man,
+though holding no rank in the army--a Spaniard who had recently come
+over from the enemy.  Two or three officers were in the room, and a
+young man sat at a table, writing.
+
+Jos� told his story briefly, concluding with a proposal that the
+prisoner should be left in his charge until Colonel Miller's return.
+
+"There is a more agreeable way still," observed the governor, with a
+bland smile.--"Major Mariano, I am not unaware either of your name or
+your services.  I know you for a dashing and brilliant officer, far and
+away superior to those nominally above you.  I am not without the power
+to make you an offer.  The Spanish cause is lost; in a few months your
+armies will be crushed; Peru will be independent.  Until that time you
+will languish miserably in prison.  Afterwards I cannot pretend to
+prophesy your fate; but I offer you an opportunity to escape from the
+wreck.  Join the Patriot army, and I pledge my word that San Martin
+shall give you the rank of colonel at once.  In a year it will be your
+own fault if you are not a general.  Come, what do you say?"
+
+Only a few hours previously I had seen an outburst of temper on
+Santiago's part; now I beheld another, which by comparison made the
+first appear mild.  His eyes literally blazed with anger; his face was
+red; he actually quivered with passion.  Twice he endeavoured to speak,
+and the words choked in his throat.  Jos� laid a hand restrainingly on
+his shoulder; he flung it off passionately.
+
+"Dog of a traitor!" cried he at last, "do you think the blood of
+Santiago Mariano is as base as yours?  Do you imagine I am a rat like
+you to leave a sinking ship?  What! lend my sword to a parcel of
+beggarly cutthroats and vagabonds?  I would rather eat out my heart in
+the blackest dungeon of Peru!"
+
+Once a flush of shame overspread the governor's face, but he recovered
+himself promptly, and listened with a bitter smile till the end.
+
+"You shall eat your words if not your heart," he exclaimed brutally;
+and turning to an officer, he added, "Rincona, bring in your men and
+the heaviest irons that can be found in the prison."
+
+Santiago smiled scornfully; but Jos�, pushing forward, said quietly,
+"You cannot do that, se�or.  This man is my prisoner, for whom I am
+responsible to Colonel Miller alone.  Until the return of the colonel,
+therefore, I cannot let him go from my keeping."
+
+For a moment Rincona hesitated, but at the governor's second command he
+left the room, while the other officers clustered round their chief.
+
+Jos� produced a pistol and cocked it, saying coolly, "The man who lays
+hands on my prisoner dies."
+
+Santiago turned to him with a pleasant smile.  "Thanks, my friend," he
+said, "but I cannot let you suffer on my behalf.  Besides, there is
+Crawford to be considered.  The consequences may be fatal to him, as he
+is sure to stand by you."
+
+"Don't hesitate on my account, Jos�," said I.  But the major's words
+had made an impression, and a shadow of annoyance flitted across my
+companion's brow.
+
+However, there was little time for thinking.  We heard the tramp, tramp
+of marching feet, and presently Rincona entered, followed by about a
+dozen soldiers.
+
+"The irons!" roared the governor, beside himself with passion; "where
+are the irons?"
+
+"I have sent for them, sir," replied Rincona.
+
+"You might have spared yourself the trouble," remarked Jos�; "they
+shall not be put on."
+
+"Yes, yes!" exclaimed Santiago; "what does it matter?  Better so than
+that you two should lose your lives."
+
+I looked at Jos�.  His lips were set like a vice, and I knew that no
+power on earth could move him now.  The situation was decidedly
+unpleasant, and unfortunately there seemed to be no way out.  True, he
+might kill the governor, but that would only still further complicate
+matters.
+
+The soldiers, as usual, stood with impassive faces; the affair was none
+of theirs, save so far as obeying orders went.  The officers were
+restless and uneasy, and one of them kept up a whispered conversation
+with the governor, who listened impatiently, and from time to time
+shook his head.
+
+At last two other men arrived, bearing a set of heavy irons, and once
+again Santiago turned appealingly, but without effect, to Jos�.
+
+One might have heard a pin drop when the governor, sheltering behind
+his officers, cried in a loud voice, "Put that man in irons!"
+
+"Stand still!" said Jos�, raising his pistol, and speaking in the
+Indian dialect.
+
+How the dispute would have ended I cannot tell, but at that moment a
+happy inspiration flashed into my mind.  The soldiers were all Indians,
+and judging by their appearance, Indians of the mountains.  Was it
+possible that any of them acknowledged the authority of the Silver Key?
+If so, we were safe.  It was a poor chance, but there seemed to be no
+other.
+
+Trembling with impatience, I opened my shirt at the neck, and drew
+forth the brigand chief's gift.  At first no one took any notice; but
+when I held the key to view, the Indians raised a shout of mingled joy
+and surprise.  Then I looked at Santiago and laughed, saying, "We are
+safe!"
+
+The Indians jabbered away in their own language, talking with one
+another, and pointing to the emblem of authority which hung from my
+neck.  The governor stood like a man in a dream; the officers gazed
+alternately at me and the native soldiers, as if doubting the evidence
+of their senses.
+
+"How many of you are followers of the Silver Key, and of Raymon
+Sorillo?" I asked.
+
+"All, all, master!" they cried.
+
+"And those outside?"
+
+"All, all!" they again shouted.
+
+"I can trust you to help me?"
+
+"To the death, master!" they cried with one voice.
+
+At that I turned to the governor, saying with a smile, "The position is
+changed, se�or.  I have but to raise my hand, and you will feel the
+weight of your own irons.  But there is no need to quarrel.  Colonel
+Miller will be here in a few days, and he shall decide between us.
+Meanwhile we will guard the prisoner."
+
+The governor nearly choked with anger, and threatened violently that as
+soon as the colonel returned he would have us all shot.  However, as it
+was evident that the soldiers would obey my orders, he raised no
+further objection to our taking Santiago away.
+
+"By St. Philip," exclaimed the major, "the room was hot!  Are you a
+magician, Crawford?"
+
+"Upon my word I begin to think so.  At any rate, I possess a magical
+key."
+
+"Which has saved our lives," observed Jos� grimly.
+
+"And I suspect," laughed Santiago, "that once upon a time it unlocked
+the door of a prison cell!  But won't those natives suffer for this?"
+
+"I don't think so.  They are too strong, and their chief has more power
+in Peru than the viceroy and San Martin combined."
+
+"You know him, then?"
+
+"Yes, and so does Jos�.  He has done me good service, for which I am
+grateful, though I could never like the man.  But here we are at the
+house.  The good folk will wonder at our bringing an uninvited guest."
+
+Fortunately a room had been set apart for us, so we could talk at our
+ease.  I was burning to tell Jos� about my father, but first of all we
+had to come to an understanding with Santiago.  This time he made no
+demur at giving his parole.  "In fact," said he gaily, "you have forced
+my hand, and I have no choice."
+
+"So much the better," remarked Jos�; "we may as well be comfortable
+together till the colonel arrives."
+
+"And after that we may be hanged comfortably together!" laughed the
+major.  "How do you like the prospect?"
+
+"I can trust Miller.  He is an honourable man, and will do what is
+right.  It is Crawford who will suffer for inciting the troops to
+mutiny."
+
+"Jos�," said I presently, "I haven't told you that Major Mariano is an
+old friend of mine."
+
+"And at one time his jailer," interrupted Santiago.  "That ought to
+make him feel grateful."
+
+"Oh," exclaimed Jos�, "you are the captain Jack has often talked about!
+Well, I'm glad we have been able to do a little for you."
+
+"This morning while we were waiting for your precious doctor," I
+continued, "he told me a very startling piece of news."
+
+"Yes?" said Jos�.
+
+"About my father."
+
+Jos� sprang to his feet, demanding fiercely, "What do you know of Se�or
+Crawford, major?  Don Eduardo came to his end by foul means: he was not
+slain by the government, but by some one who hoped to profit by his
+death."
+
+"According to the major's information, he was not slain at all," I
+said, and proceeded to relate the story.
+
+Jos� listened attentively to every word, and then asked Santiago
+innumerable questions.  Like myself, he displayed great excitement, but
+I judged from his expression that he entertained little hope of my
+father being still alive.
+
+"The truth is," said he, "Don Eduardo had made numerous powerful
+enemies both in public and private life; and as we all know, any stick
+is good enough to beat a dog with.  Besides, he owned vast estates,
+and--"
+
+"Go on!" laughed Santiago as Jos� hesitated; "the king's party put him
+to death in order to seize them!"
+
+"No, no," said Jos� hotly; "I don't tar all Spaniards with the same
+brush.  Still, they aren't all saints either, and I say some of them
+killed him under cloak of the government.  And some day," he added, "I
+will prove it.  As to his being alive, I think there is small chance of
+it.--And Jack, my boy, I would not mention the matter to your mother."
+
+"But," said I, clinging to my shred of hope, "he was not killed in the
+mountains, and we have heard nothing since."
+
+Jos� let me talk, and listened kindly to my arguments, but I noticed
+that none of them made any impression.  At the best, he said, my father
+had been thrown into prison seriously hurt, and it was not likely that
+he had survived the confinement.
+
+"Have you ever seen the casemates at Callao, major?" he asked.
+
+"Yes," said Santiago, "and very unhealthy places they are.  But there
+are more prisons than those in Peru."
+
+It would be wearisome to repeat our conversation, for, after all, we
+were arguing in the dark, having only the major's imperfect story to go
+by.  Besides, as Jos� said, many events had happened during the last
+two years, and my father was by no means the only noted man in Peru to
+disappear.  So our talk travelled in a circle, leaving off at the
+starting-point, and for sole effect it extinguished the gleam of hope
+which the major's story had kindled.
+
+In the evening, at Jos�'s suggestion, I went into the streets to pick
+up any information concerning the governor's doings.  Everything seemed
+quiet; the sentries were at their posts as usual, while the soldiers
+off duty wandered about the town.
+
+They greeted me respectfully, raising their hands in salute and
+standing at attention, as if I had been an officer of high degree.
+Recognizing a sergeant who had been in the governor's room, I stopped
+to ask a few questions.  Greatly to my relief, I learned that, with the
+exception of a few Spanish officers, the troops in the town were all
+Indians from the mountains.
+
+As the man seemed smart and intelligent, I told him how matters stood,
+and that we depended entirely upon him and his comrades until the
+coming of the English colonel.
+
+"You can trust us, master," he replied, and indeed his talk made it
+quite clear that the friend of Raymon Sorillo and the holder of the
+Silver Key might rely on the Indians in Moquegua even against Miller
+himself.
+
+Jos�, I think, felt rather relieved on hearing my news; while Santiago
+laughed heartily, prophesying that, if the Spaniards were defeated, I
+should in a few years be king, or at least president, of Peru.
+
+"I had no idea," said he, "that you were so important a person.  No
+wonder Barejo wished to keep you shut up!"
+
+That night we took it in turns to watch; but the governor attempted
+nothing against us, and the next day we walked openly in the street
+without molestation.
+
+Colonel Miller had vanished into space, and for nearly a week we heard
+nothing of him; then one morning an Indian scout rode wearily into the
+town with the news that the Englishman was close at hand.  Immediately
+the people rushed out in hundreds to line the street, and to cheer the
+returning warriors.
+
+Jos� stayed indoors with the major, but sent me out to get an early
+word with our leader.  Bright, alert, and cheery as ever, he rode at
+the head of his troops, smiling and bowing to the inhabitants as they
+greeted him with rousing cheers.  Then came the soldiers--the cavalry
+on dead-tired horses, the infantry on jaded mules--with a number of
+prisoners in the midst.
+
+The animals were tired enough; but the men!  I can hardly describe
+their condition.  Their faces were haggard, their eyes heavy and
+bloodshot; some were nearly asleep, others had scarcely strength to sit
+upright.  Very little grass had grown under their feet.  As soon as
+they were dismissed, the citizens pounced on them, taking them into the
+houses, where food and drink were provided in abundance.
+
+The governor had come out to meet the colonel, whom I expected to see
+return with him; but at the last moment he turned aside, and with a
+laughing exclamation went straight to his own quarters, whither I
+followed him.
+
+"Hullo, Crawford!" cried he.  "So you didn't get La Hera?"
+
+"No, sir; but we captured a major, and I wish to speak to you about
+him."
+
+"Won't it wait?" he asked, with a comical expression.
+
+"I am afraid not, sir.  The truth is, we've had a quarrel with the
+governor, and--"
+
+"You want to get in your version first!  A very good plan.  Well, fire
+away, but don't make it long; I've a lot of things on hand."
+
+By this time we had entered his room, and going straight to the heart
+of the affair, I told my story in the fewest possible words.  The
+colonel listened with rather a grave face, and when I had finished he
+said, "It's an awkward mess, especially just now.  It's absolutely
+necessary to keep friends with the governor, and I don't like this
+tampering with the troops.  But, of course, I won't have the prisoner
+put in irons or treated differently from the rest.  Bring him here now,
+and I'll settle the matter at once."
+
+"Yes, sir," said I, thankful to get off so lightly.
+
+The colonel had already begun some fresh work when I returned with Jos�
+and the major, but he rose from his seat and saluted the Spaniard
+courteously.
+
+"I understand it is useless to ask for your parole, major," he said.
+"Your mind is quite made up on the point?"
+
+"Yes, sir," answered Santiago, smiling in his easy, graceful way.  "An
+opportunity to escape may not arise but if it does, I shall certainly
+seize it."
+
+"Quite right!" exclaimed the colonel; "but I fear you will be
+disappointed.  However, though guarding you rigidly, we shall put you
+to as little inconvenience as possible.  You will find half a dozen
+companions in misfortune in the prison.  Most of the captured rank and
+file have joined the Patriots."
+
+The major's lip curled scornfully, but he only said, "I am obliged to
+you, colonel, for your kindness.  Some day perhaps I may be able to
+return it."
+
+"Not in the same way, I hope," laughed Colonel Miller.  "I have had a
+taste of Spanish prison life already, major.  But when the war is over
+I trust we may meet again."
+
+Then he sent for an officer and a file of soldiers, and Santiago turned
+to bid us a cheery farewell.
+
+"Good-bye," said he brightly; "I have had a pleasant time with you.--If
+I do succeed in escaping, Crawford, I will inquire further into your
+father's story.--Ah, here is my escort!" and with a salute to the
+colonel and a nod to us, he took his place in front of the men, while
+the officer received his chief's instructions.
+
+"He's a plucky fellow.  I should have liked to set him free," I said,
+as we strolled back to our quarters.
+
+"To do more mischief!" growled Jos�.  "I'm sorry for him, in a way, but
+it's better for us that he should be under lock and key.  And that
+reminds me!  How did Colonel Miller take the Silver Key business?"
+
+"Very badly; called it tampering with the troops."
+
+"So it was, but it saved our lives, all the same.  I shall be rather
+pleased when we leave this district; the governor won't regard either
+of us too favourably."
+
+"He can't hurt us now the colonel is here."
+
+"No," replied Jos�, with a curious smile "but we might meet with a
+nasty accident.  Perhaps you remember my remark, made two years ago,
+that accidents are common in Peru.  It's as true now as then."
+
+As it chanced, Jos� was shortly to have his wish; for although we did
+not know it then, the colonel had decided to abandon Moquegua.  Many of
+the troops were down with the ague, the place was a difficult one to
+defend, unless against a weak attack, and La Hera was already on the
+march with a force far superior to ours.  This, however, we did not
+learn till two days later.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XI.
+
+A NARROW ESCAPE.
+
+"It is a great honour," exclaimed Jos�, "and you should feel proud."
+
+I had just returned from an interview with the colonel, who had asked
+me to undertake for a short time the duties of his private secretary.
+It seemed a simple task then, but afterwards I regarded it differently.
+For the next three weeks I was attached to the colonel, who took me
+with him everywhere.  A secretary is generally supposed to write, but
+my work consisted in riding.  Day after day, from morning till night,
+we were on horseback, now travelling over sandy deserts to the
+seashore, again penetrating into the heart of the mountains--hungry,
+thirsty, and tired, and always in danger of falling into the hands of
+the enemy.
+
+As a measure of precaution our little force retired to Tacna, where,
+much to my satisfaction, the colonel received from Lima news of an
+armistice.  This, of course, extended to all parts of the country; but
+I was mistaken in thinking it would increase my leisure, as my time was
+still kept fully occupied.
+
+In one way this was a good thing, as it kept me from brooding over
+Santiago's story, though even at the busiest times the thought of my
+father's fate would creep into my mind.  I saw nothing of Jos�, who had
+been left behind with some Indians to hold a mountain pass, but
+occasionally I paid a brief visit to the Spanish prisoners for a chat
+with the friendly major.
+
+We had been at Tacna a month, when one evening Colonel Miller said
+abruptly: "Crawford, the armistice is at an end, and we must retreat.
+Tell Videla to send the stores and the sick to Arica the first thing in
+the morning; then carry this order to Ilo.  You will find three small
+brigs there; they are to sail at once for Arica.  Take Castro the guide
+with you, and rejoin me on the march to Arica."
+
+"Very good, sir," I replied, though my words belied my feelings.
+However, I went out, gave Videla the colonel's message, and hunted up
+the guide.
+
+Castro was an educated Indian, trained by one of the missionaries, and
+a very decent fellow.  I found him sound asleep; but he rose at once,
+looked to see if his bag of coca was full, loaded his pistols, and
+saddled his horse.
+
+"A pleasant night for a ride, lieutenant,"--the colonel had given me
+that rank,--"and every yard will take us further from the Spaniards.  I
+hear that La Hera is getting ready to swoop."
+
+"He will find his pigeon a hawk if he comes too close," I answered,
+laughing.  "Bring your horse, and wait for me at the hospital."
+
+The night was still young, and many people, civilians and military,
+were in the street, talking in excited whispers.  It was plain that
+they had heard of La Hera's approach, and were discussing what they
+knew of the colonel's plans.
+
+Soon, however, the town was left behind, and we had fairly started on
+our journey.  There was no danger in it, except that of getting lost,
+which, with Castro for a guide, was not likely to happen.  He knew the
+district as well as, perhaps better than, I knew the streets of Lima.
+
+We jogged along quietly till midnight, not wishing to tire the animals,
+and then stopped near the edge of a sandy desert for an hour's rest.
+By this time I had begun to hate the very sight of sand; it seemed to
+me more dreary and pitiless than the stoniest of barren ground.  Castro
+did not mind in the least, but lay on his back looking at the starry
+sky and placidly chewing his coca.
+
+"Come, lieutenant," said he briskly at the end of an hour, "it is time
+to mount;" and we were soon plodding on as patiently as before.
+
+It was nine o'clock when we finally arrived at Ilo.  It may have been
+owing to my own tired state, but I thought I had never seen such a
+miserable and desolate spot in all my life.  The houses were wretched
+mud-built hovels, and the few people in the place looked woebegone
+beyond belief.
+
+The three brigs were in keeping with the village, being old and
+worm-eaten, and the craziest craft imaginable.  I would not have sailed
+one across a pond.  However, I sought out the commander of this ragged
+squadron, and gave him the colonel's order.
+
+On reading it his face brightened, and he declared his intention of
+running out to sea that very afternoon.
+
+"He doesn't look much of a hero," observed Castro; "but," with an
+expressive glance at the three floating coffins, "I imagine there are
+few braver men in Peru."
+
+"One need not be brave to seize any chance of getting away from this
+depressing place," said I.  "I believe I could easily take the risk of
+being drowned if there were no other way of escape."
+
+"You will have the risk, lieutenant, if we are to go afloat in these
+brigs; but my opinion is that the bottoms will drop out of them before
+they reach Arica."
+
+"In that case we must either beat La Hera or be annihilated."
+
+"That's what it looks like," replied Castro coolly.
+
+We stabled our horses in a tumble-down shed, fed and watered them, and,
+as it was impossible to leave till they were rested, lay down to snatch
+a brief sleep on the ground.  We were invited to use the floor of a
+hovel for a couch, but after glancing at it, declined with great
+politeness and many sonorous words of thanks.
+
+When we awoke the brigs had disappeared, and a roaring wind was
+sweeping down from the north.
+
+"They'll never make headway against that," remarked Castro.  "We can
+return to the colonel and tell him his brigs are at the bottom of the
+sea.  There will be a pretty tune played presently, and La Hera will
+provide the music."
+
+To a sailor, perhaps, the danger would not have seemed formidable; but
+standing on that desolate beach, listening to the hurricane rush of the
+wind, I could not but think Castro was right.  And if indeed he had
+prophesied truly, then was our little force in sad straits.  Burdened
+with sick, hampered by fleeing patriots, encumbered by prisoners, with
+half his troops weakened as usual by ague, the English colonel could
+neither fight nor flee.  What, then, could he do?  By this time every
+one knew him too well to dream he would surrender.
+
+"Castro," said I, "we carry bad news, and bad news flies apace.  Let us
+keep up the reputation of the old proverb.  Half an hour or so may make
+all the difference in the world."
+
+He made a grimace as if to say that a few minutes more or less would
+matter little; but he saddled his horse promptly, nevertheless, and was
+ready to start as soon as I.
+
+"I reckon," he said, "that we may strike the road from Tacna to Arica
+by midnight to-morrow, unless our animals founder by the way.  Can you
+trust your horse?"
+
+"The colonel selected him."
+
+"That ought to be sufficient warrant.  The chief knows a horse, though
+he will ride in the absurd English style."
+
+There were few men in the country who would have cared to cut
+themselves adrift as Castro did on this ride of ours to intercept the
+marching Patriots.  His only guides were those he could interpret from
+nature.  While daylight lasted, he steered by the sun; at night, by the
+stars and the faint wind that fanned our faces.
+
+For twenty-four hours, during which time we rested, of course, both for
+our own sakes and for the sakes of our animals, not one human being
+crossed our path, or even came within sight of us.  And during that
+time, also, we saw neither bird nor beast, nor any manner of living
+thing, save only ourselves and our animals.
+
+And then, quite unexpectedly to me, we came upon an oasis in the dreary
+desert--a little hamlet with mud-walled hovels, but better than those
+at Ilo, and having patches of cultivated ground enclosed.  The natives
+had reclaimed this piece of land by means of the waters of a
+moderate-sized stream, and lived in almost as great isolation as if
+they had been on Robinson Crusoe's island.
+
+They were neither Patriots nor Royalists, and I doubt much whether they
+knew of the struggle going forward; but they had kind hearts, and gave
+us a warm welcome, pressing upon us gifts of fruits and vegetables to
+the limits of their scanty stock.  They found ample forage, too, for
+the weary animals, and we stayed there a matter of three hours to rest
+Castro's horse, which had shown symptoms of breaking down.
+
+I seized this opportunity to snatch an hour's sleep; but my guide was
+kept chattering by the natives, who listened with amazement to his
+news.  They knew no Spanish, and could not understand the native patois
+I spoke; neither could I understand a word of what they said.  As for
+Castro, I suppose no man in South America had the gift of so many
+Indian dialects.
+
+"After all, lieutenant," exclaimed he, as we took leave of this simple
+community, "I doubt if these people have not the best of life.  They
+eat, drink, and are at peace, caring no more for a president than for a
+king."
+
+"And doing nothing for either," I replied, laughing.  "How does the
+horse seem now?"
+
+"I think he will do this journey.  But if I'm to ride with the colonel,
+he will have to provide me with another."
+
+Throughout the evening we rode silently side by side, while all around
+us was the awful stillness of a dead world.  The sun went down, and
+presently the stars gleamed above us, throwing a ghostly light over the
+sea of sand.
+
+Midnight found us still riding, and another hour passed before Castro
+drew rein at the broken track leading from Tacna to Arica.  Throwing
+the reins over his horse's neck, and jumping down, he examined the
+ground carefully, reading it as skilfully as the student reads a
+printed book.
+
+To and fro he went, casting off here and there like a hunting-dog, till
+he was satisfied.  Then he returned to me, saying, "Carts have gone by
+hours since, and the infantry quite recently, but I see no signs of
+cavalry."
+
+"They would remain till the last minute, so as to deceive La Hera."
+
+"That is so; but the question is, has the colonel stayed with them?  It
+is to him we want to give our information."
+
+"The infantry can tell us."
+
+"We shall waste time if he is in the rear, and time is precious."
+
+"Let us separate.  You go forward; I will ride toward Tacna."
+
+"It is dangerous, se�or."
+
+"You forget that I have been over this route."
+
+"Well, as you will.  If the colonel has not passed, I shall return.
+Keep to the track; do not wander from it either to right or to left."
+
+"All right, Castro; I will take care."
+
+He vaulted to the saddle, wished me a safe journey, and rode off, while
+I turned my horse's head in the opposite direction.  Fortunately the
+night was clear, while the dawn was not far off, so that I had a great
+advantage in steering my way.  True, I rode at no great pace, being
+both afraid and unwilling to spur my jaded beast.  Now and again I even
+dismounted and walked at his head to give him some relief.
+
+It was perhaps about three o'clock in the morning.  A heavy fog had
+arisen, and I was riding with the greatest care, when suddenly I found
+a musket pointed straight at me, and heard the demand, "Halt, or I
+fire!"
+
+The man spoke in Spanish, but his accent showed him to be an Indian,
+and I hoped he was one of Miller's cavalry detachment.  Whistling
+softly, he was at once joined by a second and a third man, the last of
+whom sharply ordered me to dismount.
+
+At the sound of his voice I laughed aloud, saying, "You post your men
+well, Jos�, but they have not made a great capture this time.  Is the
+colonel here?"
+
+"We are all here," said Jos�, giving my hand a grip; "but I thought you
+had gone to Arica.  Is anything wrong?"
+
+"A good deal," I answered, speaking in English, so that the Indians
+might not understand.  "I must see Colonel Miller at once."
+
+"Jump down, then.  Leave your horse here, and I will take you to him.
+Mind where you step; the men are all tucked in and sound asleep."
+
+But for the fog, I could by this time have seen my way clearly; as it
+was, I could only just distinguish the ponchos enveloping the men's
+heads.  When the fog lifted, the light showed a more curious spectacle
+than most of you have perhaps ever seen.  It was the custom, whenever
+we halted in a sandy desert, for each man to scoop out for himself a
+shallow grave.  In this he lay, scraping the loose sand over his body
+for bed-clothes, and leaving his head, wrapped in his poncho, above
+ground.  It was, indeed, a most comfortable and delicious bed, as in
+those days, or rather nights, I often proved.
+
+The colonel lay buried alive, as it were, like his men; but he slept
+lightly, and pushing off his sandy bed-clothes at our approach, he
+struggled to his feet.
+
+[Illustration: Pushing off his sandy bed-clothes at our approach, he
+struggled to his feet.]
+
+"Who is it?" he asked.  "Crawford, where is your guide?"
+
+"Gone another way to look for you, colonel."
+
+"Have the brigs left Ilo?"
+
+"Yes; but both Castro and I doubt if they will reach Arica.  They are
+altogether crazy, and as soon as they left the harbour a strong gale
+from the north, which will drive them out of their course, sprang up."
+
+"You are rather a Job's comforter," laughed the colonel.  "I daresay
+they will arrive all right.  Still," he continued, speaking more to
+himself, "everything depends upon their safe arrival--everything!  Jump
+in, Crawford, and have a nap; I may want you presently."
+
+He went away with Jos�, while I got into his bed, pulled the sand over
+me, and was fast asleep before the two men had gone a dozen yards.
+
+For two whole hours I lay like a log; then a soldier pulled the poncho
+from my head, saying that the colonel waited for me at breakfast.  I
+rose quickly, made my toilet--not an elaborate proceeding, you may be
+sure--and waited on the colonel.
+
+"Sit down," said he, laughing; "it's early in the day for banqueting,
+but we must feast when we can.  I hope you are not blessed with too
+good an appetite?"
+
+"I don't think I should feel greatly tempted to indulge much at
+present," I replied, with a grimace at the dried meat I was cutting.
+"Indigestion would only too surely follow."
+
+"Then," said he, and his eyes twinkled with merriment, "we will eat
+sparingly.  I am going straight to Arica, and you will ride with me."
+
+"I am afraid I shall have to get you to find me a fresh horse, as my
+own has broken down, colonel."
+
+Turning to one of the soldiers near, he said, "Ask Major Videla to send
+me a good horse at once.--Take your time, Crawford; I am awaiting a
+messenger from Tacna."
+
+Nearly an hour passed before he was ready, during which time I saddled
+my fresh mount, transferred my holsters, and had a chat with Jos�.  He
+told me they had been compelled to release their prisoners, Santiago
+among them.
+
+"I had no idea you were so hard pressed," I said.
+
+"If La Hera doesn't blunder," answered Jos�, "he can sweep us all into
+his net.  The only thing that saves us now is Miller's skill and
+reputation.  Every one believes he is going to show fight somewhere
+between this and the coast."
+
+Presently the colonel came along, accompanied by Major Videla, to whom
+he gave final directions; and then, bidding me follow, rode from the
+camp.  Four miles out we came upon Castro, walking, and leading his
+horse, which had fallen dead lame.
+
+"Have you been into Arica?" asked Miller.
+
+"No, colonel; but I have learned some news.  There are four fine
+vessels in the roadstead; if you could get them, the troops would be
+safe."
+
+"Ah!" cried the colonel sharply; and telling Castro to wait for the
+cavalry, he rode off at a great pace towards Arica.  At four o'clock we
+staggered into the town, and were instantly met by the governor with a
+sorrowful tale.  He had secured the use of three vessels, but the
+commander of the fourth absolutely refused to be either coaxed or
+threatened into lending his assistance.
+
+There was not a moment to be lost, and Colonel Miller, with no other
+attendant than myself, ran down to the beach.  There we got on a balsa,
+or raft, which carried us to a launch, whose crew at once took us
+alongside a fine North American schooner.
+
+Clambering on deck, we found the master, to whom the colonel applied
+for the loan of his vessel.  The sour old sea-dog turned a deaf ear.
+The colonel offered a sum of money that would have bought the schooner
+outright at market value; he would have none of it.
+
+Now, it chanced that some of the crew were Englishmen who had served
+under Miller in the Chilian War; and though I did not know that, I
+could plainly see how interested they were in the discussion.  The
+colonel saw it too, and in a few simple but terse and vigorous words he
+laid the case before them.
+
+This produced a marked effect.  The men growled their approbation, and
+one sturdy fellow exclaimed stoutly, "I'm not going to see a countryman
+of mine hard pushed without helping him.  What's your sentiments,
+mates?"
+
+"The same!" cried they.--"We'll stand by you, colonel.  The Spaniards
+shan't cut you off if we can help it."
+
+"Thanks, men," replied Colonel Miller, "and I'll treat you fairly.
+Neither your master nor you shall have cause to complain."
+
+The skipper, however, was not to be appeased.  He threw up his command
+and went ashore with us, leaving the mate to navigate the vessel.  It
+was rather a high-handed proceeding, perhaps, on the colonel's part,
+but he was saving his troops from an unavailing fight against
+overwhelming odds.
+
+All that night we worked like slaves.  The launches could not come
+close inshore, so that every one and everything had to be transported
+to them on balsas.  The colonel did not spare himself, and my position
+procured me the honour of standing beside him knee-deep in surf while
+he superintended the embarkation.
+
+Most of the sick were got on board one or other of the four vessels,
+but the worst cases had to remain in hospital.  Then nearly a hundred
+people of the town, who had recently joined the Patriot cause,
+clamoured for protection, which was, of course, afforded.
+
+In the morning the colonel insisted I should take a rest, but the work
+continued all day, while from time to time scouts came in with the news
+that La Hera was advancing at full speed.  At length it was all done;
+only the colonel and I remained to go on board, and we had just reached
+the launch, when, with a yell and thunder of hoofs, the Royalist
+cavalry galloped down to the beach.
+
+"Just too late to take their passage," laughed Miller.  "What a pity!"
+
+"There's our late prisoner," I cried, standing up in the launch.  "Look
+at the rascal; he is shaking his sword at us, and laughing."
+
+"He's a fine fellow," remarked the colonel.  "I don't grudge him his
+liberty."
+
+Taking off my cap, I waved it vigorously; to which Santiago replied
+with a salute; and then, as pursuit was impossible, he led his men back
+into the town.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XII.
+
+A STERN PURSUIT.
+
+As soon as our vessels left the shelter of the bay, they felt the full
+force of the gale; and but for skilful handling on the part of their
+crews, would most likely have come to grief.  Even as it was, the more
+timid of the passengers began to think they would have done better in
+trusting to the mercy of the victorious Spaniards.
+
+"It is lucky for us, lieutenant," exclaimed Castro, "that the brigs did
+not reach Arica."
+
+"I hope they are safe," I said doubtfully.
+
+"Safe enough by this time," he replied--"at the bottom of the ocean!"
+
+Whether or not he was right in his surmise I cannot say, but from that
+day to this I never again heard mention of the unfortunate vessels.
+
+After being at sea about a week, on reduced rations both of food and of
+water, we ran one night into the roadstead of Pisco, landed, and before
+daylight had made ourselves masters of the town, the Royalists
+hurriedly retreating.
+
+On board the schooner I had obtained a much-needed rest, but directly
+my feet touched the shore I was set to work again.
+
+There never was such a man for prompt and instant action as Colonel
+Miller.  As Jos� said more than once, he was always packing twenty-four
+hours' work into twelve, and no one within had ever had a chance to
+shirk his share.
+
+"We must follow up the enemy--follow them up, and not give them a
+moment's rest!" said he, almost before the nose of our boat had touched
+the shore.
+
+First, however, it was necessary to obtain animals, and almost before
+day broke a dozen parties were dispatched to scour the surrounding
+district for horses.  The Royalists, however, had been beforehand, and
+it took three days to procure the needful supplies.
+
+Fortunately a woman arrived from Lima with a drove of fifty mules,
+which our leader instantly pressed into the service, in spite of their
+lawful owner's protestations.  She was a fine, handsome, and remarkable
+woman, who traded on her own account like a man, and she made a sturdy
+fight for her property.  Directly the mules were seized she bounced
+into the colonel's room, her eyes ablaze.
+
+"Good-morning, madam," said he courteously.
+
+"It's a bad morning for me," she replied.  "Do you know that your men
+have stolen my mules?"
+
+"Not stolen, madam; only borrowed, by my orders, for the good of the
+Patriot cause."
+
+"I defy you to keep them!" she cried.  "See," and waving & paper, added
+triumphantly, "that will make you less high and mighty, Se�or
+Englishman!"
+
+The paper was a passport and protection signed by San Martin himself;
+but it produced no effect on the stubborn colonel.
+
+"I am sorry, madam," he exclaimed, still courteously, "but my men need
+the mules.  They shall be paid for, handsomely, but I must have them."
+
+The woman gasped with astonishment, and pushing the paper close to the
+colonel's face, cried, "Are you blind?  Can't you see General San
+Martin's name?  Don't you know that he can have you shot to-day if he
+pleases?"
+
+"Not _to-day_, madam.  The swiftest messenger could not get here from
+Lima to-day; and thanks to your mules, which are really very fine
+animals, we shall begin to chase the Royalists at dawn."
+
+Luckily she could not see my face as she broke into a torrent of abuse.
+She had a fine command of the Spanish language, which she used for his
+benefit, besides throwing in a number of odd phrases picked up from
+English sailors.  And all the while the colonel beamed upon her
+genially, as if she were paying him the highest compliments.  At length
+she announced, in high-pitched tones, that where her mules went there
+would she go also; she would not trust them to such a band of thieving
+scoundrels.
+
+"I am delighted, madam," said the colonel, bowing low; "your society
+will in some degree atone for the hardships of our journey."
+
+Neither of us thought she would really carry out her threat; but early
+next morning she appeared mounted on one of her own mules, and attached
+herself to me.
+
+"Madam," said I gravely, trying to imitate the colonel, "this is a
+great pleasure for us; but even at the risk of losing your valued
+company, I must once more point out to you the real nature of this
+journey.  We shall be half starved, besides suffering torments from
+thirst; we shall be worn out by forced marches, and some of us, no
+doubt, will fall victims to the Spanish bullets."
+
+"I won't leave my mules," was her only reply.
+
+"But why not sell them to the colonel? he will give you a fair price."
+
+"And what about my profit?" she cried.  "Do you know why I came to
+Pisco?--to buy brandy at eight dollars a jar, which just now I could
+sell in Lima at eighty!  What do you think of that, young man?  Why, I
+should have cleared a handsome fortune by this trip!"
+
+"It is very sad, madam; but soldiers, you know--"
+
+"Soldiers?  Bah!  Look at them riding on my mules!  _My_ mules, mark
+you!  And to think that each of the honest beasts might be carrying
+four jars of brandy at eight dollars a jar! It's a wicked waste of
+mule-flesh!  Eight from eighty leaves seventy-two; take twelve for
+expenses, there's still sixty, and four sixties are two hundred and
+forty--all clear profit from!  A dozen of your vagabonds would be dear
+at the price!  Look at that rascally fellow cutting my mule with a
+whip!  I will most certainly have your colonel shot!"
+
+"I think not, madam; you have too tender a heart."
+
+"Yes," said she complacently, "that is the truth.  I am not stern
+enough.  But fancy"--and here she went all over her calculations again,
+winding up with the assertion that we were a set of common thieves and
+rogues.
+
+By degrees, however, her manner changed: the ill-humour wore off, and
+she became quite a Patriot, saying she would willingly lose her mules
+if the Royalists were hunted down.
+
+However, about nine o'clock in the morning I left the good lady to pour
+her grievances into more sympathetic ears, being ordered to push on
+with a small detachment of cavalry, guided by Castro.  Jos� was lucky
+enough to stay with the main body.  Captain Plaza was in command of our
+party, and he rode with the guide and me.  Our course to Ica, the first
+village on our route, lay over a burning desert of very loose sand,
+dotted at great intervals by clumps of stunted palms.  It was a
+horrible ride, and when we reached Ica, about four in the afternoon,
+neither men nor animals could go a step further.
+
+The people received us kindly, provided food and drink, and fresh
+horses in place of our wearied animals.  Then we slept for an hour,
+and, thus refreshed, resumed the pursuit.  I have often wondered since
+how any of us survived the hardships of the next few days.
+
+Now and again we obtained an hour's rest, but our leader halted only
+when our animals showed signs of exhaustion.  The Spaniards must have
+suffered as much as, if not more than, ourselves, as occasionally we
+came upon a dead horse or a dead man, killed by sheer fatigue.
+
+On the third night after leaving lea we had ample proof of their
+desperate straits.  We had left the sandy deserts behind, and were
+toiling along painfully, sustained only by Castro's assurance that he
+knew of a capital camping-ground.
+
+"A fine wooded place," said he, "with grass for the horses, and a clear
+stream of water.  You will be tempted to stay there all night, captain."
+
+"Three hours," replied Plaza, "not a moment more.  We must be close on
+their heels now, and I don't mean Santalla to escape if I can help it."
+
+Santalla was a Royalist colonel of whose cruelty I had heard many
+times.  He was a gigantic fellow, of enormous strength; but, according
+to all accounts, a pitiful coward in spite of his boasting.  Indeed,
+any leader of average bravery would have turned and struck a blow at
+the handful of tired riders which now pursued him.
+
+"Here we are!" exclaimed Castro presently, and I saw with satisfaction
+the trees on our left hand to which he pointed.  Every bone in my body
+was racked with pain, my lips were parched, my eyes ached, and for the
+last hour I had scarcely been able to keep my seat.
+
+Halting his men, Plaza sent me on with the guide to investigate.
+Leaving our horses, we moved forward swiftly but quietly; there was
+just the possibility of a trap.  The place was almost like an enclosure
+on a large hacienda, but the fence was composed of trees, and we could
+hear the plashing waters of a stream.
+
+Inside the ring was an open space, and there, to our astonishment, we
+beheld some twenty men lying on the grass in all manner of attitudes.
+Not one made the slightest movement, and at first I thought they must
+be dead.
+
+"Don't be too sure," whispered Castro, and stooping down he glided
+noiselessly to the nearest man, while I waited with breathless
+eagerness.
+
+"Poor beggars!" said he pityingly; "we must have pushed them hard.  I
+don't believe they would waken if a cannon were fired at them!"
+
+This was an exaggeration, but indeed they slept so soundly that our
+men, surrounding them, took away most of their weapons before they
+understood what was going on.  Binding their arms, we pushed and
+dragged them close together, and then the captain placed his men round
+them in a circle.  Sentries were stationed at various places on the
+outer ring, and, much to my disgust, I was told off to visit them
+during the first hour.
+
+"Keep a sharp lookout," said the captain, "and go round regularly.
+They are likely to fall asleep if you don't,"--which I did not think at
+all surprising.  However, I had a good drink of water, and dipped my
+head in the stream, which freshened me somewhat.  Then I began what
+has, perhaps, been the very longest hour in my life.  Fortunately I had
+to walk, and I tried hard to keep my eyes open all the time.  As to the
+captain's "sharp look-out," I concluded he must have been joking.
+
+The hour came to an end at last, and I was free to sleep.  I just lay
+down on the ground, drew my poncho over me, and was sound asleep.  I
+would not have undertaken another hour's duty just then for all the
+gold ever mined.
+
+The capture of the small Spanish detachment was a benefit to us in one
+way: it prevented Plaza from moving so early, and gave us all an extra
+hour's sleep.  However, as soon as day broke, he told off half a dozen
+men to guard the prisoners until the colonel's arrival, and ordered the
+rest to be ready for starting in ten minutes.
+
+"It's nothing to do with me," remarked Castro, as he and I rode out at
+the head of the men; "but the captain's overdoing it.  He's taking the
+heart out of his fellows, and just at the last pinch they'll fall to
+pieces.  There's nothing left in them for a dash at the end."
+
+"We shouldn't shine in a cavalry charge," I admitted, laughing and
+looking at my horse, "unless, indeed, it were under Don Quixote's
+banner!"
+
+"Well, Crawford," cried the captain, riding up, "something ought to
+happen soon now.  It's a pity we wasted that last hour this morning,
+though.  We must make up for it during the day.  One of the prisoners
+informed me that Santalla cannot be far ahead.  I have a good mind to
+push on with the men on the strongest horses, leaving you to follow.
+What do you think?"
+
+"I think that you are going fast enough, captain.  Both men and horses
+are fagged now, and it's useless to catch up with Santalla just as we
+are all dead beat."
+
+"But if we don't go ahead we shan't catch him at all.  The colonel did
+not send us on in front to sit down by the wayside."
+
+"No, captain; but that's just what we shall be doing soon, whether we
+want to or not.  Most of the horses are nearly done for now."
+
+"Then we'll get fresh ones," cried he (which, by the way, there was no
+possible means of doing), "or continue the pursuit on foot.  Do you
+think if the colonel were in my place he would lag behind?"
+
+Of course I knew he would not, but then Miller was Miller, who had not,
+to my thinking, his equal in South America.  And Plaza wished to
+imitate his chief, forgetting he did not possess that marvellous
+personal influence over men which accounted so much for the English
+colonel's success.
+
+So we pushed on, till, at the end of the third mile or thereabout, a
+horse sank through sheer weariness to the ground, and had not
+sufficient strength to rise again.
+
+"Run on with the rest," said the captain to the rider; "we will ride
+and tie by turns."
+
+The man saluted and came on, but the last I saw of him he was
+staggering from side to side of the track, as if he had completely lost
+control of his limbs.  After a time another horse fell, giving us
+another infantry-man, who in a short time was, I daresay, also left
+behind on the road.
+
+"'Twill be a plain trail for the main body," remarked the guide; for we
+ourselves were continually passing broken weapons, mules that could not
+drag their limbs a step further, dead horses, and now and then a
+Royalist soldier curled up on the track fast asleep.
+
+"Where will Santalla make for?" I asked.
+
+"Arequipa.  But I don't think he can reach it.  The Indians bar the
+direct route, and his only way out, as far as I can see, is by taking
+to the mountains at Copari."
+
+"My horse won't face a hill just now."
+
+Castro smiled, saying, "The pass near Copari is too rugged for horses
+at any time; the climbing must all be done on foot," and he smiled
+again at my gesture of despair.
+
+At ten o'clock Plaza was compelled to halt, three-fourths of the men
+being tired as dogs, while several horses had foundered on the road.
+He was very excited, having heard from the last Spaniard picked up that
+Santalla, thoroughly worn out, was barely two hours' march in front.
+
+He glanced wrathfully at his tired troopers.  There they lay, five
+minutes after the order to halt, sleeping like dead men, and for the
+time being certainly of no greater use.
+
+"Caramba!" cried he, "it makes me wild!  Two hours, Crawford!  Do you
+hear?  And look at them!  The prize will slip through our fingers after
+all!"
+
+"Hardly that, captain," I murmured sleepily, "as it has never been in
+our hands."
+
+"Santalla will have to rest as well," remarked the guide, "so the
+scales will balance."
+
+"But I don't want them to balance!" cried Plaza testily.
+
+To give the captain his due, he was greatly in earnest, and willing to
+do himself all that he required of his men.  He showed this plainly two
+hours after we had resumed the pursuit, when his horse suddenly dropped
+from exhaustion.  A dozen troopers at once made as if to dismount, but
+he ordered them to keep their seats.
+
+"No, no," he roared; "I take no advantage!" and he ran on, holding by
+the stirrup to the nearest horseman.
+
+The fellows cheered him, and I think we got on better for the incident,
+though the halts became more frequent now, and our numbers lessened, as
+one man after another dropped exhausted to the ground.  Still we were
+gaining on the runaways, as a disagreeable episode presently made clear.
+
+It was about four o'clock in the afternoon, and we were straggling at
+no great speed through a narrow valley, when half a dozen bullets from
+the rocky sides dropped into our midst.
+
+"Ah!" exclaimed Castro, "now the Spaniards are playing the proper game.
+These fellows have been left to hold us in check while the main body
+escapes through the Copari Pass."
+
+"Push on there!" roared the captain, who after a spell of riding had
+just dismounted.  There was, indeed, nothing else to be done.  We must
+run the gauntlet, and trust to luck for some of us getting through.
+The Spaniards were well hidden, and could not be dislodged, unless,
+which was out of the question, we came to hand-grasps with them.  So
+urging our jaded beasts to a spurt, we quickened the pace, while now
+and again a groan and a thud told that a bullet had found its mark.
+
+Those who were hit lay where they fell; the most of us reached the open
+country just in time to see a dozen or fifteen horsemen mount and ride
+off.  Evidently they had the pick of Santalla's animals, as they easily
+kept their distance, though allowing us to advance within range, when,
+discharging their muskets, they recommenced the retreat.
+
+Plaza fumed like one distracted at the galling fire, which considerably
+delayed our advance, though we suffered in the loss of horses rather
+than of men.  He was riding again now, and well in front, with Castro
+and myself behind him.  Suddenly, after a scattering volley, I felt my
+horse slip, and the next instant the poor beast was sprawling on the
+ground with a bullet-hole in its chest.
+
+Staggering to my feet, I ran on, but unsteadily, for in truth I was
+getting very near the end of my strength.  However, a husky shout from
+those in front encouraged me, and I saw that at last we had come fairly
+upon the runaways.
+
+Just as Castro had foretold, they were taking to a mountain pass,
+eastward of Copari, and the main body was already toiling up the
+ascent.  Their stores lay about everywhere; horses and mules were
+abandoned; only a handful of horsemen, constituting the rearguard,
+preserved any appearance of order.  For a time they stoutly held the
+mouth of the pass, but at length, leaving their animals, they too
+disappeared.
+
+Plaza went at the entrance like a bull at a gate, Castro followed, and
+I toiled after them with the men.  Up we went, some cheering, but the
+majority with closed lips, saving their breath.  In our fatigued state
+the climb was fearfully distressing: men sank to the ground gasping, or
+fell while trying to grasp the overhanging rocks with nerveless fingers.
+
+As for me, though straining every nerve, I could not keep pace with the
+leaders.  My eyes smarted and ached; my head seemed to spin round; more
+than once I should have fallen but for a friendly hand.  Presently I
+heard Plaza cheer; but he was out of sight, and the sound seemed to
+come from a long distance.  Then I was placed gently against a rock by
+a soldier, who pushed on after the rest.
+
+Had I been hit?  I really did not know.  There was blood on my hands,
+but they had been gashed by the jagged rocks.  But hit or not, I must
+do my best to keep up; so trying to steady myself, I took another step
+forward.  The pass was filled with strange sounds and with strange
+shapes too.  Large birds hovered over my head, men and animals stood in
+my path; I had to dodge here and there in order to find a way through.
+
+Suddenly a man placed his arm round my waist, and saying, "You must lie
+down, lieutenant," carried me a little distance, and then placed me on
+the ground.
+
+"No, no," I murmured drowsily; "the captain is calling!  Don't you hear
+the captain calling?"
+
+"Yes," said he: "the Spaniards have escaped, and the captain has
+sounded a halt."
+
+I did not know then that the man was tricking me for my own good, so I
+answered innocently, "Thank goodness!  Now we shall have a little rest.
+Waken me when they return."
+
+"Never fear, sir," said he; "I will waken you," and even before he
+turned away I had lost all knowledge of the situation.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIII.
+
+HOME AGAIN.
+
+Several days passed before I could recognize any one or anything, and
+then I found myself lying in bed in a strange room, but with Jos�
+sitting near me.  He rubbed his hands together and smiled when my eyes
+opened, but he would not talk beyond saying that we were back in Ica.
+
+I felt weak, but in no pain; and in a day or two was able to dress, and
+with Jos�'s help to go for a stroll in the town.  Several acquaintances
+congratulated me on my recovery; but not seeing Captain Plaza, I asked
+Jos� if he had been hurt.
+
+"Oh no," he answered, with a smile; "the captain is sound in everything
+but temper.  Santalla spoiled that by getting clear off.  You won't
+forget that charming little trip in a hurry, Jack!"
+
+"Oh, it was simply awful!  I wouldn't go through it again to be made
+commander-in-chief.  I wonder it didn't kill me."
+
+"It did kill some, and knocked you all out except Plaza and the guide.
+There was precious little difficulty in finding the route you had
+taken.  One of the troopers showed me where you were.  'The lieutenant
+is a bit light-headed; said he; 'so I put him in a corner out of harm's
+way.  I told him the captain had stopped the pursuit.'"
+
+"I remember something about it.  I was tired out before my horse got
+hit, and the climb up the pass finished me."
+
+"You weren't the only one to get knocked up.  However, the colonel
+obtained a light cart, and we brought you all back to Ica."
+
+"So we had our trouble for nothing?"
+
+"Not exactly.  Santalla escaped, but he left all his stores behind, and
+nearly a hundred of his men were captured.  Most of them, I think, were
+very glad of it.  We couldn't get them to keep their eyes open, they
+were so sleepy."
+
+"What did the colonel say?"
+
+"Oh, he laughed, and chaffed Plaza a bit, but I think he was very well
+satisfied.  Now we had better turn back."
+
+I offered no objection, as even the short distance we had walked had
+fatigued me wonderfully.  By degrees, however, my strength returned,
+and at the end of another week I was able to resume my duties.
+
+The colonel, as usual, was extremely busy, having to keep in order all
+the affairs of a huge district.  Though my services were very welcome,
+he would not let me do too much, saying kindly, "Take it easy, my lad.
+One mustn't spur the willing horse.  We are not chasing Santalla just
+at present."
+
+"Thank goodness!" I exclaimed.  "One can have too much of that sport."
+And the colonel indulged in one of his merry laughs.
+
+The town at this time was very quiet.  There were no Spanish troops
+within many miles; our own men, through decent food and careful
+nursing, were rapidly recovering from the effects of their long forced
+marches; and fierce bands of our guerillas guarded the mountain passes.
+As far as our particular district was concerned, the war seemed to be
+over.
+
+One night as I sat making a fair copy of a proclamation, the colonel,
+looking up suddenly, exclaimed, "Crawford, would you like to go to
+Lima?"
+
+"To Lima, sir?" and I let the pen fall in my eagerness; "why, I'd give
+anything to go there!"
+
+"Well, you can go for nothing, my boy, in a day or two.  Of course you
+know our friends have been for some time now in possession of the
+capital, and that San Martin is Protector of Peru?"
+
+"Yes, sir, though I think 'tis but an empty title until the Royalists
+are thoroughly beaten."
+
+"All in good time," said he pleasantly.  "That will come some day.  We
+shall be masters of Callao shortly; which will be a great step forward.
+I have received news this afternoon which impels me to make the journey
+to Lima; so if you think you're strong enough--"
+
+"I'm sure I am," I cried eagerly.  "I haven't an ache or pain in my
+whole body now, and--"
+
+"All right!" interrupted the colonel; "I'll take you.  Now finish your
+copying, and don't fling the ink all over the place; it's wasteful."
+
+It was not only wasteful, but it gave me extra work, the copy being so
+smeared and blotted that I had to write it again on a fresh sheet.
+
+"Lima in a day or two!" I said softly to myself as my pen drove along
+the paper.  The words sounded like sweetest music to me, and I hummed
+them to myself over and over again.  I pictured the dear old home, the
+park, the pony I had ridden so often, the silvery pond, and the boats I
+had fashioned to sail on its waters.
+
+But above and beyond all I saw my mother, with eyes aglint and face
+suffused with joy.  The vision was so real that I stopped in my writing
+to view it more closely.  And when the colonel presently gave me leave
+for the remainder of the day, I rushed off to find Jos�, hardly knowing
+whether I ran or flew.
+
+"What is it, Jack?" he exclaimed.  "Has Captain Plaza promised to take
+you on another trip?"
+
+He laughed at his own joke, and I laughed too, being in the humour to
+see fun in anything.
+
+"You aren't far out, Jos�," I replied, slapping him on the shoulder out
+of pure good humour.  "I am going on a trip, but not with Plaza!"
+
+"Then it must be with the colonel."
+
+"Right this time.  But where are we going, Jos�? can you tell me that,
+eh?  No, you'll never guess, so I will tell you.  To _Lima_, my boy!
+what do you think of that?"
+
+"I think that your mother will be very pleased to see you."
+
+"Fancy seeing her again, Jos�, after all these weary months!"
+
+"She will hardly know you," said he.  "You have grown so tall and
+strong and manly.  You are the image of what your father was at your
+age, Jack.  Are all the troops to be moved up?"
+
+"I think not.  As far as I know, the colonel's only paying a flying
+visit to the capital.  Why are you laughing?"
+
+"Because I'm rather doubtful of that.  If Miller goes to Lima, it's a
+proof there are hard knocks about.  And high time too!  According to
+the talk, the war should have been done with long ago."
+
+Next day the colonel made his arrangements, and on the following
+morning he set out, leaving Major Videla in charge of the district.
+Rather to my surprise, Jos� formed one of the party, which consisted
+only of us three.
+
+Under some circumstances the journey would have been tedious; but
+Colonel Miller was very agreeable, and told us many interesting stories
+of his adventurous career.  Thus the time passed pleasantly enough, and
+on the evening of September 11, 1821, we arrived in the neighbourhood
+of Lima.
+
+The capital, as I have said, was in possession of the Patriots; but a
+Royalist garrison still held Callao, and the Royalist general,
+Canterac, with a small army, had just swooped down from the mountains
+to help his friends.  Our soldiers were chiefly stationed between the
+two towns; but the citizens of Lima had armed themselves, and swaggered
+about talking of the great deeds they were about to perform.
+
+The colonel, aware of my anxiety, agreed that I should pay a visit to
+my mother at once.
+
+"I must see General San Martin," said he.  "He may give me a post here,
+and if so, I will send for you.  But you have earned a few days' rest,
+and I shall not omit to mention you favourably to the protector."
+
+As soon as he had gone, Jos� and I rode on quickly.  My heart beat
+fast, and my hands trembled so that I had to use both in holding the
+reins.
+
+"I suppose it is all right, Jos�," I remarked as we drew near the
+house.  "I suppose there is nothing wrong?"
+
+"No, no," replied he; "why should there be?  You are nervous, my boy,
+that's all.  Cheer up; in a short time you will be in your mother's
+arms."
+
+At the outer gate I drew back, leaving Jos� to accost the janitor, who
+greeted him heartily.  Then in silence we rode through the park to the
+courtyard, and in response to our knocking Antonio appeared.
+
+On seeing me the old man would have screamed with delight, but I
+checked him, saying softly, "Hush, Antonio; tell me quickly of your
+mistress, my mother.  Is she well?"
+
+"In health, se�or, but sad.  Ah, the house has been very lonely for
+many a long day!"
+
+"Go you, Jos�," said I, "and prepare her."
+
+"Joy never kills," answered he, laughing; "but perhaps it will be as
+well for me to go in first."
+
+I waited a few moments, and then dismounting, walked softly towards the
+entrance.  What would she say? what would she do?  My heart almost
+ceased beating as I stood in the shadow listening.  The door was wide
+open, and a stream of light came from the spacious hall.
+
+Suddenly I heard a quick step, and then my mother's voice crying,
+"Juan! my Juan! where are you?"  And running forward, I threw myself
+joyfully into her arms.  She kissed me repeatedly, and then hand in
+hand we went inside.
+
+"Mother!" I cried, "mother!" and for a long time that was the only word
+spoken.  We sat down side by side, and her beautiful eyes, dimmed by
+very joy, looked into mine.  She pressed my hand, smoothed my cheeks,
+and brushed back the hair from my forehead, murmuring softly, "Juan, my
+Juan!"
+
+I think, perhaps, that great happiness, like great grief, kills speech.
+At least it was so with us, and we were content to sit there silently
+gazing into each loved face.
+
+At length the good old major-domo, knocking timidly at the door,
+announced that supper was served, when my mother with a sigh suffered
+me to leave her for a few minutes, in order to make myself more
+presentable for the table.
+
+I would have had Jos� sit down with us, but he disappeared, and perhaps
+after all it was as well.  My mother made only a pretence at eating,
+and sat with her eyes fixed on me, as though fearful I should in some
+mysterious way suddenly disappear.
+
+After supper we returned to the drawing-room, where I related my
+adventures, telling her the story of the shipwreck, of my rescue and
+imprisonment in the fort, of my marvellous escape, and all the various
+incidents which had happened since I left home.  Of Santiago's
+information concerning my father I said nothing, though I longed
+greatly to do so.
+
+"I think General Barejo wished you well," she exclaimed after a pause.
+"He is not of our way of thinking, but he has a kind heart, and he was
+a true friend to me before these troubles came upon us."
+
+"Was he ever friendly with father?" I asked.
+
+"He respected him much, though he thought him greatly mistaken.  You
+see, their ideas were altogether opposed, but in private life each
+esteemed the other."
+
+Presently, remembering that the Royalists no longer held Lima, I said,
+"What has become of little Rosa?  I hope our people have not disturbed
+her, though it must be lonely for her living in that great house alone.
+Could she not have come to you?"
+
+"There was no need," and my mother's lips curled scornfully; "she is
+safe enough with her father."
+
+"With her father?" I echoed, in astonishment.  "How can he take a
+delicate child like that into a rough camp?"
+
+"His house is not a rough camp, Juan!"
+
+The truth did not strike me at first, so I said innocently, "Oh, has he
+been wounded and obtained permission to be nursed at home?  Is he
+seriously hurt?"
+
+"He is quite well, I believe, and is one of us."
+
+"Felipe Montilla turned _Patriot_?" I cried in amazement.
+
+Now let me not be misunderstood.  I honestly believed our cause just.
+In my small way I had ventured my life for the independence of Peru,
+and was quite ready to venture it again.  But this man had boasted his
+loyalty to the Spanish king, had fought under his flag, had taken high
+rank in his army!  He had accepted from him both honours and broad
+lands, and then at the first reverse in his fortunes had slunk away
+like a whipped cur.
+
+"A fig for such Patriots!" cried I hotly.  "Were I San Martin, he
+should be whipped back to the men he has deserted.  Give me a loyal
+friend or a stout enemy, I care not which; but these _jellyfish_--bah!
+they are an abomination."
+
+"You are young, my boy, and not quite wise enough to understand these
+things.  Is it not to Don Felipe's credit that he should openly confess
+his mistake?"
+
+"And save his estates into the bargain," said I wrathfully.  "Let the
+Spaniards get the upper hand, and you will find him back in their ranks
+quickly enough."
+
+"A man must follow the guiding of his conscience, even if it lead to
+his advantage," remarked my mother quietly.  "But if you are indignant
+with Don Felipe, you will be equally delighted with Rosa.  She is still
+Loyalist to the core, and makes no secret of it.  She told San Martin
+the other day that he was a busybody, meddling in affairs that did not
+concern him, and that the people of Peru could settle their disputes
+without his interference."
+
+"Bravo, Rosa!" I cried, with a laugh; "there is nothing like speaking
+one's mind.  I'll wager San Martin prefers the girl to her father.
+Have you seen the general?"
+
+"Yes; he paid me a friendly visit on purpose to show his admiration for
+your dear father.  He is a most remarkable man."
+
+It was not until the evening drew to a close that my mother spoke of
+what lay nearest her heart--our plans for the future.  She admitted
+with a sigh that I must in honour offer my services to San Martin.  I
+was still young, but there were many boys fighting in the ranks, and
+some had already sacrificed their lives for the cause.
+
+"It is hard to let you go again," said she, pressing me fondly to her,
+"and yet I must.  God grant that the war may soon be brought to an end!"
+
+"Amen to that!" I exclaimed fervently.  "Fighting is not to my liking,
+but I cannot stand idly by while others risk their lives for my
+benefit."
+
+"No," said my mother, kissing me good-night; "you must do your duty, my
+boy.  Your father would have wished it."
+
+A few minutes later I went to my room, and was just closing the door
+when Jos� appeared.  He looked hot and flushed, and I asked where he
+had been.
+
+"To the camp," said he, with a laugh, "to see what's going on.  I
+thought the colonel must have had some special news.  Unless San Martin
+holds his hand, the Spaniards are lost.  They can't stay at Callao, as
+there isn't food even for the garrison; they aren't strong enough to
+take Lima: they must retreat or starve."
+
+"Well?" I exclaimed questioningly.
+
+"Why, don't you see, directly they begin to retreat we shall crush
+them.  Already nearly two hundred of their men have deserted."
+
+"More deserters?  Why, we shall soon be able to form a battalion of
+turncoats for Don Felipe to lead!"
+
+It was now Jos�'s turn to look astonished, and his expression of
+amazement was so ludicrous that I laughed outright.
+
+"What a poltroon!" he cried contemptuously.  "But I'll see you get no
+harm by this right-about face.  He is mistaken if he thinks his
+treachery will give him a hold on your estates."
+
+"A hold on my estates, Jos�?  What do you mean?"
+
+"Oh," said he, "I have not cared to speak of it, but I must now."  And
+he proceeded to inform me that all my father's property had passed into
+the possession of Don Felipe Montilla.
+
+"But," I exclaimed, striving to appear calm, "that will be set aside
+now.  San Martin will never allow our property to be confiscated
+because my father died for the Patriot cause."
+
+"Montilla is a fox, Jack, and has made a good bargain for himself, no
+doubt.  I expect he obtained the general's written promise to confirm
+him in all his estates.  And if so," he concluded gloomily, "yours form
+part of them."
+
+"He shall not keep them," I cried angrily, "whatever San Martin has
+promised!"
+
+"No; but we must not quarrel openly until the Spaniards are done with.
+Montilla has influence, and no doubt San Martin finds him useful.  But
+don't take it to heart, Jack; we will defeat him in the end."
+
+"If we don't," said I grimly, "it will be because the son has followed
+the father.  And that reminds me, do you think Montilla knows what
+actually happened to my father?  It always seemed strange to me that
+Rosa should learn of that affair so quickly."
+
+"You don't suspect--"
+
+"That he had a hand in his death?  No, hardly that, though he is
+mean-spirited enough for it.  But it struck me that, being high in the
+viceroy's favour, he probably knew what was going on."
+
+"That is possible at least."
+
+"Probable, I should say.  However, to-morrow I intend putting the
+question to him."
+
+"Do you mean that you are going to interview him on the subject?"
+
+"Why not?  There can be no harm in asking a straightforward question."
+
+"Mind you don't lose your temper, my boy.  It's dangerous work rousing
+a venomous snake until its poison bag is extracted."
+
+"Never fear, Jos�.  I have learned how to take care of myself during
+the last few months.  Thanks to you and the colonel, I have done some
+hard practising.  And now turn in.  It will seem strange to sleep in
+one's own bed again, won't it?"
+
+"Make the most of it," advised he laughingly.  "It may be a long time
+before you have another chance."
+
+I felt very tired, and yet it was long before I fell asleep.  I was
+angry at Montilla's double-dealing, sorry for Rosa, my old playmate,
+and agitated by a thousand vague doubts and suspicions.
+
+In the morning I rose very little refreshed, had a simple breakfast in
+my room, and went to find Jos�.  He had already returned from an early
+visit to the camp, and brought word that matters were still in the same
+state.  The Spaniards remained sheltered under the guns of the
+fortress, and San Martin, knowing their provisions were almost
+exhausted, would not attack.
+
+Presently we were joined by my mother, who made Jos� happy by praising
+him for his care of me.  Then we took a stroll round the grounds,
+looked in at my workshop, where my half-painted boat still lay, and
+paid a visit to the lake.
+
+After a while I asked Jos� to have my horse saddled, saying, "Excuse
+me, mother, for a short time, please.  You know the colonel may send
+for me at any moment, and I should like to see Rosa once more."
+
+This was only partly the truth, but I could not speak of my principal
+motive, for as yet, acting under Jos�'s advice, I had made no mention
+of Santiago's queer story.  It would have been cruel to raise hopes
+that might have no actual foundation.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIV
+
+FRIEND OR FOE!
+
+I have before said that Don Felipe was our nearest neighbour; the
+grounds of his house, indeed, joined our own, and I might easily have
+gone there on foot.  Perhaps it was a touch of pride which induced me
+to go on horseback, as I was a good rider, and young enough to feel a
+certain satisfaction in my appearance.
+
+I had grown beyond the recollection of the gatekeeper, who admitted me
+to the courtyard with a show of deference, saying that both his master
+and young mistress were at home.  Rosa's mother had been dead for some
+years.
+
+Don Felipe had numerous servants, and to one of them I threw the reins,
+telling him to mind my horse.  Then going to the door, I inquired for
+Don Felipe.
+
+The major-domo was showing me to a small room, when a girl, merrily
+humming a popular Royalist song, came tripping along the corridor.
+Suddenly she stopped, looked hard at me, and then came forward again,
+saying, "Juan!  Surely you are Juan Crawford?"
+
+I have sometimes laughed since at my stupidity, yet there might be
+found some excuse for it.  During my absence from Lima I had often
+thought of my little playmate, but it had never occurred to me that
+time would change her as well as myself.  And now, instead of the merry
+child with whom I had romped and played, there appeared a beautiful
+girl at whom I gazed in wonder.
+
+"Are you not Juan Crawford?" she asked again, speaking softly.
+
+"Yes," said I, "I am Juan; but you, se�orita?"
+
+Her face rippled with merry laughter; but pouting her lips, she said,--
+
+"What a poor compliment to your old friend, Juan!  Surely you have not
+forgotten Rosa!"
+
+"Nay, that have I not; I have forgotten nothing.  But you are so
+changed, Rosa--so different!"
+
+"So are you; but I knew you at once.  When did you come home?  Have you
+come to see me?"
+
+"Yes, and your father as well.  I have some business with him."
+
+"Oh!" cried she, tossing her head and frowning, "of course you and he
+are on the same side.  My father is a Patriot now, and cries, 'Down
+with the king!'  I suppose your meddlesome general has sent you with a
+message."
+
+I did not undeceive her; and while the servant carried my name to his
+master, we entered one of the rooms and continued our conversation.  I
+saw she was troubled; yet with great skill and grace she put me at
+ease, and led me to talk of what had happened during the last two years.
+
+"What a fire-eater you are, Juan!" she cried banteringly.  "I am quite
+afraid of you.  But what a fine sword you have!  Ah, if I were only a
+boy!  Can you guess what I would do?"
+
+"No," I replied, with a shake of the head.  "No one can guess what a
+girl will do."
+
+"But I said a boy."
+
+"Ah! that would be altogether different."
+
+"I will tell you then," she said, standing up and speaking very
+earnestly.  "I would get a sword and pistols and join the king's
+friends.  I would be a loyal Spanish cavalier, Juan, if I were the only
+one in Peru!"
+
+"Then it is lucky you are a girl, Rosa, or you would soon be killed.  I
+would not harm the king, even if he were here instead of being in
+Spain, thousands of miles away; but I have no love for those who rule
+in his name."
+
+"No," said she, casting down her eyes, and I thought her voice sounded
+sad; "you have suffered at their hands.  But it is not the king's
+fault, Juan; he would have seen you righted."
+
+"It is a long way from Peru to Spain," said I, trying to speak
+carelessly, "and it seems as if in these days one must right one's own
+wrongs."
+
+After that we sat speaking very little, each afraid lest the talk
+should drift into an awkward channel, for I felt sure that she knew how
+her father had robbed us of our estates.
+
+On the return of the servant she whispered earnestly, "My father has
+changed greatly.  I am sure he is unhappy.  If he should appear cross
+and irritable, you will bear with him, won't you, Juan?"
+
+"I will do my best, Rosa.  But why should he be angry with me?  I am
+only going to ask him a question."
+
+Don Felipe was truly much altered.  His dark hair was plentifully
+sprinkled with silver; there were deep lines in his forehead and around
+his lips; his eyes had become shifty, and there was a look of cunning
+in them.  He gave me just one swift, searching glance, and then looked
+away.  It was an awkward meeting, and I hardly knew what to say.
+Fortunately Don Felipe took the lead.
+
+"You have grown almost out of knowledge, my young friend; and I notice
+you have obtained military rank," said he, with a covert sneer.
+
+"I have the honour to be a lieutenant in the army to which we both
+belong, se�or," I replied.
+
+He winced at that, and his eyes glowed angrily.
+
+"If you have brought me a message from your general," said he, "will
+you at once deliver it?  I am very busy just now."
+
+"I will not take up more than five minutes of your valuable time,
+se�or.  My errand is an important one, though _at present_ it has
+nothing to do with General San Martin."
+
+Again he glanced at me sharply, and I thought he seemed slightly
+nervous.
+
+"I must ask you to be quick with it," he said coldly.
+
+"I only desire to ask you about the death of my father.  I am sure you
+will give me all the information in your power, as he died for the
+independence of Peru, which to-day both you and I are trying to secure."
+
+At that he started up, his eyes blazing, his hand on his sword.
+
+"Do you think I killed your father?" he roared furiously.  "He died
+through his own fault.  I warned him again and again that the time was
+not ripe, but he paid no heed to me."
+
+"Are you not mistaken?" I asked.  "According to the Indians' account,
+he was slain while trying to prevent them from rising."
+
+"Then the government was deceived.  No good can be done by digging up
+the dead past, but you shall hear all that I know of the story.  At
+that time there were three parties in the country.  One section, led by
+your father, resolved upon armed insurrection; another, composed of
+Royalists, determined that nothing should be changed; the third, to
+which I belonged, endeavoured to obtain reform by moderate means.  I
+need not say that your father was a marked man.  One day the viceroy
+received word that he had started for the mountains in order to rouse
+the Indians to revolt, and, to prevent mischief, it was arranged that
+he should be placed in prison.  As you may know, he refused to submit
+quietly, and, unfortunately, was shot in the fight which ensued."
+
+"Was his body brought back to Lima?"
+
+"I never heard so.  Most probably it was left on the mountains.  I was
+sorry for him; but he was a headstrong man, and would not listen to
+reason."
+
+"That was foolish of him," I remarked quietly.  "Had he waited till the
+proper time to declare his real opinions, he would not have lost his
+life, nor my mother her property.  It is possible, indeed, that our
+estates would have been largely added to."
+
+"The estates were confiscated, it is true," said Don Felipe slowly,
+"but they fell into friendly hands."  Then, in quite a kindly tone, he
+added, "You feel bitter against me, Juan--I see it in your face.
+Perhaps it is natural; yet you really have no reason to do so.  I must
+not say more now, but all will come right in the end."
+
+"So I intend," said I stoutly, yet feeling rather mystified.
+
+The man's sudden change of manner puzzled me.  After all, I was only a
+boy, with little ability and no training to seek for things lying
+beneath the surface.  And Montilla seeing the state of my mind, played
+upon it with consummate skill.
+
+I cannot truthfully say that he made any definite promise, but this was
+the impression I received:--Knowing that all my father's property was
+forfeit to the law, he had exerted his influence to secure it.  At that
+time he thought the trouble would be settled without fighting, and
+intended in a year or two to restore the estates.  When the war broke
+out, he endeavoured to bring the viceroy over to the cause of reform,
+but finding that impossible, was compelled reluctantly to join the
+Patriots.  Of course, in the matter of the estates, nothing could be
+done now till the war was over.
+
+"Thus," said he cheerfully, "the future is safe.  If the Patriots win,
+we can have the confiscation revoked; while, on the other hand, I count
+so many friends among the moderate Royalists that the viceroy would
+hardly care to thwart me."
+
+"In any case," said I bluntly, though with no wish to vex him, "the
+Indians will see that I am not wronged!"
+
+"Trust me," he answered, his voice sounding now like the purring of a
+cat; "Felipe Montilla never makes mistakes."
+
+I had a stinging reply on my lips, but refraining from giving it
+utterance, I bade him farewell.
+
+"Come again, Juan," said he, "if the general can spare you!"  And
+though not overburdened with wits, I had a sense of being laughed at.
+
+I was joined in the corridor by Rosa, who wanted to know why I was
+going so soon.
+
+"I really must," I answered, smiling.  "I have spent no time with my
+mother yet, and I may be sent for at any moment."
+
+"But this will not be _good-bye_?"
+
+"On the contrary, I hope to see you often.  Your father has given me
+the kindest of invitations."
+
+At this she opened her eyes wide; but quickly recovering herself, she
+smiled pleasantly, and accompanied me to the hall.  As I rode by, she
+was standing at a window waving her hand.
+
+I had much to think of during the short ride home, but I got little
+satisfaction from my thoughts.  Nothing had been gained by my visit to
+Montilla, and his story only went to confirm the truth of the reports
+of my father's death.  As to my faith in his startling promises, it
+grew weaker with every step my horse took.
+
+I said nothing to my mother; but Jos�, to whom I related all that had
+passed, laughed loudly.
+
+"The cunning old fox!" cried he; "he hasn't his equal for craft in
+Peru!  You will see that, whoever sinks, Don Felipe Montilla will swim."
+
+"Not at my expense," I exclaimed, "while I have strength to raise an
+arm."
+
+The rest of that day I spent with my mother, forcing myself to forget
+that any trouble existed in the world.  It was only a brief spell of
+happiness, but we enjoyed every second of it, and by nightfall my
+mother's face had lost some of its sadness, and her eyes shone brightly
+as in the olden days.
+
+Early next morning an order was brought to me to rejoin Colonel Miller,
+as it was arranged that, for a time at least, Jos� should remain behind
+to look after the affairs of the hacienda.  The servants assembled in
+the courtyard to see me off, and my mother came to the hall door.
+There she embraced me, and stood smiling bravely as I mounted.
+Whatever sorrow she felt was locked up tightly in her own breast.
+
+Accompanied by the man who had brought the order, I rode briskly to
+Mirones, the headquarters of the Patriot army, and about a mile from
+Callao.
+
+The colonel was with San Martin and a group of officers, watching the
+enemy's movements; but he turned to me at once, saying, "General, this
+is Lieutenant Crawford, of whom I spoke."
+
+San Martin, the Protector of Peru, was a tall man with black hair,
+bushy whiskers, and a deep olive complexion.  He had black, piercing
+eyes, fringed by long lashes and overhung by heavy brows and a high,
+straight forehead.  He was strong and muscular, with an erect, military
+carriage.  He looked every inch a soldier, and one, moreover, with an
+iron will that nothing could bend.  His voice was harsh and unmusical,
+but he spoke in a kindly, simple, and unaffected manner.
+
+"Colonel Miller has told me many things of you, lieutenant," said he,
+"and all to your credit.  I am glad to know that the son of Don Eduardo
+Crawford is following so well in his father's steps."
+
+"Thank you, general," I replied, bowing low.
+
+"I understand," he continued, "that Colonel Miller wishes to keep you
+with him.  It is certainly an honourable post; but I fancy you are
+likely to get many hard knocks," he concluded, with a laugh.
+
+"He has had a strong taste of the service, general," observed Miller,
+with a merry smile.--"Are you willing to stay with me, Crawford?"
+
+"Yes, certainly, sir, with the general's permission."
+
+"Very well," said San Martin.  "And, by the way, colonel, let him have
+on hour's sleep now and again,"--a little joke at which the group of
+officers, knowing the Englishman's habits, laughed heartily.
+
+The general presently rode off to his quarters, the officers went to
+their several duties, and I accompanied Colonel Miller to that part of
+the field in which his men were stationed.  He had been appointed to
+the command of a column seven hundred strong, which was held in
+readiness to move at any moment.  The officers were unknown to me, but
+they seemed pleasant, genial fellows, and in a short time I felt quite
+at home with them.  The younger ones were grumbling because San Martin
+did not at once attack the enemy, saying that Canterac would slip away
+to the mountains in the night.
+
+"Then his army will break up of its own accord," remarked a grizzled
+major.  "He can't take his guns, and his troops are starving.  Hundreds
+will throw down their weapons on finding us close at their heels."
+
+"Better have a straight fight and have done with it," grumbled a
+youngster.  "There's no fun playing at hide-and-seek in the hills."
+
+"Should you live to be a man," said the major reprovingly, "you won't
+talk in such a light-hearted way of a battle."  And the boy's face
+flushed at the laugh which greeted the remark.
+
+"Don't be too sarcastic, Gamarra," cried another.  "The youngster's
+right in the main.  If Canterac escapes, the war may drag on for
+months, and will cost thousands of lives.  The mountains will kill more
+than a pitched battle would."
+
+"Canterac can't escape if we follow him up properly," said the major,
+"and Colonel Miller seems the man to do that."
+
+"That is so; but he can't move without orders; and there's more than
+one man in high places who will prefer Lima to a pursuit."
+
+Thus they talked during the afternoon, and early in the evening Colonel
+Miller ordered that every one not on duty should turn in at once; which
+we took to be a sign that something was going to happen shortly.
+
+At ten o'clock the column was roused.  The men assembled silently, and
+a whisper went round that Canterac had begun his retreat.  For more
+than an hour we awaited fresh orders, the colonel on horseback fuming
+impatiently, until at last the word came to march.
+
+"An hour thrown away," muttered the colonel angrily.  "Canterac will
+laugh in our faces."
+
+To our disgust, we found that the column was attached to the main army,
+and that we had to move step by step to the will of the chief.  I knew
+very little about military tactics, but it was a strange kind of
+pursuit, and made me think of a tortoise chasing a hare.
+
+"I wonder what Captain Plaza would think of this performance?" said the
+colonel, rather bitterly, as we jogged along.  "This isn't the way he
+took you after Santalla, eh?"
+
+"Indeed no, colonel!" I replied, laughing.  "The captain would have had
+us on the other side of Lima by now."
+
+"It's like a funeral procession," he muttered impatiently; "and if they
+don't mind, 'twill be a funeral procession in reality.  We shall be
+burying the independence of Peru."
+
+The ridiculous part of it was that our column had been formed of all
+the light companies on purpose to swoop down on the foe.  As far as I
+could judge, the swoop was much like that of a hawk whose wings had
+been carefully tied to its body.
+
+However, we tramped along throughout the night, halting at daybreak
+without getting a glimpse of the exulting Canterac.
+
+"Never mind," exclaimed the colonel, who hated to look on the dark side
+of things; "we may catch them during the day."
+
+In this he was disappointed, as we proceeded in the same leisurely
+manner, just as if we were out for a quiet stroll on a summer's day.
+Several times Miller rode off to the staff, but on each occasion he
+returned looking more dissatisfied than before.
+
+The men wondered, and at each halt the officers talked pretty freely
+among themselves, giving their opinions with refreshing vigour.
+
+"Canterac has the start of us now," said one, "and we shall never
+overtake him.  We had the game in our hands, and have simply thrown it
+away."
+
+The grizzled major remained optimistic, saying, "You may depend that
+San Martin has some scheme in his head."  But the rest of us were
+doubtful.
+
+"If I had an enemy in a trap, my scheme would be to keep him there and
+not to let him walk out through an open door," laughed a young captain.
+"The war might have been finished to-day; now it's likely to go on for
+another twelvemonth."
+
+"Well," remarked one of his comrades, "it's a comfort to think we
+shan't kill ourselves through over-exertion."
+
+By degrees we pushed on to a place about nine leagues east of Lima,
+where it seemed as if the lumbering machine had broken down altogether.
+It was evening when we arrived and halted; the men ate the last morsel
+of their scanty rations; the chief officers, though no one could
+imagine what they found to discuss, held a conference, and presently it
+leaked out that the pursuit had been abandoned.
+
+"I don't profess to understand it," exclaimed Major Gamarra, "but you
+will find that there's some grand scheme in the air."
+
+"Ah!" interrupted another officer, in a sarcastic tone, "and no doubt
+it will stay there; most of these precious schemes do.  What I should
+like to see would be a little common sense."
+
+"Would you recognize it if you saw it?" put in the major quick as
+lightning; and all the others laughed.
+
+"Perhaps not.  I've had little opportunity of renewing my acquaintance
+with it since San Martin came to Peru."
+
+This was a dangerous remark, as we were a very mixed crowd.  Some had
+come from Buenos Ayres with San Martin; others were Chilians who had
+fought with him throughout the Chilian War; several, like myself, were
+natives of Peru; while two or three were Englishmen.
+
+Fortunately, before the dispute had had time to become hot, the colonel
+returned from the conference, and joined us at the fire.
+
+"I don't know, gentlemen, that anything is likely to happen," said he;
+"but we may as well enjoy a night's rest while we can," and wrapping
+his cloak around him, he lay down, setting an example which most of us
+followed.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XV.
+
+WE CATCH A TARTAR.
+
+When I awoke at six o'clock in the morning, most of the officers and
+men were still sleeping, but the colonel had disappeared.  There was
+nothing to be done beyond feeding and grooming my horse, which I always
+made a point of doing myself.  As to my own breakfast, my haversack was
+empty, and I think there was hardly a pound of meat to be found among
+the whole column.
+
+After a short time the men were roused, and just after seven o'clock we
+saw the colonel come tearing along on horseback, as if pursued by a
+cavalry division.  Evidently he was in a great hurry, and his face was
+wreathed in smiles.
+
+"Good-morning, gentlemen," he cried.  "You will be glad to hear my
+news: we move in an hour's time.  The general has only a scanty stock
+of provisions, but there is sufficient to provide your men with
+breakfast.--Crawford, hunt up Lieutenant-Colonel O'Brien, and ask him
+to come to me at once."
+
+O'Brien was a famous Irishman who had served with San Martin all
+through the Chilian War.  He was a fine fellow, standing six feet six
+inches high, and well proportioned.  Every one loved him for his
+winning ways, his ready smile, his perfect honesty, and his absolute
+fearlessness.
+
+"Colonel Miller?" said he, on hearing my message.  "Faith, I'll come
+instantly."  And we rode back together.
+
+"You're prompt, O'Brien," exclaimed the colonel, laughing; "Have you
+had enough of this slow-time business?"
+
+"More than enough, colonel.  What are your fellows looking so pleased
+about?"
+
+"First, the prospect of a breakfast; and then--"
+
+"You've badgered the general into giving you a free hand!"
+
+"Not quite that; but I have permission to push on.  I fear it's too
+late.  Canterac is a fine soldier, and will be ready for us now; but I
+am going to see if he has left any weak places.  Would you care to come
+with me?"
+
+"You're just a jewel, colonel," exclaimed the big Irishman
+enthusiastically, "and I'm eternally devoted to you.  When do we start?"
+
+"Directly after breakfast.  Will you take some with me?"
+
+"That will I, colonel, and I'm as charmed with the second invitation as
+the first.  I dined with the general the day we left Mirones, and
+haven't had a decent meal since."
+
+The colonel laughed, saying, "I'm afraid I can't say much for the
+quality of our food."
+
+"Never mind the quality, colonel; I think more of quantity just at
+present."
+
+"Well, that's on a par with the quality."
+
+This did not sound very promising; but we managed to satisfy our
+hunger, and the men, having eaten their scanty rations, were drawn up
+ready for the start.  At nine o'clock we left the camp, and a rapid
+march brought us to the village of Macas, which the enemy had just
+abandoned.  Here, to our great delight, we discovered a number of sheep
+dressed and ready for cooking; so, for once in a way, we enjoyed a
+really good meal, while cracking many jokes at the Spaniards' expense.
+Then having rested, we pushed on to the foot of the mountains, where
+the men bivouacked, being too tired to drag themselves any further.
+
+I was just preparing to off-saddle when the colonel said, "Crawford, if
+you aren't too tired, you can come with me.  I am going just a little
+way up the mountain."
+
+"Very good, sir," I answered, climbing into the saddle again, but
+wishing that he had taken it into his head to sleep instead.
+
+"I should like to find out where Canterac is.  He is quite clever
+enough to set a very ugly trap for us."
+
+It was dark now, and the road was difficult; but we rode cautiously,
+listening for sounds, and keeping our eyes well open.  At the end of
+perhaps half a mile the colonel suddenly stopped, and said in a
+whisper, "Some one is coming towards us."
+
+The position was very awkward.  We were on a narrow road with no
+hiding-place at hand, and must either retreat rapidly or plump
+ourselves right into the arms of the strangers.  In another minute we
+had no choice at all, as several dusky figures loomed up before us.
+Fortunately Colonel Miller favoured the practice of taking the bull by
+the horns, and levelling his pistol, he cried in a stern voice, "Halt!
+Who are you?"
+
+Taken by surprise, the men stopped, and we heard one of them say, "No,
+no; he's no Spaniard.  I can tell by his speech."
+
+"Quite right," cried the colonel.  "I'm an English officer in the
+Patriot army.  Who are you?  Make haste; we don't want to stay here all
+night."
+
+"We're deserters from General Canterac's army," replied one boldly,
+"and want to give ourselves up."
+
+"Then you're just right.  We will return with you to the camp, or the
+sentries might shoot you.--Crawford, turn your horse round so that they
+can pass between us.--Now, my good fellows, march, and I hope for your
+own sakes that you've given a true account of yourselves."
+
+Thus we journeyed back to the camp, where, beside a good fire, Colonel
+Miller examined the prisoners.  From them we learned that General
+Canterac had halted in a strong position halfway up the mountain; upon
+which I could see, by his restlessness, that the colonel was eager to
+resume the pursuit at once.  A glance at his wearied men, however,
+showed him the folly of such an enterprise.
+
+"No," said he at last; "they couldn't stand it."  Which was quite true.
+
+Having given the strangers into the charge of the guard, we unsaddled
+our horses, wrapped ourselves up, and lay down near the fire.  Two
+seconds later we were fast asleep.  At daybreak we were moving again,
+and I fancy the colonel felt glad he had not attempted to lead his men
+up the mountains in the darkness of night.  The road was simply
+horrible, and the pass might have been defended by a score of resolute
+men against an army.  Halfway up we received a check.  O'Brien, going
+forward with a handful of men, got in touch with the enemy, who
+immediately turned about and threatened to overwhelm us by a sudden
+attack.
+
+Under some leaders we should most certainly have come to grief; but the
+colonel's cheery, smiling face kept the men at their posts.  Drawing
+them up in a strong position, he awaited the attack calmly.
+
+"If you try to run away, my lads," he said pleasantly, "the Spaniards
+will make mincemeat of you; so it is wisest to stand firm."
+
+We watched three battalions come down from the height and halt just
+beyond musket-range.
+
+"I don't believe they're going to attack, after all!" exclaimed O'Brien
+excitedly.
+
+"Not until we move," answered the colonel, "and then they'll fall on us
+tooth and nail.  I expect they are just gaining time while the main
+body gets away.  It's aggravating, too, because they have the whip hand
+of us.  We aren't strong enough to turn them out."
+
+O'Brien shook his head, saying, "If the provisions would last, we might
+stand here staring at each other till doomsday."
+
+Darkness found the position unchanged, while numerous watch-fires
+gleamed fitfully through the gloom.
+
+"I wonder," said the colonel thoughtfully, "if Canterac intends keeping
+his men there all night?  Those fires may be just a blind; he's quite
+equal to a dodge of that sort."
+
+"Let me find out," said O'Brien.--"Crawford, do you feel in trim for a
+stroll?"
+
+"Oh, thanks! it's very kind of you to think of me."
+
+"Don't mention it, my dear fellow!  It's a weakness of mine to remember
+my friends.--We'll be back in an hour, colonel.--Take off your sword,
+Crawford; we must trust to our pistols.  Are you ready?  Come along,
+then."
+
+Passing our outposts, we began to climb warily, keeping a keen lookout,
+and taking care to make no unnecessary noise.  It was possible--indeed
+I thought probable--that we should meet the enemy stealing down to
+surprise our camp by a night attack.  However, we kept steadily on our
+way, and had nearly reached the outer ring of fires, when, clutching
+O'Brien by the arm, I dragged him bodily to the ground.
+
+"What's the matter?" he asked quietly.
+
+"A sentry!  Listen!  He's talking to some one."
+
+We lay quite still, trying to hear what was said; but in this we were
+disappointed, and presently the two men separated, each walking slowly
+in opposite directions.
+
+"Now's our chance!" whispered O'Brien; and crawling on hands and knees,
+we passed quietly between the two.  Several yards away was a big fire,
+and a number of men had gathered round it, where they could easily be
+seen.
+
+"Then they haven't bolted, after all!" said O'Brien, in surprise.
+
+"It doesn't look like it; but don't let us be too sure.  You stay in
+this hollow while I investigate.  You are not a good performer on
+all-fours."
+
+"No," said he, chuckling, and I was afraid that, in spite of our
+danger, he would laugh aloud; "this is a sort of circus trick not
+taught at our school.  Can you judge where to find me again?"
+
+"Easily, if they don't let the fires out;" and I crawled further into
+the camp, and in the direction of a second fire.  It looked very
+comfortable, but no one was there to take advantage of it, and the
+third and fourth I visited were equally deserted.
+
+The trick was plain enough now.  After lighting the fires, the three
+battalions had marched off, leaving just sufficient men to tend them,
+and to act as sentries.  The sight of a soldier crossing the camp to
+throw fresh fuel on one of the fires changed suspicion into certainty,
+and I hastened back to O'Brien with my information.
+
+"That's an old dodge," said he, "but a good one.  It almost always pays
+in this part of the world.  Now let us get back and tell the colonel."
+
+Cautiously we crawled back, waited nearly an hour for a favourable
+chance to dodge the sentries, and then hurried down the pass.
+
+"Thanks," exclaimed the colonel, on hearing our report.  "We can afford
+now to let the men have a couple of hours' sleep; they need it."
+
+"And I daresay some of the officers will lie down, if you press them,"
+laughed O'Brien.--"What do you say, Crawford?"
+
+"Well, the colonel need not press me much," I replied.
+
+"Good boy!  I'm pleased you're so willing to do as you're told."
+
+"Well, he has certainly earned a rest," observed Miller.  "But we are
+moving sharp at daybreak, remember."
+
+"There's nothing strange in that," said I sleepily; "the wonder would
+be if we didn't."  At which the colonel and O'Brien laughed heartily.
+
+Next day we marched into the village of Puruchuco, on the eastern side
+of the mountain, and about six miles distant from the small town of
+Huamantanga, where the Royalists had halted.  Owing to the difficulty
+of obtaining food, Colonel Miller now sent most of our infantry back to
+Macas; the Indians were thrown forward to act as a screen in front;
+while the rest of us bivouacked in some meadows near the village.  The
+next day the colonel and I rode to within five hundred yards of
+Huamantanga, where we saw the enemy formed up in marching order.
+
+"What restless fellows they are!" I exclaimed laughingly; "they're on
+the move again!"
+
+"Yes; but this time, unless I'm much mistaken, they are moving
+backwards.  Ride round to the right, warn the Indians to be ready for
+an attack, and rejoin me at Puruchuco."
+
+I had barely reached the village when the colonel's suspicions were
+verified.  Two thousand of the enemy, all picked men, as we afterwards
+discovered, rapidly descended the heights, drove the Indians back by
+sheer strength of numbers, and at last sent them flying pell-mell to
+seek safety in some of the numerous ravines.  We had barely three
+hundred regular soldiers, many of whom were young boys, and scarcely
+one had ever smelt powder in a real fight.  But Miller was a host in
+himself, and though the odds were so desperate, I did not despair of
+victory.
+
+O'Brien, with a picked detachment of infantry, occupied a strong
+position, and began firing as soon as the assailants came within range.
+The cavalry and the remainder of the infantry were posted lower down
+the mountain side.
+
+"Aim low, lads," said the colonel, "and don't waste your ammunition.
+If they reach you, give them a taste of the steel."
+
+The flight of the Indians left us a great deal exposed, and in danger
+of being surrounded; but O'Brien had placed his men on a rocky
+platform, from which they kept one detachment in check.  Meanwhile, in
+our own quarter the fight raged furiously.  A large body of Spaniards,
+slipping past O'Brien, came on again and again.  We beat them back, but
+they gave us no rest.  Our men began to fall, and once I saw a shade of
+anxiety flit across the colonel's face.  It was gone in less than a
+second, but it confirmed my opinion that we could not hold our ground.
+
+For the most part, we contented ourselves with repelling the enemy's
+attacks; but twice our leader flung himself against their dragoons at
+the head of his cavalry.  We broke them easily, but could not pursue,
+and the experiment cost us a dozen in killed and wounded.
+
+"This won't do," said he.  "They will eat us up.--Crawford, tell
+O'Brien to retire on us slowly.  I intend to retreat.--Captain Prieto,
+get your men posted in that ravine to the left, and hold it until you
+are told to withdraw."
+
+I did not hear the captain's reply, being on my way to deliver the
+colonel's order.  I had left my horse behind, but even so, the journey
+was distinctly unpleasant, as my body was a prominent target for dozens
+of muskets.
+
+"Warm work, Crawford!" exclaimed O'Brien.  "I think the colonel is
+right.  We've caught a tartar this time, and no mistake.--Steady, my
+lads! we'll make them fight for every yard."
+
+I stayed with the detachment, helping to carry a wounded man.  The
+cheering Spaniards pressed us closely; if they could break through our
+cordon, Miller's men were doomed.  But we returned shot for shot, and
+stopped their occasional rushes by steel.  Every moment of delay gave
+our brave fellows further down the pass a better chance of escape.
+
+"Well done, O'Brien!" cried the colonel, as we joined him where he
+stood with a few horsemen.--"Steady, my lads!  Captain Prieto holds the
+pass.  Don't lose your heads, and we shall come out all right."
+
+At the ravine the horsemen halted, while the infantry continued the
+retreat; first O'Brien's men, and afterwards those who had held the
+pass under Captain Prieto.  This was the fiercest part of the struggle.
+The fighting was at hand-grips now, and I wondered we were not swept
+away headlong.
+
+"Stand firm, my lads, stand firm; it's your only chance!" sang out
+Miller cheerfully, and his eyes brightened with the passing minutes, as
+he knew that the bulk of his command was rapidly getting out of danger.
+
+For half an hour we held the narrow way with sword and pistol, and then
+a body of Spaniards, who unseen by us had worked round to the right,
+appeared lower down the pass.
+
+"We must cut our way through, and at once!" cried our leader.  "About
+face, lads, and into them.  Ride hard, and strike hard."
+
+We were in a trap now, and the only way to get out was by smashing the
+door.  The colonel led, the troopers followed as best they could, while
+O'Brien and I remained in the rear to help to check the rush of the
+enemy's main body.  There was a flash of swords, the sound of
+pistol-shots, an outburst of mocking laughter from the enemy, a "Viva!"
+from our own men, a vigorous "Hurrah!" from the colonel, and then we
+were through!
+
+"Go on, my lads!" cried the colonel, dropping to the rear.  "Your
+comrades are at the foot of the mountain.--A narrow shave, O'Brien!"
+
+"Yes! and we aren't clear yet," replied the Irishman, turning in his
+saddle to glance behind.  "There would be more chance for us if we
+could bring down that tall fellow who is leading."
+
+Whiz! whiz!  The bullets were buzzing about our ears now, too close to
+be comfortable, and but for our horses, we must soon have been killed
+or captured.  At any other time I would not have ridden down that
+mountain side at a foot pace.  It was a succession of steep descents,
+which made one dizzy to look at; and how my animal managed to keep its
+feet I could not understand.
+
+"Push on!" cried the colonel suddenly, "and tell Prieto to line the
+mouth of the pass, in case these fellows chase us all the way."
+
+He and O'Brien had stopped, intending to try the effect of a shot or
+two, and in another minute I was out of sight.  Fifty yards further
+down the road forked, and fancying the branch to the right looked the
+easier, I turned into it.
+
+"It may take a little longer to reach the bottom," I thought, "but it's
+a far less dangerous way.  I wonder if the others will think to turn
+down here."
+
+It often happens that we come to grief when feeling most secure, and it
+was so with me now.  I was riding at a swift gallop, and perhaps with
+less care than was necessary, when all at once my horse stumbled,
+failed to recover itself, and fell heavily.  Fortunately it lay still,
+and I was able to drag myself free, feeling dazed and bewildered.  Here
+was a pretty pickle!  What could I do?  In any case the colonel would
+reach the bottom first, and the retreat would be continued without me.
+
+Getting up, I tried to help the animal to its feet; but the poor thing
+either could not or would not move.  It was clear that I must leave it,
+and though hating to do so, I walked a few paces down the narrow path.
+The fall had shaken me considerably.  My head ached, and I had much ado
+to grope my way along.  Three several times in the course of a short
+distance I stumbled, and the third time fell heavily to the ground,
+twisting my left foot underneath me.  I tried to rise, but could not.
+Now, what should I do?  I dared not call for help, lest the Spaniards
+should hear me.  For two hours I lay thus, wondering what would become
+of me.  The noise of the shouting and firing had now died away; the
+enemy had probably returned to their stronghold.  Not a sound broke the
+stillness, and the gloom of evening began to envelop the path.
+
+It was now only that I realized fully my frightful danger.  Unless some
+one passed that way by accident, I should die of hunger and exposure!
+The idea nerved me to a fresh effort.  Rising painfully, and steadying
+myself here and there by the rocks, I limped a short distance, though
+every step wrung from me a cry of agony.  Several times I stopped to
+rest, and to wipe the sweat from my brow; twice in less than five
+minutes I was obliged to sit down, and at last the pain in my foot
+became so excruciating that I could struggle no further.
+
+"It's no good!" I exclaimed; "I must stay here till the morning, at
+least."  And finding a kind of recess in the rocks, I crept in.  Then
+it occurred to me to take off my boot; so opening my knife, I hacked at
+the leather till I succeeded in getting my foot free.
+
+This, after the first sudden rush of pain, was a great comfort.  I felt
+easier and brighter, and lay down to sleep in a happier frame of mind,
+intending to make a fresh start as soon as daylight appeared.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVI.
+
+GLORIOUS NEWS.
+
+Many times during the night the pain and the cold wakened me; but I
+contrived to get some sleep, for which I fell much better in the
+morning.  To my dismay, however, I found it impossible to walk; my
+ankle had swollen considerably, and the pain of putting my foot to the
+ground made me cry out in anguish.
+
+Yet, unless I wished to starve, something I must do.  Unbuckling my
+sword, and hiding it in the recess, I began to crawl along, trailing my
+injured foot carefully.  It was slow work, and I felt faint and dizzy,
+not only from my hurts, but also from want of food.
+
+Feeling sure that the Spaniards had by this time retired, I ventured to
+call for help, though little expecting to obtain it.  I cried aloud,
+both in Spanish and in the native patois, but received no answer.
+Again I crawled on, but now even move slowly than at first; and when I
+again tried to shout, my voice seemed weak and quavering.  My strength
+was nearly exhausted, when suddenly, and rather to my astonishment, I
+caught sight of a man peering at me curiously from behind a rock.  He
+was evidently a Spaniard, and an ugly customer.  He wore a long beard,
+a half-healed scar disfigured one side of his face, and on his head was
+jauntily set a small cap decked with gay-coloured ribbons.  On his
+coming forward I saw that he was dressed in the most grotesque manner,
+and heavily armed.
+
+"By St. Philip," I muttered softly, "I should have done better to give
+myself up to the soldiers!  Surely this fellow is the prince of
+ruffians."
+
+He stood a moment, leaning on his gun and regarding me with curiosity.
+
+"I don't know who you are," said I irritably, "but if you have a spark
+of human sympathy, you will give me what help you can."
+
+"Are you hurt?" he asked; and the cool tone in which he spoke made me
+angry beyond measure.
+
+Then he drew a step nearer, saying, "Perhaps the se�or will give me his
+pistols; the mountain air makes one suspicious."
+
+"Take them," I cried, "and anything else you desire; but get me some
+food and drink, and I will pay you well."
+
+"Ah," exclaimed the fellow, with renewed interest, "the se�or has money
+on him!  I had better mind that also.  There are lawless people in the
+mountains," and he grinned knowingly at me.
+
+"I have no money here," I answered, "but I will pay you well to get me
+carried to Lima."
+
+"That is a long way," he observed cautiously.  "No doubt the se�or has
+rings or some articles of jewellery?"
+
+"I don't possess a single valuable except this," said I, producing the
+silver key, "and that I must not part with."
+
+On seeing the key the fellow's manner changed instantly.
+
+"How did you get that?" he asked.  "Are you one of us?"
+
+The question could hardly be considered a compliment, but it assured me
+both of safety and of good treatment.
+
+"If you belong to the Order of the Silver Key," I remarked, "and
+recognize the authority of Raymon Sorillo, all is well.  He is my
+friend, and will give me shelter."
+
+"The chief is in the mountains, se�or, and not far off.  I will get
+help, and take you to him.  Meanwhile, eat a little coca; it will keep
+up your strength.  I shall not be long gone."
+
+"Thanks," said I, taking some of the coca, and chuckling to myself at
+this unexpected stroke of good fortune.
+
+The fellow was as good as his word.  He returned shortly with three
+Indians, armed like himself, and dressed in the same grotesque way.
+They were all sturdy fellows, and two of them, raising me gently from
+the ground, carried me in their arms with the greatest ease.
+
+Every step took me farther from the main track, and into a wilder part
+of the mountains, till at last my bearers stopped in a romantic ravine.
+There were several huts dotted about in an irregular ring, but most of
+the men were in the open, seated round a blazing fire.
+
+Three-fourths of the band were pure Indians, some were mulattoes, while
+a few were Spaniards of the lowest type.  They looked what they were,
+bandits and outlaws, and I must say that my acquaintance of the morning
+was not the most villainous of them.  They formed a striking company,
+quite in keeping with the gloomy grandeur of their home, shut in on
+every side by overhanging rocks and towering mountains.
+
+"Who is that?" suddenly roared a deep voice, and I saw the gigantic
+leader stride from the ring of men.  Approaching us, he looked me full
+in the face.
+
+"A stranger?" cried he.  "Why have you brought him here?"
+
+"I must have changed much since we last met," I interposed.  "But if
+you don't remember me, you will doubtless remember the present you gave
+me," and I showed him the silver key.
+
+He looked at me again, and this time with a gleam of recognition.
+
+"I know you now!" he cried.--"Make way there.  Room for an honoured
+guest--room for the son of Don Eduardo!"
+
+The name carried no meaning to the Spanish brigands; but the Indians
+received it with a great shout, for they knew how greatly my father had
+suffered in his efforts to make their lives easier.  They would have
+pressed round me to touch my hand, but the chief waved them back,
+saying I wanted food and rest.  They made a space beside the fire, and
+Sorillo himself attended to my injuries.
+
+"No bones broken," said he, after making an examination with as much
+skill as a surgeon.  "We have only to reduce this swelling of the
+ankle.  You can make yourself comfortable for a fortnight, at least.
+Now you must have some food, and then we'll talk."
+
+Now, I have no wish to give you a false impression of Raymon Sorillo.
+He was a wild, lawless man, who had passed his life in fighting against
+the Spanish government.  He had extraordinary courage and ability, and
+no man of his band was ever known to question an order issued by him.
+He had himself founded the Order of the Silver Key, and it was always
+my father's opinion that, but for the coming of San Martin, he would in
+time have transformed Peru into an Indian kingdom.  I am at least
+certain that his ambition tended in that direction.
+
+When the war broke out, numerous desperadoes flocked to him, and he was
+held responsible for many acts of cruelty.  Whether he was deserving of
+blame I cannot say.  Jos� held him to be cruel, and he generally had
+that reputation.  Perhaps it was only a case of giving a dog a bad
+name.  However that may be, it is certain he had a high opinion of my
+father, and for his sake was exceedingly kind to me.  But for him I
+might have lain long enough in the Spanish fortress, or perished in the
+sandy coast deserts.  Another service he did, which we only heard of
+afterwards, and then by accident, was the guarding of my mother.  From
+the time of my escape till the withdrawal of the Royalists from Lima,
+several of his men, unknown to her, kept ward over the hacienda.  They
+had received strict orders to protect its mistress against every
+danger, even at the risk of their lives.  In case of anything
+occurring, one was to rouse the natives belonging to the order in Lima,
+while another rode post-haste to the chief.
+
+Remembering these things, and others not here set down, I can hardly
+judge this remarkable man without bias; but even his most bitter
+enemies could not truly say he was wholly bad.  And it may be stated
+here that during my stay in the ravine I was treated like a prince.
+The best of everything was set before me, my slightest wish was law,
+and even the fiercest of the white men, forming a small minority of the
+band, were compelled to behave peaceably in my presence.
+
+After I had eaten and slept for a time, I told the chief the story I
+had heard from the young Spanish officer, Santiago Mariano, concerning
+my father, and asked his opinion.
+
+"I would build no hopes on that," said he, shaking his head
+thoughtfully.  "If your father is alive, we shall find him at Callao;
+but I doubt it."
+
+"The governor was expected to capitulate when I left Lima last," I
+remarked.
+
+"Yes; his provisions must be gone by now.  Your San Martin is an old
+woman.  Why did he allow Canterac to escape?  My men and I have been
+marched about from place to place just where we could do no good.  I
+shall not trouble to obey orders any more.  We are not children to be
+treated thus."
+
+Sorillo was very sore on the subject, and returned to it over and over
+again.  In the evening one of the band arrived with the information
+that Colonel Miller had sent out search-parties to look for me, and
+that three men were waiting at the entrance to the ravine.
+
+"Tell them," said the chief, "that Don Juan Crawford is with me.  He
+has sprained his ankle very badly, and cannot move for several days;
+otherwise he is unhurt.  As soon as he is well enough we will take him
+home."
+
+"I wish the colonel would let my mother know," said I; "she would be
+less anxious."
+
+"That is a poor compliment to me," observed Sorillo, smiling.  "My
+messenger is already on his way to the hacienda with the news.  I have
+told him to say you are in absolutely no danger, so that your mother
+will not be alarmed."
+
+"Then I am more than ever in your debt," said I gratefully, for the
+chief's action showed a thoughtful consideration quite unexpected.
+
+"We shall never pay all that is owing to the son of Don Eduardo
+Crawford," he answered gravely.  "And now let me carry you to my hut.
+A bed has been prepared there for you; it is a simple affair, but you
+will be comfortable."
+
+I slept well that night.  The pain had considerably decreased, and I
+had no cause for fear or anxiety.  Sorillo slept in another corner of
+the hut, going out so quietly in the morning that he did not disturb
+me.  Indeed the sun was high in the heavens when I wakened.
+
+The chief's messenger had not returned, and another day passed before
+he appeared; then, to my delight, he brought Jos� with him.
+
+"Well, Jack," exclaimed my old friend, on finding that I was really not
+much hurt, "you gave Miller a fine fright.  He thought you were either
+dead or carried off.  His troops are back in Lima.  It seems Canterac
+was too good for you."
+
+"He flung half his army at us," I responded rather sulkily, for one
+does not like being reminded of a beating.  "It must have been a matter
+of ten to one.  But never mind that.  What news do you bring from Lima?
+How is my mother? and how are events moving there?"
+
+"Your mother is well, and sends her love to you, and events are shaping
+just as we could wish them to.  We are masters of Callao."
+
+"Then the forts have fallen?  O Jos�, tell me quickly--I am burning
+with excitement--was my father there?"
+
+"Keep cool!" said he, smiling; "I don't want you to throw yourself into
+a fever.  Yes, we found your father there."
+
+"Thank God for that!" I murmured reverently.  "You can tell me the rest
+at your leisure."
+
+"There isn't much to tell," he replied.  "It seems that your father was
+suddenly surrounded in the mountains by a body of regulars, and ordered
+to submit.  Taken by surprise, there was nothing else to do; but while
+he stood hesitating, some one--not the captain in charge--shot him
+down, and he remembers nothing more till he found himself in Callao.
+The governor, La Mar, happens to be a kind-hearted fellow; so he had
+your father's wound dressed, gave him the most comfortable cell, and
+altogether treated him so well that, in spite of a long illness, he is
+entirely recovered."
+
+"This is better and better, Jos�!  I hope we shall have a chance of
+doing La Mar a good turn."
+
+"Your father will be in a position to see to that, as San Martin has
+already made him a member of the government."
+
+"That's all right then.--By-the-bye, have you seen Montilla?"
+
+"Yes.  The old fox plays the game well.  He is delighted--so he
+says--to be able to hand over the estates, which he was keeping in
+trust for you, to the rightful owner."
+
+"Do you think my father believes him?"
+
+"I can't say.  Your mother doesn't; neither do I."
+
+"Nor I."
+
+We remained silent for some minutes, when, Sorillo joining us, I told
+him the good news.  At first he did not seem to comprehend.  When he
+did, I thought he would take leave of his senses.  Even Jos�, who was
+not given to judging by outward show, was impressed by the man's
+genuine pleasure.
+
+But the grand event took place some days later, when my father himself
+came to remove me to Lima.  Sorillo marshalled his Indians at the mouth
+of the pass, and they escorted him up the ravine in a triumphal
+procession, amidst enthusiastic cries of "Long live Don Eduardo
+Crawford! long live the Indians' friend!"
+
+There is not much to tell about our meeting.  It was all very simple,
+though I suppose there were not at that moment two happier people in
+Peru.  My father was exceptionally loving and kind-hearted, but he
+never made a fuss, while my English blood kept me from being too
+demonstrative.
+
+"Well, Jack, my boy," he exclaimed, giving me a warm grip of the hand,
+"I reckon you never expected to see me again?"
+
+"Well, father, I had heard it was possible you were alive, but I hardly
+dared hope so."
+
+As Jos� said, he was looking very well, considering the circumstances.
+His cheeks were thinner, and had lost their colour; his hair had turned
+gray; he seemed less robust than formerly; but his mind was brisk and
+alert, and his eyes retained their old fire.
+
+Sorillo would have kept him awhile as an honoured guest; but he was
+anxious to return, and the carriage waited at the foot of the
+mountains.  On one point, however, the guerilla chief would not be
+denied.  Leaving the Spaniards and mulattoes in the ravine, he insisted
+on accompanying us, with his Indians, to Lima, and my father did not
+like to refuse him.  From the ravine they carried me on a comfortable
+litter to the foot of the mountains, where Jos� had stayed with the
+carriage.  Then forming up in front, they marched along singing and
+cheering for Don Eduardo Crawford.
+
+We slept that night in a deserted hacienda, and arrived at our home
+next day.  Jos� had ridden forward to inform my mother of her coming
+visitors, so that she might be able to provide them with food and drink.
+
+It was a grand home-coming for me, and a great triumph for my father.
+Though not a vain man, the incident pleased him, because it showed that
+the people for whom he had suffered so much were grateful for his
+efforts to do them good.
+
+As the journey had made me rather excited, I took no part in the
+rejoicings which were kept up through the night; but after breakfast
+the Indians took their departure, and the noise of their cheering might
+have been heard at the other end of the town.
+
+"It's rather rough on you, Jack," laughed my father, coming into my
+room; "but now you will have a chance of a little quiet."
+
+"I am not sure of that," observed my mother, who was looking from a
+window: "here are two cavaliers crossing the park.  By the way they
+ride, I should say they are Englishmen."
+
+"Is one a big, handsome man?" I asked.
+
+"Well, yes, he is certainly big!"
+
+"That is O'Brien, then; and the other most probably is the colonel."
+
+I was not mistaken.  In a short time Colonel Miller and his friend were
+in the room, and each in turn shook me heartily by the hand.
+
+"We hardly expected to see you again so soon," said the colonel,
+laughing.  "We thought Canterac had taken a fancy to your company.  I
+hope there is no permanent injury to the foot?"
+
+"Oh no, colonel; only I shan't be able to do any more mountain climbing
+yet awhile."
+
+"There's none to do," broke in O'Brien; "we've taken to dancing
+instead."
+
+"I shall not be able even to join in that for some time."
+
+"No?  What a pity!  We are enjoying ourselves immensely, though it
+seems rather an odd way of carrying on a war."
+
+"The general perhaps considers that his troops require rest," suggested
+my mother.
+
+"Even so, staying here is a great mistake," said the colonel.  "We are
+giving the Royalists time to recover their strength, and we shall
+suffer for it later on.  Unfortunately the general appears to think
+that Lima is Peru."
+
+"Not the general only," remarked my father; "many of his officers would
+be sorry to exchange Lima for the mountains."
+
+"That is so," admitted O'Brien frankly.  "The truth of the matter is,
+the citizens have treated us too well.  They have made us so
+comfortable that we wish to stay here as long as possible."
+
+"In that case," said my mother, smiling, "we must steel our hearts
+against you."
+
+"And drive us into the wilderness again!" laughed O'Brien gaily.
+"Se�ora, you will not be so cruel?"
+
+"I will not begin to-day," she replied merrily, "because I hope you
+will stay and dine with us.  To-morrow--"
+
+"Ah! let us think of to-morrow when it comes; to-day we will enjoy
+ourselves."
+
+"A pleasant creed," remarked my father, "though more often than not it
+leads to ruin.  I shall begin to think you are falling a victim to our
+South American vice."
+
+"What is that?"
+
+"Never to do to-day what can be put off till to-morrow."
+
+"That is exactly what we are doing," remarked the colonel, "and I quite
+agree with you that it is not a paying game, especially in time of war.
+A chance once missed never presents itself again."
+
+"An excellent reason for accepting Donna Maria's gracious invitation,"
+laughed O'Brien.  "Colonel, I congratulate you on your powers of
+argument."
+
+Although talking in this bantering way, it must not be thought that he
+was really in favour of remaining idle; but he was a soldier, and had
+to obey orders, however much he disliked them.
+
+My father, being a member of the government, was in a much worse
+position, as many held him responsible in a measure for the lazy way in
+which the war was being conducted.  Really he had no power over the
+army at all, and could not on his own authority have moved a section of
+recruits.
+
+O'Brien had spoken truly in saying that the officers had taken to
+dancing instead of climbing.  All the chief families opened their doors
+to them, and our neighbour, Montilla, who had so suddenly been
+converted to our side, gave a ball more brilliant than even the oldest
+inhabitant could remember.
+
+Thus the days passed into weeks; my ankle grew strong and well, I was
+able to resume my duties, and still there was no sign of moving.  We
+held possession of Lima and Callao, but on the other side of the
+mountains the Royalists did as they pleased.
+
+"I hope," remarked my father more than once, "that when we wish to move
+we shall be able to do so."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVII.
+
+DUTY FIRST.
+
+As far as we in Peru were concerned, the winter of 1821-22 passed
+without disturbance; but Colonel Miller busied himself in drilling the
+new regiment of Peruvians which had been placed under his command.  As
+he had made me his aid-de-camp, we were much together, and he paid
+frequent visits to our house, where he was always gladly welcomed.
+
+Owing to my father's office, I saw a great deal at this time of the
+protector, who treated me with extreme kindness.  Although such a great
+soldier, he had no love for war, and planned to bring about the real
+independence of the country without fighting.
+
+"I do not wish the Peruvians to kill each other," he repeatedly
+declared.  "I wish them to live at peace with each other; and whenever
+they are ready to do that I will step aside, so that they may choose
+whatever kind of government they please."
+
+My father, who admired him greatly, several times pointed out the
+dangers that loomed ahead.
+
+"You are reckoning without Bolivar," said he.  "He has already driven
+the Spaniards from Venezuela and Colombia, and is steadily pushing them
+into Peru.  He will follow them and mix himself up with our affairs.
+He is mad with ambition, and you will find there is not room enough for
+both of you in one country."
+
+"In that case I will go away," answered San Martin, with a sad smile.
+"I am here, not for my own good, but for that of Peru."
+
+"After bearing the heat and burden of the day, you will give up your
+just reward?  It is monstrous!"
+
+"I seek no reward, Crawford; I seek only the happiness of Peru.  In
+order to gain that I shall willingly sacrifice myself."
+
+"We will not permit it, general!"
+
+"You must, because it is your duty.  Having made South America
+independent of Spain, it would be sheer wickedness to turn and rend
+each other.  Let Bolivar have the glory.  I shall have a quiet
+conscience.  But it seems to me that we are giving substance to
+shadows.  Bolivar will join hands with me.  We shall establish a strong
+government in Peru; then having done our duty, each will retire."
+
+My father shook his head, saying, "You are mistaken; General Bolivar's
+ambition is to make all South America into one country, with himself at
+the head.  Nothing less than that will content him."
+
+"Then he will fail," answered San Martin.  "Let us hope he will not
+drag the country to ruin with him."
+
+About this time, March 1822, news reached us that our forces at Ica had
+met with a terrible defeat.  By a swift and daring march, the Spanish
+general, Canterac, had thrown his army against them with startling
+suddenness.  They tried to retreat, but, being attacked in the night,
+were cut to pieces, and an enormous quantity of stores passed into the
+hands of the Royalists.  The news cast a gloom over the city, and many
+weak-kneed Patriots lost their heads entirely.  Unless we could obtain
+help from General Bolivar, they cried, our cause was undone.  My father
+did not believe this; he distrusted Bolivar, and made no scruple of
+saying so.
+
+"Still we must find out just what he means to do," remarked San Martin
+one evening.
+
+"His intentions are evident," replied my father, rather bitterly.  "He
+means to make himself master of the country, and to push you aside."
+
+"I think you misjudge him; but in any case I place the happiness of
+Peru before personal ambition.--By the way," he added, turning to me,
+"have you ever seen this remarkable man?"
+
+"No, general."
+
+"Would you like to do so?  Ah, I see you would.  Well, you shall.  I am
+going to meet him at Guayaquil; you shall go with me, unless your
+father objects."
+
+"I have no objection, general.  It will do him good, by opening his
+eyes!"
+
+"Very well; let him be ready to-morrow morning.  I will let Colonel
+Miller know of the arrangement."
+
+"Jack," exclaimed my father when San Martin had gone, "this is a great
+honour for you.  I don't expect the protector will take any one else,
+except Guido, who goes with him everywhere.  I almost envy you, my boy,
+for San Martin and Bolivar are certainly the two most wonderful men in
+South America."
+
+"Will there be any danger?" asked my mother.
+
+"I think not; the visit is a friendly one."
+
+The next day, having put on my gaudiest uniform, blue with red facings,
+white edging, and abundance of gold lace, I went over to Callao,
+meeting the general and his "aid" just as they were embarking on the
+schooner _Macedonia_.  As usual, the general looked grave and rather
+stern.  He was very silent too, and as the schooner slipped from her
+moorings he disappeared within his cabin.  Guido, who shared a cabin
+with me, was far less reserved than his chief.
+
+"This is a fool's errand," said he brusquely.  "The protector is just
+playing into Bolivar's hands."
+
+"He knows what he is doing, I think."
+
+"That makes me the more angry.  But for him the Spaniards would still
+be in possession of Peru; and now, rather than make a bother, he'll let
+the other fellow take the prize."
+
+"What would you have him do?"
+
+"Do?" cried he excitedly; "why, stand his ground.  I would say, 'I have
+done all the hard work, I have made Peru free, and I am going to be
+master of the country.  Let Bolivar or any one else come here at his
+peril!'"
+
+"Then there would be a three-cornered fight, and the Spaniards would
+have the best of it!"
+
+"That wouldn't be San Martin's fault.  Do you think Bolivar cares how
+the country suffers as long as he comes out on top?  Not he!"
+
+"If that is so, San Martin is certainly playing the better part."
+
+"The better part? a fig for the better part!  He can beat Bolivar and
+the Spanish put together if he chooses.  He is far and away the finest
+general in South America."
+
+"And one of the best men, if he acts as you say he will."
+
+But Guido was much too angry to take that view.  When I added that
+without Bolivar's help we could hardly reduce the Spaniards to
+submission, he laughed scornfully and turned away.
+
+On the evening of July 25, 1822, the _Macedonia_ dropped anchor in the
+harbour of Guayaquil, and immediately afterwards two of Bolivar's
+officers came on board with a friendly greeting from their chief.
+
+"Caramba!" muttered Guido beneath his breath, "it makes me mad!  It's
+like the old custom of garlanding a victim before offering him up as a
+sacrifice!"
+
+That night we slept on the schooner, disembarking the next day.  The
+route was lined by Bolivar's soldiers, who saluted stiffly, and by
+thousands of people cheering wildly for their renowned visitor.
+
+"There it is, you see," whispered Guido; "the people want San Martin.
+If they had their way, Guayaquil would be a part of Peru, with him as
+president."
+
+"But they haven't," said I, "and Bolivar has; which makes all the
+difference."
+
+"Look!" exclaimed he contemptuously, as the carriage stopped; "isn't it
+like a circus show?"
+
+In front of a house stood a group of officers dressed in the most
+magnificent and gorgeous uniforms.  As San Martin stepped from the
+carriage, one of them, moving a pace forward, embraced him.
+
+"That's Bolivar!" whispered Guido, and I gazed at the great captain
+with intense interest.
+
+Perhaps I was prejudiced against him, but he did not come up to my
+expectations.  He was short, thin, and narrow-chested, his skin was
+sallow, his high but narrow forehead was deeply lined.  His hair was
+black and curly; he had thick lips and beautiful white teeth, which he
+was fond of showing.  His eyes were large and black but deeply sunken;
+now bright and sparkling, again dull and glassy.  His features, to me
+at least, were harsh and unpleasing; but he was evidently a man of
+great energy, to whom action was as the breath of life.
+
+Arm in arm the two leaders entered the house, Guido and I following
+with Bolivar's staff.  The saloon presented a striking scene, being
+filled with officers in brilliant uniforms and by beautifully-dressed
+ladies.  A young girl, stepping forward, greeted San Martin, and placed
+a laurel wreath of gold upon his head.
+
+"What rubbish!" muttered Guido testily.  "Does she think he is as great
+a mummer as Bolivar?"
+
+"Hush!" I whispered, not wishing his outspoken comments to be heard.
+"See, he is taking it off."
+
+We could not hear what he said, but he spoke pleasantly, and beckoning
+to Guido, placed the wreath in his hand.
+
+"Take great care of this," said he; "I value it highly for the sake of
+the giver."
+
+"Bolivar would have worn a dozen, one on top of the other," growled
+Guido.
+
+Presently the two chiefs proceeded to an inner room, where they
+remained alone for nearly two hours, while we chatted with the Bolivian
+officers, several of whom were Englishmen.
+
+At length the door opened, the leaders came out, and San Martin
+accompanied Bolivar to the street, where they parted with a show of
+cordial friendship.  Directly afterwards the assembly dispersed, and we
+were left in peace.  The next day they had a much longer interview, and
+at its close I read in San Martin's face that he had resolved to
+sacrifice himself for the good of Peru.
+
+"Guido," said he quietly, "let the baggage be taken aboard.  They are
+giving a grand dinner in my honour this evening; as soon as I can get
+away, we sail for Callao."
+
+The banquet, which was held in the house set apart for Bolivar, was on
+the most magnificent scale.  The room was bright with showy uniforms;
+every one appeared to be covered with stars and crosses and
+decorations.  I almost regretted that my silver key was not dangling
+outside my tunic.
+
+San Martin sat in the chair of honour at the right of our host.  Of all
+the good things set before him he ate and drank little, his thoughts
+being evidently far removed from the banqueting-room.
+
+This was the first time I had been at a public dinner, and but for
+anxiety on our leader's account, I should have enjoyed it immensely.
+Presently, when the servants had removed the dishes, Bolivar filled his
+glass with wine, and stood up.  Instantly the buzz of conversation
+ceased; the officers gazed intently at their chief, who was about to
+propose a toast.  I listened too, wondering if my ears were playing me
+false.  As to Guido, I thought that, in his scornful contempt, he would
+have kicked the table over.
+
+"Gentlemen," said our host, "to the two greatest men of South
+America--General San Martin and myself!"
+
+There was a round of cheering, while Guido and I hardly dared look at
+each other, and not at all at our chief.
+
+Soon afterward we adjourned to the ballroom, but did not stay long, San
+Martin saying, "Let us go; I cannot stand this riot!"
+
+Quietly bidding Bolivar farewell, we followed one of the high
+officials, who let us out through a private door, and escorted us to
+the quay.  There we boarded the schooner, which in less than an hour
+was under way.  The protector went straight to his cabin without
+speaking.  He was bitterly disappointed at the result of the interview,
+but all that passed his lips on the subject was, "Bolivar is not the
+man we took him to be."  These words were said as we paced the deck
+together next morning, and they were spoken more to himself than to us.
+
+"It has happened as I predicted," remarked Guido that afternoon, "and
+the rest will follow.  As soon as he has put things in order, he will
+leave Peru to make room for Bolivar.  And he will not let people know
+the reason; he will even make Bolivar's path smoother."
+
+"You would plant it thick with thorns, I suppose?"
+
+"I would plant it with naked swords!"
+
+"Ah, Guido," I cried, "that is not San Martin's teaching!"
+
+"No," said he surlily; "it's a lesson of my own composing."
+
+The voyage passed uneventfully, and on the twentieth of August the
+_Macedonia_ once more sailed into the Bay of Callao.
+
+During our absence a riot had taken place in Lima; but the people
+received San Martin enthusiastically, coming down in thousands to the
+port, and escorting him to his country house in triumph.
+
+I said little of what had taken place to any one except my father, and
+he was able to judge of things by other signs.  The protector, who told
+him Bolivar had agreed to help Peru with troops, worked feverishly day
+and night, until the opening of the first Peruvian Congress.  Then
+removing his sash of authority, he resigned his office, and formally
+handed over the care of the country to the new Parliament.  That same
+evening my father and I called at his house, where we found Guido, ever
+faithful, waiting in the anteroom.
+
+"Where is the general?" asked my father.
+
+"Here, Crawford!" answered San Martin, opening the door of an inner
+room.  "Is anything wrong?"
+
+"No, general, but I fear there soon will be.  Do you know it is
+whispered in the town that you are about to leave Peru?"
+
+"The rumour is correct, my friend, as I have just been telling Guido.
+No, it is useless to talk; my mind is made up.  I can do the country no
+more good."
+
+For a long time both Guido and my father tried to prevail upon him to
+stay, but in vain.
+
+"The world will regard you as a deserter!" urged Guido.
+
+"What matters it as long as I know the truth?  I care not for the
+applause of the world, my friends, nor fear its frowns.  I leave my
+work unfinished, it is true, but others will finish it and reap the
+glory.  Besides, Peru will be the better for my absence."
+
+"No, no!" exclaimed my father earnestly.  "The people love you and
+trust you.  They will uphold your authority."
+
+San Martin held out his hand, saying,--
+
+"You are a true friend, Crawford, but you are a true patriot and a
+shrewd man as well.  Now listen to me.  Without help it will take two
+years at least to subdue the Spaniards.  That will mean two years of
+misery.  Do you follow me?"
+
+"Perfectly."
+
+"With help the war can be brought to an end in six months.  The
+Chilians can do no more, and we can look only to Bolivar.  Now, do you
+imagine that he and I can run in double harness?"
+
+My father shook his head sorrowfully.
+
+"Of course not.  Bolivar is a great man, a remarkable man; but he is
+ambitious, and will brook no rival.  Now, suppose I remain.  It will be
+difficult to avoid strife, and the country will be plunged back into
+its old condition of slavery.  Do you think that San Martin will give a
+day of delight to the common enemy?  No, my friend; if only Peru
+retains its independence, I care nothing for self.  Let men call me
+what they please.  The path of duty lies plain before me; I am going to
+walk in it.  Let Bolivar have the glory; it is but a breath.  I shall
+not say this publicly; neither will you.  I am broken in health; let
+that do for the present.  In years to come, perhaps, the world will
+recognize my good faith; if not, never mind!"
+
+Even after that my father endeavoured to dissuade him from going, but
+his efforts were useless.
+
+"Let me wish you good-bye, Crawford," said he.  "I need hardly counsel
+you to accept the help which Bolivar offers.  The man may not please
+you, but--country first!--Good-bye, my boy; if you make half as good a
+man as your father, you will not do amiss."
+
+We grasped his hand for the last time, and leaving Guido with him, went
+into the road, mounted our horses, and rode slowly homeward.
+
+Next day it became known that San Martin had left Peru for ever, and
+instantly men's tongues were loosed in a babel of talk.  Some few
+judged him rightly; but for the most part his splendid services were
+forgotten, and with sickening haste people turned their gaze toward
+Bolivar, the new sun.
+
+"There is a lesson for you, Jack, worth heeding," remarked my father.
+"If only these people knew the truth!"
+
+"They wouldn't understand it!" said I hotly.  "The idea of a man making
+such a sacrifice is beyond them.  You know I have sometimes thought the
+general made a big mistake in the conduct of the war, but he atoned for
+everything last night.  He looked simply splendid when he talked about
+giving up everything for duty."
+
+"Ah!" exclaimed my father thoughtfully, "with all his battles to look
+back upon, he never won a greater victory than he did last evening.  It
+must almost have broken his heart, Jack, but he did not whimper."
+
+Few spoke in this strain, and I was disappointed that even Jos� took
+sides with the majority.  Sentiment, beyond his love for us, did not
+appeal to him; he looked only on the practical side of things.
+
+"I shouldn't have thought San Martin would have thrown up the sponge,"
+said he.  "I gave him credit for more pluck than that.  They do say in
+the town that he was keen on making himself king or emperor."
+
+"A pack of rubbish!" I cried.
+
+"Well," said Jos�, "I would have seen the thing through, anyhow.  It
+won't be pleasant for your father, either, when Bolivar gets the
+whip-hand.  San Martin's friends will be in Bolivar's black books.
+I'll guarantee Montilla has written to him already."
+
+"You aren't in a very good temper this morning, Jos�," said I, with a
+laugh.
+
+"No; because I am looking a long way ahead, and see things.  Is your
+father going to keep in office?"
+
+"I expect so.  He may be able to do the country a little good."
+
+"And himself a lot of harm!  Shall you resign your commission?"
+
+"How can I? the Spaniards are still in the field."
+
+"And will take a lot of beating yet!  'Twould have answered better if
+the Peruvians had done the job by themselves."
+
+I might have mentioned that if they found it so difficult with the aid
+of others, they could hardly have done it alone; but dear old Jos� was
+too angry for argument, so I let the subject drop.
+
+Among the officers opinion was divided, but no one had much to say on
+the matter.  It almost seemed as if they feared to express their real
+opinion in case of future trouble.  Colonel Miller, however, spoke his
+mind freely, and so did the other Englishmen with him.
+
+"I am sorry San Martin has gone," said he; "but my duty is plain.  I am
+an officer in the army of Peru, and must obey orders from the
+government.  If they give the chief command to Bolivar, why, I shall
+fight under him, just as I have done under San Martin.  That's one good
+thing about soldiering--you always know where you are."
+
+"Humph!" said Jos�, on hearing the remark, "I'm not so sure that the
+colonel's right.  In my opinion there's more than one soldier just at
+present wondering if he hadn't better join the other party again.
+Another affair like the one at Ica would send them flying to Canterac
+in scores.  The great thing with some of them is to be on the winning
+side."
+
+As soon as San Martin had left Peru, Bolivar sent a message, offering
+the aid of his troops; but the government declined all assistance.  A
+new spirit seemed to enter into the nation: the people declared the
+country would fight its own battles, and preparations to meet the
+Spaniards were eagerly pushed on.
+
+What came of them we shall shortly see.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVIII.
+
+DARK DAYS.
+
+"I have decided to leave you in Lima, Crawford, to help Videla with the
+second battalion.  I have good reasons for doing so," continued the
+colonel, observing my disappointed look; "and, anyhow, you are well out
+of this expedition.  I don't expect much from it."
+
+The expedition of which Colonel Miller spoke had been planned on a
+large scale for the purpose of crushing the enemy in the south, and the
+first battalion of the Peruvian Legion formed part of it.  Naturally I
+had quite looked forward to sailing with it, and was not at all
+pleased, therefore, to be left behind.  I had many friends, some of
+them not much older than myself, among the officers of the first
+battalion, and on the morning of the embarkation I went over to Callao
+to see them off.  They were delighted at the thought of active service,
+and of course chaffed me unmercifully.
+
+"Take care of the town, Juan," said one; "we shall want it when we come
+back."
+
+"Some day, when you are a man, we will take you with us," laughed
+Ensign Alzura, a merry, round-faced youngster of sixteen; "but we must
+have seasoned men for this trip, dear boy."
+
+"Should the Spaniards arrive while we're away, ask them to wait till
+our return," remarked another.
+
+"I don't wonder you are so excited," said I coolly; "I felt the same
+before I knew what a battle is really like."
+
+"Bravo, Crawford!" cried the colonel, who had joined us unperceived;
+"that's a round shot for them.  They haven't heard the whistle of the
+bullets yet, eh?  Well, good-bye; it's time you were getting ashore.
+You'll hear news of us from time to time."
+
+"Good news too, I hope, colonel.--Good-bye, Zuviria, Alzura, and all of
+you.  I hope you've shipped a schoolmaster," and with that parting shot
+I ran down to the quay.
+
+The Peruvians were on board the _O'Higgins_; but there were several
+other vessels, and presently they all stood out of the bay amidst a
+regular salvo of cheering from the spectators.
+
+I returned to Lima feeling rather gloomy, but Lieutenant-Colonel
+Videla, who commanded our second battalion, gave me little time for
+brooding.  Fresh recruits were coming in every day, and the work of
+attending to them kept me employed for weeks.  There was still a
+Patriot army encamped outside Lima, but it did nothing, though who was
+to blame I could not say.
+
+About the end of the year, vague yet disquieting rumours began to
+circulate in the city.  It was said that our troops in the south had
+met with defeat, had been cut to pieces and practically swept out of
+existence.  The victorious Spaniards, uniting all their forces, were
+making ready for a swoop on Lima.  Everything was lost!
+
+Don Felipe brought us the news, and it was easy to see, in spite of his
+talk, that it did not displease him.
+
+"We shall have to call in Bolivar now," said he, "or make peace with
+the viceroy.  Of course you and I will suffer.  Our estates will be
+confiscated; we shall probably be thrown into prison; but we are good
+patriots, and will not shrink from our duty."
+
+"If the others agree with me," replied my father, "we shall neither
+call in Bolivar nor make peace.  There is still an army left!"
+
+"Just so, but we cannot trust it.  The troops are almost in open
+rebellion, and this news will not quiet them."
+
+"We do not yet know that it is true."
+
+"I am sure of it," said our neighbour hastily.  "I have--that is to
+say, there can be no doubt of it."
+
+A week or two later--January 20, 1823, to be precise--there walked into
+the quarters of the second battalion a young officer.  His face was
+white and drawn, his eyes were sunken; he looked so pitifully weak and
+ill that at first I failed to recognize him.
+
+"Well, Crawford," he exclaimed, "am I as changed as all that?  Don't
+you know your old chum Alzura when you see him?"
+
+"Alzura?" I echoed, aghast.
+
+"All that is left of him."
+
+"Where is the first battalion?"
+
+Spreading his hands out dramatically, he said, "Haven't you heard?
+Don't you know what has happened at Torata and Moquegua?"
+
+"I have heard nothing but some very dark rumours," I replied uneasily.
+
+"They cannot be darker than the truth.  The army has been destroyed,
+and the battalion with it."
+
+"And the colonel?"
+
+"Oh, he was in another district with the light company.  But I'll tell
+you all about it.  We had a wretched voyage, and arrived at Arica half
+dead.  After that we sat down for three weeks doing nothing, when
+Alvarado, who was in chief command, sent the colonel north with the
+light company.  A lucky thing for them, too!"
+
+"Go on!" said I impatiently.
+
+"Well, at last we moved, and marched as far as Torata.  Do you know the
+place at all?"
+
+"Oh yes; it's a few miles from Moquegua, isn't it?"
+
+"That's it.  Well, the Spaniards were at Torata, and we tried to turn
+them out, but failed.  Then they attacked, and we were beaten.  It was
+simply awful.  The legion fought like a battalion of heroes.  Every one
+praised us; but praise won't bring the dead to life.  We broke two
+cavalry charges, and stood our ground till there wasn't a cartridge
+left."
+
+"Then you retreated?"
+
+"Some of us did, not many!  We left fifteen of our officers there and
+three-fourths of the battalion, all dead or dangerously wounded.
+Alvarado took us back to Moquegua; but the Spaniards caught us again.
+The second defeat was worse than the first, and when the battle was
+over there was no army left.  As to the battalion--!  O Juan, isn't it
+awful?  La Rosa, Tarramona, Escobar, Rivero--all gone!  I should
+think," he added, with a bitter laugh, "I must have been senior
+officer."
+
+It was, indeed, a terrible story.  I could hardly realize that of all
+my high-spirited young friends who had sailed from Callao this was the
+only one to return.
+
+"How did you get back?" I asked, after a time.
+
+"With General Martinez.  We embarked at Ilo, while General Alvarado
+went on to Iquiqui.  The game's up in that part of the country, Juan!"
+
+"Oh, nonsense!" I replied brusquely.  "We aren't going to lose heart
+over a couple of defeats."
+
+Of course the news soon spread, and the people, especially the
+soldiers, were wild with anger.  They said it was the fault of the
+government, and called for fresh rulers.  Some advised sending for
+Bolivar, while a few prominent citizens even talked of coming to terms
+with the enemy.
+
+One morning, toward the end of February, Videla called a council of the
+officers belonging to his battalion.  He looked pale, but firm and
+determined, as if he had resolved on some particular course.
+
+When we had taken our seats, he rose and said, "Se�ors, I have called
+you together to discuss an important proposal.  Affairs, as you know,
+are in a bad state; the country is in disorder, and the enemy are
+triumphing everywhere.  Under these circumstances, the chiefs of the
+army have decided to force the hands of the government.  To-morrow the
+troops will march to Lima and demand that a president shall be
+appointed with full powers.  Now, I will have no part or lot in this
+matter.  I call it treason.  If the government choose to resign, well
+and good; if they resist, my sword, at least, is at their service."
+
+A round of cheering greeted his remarks, and one after another the
+officers sprang up, pledging themselves to support him.
+
+"Thank you," said he quietly; "I knew you would not fail me.  Nothing
+will be done until the morning.  Then, when the order to march is
+issued, I shall command you to stand still."
+
+"Suppose they use force, colonel?" I suggested.
+
+His face grew paler, but he answered steadily, "I trust they will not
+be so foolish.  Should they be, the battalion, will know how to defend
+itself."
+
+"Caramba!" exclaimed Alzura, when the meeting broke up, "it seems to me
+that the second battalion is likely to follow the first.  What can we
+do against an army?"
+
+"There will be no fighting," I answered cheerfully.  "They will simply
+march without us, and the government will agree to their demands."
+
+I spoke as if my opinion were conclusive, but nevertheless I did not
+sleep comfortably that night.  The troops were wakened early, breakfast
+was hurried over, and then, to the sound of bugles, the various
+regiments paraded.  Presently they began to move, and a mounted officer
+dashed over to know why our battalion remained still.
+
+"By my orders they remain.  I refuse to join in what my officers and I
+regard as an act of treason," calmly replied Videla.  "We will
+willingly march against the enemy, but not against our own government."
+
+Bending over, the officer whispered something in his ear.
+
+"We have counted the cost," replied our chief, "and are not to be
+frightened.  Let the men who are unwilling to obey me fall out; no harm
+will happen to them," said he, turning to the troop.
+
+Not a man moved, the brave fellows stood in their ranks, firm as rocks.
+Again the officer whispered to Videla, and then dashed off at full
+speed.  It was, as Alzura afterwards remarked, a bad quarter of an hour
+for us.  If the chiefs endeavoured to force us into submission, there
+could be but one result.  Videla would not yield, and we could not
+desert him.  Perhaps the firmness of our bearing saved us; perhaps the
+chiefs feared the people, for the battalion was composed entirely of
+Peruvians; but whatever the reason, we remained unmolested, and the
+army marched off without us.  Then the men were dismissed, and we
+gathered in groups to chat over the incident.
+
+"What will happen now?" asked one fellow.
+
+"It is all decided," replied Videla.  "I heard last night that the
+government will yield.  Riva-Aguero is to be made president, and Santa
+Cruz commander-in-chief."
+
+"And what shall we do, colonel?"
+
+"Obey orders," he answered, smiling.  "We cannot fight for a government
+that has resigned its powers."
+
+The evening proved Videla's words true.  The troops, having
+accomplished their object, returned to camp, rejoicing that the country
+had a new ruler.
+
+"Now," exclaimed Alzura, as we turned in for the night, "I suppose we
+shall see great things done!"
+
+"New brooms sweep clean," said I, laughing, "but unfortunately they
+soon become old ones."
+
+However, it really did seem as if the new general intended to push on
+the war in vigorous style.  Preparations were made for another
+expedition to the south; Bolivar was invited to Peru; and Sucre, his
+most brilliant general, had already come.
+
+At this time we knew nothing of Colonel Miller; but about the end of
+March he returned to Lima, having done more with his handful of men
+than all the southern army.  The stories told by officers who served
+with him filled us with envy.
+
+"Did you hear how we cleared the Royalists out of Arequipa?" asked
+Captain Plaza.  "That was a rich joke," and he laughed even at the
+recollection of it.
+
+"Let us hear it," said I.
+
+"Well, of course, it loses in the telling, but I'll do my best.  First
+of all, we caught a peasant and shut him up where he could hear all and
+see nothing.  The poor fellow imagined we were going to shoot him as a
+spy.  About every half-hour or so one of us would go to the colonel to
+report the arrival of fresh troops, and ask where they were to camp.
+Then we spread our few men about the valley and kindled dozens of
+blazing fires.  As soon as it was dark enough, the colonel ordered the
+man to be brought out."
+
+"His face was a study," interrupted Cordova.  "He certainly expected to
+be shot."
+
+"The colonel read him a lecture," continued Plaza, "and wound up by
+offering to spare his life on his promising to take a letter to the
+governor of Arequipa.  'But,' said the colonel sternly, 'you are not to
+tell what you have seen here.  I want him to think we are very few in
+number.  Do you understand?'  The fellow promised readily enough,
+placed the letter in his hat, mounted his horse, and rode down the
+valley, counting the fires as he went.  Of course he told every
+Royalist officer the truth as he believed it, and they cleared out of
+the district in double-quick time.  Then we forced the governor to
+supply us with forage for five hundred horses."
+
+"But you didn't have five hundred!"
+
+"That was the joke.  We carted the stuff to some sandhills, where a
+part of the force was supposed to lie in ambush.  When the Royalists
+returned with large reinforcements, they wasted days, being afraid of
+falling into a trap.  It was very funny watching their manoeuvres."
+
+"Then there was the officer with the flag of truce near Chala," said
+Cordova.  "He carried back a pretty report to his chief!"
+
+"Yes," said Plaza, laughing; "he believed we were just the
+advance-guard of a large force.  He stayed with us the night, but I'm
+afraid his slumbers were troubled ones.  The bustle was
+tremendous--soldiers coming and going every few minutes.  The colonel
+was giving all kinds of impossible orders; in fact, you would have
+thought we had quite a big army there.  Next morning I escorted the
+Royalist a mile or so on the road.  All our men were spread out, some
+in fatigue dress, to make him believe there were at least two
+regiments."
+
+"That was a good trick," laughed Alzura.
+
+"And the officers galloped about, shouting to the men to go to their
+camps in the rear.  Turning to me, the fellow exclaimed seriously, 'It
+is all very well for Miller to have a couple of battalions; but we have
+a couple as well as he!'
+
+"'Ah,' said I, trying to keep a straight face, 'you keep your eyes
+open, I see.  I warned the colonel not to let you see so much.'"
+
+"Did you really fool him?" asked half a dozen men in a breath.
+
+"Yes, and kept our position till the colonel was ready to move.  If I
+had my way, Miller should be commander-in-chief.  He is now the best
+man in the country for the post."
+
+"Bravo!" cried Cordova.  "As it is, I suppose we shall all be under
+Bolivar's thumb soon."
+
+"I don't much care who leads," said Alzura, "as long as we win; and
+it's about time something was done.  The Royalists are getting a strong
+following in the city again."
+
+"Bah!" exclaimed Plaza scornfully, "they're just weather-cocks,
+twisting about with every wind that blows--first Royalist, then
+Patriot, then Royalist again!  It's enough to take away one's breath.
+Did you hear about Camba?"
+
+"He was one of us," said Alzura, "went over to the Royalists, and came
+back again."
+
+"And was appointed second in command of the Legion!"
+
+There was a cry of amazement from every one in the room; but Plaza
+continued, "It's a fact; only Miller put his foot down.  'My officers
+are gentlemen,' said he.  'If you appoint this man over them they will
+break their swords, and I shall be the first to do so.'  That stopped
+the game, and Camba was pushed in somewhere else."
+
+"It's a wonder he hasn't changed again," I said.
+
+"He is only biding his time, like a good many others."
+
+"I know nearly a dozen myself," said Alzura, "and one of them is a
+neighbour of yours, Crawford."
+
+"Do you mean the fellow with the pretty daughter?" some one asked.
+
+"Yes.  I respect the girl.  She is an out-and-out Royalist, and makes
+no attempt to deny it; but the old man is a schemer--he runs with the
+hare and hunts with the hounds."
+
+"Don't vent your opinion too freely, my boy; Montilla has powerful
+influence in high quarters."
+
+"Well," said Alzura doggedly, "if he isn't working hard to bring back
+the Royalists, I am very much mistaken."
+
+The young officer's words made me very uneasy.  I knew little of Don
+Felipe's proceedings, as, although he was an occasional visitor at our
+house, a certain coolness had sprung up between us.  For this feeling
+it would have been difficult, perhaps, to give any particular reason.
+To all appearance the man had acted fairly enough; indeed, according to
+his own account, he had always been my best friend.
+
+Still, I had very little love for him, and no respect at all.  I was
+rather suspicious of a man who changed sides just when it best suited
+his interests.  With Rosa things were different.  She was a born
+Royalist, and though I thought her views mistaken, I admired her pluck
+in holding so stoutly to them.
+
+But the idea that her father was preparing to turn his coat again
+worried me.  True, he might win a big reward by helping the Spaniards;
+but in the event of discovery, he could hardly expect to escape death.
+I told myself the punishment would serve him right, and that the
+business was none of mine; yet somehow I could not get rid of the
+uneasy feeling.  If Alzura's suspicions were correct, the man might be
+taken and hanged at any moment.  I said again it would serve him right,
+but the justice of his sentence would not lessen Rosa's suffering.
+
+All that night I lay awake thinking.  I could not get the girl out of
+my head.  You see, I had known her so long; we had played together like
+brother and sister; she was so pretty and winsome that I hated the idea
+of trouble assailing her.
+
+In the morning I was inclined to laugh at my fears.  Every one knew
+there were many people in Lima willing to welcome the Royalists, and it
+had been openly stated more than once that Don Felipe Montilla had only
+changed sides to secure his property.  Doubtless Alzura, knowing this,
+had jumped to the conclusion that he would willingly return to his
+former allegiance.
+
+"That is about all there is in it," said I, feeling a little more
+assured.  "It is marvellous what stories some men can build up from a
+word here and there!  If Alzura lives till the end of the war, he
+should be a novelist."
+
+At this time I was a great deal in Lima, being employed by Colonel
+Miller in connection with the new expedition which Santa Cruz was to
+lead south.  Several nights a week I slept at home, much to mother's
+satisfaction.  My father continued to be busy in public matters, though
+he had resigned his office as a protest against the invitation to
+Bolivar.
+
+Now, it chanced, about a fortnight after young Alzura's disquieting
+talk, that I had occasion to go late at night to Callao, and Jos�
+offered to accompany me.  It is likely enough that my mother put the
+idea into his head, for though brave enough herself, she was always
+fearful on my account.  However, I was glad to avail myself of Jos�'s
+offer.  The night was fine, the sky was studded with stars, and the
+moon, nearly at the full, gave forth a splendid light.
+
+"You may go to bed, Antonio," said I to the old janitor, as he opened
+the gate.  "We are not likely to return till morning."
+
+"Do you remember our first night ride to Callao?" asked Jos�.  "There
+was no need for any one to sit up for us then."
+
+"Yes, that I do.  And the voyage in the schooner," I added gaily.
+"That was an adventure, if you like! We were as near to death then,
+Jos�, as ever we have been since."
+
+"Yes," he said thoughtfully.  "I have often wondered how we managed to
+escape."
+
+Passing through the outer gates of the park on to the highroad, we
+cantered our horses about a quarter of a mile, and then turned up a
+narrow lane which separated our property from that of Don Felipe
+Montilla.
+
+Suddenly checking his horse, Jos� whispered, "See to your pistols, my
+boy; there are horsemen coming this way."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIX.
+
+FALSE PLAY, OR NOT?
+
+There was no actual reason why we should feel alarmed; but Lima was an
+unsafe place in those days, and people who travelled at night generally
+went well armed.
+
+As yet the bend in the road prevented us from seeing any one, but
+listening intently, we distinctly heard the sounds of a horse's hoofs.
+
+"There's only one, Jos�," I whispered; and he nodded.  I do not know
+that we should have taken any notice of the man, but for his efforts to
+conceal his identity.  We came upon him suddenly, while the moon shone
+full in his face, and before he had time either to draw his poncho
+closer or to pull the slouch hat over his eyes.  Both these things he
+did quickly, but meanwhile we had seen, and a look of keen surprise
+shot across Jos�'s face.  Recovering himself instantly, he said
+cheerfully,--
+
+"Good-night, se�or.  Fine night for a ride."
+
+"So you seem to think," replied the other surlily.
+
+"You have come from the town, I see," said Jos�, for we lived eastward
+of Lima; "is all quiet there?"
+
+"Why shouldn't it be?  Kindly allow me to pass; I am in a hurry,"
+responded our morose stranger.
+
+"Then 'twas lucky that you knew of this short cut," remarked Jos�,
+nothing daunted by the fellow's manner.  "Well, good-night, se�or.
+Pleasant ride!" and he drew his horse aside that the stranger might
+pass.
+
+"He isn't any too polite!" I remarked, as digging his spurs into his
+horse the fellow galloped off.  "He's a fine horseman, though, and has
+the air of a military man, if I'm not mistaken."
+
+"Yes," agreed Jos�; "he certainly rides like a soldier."
+
+"But he isn't in uniform."
+
+"No; he has left his uniform at home, I expect."
+
+"He must be pretty familiar with Lima to know this short cut."
+
+"I daresay he is.  But didn't you recognize him?  Well, I suppose it's
+hardly likely you would; you were only a little chap at the time, and
+perhaps never saw him.  He's a rascal to the marrow!"
+
+"But who is he?" I asked impatiently.
+
+"Pardo Lure�a."
+
+"Lure�a?  Haven't I heard my father speak of him?"
+
+"Very likely.  He was one of the 'young bloods' of Peru, and, being a
+cadet of a wealthy family, able to do much as he pleased.  He was
+always a thorough ruffian, and the common people hated him like poison.
+His pranks, however, were hushed up by those in authority, until, for
+some offence more startling than usual, your father got him clapped in
+prison.  The Dons howled finely, but your father stood firm, and the
+people backed him up; so young Lure�a had a taste of prison life.
+There was great excitement over it at the time."
+
+"What happened afterwards?"
+
+"Lure�a left Lima.  He went from bad to worse, and finally joined the
+ranks.  Of course his relatives used their influence, and he was given
+a commission; but he never rose very high, I believe."
+
+"What could he be doing in Lima to-night?"
+
+"Something rascally, I'll be bound!  He may have been to the town, but
+I believe the last place he stopped at was over there," and Jos�
+pointed toward Don Felipe's house.
+
+"You don't think there's some treachery afoot between them, do you?"
+
+"Why not?  Once a traitor, always a traitor!  Montilla means to save
+his property at all costs, and to pick up as much as possible in the
+general scramble.  Should the Spaniards win, your father will say
+good-bye to his estates."
+
+"Isn't your prejudice making you a little unjust, Jos�?  Remember that
+we know nothing against Don Felipe."
+
+"Oh, don't we?  He got the estates into his hands once, and by hook or
+by crook he'll get them again!"
+
+I thought Jos� exaggerated the danger, but this meeting with Lure�a set
+me thinking.  The fellow was evidently a Royalist soldier, and on a
+secret errand.  If Jos�'s idea was correct, there could be only one
+object in his visiting Montilla.
+
+But our neighbour was not the man to compromise himself unless there
+was a distinct chance of success.  Had he learned any news favourable
+to the Royalist cause?  If so, that might account for his action.
+
+Silently we rode through the sleeping town and along the road to
+Callao, where Jos� waited at an inn while I did the business which had
+brought me to the port.  The bay was filled with shipping, and men were
+hard at work fitting out the transports for the troops ordered south.
+
+"Isn't it rather risky to remove so many troops?" I asked the colonel.
+"Suppose the enemy should swoop down on the capital?"
+
+"They're quite welcome to do so," he replied, with a laugh.  "Lima is
+of no use to us really; it's Callao that matters."
+
+"Are you going with them, colonel?"
+
+"No; I stay behind with General Sucre."
+
+There was one question I wanted very much to ask, but it was long
+before I could muster the courage to do so.
+
+"Colonel," I said at length, "I want to ask a rather queer question,
+but I have reasons for it.  Do you think the war will end in favour of
+the Spaniards?"
+
+"That depends," he answered, looking at me in surprise.  "It certainly
+will do so if our people quarrel among themselves, which is what the
+enemy reckon on.  That is their sheet-anchor, in fact."
+
+"Would a clever man think they had a chance just now?"
+
+"Why, yes," replied the colonel thoughtfully; "he might think they
+stand an excellent chance."
+
+"Thank you, sir," I said, and the incident of the preceding night
+loomed up larger and uglier than ever.
+
+Day had fairly broken when I sought Jos� for the purpose of returning
+home.  I said nothing to him of my talk with the colonel, though the
+remembrance of it kept running through my mind.  On our return I found
+my father alone, so I told him my suspicions, and asked his advice.
+
+"It certainly has an ugly look, Jack," said he; "yet it may be easy of
+explanation.  For Rosa's sake, I hope Montilla isn't playing false.  He
+is in our counsels, and knows everything that goes on, so that he could
+make the Spaniards pay high for his treachery."
+
+"And if he is discovered?"
+
+"He will be shot."
+
+"And you couldn't save him, if you would?"
+
+"I couldn't and wouldn't.  A man may be a turncoat in good faith, but a
+traitor--bah!  But after all, my boy, it seems to me we are hunting a
+fox that hasn't broken cover.  This Lure�a, whom Jos� recognized, is no
+friend of mine; and though he was an ensign in the Royalist army years
+ago, it does not follow that he is a Royalist now.  Ah, I have it!"
+said he, in a tone of relief.
+
+"What--an explanation?" I asked curiously.
+
+"Yes; and the right one, I'll wager!  It is through Lure�a we get our
+information of the enemy's doings!  No doubt Montilla employs him as a
+spy."
+
+"Then why was he so put out at meeting with us?"
+
+"Well, naturally he would not want his secret known."
+
+My father's idea was feasible enough, but it did not altogether satisfy
+me; yet what could I do?  If Montilla were playing false, I seemed
+almost as guilty in not denouncing him.  But for Rosa's sake I could
+not bring myself to act; and after all, it was merely a matter of
+suspicion.
+
+About three days before the sailing of the expedition I rode home to
+spend the evening.  Jos� met me at the outer gate, and I saw in a
+moment that something had happened.
+
+"What is it?" I asked.  "Have you come to meet me?"
+
+"Yes.  Send your horse on; I want to talk to you."
+
+We walked across the park out of earshot, when Jos� said in a whisper,
+as if still fearful of being overheard,--
+
+"He is here again."
+
+"He!" said I; "who?"
+
+"Lure�a.  He went into Don Felipe's house half an hour ago."
+
+"Well, what of that?  You know what my father said."
+
+I spoke boldly, as if there could be nothing in the business; but Jos�
+smiled grimly.
+
+"Look here, Jack," said he at length, "we can easily settle this
+affair.  If Montilla is innocent, there's no harm done; if he's
+guilty--well, better for one to suffer than thousands."
+
+"What do you propose?"
+
+"To waylay this Lure�a.  He is almost certain to have papers on him
+which will tell all we wish to know."
+
+"I can't do it, Jos�.  Don Felipe is Rosa's father, and I am reluctant
+to bring trouble to her."
+
+"Would you rather sacrifice your own father and mother?"
+
+"How dare you ask such a question, Jos�?" I cried angrily.
+
+"I dare anything for my master," said he, unmoved.  "If the Spaniards
+win, your father is doomed, and you also, while your mother will be a
+beggar.  See, Jack, I have no right to speak thus, but I can't help it.
+With or without your help, I intend getting to the bottom of this
+matter."
+
+I knew Jos� of old, and that once his mind was made up, no amount of
+threats or coaxing would turn him from his purpose.
+
+"If your father is right," he continued, "so much the better--the
+knowledge will make our minds easy; but I can't and won't stand this
+suspense any longer."
+
+In a sense I was completely in his power.  Whether I went or not he
+would go, and by himself would most certainly proceed to extreme
+measures.
+
+"Very well, Jos�," I said reluctantly, after weighing the matter in my
+mind, "have your own way."
+
+"There is no other," he replied.  "Come, let us go to the workshop and
+get a few tools."
+
+I did not know his plan, but it was evident he had thought it all out.
+First he made a simple but effective gag; then he selected a long piece
+of thin but tough rope, several strips of hide, a large rug, and a tiny
+lantern.
+
+"Now," said he with a chuckle, "I think we shan't have much trouble
+with Mr. Lure�a."
+
+On our way to the lane he told me his plan, and gave me full directions
+as to my share in it.  The night was dark, but we moved quietly,
+speaking only in whispers, and straining our ears for the slightest
+sound.
+
+At the bend in the narrow lane Jos� unrolled the cord, and I, taking
+one end in my hand, sat down in the darkness, laying the gag and a
+strip or two of hide on the ground near me.  Jos� moved to the other
+side of the lane, and we let the rope lie slack across the road.  Then
+we waited in silence for the coming of Lure�a, feeling confident that
+he would not leave the house till the night was far spent.
+
+This adventure was not to my liking, and I could only hope that in some
+way my presence might be of use to Montilla.  Somehow I had not the
+slightest hope of my father's idea proving right.  My old distrust of
+the man returned in full force, and I dreaded what an examination of
+Lure�a's pockets would reveal.
+
+Slowly, very slowly, the minutes passed; a whole hour went by, and
+still there was no sign of our intended victim.  Had he left the house
+by the front?  I almost hoped he had.  Yet, should he escape us this
+time, I knew that now Jos� had started his quarry he would run it to
+earth.
+
+A second hour passed.  He must come soon now or not at all.  My limbs
+were dreadfully cramped, and I began to get fidgety.  Once I coughed
+slightly, but a sharp pull at the rope warned me to be silent.  At last
+the hoof-beats of a horse could be distinctly heard.  From the way he
+rode, the horseman evidently knew the road well.  Nearer and nearer he
+came, while we, raising the rope, stretched it tight.  The figure of
+horse and man loomed up dimly, came close to us; there was a stumble, a
+low cry of surprise, and the next moment our man lay on the ground, his
+head enveloped in Jos�'s rug.
+
+A spectator might easily have mistaken us for professional thieves, we
+did the thing so neatly.  Almost in less time than it takes to tell, we
+had thrust the gag into our victim's mouth, and bound both his legs and
+arms.  Then, while I removed his weapons, Jos� lit the lantern, and we
+looked for the incriminating papers.  We searched minutely every
+article of his clothing and the trappings of his horse, but without
+result, except for a scrap of paper hidden in his girdle.
+
+Jos� pounced on this like a hawk, and we examined it together by the
+light of the lantern.  I could have shouted for joy when at last we
+were able to read it: "To all good friends of Peru.  Pass the bearer
+without question."  It was signed by the president, Riva-Aguero, and
+bore the official seal.
+
+"It seems you were right," whispered Jos� sulkily.  "Help me to raise
+the horse, and we will let the fellow go."
+
+Fortunately the animal was unhurt, and very soon we had it on its feet.
+Then we unbound the man, removed the rug from his head, and slipped out
+the gag.
+
+"Mount and ride on," said Jos� sternly, disguising his voice.  "We wish
+you no harm."
+
+"Give me my pistols, you rascal!" cried Lure�a, stamping his foot
+angrily.
+
+"Mount!" repeated Jos�, and the click of his own pistol sounded
+ominously on the still air.
+
+There was nothing for it but to obey, and fuming with passion, the
+fellow clambered sullenly to the saddle.  Shaking his fist at us and
+vowing all manner of vengeance, he disappeared in the gloom.
+
+"I'm glad we came," said I, helping Jos� to pick up the things; "that
+bit of paper has removed a load from my mind.  I thought my father
+might be right, but must admit I was rather doubtful."
+
+"I am in no doubt whatever," responded Jos�.  "Either the fellow was
+too sharp for us, or we made our venture at an unlucky time.  If there
+was nothing wrong, why did he ride off so quickly?"
+
+"Well," said I, laughing, "the click of a pistol in one's ears is not
+much of an inducement to stay.  I think he acted very wisely."
+
+"If all were square and aboveboard, he would have shouted for help."
+
+"And drawn more attention to himself!  That would have been foolish in
+any case.  No, no, Jos�; the case is clear, I think.  We have misjudged
+Montilla, and though I don't admire his methods, it is evident he is
+working on our side.  Let us be just, at least."
+
+"I wish it were possible," muttered Jos�, leaving me to conjecture what
+his words exactly meant.
+
+Strangely enough, my distrust of Don Felipe was as strong as ever next
+day.  The incident of the spy should have removed any lingering doubt
+as to his fidelity, but it did not.  Perhaps it was owing to Jos�'s
+influence, but whatever the cause, I still found myself speculating
+keenly on our neighbour's honesty.
+
+Now, mind you, I do not wish to be praised or blamed on false grounds.
+What I did afterwards may have been right or wrong--and much, perhaps,
+can be said on both sides--but it was not done through either love or
+hatred of Don Felipe.  True, the man was no friend of mine, but his
+daughter was, and I could not bear to think of her suffering through
+his misdeeds.
+
+On the very day that the troops for the south embarked, I met her quite
+by accident.  She had been for a gallop, and was returning home.  Her
+cheeks were flushed with the exercise, her eyes were bright and
+sparkling; I had never seen her look so beautiful.
+
+"Well, Juan," she cried saucily, "so you have sent away your band of
+ragamuffins?  I wonder how many of this lot will come back!  Upon my
+word, I feel half inclined to pity them."
+
+This, of course, she said to tease me; because, if our men lacked
+something in discipline, they were at least a match for the Spaniards
+in bravery.
+
+"You are pleased to be merry," said I, riding with her to the gate,
+"but I hope you do not seriously think that the Spaniards have any
+chance of winning."
+
+"Why not?  It is you who live in a fool's paradise Juan.  Before long
+the king's flag will be floating over Lima again."
+
+She spoke so confidently that I looked at her uneasily.  Was there
+really a Royalist plot on foot, and did she know of it?
+
+Perhaps I acted foolishly, but what I did was done with a good motive.
+
+"Send your horse on," said I, "and let me walk with you to the house.
+There is something on which I wish to speak seriously to you."
+
+"Is it a penance for my sins?" she laughed, holding up her
+riding-habit.  "Please don't be too severe, Juan!  Now begin, and I
+will try to be good."
+
+"To begin is not so easy as you think, Rosa; but first let me tell you
+one thing--the Spaniards will never again be masters of Peru."
+
+"Pouf!" cried she, tossing her head; "that is rubbish, and says little
+for your understanding, Juan."
+
+"I am sorry you don't believe it; yet it is true, nevertheless.  There
+are Royalists in Lima who hope otherwise, but they will be
+disappointed.  More than that, some of them who are working secretly
+against us will meet with just punishment."
+
+"What is that to me?  I can't work for the king, being only a girl, but
+no one can accuse me of hiding my opinions."
+
+I could have laughed at that had I been in the mood for merriment.  All
+Lima knew that Peru did not contain a stancher Royalist than Rosa
+Montilla.
+
+"It is not of you I speak, but of the so-called Patriots, who are
+sedulously plotting for the enemy.  Already names have been mentioned,
+and before long some of these people will be shot."
+
+I think it was then she first began to suspect my meaning.  Her eyes
+flashed fire, and looking me full in the face, she cried,--
+
+"What is all this to me?  What have I to do with your wretched story?"
+
+My face was hot, my forehead clammy with perspiration.  I mumbled out
+my reply like a toothless old woman.
+
+"Don't be angry, Rosa," I said.  "I hate to give you pain,
+but--but--can't you understand?"
+
+"No," replied she calmly; "I understand nothing."
+
+"I wish to warn you," I continued desperately--"to put you on your
+guard.  There is a rumour--I heard it in camp, but I do not vouch for
+its truth--"
+
+"Come, make an end of this," she said haughtily, "or allow me to
+proceed to the house.  What is this rumour which seems to have tied
+your tongue so?"
+
+"I will tell you.  It is said that the leader of the conspiracy is Don
+Felipe Montilla!  Let me--"
+
+"Thank you, Juan Crawford," said she, making a superb gesture of
+disdain.  "Now go!  If our friendship has given you the right to insult
+me thus, you have that excuse no longer.  Go, I say, before I call the
+servants to whip you from the place."
+
+I tried in vain to offer some explanation.
+
+"Go, se�or, go!" she repeated, and at last I turned sorrowfully away.
+
+I had done my best and failed.  I had lost my friend, and had effected
+no good, for I saw by her face that she would think it treason to
+mention the subject to her father.  And as I rode from the gate, I
+wondered whether, after all, we had been mistaken in our judgment.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XX.
+
+"SAVE HIM, JUAN, SAVE HIM!"
+
+"Aren't you coming, Juan?"
+
+Two days had passed since my interview with Rosa Montilla, and I was
+sitting in my room at the barracks, feeling at enmity with all the
+world.
+
+"It's a pity we've nothing better to do than to make fools of
+ourselves," said I savagely, when young Alzura burst in on me excitedly.
+
+He was dressed to represent some hideous monster that never was known
+on sea or land, and in his hand he carried a grotesque mask.
+
+"Hullo!" he exclaimed; "some one been rubbing you down the wrong way?
+Caramba, you are in a towering rage!  Pray what has offended your Royal
+Highness?"
+
+"Why, all this tomfoolery!  Fancy a masked ball with Canterac in the
+mountains ready to swoop down on us at any moment!"
+
+"The more reason why we should enjoy ourselves while we can.  Besides,
+you are as bad as the rest: you promised to go!"
+
+"I have forgotten it, then."
+
+"Well, you did; so make haste--the carriage is waiting."
+
+"I have no dress ready," said I coldly.
+
+"That doesn't matter in the least.  Go in your uniform; you look very
+well in it."
+
+"Thanks, I prefer to stay here."
+
+"You forget the ball is given in our honour!  Colonel Miller won't be
+too pleased at finding you absent.  'Twill be a slight on our host and
+hostess."
+
+"Very well, if you put it that way, I'll join you in the messroom
+shortly," said I indifferently.
+
+"That's right.  Slip your things on sharp; the animals will get
+restive."
+
+Alzura was in high spirits.  He loved fun of all kinds, and this ball
+was just to his taste.  Plaza and Cordova shared our carriage, and both
+of them rallied me on my glum looks.
+
+"Crawford's a bloodthirsty fellow," cried Alzura banteringly--"never
+happy unless he's fighting!"
+
+"That's a libel!" said I warmly; "I'm sick of the whole thing.  When
+this war's over, I hope never to hear a shot fired again."
+
+"Be easy," laughed Cordova; "you'll be an old man by then, and too deaf
+to hear even the report of a pistol."
+
+"There may be more truth in that than you think," I observed, bitterly.
+
+"Never mind, my boy," said Plaza; "you won't hear any shots fired
+to-night.  There's no great harm in enjoying ourselves for an hour or
+two.  Here we are!  What a crowd outside!--Put on your mask, Alzura;
+the people will like the fun."
+
+There was a roar of laughter from the spectators as Alzura, appeared,
+and we went into the hall amidst a round of cheering.  Most of the
+guests wore some fanciful costume, but several officers, Miller and
+O'Brien among them, were in uniform.
+
+The magnificent _salons_ were illuminated by thousands of lights; the
+guests were numerous, and represented most of the beauty and wealth of
+Lima.  My father and mother had not come, neither did I see Montilla.
+Rosa, of course, would have scorned to attend a ball given to the
+Patriots.
+
+Despite the lights and the music and the striking gaiety of the scene,
+I could not banish my feeling of dread.  I felt, as people say, that
+"something was going to happen," and moved listlessly among the
+brilliant assembly, wondering what it would be.
+
+"You look bored, Crawford," remarked O'Brien, coming across to me.  "Is
+anything the matter?"
+
+"No, thanks; I'm a bit off colour--that's all."
+
+"Would you rather be in the mountains?" asked Colonel Miller, who had
+joined us.
+
+"It depends on circumstances, colonel," I replied, trying to smile.
+
+When they had left me, I fell back on my occupation of gazing
+indifferently at the brilliant scene.  I could take no interest in it,
+nor in the chaff and nonsense of my friends, who tried hard to make me
+more like myself.  It seemed that in some mysterious way I was waiting
+for something, though what I could not imagine.  When the summons
+actually came, I was not in the least surprised.
+
+Alzura, who brought it me, had no idea he was assisting at a tragedy,
+but, with a merry laugh, exclaimed, "Crawford, there is a lady outside
+waiting to see you; she will not leave her carriage."
+
+"Who is it?" I asked.
+
+"I don't know; I haven't seen her.  A servant gave me the message, and
+I set off to find you."
+
+"Thanks," said I quietly, and crossing the brilliantly-lit _salon_,
+took my cap and went into the vast hall.
+
+Who had come for me--my mother?  That was my first thought, but a
+moment's reflection showed that it was unlikely.  Had there been
+anything wrong at home, she would have sent Jos� on a swift horse.  The
+answer to my question came as I stood on the flight of steps leading to
+the hall.  The crowd of people had dispersed, and only a solitary
+carriage with its attendants stood at the door.  Recognizing the
+Montilla livery in an instant, I ran down the steps with a beating
+heart.
+
+The carriage door was open, and the light from the hall fell full on
+the white face of Rosa.
+
+"What has happened?" I cried.  "Why do you look so frightened?  Tell
+me, quick!"
+
+Her only answer was to bid me step inside.  The footman sprang to his
+place, the coachman gathered up the reins, the carriage turned with a
+swing, and almost before I realized it we were off at a gallop.  The
+girl's face was hidden now in darkness, but I had seen it for a moment,
+and could not forget it.  She was white and scared; her cheeks were
+tear-stained, and her eyes full of apprehension and grief.
+
+Some terrible disaster had happened, but I could not learn what it was.
+To all my questions she replied, "Home! home!" and ordered the coachman
+to drive faster.  Then she burst into a fit of crying, uttering
+incoherent words, of which I could make nothing.
+
+"Is it your father, Rosa?" I asked.  "Has anything happened to him?"
+At which she cried still more, upbraiding me for I knew not what.
+
+The gates of the hacienda were wide open.  We passed through at a
+gallop, and the trembling, foam-covered horses drew up at the front
+door.  As soon as the carriage came to a standstill, I jumped out and
+assisted Rosa to alight.  All the servants seemed to have gathered in
+the hall.  Their faces were white, their eyes wild with dread; some of
+them still shivered.  Evidently a great calamity had occurred.  What
+was it?
+
+Looking around, I noted the absence of Don Felipe.  That gave me a clue
+to the nature of the disaster.  Perhaps he lay dead in his room;
+perhaps the government, suspecting him of treachery, had torn him away.
+I did not hit on the exact truth, but my conjectures went very near it.
+
+Rosa's wild fit had passed; she was no longer a weeping girl, but an
+imperious mistress.  Her tears were dried; she had banished her fear.
+There was a light of scorn and command in her eyes.
+
+"Away, cowards!" she cried.  "Do you call yourselves men, and would not
+try to save your master?  Begone!" and she stamped her foot in passion.
+
+The servants slunk off abashed, and she led me along the corridor.  The
+door of her father's room was closed, but she opened it, and said,
+"Come in, Juan; see your friends' handiwork!"
+
+The apartment was in total disorder.  Chairs were overthrown; the table
+was stripped of its contents; all kinds of articles lay strewn about
+the floor: there were very evident signs of a fierce and prolonged
+struggle.  On one wall was the mark of a bullet, and a corner of the
+apartment was splashed with blood.  I gazed round eagerly for
+Montilla's body, but it was not there.
+
+"See," said the girl, "he was sitting there when the ruffians burst in
+upon him.  He fought for his life like a cavalier of old Spain, but the
+cowards were too many.  They flung themselves upon him like a pack of
+wolves, and bore him to the ground."
+
+"But who were they?" I asked in amazement.  "Who did it?  Tell me
+plainly what happened."
+
+"Need you ask?" she said coldly.  "The ruffians were your friends--your
+servants, for all I know."
+
+"Rosa, you are speaking wildly.  I do not wonder at it: this terrible
+affair has upset your nerves."
+
+Then she turned upon me, her eyes blazing with angry scorn.
+
+"What is it that you wear beneath your tunic, Juan Crawford?" she
+cried.  "Are you ashamed that it should be seen?"
+
+At first I did not understand her meaning; then a glimmer of the truth
+began to dawn on me, and slowly I drew out the silver key.
+
+"Do you mean this?"
+
+"Yes!  'The chief of the Silver Key'--that is what the black-browed
+ruffian called himself.  Fancy my father, a Spanish gentleman, the
+prisoner of a band of half-dressed savages--your friends, Juan
+Crawford!"
+
+"But I know nothing about it," I cried.  "These men take no orders from
+me.  The key was given me by the chief when I myself stood in need of
+protection."
+
+"Nevertheless they are your friends, and they have dragged my father
+from his home."
+
+"But why?  Surely there must be a reason!  Tell me what they said.  Try
+to be calm, Rosa; your father's life may depend on your words."
+
+"I know nothing.  How should I?  I was in bed.  My father sat there
+writing when they broke into the house.  The servants fled, and hid
+themselves like frightened sheep.  The cowards!  I dressed and ran
+here.  My father had killed one ruffian, but--but he could not struggle
+against so many."
+
+"I'll wager that he showed himself a brave man."
+
+"He did; but they overcame him," she continued, speaking more calmly.
+"They bound him with cords: he was helpless.  I begged the big bandit
+to release him; I would have gone on my knees--I, a daughter of the
+Montillas!" and she drew herself up proudly.
+
+"But the chief, Rosa--what did he say?"
+
+"That my father was charged with a serious offence, and that he must be
+tried by the officers of the Silver Key.  Think of that, Juan
+Crawford!--my father tried for his life by those dirty bandits!  Oh,
+how I wish I was a man!  Then they took him away.  I was alone and
+friendless; I thought of you, and told the coachman to drive me to
+Lima.  Then I remembered you were one of these people, and would have
+turned back.  But my father's life is precious; I would beg it even of
+an enemy.  O Juan, Juan, save him for me!"
+
+She broke down utterly.  I tried to comfort her, and failed.  She did
+nothing but cry, "Save him, Juan, save him!"
+
+[Illustration: "Save him, Juan, save him!"]
+
+I had no faith in my power to help her, but I could not tell her so.
+Why Raymon Sorillo had done this I knew no more than she--unless,
+indeed, he had discovered Don Felipe conspiring with the Royalists.  In
+that case, perhaps, I might prevail on him to spare the prisoner's
+life, and to restore him to liberty when the war was over.  It was only
+a tiny spark of hope, but I made the most of it.
+
+"Listen, Rosa," I said cheerfully.  "I do not belong to this society of
+which you speak, but its chief will do much for me.  I will go to him
+now and use all my influence.  I will beg him earnestly to spare your
+father's life, and I think he may grant it me.  Cheer up, Rosa!  In a
+few days I shall return and bring your father with me, most likely."
+
+"O Juan, how shall I ever thank you!  Forget the wild words I said to
+you.  I was distracted with fear and anger; I did not mean them, Juan!"
+
+"No, no," I answered soothingly; "I have forgotten them already.  Now
+go to bed; I must start at once.  I shall take a horse from your
+stables."
+
+"You have no sword!"
+
+"I shall not need one.  There is no danger for me in the mountains.
+The Indians will do me no harm."
+
+As soon as she had promised to go to her room I returned to the hall,
+and calling the servants, sent one to explain matters briefly to my
+father, and asking that my mother would come and stay with Rosa for a
+while.  Then going to the stables, I selected two good horses, and
+ordered a groom to help me to saddle them.  Sorillo might or might not
+listen to my request, but it would be as well to waste no time on the
+journey.
+
+The thought of taking Jos� occurred to me, but I put it aside.  There
+was really no danger in the journey, while if Sorillo would not listen
+to an appeal made in my father's name, he was not likely to listen at
+all.
+
+Leading the spare horse, I rode through the grounds, cantered down the
+narrow lane, struck the highroad, and turned in the direction of the
+mountains.  Just where Sorillo might be I could not tell, but I
+determined first of all to try the ravine where I had once spent
+several days.
+
+I have said that I had little faith in the success of my mission.  Why
+the Indians had committed this outrage was a mystery, and I could think
+of nothing which would help me to solve it.  That Don Felipe had acted
+treacherously I could well believe; but why, in that case, did not
+Sorillo hand him over to the government?  Why should the officers of
+the Silver Key take it upon themselves to try him?
+
+I rode on gloomily till the sun was high in the heavens, halting at a
+solitary hut, where the woman gave me food and drink for myself and the
+animals.  She was kind enough in this matter, but to my questions she
+would return no answers.  She knew nothing about the war, except that
+the soldiers had slain her only son, and her husband had been absent
+for over a year.  He might be Royalist or Patriot, she did not know,
+only she wished people were allowed to live in peace, and to cultivate
+their little plots of land.
+
+Giving her some money, I mounted and rode on, feeling refreshed by the
+brief halt.  The district was for the most part bare and uninhabited.
+Here and there were the remains of a ruined hut, and on the route I
+passed the deserted hacienda which had once afforded me a night's
+shelter.  I met no people, except occasionally a few women and little
+children; the men and growing boys were in the mountains or in the
+ranks of the army.
+
+It was evening when I reached the foot of the mountains.  My horses
+were tired out, and the worst part of the journey still lay before me.
+However, the light had not altogether faded, so I began the ascent,
+hoping to meet with some of Sorillo's men.  As it chanced, I had not
+long to wait.
+
+A sudden "Halt! who are you?" brought me to a stand, and I answered at
+random, "A friend of the Silver Key."
+
+"Are you alone?" asked the voice, with just a tinge of suspicion.
+
+"Yes," I replied.  "I am Juan Crawford, and am looking for Raymon
+Sorillo.  Can you take me to him?"
+
+A man stepped from behind a rock, and eyeing me suspiciously,
+exclaimed, "Wait, se�or.  I cannot leave my post, but I will call for a
+guide;" and putting his hand to his mouth, he whistled softly.
+
+The sound was answered by one from higher up, and presently a second
+Indian, armed to the teeth, came running down.  The two talked together
+in whispers, and at last the second man said, "Come this way, se�or; I
+will lead you to the chief.  He will be pleased to see the son of Don
+Eduardo."
+
+Under the circumstances I thought this rather doubtful, but I followed
+him up the path.
+
+"Are you staying in the ravine?" I asked.
+
+"Yes, se�or, for the present."
+
+"Did you go with the chief to Lima?"
+
+"Ah, the se�or knows of that!  The old crocodile showed fight, and
+killed a good man; but he is safe enough now."
+
+"He has not been put to death?" I asked, my forehead clammy with
+perspiration.
+
+"Not yet, se�or; he must first be tried."
+
+"But what have you discovered?" I asked, thinking the fellow might be
+able to give me some information as to the cause of Don Felipe's
+abduction.
+
+In this I was mistaken.  The man knew, or pretended to know, nothing
+about it.  The chief had given orders, but not reasons, and had, as
+usual, been obeyed unquestioningly.  At a word from him his men would
+have ridden into Lima and dragged the president from his palace.
+
+It almost seemed as if Sorillo expected his stronghold to be attacked.
+The path was guarded by sentries, and a score of men were stationed at
+the entrance to the ravine, They passed us through without trouble, and
+before long I found myself in the presence of the chief.
+
+"You are surprised to see me?" I said briskly.
+
+"Yes; I thought you were in Lima."
+
+"I was there last night."
+
+"You have made a wonderfully quick journey.  You must be tired and in
+need of refreshment.  Come; I can at least offer you a good supper."
+
+"Not yet, thank you.  I want to ask you a question first.  What have
+you done with Don Felipe Montilla?"
+
+"The dog is in the hut yonder."
+
+He spoke with both anger and contempt; his face underwent a sudden
+change; for the first time I saw how cruel it could look.  My heart
+sank as I realized the uselessness of any appeal to him for mercy.
+Then I thought of Rosa, and said,--
+
+"It is on Don Felipe's account I am here.  What has he done?  Why has
+he been brought here?"
+
+"If another dared question me like this, I would answer him with a
+pistol shot," he cried fiercely; "but I do not forget that you are the
+son of Don Eduardo Crawford.  Come, let us eat and forget this
+business."
+
+"Will you tell me afterwards?"
+
+"I will tell you nothing, but you shall hear for yourself.  To-morrow
+the man will be tried, and if he is found guilty, not all South America
+shall save him.  But we will try him fairly, and you shall bear witness
+to our justice."
+
+"I want mercy!" said I.
+
+"You do not know what you ask yet.  Wait till the morning.  And now
+come; you must not be able to accuse me of inhospitality."
+
+The guerillas led away my horses, and I followed Sorillo to his own
+hut, where in a short time a plentiful meal was laid.  I was both
+hungry and thirsty, yet I had to force myself to eat and drink.
+Sorillo made no attempt at conversation, and I did not care to talk.
+
+When the things were removed, he had a bed made on the floor, and
+suggested I should lie down.
+
+"I am busy," said he.  "Most likely I shall be up all night, but that
+is no reason why you should not rest.  I will have you wakened in good
+time in the morning."
+
+"Thank you," I answered; and as he left the hut I lay down on the bed
+and closed my eyes.
+
+Though tired out, hours passed before I was able to sleep.  In the
+darkness I could see Rosa's white face, and hear her pitiful cry, "Save
+him, Juan, save him for me!"
+
+What had he done to make Sorillo so angry?  Surely he was not so bitter
+against every traitor?  He had hinted that even I would not beg for
+mercy when I knew the truth.  It would have to be something very
+dreadful, I thought, to make me forget my promise to Rosa.
+
+And what of Don Felipe?  How was he passing the night?  Did he know the
+charge to be brought against him in this most irregular court? and
+would he be able to clear himself?  I wondered.
+
+So thinking and dreaming, between sleep and wakefulness, I lay on the
+chief's bed, while the long hours rolled slowly away.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXI.
+
+ROUGH JUSTICE.
+
+I did not take much rousing in the morning, and even before remembering
+the exact circumstances, felt oppressed by the weight of coming sorrow.
+I breakfasted alone, Sorillo sending a profuse apology for not being
+able to join me, though I was rather glad than otherwise at his absence.
+
+Leaving the hut, I went into the ravine.  There were perhaps a hundred
+men in sight, all armed, and apparently waiting for some signal.  Their
+comrades, no doubt, had been dispatched on an errand, or were guarding
+the neighbouring passes.  In front of Don Felipe's hut stood a sentry,
+and, somewhat to my surprise, I now noticed a second hut, slightly
+lower down and similarly guarded.
+
+"Two prisoners!" I thought.  "I wonder who the other is?  Sorillo did
+not mention him."
+
+Nearer the head of the ravine some soldiers were at work, and going
+towards them I beheld a strange and significant sight.  In the side of
+the hill was a natural platform, broad and spacious, while round it
+stretched in a semicircle a wide stone seat, which the men were
+covering with bright red cloth.  Below the platform stood a ring of
+soldiers with impassive faces.
+
+I was still wondering what this might mean, when Sorillo, touching my
+arm, led me to the centre of the stone seat, saying, "Sit there; you
+shall be a witness that the people of the Silver Key treat their
+enemies justly."
+
+Rather reluctantly I took the seat indicated.  Sorillo sat next me, and
+six officers, ascending the platform, took their places, three on
+either side of us.  That portion of the seat occupied by the chief was
+slightly raised; but this, of course, makes no difference to the story.
+
+At a signal from Sorillo the door of Don Felipe's hut was opened, and
+the prisoner came out escorted by two armed men.  The soldiers, opening
+to right and left, made way for him, and by means of the boulders,
+which served as steps, he climbed to the platform.
+
+In spite of my prejudice against the man, I rejoiced to see how boldly
+he held himself.  He appeared to have summoned to his aid all the pride
+of his dead-and-gone ancestors.  He glanced contemptuously at the
+gigantic Sorillo, and meeting my eyes, smiled defiantly.  As to the
+officers, he did not give them even a look.
+
+[Illustration: He glanced contemptuously at the gigantic Sorillo.]
+
+"Thank goodness," said I to myself, "no one can call Rosa's father a
+coward!"
+
+Then Sorillo began to speak, clearly and distinctly, but with no note
+of anger in his voice.
+
+"Don Felipe Montilla," he said, "you are brought here by order of the
+Society of the Silver Key."  Don Felipe's lips curled as if in
+amusement.  "It is charged against you that you, having taken the oath
+of loyalty to the government, have since been in traitorous
+communication with the Royalist leaders.  Do you deny or admit the
+charge?"
+
+Don Felipe shrugged his shoulders carelessly, saying, "A truce to your
+mummery!  Do you think I would plead for my life to a band of
+cut-throats?  What care I for your society?"
+
+I thought this outburst would provoke his captors beyond measure, but,
+as far as I could judge, it produced no effect at all.  They sat quite
+still, as if the remarks had been addressed to others.
+
+"It is our custom," continued Sorillo, "to give those brought before us
+every chance to defend themselves.  We are not lawyers; we do not
+juggle with words; our one desire is to get at the truth."
+
+"By St. Philip," muttered Montilla, "this is the last place I should
+have thought to find it in!"
+
+"For this reason," continued the chief, ignoring the sarcastic
+interruption, "the story shall be told plainly, and then you will
+understand exactly what you are charged with.  Three nights ago we
+stopped a man returning from Lima.  Many times he had gone to and fro
+unmolested, protected by a pass from Riva-Aguero.  At last he was
+recognized by one of our men as Pardo Lure�a, an utterly worthless man,
+who had already changed sides several times during the war."
+
+"He would have made a good recruit for you," remarked Montilla.
+
+"Suspecting this man, we had him watched," continued the chief, again
+passing over the interruption, "and found that always he went to your
+house, se�or, returning under the cover of night.  We knew you to be an
+excellent Patriot, yet the circumstance made us uneasy.  At length we
+decided to ignore the president's passport.  Lure�a was stopped and
+searched, with this result," and he flourished a letter before the
+prisoner.
+
+Don Felipe must have known by now how helpless his case was; but he
+only smiled.  In truth, at this crisis of his life he showed no want of
+pluck.
+
+"There is much in this letter," said the chief mercilessly.  "It
+contains a full list of the troops just dispatched to the south, and of
+those still remaining in Lima, with an exact statement as to the
+quantity of their stores and ammunition.  It describes their position,
+and advises General Canterac how he can best enter Lima and seize
+Callao.  It provides also a list of those who will join him, and
+stipulates that the writer shall keep not only his own estates, but
+shall be given those of which he has lately been deprived."
+
+At this last revelation Don Felipe changed colour somewhat, and
+withdrew his eyes from my face.
+
+"This letter," said Sorillo, "came from your house; it is signed F. M.,
+and I charge you with having written it.  Can you deny that it is in
+your handwriting?"
+
+The prisoner seemed to have regained self-possession, for looking
+steadily at Sorillo, he exclaimed, "A gentleman of Spain does not
+answer the questions of a mountain robber."
+
+Passing the letter to me, Sorillo said, "You know this man's
+handwriting; perhaps you will satisfy yourself that he wrote this
+letter?"
+
+"No," said I coldly, thrusting the paper away; "I will be neither judge
+nor witness in this case."
+
+"Very well," answered the chief; "let the second prisoner be brought
+forward."  And two men immediately fetched Pardo Lure�a from his hut.
+
+He was still a young man, but looked old.  His eyes were shifty and
+cunning, his lips full and thick; he did not seem to be at all the kind
+of man to play so daring a game.  Don Felipe looked at him so
+scornfully that he turned away his face in confusion.  He gave his
+answers clearly, however, and told the story from beginning to end
+without a tremor.
+
+It was as Sorillo had said.  The fellow admitted being a Royalist spy
+employed in carrying messages between General Canterac and Montilla.
+The Don, he declared, had procured him the pass signed by Riva-Aguero,
+and had given him the letter now in the guerilla chief's possession.
+
+Don Felipe never once interrupted him either by word or gesture; to
+look at him, one would have thought he was merely a spectator, with no
+interest in the matter one way or another.  But when at last the tale
+ended, and Sorillo called upon him to speak, his attitude changed.
+
+"Do your murders your own way," he cried defiantly.  "If the farce
+pleases you, play it.  What has it to do with me?  When I am accused of
+crime by the government of my country, I will answer."
+
+"Don Felipe is right, Sorillo," I interrupted.  "If he has done wrong,
+let him be brought before a proper tribunal.  Whether he be innocent or
+guilty, if you kill him you commit murder.  You and your followers have
+no right to punish him."
+
+"In the case of a traitor we take the right," answered Sorillo
+drily.--"But there is a further charge, Don Felipe Montilla, more
+serious still.  You have been proved false to your country; I accuse
+you also of being false to your friend."
+
+Hitherto, I am bound to admit, the guerilla chief had acted like a
+perfectly impartial judge; now there was a ring of anger in his voice
+and a dangerous glitter in his eyes.  As to Montilla, I could hardly
+suppress an exclamation of surprise at the change in his appearance.
+No longer boldly erect, he stood with drooping head, pale cheeks, and
+downcast eyes.  In the first act he had behaved like a man of spirit;
+the second he began like a craven.
+
+"Listen!" exclaimed Sorillo sternly, and his first words told me what
+would follow.  "For many years there has lived in Lima a man who loves
+the Indians.  He saw that they were treated as dogs, and because of his
+great pity he resolved to help them.  To this end he worked day and
+night, making many enemies among the rulers of the country.  They tried
+to turn him from his purpose, now with threats, again with offers of
+heavy bribes: he would not be moved.  So badly were the Indians treated
+that it mattered little whether they lived or died.  They banded
+together, procured arms and ammunition, and determined to fight for
+their liberty.  Their friend sent them word that the attempt was
+hopeless; but they were very angry, and would not listen.  Then he left
+his home to speak to them himself, and endeavour to dissuade them from
+their purpose."
+
+Montilla had not once raised his head, and now his limbs quivered.  As
+for me, I sat listening with fascinated interest.
+
+"Side by side with this friend of the Indians," the chief continued,
+"there lived a Spanish gentleman, who told the viceroy falsely that his
+neighbour was going to the mountains to raise the standard of
+rebellion.  The viceroy, who was frightened, sent soldiers to seize
+him.  Second in command of the party was a lieutenant, young in years
+but old in crime.  To him this Spaniard went secretly.  'If this man
+should be killed in the scuffle,' said he, 'you can come to me for five
+thousand dollars.'
+
+"The lieutenant did his best to earn the money, and thought he had
+succeeded.  As it chanced, however, his victim did not die, but his
+estates were confiscated and given to the man who had betrayed him."
+
+The speaker stopped.  All was still; save for the leaping waters of the
+torrent, no sound was to be heard.  I glanced at Montilla: he was
+deathly pale, and on his forehead stood great beads of perspiration,
+which, with his bound hands, he was unable to wipe away.
+
+"Shall I tell you who these men were?" asked Sorillo.  "One is Don
+Eduardo Crawford; the others stand here," and he pointed to the
+prisoners.  "Listen to your accomplice, Felipe Montilla, if you care to
+hear the story repeated."
+
+Again Lure�a gave his evidence glibly.  I think he had no sense of
+shame, but only a strong desire to save his life.  He might not have
+committed the deed for the sake of the money alone, he said, but he
+hated my father for having cast him into prison.
+
+It was poor evidence on which to try a man for his life, yet no one
+doubted Montilla's guilt.  There he stood with trembling limbs and
+ashen face--truly a wretched figure for a cavalier of Spain!  His
+courage had broken down completely, and to all the questions put by his
+self-appointed judge he answered no word.
+
+At length Sorillo asked his officers for their verdict, and with one
+consent they pronounced him "Guilty!"
+
+"It is a true verdict," exclaimed Sorillo; "any other would be a
+lie.--And now, Felipe Montilla, listen to me for the last time.  You
+have been proved a traitor to your country, and that alone merits
+death; but this other crime touches the members of the Silver Key more
+closely.  When the great men of Peru called the Indians dogs, Don
+Eduardo was our friend.  He took our side openly, encouraged us,
+sympathized with us, pitied us.  And you tried to slay him! not in fair
+fight, mind you, and only because you coveted his possessions.  For
+that you die within forty-eight hours, as surely as the sun will rise
+to-morrow!"  And all his hearers applauded.
+
+The condemned man still made no reply, uttered no appeal for mercy, but
+stood as one dazed.  But I thought of the daughter who loved him so
+well, and sprang to my feet.
+
+"Hear me!" I cried excitedly.  "If Don Felipe has done wrong, it is
+against my father.  Do you think he will thank you for killing his
+enemy?  Is that his teaching?  You know it is not; you know that he
+would forgive him freely--would beg his life from you on his bended
+knees.  If you really love my father, if you feel that he deserves your
+gratitude, spare this man's life.  If he has sinned he will repent.  I
+have come here for him.  Do not let me go back alone.  Am I to say to
+my father, 'You are foolish in thinking the Indians care for you; they
+care nothing!  I asked of them a boon in your name, and they refused
+it'?  Raymon Sorillo, I appeal to you, give me this man's life for my
+father's sake!"
+
+I looked at him earnestly, hoping to find a spark of mercy in his eyes.
+Alas, there was none!  He was hard as iron, cold as ice; on that day,
+at least, there was no pity in him.
+
+"You are foolish," said he; "you are like a child who cries for the
+moon.  Set this man free and he will immediately begin his old games of
+deceit and trickery.  He cannot help himself.  It is his nature, as it
+is a spider's to weave its web.  Your father's happiness depends on
+this traitor's death."
+
+I heard him patiently, and then renewed my appeal.  It was quite
+useless.
+
+"Remove the prisoners," said he; and at a sign the troops marched off,
+the officers dispersed, and none save we two remained on the platform.
+For a long time neither spoke.  I was thinking of Rosa anxiously
+awaiting my return.  I had bidden her hope, and there was no longer any
+hope.  I made no attempt to deceive myself in this respect.  Sorillo
+would do much for me, but this one thing he would not do.  I dreaded
+the thought of returning to Lima.  What would Rosa say and do when she
+heard of her father's shameful death?  Perhaps that part might be
+spared her; she need not learn the whole truth.  I must invent some
+story which would save her the knowledge of his double treachery.
+
+At last I turned to the chief, saying, "Will you allow me to speak with
+Don Felipe in private?  He has a daughter at home; he may wish to send
+her a last message."
+
+"He is not worth your kindness; but do as you please."
+
+I thanked him, and walked toward the hut in which Don Felipe was
+confined.  The sentry let me pass without protest, and opening the door
+I entered.
+
+The sight before me was a pitiful one.  The wretched prisoner sat on a
+wooden bench in the dreary hovel.  His arms were bound, but he was free
+to walk about if he so wished.  At the click of the latch he raised his
+head, but seeing me dropped it again quickly, as if ashamed to meet my
+gaze.
+
+"Don Felipe," I began, "have you any message for your daughter?"
+
+Instead of answering my question, he himself asked one.
+
+"Will that brigand really put me to death?" he said.
+
+"I am afraid so.  I have begged hard for your life, but in vain."
+
+Looking at me curiously, he exclaimed, "I cannot understand why you
+should wish to save me!"
+
+"For Rosa's sake!  When you were carried off, she came to me, and I
+promised if it were possible to bring you back with me."
+
+"Then you do not believe the story you heard to-day, about--about--"
+
+"My father?  Yes, I believe it; but that is no reason why I should be
+unkind to Rosa.  Poor girl! 'twill be hard enough for her to lose you."
+
+"Is there no way of escape?"
+
+I shook my head.  "An armed sentry stands outside; a hundred soldiers
+are in the ravine; the path is closely watched.  I would help you if it
+were possible."
+
+"It will be dark to-night."
+
+"That would help us little.  Even if you escaped from the hut, you
+would be challenged at every dozen yards.  No, I can see no way out."
+
+I think that at this time he began to fully realize the danger he was
+in.  He had a hunted look in his eyes, and again the perspiration stood
+on his forehead.  Fear was fast killing shame, and he seemed to care
+nothing that I was the son of the man whom he had tried to murder.
+
+"Juan," said he, "can't you make an excuse to visit me after dark?"
+
+"I should think so," I replied.
+
+"And will you cut these cords?"
+
+"If you think it will help you at all."
+
+"Leave that to me," said he, speaking almost hopefully.  "By St.
+Philip, I shall escape the ruffian yet!"
+
+What his plan was he did not tell me, but it seemed to please him
+greatly.  He even laughed when I again mentioned Rosa, and said he
+would carry his message himself.  And with hope there came back to him
+something of the old cunning and smoothness of speech for which he was
+so noted.
+
+"I am sorry you were misled by that preposterous tale," said he softly.
+"Pardo Lure�a is a villain, but we will unmask him.  Of course, there
+was a little truth in his story, but so twisted and distorted that it
+could not be recognized.  Your father will understand, however, and
+even you will come to see that I am not greatly to blame.  A little
+thoughtlessness, Juan, and a desire to help a friend--no more; but that
+can wait.  You will be sure to come, Juan; you will not fail me?"
+
+"I will do my very best, Don Felipe, for your daughter's sake."
+
+Wishing him farewell, I returned to the chief's hut.  He was not there,
+so I lay down to think out the situation; but my head was in a hopeless
+muddle.  I went into the ravine again, and, watching the soldiers,
+wondered how the unhappy prisoner hoped to escape them.
+
+As it chanced, his plan was doomed to disappointment.  Toward the end
+of the afternoon I stood chatting with Sorillo and some of his
+officers, when a messenger rode up the ravine.  His horse had travelled
+far and fast, while he looked worn out with fatigue.
+
+Springing to the ground, he saluted, while the chief cried, "What news,
+Sanchez? it should be worth hearing!"
+
+"I think it is," replied the man, with a significant smile.  "General
+Canterac is marching on Lima at the head of a Spanish army."
+
+"How many men has he?"
+
+"Nine thousand, perhaps ten--horse, foot, and guns.  The advance-guard
+is not far off."
+
+"Thanks, Sanchez.--Let the men assemble, Barros: a dozen to stay here,
+the rest to follow me.  Has Cerde�a sent word to Lima?  Good.  He knows
+his business.--Juan, you will just have time to ride clear, and not
+much to spare.  No doubt Canterac has sent some of his troops by the
+near cut."
+
+All was bustle and activity in the ravine.  Officers issued commands,
+troopers saddled their horses, muskets were seen to, an extra supply of
+ammunition was served out, and in a very short time everybody save the
+few men left to guard the ravine was ready to march.
+
+"What can your handful of men do against Canterac's army?" I asked
+Sorillo as we rode away.
+
+"Not much beyond cutting off a few stragglers," he replied, smiling;
+"but we shall obtain information of which our leaders in Lima seem to
+stand badly in need."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXII.
+
+THE "SILVER KEY" AGAIN.
+
+Since these events happened I have asked myself many times whether I
+did right or wrong, and even now I scarcely know how to decide.  Those
+who blamed me said I was Sorillo's guest, and should not have abused
+his confidence.  Others urged that I was bound, if possible, to prevent
+him putting a man to death unlawfully.  All, however, agreed that none
+but a madman would have embarked on so preposterous an enterprise.
+
+The idea occurred to me suddenly.  The guerillas, split up into groups,
+had gone, some this way, some that, to watch the movements of the
+Royalist troops.  Sorillo had kept me company till we cleared the pass,
+when he, too, with a word of farewell, rode away.  It was now dusk,
+and, as the chief had truly said, there was no time to waste; yet I did
+not move.  Right in my path, with outstretched arms and pitiful,
+beseeching face, stood Rosa Montilla.  I knew it was but the outcome of
+a fevered brain; yet the vision seemed intensely real.
+
+The girl's eyes looked at me reproachfully, her lips moved as if in
+speech.  I fancied I could hear again her parting cry, "O Juan, save
+him!"
+
+I asked myself impatiently what more could be done.  I had tried my
+best and failed, and there was an end of it.  Besides, the words of the
+chief rang in my ears in ominous warning: Don Felipe could not be
+trusted!  To set him free was like giving liberty to a venomous snake;
+his hatred would now be all the more bitter in that he had struck and
+failed.
+
+Why should I add to my father's danger?  The fellow had tried to slay
+him once; the next time he would make no mistake.  I would make no
+further effort to help such a traitor; I would ride on.  But again the
+beseeching face of the girl stopped me, and again I was moved to think
+how I could aid the miserable prisoner.  Like a flash of lightning I
+thought of the silver key.  _That_ would unlock his prison door.
+Although I fully believed in Don Felipe's guilt, I remembered he made
+no effort to defend himself.  He would not admit Sorillo's right to try
+him.  Before a lawful judge he might be able to vindicate his actions
+in some way; at least he should have the chance to do so.  Thus
+thinking, I turned back in the direction of the ravine.
+
+Half of the sentries, I knew, had been withdrawn to ride with their
+chief, but the number on guard mattered little; the silver key was an
+all-powerful talisman.  I rode slowly, not wishing to tire the horses,
+to whose speed and strength we might later be indebted for our lives.
+I thought, too, it would serve my purpose better to reach the ravine in
+the dead of night, when the men would be sleepy and less likely to ask
+inconvenient questions.
+
+I was stopped at the entrance to the pass, but not for long.  The
+Indians who had seen me ride out with their chief had no suspicion of
+my object.
+
+"Where is the chief?" asked the officer.  "Have the Royalists got clear
+of the mountains?"
+
+"No; they are still in the defiles.  But I am in a hurry; I have come
+for the Spanish prisoner Montilla."
+
+Fortunately this officer had not attended the trial of Don Felipe, and
+Sorillo was not the man to give reasons for his orders.  My main
+difficulty would lie with the sentry at the door of the hut, but I did
+not think he would disobey the authority of the Silver Key.
+
+In any case, boldness was my best policy; so I clattered up the ravine,
+stopping hardly a yard from the astonished sentry.
+
+"Quick, man!" I cried, springing to the ground; "are you asleep?  Open
+the door.  I have come back for the prisoner.  Is he still bound?
+Good.  Can you tie him to this horse so that he cannot escape?"
+
+"Yes, se�or, if the chief wishes it.  But, pardon me, se�or, I have no
+orders."
+
+"Orders!" cried I angrily; "what would you?  I have but just left the
+chief; and is not this" (producing the silver key) "sufficient
+authority?  Am I to tell the chief that he must come himself for the
+prisoner?"
+
+"No, no, se�or; but I am only a simple soldier.  I must not open the
+door unless my officer bids me."
+
+"He is below," I said; "we cannot pass without his permission.  And I
+must hurry, or it will be too late.  Quick, drag the fellow out and
+bind him firmly on the horse; then come with me."
+
+The sentry had no inkling of the truth, and, never dreaming that his
+officer could be deceived, opened the door.  Then the prisoner, whether
+from fear or from cunning I could not tell, acted in such a manner that
+no one would think I was helping him to escape.
+
+He refused to stir an inch from his bench, and kicked vigorously when
+the sentry tried to seize him.  Then he yelled so loudly that the
+officer came running up in alarm.
+
+"The bird has no wish to leave his cosy nest," laughed he.--"Give me
+the rope, Pedro, and get a gag; the chief won't want to hear that
+music.--Now, se�or, if you'll bear a hand we'll hoist him up.--Be
+still, you villain, or you'll get a knock on the head.--Had not one of
+my fellows better go with you to guard this wild beast, se�or?"
+
+Now, from the officer's point of view this was a very sensible
+proposal, and one which I dared not oppose for fear of exciting
+suspicion.
+
+So I answered carelessly, "A good thought, and I am obliged to you;
+though," with a laugh, "the prisoner won't be able to do much mischief
+when you have finished with him."
+
+"No, indeed; he'll be pretty clever if he can get these knots undone,"
+replied the officer complacently.--"Now, the gag, Pedro.  Quick, or
+he'll spoil his voice in the night air.--There, my pretty bird! you
+shall sing later on."
+
+All this occupied time, and I was in dread lest dawn should break
+before we left the ravine.  Then we had to wait till Pedro had saddled
+his horse; and I watched the sky anxiously.  At last we were ready, and
+bidding Pedro ride in front, I took leave of the unsuspecting officer.
+
+"A safe journey," he cried.  "I should like to know what Sorillo means
+to do with the fellow."
+
+"You'll hear all about it when the troops return," said I, laughing and
+hurrying after Pedro.
+
+Thus far the venture, with one exception, had succeeded admirably.  The
+prisoner was out of his cage, and would soon be clear of the pass.
+Then I should only have Pedro to deal with.  His company was a
+nuisance, but it must be borne with for the present; later I should
+have to find means to get rid of him.
+
+We rode slowly down the narrow path, Pedro in front, Don Felipe and I
+abreast.  The poor fellow was in a hapless plight.  The gag hurt his
+mouth, and the cords cut into his flesh.  Had we been alone, I should,
+of course, have done something to ease his pain; but as long as Pedro
+was there, this was out of the question.
+
+"Anyhow, it's better than being shot," I thought; "and really the
+wretch deserves it all."
+
+We passed the sentries without trouble; but at the bottom of the pass
+my difficulties began again.
+
+"I suppose the chief has gone to San Mateo, se�or?" said Pedro
+questioningly.  "That is the best place to watch from."
+
+This was an awkward question, as I had intended making a straight dash
+for Lima; but it would not do to arouse the man's suspicions.  We were
+too close to the mountains to run any unnecessary risks, and if Pedro
+showed fight there, our chance of escape was gone.
+
+So I answered, "Yes," and rode along, wondering what would come of it.
+Every step led us into greater danger.  We might run into the arms of
+the guerillas, in which event Don Felipe's fate was certain; or be
+stopped by the Royalists, when I should be made prisoner.
+
+Day was now breaking, and with the strengthening light I began to see
+our position more clearly.  It was not promising.  We were farther from
+Lima than we had been when in the ravine, and were making straight for
+the mountains again.  Another half-hour's riding would cut us off from
+escape completely.  What could be done?  There was no time to lose, and
+I must hit on a plan at once.  The simplest and perhaps the only one
+likely to be successful I set aside without a moment's hesitation.  Not
+for a dozen men's lives, my own included, would I harm the unsuspecting
+man whom chance had thrown into my power.  I might, however, frighten
+him into obedience.  As far as I could see, it was that or nothing, and
+the attempt must be made at once.
+
+So, with beating heart and greatly doubting what would be the issue, I
+whipped out my pistol, and, levelling it at him, said quietly, "Move
+your hand to your musket, and you are a dead man! do as I bid you, and
+no harm will befall you.  Leave your gun, get down from the saddle, and
+hold your hands above your head."
+
+In the circumstances it was a risky experiment, because if the man
+should guess the truth I was entirely at his mercy.  For him there was
+no more danger than if my pistol were a piece of wood.
+
+"But, se�or--" he began, staring at me in surprise.
+
+"Get down!" I repeated sternly.  "It is my order.  Don't waste time, or
+I shall be obliged to fire."
+
+Pedro was a brave man; indeed, all the Indians in Sorillo's band held
+their lives cheap.  He did not exactly understand what was happening,
+yet he seemed to think that all was not right.
+
+"The chief!" he exclaimed.  "Does he--"
+
+"Get down!" I cried once more, brandishing my weapon.
+
+With a thundering shout of "The Silver Key!  Help for the Silver Key!"
+he clubbed his musket and dashed straight at me, regardless of the
+levelled pistol.
+
+One moment's pressure on the trigger and he would have dropped to the
+ground helpless, but I refrained; instead, I pulled the rein, and my
+horse swerved sharply, though not in time.  The musket descended with a
+thud; the pistol slipped from my nerveless fingers; I seemed to be
+plunging down, down beneath a sea of angry waters.
+
+How long I lay thus, or what happened during that time, I do not know;
+but I awoke to find myself beside a roaring fire, and to hear the hum
+of many voices.  A soldier, hearing me move, came and looked into my
+face.
+
+"Where am I?" I asked anxiously.
+
+"Not far from Lima," said he.  "A few hours since you weren't far from
+the next world.  How did you get that broken head?"
+
+I tried hard to remember, but could not; the past was a total blank.
+
+"Well, well, never mind," exclaimed the man kindly.  "Try to sleep; you
+will be better in the morning."
+
+With the coming of dawn I saw that I was in the midst of a large camp.
+Thousands of soldiers wrapped in their ponchos lay motionless before
+smouldering fires.  Presently there was a blowing of bugles, and the
+still figures stirred to life.  Officers rode hither and thither
+issuing orders, the men ate their scanty rations, the cavalry groomed
+and fed their horses--there were all the sights and sounds connected
+with an army about to march.
+
+Then the infantry formed in battalions, the horsemen mounted, bugles
+sounded in numerous places; there was a cracking of whips, the creaking
+of wheels, and all began to move slowly forward.  Soon but a few men
+remained, and it seemed that I had been forgotten.
+
+At length a man came to me.  He was dressed in uniform, but his words
+and actions proved him to be a surgeon.
+
+"Feel better?" he asked.  "Can you eat something?  I can only give you
+army food; but that will fill up the hollows.  Now let me look at the
+damage.  Faith, I compliment you on having a thick skull.  A thinner
+one would have cracked like an egg-shell.  Don't try to talk till
+you've had something to eat."
+
+"Just one question," I said faintly.  "Who are the soldiers just moved
+out?"
+
+"Why, General Canterac's troops.  I see you belong to the other side.
+But don't worry; we shan't hurt you."
+
+"Then I am a prisoner?"
+
+"That's always the way--one question leads to a dozen, Yes, I suppose
+you are a prisoner; but that's nothing very terrible," and he hurried
+off to procure food and drink for me.
+
+Later in the day he came to have another talk, and I learned something
+of what had happened.
+
+"We crossed the mountains almost without a check," he began.  "The
+Indians did us some damage; but they were only a handful, and we saw
+none of your fellows."
+
+"But how came I to be here?"
+
+"Ah! that's a queer story.  A party of scouts screening our left flank
+had just reached the base of the mountains, when they heard a fellow
+yelling at the top of his voice.  By the time they got in sight, the
+man had evidently knocked you down, and was off at a mad gallop."
+
+"Alone?" I asked.
+
+"No; that's the strange part of it.  He was leading a spare horse which
+carried something on its back.  Our men could not get a good view, but
+it looked like a full sack, or a big bundle of some sort.  They
+followed rapidly, and were wearing the runaway down when the Indians
+appeared in force on the hills.  Of course that stopped the pursuit,
+and after picking you up, they came on with the army."
+
+My memory returned now, and I understood what had happened.  Pedro had
+escaped, and carried Don Felipe with him to the Indians of the Silver
+Key.
+
+"Poor Rosa!" I sighed; "it is all over now.  She will never see her
+father again.  Sorillo will take care that he doesn't escape a second
+time."
+
+My thoughts dwelt so much on this that I took little interest in the
+rest of the doctor's conversation.  He was very jubilant, though, I
+remember, about his party's success, telling me that in a short time
+General Canterac would be master of Callao, and that the Patriots had
+nowhere the slightest chance of victory.
+
+"What will be done with me?" I asked.
+
+"I shall send you with our sick to the hospital at Jauja.  The air
+there is bracing, and will help you to recover more quickly."
+
+"Thank you," I said, though really caring very little at that time
+where I was sent.
+
+Next day I was placed with several Spanish soldiers in an open wagon,
+one of a number of vehicles guarded by an escort of troopers.  My
+friendly surgeon had gone to Lima; but I must say the Spaniards behaved
+very well, making no difference between me and their own people.
+
+As to the journey across the mountains, I remember little of it.  The
+worthy Pedro had made such good use of his musket that my head was
+racked with pain, and I could think of nothing.  Most of the sick
+soldiers were also in grievous plight, and it was a relief to us all
+when, after several days' travelling, the procession finally halted in
+Jauja.
+
+Here we were lifted from the carts and carried to a long whitewashed
+building filled with beds.  They were made on the floor, and many of
+them were already occupied.  Accommodation was found for most of us,
+but several had to wait until some of the beds became vacant.
+
+Two or three doctors examined the fresh patients, and one forced me to
+swallow a dose of medicine.  Why, I could not think, unless he wanted
+me to know what really vile stuff he was capable of concocting.
+
+I shall pass quickly over this portion of my story.  For weeks I lay in
+that wretched room, where dozens of men struggled night and day against
+death.  Some snatched a victory in this terrible fight, but now and
+again I noticed a file of soldiers reverently carrying a silent figure
+from one of the low beds.
+
+By the end of September I was strong enough to get up, and the doctors
+pronouncing me out of danger, I was taken to another building.  This
+was used as a prison for captured officers of the Patriot forces, and
+the very first person to greet me as I stepped inside the room was the
+lively Alzura.
+
+"Juan Crawford," cried he, "by all that's wonderful!  From the ballroom
+to the prison-house!  There's a splendid subject for the moralist.
+Where have you been, Juan? your people think you are dead.  Miller is
+frantic; all your friends in Lima are in despair."
+
+"Do you know anything of Don Felipe Montilla?" I asked.
+
+"Montilla?  No; there is a mystery about him too.  It is given out that
+he was abducted by brigands, but some people whisper another story."
+
+"What?"
+
+"That he fled to the Royalists, my boy, as I prophesied he would."
+
+"Then you were a false prophet."
+
+"Then I ask the worthy Don's pardon for suspecting him without cause.
+But how did you get here?"
+
+"I was brought in a wagon."
+
+"Lucky dog!  Always lucky, Juan.  I had to walk," and he showed me his
+feet, naked, and scored with cuts.
+
+After sympathizing with him, I asked him how events were shaping.
+
+"Canterac did not capture Callao, as he hoped, and is now back in the
+highlands.  Many things have happened, however; let me be your
+chronicle.  Where shall I start?"
+
+"From the day that Canterac swooped down on Lima."
+
+"That was nothing.  He sat down in the capital; we hugged the guns at
+Callao and looked at him.  When he got tired he took himself off, and
+we returned to our quarters."
+
+"Nothing very exciting in that."
+
+"You are right, my boy.  Your judgment is marvellous.  But we had a day
+of excitement shortly before I came on this trip.  You should have been
+there.  Lima went stark mad!  The guns at Callao thundered for hours;
+the capital was decked with flags; the people cheered till they were
+hoarse; there was a very delirium of joy.  It was the greeting of Peru
+to her saviour--her second saviour, that is."
+
+"Why can't you speak plainly?  Do you mean Bolivar has come?"
+
+"Your second question, Juan, shows there was little need for the first.
+Yes, Bolivar, the protector or emperor, or whatever name the new master
+of Peru cares to be known by.  The hero of South America has arrived;
+let the Spaniards tremble!"
+
+"For any sake give your tongue a rest.  What has Santa Cruz done?"
+
+"What has Santa Cruz done?  A very great deal, my boy, I assure you.
+He has lost his whole army--men and horses, guns and ammunition, wagons
+and stores.  What do you think of that, young man?  You will be
+compelled to swallow Bolivar after all."
+
+"Let us change the subject.  Tell me about yourself."
+
+"Ah," said he, "that is indeed a great subject!  Your discernment is
+worthy of praise.  I can talk on that topic for hours without tiring.
+Where shall I begin?"
+
+"Where is the jailer?"
+
+"Why?"
+
+"That I may ask him to send me back to the hospital."
+
+"Juan, you are a fraud!  But hark! that is the bell calling us to
+dinner.  Blessed sound!  Come with me to the banquet."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIII.
+
+AN OPEN-AIR PRISON.
+
+There were fifteen or sixteen Patriot officers of all ranks in the
+prison, and I found most of them jolly fellows.  We lived all together
+in two large rooms, one of which was used as a bedroom.  In addition,
+we were allowed at certain hours to walk up and down a long corridor,
+so that we got a fair amount of exercise.
+
+Alzura and a few of the other youngsters spent much time in planning
+methods of escape, and they were glad of any suggestions I could offer.
+As a rule, our arrangements ended in talk.  The viceroy put his trust
+rather in keen-eyed sentries than in locks, bolts, and strong walls.
+An armed man stood on either side of the door leading to the corridor,
+which was itself guarded by a chain of soldiers.  At the yard-door,
+through which we were not permitted to pass, an officer with several
+men always stood on duty.
+
+Three or four times every week, in the middle of the night, an
+inspecting officer would summon us to get up and answer our names.
+This was a great nuisance, as it disturbed our sleep, but fortunately
+it did not take long.  We slept on the floor fully dressed and wrapped
+in our ponchos, so there was no delay in making our toilets.
+
+We were given sufficient food--of a sort; but we had no amusements of
+any kind, and absolutely nothing to do.  Our sole occupation was
+walking round and round the room like caged bears, and chatting about
+the war.
+
+Most of us voted Alzura a bore in this respect, but I think on the
+whole he did us good.  His was the first voice heard in the morning,
+and the last at night.  He was equally ready to talk with ensign or
+general, and on any subject under the sun.  He would jest or laugh, or,
+I really believe, weep with you at a moment's notice.  He would
+instruct the artillery officer in the management of guns, advise the
+cavalryman how to ride, and show the general the best way to order a
+battle.  Alzura was a genius, and most of us were only now beginning to
+find it out.
+
+When the talk turned to the best way of escaping, he was delightful.
+Never was there a fellow with such ingenious schemes; only, as it
+happened, they were not quite suitable to our circumstances.  Had we
+been in an underground cell, with massive walls and an iron door, he
+would have had us out in less than no time.  When I mentioned casually
+that we were not so placed, he would reply good-humouredly, "No, dear
+boy, but some day you may be, and then my instructions will come in
+handy.  But, as you say, the position at present is slightly different.
+First, we have to pass the sentry on this side of the door.  I suppose
+we are all agreed on that point?  Well, then, having got rid of him--"
+
+"But we haven't got rid of him!"
+
+"No; quite true.  I can see him from here, and a very surly fellow he
+looks.  I wonder the officer doesn't give us some one with a more
+amiable face.  However, that's outside the argument.  Now, supposing we
+had disposed of this fellow, the question is, what to do next."
+
+"But we haven't disposed of him!"
+
+"Just so; but we ought to be prepared in case he is withdrawn, or
+anything of that sort, you know.  However, if you won't follow my
+advice, it's no use giving it.  It's simply folly to go on talking."
+
+"I felt convinced you would say something sensible before you had
+finished," laughed one of the youngsters gaily.
+
+Alzura laughed too, and gave the fellow a playful tap on the head, for
+he loved a joke whoever chanced to be the victim.
+
+That same evening he told us of a fresh plan--for Alzura was as full of
+plans as an egg is of meat--and before he came to the end, we were
+laughing so uproariously that the sentry ordered us to make less noise.
+
+"I daresay you fellows have wasted the day as usual," he began; "that
+is the worst of having some one to do your thinking for you.  I really
+wish you wouldn't depend so much on me."
+
+"That's the penalty of being so clever, my boy.  The world always
+overworks its greatest men.  It's quite reasonable, after all."
+
+"But it's hard on me, nevertheless," observed Alzura; "though I suppose
+one ought not to complain of being a genius.  Well, I've been working
+my brains all day--"
+
+"Your what?"
+
+"Oh, shut up, and let me speak!  I've hit on a lovely plan: it will
+work like a machine; it can't possibly fail.  We have been on the wrong
+tack, trying to meet force with force.  What we want is craft.  Do you
+follow me, boys?"
+
+"Yes, yes; go on!  Let's hear the lovely plan."
+
+"When you do hear it, you will wonder why no one thought of it before.
+It is simple beyond belief, almost."
+
+"A true mark of genius, Alzura.  But we're waiting to hear this
+infallible plan."
+
+"Well, look here.  Just study that sentry's face a minute.  Who is he
+like?  Don't know?  Why, isn't he just like our friend Crawford?"
+
+The little group laughed with delight, while I said reproachfully, "Oh,
+come, Alzura!"
+
+"Not so much the face, dear boy," said he, "but the figure.  He's just
+your height and build; you will admit that.  And his clothes will fit
+you, Juan.  Now, do you see?"
+
+I confessed to being still in a fog, so he continued his explanations.
+
+"This is the idea," said he.  "You and Barriero--Barriero is
+wonderfully strong--stroll down to him presently.  Pretend you want to
+ask him a question.  That will put him off his guard.  What happens?
+You spring on him suddenly, clap a rag in his mouth, and with our help
+hold him so that he cannot struggle.  Then you exchange clothes and
+stand on guard.  When the relief comes you march away.  Understand?"
+
+"Nothing could be simpler," I murmured, while we were all nearly
+choking with suppressed laughter.
+
+"Grand, isn't it?" said he.  "I knew you would be struck."--I
+was.--"Then we'll serve the next fellow the same way, and the next, and
+so on till we are all out.  After that we'll seize the viceroy--"
+
+But by this time we were convulsed with laughter, and the sentry, in no
+very gentle tones, advised us to be quiet.
+
+"It's a great scheme, Alzura," I said presently, "a wonderful scheme,
+but it can't be carried out.  Suppose the trick was discovered after my
+escape, all you fellows would be punished sharply, and I shouldn't like
+that."
+
+"No," said he, in a disappointed tone; "I thought your scruples might
+stand in the way."
+
+Alzura's plan was still fresh in our minds when the Royalists showed us
+how to pass the sentry.  One morning, directly after breakfast, an
+officer entered the room with a number of soldiers, and we were ordered
+to stand in line.  Producing a paper, he read a list of the names, and
+each man, as he answered, was told to step forward.  Then we were
+marshalled in twos, the left arm of one man being tied to the right of
+the other.  My companion was Alzura, and very disgusted he looked at
+the treatment.
+
+"What are they going to do with us?" he asked.
+
+"I don't know.  Perhaps they heard we wanted to get away, and are
+obliging us."
+
+"Silence!" roared a Royalist sergeant; "no talking!"  And Alzura
+groaned.  How was he to live if he had to keep his tongue still?
+
+A long strip of tough hide was now brought, and was knotted at
+intervals to the fastenings between each pair of prisoners.  It formed
+a sort of gigantic single rein, and I suggested in a whisper to Alzura
+that we were to be harnessed to the viceroy's chariot.
+
+"'Twill save horseflesh, and we shall be doing something for our
+living," I added.
+
+Some of the soldiers now went to the front of us, some to the rear; the
+door was flung wide open.  "March!" cried the officer, and into the
+corridor we marched, through the yard, and so into the open road.
+
+"Out at last," I remarked to Alzura.  "The Royalists have hit on an
+even simpler plan than yours."
+
+"Simple, but not clever.  There is no art in this kind of thing."
+
+"Oh, isn't there?" I laughed, giving the thongs a tug.  "The
+arrangement strikes me as unusually artistic."
+
+"You are trying to be witty, dear boy.  Don't.  The Royalists will be
+revenged on us, and who shall blame them?  Hullo, they aren't taking us
+into the town!"
+
+"No; we're going for a pleasure trip somewhere, I expect.  How kind of
+them to think we need a change!--I say, Barriero, don't you think this
+is an improvement on Alzura's plan?"
+
+Barriero, who was one of the couple in front of us, laughed and said,
+"Well, I can't say yet.  I'll tell you when I know more about it."
+
+At the gate of the prison our escort had been strengthened by a number
+of horsemen, who now rode on either side of us, so that any hope of
+escaping was quite extinguished.  We knew nothing as to our
+destination, which I think the officer in charge did not make known
+even to his subordinates.  A few people stood at the outskirts of the
+town to watch us pass, but during the remainder of the day we saw no
+one except our guards.
+
+The march was terribly painful and fatiguing, though I have no wish to
+suggest that we were ill-treated.  The fact was, the long confinement
+we had undergone made us keenly alive to the trials of a wearisome
+journey such as this.  About midday a halt was called, our fastenings
+were loosened, while we were allowed to sit down and eat a ration of
+meat which was served out to each of us.  Some of the soldiers rested;
+others stood on guard, with orders to shoot any man who made the
+slightest effort to escape.
+
+"They needn't fear my running far," said Alzura ruefully, showing me
+his bleeding feet.
+
+"Caramba!" cried a soldier sitting near, "that won't do, se�or.  The
+rocks are sharp in this part of the country.  Wait; I have some green
+hides in my knapsack.  I'll make you some sandals if the colonel halts
+for an hour."
+
+"I shall be very grateful for your kindness," said Alzura; "the pain in
+my feet has kept me from admiring the scenery, and there are some grand
+views about here."
+
+"I've seen finer in Lima," muttered the man, who was already busy at
+his self-imposed task.
+
+"Give me some stuff," said one of his comrades; "I'll make one sandal
+while you make the other.  The youngster will have his feet cut to the
+bone.  He ought to be at school instead of marching about the country."
+
+"I'm not eager to march," laughed Alzura; "I'll stay behind willingly."
+
+"Ugh!" exclaimed the first soldier, "you would soon be dead in this
+wilderness.  We have seen some sights in this district--haven't we,
+Alonzo?"
+
+"That we have," replied his companion, "and I don't want to see any
+more of them."
+
+The two worthy fellows worked so industriously that in less than half
+an hour the sandals were completed, the holes pierced, and the laces
+put in, all ready for use.
+
+"I don't know how to thank you," said Alzura earnestly, "but if we
+manage to live through this war, I may be able to pay you back.  At
+present you must take the will for the deed."
+
+"It's all right, se�or; we could not see you suffer like that.  And our
+officer will say we did right.  Just in time, too!  There's the summons
+to assemble."
+
+At the evening halt we were again set free a short time, being
+refastened for the night.  After travelling for four days in this way,
+we saw from the top of a high hill the waters of a magnificent lake,
+studded with islets.  It seemed quite near; but several hours passed
+before we reached its border--a broad morass, through which ran devious
+tracks.
+
+Our leader now stopped, and we saw a number of soldiers carefully
+crossing one of the tracks from the lake.  As soon as they reached us
+we were unbound and placed in single file, while the chief of the
+escort said, "The journey is ended.  Yonder is your home while the war
+lasts.  It is not a lively place, but you will be out of mischief.
+Follow your guides, and walk carefully; you will not enjoy sinking in
+the quagmires."
+
+We appreciated his advice more when, about half-way across, a stout
+middle-aged major, missing his footing, plunged into the liquid mud.
+In an instant he was immersed to the chin, and but for Barriero, who
+grasped his head, would have disappeared altogether.  As it was, he
+presented a miserable appearance, and showed us how terrible was the
+danger.
+
+Several boats were moored at the edge of the lake, and an officer
+directed us to get in, one by one.  Barriero, Alzura, and I entered the
+same boat; which was fortunate, as the prisoners were divided into
+three groups and taken to different islets.
+
+There were six of us in our group, and twelve soldiers under the
+command of a non-commissioned officer.  The guard occupied comfortable
+quarters, while three mud huts were reserved for us.  The islet was
+quite bare of trees, and was so small that Alzura pretended he could
+not stretch his legs comfortably for fear of slipping into the water.
+
+The men who had rowed us over did not land, but took the boats to
+another islet, much larger than ours, which we guessed to be the
+headquarters of this novel prison.
+
+"The governor of this place is a clever warder," remarked Barriero;
+"there's no getting away from here."
+
+"Why not?" I asked.
+
+"The risk is too great.  Just think for a minute.  First one would have
+to swim to the shore, and then cross the morass in the dark, as it
+would not be possible to escape in the daytime.  It's really waste of
+time to mount a guard over us."
+
+"We must set our wits to work," observed Alzura gravely.
+
+"No, no," I cried; "Barriero's is the only way, and a very poor one it
+is.  The swim is a trifle, but to cross the morass--"
+
+"Why not build a bridge?" suggested Alzura.
+
+"And use our bodies as part of the foundations," said Barriero,
+laughing.  "If you make any more idiotic remarks, Alzura, I'll throw
+you into the lake."
+
+"All right," said he.  "You'll be sorry when Crawford and I escape and
+leave you behind."
+
+"I've a long time to wait," replied Barriero, "so I'll pass some of it
+in sleep."
+
+Alzura and I shared one of the huts between us.  There was no
+furniture; the floor was of mud, and so were the walls, while the roof
+was thatched with some dried vegetable matter.  The place was not
+exactly a palace, but it sheltered us, and for that we were thankful.
+
+The sergeant in charge of the islet was a good-humoured fellow.
+Feeling sure that we could not escape, he treated us quite genially,
+though maintaining discipline at the same time.  He often talked of the
+war, giving us news now and again of events which never happened.
+
+On the third morning after our arrival, we saw several boats leave the
+main island and visit the various islets on which prisoners were kept.
+
+"That's the governor making a tour of his kingdom," the sergeant
+explained.  "He is bringing us a week's provisions, and will no doubt
+have a peep at his new subjects."
+
+The governor was a Spanish officer, quite old, but stiff and erect in
+spite of his many years.  He ordered us to draw up in line, called our
+names from the list, hoped we should be comfortable, ordered the
+sergeant to put in irons any man who disobeyed him, wished us all
+good-morning in courtly old-world style, stepped into his boat, and was
+rowed away.
+
+"Not a word about attempting to escape!" remarked Barriero.
+
+The sergeant heard the remark, and said with a laugh, "It is needless,
+se�or.  No one ever got away from here.  Some have tried, and they are
+at the bottom of the morass.  Why, even I would not venture to cross
+that terrible place, except in broad daylight with a trusty guide.  If
+you think of trying, se�or, let me advise you to stay where you are.
+Here you can be comfortable; there--ugh!" and the man shuddered at the
+very thought of it.
+
+"Your advice is good, sergeant, and I intend to profit by it," cried
+Barriero.  "We saw one man slip when we were crossing, and I shan't
+forget his face in a hurry.  Caramba! it makes me shiver yet."
+
+"Besides," continued the sergeant, "suppose that by some miracle you
+cross the marsh, what would happen then?  You would die of hunger.  But
+I will grant you a further miracle.  You shall cross the mountains and
+join your friends.  Is the danger over?  It is but just beginning.  You
+will be killed in battle.  But your luck clings to you, and you still
+survive.  Well, then, the war comes to an end; you are hunted down,
+captured with arms on you, and shot as rebels."
+
+"What a charming picture, sergeant!" laughed Alzura.  "It seems to me
+we are better off where we are."
+
+"I am glad for your own sake that you think so," said the officer
+gravely.  "I grow attached to my birds with their clipped wings, and
+only desire their welfare.  There was a young fellow here once, a
+pretty boy, se�or, like yourself"--Alzura bowed gracefully--"and I had
+grown to love him.  But he got tired of the place and the company, I
+suppose, and one night he slipped into the water.  I fired my musket,
+and a boat which is always kept ready started in pursuit.  He reached
+the morass first, and found a track.  My men followed cautiously.  They
+could not see him, but presently they knew there was no need to go
+further."
+
+"How?" asked Alzura curiously.
+
+"The shriek of the boy as he went to his death told them what had
+happened.  Ah, it was not the first time some of them had heard such a
+wail!"
+
+"Sergeant," said Alzura, "you tell such lively stories that I wonder at
+any one becoming tired of your society!"
+
+"You are pleased to be merry," replied the man, "and I, too, can be the
+same, only not when speaking of the morass.  Come, let us forget it for
+a while.  Although you are my prisoners, you will not find me a harsh
+jailer."
+
+This was quite true, but not all his kindness could make up to us for
+loss of liberty.  Barriero and the other three prisoners seemed quite
+resigned to their fate, but Alzura was always hankering after the
+delights of Lima and home, while I, too, longed very much to see my
+parents and friends.  So we often sat for hours watching the margin of
+the lake, envying the men who went ashore.  They carried on their heads
+whatever bundles they had, and we carefully noted the landing-place, as
+well as the track across the morass which they appeared to take.
+
+"It seems easy enough, doesn't it?" Alzura would say; "but in the dark
+it would be different!  Think of the quagmires, Juan!  Caramba! the
+sergeant was right.  We had better give up our dreams, Juan, eh?"
+
+I felt sure that this was wisely spoken, but somehow the next day we
+again went to look at the opposite shore and possible freedom.  That
+horrible morass had a wonderful fascination for us.  We thought of it
+by day and dreamed of it by night; but the weeks slipped away, and
+still we were prisoners on the islet.
+
+The new year came, and in May 1824 we were joined by another captive.
+This was a treat for us, as he brought news from the outside world.  He
+told us there had been many disturbances, that Bolivar was now
+undisputed ruler and leader of the Patriots, but that the end of the
+war seemed as far off as ever.
+
+"If they keep us till the country is at peace," said he, "we shall die
+of old age on this islet."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIV.
+
+A DANGEROUS JOURNEY.
+
+"I think," remarked Alzura, one day toward the end of June, "I'll get
+the sergeant to put me in irons."
+
+"Why?" I asked in surprise.
+
+"Because sitting here and looking at the land is driving me crazy."
+
+"Then don't look at it."
+
+"I can't help it, and that's the truth.  Wouldn't it be grand if we
+could only cross that morass safely!"
+
+"But we can't!"
+
+"No," said he; "but suppose we could?  Suppose there came a night when
+it was just dark enough to hide us, and yet light enough to show us the
+track?  Wouldn't it be a feather in our caps if we could get back
+safely to Miller?"
+
+"It would; but we should lose our nerve in that horrible swamp, even if
+we reached it."
+
+"Very likely; and our lives too.  Let's go back to the hut."
+
+We had often talked like this, but now there seemed more purpose and
+earnestness in my chum's manner.  I looked at him closely as we
+returned to our quarters, and wondered if he had decided to run the
+risk.
+
+"A quarter of a mile isn't a long swim, is it?" he said, after a time.
+
+"Oh no!" I agreed cheerfully.
+
+"And we might easily save sufficient food from our rations to last a
+long while."
+
+"Most likely we shouldn't need it long."
+
+"It would be very useful if we did."
+
+"Look here, Alzura," said I, turning on him suddenly, "let's make an
+end of this business.  What are you driving at?  Are you going to risk
+your life in that morass?"
+
+"I'm very tired of this place," he answered moodily.
+
+"So am I; but that doesn't lessen the danger of the swamp.  Now, let us
+make no mistake.  There is, perhaps, one chance in a hundred.  Is it
+worth risking?  Death in a morass must be rather horrible.  Don't you
+think so?"
+
+"Well, it can't be very pleasant; but you admit we stand a chance of
+getting across."
+
+"One in a hundred, no more."
+
+"Ah, well," said he thoughtfully, "let us sleep on it."
+
+I could not help thinking that my chum must want his freedom badly to
+even suggest such a venture.  Any hot-blooded enterprise, I knew well,
+appealed to him strongly; but this one required cool, dogged patience
+and nerves of iron.  Barriero was a brave fellow too, but he honestly
+admitted he would rather be shot than try to cross the morass in the
+dark.  As for me, I trembled at the thought of taking part in so
+hazardous an enterprise.
+
+However, it seemed to me that Alzura was making up his mind to go.
+Every day he let fall broad hints, and at last stated his intentions
+without reserve.
+
+"Juan," said he one evening, "I'm going.  The war may last a couple of
+years yet.  Are you coming with me?  Don't if you'd rather not risk it."
+
+"Have you counted the cost?"
+
+"Yes.  I know it's a touch-and-go affair; that is why I won't press you
+to join me."
+
+"Two will stand a better chance than one," said I thoughtfully, "and
+you mustn't try it alone.  Shall we ask Barriero to come with us?"
+
+"May as well pass the compliment," answered Alzura, laughing.  "But he
+won't, I'm positive."
+
+And he was right; for Barriero, on being asked, said hotly,--
+
+"You're a pair of idiots, and I don't know which is the bigger."
+
+"It must be neither or both, if we're a pair," chuckled Alzura.
+
+"Why can't you be satisfied?" growled Barriero.  "You've plenty of
+food, no work to do, and are well treated.  And there isn't one chance
+in a thousand of your getting through."
+
+"Crawford said one in a hundred!"
+
+"Well, anyway, you're certain to lose your lives, and I shall be blamed
+for not stopping you.  It's my duty to inform the sergeant, and have
+you chained up."
+
+"You can't," said Alzura--"you can't betray us."
+
+"You're two lunatics--stark, staring lunatics--and I wish you had told
+me nothing of your mad scheme."
+
+"It's awfully risky," said I, "but not so mad as you think.  We shall
+choose our night, and we know just where to land.  Then we shall take
+provisions to last us three or four days."
+
+"You won't need them," interrupted Barriero, in a tone of conviction
+which was far from encouraging.
+
+But now that the affair had really been decided on, the dangers of the
+morass soon lost some of their terrors.  We were able to talk about
+them calmly, and thus grew familiar with them, at least in imagination.
+Every day we set aside a portion of the dried meat and biscuit which
+formed the chief part of our food, until at last we had as much as
+could be carried easily.  It would be stupid to load ourselves with too
+heavy a burden, as Barriero rather unkindly reminded us.
+
+We waited three whole weeks after coming to our decision before
+starting on the venture, and then, one favourable night, slipped down
+to the edge of the islet.  Barriero, who had kept the secret, came to
+wish us good-bye, and the poor old fellow shook like a timid child.
+
+"It is a mad game," said he, "a downright mad game.  I shall never
+forgive myself for allowing you to go.  It isn't too late now to draw
+back.  Do take my advice, and don't risk it.  I shan't sleep a wink all
+night if you go."
+
+"Never mind, my boy," replied Alzura, laughing; "you'll have plenty of
+time afterwards for a nap.--Now, Juan, off with your clothes."
+
+The other prisoners were sound asleep in their huts; so were the
+soldiers, with the exception of the two sentries.  These men were
+supposed to keep a sharp lookout, but nothing had happened for so long
+a time that their duty was mostly a matter of form.  However, Barriero
+kept watch while we each stripped and made a bundle of our food and
+clothes to carry on our heads.
+
+"Good-bye, old man," we said to him when we were quite ready; and he,
+gripping our hands, whispered back,--
+
+"Good luck; but I wish you would not go.  Take care, and come back here
+rather than lose your lives, if you cannot find the track."
+
+We promised to do so, and then took quietly to the water.  The first
+part of the journey gave us no trouble whatever.  We were both good
+swimmers, and quickly arrived at the spot which we had selected as the
+landing-place.  Here we crouched on a patch of firm ground, undid our
+bundles, and proceeded to dress quickly.  A smothered exclamation from
+Alzura made me glance at him.  In his hurry he had whisked his shirt a
+yard or two away, and it had settled in the liquid mud.
+
+"There's an end to that garment!" said he.  "Well, after all, it's no
+great loss; 'twas mostly made of holes.  What have you found, Juan?"
+
+"A stout staff tipped with iron, left here by the soldiers, most
+likely.  What a piece of luck, my boy!  Now we shall be able to test
+the ground."
+
+"Yes, the balance is on our side," said he happily, buttoning his
+tunic.  "Are you ready?  Give me the staff, and I'll go first."
+
+Of course I could not let him do that; so turning it off with a laugh,
+I cried,--
+
+"No, thank you.  I'm not going to trust my life to your hands, or
+rather feet.  Now, follow me closely.  Walk just where I do, and if you
+see me disappearing, pull me back sharp.  We're on the track now, and
+must try to keep on."
+
+"Spoken with the wisdom of a sage!" said Alzura saucily.  "I say, Juan,
+how shall I know when you're moving?"
+
+There was certainly reason for his sarcasm.  As often as not, when I
+raised my foot I brought it down in the same place again, or, according
+to Alzura, even went a step backward.  The night was not particularly
+dark--indeed, we had doubted whether it was dark enough for us to swim
+ashore unobserved--but the marsh was fearfully deceptive.
+
+In places the track was merely a dry hump here and there, for which I
+had to feel with the staff.  Twice, in spite of every precaution, I
+missed my footing, and the second time had sunk to the waist before
+Alzura could pull me out.
+
+"I can't see you very well, Juan," said he, laughing, "but I have an
+idea that you would cut a fine figure in a ballroom just now."
+
+"Especially if it were a fancy-dress affair," I replied in the same
+tone.
+
+We were in no merry humour, mind you; but the weakest joke was better
+than dwelling on the horrors which surrounded us.  Each of us knew
+that, but for Alzura's quickness, I should have disappeared for ever,
+leaving no trace behind me.  Twice before the break of day I had saved
+him from a similar fate.
+
+We left the islet about ten o'clock, and at midnight were still in the
+morass, unable to move.  Alzura had joined me on a piece of firm
+ground, just large enough for us to stand on, and no more.  It was
+darker now, so that we could see nothing clearly, while I failed to
+touch any solid substance, except that behind us, with my pole.
+Alzura's attempts were equally unsuccessful.
+
+"You're a pretty guide!" said he.  "You've got off the track; we had
+better try back.  Give me the staff."
+
+"Be careful; mind how you turn.  Can you feel the ground where we stood
+just now?"
+
+"Yes; here it is," and the next minute he stepped back to feel for the
+proper path, while I stood trembling lest he should slip in and be
+smothered before I could get to his assistance.
+
+"Can you find a place?" I asked.
+
+"Only towards the lake.  It's nothing but marsh to right and left.  I
+think I'll come to you again.  What is it?  Did I hurt you?"
+
+"Oh no, not at all!--only crushed my toes a bit with the pole!  What
+are we going to do now?"
+
+"I suppose it's too early for breakfast?" he began, and then in a
+different tone he added hastily, "Oh, I say, what a joke!  I've dropped
+my bundle of food somewhere.  Perhaps it's just as well; I shall walk
+lighter."
+
+"But you'll want something to eat," I suggested.
+
+"Of course I shall.  How dense you are!  Don't you see how the accident
+will benefit us both?  There are two now instead of one to eat your
+rations, so you will have all the less to carry."
+
+"Oh," said I doubtfully, not quite appreciating the logic.  "Well, we
+don't want breakfast yet, and the question is, what are we to do?  The
+sergeant's bound to discover our escape at breakfast-time, and a
+search-party will be sent ashore immediately."
+
+"It will be light in an hour or two," observed Alzura cheerfully--"at
+least light enough for us to find the track again.  Let us sit down; it
+won't be so tiring, and we can't make ourselves any wetter or dirtier.
+It's a good thing I didn't start on this journey alone; I should be
+with my provisions now."
+
+"It's always pleasanter to have company," said I, shivering, and not
+noticing the absurdity till Alzura laughed.
+
+There was certainly very little pleasure in our position just then.  We
+were wet through, chilled to the marrow, and plastered with mud from
+head to foot.  Our limbs felt horribly cramped, yet we almost feared to
+stretch them, and the enforced delay was fast diminishing our chances
+of escape.  The dawning light might show us the route, but it would
+also set the soldiers on our heels.  Altogether, I was rather inclined
+to envy Barriero, sleeping peacefully in his hut.
+
+As soon as ever it became light enough, Alzura jumped up, saying,
+"Where is the pole?" and grasping it, he began trying to touch bottom.
+He poked long and vigorously in all directions, but without success,
+till it seemed as if our only plan was to return and give ourselves up.
+
+"Yet there must be a way out," said I impatiently.  "The track leads
+here plainly enough, and it wouldn't come to an end just in the middle
+of the morass."
+
+"I shouldn't think so," said Alzura.  "I wonder whether they've missed
+us yet.  How old Barriero will grin on seeing us back again!"
+
+"We aren't back yet," I replied.  "Look at that hump yonder.  It seems
+solid, doesn't it?  Lend me the pole.  Ah, too short!  What d'you
+think, Alzura?"
+
+"It looks all right," said he; "but appearances are often deceptive.
+Besides, we can't reach it."
+
+"We can jump it, perhaps."
+
+"Yes," said he thoughtfully, "we might.  It's a big risk, though.  If
+it isn't firm ground, the one who jumps will go to his death."
+
+"I'll chance it," said L
+
+"No, you won't; it's my venture.  Stand aside, and give me room for a
+take-off.  Remember me to the others if I go down."
+
+"Wait," said I; "there's no need for you to go.  We can put it to the
+test without risking life," and I hastily unslung the packet of
+provisions which hung over my shoulder.
+
+"Bravo, Juan! that is a good dodge.  Mind your aim, though!"
+
+"All right," and raising the bundle, I swung it carefully to and fro,
+trying to gauge the distance.  Then giving it an upward sweep, I let it
+go, and we watched breathlessly as it fell plump on the spot.
+
+"Firm as a rock," cried Alzura.  "Viva! now for the jump, my boy; it's
+easy enough."
+
+"As long as we come down in the proper place.  Stand back," and pulling
+myself together, I took the leap, landing close beside the bundle.
+This I picked up, and, telling Alzura to throw me the pole, proceeded
+to investigate.
+
+"Is it all right?" he cried softly.
+
+"Yes," said I, and stood back while he jumped across.
+
+"Caramba!" said he, "that's a nasty bit well over!" and I noticed that
+his limbs trembled.
+
+"All's well that ends well," I replied.  "Come on, my boy; we've done
+the worst part, and the track's as plain as a pikestaff now.  If we can
+reach the hill we came down months ago, 'twill be an easy matter to
+hide."
+
+"I wonder if the sergeant has discovered anything yet?  According to
+his account, the guards will think us dead."
+
+"So much the better for us; they'll give up the search sooner.  Hurrah!
+the ground's getting firmer at every step.  I believe we're out of the
+morass."
+
+The words were hardly spoken, when, my foot catching in some coarse
+grass, I fell sprawling, face downwards.
+
+"Not quite," observed Alzura, pulling me up, while I tried to get the
+mud from my mouth and eyes.  "It's a lucky thing you didn't try that
+trick before.  Faith, Juan, you do look a picture!  I'd willingly give
+a hundred dollars to be able to pop you down in Lima!"
+
+"Come along, and don't be idiotic, or we shall find ourselves back on
+the islet."
+
+"Yes," said he, still grinning all over his face; "we can't stay here
+laughing all day."
+
+"I'm not laughing," I cried indignantly.
+
+"Aren't you?  Well, you see, old fellow, it's rather difficult to tell
+what you're doing through that black mask.  I shouldn't try to rub it
+off.  Let it cake, and we'll chip it off with a stone."
+
+"This way," said I gruffly, taking no notice of his attempts to be
+funny.  "We'd better make straight for the mountains and hide
+ourselves."
+
+"We've need to," he replied, with a meaning laugh.
+
+We were now in a wide plain, dotted with numerous hillocks, and a good
+deal cut up by streams from the overflow of the lake.  The ground was
+damp, while here and there we plumped straight into a marsh.  By this
+time, however, we were in such a state that nothing mattered, and being
+unwilling to lose time, we took the shortest though not the most
+pleasant route.
+
+We had a good start of the soldiers, who, as it happened, were
+completely thrown off the scent through finding Alzura's bundle.
+Knowing the terrible nature of the morass, they concluded we were both
+dead, and returned to the island with the tidings.
+
+We learned this long afterwards from Barriero, who told us how he had
+mourned our sad fate, and blamed himself repeatedly for having let us
+go.  At the time, however, we expected every moment to hear the patter
+of feet behind us, and raced on till, breathless and panting, we
+reached the base of the mountain.
+
+Here we stopped a few moments to recover breath, and then, climbing
+some distance, proceeded to search for a cavern.
+
+"There ought to be several," said Alzura, "for the mountain has been
+mined.  Didn't you notice the _rodados_ as we came down?"
+
+"Those heaps of rubbish?"
+
+"Yes.  All that refuse has been taken out of the mountain.  Here's a
+heap, and the mouth of the tunnel won't be far away.  Now, keep your
+eyes open."
+
+I did my best; but Alzura found the cavern, and in a short time we were
+both inside.  The place was dark, and smelt dreadfully, the roof almost
+touched our heads, and the passage was very narrow.
+
+"A nice trap!" I remarked.  "If the soldiers catch us here, there's an
+end to our freedom."
+
+"I'm not so sure of that.  The gallery may run a long way back, and
+perhaps communicate with another.  Shall we explore it?"
+
+"Not now; I'm hungry and tired."
+
+"So am I, and wet and cold too.  I wish we had a fire.  Better take
+your things off and wring them; you'll be a bit more comfortable."
+
+I followed his advice, and then we sat down to feast on the dried beef
+and biscuits, which, happily, we had been able to keep in good
+condition.  It was not a brilliant banquet, but we were hungry, and our
+teeth were sharp.
+
+"I think it's a pity I lost my stock," remarked Alzura, lazily enjoying
+the food.  "That bit won't last long."
+
+"You must eat less.  I shall put you on short rations in the morning."
+
+"Tell me that to-morrow; I'm sleepy now."
+
+"Aren't we going to keep watch?"
+
+"I don't think it's worth while.  The soldiers aren't likely to look
+here for us, unless you attract their attention by snoring too loudly,"
+and the rascal chuckled himself off to sleep.
+
+In a few minutes I lay down beside him, and slept soundly till he
+wakened me by beating a tattoo on my ribs, and saying that he wanted
+his supper.  We had, in fact, slept through most of the day, and it was
+too late to think of making a fresh start till the first thing in the
+morning.
+
+However, as soon as day broke we set out with a hazy idea of making our
+way to Lima.  By dint of careful economy, our provisions would last for
+three days, and then we must trust to luck.  We had no notion how the
+war had gone, and I should not have been surprised to hear that the
+Royalists were again masters of the country.
+
+About noon on the third day of our journey we sat down beside a
+pleasant stream in a picturesque ravine.  There was sufficient food
+left for one meal, and Alzura voted for having it at once.
+
+"It's a long time since breakfast," said he, "and this mountain air
+sharpens one's appetite.  Besides, it's good policy to make sure of a
+thing while one has the chance."
+
+"All right," said I, laughing, and opening the bundle, "here you are.
+Don't grumble with me when we have to go to bed without supper."
+
+"We may get a fresh supply before then; who knows?"
+
+I did not think it likely; but all the same I joined him in an attack
+on the provisions, which we devoured to the very last morsel.  Then we
+had another drink of water, and rose to resume our journey.  As if this
+were a signal, the rocks round about suddenly became alive with armed
+men, who yelled some orders which we could not understand.  Then
+clambering over the boulders, they surrounded us, and in a short time
+had bound our arms tightly with strips of hide.  They were
+fierce-looking fellows--Indians, never seen westward of the Andes--and
+apparently unfamiliar with the Spanish language.  I tried to question
+them, but they did not understand, while neither of us could make out a
+word of their patois.  It was clear, however, that they meant to take
+us with them; and as we marched off, Alzura said, with a laugh,--
+
+"What a lucky thing, Juan, that we ate our supper in good time!"
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXV.
+
+BACK TO DUTY.
+
+Since the beginning of the war I had seen a great deal of Indian
+endurance, but nothing to equal that of our new captors.  They marched
+along in a curious fashion at a kind of jog-trot pace, taking short
+steps and carrying their feet close to the ground.  Mile after mile was
+covered without apparent effort, and when at last a halt was called,
+not a man looked the least bit tired.  As for Alzura and me, we were
+exhausted, and lay down just as we were.  The Indians lit a fire,
+roasted some maize, and loosening our bonds, gave us a share of the
+food, a drink of water, and a little coca.  Whether they were friends
+or foes we could not tell, but despite their ferocious looks they did
+us no harm.
+
+While on the march I had resolved to try them with the charm of the
+silver key; but, to my dismay, I found it was no longer round my neck.
+A part of the chain was still there, but it had snapped off, and the
+key was gone, sunk probably in the dreadful morass.  However, turning
+to one of the fellows, I said, first in Spanish, then in the patois
+used by Sorillo's men, "We are officers in the Patriot army, and
+friends of Raymon Sorillo and the Silver Key; who are you?"
+
+He shook his head solemnly, and looked at me with a blank stare.
+
+"Try him with English, Juan," laughed Alzura.  "I wonder where he lives
+when he's at home?  Perhaps he knows Portuguese.  I'll have a shot at
+him."
+
+If Alzura knew Portuguese--which I rather doubted--the Indian was
+ignorant of that language, and was quite unmoved by my comrade's flood
+of oratory.
+
+Perhaps he thought Alzura was singing.  But my companion in adversity
+did not take the suggestion in good part; indeed it seemed to annoy him.
+
+"Never mind," said I cheerfully; "they can't march us about for ever.
+We are bound to meet with civilized beings some time or other."
+
+"But these fellows may belong to the Royalists!  Many of the Indians on
+this side of the mountains do.  Then we shall be taken back to the
+island!"
+
+"We shall have guides across the morass, though; that's one thing to be
+thankful for."
+
+"And be put in irons!  Perhaps you think that's a subject for
+cheerfulness?"
+
+"We shouldn't be able to risk our lives again, at all events."
+
+"Oh, go to sleep," exclaimed Alzura, "if you've nothing more sensible
+than that to say!" and he rolled a little nearer the fire.
+
+The next morning the Indians resumed their journey, and after a weary
+tramp of many miles, encamped on the side of a mountain, where stood
+several huts in a half-ruined state.  One of these was set aside for
+us, and a sentry was placed at the door.
+
+Here we remained for three weeks while our captors made frequent
+excursions, starting early in the morning and returning late at night,
+though of their object we had not the faintest idea.  At the end of
+that time we were taken with them; and from morn till night, for
+several days in succession, we roamed about those dreadful mountains,
+till every muscle in our bodies ached with fatigue.
+
+"What is the use of it all?" I asked Alzura gloomily.  "What do they
+expect to gain by this continual tramp up and down?"
+
+"It's my belief that they can't help themselves," he replied.  "It's a
+disease, a form of madness, which keeps them continually on the move.
+Yesterday we climbed the same hill a dozen times, and finished at the
+starting-point.  Or perhaps it's some new kind of warfare they've
+invented."
+
+"It's awfully ridiculous, anyhow, and I don't see that we've gained
+much by leaving the island--unless it's exercise."
+
+"When the war is over, I'll give up walking altogether," said my chum
+resolutely.  "When I'm not on horseback, or in a carriage of some kind,
+I'll be carried about in a chair.  If this lasts much longer, my feet
+will be worn out."
+
+That evening the Indians lit their fire earlier than usual--a
+circumstance for which we were duly grateful.  We ate our supper, and
+sat chatting together cheerfully, being put in good humour by the
+warmth and brightness of the ruddy flames.
+
+Suddenly we heard in the distance the long-drawn-out note of a night
+bird, repeated again and again, and each time nearer to us.  It was
+answered by our sentries; but the men round the fire made no movement,
+nor did they show the slightest interest when half a dozen horsemen
+rode up.  The leader, however, rose slowly and talked to the strangers,
+who, after seeing to their horses, came and sat down.
+
+"Juan," said Alzura, "these fellows belong to a different tribe.
+Perhaps we shall have a chance of making ourselves understood."
+
+"They are looking at us very pointedly," I answered; and raising my
+voice, I said, "Can any of you talk Spanish?"
+
+"Yes," cried several together, coming near to us; "what do you want?"
+
+"To make ourselves known," I replied.  "These worthy fellows can't
+understand us, and we're tired of playing hide-and-seek in the
+mountains."
+
+"Who are you?  Where do you come from?  Are you for the king?" asked
+one.
+
+This was treading on dangerous ground; but as we really were worn out,
+and there seemed no chance of escape, I thought it best to take the
+bull by the horns.  At the worst we should only be handed over to the
+enemy and sent back to prison.
+
+So I answered quietly, "No; we are Patriot officers who have escaped
+from the Spaniards.  If you are on our side, perhaps you will help us
+to return to our own people."
+
+"You are with friends, se�or, if what you say is true," remarked one
+who seemed to have some sort of authority.
+
+"_If?_" said I, trying to speak haughtily; "do you doubt it?"
+
+"Well," said the fellow, with a knowing grin, "you don't look much like
+officers of any kind."  And he was right.
+
+We were, in fact, a pair of as dreary-looking objects as one would be
+likely to meet.  Our sandals were worn out, our clothes hung in rags,
+and the holes in Alzura's tunic made it painfully apparent that he did
+not indulge in the luxury of a shirt.  Whether we wore uniform, and if
+so what kind, would have been difficult to decide, as we were still
+plastered with mud from head to foot.  So I could not altogether blame
+the man for his distrust.
+
+However, I repeated my statement, told him we had fought under the
+Englishman Miller, and at last introduced the name of Raymon Sorillo.
+
+"We know him well," I said in conclusion, "and are good friends of the
+Silver Key."
+
+Apparently my words were interpreted for the benefit of our captors,
+who jabbered together for a considerable time, while Alzura and I
+anxiously awaited the result of the conference.
+
+At last the leader of the horsemen, turning to me, said, "Se�or, it is
+decided that I shall take you to the army, where your words can be
+proved.  If your story is not true, you will be shot as spies."
+
+"All right; we agree!" I exclaimed joyfully, for it was a delightful
+thought that we were to escape the strange beings who spent their time
+in running about the rocks.
+
+"We shall start early," he continued, "so you had better get some
+rest."  Which we did, as soon as our excited state permitted.
+
+"Bravo!" exclaimed Alzura, after breakfast the next morning; "this is
+an improvement.  Fancy being on horseback again!  This will be better
+than trudging on foot, Juan, eh?"
+
+"What about the men who have lent us their horses?"
+
+"Oh," said he merrily, "I believe they would as soon walk as ride, and
+I'm sure they could keep up longer than the animals."
+
+By this talk you will understand we had been provided with a couple of
+horses; and taking leave of our original captors, we rode off with our
+new ones.  Of course, both Alzura and I were unarmed, and the leader,
+in a quiet way, so arranged that we were never very far from a man with
+a musket.
+
+He was rather a lively fellow for an Indian, and having made sure we
+could not escape, talked with us freely.  He told us the men we had
+just left were very useful, having already sent in a great deal of
+valuable information to the Patriot army.  He also said that Bolivar
+had crossed the Andes with a large army, and that a decisive battle was
+expected at any time.  He was very curious about our escape, and could
+barely credit that we had crossed the morass without assistance.
+
+"It has been done before," he said, "but only once or twice, and then
+by natives."
+
+"We shan't do it again," laughed Alzura.  "It nearly turned our hair
+white.  It was the nastiest experience I have ever had--worse than when
+the Royalists cut us up at Torata."
+
+"Were you in that battle, se�or?  Wasn't it terrible?" and the man
+looked at my comrade with renewed interest.
+
+Indeed, from that time he treated us both with increased respect, and
+the journey passed quite pleasantly in his company.  During the second
+day we met several groups of mounted Indians, and a detachment of
+regular soldiers; which showed that we could not be far from the main
+encampment, on the plain between Rancas and Pasco.  Our guide expected
+to reach it that night, but we did not get in till after breakfast next
+morning.
+
+The plain was a splendid place for a camp, though rather high up, being
+some twelve thousand feet above the level of the sea.  Surrounding it
+on all sides, huge mountains towered, their mighty summits hidden by
+the clouds.  The table-land itself was alive with soldiers, and
+presently I caught sight of the flag which had been presented to the
+Peruvian Legion.
+
+"Take us over there," I cried excitedly to the guide.--"There are our
+comrades, Alzura.  I see Plaza, and Cordova, and the sour-faced old
+major.  Viva! viva!" and I rose in the stirrups with delight.
+
+What explanation the Indian gave I do not know.  We were plucked from
+the saddles and bandied about from one fellow to another in less than
+no time, every one helping to keep up a running fire of remarks.
+
+"Now let the Royalists tremble!" exclaimed Plaza, striking a dramatic
+attitude, spoiled only by the fun and twinkle in his eyes.
+
+"Only think, our little Alzura has returned to us!" cried another; "let
+us embrace him."
+
+"Wait till he's been scrubbed a few times," suggested Plaza.  "The
+legion should be proud of these 'young bloods.'  What airs and graces!
+What remarkable and novel costumes!  What--"
+
+"Can any one lend me a shirt?" interrupted Alzura.
+
+"A shirt?" exclaimed Cordova.  "My dear fellow, I have a dozen, quite
+clean and doing nothing, I shall be proud to let you and Crawford each
+have one."
+
+"Oh, thanks!" said Alzura.  "I thought something practical ought to
+come from all that talk.  Come on, my boy, let's have them at once.
+Where are they?"
+
+"Just down in Lima.  You have only to--" but a roar of laughter drowned
+the end of the sentence.
+
+"You really don't require one," remarked Plaza; "it would spoil the
+rest of your uniform--that is, if you have one under that dirt."
+
+Every one was still enjoying the joke, when a number of officers in
+brilliant uniforms approached our quarter of the plain.  In the leader
+I recognized Bolivar; and, to my great satisfaction, Colonel Miller was
+one of his suite.
+
+"Your men seem to be enjoying themselves, colonel," we heard Bolivar
+remark; "what is it all about?"
+
+At that moment Miller caught sight of us, and leaving the general's
+question unanswered, called us over, saying, "Alzura!  Crawford!  Where
+have you been, my boys?  We had quite given you up.--General, these are
+two of my young officers who have been missing for months."
+
+Bolivar, who was in good humour that morning, made us stand by him and
+relate our adventures.  Then he complimented us on our pluck, and
+turning to an officer, said, "Take these youngsters to O'Brien, and ask
+him to supply them with decent clothing; they have at least earned
+that.  And I am very proud of you, boys; and so, no doubt, are your
+comrades."  At which Plaza led off a round of cheering.
+
+I was very glad to see the great, big, jolly Irishman again, and he
+lost no time in getting us fresh uniforms from the stores, with an
+extra poncho apiece.
+
+"You'll be glad of that at night," said he, "for up here the
+thermometer is generally below freezing-point.  I must come to see you,
+if there's time, and hear your story."
+
+O'Brien was quite right about the biting cold, but on that first night
+at least we hardly felt it.  Dressed in our new clothes, comfortably
+wrapped in our ponchos, seated close to a roaring fire, and surrounded
+by old friends, Alzura and I felt amply repaid for all our toils and
+privations.
+
+In honour of our arrival our brother officers had organized a grand
+supper, the greatest delicacy being a small loaf of white bread, which
+they insisted on sharing with Alzura and myself.  After supper, we had
+to give an account of our adventures; and many a laugh went up as I
+told of my chum's plans, of our disasters in crossing the morass, and
+of the strange Indians who had mistaken us for Royalists, which, Plaza
+unkindly remarked, was a poor compliment to the enemy.
+
+"After all," he continued, "you haven't had such a very bad time.  Now,
+while you've been playing, we've been at work."
+
+"Oh," cried Alzura, smiling blandly, "that would be a change for you!"
+
+"We've made roads," said Cordova, with a solemn air, "built huts,
+collected fuel, carried corn, and driven cattle.  We've worked harder
+than the labourers on your father's estates."
+
+"Glad to hear it," laughed my chum.  "I thought Bolivar would make
+something of you.  A pity we weren't with you, though."
+
+"A great pity!  With Crawford and you helping, there would have been
+little for us to do."
+
+"It must have been rough work crossing the mountains," I observed.
+
+"Rough? rather! especially as Bolivar has turned us into cavalry," and
+he proceeded to give a graphic account of the passage.
+
+"The shelving ledges on the mountain sides are so narrow that the
+troops were obliged to advance in single file.  The cavalry, of course,
+were greatly handicapped.  Each man rode a mule, and had a led horse,
+which he dragged after him by a lasso.  Sometimes a break in the track,
+caused by a deep gully or a waterfall, occurred, when the men had to
+dismount, and to lead their animals.
+
+"But the worst of all was when night came while we were still on the
+march," said Plaza.  "We always walked then, and more than one fellow
+went tumbling down some frightful precipice.  We lost our way two or
+three times, though there were plenty of trumpeters stationed at
+intervals.  But Cordova will tell you about that," and there was a
+general laugh.
+
+"Oh," said Alzura, scenting a bit of fun, "order, please, for Cordova's
+story.--Now, my boy, out with it!"
+
+"'Twas nothing," replied Cordova airily.  "We missed our way, and had
+to return, that's all.  A mere accident, only these fellows make such a
+fuss about it."
+
+"Plaza, you tell the yarn," said I.  "Cordova's much too modest, and
+that's quite a new thing for him, too!"
+
+"Well, it happened on the wildest night of the whole journey.  A
+terrific snowstorm came on, half blinding us.  We were wet through and
+tired as dogs, and the camping-place was still a long way off.  We
+couldn't see much, but there was plenty of noise.  The wind howled, the
+trumpeters blew loud enough to wake the dead, officers shouted to their
+men, horses neighed and mules brayed: it was a regular pandemonium!  To
+crown all, we were following the windings of a roaring torrent."
+
+"And Cordova was leading," interrupted Major Gamarra.
+
+"Some one suggested we were on the wrong track, but our friend knew
+better.  'Follow me,' said he; 'I can guide you by the sounds of the
+trumpets.'  And we followed."
+
+"Like a flock of sheep," chimed in the major.
+
+"We went on," continued Plaza, "till even Cordova admitted something
+was wrong; then we stopped."
+
+"Why didn't you turn back?"
+
+"Out of the question, my boy.  We tried it, and lost half a dozen
+animals in the attempt.  The only thing possible was to advance till we
+reached an open spot.  When all our fellows were across we turned
+round, and began the march back."
+
+"Bravo, Cordova!" cried my chum, who was bubbling over with laughter.
+
+"Oh, come, wait a bit.  You haven't heard the best of the joke yet.  We
+had done nearly half the distance, when we met the head of another
+squadron that followed us.  'Go back,' we yelled; 'you've missed the
+proper path.'  'Go back yourselves,' they shouted in reply; 'we can't!'
+Well, you know, neither party dared move till daybreak; so we stood
+there, crouching against the rocks and holding on to the animals.  We
+could neither eat nor sleep.  The wind flung the snow at us in masses,
+and we were frozen to the marrow.  Some pretty things were said about
+Cordova before the morning, I can assure you."
+
+"To hear them talk, one would think they were made of sugar!" grunted
+Cordova.
+
+"It took us four hours the next day to get out of the mess," laughed
+Plaza, "and then we had to catch up with our division.  Altogether, it
+was a very pleasant incident, though the major here and a few others
+failed to see the fun."
+
+"But how came Canterac to let you through the passes without a fight?"
+I asked.
+
+"A case of pride going before a fall, I expect.  He thinks to serve us
+as he did at Torata.--By the way, Crawford, you gave Miller his wrong
+rank this morning.  He's a general now, and chief of all the Peruvian
+cavalry."
+
+"Bravo, that's grand news!  There isn't a better soldier in the army."
+
+"Only he's so fearfully energetic.  He'll keep one on the move for
+sixteen hours, and then suggest a little scouting as a titbit to wind
+up with," said Cordova.
+
+"You've had a good rest now, anyway."
+
+"We shall pay for it, though."
+
+And Cordova was not far wrong.  We had barely fallen asleep when the
+bugles sounded.  The troops rose, and mounted officers dashed about,
+carrying orders to different squadrons and battalions.
+
+"Breakfast at once; ready to march in an hour," were the commands, and
+we wondered what information Bolivar had obtained.
+
+Some said one thing, some another, and very soon a fine crop of rumours
+sprang up.  Canterac was advancing with twenty thousand men; his troops
+had mutinied, and declared for the Patriots; he was retreating hot-foot
+for Cuzco; he was a prisoner in the hands of the mountain tribes.
+Every man suggested the event he fancied most, and seemed quite annoyed
+if one expressed any doubt of its accuracy.
+
+"Just our luck," grumbled Alzura.  "I did think we should have had a
+little rest."
+
+"It's just because you're here that we're moving," laughed Plaza.
+"Directly Bolivar caught sight of you and Crawford yesterday morning,
+he determined to march.  'Canterac won't stand against those fellows,'
+he said."
+
+"Bolivar is a capable fellow and a good judge," said Alzura.  "I wonder
+where General Miller is."
+
+"Went off in the night, reconnoitring with a party of mountaineers.
+It's wonderful how those wild fellows have taken to him.  They'll go
+anywhere with him.  Come along; it's nearly time for us to move, and
+Bolivar doesn't like to be kept waiting."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXVI.
+
+THE HUSSARS OF JUNIN.
+
+Contrary to custom, we moved off the ground slowly, marching along with
+swarms of Indians on our flanks and in front.  For once in a way
+Bolivar had adopted caution instead of the fiery recklessness he
+usually displayed, and seemed resolved on running no unnecessary risks.
+Our course lay southward, over very rough, broken ground, and a staff
+officer informed Plaza we were making for the plains of Junin, to the
+south of Lake Reyes.
+
+"We shall catch Canterac there," said he, "or Canterac will catch us; I
+hardly know which at present."
+
+Our bivouac that night was cheerless and uncomfortable.  The position
+was a very strong one, but Bolivar was evidently determined to leave
+nothing to chance.  The sentries were doubled and in some places
+trebled, so that most of us were unable to snatch more than a few
+hours' sleep.  Early in the morning the journey was resumed, and after
+a tedious march of fifteen miles through mountainous country we
+suddenly beheld the Royalist army crossing the plains at our feet.  The
+men, breaking into a thundering "Viva," waved their caps or swung their
+lances in the air, and the cavalry were ordered to shift their saddles
+from the mules to the led horses.
+
+"'Twill be a cavalry action," said Plaza, vaulting into his saddle.
+"Here comes an 'aid' with orders."
+
+"There goes Miller with a squadron," cried Alzura.  "We shall be out of
+it.  The Colombian Horse are moving too.  We shall be left behind with
+the infantry."
+
+"Not so fast," said Plaza, laughing, as Bolivar's messenger dashed up
+to Colonel Suares, who was in charge of our squadron.  "Now for it!"
+
+"You won't be quite so eager presently," growled the tough old major.
+"Look at the ground; see the defile between the swamp and the hills.
+Canterac can cut us to pieces there, and he's soldier enough to know
+it."
+
+"No, no, major; his cavalry aren't a patch on ours.  We've never had a
+chance to show our mettle before."
+
+"Well, we shall have one now," said the major, as we began to descend
+to the plain.
+
+Two Colombian squadrons were in front of us, while Miller was still
+further ahead and bearing to the left.  On the other side of the defile
+we caught a glimpse now and then of the Royalist cavalry forming up.
+The ground was so broken that we could only go at a foot-pace, and I
+began to think the major might be right.
+
+As we entered the defile there came a great shout of "Viva el Rey!"
+from the plains ahead, and the next instant the Royalist horsemen,
+thirteen hundred strong, and led by Canterac himself, dashed madly to
+the attack.
+
+"Viva! viva!" they yelled, cutting and thrusting with sabre and lance.
+The onset was like a mighty avalanche, and our men were for the most
+part overwhelmed.  A few of the strongest and best mounted cut their
+way through, but numbers were overthrown, and the rest came flying
+back, with the victorious Royalists slashing and cutting on all sides.
+
+"By St. Philip," muttered Plaza, "we shall be swept away."
+
+Our colonel, seeing the danger, manoeuvred us into an angle of the
+marsh, just as the mob of horsemen, friend and foe inextricably mixed,
+swarmed down, shouting, struggling, fighting.
+
+"Forward! forward!" yelled the exultant Royalists, sweeping past like a
+whirlwind.
+
+Farther away on the left, another body was driving Miller's men into
+the swamp, and it seemed that the Patriot cavalry must be annihilated.
+But our squadron remained untouched, and leading us into the plain,
+Suares issued an order to charge the Royalists who were handling
+Miller's troops so roughly.
+
+"We must win or die, my lads!" he cried; "the country depends on us."
+
+The men cheered with a will and shook their sabres; we settled more
+firmly in our saddles; the colonel rode to the front; the squadron
+moved forward and broke into a trot.  Men and officers alike knew that
+our leader had spoken no more than the truth.  We must win or die!  On
+us alone hung the issue of the battle.  If we failed, hardly a man of
+the Patriot cavalry would leave the field alive; if we won, the
+Royalists must stop the pursuit in order to help their comrades.
+
+It was a heavy task, but one thought cheered and nerved us.  We were
+all Peruvians belonging to the Legion, and it was but fitting that the
+desperate venture should fall to us.  How our infantry battalion would
+cheer, how proudly they would greet us, should we return victorious!
+It would be glorious to show both friends and enemies that the
+Peruvians could strike a stout blow in their own defence.
+
+"Gallop!"
+
+We received the order with a cheer, bent low in the saddle, and grasped
+our sabres firmly.  Suares knew his work, and led us across a wide
+stretch of smooth, firm ground, the very spot for a cavalry charge.
+
+Finding themselves between two foes, the Royalists faced about and
+dashed at us.  The shock was tremendous: men and horses were bowled
+over like ninepins; great gaps appeared in the ranks; men went down and
+were trampled under foot in the furious fray; there was a ring of steel
+as sabre clashed with sabre, and the defiant shouts of the combatants
+mingled with the groans of the wounded.
+
+Reeling and panting, I found myself on the other side of the press.
+Plaza was there, too, with a dozen of his men.  Alzura broke through
+smiling in spite of a nasty cut across the face, and was followed by
+many more.  Then above the din General Miller's voice was heard, and we
+flushed with pride.
+
+"Bravo, my boys!" he cried; "I'm proud of you!  All the army will sing
+your praises presently."
+
+Freed from the Royalists, his men had got out of the swamp, and now
+came to join us.  The few Colombians who had cut their way through in
+the first attack galloped back, and inspirited by General Miller's
+stern "Hurrah!" we once more flung ourselves on the foe.  It was steel
+to steel now, and the Spaniards stood their ground well till they saw
+their comrades retreating from the defile.  Then, with the exception of
+a devoted few who stayed in a grim ring around the standard-bearer,
+they turned to flee.
+
+"The flag!" cried the general; "have at the flag!"  And like a torrent
+in flood, we swept down on the little band.
+
+"Rally to the flag!" cried a voice I knew well, and the next instant I
+was crossing swords with Santiago Mariano.  I do not care much to dwell
+on this part of the fight.  These Royalists were the pick of their
+squadron, and it seemed as if each man would die where he fought rather
+than surrender the colours.  Three or four times the flag disappeared,
+but came up again the next instant, and presently I saw it borne aloft
+by Santiago, who had been forced away from me in the fierce turmoil.
+Hardly a dozen men remained with him now, and we were all round him.
+
+"Surrender!" cried the general.  "It is a pity to kill so brave a man!"
+
+Santiago laughed lightly, dug the spurs deep into his horse's sides,
+cleared a passage with his sabre, and wheeling his horse by the
+pressure of his knees, bounded away, crying defiantly,--
+
+"Rally to the flag!  Viva el Rey!"
+
+A young Colombian officer levelled his pistol; but Miller struck it up,
+saying,--
+
+"The odds are heavy enough now.  If you want the flag, get it with your
+sword."
+
+The youngster's face flushed, but he kept his temper, and saluting the
+general, dashed after Santiago, crying,--
+
+"To me, Colombians!"
+
+As Suares had foreseen, our action gave the beaten squadron a chance to
+rally; officers and men who had survived the crushing avalanche
+collected in groups, and the fight was proceeding fiercely on the open
+plain.  Ordering our squadron to re-form, the general placed himself at
+our head.
+
+Meanwhile, I was watching the gallant Santiago and his handful of men.
+He was a superb rider, and able to guide his horse without using the
+reins, thus leaving both hands free.  His Royalist comrades, now
+reunited, were opposite the defile, and too far off to help, while
+several detachments of Patriot cavalry were hurrying to cut off his
+retreat.  Behind him, too, thundered the hot-headed Colombian officer
+with a dozen troopers.
+
+"That plucky Royalist officer will be killed," said the general to
+Colonel Suares.  "He's a gallant fellow--eh, Crawford?"
+
+"He is, sir," I answered warmly; "and I'd give anything to see him get
+through safely."
+
+"Why, Crawford," returned the general, smiling, "that sounds very much
+like treason."
+
+By this time we ourselves were in motion, but as my place was on the
+flank, I had a good view of Santiago's desperate venture.  A body of
+Colombians, some twenty strong, had thrown themselves across his path;
+and though they were our allies, I could hardly keep from cheering as
+he dashed through them, losing, as far as could be seen, only one man
+of his little band.
+
+Casting a backward glance to see how his followers fared, he waved the
+flag again, and I could guess at the defiant shout of "Viva el Rey!"
+that came from his lips.
+
+"He's just splendid," said I, between my teeth.  But surely now his
+time was come!  Close on his heels rode the beaten Colombians, while in
+front another detachment, far stronger, awaited him.  What would he
+do--surrender?  That, I felt sure, would never enter his head.
+
+One chance of escape there was if he would take it.  By swerving
+sharply to the left he might avoid the hostile troopers, and gallop
+across the plain to the Royalist infantry.  It was evident he saw this
+way out; but his blood was up, and he made straight for the forest of
+lances.
+
+"Lost!" said I, with a groan.  "Poor old Santiago!"
+
+I counted eight men with him, and Royalist and Patriot troops combined
+held none braver.  It was magnificent, and yet terrible, to watch them
+spring at the massed troops, Santiago only slightly in advance of them.
+I held my breath as they leaped into the throng and were swallowed up.
+We were not near enough to distinguish the flag amidst the flashing
+sabres and the long-handled lances, but I feared it had fallen with its
+daring protector.
+
+The tumult showed that some of the brave few still lived, and suddenly
+I heard General Miller, as if his feelings had surprised him into
+speech, say in English,--
+
+"By Jove, he's through!"
+
+It was true.  There in the distance rode a man bare-headed, waving a
+flag defiantly, and for all we knew cheering for the king.  One by one
+four others joined him, and continued the gallop: their comrades lay
+dead on the plain.
+
+Had half the Royalist cavalry possessed Santiago's pluck, the story of
+this affair at Junin would have had a different ending.
+
+As it was, the Spaniards began to waver.  They could barely hold their
+own against the reassembled squadrons from the defile, and our arrival
+had turned the scale.  They began to give ground slowly but surely, in
+spite of their officers' appeals.  I saw Santiago again; indeed he was
+the most conspicuous man, though not the highest officer, on the field.
+Wherever the troops seemed weakest, there he was, flag in hand,
+cheering them on and fighting desperately.
+
+When at last they could stand it no longer, but broke and fled, he got
+together another little band to protect the retreat.  But for him, I
+doubt whether Canterac would have saved a quarter of his cavalry.
+Once, when turning at bay to repel a fiercer rush than usual, he caught
+sight of me, and his face lit up with a smile.  He had been wounded,
+but not dangerously, and his sword-arm was vigorous as ever.
+
+Again and again, with the aid of his choicest troopers, he stemmed the
+onset; but his efforts were vain--we were too many.  His men dropped
+one after another, and he was forced to continue the retreat, till the
+remnant of the Royalist horsemen found shelter behind the lines of
+their infantry, who greeted us with a scattering fire.
+
+It was now growing dusk, and we could not attack an army, though
+General Miller decided to hang on a little longer.  In the long pursuit
+our men had become scattered over the plain, and he dispatched various
+officers to collect them.  Then turning to me, he said,--
+
+"Crawford, ride back, find General Bolivar, and tell him the Royalists
+are in full retreat.  If followed up strongly, I believe they would
+disperse."
+
+Saluting, I turned my horse and rode back rapidly.  The scene was
+bewildering.  Officers galloped this way and that, shouting to their
+men; riderless horses careered madly about; slightly-wounded troopers
+were hobbling to the rear; others, more unfortunate, lay on the ground
+groaning and calling for water; while here and there mounted men were
+escorting groups of prisoners toward our infantry lines.
+
+Several times I stopped to ask where General Bolivar was.  He had
+entered the defile with the cavalry; but from the time our first
+squadrons were routed I had seen nothing of him.  At last an officer
+told me that, seeing his horsemen overthrown, the general had galloped
+back to the infantry, which he had posted on a very high hill about a
+league away.
+
+"He quite expected to be attacked," added my informant, "never dreaming
+we should recover ourselves.  The Peruvians saved us.  They are fine
+fellows!"  For in the gathering gloom he could not distinguish my
+uniform.
+
+"Thanks!" said I, laughing; "I'll repeat that compliment to my
+comrades," and rode on.
+
+Bolivar was standing, or to be correct, walking about, on the brow of
+the hill, looking anxiously toward the plain.  Several messengers had
+brought him word of the varying fortunes of the fight, but none had
+arrived from Miller.
+
+I passed close to the head of the Peruvian infantry, and the colonel
+shouted,--
+
+"What news, Crawford!"
+
+"Good!" I replied, hurrying along; and reaching Bolivar, I jumped to
+the ground and saluted.
+
+"Where do you come from?" he cried.
+
+"General Miller, sir.  The Royalists are in full retreat--horse, foot,
+and artillery.  The general wishes me to say that a vigorous pursuit
+would probably disperse them altogether."
+
+"Too late," said he; "tell General Miller I have ordered the cavalry to
+retire on me.--Caza," to one of his officers, "lend--"
+
+"Lieutenant Crawford, sir."
+
+"Lend Lieutenant Crawford your horse; his is done up.--Now ride as fast
+as you can, and give General Miller my message."
+
+I saluted, sprang into the saddle, dashed past the Peruvian infantry,
+down the hill, and into the defile.  Here I found the main body of our
+cavalry retiring in accordance with Bolivar's command, and heard that
+Miller, with a squadron of Peruvians, was still following the Royalists.
+
+It was quite dark now, and the route was covered with hillocks; but I
+rode on swiftly, trusting to luck, and at length came up with the
+general, who had halted in his pursuit.  On receiving Bolivar's message
+he immediately gave orders to retire, and about seven o'clock we
+reached our camping-ground.
+
+Fortunately we managed to collect a little fuel, for the night was so
+intensely cold that few of the seriously wounded, though receiving
+every possible attention, survived its rigours.  Even lying close to
+the fire and enveloped in our ponchos we shivered.
+
+A surgeon had sewn up the cut in Alzura's face, and we gave him the
+most sheltered place, and the one nearest the fire.  There was not much
+sleep for any of us that night; we were far too excited, and spent most
+of the time fighting the battle over again.
+
+To my delight, every one talked of Santiago and his magnificent bravery.
+
+"Didn't we take him prisoner once, down south?" asked Plaza.  "His face
+seemed familiar to me."
+
+"Yes," said I: "his name is Santiago Mariano, and at that time he was a
+major."
+
+"Faith," observed Alzura, looking up, "as far as fighting goes, he
+ought to be a commander-in-chief!  A wounded Colombian told me the
+fellow sprang on them like a lion falling on a herd of deer.  A lucky
+thing for us that the Marianos are in a minority among the Royalists."
+
+"Canterac nearly did the trick though," growled the major.  "I thought
+he would drop on us in that defile.  I tell you what it is: Bolivar can
+thank our colonel that he has any cavalry left."
+
+"Bravo, major!  I heard this evening that we saved the army."
+
+"So we did," chuckled Plaza; "and we can say it without a word of
+boasting.  I don't care about praising my own men."  But the rest was
+drowned in good-humoured laughter, as every one knew that the finest
+troop in South America--and the world, too, for that matter--was
+Plaza's.
+
+However, it appeared that we really had done a smart thing: for the
+next morning Bolivar held a grand parade, and in presence of the whole
+army ordered that henceforth the regiment of which we formed part
+should be known as the "Hussars of Junin;" and General Miller publicly
+said that we deserved the honour.
+
+After the parade we marched into the town of Reyes, which had been
+sacked by the Royalists.  Bolivar occupied the only hut that had a
+roof, the rest consisting of nothing but bare walls.  The inhabitants
+had fled into the surrounding country, but now they returned, and did
+all they could to assist us, lighting fires, cooking our scanty
+rations, and erecting sheds to shelter us from the cold.
+
+"I suppose it's all right," said Alzura; "but I can't help thinking
+Bolivar has made a big blunder.  While we hang about here, Canterac is
+pulling himself together, and we shall have all the work to do over
+again.  If I were the general--"
+
+"I should join the other side immediately," laughed Plaza.
+
+"Please don't interrupt," said Cordova.  "It amuses me to hear these
+youngsters talk.  I'll wager Alzura would have finished the war two
+years ago, only the end might not have been as we anticipate."  At
+which there was a general laugh.
+
+"What I don't like about Bolivar is his play-acting," I said.  "Have
+you seen his hut?  Have a look at it in the morning.  The doorway is
+hung with silver ornaments in place of laurel wreaths, which the
+Indians were unable to get."
+
+"But he can't help the Indians idolizing him!"
+
+"Nonsense!  Did you ever hear of such rubbish with San Martin?  And the
+Indians worshipped him!"
+
+"Ah!" exclaimed Plaza, "you're a San Martin man, and jealous of the new
+sun!"
+
+"A new comet," said I, a bit testily perhaps, because Plaza had
+happened on an explanation very near the truth.
+
+"At any rate," observed Cordova, "it's better to be here at our ease
+than tramping fruitlessly about the mountains.  I'm fairly tired of
+that fun.  I want a day or two at Lima."
+
+None of us guessed how much weary marching lay before us ere we
+returned to the capital.  However, for the time we were in
+comparatively good quarters, and though grumbling occasionally because
+Bolivar had not followed up the victory at Junin, were quite prepared
+to make the best of things.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXVII.
+
+A DISASTROUS RETREAT.
+
+When General Canterac retreated from Junin, he fled from his own
+shadow.  Instead of pursuing him closely, we advanced in a leisurely
+way to Guamanga, and stayed there a month doing nothing.  Then we
+marched to Challuanca, where Bolivar, being needed at the capital, left
+us under the command of General Sucre, who had shown himself a very
+skilful soldier.  It seems we were not strong enough to proceed, and as
+the rainy season was at hand, no one thought the Royalists would return
+to the attack.
+
+The Patriot army was spread across the country for many miles, our post
+being on a high tableland four leagues from Challuanca.  The weather
+was abominable.  Frequent storms swept through the district, the rain
+fell in torrents, the thunder pealed in reverberating claps among the
+mountains, and many animals and some men were killed by the lightning.
+It was bitterly cold, too, and our only shelter was a cluster of
+miserable Indian huts, where we passed all our time when not on duty.
+Often I returned to my cheerless quarters cold, shivering, and
+drenched, yet with no change of clothing.
+
+To add to our misfortunes, it was rumoured that the various Royalist
+armies, having united, were marching to attack us; so for days together
+we were kept on the alert, riding for hours over the desolate country
+and returning thoroughly exhausted.
+
+One evening early in November I got back after a twenty miles' ride
+with a small patrol, and found the camp in a state of confusion.
+
+"What is it, Alzura? what's all the fuss about?" I asked, wearily
+getting off my mule--for we rode horses only when absolutely necessary.
+
+"Oh, my dear Juan, you will be delighted," he replied, his face
+brimming with fun.  "We are just going back to Challuanca.  The viceroy
+is somewhere in our rear with all his army, and we have to run for it."
+
+"My animal is dead-beat," said I gloomily.
+
+"You must walk, and lead both animals.  Never mind, dear boy; the
+excitement will keep you going," he answered, laughing.
+
+"Hullo! is it you, Crawford?  In luck's way again!  And I've been
+worrying about your being left behind," said Plaza, coming up.
+
+I did not exactly see where the luck came in; but the sound of the
+bugle cut short my reply, and I took my place in the column.  That
+march was the longest twelve miles I remember.  Sometimes riding,
+sometimes walking, aching in every limb, and more than half asleep, I
+plodded along the rocky path, dreamily wondering at every step whether
+I could take another.  As soon as we arrived at Challuanca I just lay
+down on the bare ground, and was fast asleep in a second.
+
+It was daylight when the sounds of bugles awakened me, and I rose
+sleepily.  The army had disappeared, with the exception of our
+squadron, which I afterwards found formed part of the rearguard.
+
+"Come on, sleepy-head," sang out Alzura, "or you'll get no breakfast.
+I've seen to your animals.  A wonder they didn't kick you to death in
+the night!"
+
+"The poor beasts were too tired to have a kick left in them.  Where's
+General Sucre?"
+
+"Going on to a place called Lambrama.  Do you know Miller is a
+prisoner?"
+
+"A prisoner?  I don't believe it."
+
+"It's true, nevertheless.  His scouting party has returned without him.
+From what I can hear, we're in a tight fix."
+
+According to rumour, Alzura was right; but after a long and wearisome
+march we reached Lambrama, where General Sucre halted.  During the
+afternoon, while we rested in the valley, a great shout from the troops
+on our right brought us to our feet, and we saw a soldier on a
+beautiful white horse descending a pass into the valley.
+
+"That's General Miller's horse!" I cried excitedly.
+
+"And the general's on its back!" said Plaza.  "Viva! viva Miller!"  And
+the cry was taken and repeated by thousands of lusty throats.
+
+I had witnessed San Martin's brilliant reception, and had seen Bolivar
+f�ted by his admirers; but this outburst was the most remarkable of
+all.  One would have thought the general was a personal friend of every
+man in the army.
+
+Each battalion, as he passed it, broke into renewed cheering, the men
+flung their caps into the air, and the whole scene was one of amazing
+enthusiasm.  The general rode along slowly, and his smiling face showed
+how greatly he was touched by his reception.
+
+"The man's a marvel!" exclaimed Plaza admiringly.  "Look at him!  One
+would think he had just come from a pleasure-trip instead of being
+hunted through the mountains.  I warrant the viceroy would count his
+capture cheap at half a million dollars."
+
+"Say a million, and it would still be cheap," said Alzura; and most of
+us agreed with him.
+
+General Miller apparently brought important information, as, shortly
+after his arrival, orders were issued for a fresh start.  I need not
+dwell long upon our sufferings during that disastrous retreat.  The
+Royalists had outmarched us, and, hoping to stop our advance, closed
+many of the defiles and destroyed the bridges by which we should have
+crossed the numerous rivers.
+
+Several times we caught a glimpse of the enemy, and one night the
+hostile armies bivouacked within two miles of each other, but separated
+by a deep and rugged valley.  The terrible march was so weakening us
+that many officers hoped the enemy would attack at once.  But this the
+viceroy, who was a clever old soldier, would not do.  His plan was to
+wear us down by degrees and only fight at an advantage.
+
+For several days we remained watching each other, but on November 25th
+the Royalists disappeared, and Sucre immediately made preparations to
+cross the valley.  A swollen river lay in our path; the bridge was
+destroyed, and there was no material with which to build another.
+
+The crossing was simply terrible.  The weather was intensely cold, and
+even at the ford the infantry were breast high in icy water.  It was
+death to remain behind, however, and though many men, numbed and
+exhausted, were swept down the stream, only two lives were lost.
+
+On the last night in November we reached a valley whose sides were
+clothed with enormous trees, and the order to encamp was gratefully
+received.
+
+"Thank goodness!" said Alzura.  "We shall have a comfortable night at
+last.  The trees will shelter us from the cold winds, and we shall be
+as cozy as in bed."
+
+"Humph!" said Gamarra testily; "much you know about it.  In half an
+hour you'll wish we had camped on the top of a mountain."
+
+"Why?" I asked curiously, for the valley seemed to me a very suitable
+camping-ground.
+
+"Wait!" growled the crusty old major; "you'll soon know."
+
+This sounded very mysterious, but in a short time the secret was out.
+We had just settled ourselves comfortably when Alzura started up, and
+some one said, in a tone of great disgust, "Mosquitoes!"
+
+They were very fine specimens, and, I suppose, exceedingly angry at our
+invasion of their territory.  They came buzzing up in countless
+thousands, and though many were slain, the slaughter made no apparent
+difference in their numbers.
+
+I had put on my gloves, and now hastily covered my face with a
+handkerchief.  The mosquitoes were by no means dismayed.  Thirsting for
+blood, they would not be denied, but drank deeply.  To any one
+mosquito-proof the scene would have been most laughable.  We made a
+desperate fight, but the victory was to the mosquitoes.
+
+Our hands, necks, and faces were swollen from their venomous bites.
+Some of the men could hardly see; and though we were dreadfully
+fatigued, every one longed to hear the bugle-call to fall in.  No one
+wanted to remain in what Plaza christened "Alzura's paradise."
+
+The welcome sound came at break of day, and we moved out quickly,
+abandoning the battlefield to our active and vigorous foes.  As soon as
+we reached the open country the rain began to fall, and continued in
+torrents all that day and the following night.
+
+"I don't exactly see how much better off we are than Barriero,"
+remarked Alzura, as we lay down to sleep in a muddy puddle.
+
+"You should have stayed with him, then."
+
+"It's all very well to say that now.  Why did you bring me away?"
+
+I was too much staggered by the audacity of the question to make a
+suitable reply.
+
+Hungry, cold, and wet, we resumed the retreat, and soon began defiling
+into another valley.  Our squadron was right in the rear, and suddenly
+the sounds of firing and the cries of startled men were heard in front
+of us.
+
+"Mount!" cried the colonel; for we were still leading our horses, and
+most of our mules were dead.  "Forward!  Trot!"
+
+"Some of the enemy have doubled and cut in on our flank!" said Plaza
+excitedly.
+
+"Gallop!" roared the colonel, as entering the valley we caught sight of
+what was going on.
+
+Unperceived by us, a Royalist detachment had stolen down the valley and
+flung itself on the flank of our two rear battalions.  Taken by
+surprise, and outnumbered, our men were speedily overpowered, and
+before we had arrived on the scene they had dispersed in all directions.
+
+To the shouts of "Viva el Rey!" and encouraged by their officers, the
+Royalists were hotly chasing their beaten enemy.  The valley was in a
+state of terrible confusion.  The dead bodies of men lay scattered
+about; a few of the victors were dragging off an abandoned gun; others
+were carrying away stores and baggage.  The fight was a complete
+disaster for our side.
+
+"We can't do any good," whispered Alzura, as the colonel halted us,
+"and I doubt if we aren't cut off ourselves."
+
+"Better charge at once," muttered Plaza; "the more we look at it the
+less we shall like it."
+
+"My lads," cried the colonel, riding down the ranks, "there is a stiff
+bit of work before us.  Let us remember we are the Hussars of Junin."
+
+The troopers responded with a ringing "Viva!" and as we got a firmer
+seat on our saddles, Alzura remarked,--
+
+"That's the way to talk, Juan.  These fellows will fight to the death
+now."
+
+There was something fresh happening on the other side, but we had no
+time to see what it was.  The bugle sounded, and with the colonel
+leading we dashed straight across the valley.  An infantry battalion
+peppered us from the right, and a squadron was drawn up right across
+our path.
+
+Men began to fall.  Here and there a riderless horse, darting from the
+ranks, tore across the valley.  We were, as Alzura said, in a warm
+corner.
+
+Bullets whizzed past our ears, but we noticed them not, riding straight
+as a die at the hostile cavalry.
+
+"The major's down!" cried Plaza.  "Poor old major!"
+
+That was his only epitaph.  We had no time to sorrow for any one just
+then, though we mourned for him sincerely enough afterwards.
+
+"Charge!" roared the colonel; and the sabres flashed as the horses
+bounded forward, thundering with their hoofs on the ground.
+
+"Caramba!" cried Plaza; "it's your old friend Mariano.  Well, friend or
+foe, this is his last fight if my blade can reach him."
+
+Yes, the officer who had accomplished this daring flanking movement was
+none other than Santiago Mariano, who, with the flush of success on his
+handsome face, was again leading his men to the charge.
+
+"Viva el Rey!" he cried, and his voice rang high and clear above the
+din.  "Down with the bandits!"
+
+Crash!  We were into them, fighting our way through desperately.
+Horses pranced, and bit, and kicked.  Men shouted triumphantly, or went
+down with a cry of agony on their lips.  Here a gap was made and filled
+at once, as some daring fighter urged his way forward.
+
+Alzura rode with the colonel, carrying the colours, and we pressed
+after them, knowing that our sole chance of safety was to get through
+the Royalist squadron.  On coming out at the other side we heard a
+voice crying, "Bravo! bravo, my bold hussars!" and there was General
+Miller, who seemed to scent a fight as a hound scents its quarry.
+
+By this time Santiago had re-formed his squadron, and was dashing at
+our rear, when from the rocks above us sprang a line of fire, and his
+horsemen, wheeling round, rapidly withdrew.  While we had been
+fighting, General Miller had rallied the beaten battalions and posted
+them in a commanding position to cover our ride through the pass.
+
+That night in bivouac we counted Santiago's venture had cost us more
+than two hundred men, all the spare horses, and a quantity of stores.
+
+"I hope you are proud of your Royalist friend," said Alzura to me.  "He
+has done us a nice bit of mischief."
+
+"He's a smart soldier."
+
+"He is that," agreed Plaza, "and a splendid swordsman.  I had a good
+bout with him, but could not pass his guard, though he was defending
+himself against three of us."
+
+"Did any one see the major after he fell?" I interrupted.
+
+"No," said Alzura; "but I feel sure he is dead, as the bullet passed
+through his forehead.  He was a grim old fighter, and I'm sorry he's
+gone."
+
+"So am I.  But he died a soldier's death, poor old chap," said Cordova.
+"We must have lost heavily since the retreat began.  I wonder what
+Sucre intends doing now."
+
+"Why, continuing the retreat."
+
+"To Lima?  If so, he won't have a hundred men left by the time he
+reaches the capital."
+
+"Well, what can he do?  We can't stay here and starve, and he can't
+make the Royalists fight."
+
+"As to starving," laughed Alzura, "I would as soon starve here as
+elsewhere.  I'm getting used to it."
+
+"And I don't know," remarked Cordova, "that forcing a fight will be so
+very brilliant for us.  We have had one sample to-day."
+
+"Oh, go to sleep!  You might be a raven as far as croaking's concerned.
+One would think we were in a hole and couldn't get out.  Trust to Sucre
+and Miller; they'll pull us through all right."
+
+"I'm going to sleep," announced Alzura gravely.  "I had a beautiful
+dream last night, and want to go on where reveille interrupted it.  I
+dreamed we were in Lima, at a banquet given by the city to the Patriot
+officers.  There was a band to play during the feast; the hall was
+brilliantly lit; the table was laden with all kinds of good things.  We
+were just beginning when the band struck up, and I woke to hear
+Crawford saying, 'Are you going to sleep all day?'  It was a splendid
+feast, though.  Such a quantity of--"
+
+"Sit on him, Juan! stifle him with his own poncho!  Fancy talking of
+banquets now!  Cruelty to animals I call it."
+
+"Why, I thought you'd be delighted," grumbled Alzura.
+
+In a very short time we were all asleep.  We rose at dawn, hungry and
+shivering, to resume our journey.  On this day the enemy marched
+parallel with us, but on the other side of a deep gorge, and General
+Sucre tried in vain to draw them into an engagement.  Their leader was
+too crafty.  Why need he sacrifice his men?
+
+"It's a pity from our point of view," remarked Plaza, as we toiled
+along, "but they are playing the proper game.  We're like fruit
+ripening on a tree.  When thoroughly fit we shall just drop and be
+gathered without difficulty."
+
+"Who's croaking now?" asked Cordova,
+
+"I'm simply stating facts," replied Plaza.  "Look at the road."
+
+"Thanks; I've seen more than enough of it already."
+
+"We're half starved."
+
+"That's less than a fact," laughed Alzura.  "You can put me down as
+three-quarters.  If decent food were set before me, I shouldn't know
+how to eat it."
+
+"We're losing hundreds of men," continued Plaza quietly, "and we've one
+miserable field-gun."
+
+"Take a dose of your own medicine," said I, laughing.  "Trust to Sucre
+and Miller; they'll pull us through."
+
+The captain's gloomy fit soon passed off, and he was as cheerful as
+ever; but there was no doubt of our being in a very awkward position.
+As far as fighting went, we could hold our own till doomsday; but we
+were bound to eat, and food did not grow on the mountains.
+
+Bolivar was working with all his fiery energy to hurry up
+reinforcements from Colombia and Chili, but until they arrived he could
+not send them on.  Then, too, the viceroy had gained over several
+Indian tribes, and they had already cut one detachment to pieces.  As
+far as I could judge, the Royalists had the whip-hand, and unless they
+made a mistake we should very shortly be at their mercy.
+
+On the sixth of December we halted at a little village, and a thrill of
+joy went through the troops when it was rumoured that our leaders
+intended to attack the enemy at all risks.  Wearied men, who had thrown
+themselves exhausted on the ground, struggled to their feet; starving
+men forgot their pangs; the very invalids crawled into the ranks, some
+of them so weak that they could barely trail a musket.
+
+"Stand by your horses!" said the colonel, as the enemy were only three
+miles off, and we might be required at any moment.
+
+An hour passed and we still waited; the morning wore away; afternoon
+merged into evening, and we were ordered to encamp.  Something, we knew
+not what, had gone wrong.
+
+"I don't know if there was a chance to-day," observed Plaza, "but won't
+there be one to-morrow?"
+
+"Why?"
+
+"Because the Royalists will block the road along which we must retreat.
+Then we must either throw ourselves against a terribly strong position,
+or stay here and starve."
+
+Events soon proved that he had not spoken at random.  Early next
+morning the enemy moved to an almost impregnable post.  Twice our
+number of strong men, flushed with victory and well equipped with guns,
+might well have hesitated to attack.  As for us, it was sheer madness.
+
+Things had come to the worst now.  Further retreat was barred; our
+provisions, even if we subsisted on the shortest of short rations,
+would not last five days, while to move against the foe was simply to
+commit suicide.
+
+"Lucky Barriero, sitting in his little hut!" said Alzura; "no fighting,
+no starving!  The next time we're taken prisoners we'll make the best
+of it, Juan."
+
+"I doubt if the Spaniards will make many prisoners--that is, among the
+officers," growled Cordova.  "The men will be spared, but we shall be
+put out of the way of doing mischief."
+
+I think myself Cordova exaggerated the danger; but his opinion was
+shared by the great majority of the Patriots, and it was this fear
+which made them resolve to fight to the bitter end rather than
+surrender.
+
+After breakfast we lounged about on the heights watching the Royalists,
+who had encamped just without gunshot, wondering what our leaders would
+decide to do.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXVIII.
+
+THE BATTLE OF THE GENERALS.
+
+"They're coming down!" cried Alzura excitedly, rushing into our tent.
+
+It wanted two hours to sunset; we had done nothing all day, and tired
+of watching the enemy on the opposite heights, most of us had gone to
+sleep.
+
+Alzura's announcement woke us up, and running forward, we glanced
+eagerly at the hill, which a battalion of infantry was descending.
+
+"Skirmishers, nothing more," said Plaza quietly.  "They fancy we might
+attempt a night attack.  Take my word for it, they won't be foolish
+enough to meet us on the plain."
+
+"Unless they try a rush in the dark."
+
+"That's just possible, but not probable; they're sure of us without
+that."
+
+"There goes a battalion of our light infantry in extended order,"
+remarked Cordova; "but there won't be any real fighting to-night.  I'm
+going back to bed."
+
+"A very sensible proceeding, too," exclaimed a genial voice; and
+turning round we beheld General Miller.  "I should advise all of you
+not on duty to do the same," he added.
+
+"Are we going to fight, general?" I asked eagerly.
+
+"Hullo, Crawford!  I've been so busy that I've lost sight of you
+lately.  Well, I hardly know.  Perhaps the viceroy would be better able
+to tell you; he knows more about it than I do."
+
+"I don't think he'll abandon his strong position just to give us a
+better chance, sir," remarked Plaza.
+
+"Perhaps not," replied the general.  "But you mustn't think he's in
+clover up yonder.  His men are as hungry as ours, and that's saying
+much.  If it is a fight, however, 'twill be a fight to the finish, and
+the Hussars of Junin won't be missing!"
+
+"Take us with you, sir!"
+
+"That's just what I've come to see the colonel about.  I intend to get
+all the regiment together and use it as a battering-ram."
+
+"He thinks the Royalists will attack," said Alzura, as the general
+passed on.  "He has heard something important, you may depend.  And why
+shouldn't they? they're two to one, and have no end of guns."
+
+"I like his idea of using all the regiment," laughed Cordova.  "Nearly
+a half of the third squadron are mounted on baggage mules; their horses
+are all dead."
+
+"They must get fresh ones from the enemy," I suggested.
+
+"Come," said Plaza; "there's nothing more to see here."  And we
+returned to the tent.
+
+Anxious to have a good long night, Cordova soon fell asleep; but Alzura
+and I sat up chatting till within an hour or two of dawn.  We could
+hear the hostile skirmishers peppering away at each other at intervals,
+and somehow the sounds seemed to be the prelude to a coming battle.
+
+Fortunately the morning dawned fair, but there was a nip in the air
+which impelled us to move about smartly.  Then the sun rose gloriously
+over the eastern peaks, and its genial warmth raised our drooping
+spirits.  I cannot account for the feeling, but somehow the whole army
+felt that a battle was imminent, and the faces of the troops wore a
+look of excited expectancy.
+
+Directly after breakfast, or what we were pleased to call breakfast,
+the men began moving to their positions, each corps being formed in
+close column.  For the better understanding of what happened, I must
+try to describe our position.  We were drawn up on a nearly square
+tableland known as the Plain of Ayacucho, a league in circumference,
+and flanked right and left by rugged ravines.  We had the village at
+our backs, and the only road by which we could retreat was effectually
+blocked.  The Royalist army was perched just below the summit of a
+gigantic ridge called Condorcanqui, which formed the eastern boundary
+of the plain.
+
+At seven o'clock our regiment moved out, and the men of the third
+squadron, of whom Cordova had spoken, provoked much humour and
+good-natured chaff as they rode past on their baggage mules.  It was
+thought that they would help to make a show, but no one suspected that
+later on, when ordered to remain in the rear, they would answer firmly,
+"No, we will conquer or die with our comrades!"
+
+The cavalry, consisting of four regiments, was stationed in the centre,
+with an infantry division on either side, and a third in the rear as a
+reserve.
+
+About nine o'clock a great cheer rose from all parts of the plain: the
+Royalists were descending the craggy side of Condorcanqui.  Between the
+infantry of each division appeared the cavalry, the riders leading
+their horses and advancing with difficulty.  It was an impressive
+scene, and we stood watching with breathless interest.
+
+Then our fellows renewed their cheering as General Sucre, riding along
+the line, addressed a few rousing words to each particular corps.
+
+"A tough nut to crack," remarked Plaza, watching the Royalists form,
+"but we'll get at the kernel before the day's over."
+
+"There's the beginning!" cried Alzura, as the infantry on our right
+slowly advanced.  "Hurrah! we're to help!" for an aid-de-camp from
+General Sucre had just dashed up to Miller with orders.
+
+We waited eagerly for the word to mount, but our turn had not yet come.
+Two cavalry regiments moved off with Miller, and left us gazing at the
+drama being unfolded before our eyes.
+
+Our infantry columns marched to the attack like so many automatic
+machines; the Royalists waited firmly, as if confident of victory.  We
+stood holding our horses, and quivering with excitement.  Much would
+depend upon the result of that first encounter.
+
+"They're stopping to fire," cried Alzura.  "Now they're moving again.
+Viva! they're going to charge.  Look at the sun on their bayonets."
+
+Would the Royalists give way?  No; they stood firm as the rocky heights
+behind them--not a man moved.  It seemed to me that there was not even
+a tremor in the whole mass.  If our fellows charged and failed, they
+would be cut to pieces.  We were like spectators in a theatre, only the
+drama was a real one.
+
+A mighty "Viva!" floated back to us as our men broke into the charge.
+It was neck or nothing now--decisive victory or stern defeat.
+
+"The Royalists will run," muttered Plaza; "they must."
+
+But they did not, and the next instant bayonet crossed bayonet in
+desperate conflict.
+
+Excitement drove us well-nigh crazy.  We cheered and shouted and waved
+our sabres, as if by so doing we could help in the fight.  Our troops
+had met their match, and seemed to make no impression.  Unless they
+went forward shortly they must retreat.
+
+"If they're driven back," remarked Plaza, "they are lost."
+
+How the struggle would have ended I cannot tell, but just then we broke
+into a cry of relief.  The two cavalry regiments which had made a wide
+detour were seen bearing down on the Royalists' flanks.  They swept
+along at hurricane speed.  Nothing could stand against the shock of
+their long lances.  A portion of the Royalists, facing about, delivered
+a telling volley at short range.  Men and horses went down with a
+crash, but the survivors were not checked.  A second volley crashed
+into them, making wide gaps, and then, with the force of a roaring
+torrent, they literally swept away the barrier of men and steel.
+
+"That settles it," said Plaza, breathing deeply; "the bravest troops in
+the world couldn't recover from such a smashing blow.  It's a case of
+complete rout, in that part of the field at all events."
+
+He was right too.  The enemy would not, indeed could not rally.  Here
+and there small groups stood at bay, fighting desperately but vainly to
+stem the onset of their pursuers.  All they could do was to die
+fighting, in the hope that the sacrifice might save their comrades.
+Even those who reached the heights were not out of danger.  Whiz, whiz
+sped the bullets; and numbers of the fugitives rolled down the mountain
+side till their bodies were caught by crag or brushwood.
+
+So greatly was our attention absorbed by the scene that we had scarcely
+noticed what was happening on our left.  Suddenly, however, a heavy
+fire broke out, followed by the quick reports of hundreds of muskets.
+Our colonel glanced in the direction uneasily.  His orders were strict.
+He was on no account to move his regiment, and yet--
+
+"Crawford," said he, looking round, "see what that firing means."
+
+I sprang to the saddle and galloped off.  But for our success on the
+right, I should have felt inclined to take a gloomy view of things: our
+left had given way.
+
+Two Royalist battalions were advancing in pursuit, while still further
+on the left a cavalry regiment was swooping down on one of our reserve
+battalions sent in support.  The crafty enemy had crossed a deep
+ravine, on the farther side of which a whole division was stationed.
+
+A mounted officer, with cap gone and cloak flying in the wind, pulled
+up on seeing me, and said rapidly, "Where is your regiment?  Take me to
+your colonel quickly.  We want cavalry; we must have cavalry, or our
+whole left will be rolled up!"
+
+"This way," I replied, and together we galloped towards the Hussars of
+Junin, reaching the colonel just as General Miller dashed up from the
+right.
+
+"What is it?" he asked hastily.
+
+"We are overpowered, sir.  The enemy have four field-guns across a
+ravine; our division has suffered terribly, and the troops are giving
+way.  The general requires a regiment of cavalry immediately."
+
+"Tell him it's coming," replied Miller.--"Now, colonel, here's a chance
+for your men to show their mettle.  We've smashed the enemy on the
+right; let the 'Hussars of Junin' do the same on the left."
+
+How we did cheer as our colonel led us out!  General Miller's face wore
+an anxious expression as he glanced over the field.  Everywhere the
+victorious Spaniards were driving back our left wing; we should only be
+just in time to repair the mischief.
+
+"Push those two infantry battalions across the ravine while I rally the
+fugitives," said Miller.  But he had barely spoken when the Royalist
+cavalry dashed down on the right flank.
+
+"Here's Crawford's friend again!" said Plaza.  "We might have guessed
+he had a hand in this business."
+
+Santiago made a handsome picture as he tore along well in front of his
+regiment, and enemy though he was, I could not help feeling proud of
+him.  We turned to meet this vigorous onslaught, and though Santiago
+fought with all the traditional valour of his race, his men, already
+tired by their great exertions, could not stand against us.
+
+Stopping their flight, our own infantry rallied, and advanced in
+support, while their loud cheers proclaimed the arrival of a second
+cavalry regiment.  Nothing daunted by his repulse, Santiago led his
+troopers against the new enemy, while we bore down on the hostile
+infantry.
+
+"Gallop!" cried our colonel; and neck by neck the horses flew over the
+ground, the men waving their sabres and cheering lustily.  We could see
+the glittering steel of the bayonets now, could almost look down the
+barrels of the muskets, when there came a blinding flash, the thud of
+falling bodies, and hoarse shrieks of pain.
+
+"Forward!" thundered the colonel, "forward; remember the 'Hussars of
+Junin!'"
+
+Crash we went right into them before they could fire another volley,
+and then it was horseman against footman, sabre against bayonet.  To
+and fro we surged, striking parrying, thrusting, till at last the brave
+enemy, unable to continue the struggle longer, fled to the ravine,
+hotly pursued by our victorious regiment.
+
+In a calmer moment we should have pulled up, but there was no stopping
+now.  Some one raised a warning cry: it came too late.  Down the ravine
+we went, the horses slipping and scrambling--some rolling over and
+crushing their riders; the majority, keeping their feet somehow,
+reached the opposite bank.  A small detachment of the enemy halted to
+fire a scattering volley, which did some mischief.  A man close to me
+fell forward on his horse's neck.
+
+"Good-bye, Crawford!" said he faintly; "I am done for."
+
+It was Cordova; but there was no time to help him.  On we dashed
+straight at the guns, which the gunners dared not fire, so mixed up
+were friend and foe.  A cry of "Viva el Rey!" arose in our rear.
+Santiago was galloping back.
+
+The Royalists could not stand.  Miller had brought up three battalions
+in double-quick time; the guns were ours; horse and foot we swept over
+the plain, driving the enemy pell-mell in all directions.  Only the
+regiment led by the undaunted Santiago endeavoured to cover the
+retreat, and at last it too fled.
+
+Not so their brave leader; he remained on the field.  I found him
+later, with a hole in his side and a nasty gash across the face.  He
+was not dead, however, and with assistance I carried him to the
+village, where a surgeon dressed his wounds.  Then I returned to my
+regiment.
+
+"It's all over!" cried Alzura exultantly.  "The viceroy is taken
+prisoner, and Canterac has come to sue for terms.  He is with Sucre
+now."
+
+"Where is Plaza?"
+
+"Just gone to find poor Cordova.  It's hard lines to drop off in the
+moment of victory.  And the war is over now; the Royalists will never
+lift their heads again."
+
+This was not quite correct, as a few still held out in other parts of
+the country, but they were powerless to do any real mischief.  This
+battle of Ayacucho--or Battle of the Generals, as we called it--secured
+the independence of Peru.  Fourteen Spanish generals, some of them the
+most famous in South America, gave up their swords; nearly six hundred
+officers and most of the rank and file became prisoners of war.
+
+Late that evening I went to see Santiago.  He lay on a bench in a
+miserable hut, where several wounded officers had been brought for
+shelter.  Two small earthen lamps gave a feeble light, barely
+sufficient for us to see each other's faces.  I bent over him, and
+choked back the sob that would rise in my throat.  We neither of us
+tried to gloze over the truth.  He was dying, and we both knew it.
+
+"I am glad you have come," he whispered.  "It will soon be over, and I
+am not sorry; I have tried to do my best."
+
+"Indeed you have, old fellow; friend and foe alike are loud in your
+praise."
+
+"I have been loyal to my king; I have done my duty," he continued, not
+heeding the interruption.  "Life is precious, Juan, but honour is the
+first thing.  My name is unstained.  I die as I have lived, a cavalier
+of Spain!"
+
+That thought cheered him as he took his last and long journey.  He was
+young and handsome and well beloved; he had fair estates and hosts of
+friends; he might have risen high in the councils of his nation; but
+death, stern and unyielding, claimed him, and he braced himself to meet
+it.
+
+"Thank God!" he murmured; "I die with a clear conscience."
+
+I stayed with him till nearly midnight, when he became unconscious.
+Then having work to do, I sorrowfully went away.  Next morning, on my
+way to the hut I met General Miller.
+
+"Poor fellow!" he said, when I told him of Santiago's state.  "I will
+come with you.  I remember him well."
+
+Just as we were moving on, we met General Sucre accompanied by a
+Spanish officer, who on seeing Miller ran forward and embraced him.
+
+"I know you!" he cried.  "I am Vald�s.  You and I must be friends."
+Then turning to General Sucre, he added, "This Miller has often kept us
+on the move.  I am called active; but he was a regular wizard--here,
+there, everywhere, without giving a clue to his intentions until he
+dealt us some sly blow."
+
+I looked at this celebrated Spanish general with a great deal of
+interest.  He was a small, spare man, with keen eyes and rough,
+weather-beaten face.  He wore a broad-brimmed beaver hat, a coarse gray
+surtout, and long brown worsted leggings.  He stooped slightly, and to
+judge by appearances, one would never have thought he was perhaps the
+finest soldier in the Spanish service.
+
+Sucre left the two chatting, and presently Miller said, "I was just
+going to visit one of your men, a Colonel Mariano.  Do you know him?"
+
+"Mariano?  He was my best cavalry officer.  It was he who helped me to
+cut up your rearguard some time ago, and to drive back your left wing
+yesterday.  I'll come with you."
+
+"He will be very pleased to see you, no doubt.--You go first and show
+us the way, Crawford."
+
+Santiago lay with closed eyes, breathing so faintly that at first we
+thought he was dead.
+
+"Santiago," I softly whispered, "do you know me?  I have brought you a
+visitor."
+
+His eyes opened slowly, and there was a fleeting smile in them, but he
+did not speak.
+
+"Colonel!" said Vald�s, stepping to the side of the bench.  The sound
+of that voice brought the poor fellow for a short time from the Valley
+of the Shadow.  By some extraordinary means he managed to sit up
+without assistance, raised his hand to the salute, and in a clear,
+ringing voice exclaimed, "At your service, general!"
+
+It was the last act of his life.  On placing my arm round him to
+prevent him from falling, I found he was dead.
+
+"A fine fellow," said General Miller quietly.
+
+"A thorough soldier to the end!" cried the Spanish general.
+
+I said nothing, but mourned none the less the true friend I had found
+in the ranks of our enemies.
+
+We were very quiet in camp that day.  The excitement of battle had
+passed, and we were counting the cost of our triumph.  Many familiar
+faces were missing, and the death of Cordova especially affected us.
+We had been through many perils together, had endured many hardships,
+and it seemed a pity that he should not have lived to taste the sweets
+of victory.
+
+Shortly before sunset that same day I received a message from General
+Miller asking me to go to his quarters.  I found him expecting me, and
+he at once plunged into the subject upon which he wished to speak.
+
+"The war is now over, Crawford," said he, "and General Sucre is able to
+release a large part of his force.  I am proceeding to Cuzco, but there
+is no need for you to do so.  You have done your share, and I intend
+sending you on special service to Lima."
+
+"Oh, thank you, general!" I answered, my eyes sparkling and my cheeks
+flushing with pleasure.
+
+"The regiment will return in a few weeks at the most," he continued.
+"Be ready to start in the morning, and don't forget to remember me
+kindly to your parents.  Some day I hope to call upon them."
+
+"I am sure you will receive a very warm welcome when you come,
+general," I replied, taking the hand held out to me.
+
+"Well, dear boy," said Alzura, on my return to our quarters, "what is
+the news?"
+
+"Good," said I, "though perhaps it's a bit selfish to say so.  I start
+to-morrow for Lima.  The regiment proceeds to Cuzco, but it will return
+to the capital in a few weeks."
+
+"All right, old fellow.  I'm glad to hear of your good fortune, though
+I shall miss you awfully.  Mind you hunt up my people and tell them I'm
+all right and hoping to see them soon."
+
+Of course I promised to do so, and then went to wish the others
+good-bye.
+
+"I hope you will find all your people well," exclaimed Plaza on hearing
+the news.  "After all, you're only a sort of advance courier, and we
+shall soon meet again."
+
+"We shall expect you to give a ball to the officers of the regiment,
+and a feast to the men, when we reach the capital," cried Alzura
+merrily.
+
+"Meanwhile," said Plaza gravely, "take my advice, and have a good rest."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIX.
+
+HOME AGAIN.
+
+Home again!  The weary journey was at an end.
+
+I had crossed the desolate mountains, and was riding into Lima.  The
+city was gay with flags and bunting; decorations abounded on all sides;
+joy-bells pealed, and the streets resounded with the merry laughter and
+chatter of the citizens.
+
+News of the brilliant victory at Ayacucho had evidently preceded me.
+
+I longed to ride home at a gallop and throw myself into my mother's
+arms; I yearned eagerly for a glimpse of my father's face.  I was (do
+not think the confession weak) utterly homesick.  Duty, however,
+claimed me a while longer, and I turned my horse's head toward the
+Government House.
+
+It was not possible to move at more than a foot-pace.  The crowd surged
+around me; little children, garlanded with flowers, ran close to my
+horse's hoofs.  I was terribly afraid some of them would be trampled to
+death.
+
+Many soldiers were there, too, their uniforms spick and span, and
+unspotted by the soil of the Andes.  Mine was dirty, bloodstained, and
+not altogether free from rents.  I rode carefully, but my eyes were
+heavy and my limbs ached with fatigue.
+
+Darting suddenly from the throng, a man seized my bridle-rein and cried
+aloud, "A soldier from Ayacucho!  Here is one of our brave deliverers!"
+
+[Illustration: "A soldier from Ayacucho!  Here is one of our brave
+deliverers!"]
+
+Instantly I was surrounded by the crowd, which pressed me so closely
+that my horse could barely move.  Viva after viva rent the air;
+laughing girls and women half smothered me with flowers; men marched
+beside me or fell into line behind, forming a kind of triumphal
+procession.  One would have thought I was the saviour of the country--a
+second Bolivar!
+
+Thus, laughing, cheering, and singing, they escorted me to the
+Government House, where, leaving my astonished horse with the guards, I
+hurried inside.  An official, in all the glory of a gorgeous uniform,
+demanded my business, and remarked haughtily that the president was
+engaged.
+
+"Tell him," said I, "that a lieutenant of the Hussars of Junin is here
+with dispatches from General Sucre."
+
+After waiting a few minutes, I was conducted through the spacious hall
+to a room guarded by a file of soldiers.  My attendant knocked timidly
+at the door, which was immediately opened, and I entered the apartment.
+
+Bolivar sat at a table dictating letters to his secretary and talking
+to several officers of high rank.  His complexion seemed sallower than
+ever, his dark hair had more of gray in it, but his eyes had lost none
+of their penetrating keenness.
+
+I saluted and stood at attention, waiting for him to speak.
+
+"Ah," exclaimed he, in his loud, rasping voice, and turning his eyes
+askance as he usually did in conversation, "you are Lieutenant
+Crawford!  I have not forgotten you.  How is it that you still have
+only two stripes?" pointing to the stripes of silver lace round my
+cuff, which denoted the rank of lieutenant.
+
+"I do not know, general," I replied.
+
+"Your Excellency!" corrected one of the officers standing near.
+
+"Let him alone!" cried Bolivar; "he is a soldier, and 'general' comes
+more naturally to his lips.--Where are the dispatches?"
+
+I presented them.
+
+"Humph! enough work here for the rest of the day," said he on glancing
+through them.--"Garcia," turning to one of the officers, "countermand
+the reception; I shall be too busy.--Ah, here is a letter from Miller!
+I see he commends you very highly, young man, and desires to bring you
+to my notice.  There is nothing I like so much as rewarding true
+merit.--Garcia, make out Lieutenant Crawford's commission as captain in
+the Hussars of Junin, for bravery on the field.--I congratulate you,
+captain.  I see by your face you are anxious to go."
+
+After thanking him for my promotion, I said, "Yes, general; I have not
+seen my father and mother for a very long time."
+
+"Your father--ah, now I remember.  He is no friend to me--would be glad
+to see me out of Peru, in fact, eh?  Well, I shall go some day.  But he
+is a true man for all that, and an Englishman.  I love the English.
+Perhaps it is as well for your father that I do.  Tell him, Captain
+Crawford, that Bolivar has some good points."
+
+"He has already recognized them, general," I answered.
+
+"He conceals his discovery well, then.  But I will not keep you longer.
+Present yourself at my levee in the morning, and don't forget to wear
+that extra band of lace."
+
+"There is no fear of that, general," said I, with a smile; "I am too
+proud of the honour."
+
+Apparently the remark pleased him, as he was very gracious when I took
+my leave, though the officers-in-waiting looked at me as if I had been
+overbold.
+
+Out again into the street.  The crowd had dispersed, and only a few
+people were about as I once more mounted my jaded animal.  Now for
+home!  Forward, good horse!  My spirits rose with every step; the tired
+feeling left me; I could have sung aloud for very joy.
+
+The sight of the Montilla hacienda sobered my happiness somewhat.  The
+grounds were trim and well-kept, but the dwelling looked untenanted.
+What had become of Rosa?  Perhaps--yes, that must be it--she was
+staying with my mother.  I urged my horse into a spasmodic gallop, but
+the poor beast soon resumed his old pace.
+
+There was a horse behind me, though, that could gallop.  I turned
+quickly to see who the rider was, and laughed gaily.
+
+"Why, Jack!" cried the faithful Jos�, his eyes brimful of pleasure.
+
+"Captain Crawford, if you please!" I interrupted with assumed dignity.
+
+"Captain or general, it's all the same to me, as long as you're home
+again, Jack, with no scratch on you!  Hurrah! won't there be a fuss in
+the house to-night!" and away he went at breakneck speed toward the
+gate.
+
+"Better so," said I, jogging along.  "He'll be able to prepare them a
+little.--Come, old boy," to my horse, "can't you manage even a trot?
+Well, never mind; we're nearly there."
+
+The gate of the park was wide open, and inside stood more than half of
+my father's servants.  They could not wait for me to reach the
+courtyard.  How they cheered, to be sure!  It was a pleasant foretaste
+of the welcome that awaited me.
+
+Good old Antonio was at the little gate, so I dismounted and spoke a
+word with him, though my feet itched to be dashing along the courtyard.
+Then I sent my horse to the stables, with strict orders that it should
+be carefully groomed and fed, and made comfortable.
+
+At last!  My heart beat loudly; my head was dizzy; I could barely
+distinguish the figures in the hall.  But my mother's arms were round
+me, her lips pressed close to mine, in a fond embrace.
+
+Then came my father's welcome, and presently, in the brilliantly-lit
+drawing-room, a young girl came forward and placed her hand in mine.
+She was dressed in black, and looked somewhat sad and careworn, as if
+life had not been particularly pleasant of late.
+
+"Welcome home, Juan," said she softly; and I saw by her face she was
+thinking of the night when I had ridden hurriedly away in the vain
+endeavour to save her father's life.  We did not speak of it then, and
+when, after changing my clothes, I returned to the drawing-room, Rosa
+was not there.
+
+"She has gone to her own room," explained my mother, noticing my look
+of disappointment.  "It would have been difficult for the poor child to
+stay with us this first evening."
+
+"She has heard of her father's death, then?"
+
+"Yes," said my father, quickly and with a warning glance.  "She knows
+that the Indians shot him, thinking he had been in correspondence with
+the Royalists."
+
+I understood at once that my father was aware of the truth, but that,
+with his usual kindly thought, he had kept it from both the bereaved
+girl and my mother.  He never alluded to the miserable incident, nor
+did I; and Rosa was left in ignorance of the real reason for her
+father's untimely end.
+
+Of course, we sat late talking over my adventures in the mountains, and
+of the terrible battle which had secured the independence of Peru.
+
+"Yes," said my father confidently, "whatever else happens, the
+Spaniards will never again rule over this country; their power is
+broken.  But we are not yet out of the wood: as a Peruvian, I still
+fear Bolivar's ambition."
+
+"Oh," I exclaimed gaily, "I had forgotten Bolivar!  He has made me a
+captain!" and I told them all about my interview with the celebrated
+general.
+
+"I admit his good points," laughed my father; "but I do not like to see
+one person invested with such tremendous power.  Still, there is no
+doubt we owe our liberty in great part to his wonderful energy,
+together with his determination never to acknowledge defeat.  He has
+toiled day and night like a slave."
+
+"I shall be glad when your regiment returns, Juan," said my mother.  "I
+am longing to see your brave friends, and especially Alzura.  I seem to
+know him quite well already."
+
+"You are sure to like him, mother.  He is a delightful companion, full
+of fun, and always laughing and joking.  Plaza is older and more of a
+soldier, but I owe a great deal to his kindness."
+
+"We will endeavour to repay it, my boy," said she brightly, kissing me
+good-night.  "Don't stay up too long.  Remember you have to attend the
+levee in the morning."
+
+When she had retired, I asked my father for news of Raymon Sorillo.
+
+"He is still serving against the Royalists, but his band has sadly
+diminished.  He came here secretly one night, and informed me of your
+attempt to rescue Montilla.  I think he was very angry; but he said it
+was a daring act, and almost successful.  However, he bears no malice,
+and is as ready as ever to stand your friend."
+
+"Ugh!" said I, getting up with a shiver; "I hope I shall not need his
+assistance."
+
+The next day, after attending the levee, where Bolivar was particularly
+gracious, I obtained an indefinite leave of absence, and returned home.
+
+Rosa was alone, and though rather dreading to be asked about the
+business of the silver key, I thought it best to get the interview
+over.  As it happened, I need not have worried myself at all.
+
+"I wanted to see you, Juan," she said, giving me her hand.  "It seems
+ages ago when I sent you out on that terrible errand.  I ought not to
+have done it; but my father's life was at stake, and I did not think of
+the danger to you."
+
+"Think no more of it, Rosa.  After all, the danger was trifling; the
+Indians would not have hurt me."
+
+"I don't quite understand the story," she said thoughtfully, "but I
+know you risked your life."
+
+"There was little risk.  I had a slight chance to rescue your father
+from the Indians, and seized it.  Unfortunately the attempt failed, and
+I was captured by the Royalists.  So in one way you did me a good turn;
+for while the other fellows were starving and fighting in the
+mountains, I was pretty comfortably off."
+
+"But you were in the great battle?"
+
+"Yes, I was.  I escaped from prison chiefly to please a mad-brained
+young lieutenant of my regiment.  But it is all past now, Rosa, and
+there will be no more fighting."
+
+"I am sorry for his Majesty," she said simply, "and for the loyal
+gentlemen who have died for him."
+
+"There were some splendid fellows amongst the Royalists," I said, and
+proceeded to tell her the story of the gallant Santiago Mariano.
+
+"He must have been a brave man, Juan!"
+
+"He was, and he had equally brave comrades.  Now that the struggle is
+over, they will join us, and we shall all work together in peace for
+the prosperity of our common country.  The war has been a terrible
+evil, but I am hoping that much good may come from it.  I dream of a
+grand future for Peru, and of a time when the Land of the Sun shall
+recover its ancient glory."
+
+"I hope your dream will come true, Juan.  I am sure you will try to
+make it do so," she said.  "But you must not expect me to be pleased
+that we are no longer loyal subjects of the Spanish king."
+
+      *      *      *      *      *      *
+
+Here ends the story of my adventures during the War of Independence.
+The Spanish power was completely crushed; but, as my father had
+foretold, there were still many misfortunes in store for our unhappy
+country.  The men who had fought so hard for liberty quarrelled among
+themselves.  There were endless disputes and conspiracies, and many
+soldiers who had bravely faced death on the battlefield were executed
+by their fellow-countrymen.
+
+For two years Bolivar ruled at Lima.  He was at the height of his
+glory.  He had freed Venezuela, New Granada, and Ecuador from the
+Spaniards, and joined them into the one country of Colombia.  Upper
+Peru he had formed into another country called Bolivia, and he was the
+real master of Peru proper.
+
+His boundless ambition, however, overreached itself.  Enemies rose up
+against him on all sides.  He was driven from power, and seven years
+after the battle of Ayacucho died a broken-hearted man.
+
+After his departure from Lima, my father's Spanish friend, General La
+Mar, who had once been Governor of Callao, was elected president, and
+the country settled down into a state of something like order.
+
+There still remain a few personal matters to be recorded before my pen
+is finally laid aside.
+
+Among those who opposed Bolivar's rule in Peru, none was more bitter or
+reckless than the guerilla chief, Raymon Sorillo.  Unfortunately for
+him, the war had greatly weakened the society of the Silver Key.  His
+bravest men and ablest lieutenants had died fighting, and he was left
+with only a shadow of his former power.
+
+Undaunted by this, he openly defied Bolivar's authority.  For several
+months he held his own against the regular troops, but at last, being
+captured, was tried as a traitor, and condemned to death.
+
+My father made strenuous efforts to save him, and would have succeeded
+but for Sorillo himself.
+
+"The man is a desperate ruffian," said Bolivar, in answer to my
+father's appeal for mercy; "but I will pardon him on condition that he
+takes the oath of allegiance and swears to obey the laws."
+
+Overjoyed by his success, my father hurried to the prison where Sorillo
+was confined.  The doughty mountaineer refused the offer with scorn.
+
+"I took up arms for the independence of Peru," said he, "not to
+exchange the tyranny of the Spaniards for that of a Venezuelan
+adventurer.  I thank you, se�or, from my heart, but I prefer death to
+these conditions."
+
+My father stayed with him nearly the whole day, but could not shake his
+resolve.  So in the early morning the redoubtable chief was led into
+the prison yard, and was placed near a wall.  Some of the soldiers
+wished to bandage his eyes, but he would not allow it.
+
+"No," said he; "I have looked in the face of death too closely and too
+often to fear it.  Fire!  I shall not tremble."
+
+Thus he died, and whatever else may be said, it cannot be denied that,
+in his own headstrong, obstinate way, he was faithful to the cause for
+which many better men had laid down their lives.
+
+Of my friend Plaza it is only necessary to say that, through General
+Miller's influence as well as by his own merit, he rapidly advanced to
+high office, being made governor of one of the inland provinces.  He
+has paid me several visits since he left the hussars, and his sole
+regret is that Cordova did not live to share in the general good
+fortune.
+
+An old acquaintance, who has also since done well in the world, is
+Barriero.  When the victory at Ayacucho became known, the prisoners on
+the island rose in revolt, and overpowered their guards.  Barriero
+placed himself at their head, seized all the arms and ammunition, and
+formed the patriots into a company.  Then, assisted by some Indians, he
+crossed the morass and marched to Cuzco, where, to his joy and
+astonishment, he heard that Alzura and I had safely escaped across the
+dreaded swamp.
+
+Alzura resigned his commission shortly after the regiment returned to
+Lima.  He succeeded to a fine estate near the capital, and is one of
+our most frequent visitors.  My father is very fond of him, and as for
+my mother, I sometimes say she thinks more of him than of myself;
+indeed, the dear fellow has almost become like a second son to her.
+
+Jos� is still my father's right-hand man.  He has long since amassed a
+snug fortune; but I expect he will die in the old home, where he is an
+esteemed and valued and trusty friend.
+
+Felipe Montilla's hacienda no longer stands desolate.  Rosa has again
+taken up her residence there, but under the name of Crawford, and
+employs me, as my father jokingly says, to look after her estates.  She
+is still a Royalist at heart, but as the years pass she becomes more
+and more reconciled to the changes which have taken place since Peru
+obtained its independence
+
+    AT THE POINT OF THE SWORD.
+
+
+
+
+THE END.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+End of Project Gutenberg's At the Point of the Sword, by Herbert Hayens
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK AT THE POINT OF THE SWORD ***
+
+***** This file should be named 22595-8.txt or 22595-8.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        https://www.gutenberg.org/2/2/5/9/22595/
+
+Produced by Al Haines
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+https://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+https://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including including checks, online payments and credit card
+donations.  To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
diff --git a/22595-8.zip b/22595-8.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f9c9cad
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22595-8.zip
diff --git a/22595-h.zip b/22595-h.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..39eb2e8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22595-h.zip
diff --git a/22595-h/22595-h.htm b/22595-h/22595-h.htm
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..10f4ee4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22595-h/22595-h.htm
@@ -0,0 +1,18623 @@
+<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN">
+<HTML>
+<HEAD>
+
+<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
+
+<TITLE>
+At the Point of the Sword
+</TITLE>
+
+<STYLE TYPE="text/css">
+BODY { color: Black;
+       background: White;
+       margin-right: 5%;
+       margin-left: 10%;
+       font-size: medium;
+       font-family: "Times New Roman", serif;
+       text-align: justify }
+
+P {text-indent: 4% }
+
+P.noindent {text-indent: 0% }
+
+P.poem {text-indent: 0%;
+        margin-left: 10%;
+        font-size: small }
+
+P.letter {font-size: small ;
+          margin-left: 10% ;
+          margin-right: 10% }
+
+P.salutation {font-size: small ;
+              text-indent: 0%;
+              margin-left: 10% ;
+              margin-right: 10% }
+
+P.closing {font-size: small ;
+           text-indent: 0%;
+           margin-left: 10% ;
+           margin-right: 10% }
+
+P.footnote {font-size: small ;
+            text-indent: 0% ;
+            margin-left: 0% ;
+            margin-right: 0% }
+
+P.transnote {font-size: small ;
+             text-indent: 0% ;
+             margin-left: 0% ;
+             margin-right: 0% }
+
+P.index {font-size: small ;
+         text-indent: -5% ;
+         margin-left: 5% ;
+         margin-right: 0% }
+
+P.intro {font-size: medium ;
+         text-indent: -5% ;
+         margin-left: 5% ;
+         margin-right: 0% }
+
+P.dedication {text-indent: 0%;
+              margin-left: 15%;
+              text-align: justify }
+
+P.published {font-size: small ;
+             text-indent: 0% ;
+             margin-left: 15% }
+
+P.quote {font-size: small ;
+         text-indent: 4% ;
+         margin-left: 0% ;
+         margin-right: 0% }
+
+P.report {font-size: small ;
+         text-indent: 4% ;
+         margin-left: 0% ;
+         margin-right: 0% }
+
+P.report2 {font-size: small ;
+         text-indent: 4% ;
+         margin-left: 10% ;
+         margin-right: 10% }
+
+P.finis { text-align: center ;
+          text-indent: 0% ;
+          margin-left: 0% ;
+          margin-right: 0% }
+
+H3.h3left { margin-left: 0%;
+            margin-right: 1%;
+            margin-bottom: .5% ;
+            margin-top: 0;
+            float: left ;
+            clear: left ;
+            text-align: center }
+
+H3.h3right { margin-left: 1%;
+             margin-right: 0 ;
+             margin-bottom: .5% ;
+             margin-top: 0;
+             float: right ;
+             clear: right ;
+             text-align: center }
+
+H3.h3center { margin-left: 0;
+              margin-right: 0 ;
+              margin-bottom: .5% ;
+              margin-top: 0;
+              float: none ;
+              clear: both ;
+              text-align: center  }
+
+H4.h4left { margin-left: 0%;
+            margin-right: 1%;
+            margin-bottom: .5% ;
+            margin-top: 0;
+            float: left ;
+            clear: left ;
+            text-align: center }
+
+H4.h4right { margin-left: 1%;
+             margin-right: 0 ;
+             margin-bottom: .5% ;
+             margin-top: 0;
+             float: right ;
+             clear: right ;
+             text-align: center }
+
+H4.h4center { margin-left: 0;
+              margin-right: 0 ;
+              margin-bottom: .5% ;
+              margin-top: 0;
+              float: none ;
+              clear: both ;
+              text-align: center  }
+
+H5.h5left { margin-left: 0%;
+            margin-right: 1%;
+            margin-bottom: .5% ;
+            margin-top: 0;
+            float: left ;
+            clear: left ;
+            text-align: center }
+
+H5.h5right { margin-left: 1%;
+             margin-right: 0 ;
+             margin-bottom: .5% ;
+             margin-top: 0;
+             float: right ;
+             clear: right ;
+             text-align: center }
+
+H5.h5center { margin-left: 0;
+              margin-right: 0 ;
+              margin-bottom: .5% ;
+              margin-top: 0;
+              float: none ;
+              clear: both ;
+              text-align: center  }
+
+IMG.imgleft { float: left;
+              clear: left;
+              margin-left: 0;
+              margin-bottom: 0;
+              margin-top: 1%;
+              margin-right: 1%;
+              padding: 0;
+              text-align: center }
+
+IMG.imgright {float: right;
+              clear: right;
+              margin-left: 1%;
+              margin-bottom: 0;
+              margin-top: 1%;
+              margin-right: 0;
+              padding: 0;
+              text-align: center }
+
+IMG.imgcenter { margin-left: auto;
+                margin-bottom: 0;
+                margin-top: 1%;
+                margin-right: auto; }
+
+.pagenum { position: absolute;
+           left: 1%;
+           font-size: 95%;
+           text-align: left;
+           text-indent: 0;
+           font-style: normal;
+           font-weight: normal;
+           font-variant: normal; }
+
+.sidenote { left: 0%;
+            font-size: 65%;
+            text-align: left;
+            text-indent: 0%;
+            width: 17%;
+            float: left;
+            clear: left;
+            padding-left: 0%;
+            padding-right: 2%;
+            padding-top: 2%;
+            padding-bottom: 2%;
+            font-style: normal;
+            font-weight: normal;
+            font-variant: normal; }
+
+
+
+</STYLE>
+
+</HEAD>
+
+<BODY>
+
+
+<pre>
+
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of At the Point of the Sword, by Herbert Hayens
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: At the Point of the Sword
+
+Author: Herbert Hayens
+
+Release Date: September 14, 2007 [EBook #22595]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK AT THE POINT OF THE SWORD ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Al Haines
+
+
+
+
+
+</pre>
+
+
+<A NAME="img-front"></A>
+
+<BR><BR>
+
+<H4>
+[Frontispiece: &quot;In a short time they had bound our arms tightly with strips of hide.&quot;]
+</H4>
+
+<P CLASS="noindent">
+[Transcriber's note: frontispiece missing from book.]
+</P>
+
+<BR><BR><BR>
+
+<H1 ALIGN="center">
+At the Point of the Sword
+</H1>
+
+<H2 ALIGN="center">
+A Story for Boys
+</H2>
+
+<BR>
+
+<H3 ALIGN="center">
+By
+<BR>
+HERBERT HAYENS
+</H3>
+
+<BR><BR>
+
+<H4 ALIGN="center">
+Author of "Ye Mariners of England," "Under the Lone Star," <BR>
+"For the Colours," "A Captain of Irregulars," <BR>
+"In the Grip of the Spaniard,"<BR>
+&amp;c., &amp;c.
+</H4>
+
+<BR><BR><BR>
+
+<H4 ALIGN="center">
+THOMAS NELSON &amp; SONS, LTD.
+<BR>
+LONDON, EDINBURGH, AND NEW YORK
+<BR>
+1903
+</H4>
+
+<BR><BR><BR>
+
+<H2 ALIGN="center">
+CONTENTS.
+</H2>
+
+<BR>
+
+<CENTER>
+
+<TABLE WIDTH="80%">
+
+<TR>
+<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">I.&nbsp;&nbsp;</TD>
+<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top">
+<A HREF="#chap01">A BIRTHDAY EVE</A></TD>
+</TR>
+
+<TR>
+<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">II.&nbsp;&nbsp;</TD>
+<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top">
+<A HREF="#chap02">AN EXCITING VOYAGE</A></TD>
+</TR>
+
+<TR>
+<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">III.&nbsp;&nbsp;</TD>
+<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top">
+<A HREF="#chap03">THE END OF THE "AGUILA"</A></TD>
+</TR>
+
+<TR>
+<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">IV.&nbsp;&nbsp;</TD>
+<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top">
+<A HREF="#chap04">THE SILVER KEY</A></TD>
+</TR>
+
+<TR>
+<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">V.&nbsp;&nbsp;</TD>
+<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top">
+<A HREF="#chap05">IN THE HIDDEN VALLEY</A></TD>
+</TR>
+
+<TR>
+<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">VI.&nbsp;&nbsp;</TD>
+<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top">
+<A HREF="#chap06">WE LEAVE THE HIDDEN VALLEY</A></TD>
+</TR>
+
+<TR>
+<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">VII.&nbsp;&nbsp;</TD>
+<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top">
+<A HREF="#chap07">WHOM THE GODS LOVE DIE YOUNG</A></TD>
+</TR>
+
+<TR>
+<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">VIII.&nbsp;&nbsp;</TD>
+<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top">
+<A HREF="#chap08">A FRIENDLY OPPONENT</A></TD>
+</TR>
+
+<TR>
+<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">IX.&nbsp;&nbsp;</TD>
+<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top">
+<A HREF="#chap09">A GLEAM OF HOPE</A></TD>
+</TR>
+
+<TR>
+<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">X.&nbsp;&nbsp;</TD>
+<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top">
+<A HREF="#chap10">A STORMY INTERVIEW</A></TD>
+</TR>
+
+<TR>
+<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XI.&nbsp;&nbsp;</TD>
+<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top">
+<A HREF="#chap11">A NARROW ESCAPE</A></TD>
+</TR>
+
+<TR>
+<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XII.&nbsp;&nbsp;</TD>
+<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top">
+<A HREF="#chap12">A STERN PURSUIT</A></TD>
+</TR>
+
+<TR>
+<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XIII.&nbsp;&nbsp;</TD>
+<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top">
+<A HREF="#chap13">HOME AGAIN</A></TD>
+</TR>
+
+<TR>
+<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XIV.&nbsp;&nbsp;</TD>
+<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top">
+<A HREF="#chap14">FRIEND OR FOE?</A></TD>
+</TR>
+
+<TR>
+<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XV.&nbsp;&nbsp;</TD>
+<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top">
+<A HREF="#chap15">WE CATCH A TARTAR</A></TD>
+</TR>
+
+<TR>
+<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XVI.&nbsp;&nbsp;</TD>
+<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top">
+<A HREF="#chap16">GLORIOUS NEWS</A></TD>
+</TR>
+
+<TR>
+<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XVII.&nbsp;&nbsp;</TD>
+<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top">
+<A HREF="#chap17">DUTY FIRST</A></TD>
+</TR>
+
+<TR>
+<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XVIII.&nbsp;&nbsp;</TD>
+<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top">
+<A HREF="#chap18">DARK DAYS</A></TD>
+</TR>
+
+<TR>
+<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XIX.&nbsp;&nbsp;</TD>
+<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top">
+<A HREF="#chap19">FALSE PLAY, OR NOT?</A></TD>
+</TR>
+
+<TR>
+<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XX.&nbsp;&nbsp;</TD>
+<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top">
+<A HREF="#chap20">"SAVE HIM, JUAN, SAVE HIM!"</A></TD>
+</TR>
+
+<TR>
+<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XXI.&nbsp;&nbsp;</TD>
+<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top">
+<A HREF="#chap21">ROUGH JUSTICE</A></TD>
+</TR>
+
+<TR>
+<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XXII.&nbsp;&nbsp;</TD>
+<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top">
+<A HREF="#chap22">THE "SILVER KEY" AGAIN</A></TD>
+</TR>
+
+<TR>
+<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XXIII.&nbsp;&nbsp;</TD>
+<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top">
+<A HREF="#chap23">AN OPEN-AIR PRISON</A></TD>
+</TR>
+
+<TR>
+<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XXIV.&nbsp;&nbsp;</TD>
+<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top">
+<A HREF="#chap24">A DANGEROUS JOURNEY</A></TD>
+</TR>
+
+<TR>
+<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XXV.&nbsp;&nbsp;</TD>
+<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top">
+<A HREF="#chap25">BACK TO DUTY</A></TD>
+</TR>
+
+<TR>
+<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XXVI.&nbsp;&nbsp;</TD>
+<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top">
+<A HREF="#chap26">THE HUSSARS OF JUNIN</A></TD>
+</TR>
+
+<TR>
+<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XXVII.&nbsp;&nbsp;</TD>
+<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top">
+<A HREF="#chap27">A DISASTROUS RETREAT</A></TD>
+</TR>
+
+<TR>
+<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XXVIII.&nbsp;&nbsp;</TD>
+<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top">
+<A HREF="#chap28">THE BATTLE OF THE GENERALS</A></TD>
+</TR>
+
+<TR>
+<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XXIX.&nbsp;&nbsp;</TD>
+<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top">
+<A HREF="#chap29">HOME AGAIN</A></TD>
+</TR>
+
+</TABLE>
+
+</CENTER>
+
+<BR><BR><BR>
+
+<H2 ALIGN="center">
+LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS.
+</H2>
+
+<BR>
+
+<H4>
+<A HREF="#img-front">
+"IN A SHORT TIME THEY HAD BOUND OUR ARMS TIGHTLY<BR>
+  WITH STRIPS OF HIDE"&nbsp;.&nbsp;.&nbsp;.&nbsp;.&nbsp;.&nbsp;. <I>Frontispiece</I>
+</A>
+</H4>
+
+<H4>
+<A HREF="#img-046">
+"'HELP, HELP!' I EXCLAIMED FAINTLY; BUT HE HEARD ME,<BR>
+  AND I KNEW I WAS SAVED."
+</A>
+</H4>
+
+<H4>
+<A HREF="#img-151">
+"PUSHING OFF HIS SANDY BED-CLOTHES AT OUR APPROACH,<BR>
+  HE STRUGGLED TO HIS FEET."
+</A>
+</H4>
+
+<H4>
+<A HREF="#img-273">
+"'SAVE HIM, JUAN, SAVE HIM!'"
+</A>
+</H4>
+
+<H4>
+<A HREF="#img-281">
+"HE GLANCED CONTEMPTUOUSLY AT THE GIGANTIC SORILLO."
+</A>
+</H4>
+
+<H4>
+<A HREF="#img-390">
+"'A SOLDIER FROM AYACUCHO!  HERE IS ONE OF OUR BRAVE<BR>
+  DELIVERERS!'"
+</A>
+</H4>
+
+<BR><BR><BR>
+
+<A NAME="chap01"></A>
+
+<H1 ALIGN="center">
+AT THE POINT OF THE SWORD.
+</H1>
+
+<BR>
+
+<H3 ALIGN="center">
+CHAPTER I.
+</H3>
+
+<H3 ALIGN="center">
+A BIRTHDAY EVE.
+</H3>
+
+<P>
+In spite of my English name&mdash;Jack Crawford&mdash;and my English blood, I
+have never set foot on that famous little island in the North Sea, and
+now it is quite unlikely that I ever shall do so.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I was born in Peru, on the outskirts of beautiful Lima, where, until
+the year 1819, on the very eve of my fourteenth birthday, the days of
+my childhood were passed.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I expect you know that in ancient days Peru was called the "Land of the
+Sun," because the sun was worshipped by the natives.  Their great city
+was Cuzco, built, it is said, in 1043 A.D., by Manco Capac, the first
+of the Incas, or Emperors of Peru.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The natives believed Manco to be a child of the sun; but I have heard
+an old story that his father was a shipwrecked Englishman, who married
+the daughter of a Peruvian chief.  I do not think this tale correct,
+but it is full of interest.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Most of the Incas ruled very wisely, and the remains of palaces,
+temples, and aqueducts show that the people were highly civilized; but
+in 1534 the Spaniards, under Pizarro, invaded the country, and swept
+away the glorious empire of the Incas.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+After that Peru became a part of Spanish America, and Pizarro founded
+the city of Lima, which he made the capital.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+My father, who settled in the country when quite a young man, married a
+Peruvian lady of wealthy and influential family.  The estate near Lima
+formed part of her marriage portion, and a beautiful place it was, with
+a fine park, and a lake which served me both for boating and bathing.
+I had several friends, chiefly Spaniards, but two English boys, whose
+fathers were merchants in Callao, often visited me, and many a pleasant
+game we had together.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+At this time Peru was a Spanish colony, but some people, among whom was
+my father, wanted to make it an independent country, having its own
+ruler.  Being still a boy, I did not hear much of these things, though,
+from certain talk, I understood that the country was in a most
+unsettled state, and that the Spanish governor had thrown many good men
+into prison for urging the people to free themselves.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+One evening, in March 1819, I was busy in my workshop painting a small
+boat.  My father had been absent for nearly a week, but he had promised
+to return for my birthday, and every moment I expected to see him
+crossing the courtyard.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Presently, hearing old Antonio unfasten the wicket-gate, I put down my
+brush, wiped my hands, and ran out joyously.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The happy welcome died on my lips.  It was not my father who had
+entered, but Rosa Montilla, the young daughter of a famous Spanish
+officer.  She was nearly a year younger than myself, and a frequent
+visitor at our house.  Often we had gone together for a row on the
+lake, or for a gallop on our ponies round the park.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+She was very pretty, with deep blue eyes and fair hair, quite unlike
+most Spanish girls, and generally full of fun and good spirits.  Now,
+however, she was very pale and looked frightened.  I noticed, too, that
+she had no covering on her head or shoulders, and that she had not
+changed the thin slippers worn in the house.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+These things made me curious and uneasy.  I feared some evil had
+befallen her father, and knew not how to act.  On seeing me she made a
+little run forward, and, bursting into tears, cried, "O Juan, Juan!"
+using, as also did my mother, the Spanish form of my name.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Now, being only a boy, and being brought up for the most part among
+boys, I was but a clumsy comforter, though I would have done anything
+to lessen her grief.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"What is it, Rosa?" I asked; "what has happened?"  But for answer she
+could only wring her hands and cry, "O Juan, Juan!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Do not cry, Rosa!" I said, and then doing what I should have done in
+the first place, led her toward the drawing-room, where my mother was.
+"Mother will comfort you.  Tell her all about it," I said confidently,
+for it was to my mother I always turned when things went wrong.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+On this her tears fell faster, but she came with me, and together we
+entered the room.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Juan!" cried my mother.&mdash;"Rosa! what is the matter?  Why are you
+crying?  But come to me, darling;" and in another moment she was
+pressing the girl to her bosom.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+At a sign from her I left the room, but did not go far away.  Rosa's
+action was so odd that I waited with impatience to hear the reason.
+She must have left her home hurriedly and unobserved, since it was an
+unheard-of thing that the daughter of Don Felipe Montilla should be out
+on foot and unattended.  I was sure that should her father discover it
+he would be greatly annoyed.  The whole affair was so mysterious that I
+could make nothing of it.  The girl's sobs were more under control now,
+and she began to speak.  As she might not wish me to hear her story, I
+walked away, meaning to chat with Antonio at the gate, and to await my
+father's return.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+He might not come for hours yet, as it was still early evening, but I
+hoped he would, and the more so now on Rosa's account.  She might need
+help which I was not old enough to give; while, as it chanced, Joseph
+Craig, my father's trusty English servant, had gone that afternoon into
+Callao.  However, he also might be back at any moment now, and would
+not, in any case, be late.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Half an hour had perhaps passed, and I was turning from the gate, when
+two horsemen dashed up at full speed.  One was Joseph Craig, or Jos� as
+the Spaniards called him, and my feeling of uneasiness returned as I
+noticed that his face, too, wore a strange and startled look.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Jos�, as I have said, was my father's servant; but we all regarded him
+more as a friend, and treated him as one of ourselves.  He was a
+well-built man of medium height, with good features and keen gray eyes.
+He spoke English and Spanish fluently, and could make himself
+understood in several Indian dialects.  He kept the accounts of the
+estate, and might easily have obtained a more lucrative situation in
+any counting-house in Callao.  He excelled, too, in outdoor sports, and
+had taught me to fence, to shoot, and to ride straight.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The second man I did not know.  He seemed to be an Indian of the
+mountains, and was of gigantic stature.  His dress was altogether
+different from that of the Spaniards, and in his cap he wore a plume of
+feathers.  His face was scarred by more than one sword-cut, his brows
+were lowering, and his massive jaw told of great animal strength.
+Jos�'s horse had galloped fast, but the one ridden by the stranger was
+flaked with foam.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Antonio would have opened the big gate without question: but I,
+thinking of Rosa, forbade him, saying to Jos� in English, "Does he mean
+harm to the girl?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+You see, my head was full of the one idea, and I could think of nothing
+else.  I imagined that Rosa had run away from some peril, and that this
+man with the savage face and cruel eyes had tracked her to our gate.
+So I put the question to Jos�, who looked at me wonderingly.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"The girl?" he repeated slowly; "what girl?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Rosa Montilla," I answered.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+We spoke in English; but at the mention of Rosa's name the mountaineer
+scowled savagely, and leaned forward as if to take part in the
+conversation.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"The man has come from the mountains with a message for your mother,"
+said Jos�; "I met him at the entrance to the park.  But if Rosa
+Montilla is here, the news is known already."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+His face was very pale, and he spoke haltingly, as if his words were
+burdensome, and there was a look in his eyes which I had never seen
+before.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I motioned to Antonio, and the two passed through.  What message did
+they bring?  What news could link dainty little Rosa with this wild
+outlaw of the hills?
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Jos� jumped to the ground and walked with me, laying a hand on my
+shoulder.  Until then I had no thought of the truth, but the touch of
+his fingers sent a shiver of fear through me, and I looked at his face
+in alarm.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"What is it, Jos�?" I asked; "what has happened?  Why did Rosa steal
+here alone and sob in my mother's arms as if her heart would break?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"The little maid has heard bad news," he answered quietly, "though how
+I do not know."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"And as she had no mother, she came to mine for comfort," I said.  "It
+was a happy thought: mother will make her forget her trouble."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Jos� stopped, and looked searchingly in my face.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Poor boy!" he said.  "You have no idea of the truth, and how can I
+tell you?  The little maid did not weep for her own sorrow, but for
+yours and your mother's."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+At that I understood without further words, though I was to learn more
+soon.  The reason of it I guessed, though not the matter; but I knew
+that somewhere my dear father lay dead&mdash;killed by order of the Spanish
+viceroy.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Jos� saw from my face that I knew, and there was sympathy in the very
+touch of his hand.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"It is true," he whispered.  "The Spaniards trapped him in the
+mountains, whither he had gone to meet the Indians.  They wished to
+rise against the government; but he knew it was madness just now, and
+thought to keep them quiet till his own plans were ready."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"And the Spaniards slew him?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Yes," replied Jos� simply.  "Here," pointing to the mountaineer, "is
+our witness."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"But how did Rosa hear of it? she was not in the mountains.  Ah, I
+forgot!  Her father stands high in the viceroy's favour.  And so my
+father is dead!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The thought unnerved me, and I could have cried aloud in my sorrow.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Hold up your head, boy!" exclaimed the harsh voice of the mountaineer.
+"Tears are for women and girls.  Years ago my father's head was cut
+off, but I did not cry.  I took my gun and went to the mountains," and
+he finished with a bitter laugh.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"But my mother!" I said.  "The news will break her heart."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"The world will not know it," he answered, and he spoke truly.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I am glad the little maid has told her," remarked Jos�, giving his
+horse and that of the stranger to a serving-man.  "Jack, do you go in
+and prepare her for our coming."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+A single glance showed that Rosa had indeed told her story.  She sat on
+a lounge, looking very miserable.  My mother rose and came toward me.
+Taking my hands, she clasped them in her own.  She was a very beautiful
+woman, famous for her beauty even among the ladies of Lima.  She was
+tall and slightly built, with black hair and glorious dark eyes that
+shone like stars.  I have heard that at one time she was called the
+"Lady of the Stars," and I am not surprised.  They shone now, but all
+gentleness had gone from them, and was replaced by a hard, fierce
+glitter which half frightened me.  Her cheeks were white, and her lips
+bloodless; but as far as could be seen, she had not shed a tear.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Still holding my hands, and looking into my face, she said, "You have
+heard the news, Juan?  You know that your father lies dead on the
+mountains, slain while carrying a message of peace to the fierce men
+who live there?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I bowed my head, but could utter no sound save the anguished cry of
+"Mother, mother!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Hush!" she exclaimed; "it is no time for tears now.  I shall weep
+later in my own room, but not before the world, Juan.  Our grief is our
+own, my son, not the country's.  And there is little Rosa, brave little
+Rosa, who came to bring me the news; she must go back.  Let Miguel
+bring round the carriage, and see that half a dozen of the men ride in
+attendance.  Don Felipe's daughter must have an escort befitting her
+father's rank."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I began to speak of the strange visitor outside; but Rosa was her first
+care, and she would see no one until Rosa had been attended to.  So I
+hurried Miguel, the coachman, and the men who were to ride on either
+side of the carriage, returning to the room only when all was ready.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Mother had wrapped Rosa up warmly, and now, kissing her, she said,
+"Good-bye, my child.  You were very good to think of me, and I shall
+not forget.  Tell your father the truth; he will not mind now."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Rosa kissed my mother in reply, and walked unsteadily to the coach.
+She was still sobbing, and the sight of her white face added to my
+misery.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Don't cry, Rosa," said I, as I helped her into the carriage and wished
+her good-bye, neither of us having any idea of the strange events which
+would happen before we met again.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+As soon as the carriage had gone, my mother directed that the stranger
+should be admitted, and he came in accompanied by Jos�.  I would have
+left the room, but my mother stopped me, saying,&mdash;
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"No, Juan; your place is here.  An hour ago you were but a thoughtless
+boy; now you must learn to be a man.&mdash;Se�or, you have brought news?
+You have come to announce the death of my husband; is it not so?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The mountaineer bowed almost to the ground.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"It is a sad story, se�ora, but it will not take long to tell.  The
+Spaniards pretended he was stirring up our people to revolt; they
+waited for him in the passes, and shot him down like a dog."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Did you see him fall?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The fellow's eyes flashed with savage rage.  "Had I been there," he
+cried, "not a soldier of them all would have returned to his quarters!
+But they shall yet pay for it, se�ora.  My people are mad to rise.
+Only say the word, and send the son of the dead man to ride at their
+head, and Lima shall be in flames to-morrow."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+My mother made a gesture of dissent.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Don Eduardo liked not cruelty," she exclaimed; "and it would be but a
+poor revenge to slay the innocent.  But Juan shall take his father's
+place, and work for his country's freedom.  When the time comes to
+strike he shall be ready."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Before the time comes he will have disappeared," cried the
+mountaineer, with a harsh laugh.  "Do you think Don Eduardo's son will
+be allowed to live?  Accidents, se�ora, are common in Peru!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"It is true," remarked Jos�; "Juan will never be out of danger."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"But the country is not ready for revolt, and only harm can come from a
+rising now.  Should the Indians leave their mountain homes, the trained
+soldiers will annihilate them."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"But Juan must be saved!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Yes," assented my mother; "we must save Juan to take his father's
+place."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+After this there was silence for a time.  Then Jos� spoke, "There is
+one way," said he slowly.  "He can find a refuge in Chili till San
+Martin is ready; but he must go at once."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+A spasm of fresh pain shot across my mother's face, but it disappeared
+instantly; even with this added grief she would not let people know how
+she suffered.  Only as her hand rested on mine I felt it tremble.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Let it be so, Jos�," she said simply.  "I leave it to you."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Then she thanked the mountaineer who had ridden so far to break the
+terrible news to her, and the two men went away, leaving us two
+together.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Mother," I said, "must I really leave you?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+For answer she clasped me in her arms and kissed my face passionately.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"But you will come back, my boy!" she cried; "you will come back.  Now
+that your father is no more, you are my only hope, the only joy of my
+life.  O Juan, Juan! it is hard to let you go; but Jos� is right&mdash;there
+is no other way.  I will be brave, dear, and wait patiently for your
+return.  Follow in your father's footsteps.  Do the right, and fear not
+whatever may happen; be brave and gentle, and filled with love for your
+country, even as he was.  Keep his memory green in your heart, and you
+cannot stray from the path of honour."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I will try, mother."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"And if&mdash;if we never meet again, my boy, I will try to be brave too."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+She wiped away the tears which veiled like a mist the brilliance of her
+starry eyes, and we sat quietly in the darkening room, while outside
+Jos� was making preparations for our immediate departure.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+At last he knocked at the door, and without a tremor in her voice she
+bade him enter.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"The horses are saddled, se�ora."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Yes; and your plan, what is it?" she asked.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"It is very simple, se�ora.  Juan and I will ride straight to Mr.
+Warren at Callao.  He may have a vessel bound for Valparaiso; if not,
+he will find us one for my master's sake.  Once at sea, we shall be out
+of danger.  General San Martin will give us welcome, and there are many
+Peruvians in his army."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Once my mother's wonderful nerve nearly failed her.  "You will take
+care of him, Jos�," she said brokenly.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I will guard him with my life, se�ora!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I know it, I am sure of it; and some day yon will bring him back to
+me.  God will reward you, Jos�.&mdash;Good-bye, Juan, my boy.  Oh how
+reluctant I am to let you go!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I will not dwell on the sadness of that parting.  The horses were
+waiting in the courtyard, and after the last fond embrace I mounted.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Good-bye, mother!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Farewell, my boy.  God keep you!" and as we moved away I saw her white
+handkerchief fluttering through the gloom.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+At the gate the Indian waited for us, and he followed a few paces in
+the rear.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I thought this strange, and asked Jos� about it.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"It may be well to have a friend to guard our backs," he replied.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+So in the gathering darkness I stole away from my home, with my heart
+sore for my father's death and my mother's suffering.  And it was the
+eve of my birthday&mdash;the eve of the day to which I had looked forward
+with such delight!
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Being so young, I did not really understand the peril that surrounded
+me; but my faith in Jos� was strong, and I felt confident that in
+taking me away he was acting for the best.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Our path through the park led us near the lake, and I glanced
+sorrowfully at its calm waters and fern-fringed border.  I would have
+liked to linger a moment at its margin, dwelling on past joys; but Jos�
+hurried me on, remarking there was no time to waste.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Only, as the great gates swung open, he let me stop, so that I might
+bid a silent adieu to the beautiful home where my happy days of
+childhood had been passed.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Keep a brave heart," said he kindly; "we shall be back some day.  And
+now for a word of advice.  Ride carefully and keep your eyes open.  I
+don't want to frighten you, but the sooner we're clear of Lima the
+better I shall be pleased."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+With that he put spurs to his horse, and with the clanging of the gate
+in our ears we rode off on the road to Callao, while the gigantic
+Indian followed about twenty paces behind.
+</P>
+
+<BR><BR><BR>
+
+<A NAME="chap02"></A>
+
+<H3 ALIGN="center">
+CHAPTER II.
+</H3>
+
+<H3 ALIGN="center">
+AN EXCITING VOYAGE.
+</H3>
+
+<P>
+It may be that Jos�'s fears on my account had exaggerated the danger,
+as we reached Callao without interruption, and dismounted outside Mr.
+Warren's villa.  Here the Indian took leave of us, but before going he
+unfastened a silver key from the chain round his neck, and pressed it
+into my hand.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"It may happen," said he, "that at some time or other you will need
+help.  That key and the name of Raymon Sorillo will obtain it for you
+from every patriot in the mountains of Peru.  For the present,
+farewell.  When you return from Chili we shall meet again."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Without waiting for my thanks he bade adieu to Jos� and then, spurring
+his horse into a gallop, he disappeared.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+From the man who opened the gate in answer to our summons we learned
+that my father's friend was at home, and leaving our horses, we went
+immediately into the house.  This English merchant had often been our
+guest, and it was soon abundantly evident that we had done right in
+trusting him.  He was a short, round-faced man, with a florid
+complexion, twinkling eyes, and sandy hair.  He was very restless and
+irritable, and had a queer habit of twiddling his thumbs backward and
+forward whenever his hands were unoccupied.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"How do, Joseph?" exclaimed he, jumping up.  "Come to take that berth I
+offered you?  No?  Well, well, what a fool a man can be if he tries!
+Why, bless me, this is young Jack Crawford!  Eight miles from home, and
+at this time of night too!  Anything the matter?  Get it out, Joseph,
+and don't waste time."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+While Joseph was explaining the circumstances, the choleric little man
+danced about the room, exclaiming at intervals, "Ted Crawford gone?
+Dear, dear!  Not a better fellow in South America!  I'd shoot 'em all
+or string 'em up!  The country's going to the dogs, and a man isn't
+safe in his own house!  Eh?  What?  Hurt the boy?  What's the boy to do
+with it?  They can't punish him if his father had been fifty times a
+rebel!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"That is so, sir," remarked Jos�; "but he might meet with an
+unfortunate accident, or vanish mysteriously, or something of that
+kind.  What's the use of making believe?  Those who have got rid of the
+father won't spare the son, should he happen to stand in their way."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Which he will," interrupted Mr. Warren.  "My poor friend was hand in
+glove with the Indians, and they'll rally round the boy."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"There are other things, too, which need not be gone into now,
+however," said Jos�; "but the long and the short of it is that Jack
+must be got out of the way at present."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"And his mother?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"She has sent him to you."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"But he can't be hidden here.  The rascally Dons will have him in the
+casemates before one can say 'Jack Robinson!'"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"We don't mean to stay here, sir," replied Jos�.  "Our idea is to go to
+Valparaiso, and we thought if you had a ship&mdash;"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"The very thing, Joseph," and the thumbs went backward and forward
+taster than ever.  "Maxwell has a schooner leaving in the morning.  You
+can go on board to-night if you choose, but you had better have some
+supper first."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+As it happened, both Jos� and I had been some time without food, so we
+were glad to have something to eat; after which Mr. Warren took us to
+the quay, where the schooner <I>Aguila</I> lay moored.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"There she is," he remarked; "let us go aboard.  Most likely we shall
+find Maxwell there.&mdash;Hi, you fellows, show a light!&mdash;Lazy dogs, aren't
+they?  Mind your foot there, and don't tumble into the harbour; you
+won't get to Valparaiso that way.&mdash;That you, Maxwell?  I have brought a
+couple of friends who are so charmed with your boat that they want to
+make a trip in her.  Where do you keep your cabin?  Let's go down
+there; we can't talk on deck."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Mr. Maxwell was another English merchant at Callao, and as soon as he
+heard what had happened, he readily agreed to give us a passage in the
+<I>Aguila</I>.  We must be prepared to rough it, he said.  The schooner had
+no accommodation for passengers, but she was a sound boat, and the
+Chilian skipper was a trustworthy sailor.  Then he sent to his
+warehouse for some extra provisions, and afterwards introduced us to
+the captain, whose name was Montevo.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+As the schooner was to sail at daylight, our friends remained with us,
+and, sitting in the dingy cabin, chatted with Jos� about the state of
+the country.  By listening to the talk I learned that General San
+Martin was a great soldier from Buenos Ayres, who, having overthrown
+the Spanish power in Chili, was collecting an army with which to drive
+the Spanish rulers from Peru.  At the same time another leader, General
+Bolivar, was freeing the northern provinces, and it was thought that
+the two generals, joining their forces, would sweep Peru from north to
+south.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"And a good thing, too!" exclaimed Mr. Warren.  "Perhaps we shall have
+a little peace then!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Pooh! stuff!" said his friend; "things will be worse than ever!  These
+people can't rule themselves.  They're like disorderly schoolboys, and
+need a firm master who knows how to use the birch.  I am all for a
+stern master."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"So am I," agreed Jos�, "if he's just, which the Spaniards aren't."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"That is so," cried Mr. Warren.  "What would our property be worth if
+it wasn't for the British frigate lying in the harbour?  Tell me that,
+Maxwell; tell me that, sir!  They'd confiscate the whole lot, and clap
+us into prison for being paupers," and the thumbs revolved like the
+sails of a windmill.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+So the talk continued until daybreak, when the skipper, knocking at the
+cabin door, informed us that the schooner was ready to sail; so we all
+went on deck, where the kindly merchants bade us good-bye, and hoped we
+should have a pleasant voyage.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Keep the youngster out of mischief, Joseph.  There's plenty of food
+for powder without using him," were Mr. Warren's last words as he
+stepped ashore, followed by his friend.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+It was the first time I had been on board a ship, and I knew absolutely
+nothing of what the sailors were doing; but presently the boat began to
+move, the merchants, waving their hands, shouted a last good-bye, and
+very quickly we passed to the outer harbour.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I have been in many dangers and suffered numerous hardships since then,
+some of which are narrated in this book, but I have never felt quite so
+wretched and miserable as on the morning of our departure from Callao.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Wishing to divert my thoughts, Jos� pointed out the beauties of the bay
+and the shore; but my gaze went far inland&mdash;to the lonely home where my
+mother sat with her grief, to the mighty cordillera where my father lay
+dead.  Time softened the pain, and brought back the pleasures of life,
+but just then it seemed as if I should never laugh or sing or be merry
+again.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The first day or two on the <I>Aguila</I> did not tend to make me more
+cheerful, though the skipper did what he could to make us comfortable.
+We slept in a dirty little box, which was really the mate's cabin, and
+had our meals, or at least Jos� had, at the captain's table.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+By degrees, however, my sickness wore off, and on the fourth morning I
+began to take an interest in things.  By this time the land was out of
+sight; for miles and miles the blue water lay around us&mdash;an
+interminable stretch.  There was not a sail to be seen, and the utter
+loneliness impressed me with a feeling of awe.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Jos� was as ignorant of seafaring matters as myself; but the captain
+said we were making a good voyage, and with that we were content.  A
+stiff breeze blew the schooner along merrily, the blue sky was flecked
+only by the softest white clouds, and the swish, swish of the water
+against the vessel's sides sounded pleasantly in our ears.  I began to
+think there were worse ways of earning a living than by going to sea.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+That same evening I turned in early, leaving Jos� on deck, but I was
+still awake when he entered the cabin.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"There's an ugly storm brewing," said he, kicking off his boots, "and I
+don't think the skipper much likes the prospect of it.  He has all
+hands at work taking in the sails and getting things ready generally.
+Rather a lucky thing for us that the <I>Aguila</I> is a stout boat.  Listen!
+That's the first blast!" as the schooner staggered and reeled.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Above us we heard the captain shouting orders, the answering cries of
+the sailors, and the groaning of the timbers, as if the ship were a
+living being stretched on a rack.  Slipping out of my bunk and dressing
+quickly, I held on to a bar to steady myself.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Let us go on deck before they batten down the hatches," said Jos�,
+putting on his boots again.  "I've no mind to stay in this hole.  If
+the ship sinks, we shall be drowned like rats in a trap."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+He climbed the steps, and I followed, shuddering at the picture his
+words had conjured up.  The scene was grand, but wild and awful in the
+extreme.  I hardly dared to watch the great waves thundering along as
+if seeking to devour our tiny craft.  Now the schooner hung poised for
+a moment on the edge of a mountainous wave; the next instant it seemed
+to be dashing headlong into a fathomless, black abyss.  The wind tore
+on with a fierce shriek, and we scudded before it under bare poles,
+flying for life.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Two men were at the wheel; the captain, lashed aft, was yelling out
+orders which no one could understand, or, understanding, obey.  The
+night, as yet, was not particularly dark, and I shivered at sight of
+the white, scared faces of the crew.  They could do nothing more; in
+the face of such a gale they were helpless as babies; those at the
+wheel kept the ship's head straight by great effort, but beyond that,
+everything was unavailing.  Our fate was in the hands of God; He alone
+could determine whether it should be life or death.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Once, above the fury of the storm, the howling of the wind, the
+straining of the timber, there rose an awful shriek; and though the
+tragedy was hidden from my sight, I knew it to be the cry of an unhappy
+sailor in his death-agony.  A huge wave, leaping like some ravenous
+animal to the deck, had caught him and was gone; while the spirit of
+the wind laughed in demoniacal glee as he was tossed from crest to
+crest, the sport of the cruel billows.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The captain had seen, but was powerless to help.  The schooner was but
+the plaything of the waves, while to launch a boat&mdash;ah, how the
+storm-fiends would have laughed at the attempt!  So leaving the hapless
+sailor to his fate, we drove on through a blinding wall of rain into
+the dark night, waiting for the end.  No sky was visible, nor the light
+of any star, but the great cloud walls stood up thick on every side,
+and it seemed as if the boat were plunging through a dark and dreary
+tunnel.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Close to me, where a lantern not yet douted [Transcriber's note:
+doused?] cast its fitful light, a man lay grovelling on the deck.  He
+was praying aloud in an agony of fear, but no sound could be heard from
+his moving lips.  Suddenly there came a crash as of a falling body, the
+light went out, and I saw the man no more.  How long the night lasted I
+cannot tell; to me it seemed an age, and no second of it was free from
+fear.  Whether we were driving north, south, east, or west no one knew,
+while the fury of the storm would have drowned the thunder of waves on
+a surf-beaten shore.  But the <I>Aguila</I> was an English boat, built by
+honest English workmen, and her planks held firmly together despite the
+raging storm.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+For long hours, as I have said, we were swallowed up in darkness,
+feeling ourselves in the presence of death; but the light broke through
+at last, a cold gray light, and cheerless withal, which exactly suited
+our unhappy condition.  The wind, too, as though satisfied with its
+night's work, sank to rest, while by degrees the tossing of the angry
+billows subsided into a peaceful ripple.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+We looked at each other and at the schooner.  One man had been washed
+overboard; another, struck by a falling spar, still lay insensible; the
+rest were weary and exhausted.  Thanks to the skipper's foresight, the
+<I>Aguila</I> had suffered less than we had expected, and he exclaimed
+cheerfully that the damage could soon be repaired.  But though our good
+ship remained sound, the storm had wrought a fearful calamity, which
+dazed the bravest, and blanched every face among us.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The skipper brought the news when he joined us at breakfast, and his
+lips could scarcely frame the words.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"The water-casks are stove in," he exclaimed, "and we have hardly a
+gallon of fresh water aboard!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Then we must run for the nearest port," said Jos�, trying to speak
+cheerily.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The captain spread out his hands dramatically.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"There is no port," he replied, in something of a hopeless tone, "and
+there is no wind.  The schooner lies like a log on the water."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+We went on deck, forgetting past dangers in the more terrifying one
+before us.  The captain had spoken truly: not a breath of air stirred,
+and the sea lay beneath us like a sheet of glass.  The dark clouds had
+rolled away, and though the sun was not visible, the thin haze between
+us and the sky was tinged blood-red.  It was such a sight as no man on
+board had seen, and the sailors gazed at it in awestruck silence.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Hour after hour through the livelong day the <I>Aguila</I> lay motionless,
+as if held by some invisible cable.  No ripple broke the glassy
+surface, no breath of wind fanned the idle sails, and the air we
+breathed was hot and stifling, as if proceeding from a furnace.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The men lounged about listlessly, unable to forget their distress even
+in sleep.  The captain scanned the horizon eagerly, looking in vain for
+the tiniest cloud that might promise a break-up of the hideous weather.
+Jos� and I lay under an awning, though this was no protection from the
+stifling atmosphere.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Every one hoped that evening would bring relief, that a breeze might
+spring up, or that we might have a downpour of rain.  Evening came, but
+the situation was unchanged, and a great fear entered our hearts.  How
+long could we live like this&mdash;how long before death would release us
+from our misery? for misery it was now in downright, cruel earnest.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Once Jos� rose and walked to the vessel's side, but, returning shortly,
+lay face downward on the deck.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I must shut out the sight of the sea," he said, "or I shall go mad.
+What an awful thing to perish of thirst with water everywhere around
+us!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+This was our second night of horror, but very different in its nature
+from the first.  Then, for long hours, we went in fear of the storm;
+now, we would have welcomed the most terrible tempest that ever blew,
+if only it brought us rain.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Very slowly the night crept by, and again we were confronted by the
+gray haze, with its curious blood-red tint.  We could not escape from
+the vessel, as our boats had been smashed in the hurricane; we could
+only wait for what might happen in this sea of the dead.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Rain or death, it is one or the other!" remarked Jos�, as, rising to
+our feet, we staggered across to the skipper.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Rain or death!  Which would come first, I wondered.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The captain could do nothing, though I must say he played his part like
+a man&mdash;encouraging the crew, foretelling a storm which should rise
+later in the day, and asserting that we were right in the track of
+ships.  We had only to hold on patiently, he said, and all would come
+right.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Jos� also spoke to the me cheerfully, trying to keep alive a glimmer of
+hope; but as the morning hours dragged wearily along, they were fain to
+give way to utter despair.  No ships could reach us, they said, while
+the calm lasted, and not the slightest sign of change could be seen.
+Our throats were parched, our lips cracked, our eyes bloodshot and
+staring.  One of the crew, a plump, chubby, round-faced man, began
+talking aloud in a rambling manner, and presently, with a scream of
+excitement, he sprang into the rigging.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Sail ho!" he cried, "sail ho!" and forgetting our weakness, we all
+jumped up to peer eagerly through the gauzy mist.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Where away?" exclaimed the captain.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The sailor laughed in glee.  "Oho!  Here she comes!" cried he; "here
+she comes!" and, tearing off his shirt, waved it frantically.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The action was so natural, the man seemed so much in earnest, that we
+hung over the schooner's side, anxiously scanning the horizon for our
+rescuer.  Again the fellow shouted, "Here she comes!" and then, with a
+frenzied laugh, flung himself into the glassy sea.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+A groan of despair burst from the crew, and for several seconds no one
+moved.  Then Jos�, crying, "Throw me a rope!" jumped overboard, and
+swam to the spot where the man had gone down.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Come back!" cried the skipper hoarsely; "you will be drowned!  The
+poor fellow has lost his senses."  But Jos�, unheeding the warning,
+clutched the man as he came to the surface a second time.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+We heard the demented laugh of the drowning sailor, and then the two
+disappeared&mdash;down, down into the depths together.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"He has thrown his life away for a madman!" said the captain, and his
+words brought me to my senses.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+With a prayer in my heart I leaped into the sea, hoping that I might
+yet save the brave fellow.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+A cry from the schooner told me that he had reappeared, and soon I saw
+him alone, and well-nigh exhausted.  A dozen strokes took me to his
+side, and then, half supporting him, I turned toward the vessel.  The
+men flung us a rope, and willing hands hauled first Jos� and then me
+aboard.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"A brave act," said the skipper gruffly, "but foolhardy!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Jos� smiled, and, still leaning on me, went below to the cabin, where,
+removing our wet things, we had a good rub down.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Thanks, my boy!" said Jos�, "but for your help I doubt if I could have
+got back.  The poor beggar nearly throttled me, down under!" and I
+noticed on his throat the marks of fingers that must have pressed him
+like a vice.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Do you feel it now?" I asked.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Only here," touching his throat; "but for that, I should be all the
+better for the dip.  Let us go on deck again; I am stifling here.  And
+keep up your spirits, Jack.  Don't give way the least bit, or it will
+be all over with you.  We are in a fearful plight, but help may yet
+come."  And I promised him solemnly that I would do my best.
+</P>
+
+<BR><BR><BR>
+
+<A NAME="chap03"></A>
+
+<H3 ALIGN="center">
+CHAPTER II.
+</H3>
+
+<H3 ALIGN="center">
+THE END OF THE "AGUILA."
+</H3>
+
+<P>
+The drowning of the crazy sailor had a bad effect on the rest of the
+crew, and it became evident that they had abandoned all hope.  They
+hung about so listlessly that even the captain could not rouse them,
+and indeed there was nothing they could do.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+This utter inability to help ourselves was the worst evil of the case.
+Even I, though only a boy, wanted to do something, no matter what, if
+it would help in the struggle for life; but I, like the rest, could
+only wait&mdash;wait with throat like a furnace, peeling lips, smarting
+eyes, and aching head, till death or rain put an end to the misery.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I tried not to think of it, tried to shut out the horrible end so close
+at hand; but in vain.  Jos� sat beside me, endeavouring to rouse me.
+It must rain, he said, or the wind would spring up, and we should meet
+with a ship; but in his heart I think he had no hope.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The day crawled on, afternoon came, and I fell into a troubled sleep.
+The pain of my throat directed my wandering thoughts perhaps, and
+conjured up horrible visions.  I was lashed to the wheel of the
+<I>Aguila</I>, and the schooner went drifting, drifting far away into an
+unknown sea.  All was still around me, though I was not alone.  Sailors
+walked the deck or huddled in the forecastle&mdash;sailors with skin of
+wrinkled parchment, with deep-set, burning yet unseeing eyes, with
+moving lips from which no sound came; and as we sailed away ever
+further and further into the darkness, the horror of it maddened me.  I
+struggled desperately to free myself, calling aloud to Jos� to save me.
+Then a hand was laid softly on my forehead, and a kind, familiar voice
+whispered,&mdash;
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Jack!  Jack!  Wake up.  You are dreaming!"  Opening my eyes I saw Jos�
+bending over me, his face stricken with fear.  My head burned, but my
+face and limbs were wet as if I had just come from the sea.  "Get up,"
+said Jos� sharply, "and walk about with me.  You must not dream again."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+It seems that in my sleep I had screamed aloud; but the sailors took no
+notice of me either then or afterwards.  They had troubles enough of
+their own, and were totally indifferent to those of others.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The red tinge had now gone from the haze, leaving it cold and gray; the
+sea was dull and lifeless, no ripple breaking the stillness of its
+surface.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Is there any hope, Jos�?" I asked in a whisper, and from his face,
+though not from his speech, learned there was none.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The captain had stored two bottles of liquor in the cabin for his own
+use.  These he shared amongst us; but it was fiery stuff, and even at
+the first increased rather than allayed our thirst.  Most of the crew
+were lying down now; but one had climbed to the roof of the forecastle,
+and stood there singing in a weak, quavering voice.  Jos� spoke to him
+soothingly; but he only laughed, and continued his weird song.  His
+face haunted me; even when darkness closed like a pall around us I
+could still see it.  He sang on and on in the gloom, and it appeared to
+me that he was wailing our death-chant.  Presently there was silence,
+followed by a slight shuffling sound as the man moved to another part
+of the deck; then the song began again, and was followed by a burst of
+uncanny laughter.  Suddenly it seemed as if the poor fellow realized
+his position, as he broke into a sob and called on God to save him.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Making our way to the other side of the vessel, we found him sitting
+disconsolately on a coil of rope, and did our best to cheer him.  The
+skipper joined us, but no other man stirred hand or foot.  Apparently
+their terrible suffering had overpowered all feeling of sympathy.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Don't give way," said Jos� brightly, laying a hand on his shoulder;
+"bear up, there's a good fellow.  Rain may fall at any moment now, and
+then we shall be saved."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Ah, se�or," cried the poor fellow huskily, "my throat is parched,
+parched; my head is like a burning coal! but I will be quiet now and
+brave&mdash;if I can."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"This is terrible," exclaimed the captain piteously, as after a time we
+turned away.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Hope must be our sheet-anchor," said Jos�.  "Once cut ourselves adrift
+from that, and we shall go to ruin headlong."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+He spoke bravely, but his words came from the lips only, and this we
+all knew.  Sitting down on a coil of rope, we waited for the night to
+pass, longing for yet dreading the appearance of another dawn.  It was
+dreadfully silent, except when some poor fellow broke the stillness
+with his groans and cries of anguish.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+It was, as nearly as I could judge, about one o'clock in the morning,
+when Jos� suddenly sprang to his feet with a cry of joy.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"What is it?" I asked; and he, clapping his hands, exclaimed,&mdash;
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Lightning!  See, there is another flash.&mdash;Get up, my hearties; the
+wind's rising.  There's a beautiful clap of thunder.  We shall have a
+fine storm presently!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+One by one the men staggered to their feet.  They heard the crash of
+the thunder, and a broad sheet of lightning showed them banks of cloud
+gathering thick and black overhead.  Directed by the captain and helped
+by Jos�, they spread every sail and awning that could be used,
+collected buckets and a spare cask, and awaited the rain eagerly and
+expectantly.  Would it come?  Fiery snakes played about the tops of the
+masts or leaped from sky to sea; the thunder pealed and pealed again
+through the air; the wind rose, the sails filled, the schooner moved
+through the water, but no rain fell.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I cannot tell you a tithe of the hopes and fears which passed through
+our hearts during the next half-hour.  Now we exulted in the certainty
+of relief; again we were thrown into the abyss of despair.  We stood
+looking at the darkness, hoping, praying that the life-giving rain
+might fall speedily upon our upturned faces.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Another terrific crash, and then&mdash;ah, how earnestly we gave thanks to
+God for His mercy&mdash;the raindrops came pattering to the deck, lightly at
+first, lightly and softly, like scouts sent forward to spy out the
+land, and afterwards the main body in a crowd beating fiercely, heavily
+upon us.  How we laughed as, making cups of our hands, we lapped the
+welcome water greedily!  What cries of delight ascended heavenward as
+we filled our spare cask and every vessel that would hold water!  The
+rain came down in a steady torrent, soaking us through; but we felt no
+discomfort, for it fed us with new life.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Presently the captain got some of the men to work, while the others ate
+the food which had lain all day untasted, and then, doubly refreshed,
+they relieved their comrades.  Jos� and I, too, ate sparingly of some
+food; but even this little, with the water, made new beings of us.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+As yet the wind was no more than a fair breeze, but by degrees it
+became boisterous, and the crew, still weak and now short of three men,
+could barely manage the schooner.  Jos� and I knew nothing of
+seamanship, but we bore a hand here and there, straining at this rope
+or that as we were bidden, and encouraging the crew to the best of our
+ability.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+As yet we gave little thought to the new danger that menaced us, being
+full of thanks for our escape from a horrible death; but the fury of
+the storm increased, the wind battered against the schooner in howling
+gusts, and presently the topgallant mast fell with a crash to the deck.
+Fortunately no one was hurt, and we quickly cut the wreckage clear; but
+misfortune followed misfortune, and at length, with white, scared face,
+the carpenter announced that water was fast rising in the hold.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Here, at least, Jos� and I were of service.  Taking our places at the
+pumps, we toiled with might and main to keep the water down.  Thus the
+remainder of the night passed with every one working at the pumps or
+assisting the captain to manage the vessel.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Morning brought no abatement of the storm, but the light enabled us to
+realize more clearly how near we were, a second time, to death.  The
+rain still poured down in torrents, the wind leaped at us with
+hurricane fury, the schooner tossed, a helpless wreck, in the midst of
+a mountainous sea.  The carpenter reported that, in spite of all our
+labours, the water was fast gaining on us.  The sailors now lost heart,
+and one of them left his post, saying sullenly they might as well drown
+first as last.  It was a dangerous example, but the skipper checked the
+mischief.  Running forward with loaded pistol, he shouted,&mdash;
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Go back to the pumps, you coward, or I will shoot you down like a dog!
+Call yourself a man?  Why, that youngster there is worth fifty of you!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The fellow returned to his work; but as the hours passed we became more
+and more certain that no amount of pumping would save the ship.  Even
+now she was but a floating wreck, and soon she would be engulfed by the
+raging sea.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+While Jos� and I were taking a rest, the captain told us that, even
+should the storm cease, the <I>Aguila</I> must go down in less than
+twenty-four hours, and that he knew not whether we were close to the
+shore or a hundred leagues from it.  Jos� received the news coolly.  He
+came of a race that does not believe in whimpering, and his only care
+was on my account.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I am sorry for your mother, Jack," said he, "and for you too.  We're
+in a fair hole, and I don't see any way of getting out; but for all
+that we will keep our heads cool.  Never go under without a fight for
+it&mdash;that's as good a motto as any other.  You heard the skipper say the
+schooner is bound to go down, and you know we have no boats&mdash;they
+wouldn't be any good if we had, while this storm lasts; but if the sea
+calms, a plank will keep you afloat a long time, and maybe a ship will
+come along handy.  Anyhow, make a fight for it, my boy.  Now we'll have
+a snack of something to eat, and then for another spell at the pumps."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+By this time a feeling of despair had seized the crew, and but for fear
+of the captain's pistol they would have stopped work in a body.
+However, he kept them at it, and towards noon the tempest ceased almost
+as suddenly as it had begun.  The gale dropped to a steady breeze, and
+the surface of the ocean became comparatively calm.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The change cheered us; we looked on it as a good omen, and toiled at
+the pumps even harder than before.  We could not lessen the quantity of
+water, but for a time we kept it from gaining, and a germ of hope crept
+back into our hearts.  Every hour now was likely to be in our favour,
+as the captain judged the wind was blowing us to some part of the
+coast, where we might either fall in with a vessel or effect a landing.
+Thus, between hope and fear, the afternoon passed, and then we saw that
+the captain's judgment was correct.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Straight before us, though far off as yet, appeared the dark line of
+coast with a barrier of mountains in the background, and in front a
+broad band of snow-white foam.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Would the schooner cover the distance?  If so, would she escape being
+dashed to pieces in the thundering surf?  These were the questions
+which agitated our minds as, impelled by the breeze, she drove through
+the water.  We of ourselves could do nothing save work at the pumps and
+wait for what might happen.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Afternoon merged into evening, and evening into night.  A few stars
+peeped forth in the sky, but were soon veiled by grayish clouds.  The
+broad white band along the shore was startlingly distinct, and still
+the issue was undecided.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The end came with such unexpected suddenness that the men hardly had
+time to cry out.  Jos� and I were resting at the moment, when the
+schooner lurched heavily, tried to right herself and failed, filled
+with water, and sank like a stone.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I often think of that shipwreck as a horrible dream.  Down, down I
+went, holding my breath till it seemed impossible to stay longer
+without opening my mouth and swallowing the salt water.  By an effort I
+restrained myself till my head shot above the surface and once more I
+was free to breathe.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The ship had disappeared entirely, and it was too dark to see such a
+small object as a man's head.  By great good fortune I managed to seize
+a floating spar, and, resting on it, called aloud for Jos�.  The only
+answer was the anguished cry of a drowning man across the waste of
+waters.  Twice again it came, and then all was silent, though in
+imagination I still could hear that anguished cry.  The sea rolled in
+long surges, carrying me forward without effort and at a great rate
+toward the clear white line.  Live or die, I could not help myself now,
+but was entirely at the mercy of the waves.  I thought of Jos�'s advice
+to make a fight for it, but there was nothing to be done.  Clinging to
+my spar, I was tossed from crest to depth like a ball bandied about by
+boys.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+And now my ears were filled with a great roaring as I approached nearer
+to the crested foam; then feeling that the end was very near, I prayed
+silently yet fervently that God would comfort my mother in this her new
+trial, and prepared myself to die.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+From the top of a high wave I went down into the depths, rose again to
+the crest of a second huge roller, and then was flung with the velocity
+of lightning into the midst of the great sea-horses with their snowy
+manes.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Of this part of the adventure I remember but little, only that for a
+moment I lay bruised and battered at the foot of a high rock.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Once more Jos�'s advice sounded in my ear, and loosing my spar, I
+clambered, dizzy and half blind, to the top.  The ramping white horses
+raced after as if to drag me back, but finding that impossible, retired
+sullenly to spring yet once again.  Shrieking and hissing, the great
+white monsters tore along, dashing in fury and breaking in impotence
+against the immovable rocks.  The wild, weird scene, too, frightened
+me; for I was but a boy, remember, who up to this had never met with a
+more stirring adventure, perhaps, than a tussle with a high-spirited
+pony.  I was worn out, too, by hard toil, faint from loss of blood,
+saddened by the loss of my faithful Jos�, and by the awful calamity
+that had overtaken the crew of the schooner.  Yet, in spite of all, so
+strong was the instinct to live, that, almost without thought, I
+clambered along the rocky ridge which jutted out from the mainland,
+while the baffled waves raced hungrily on either side of me, as if even
+now loath to abandon their expected prey.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+At length the line of white foam was at my back.  I found myself on a
+boulder-strewn beach, and for the time safe!  Although half dead with
+privation and exposure, I wandered some way along the beach, calling
+aloud on Jos� and the sailors, forgetful that the roar of the surf
+drowned my voice.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Presently I could go no further, the beach in that direction being
+walled in by a rocky cliff, steep and high, and but for a narrow
+fissure upon which I happily came, insurmountable.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I say happily, for at the summit of the cliff I fancied I saw the flash
+of a lantern.  A lantern meant human beings, who on hearing my story
+would search the shore, and find, perhaps, that others besides myself
+had escaped from the wreck.  With this idea in my head, I began to
+climb, going very steadily; for, as I have said, the track was little
+more than a fissure in the rock, and my head was far from clear.  I
+toiled on, cutting my hands and legs with the jagged rocks, but making
+some progress, till at length I had covered the greater part of the
+distance; then I could do no more.  A tiny crevice gave me foothold,
+and I was able to rest my arms on a wide ledge, but had no strength to
+draw myself up to it.  Twice I tried and failed; then fearful lest my
+strength should give way, I strove no more, but, raising my voice,
+shouted loudly for help.  Very mournful the cry sounded in the silent
+night, as I hung there utterly helpless on the face of the cliff.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Again and again I shouted with all my might, to be answered at first
+only by the roar of the surf below.  Presently, on the summit of the
+cliff, not far above me, a lantern flashed, then another, and another,
+and a voice hailed me through the darkness.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Help!" I cried, "help!" and my voice was full of despair, for my
+strength was fast ebbing.  I must soon lose my hold, and be dashed to
+pieces at the foot of the cliff.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The lanterns flashed to and fro above me.  Would they never come
+nearer?  What was that?  A big stone bounding and bouncing from rock to
+rock whizzed past my head, and disappeared in the gloom below.
+Collecting all my strength, I shouted again, fearing that it must be
+for the last time.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+But now&mdash;oh, how sincerely I gave thanks to God!&mdash;a light had come over
+the edge of the cliff, and though moving slowly, it certainly advanced
+in my direction.  Yes, I saw a man's outline.  In one hand he carried a
+lantern, in the other a noosed rope, and he felt his way carefully.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Help! help!" I exclaimed, faintly enough now; but he heard me, and I
+knew I was saved.  Putting the lantern on the ledge and grasping the
+collar of my coat, he got the noose round my body under the arms, and
+those above drew me up.
+</P>
+
+<A NAME="img-046"></A>
+<CENTER>
+<IMG CLASS="imgcenter" SRC="images/img-046.jpg" ALT="&quot;Help! help!&quot; I exclaimed, faintly; but he heard me, and I knew I was saved." BORDER="2" WIDTH="408" HEIGHT="600">
+<H4 CLASS="h4center" STYLE="width: 408px">
+&quot;Help! help!&quot; I exclaimed, faintly; but he heard me, <BR>
+and I knew I was saved.
+</H4>
+</CENTER>
+
+<P>
+The lanterns showed a group of men in uniform, who crowded around me as
+I reached the top; but being uncertain how long my strength would last,
+I cried,&mdash;
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"A wreck!  Search the beach.  There may have been others washed ashore."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Upon this there was much talking, and then two men carried me away,
+leaving their companions, as I hoped, to search for any chance
+survivors.
+</P>
+
+<BR><BR><BR>
+
+<A NAME="chap04"></A>
+
+<H3 ALIGN="center">
+CHAPTER IV.
+</H3>
+
+<H3 ALIGN="center">
+THE SILVER KEY.
+</H3>
+
+<P>
+It would be hard for me to tell just what happened during the next day
+or two.  I did not lose consciousness altogether, but my nerves were so
+shattered that I mixed up fact and fancy, and could hardly separate my
+dreams from events which actually took place.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+On the third or fourth day my senses became clearer I lay on a bed in a
+small cell-like apartment.  In the opposite corner was a mattress, with
+a blanket and rug rolled neatly at the head; above it, on the wall,
+hung a sword and various military articles, as if the room belonged to
+a soldier.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Presently, as I lay trying to recall things, the door was pushed open,
+and a man entered.  He was young; his face was frank and open, and he
+had fine dark eyes.  He was in undress uniform, and I judged, rightly
+as it turned out, that he was a Spanish officer.  Seeing me looking at
+him, he crossed to the bed, and exclaimed in the Spanish tongue, "Are
+you better this morning?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I nodded and smiled, but could not speak&mdash;my throat hurt me so.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"All right!" he cried gaily.  "Don't worry; I understand," and at that
+he went out, coming back presently with the military doctor.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Now I had no cause, then or afterwards, to love the Spaniards; but I
+hold it fair to give even an enemy his due, and it is only just to say
+that this young officer, Captain Santiago Mariano, treated me royally.
+In a sense I owed my life to him, and I have never forgotten his
+kindness.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+As my strength returned he often sat with me, talking of the wreck,
+from which I was apparently the only one rescued.  Three men, he said,
+had been washed ashore, but they were all dead.  Two were ordinary
+sailors, and from his description I easily recognized the third as
+Montevo, the skipper.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+There was a rumour, the young officer continued, that a man had been
+picked up by some Indians further along the coast; but no one really
+knew anything about it, and for his part he looked on it as an idle
+tale.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+There was small comfort in tills; yet, against my better judgment, I
+began to hope that Jos� had somehow escaped from the sea.  He was a
+strong man and a stout swimmer, while for dogged courage I have rarely
+met his equal.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+One morning Santiago came into my room&mdash;or rather his&mdash;with a troubled
+expression on his face.  I was able to walk by this time, and stood by
+the little window, watching the soldiers at exercise in the courtyard.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Crawford," said he abruptly, "have you any reason to be afraid of
+General Barejo?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Now, until that moment I had not given a thought to the fact that in
+escaping one danger I had tumbled headlong into another; but this
+question made me uneasy.  As far as safety went, I might as well have
+stayed at my mother's side in Lima as have blundered into a far-off
+fortress garrisoned by Spanish soldiers.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I ought not to speak of this," continued Santiago, "but the warning
+may help you.  Did you hear the guns last night?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Yes," said I, wondering.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"It was the salute to the general, who is inspecting the forts along
+the coast."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I have heard my father speak of General Barejo."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Well, after dinner last evening the commandant happened to speak of
+your shipwreck, and the general was greatly interested.  'A boy named
+Crawford?' said he thoughtfully; 'is he in the fort now?' and on
+hearing you were, told the commandant he would see you in the morning.
+This is he crossing the courtyard.  He is coming here, I believe."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I had only time to thank Santiago for his kindness when the general
+entered the room.  He was a short, spare man, with closely-cropped gray
+hair and a grizzled beard.  His face was tanned and wrinkled, but he
+held himself erect as a youth; and his profession was most pronounced.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The young captain saluted, and, at a sign from the general, left the
+room.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Barejo eyed me critically, and with a grim smile exclaimed, "By St.
+Philip, there's no need to ask.  You're the son of the Englishman
+Crawford, right enough."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Who was murdered by Spanish soldiers," said I, for his cool and
+somewhat contemptuous tone roused me to anger.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+He smiled at this outburst, and spread out his hands as if to say, "The
+boy's crazy;" but when he spoke, it was to ask why I had left Lima.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Because I had no wish to meet with my father's fate," I answered
+brusquely; and he laughed again.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Faith," he muttered, "the young cockerel ruffles his feathers early!"
+and then, again addressing me, he asked, "And where were you going?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"On a sea voyage, for the benefit of my health&mdash;and to be out of the
+way."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+To this he made no reply, but his brows puckered up as if he were in
+deep thought.  I stood by the window watching him, and wondering what
+would be the outcome of this visit.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+After a short time he said, slowly and deliberately, so that I might
+lose nothing of his speech, "Listen to me, young sir.  Though you are
+young, there are some things you can understand.  Your father tried,
+and tried hard, to wrest this country from its proper ruler, our
+honoured master, the King of Spain.  He failed; but others have taken
+his place, and though you are only a boy, they will endeavour to make
+use of you.  We shall crush the rebellion, and the leaders will lose
+their lives.  I am going to save you from their fate."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I thought this display of kindness rather strange, but made no remark.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"In this fortress," he continued, "you will be out of mischief, and
+here I intend you shall stay till the troubles are at an end."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"That sounds very much as if you mean to keep me a prisoner!" I
+exclaimed hotly.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Exactly," said he; then turning on his heel he walked out.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+From the window I watched him cross the courtyard and enter the
+commandant's quarters.  Ten minutes afterwards Santiago appeared with a
+file of soldiers.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Very sorry, my boy," said the young captain, coming into the room,
+"but a soldier must obey orders.  You are my prisoner."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I couldn't wish for a better jailer," said I, laughing.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I'm glad you take it like that, but unfortunately you won't be under
+my care.  Have you all your things?  This way, then."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+We marched very solemnly side by side along the corridor, the soldiers
+a few paces in the rear.  At the end stood a half-dressed Indian,
+holding open the door of a cell.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Oh, come," said I, looking in, "it's not so bad."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The cell was, indeed, almost a counterpart of Santiago's room, only the
+window was high up and heavily barred.  The furniture consisted of
+bedstead and rugs, a chair, small table, and one or two other articles.
+The floor was of earth, but quite dry; and altogether I was fairly
+satisfied with my new home.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"You'll have decent food and sufficient exercise," said the captain,
+who had entered with me; "but"&mdash;and here he lowered his voice to a
+whisper&mdash;"don't be foolish and try to escape.  Barejo's orders are
+strict, and though it may not appear so, you will be closely guarded."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Thanks for the hint," said I as he turned away.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The Indian shut the door, the bolts were shot, the footsteps of the
+soldiers grew fainter, and I was alone.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I shall not dwell long on my prison life.  I had ample food, and twice
+a day was allowed to wander unmolested about the courtyard.  The
+general had gone, and most of the officers, including Santiago, showed
+me many acts of kindness, which, though trifling in themselves, did
+much towards keeping me cheerful.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Several weeks passed without incident, and I began to get very tired of
+doing nothing.  There seemed to be little chance of escape, however.
+Every outlet was guarded by an armed sentry, and I was carefully
+watched.  One day I dragged my bedstead under the window, and making a
+ladder of the table and chair, climbed to the bars.  A single glance
+showed the folly of trying to escape that way without the aid of wings.
+That part of the fort stood on the brink of a frightful precipice which
+fell sheer away for hundreds of feet to the rocky coast.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Of course I had no weapon of any kind, but the Spaniards had allowed me
+to keep the silver key, which hung around my neck by a thin, stout cord.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I had almost forgotten the mountaineer's strange words, when a trifling
+incident brought them vividly to my mind.  One morning the Indian, as
+usual, brought in my breakfast, and was turning to go, when he suddenly
+stopped and stared at me with a look of intense surprise.  He was a
+short, stout, beardless man, with a bright brown complexion and rather
+intelligent features.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Well," I exclaimed, "what is it?  Have I altered much since yesterday?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The man bent one knee, and bowing low, exclaimed in great excitement,
+"It is the key!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Then I discovered that, my shirt collar being unfastened, the silver
+key had slipped outside, where it hung in full view.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Yes," said I, "it is the key right enough.  What of it?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+His eyes were flashing now, and the glow in them lit up his whole face.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"What is the master's name?" he whispered eagerly.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Now this was an awkward question for me to answer.  In the first place,
+the man might or might not be trustworthy; and in the second, the only
+name I knew was that of the bandit chief.  However, I concluded the
+venture was worth making, and said, "Men call the owner of the key
+Raymon Sorillo."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Ah!" exclaimed the Indian, with a sigh of satisfaction, "he is a great
+chief.  Hide the key, se�or, and wait.  A dog's kennel is no place for
+the friend of our chief."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+With that he went out, and the door clanged after him, while I stood
+lost in astonishment.  What did he mean?  Was it possible that he
+intended to help me?  Thrusting the mysterious key out of sight, I sat
+down to breakfast with what appetite I could muster.  All that day I
+was in a state of great excitement, though at exercise I took care to
+appear calm.  I waited with impatience for the evening meal, which, to
+my disgust, was brought by a strange soldier.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Hullo!" I exclaimed, "a change of jailers?  What has become of the
+other fellow?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"The dog of an Indian is ill," answered the man, who was evidently in a
+very bad temper, "and I have his work to do."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Placing the things on the table, he went out, slamming the door behind
+him, and shooting the bolts viciously.  The next morning he came again,
+and indeed for four days in succession performed the sick man's duties.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Now you may be sure I felt greatly interested in this sudden illness.
+It filled me with curiosity, and to a certain extent strengthened my
+hope that the Indian intended to help me to escape from the fort.  What
+his plans were, of course I could not conjecture.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+On the fifth night I undressed and lay down as usual.  It was quite
+dark in the cell, and the only sound that reached me was the periodical
+"All's well!" of the sentry stationed at the end of the corridor.  For
+a long time I lay puzzling over the strange situation, but at length
+dropped into a light sleep.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Suddenly I was awakened by a queer sensation, and sat up in bed.  It
+was too dark to see anything, but I felt that some one was creeping
+stealthily across the floor.  Presently I heard a faint sound, and knew
+that the object, whatever it might be, was approaching nearer.  At the
+side of the bed it stopped, and a muffled voice whispered, "Se�or, are
+you awake?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Yes," said I.  "Who's there?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"A friend of the silver key.  Dress quickly and come with me; the way
+is open."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Where is the sentry?" I asked.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Gagged and insensible," replied the voice.  "Quick, while there is yet
+time."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Perhaps it was rather venturesome thus to trust myself in the hands of
+an unknown man, but I slipped on my clothes, and keeping touch of his
+arm, accompanied him into the dimly-lighted corridor.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Turning to the left, we glided along close to the wall.  At the end of
+this passage the body of the sentry lay on the ground, while near at
+hand crouched an Indian, keeping watch.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+This man joined us, and my guide immediately led the way into an empty
+room, the door of which was open.  As soon as we were inside he closed
+it softly.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Keep close to me," he whispered, and then said something to an unseen
+person in a patois I did not understand.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Presently he stopped, and I could just distinguish the figure of a
+third man, who, grasping my hand, whispered, "The silver key has
+unlocked the door, se�or."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Before I could recover from my astonishment&mdash;for the man who spoke was
+the sick jailer&mdash;my guide let himself down through a trap-door, and
+called to me to follow.  I found myself on a flight of steep steps in a
+kind of shaft, very narrow, and so foul that breathing was difficult.
+At the bottom was a fair-sized chamber, with a lofty roof&mdash;at least I
+judged it so by the greater purity of the air&mdash;and here the guide
+stopped until his companion caught up with us.  The jailer, to my
+surprise, had remained in the fort, but there was no time for
+explanation.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The exit from the chamber was by means of an aperture so low that we
+had to lie flat on the ground, and so narrow that even I found it hard
+work to wriggle through.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Of all my adventures, this one impressed itself most strongly on my
+mind.  People are apt to smile when I speak of what one man called
+"crawling along a passage;" yet had the terrors of the journey been
+known beforehand, I think I could hardly have summoned the courage to
+face them.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+We went in Indian file, I being second, and my shoulders brushed the
+sides of what was apparently a stonework tube.  There was not a glimmer
+of light, and the foul air threatened suffocation at every yard.  I
+could breathe only with great difficulty, my throat seemed choked, I
+was bathed in perspiration, while loathsome creatures crawled or
+scampered over every part of me.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Before half the distance was covered&mdash;and I make the confession without
+shame&mdash;I was truly and horribly afraid.  However, there was no turning
+back&mdash;indeed there was no turning at all&mdash;so I crawled on, hoping and
+praying for light and air.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Presently I caught sight of a dull red glow like that from a burning
+torch, my breath came more easily, and at the end of another hundred
+yards the guide, rising to his feet, stood upright: we had arrived at
+the exit from the tunnel.  Clambering up, I once more found myself in
+the open air, and was instantly followed by the second Indian.  Two
+other men waited for us, and the four, with some difficulty, rearranged
+a huge boulder which effectually blocked the aperture.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Then the light from the torch was quenched, and I was hurried off in
+the darkness.  For an hour perhaps we travelled, but in what direction
+I had no idea.  At first we had the roar of the thundering sea in our
+ears, but presently that grew faint, until the sound was completely
+lost.  The route was rocky, and I should say dangerous; for the guide
+clutched my arm tightly, and from time to time whispered a warning.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+At last he stopped and whistled softly.  The signal was heard and
+answered, and very soon I became aware of several dusky figures,
+including both men and horses.  No time was wasted in talk; a man
+brought me a horse, and a loose cloak with a hood in which to muffle my
+head.  I mounted, the others sprang to their cumbrous saddles, and at a
+word from the guide we set off.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The route now lay over a desert of loose sand, in which the animals
+sank almost to their fetlocks; every puff of wind blew it around us in
+clouds, and but for the hood I think I must have been both blinded and
+choked.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I have not the faintest idea how the leader found his way, unless it
+was by the direction of the wind, as there were no stars, and it was
+impossible to see beyond a few yards.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Hour after hour passed; dawn broke cold and gray.  The choking sand was
+left behind, and we approached a narrow valley shut in by two gigantic
+ranges of hills.  Here a voice hailed us from the rocks, the guide
+answered the challenge, and the whole party passed through the defile
+to the valley beyond.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+It was now light enough to observe a number of Indian huts dotted about
+on both slopes; and the horsemen who had formed my escort quickly
+dispersed, leaving me with the guide.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"We are home," said he, "and the dogs have lost their prey."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Dismounting and leading the horses, we approached a hut set somewhat
+apart from the rest.  An Indian boy standing at the entrance took our
+animals away while we entered the hut.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Will you eat, se�or, or sleep?" asked my rescuer.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Sleep," said I, "as soon as you have answered a question or two."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I cannot repeat exactly what the man told me, as his Spanish was none
+of the best, and he mixed it up with a patois which I only half
+understood.  However, the outline of the story was plain enough, and
+will take but little telling.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+My late jailer belonged to the Order of the Silver Key, a powerful
+Indian society, acting under the leadership of Raymon Sorillo.  He had
+been placed in the fort both as a spy on the garrison and to assist
+comrades if at any time they endeavoured to capture the stronghold by
+way of the secret passage.  Only the commandant and his chief officer
+were supposed to know of its existence, but a strange accident had
+revealed it to the Indians some years previously.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The jailer, of course, could have set me free, but in that case he must
+have joined in my flight.  The plan he adopted was to communicate with
+his friends, and then, by feigning illness, to divert suspicion from
+himself.  As soon as we descended the steps, he replaced the trap-door,
+removed all signs of disturbance, and crept cautiously back to his room.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+When the Indian had finished his explanation, I asked him to what place
+he had brought me.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"The Hidden Valley," he replied, "where no Spaniard has ever set foot.
+Here you are quite safe, for all the armies of Peru could not tear you
+from this spot."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Does Sorillo ever come here?" I asked.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Rarely; but his messengers come and go at their pleasure."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"That is good news," I remarked, thinking of my mother.  "I shall be
+able to get a message through to Lima.  And now, if you please, I will
+go to sleep."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+He spread a rug on the earth floor, covered me with another, and in a
+few minutes I was fast asleep, forgetful even of the dismal tunnel and
+its horrible associations.
+</P>
+
+<BR><BR><BR>
+
+<A NAME="chap05"></A>
+
+<H3 ALIGN="center">
+CHAPTER V.
+</H3>
+
+<H3 ALIGN="center">
+IN THE HIDDEN VALLEY.
+</H3>
+
+<P>
+Perhaps my Indian host overstated the case, but he could not have been
+far wrong in saying that no stranger had ever succeeded in finding the
+Hidden Valley.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Let me describe the coast of Peru, and then you may be able to form
+some idea of the district between the Spanish fortress and my new home.
+The coast is a sandy desert studded with hills, and having in the
+background stupendous ranges of towering mountains.  From north to
+south the desert is cut at intervals by streams, which in the rainy
+season are converted into roaring rivers.  Little villages dot the
+banks of these streams, and here and there are patches of cultivated
+land.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+From one river to another the country is for the most part a dreary
+desert of sand, where rain never falls nor vegetation grows&mdash;a dead
+land, where the song of a bird is a thing unknown.  Sometimes after a
+sandstorm a cluster of dry bones may be seen&mdash;the sole remains of lost
+travellers and their animals.  At times even the most experienced
+guides lose the track, and then they are seen no more.  Over such a
+desert I had ridden from the fort, and the Indians assured me that,
+even in broad daylight, I could not go back safely without a guide.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+As for the valley itself, it was comparatively nothing but a slit in
+the mass of mountains.  A river ran through it, and the water was used
+by the Indians to irrigate the surrounding land.  Their live stock
+consisted chiefly of oxen and horses, and the principal vegetables
+cultivated were maize and coca.  You may not know that this coca is a
+plant something like the vine, and it grows to a height of six or eight
+feet.  The leaves are very carefully gathered one by one.  They are
+bitter to the taste, however, and as a rule strangers do not take
+kindly to coca.  The Indian is never without it.  It is the first thing
+he puts into his mouth in the morning, and the last thing that he takes
+out at night.  He carries a supply in a leathern pouch hung round his
+neck, and with this and a handful of roasted maize he will go a long
+day's journey.  I had never chewed coca before, but soon got into the
+habit of doing so, much to the delight of my new friends.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+My stay in the Hidden Valley, although lasting nearly two years, had
+little of interest in it.  The Indians treated me with every respect.
+I was lodged in the best house, and was given the best fare the valley
+produced.  Within the valley I was master, but I was not allowed to
+join any of their expeditions, and without their help it was
+impossible, as I have explained, to get away.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Their advice to stay quietly in my hiding-place was indeed the best
+they could give.  I was quite safe, the Spanish soldiers in the fort
+being unable to follow me, and indeed, as we gathered from the spy,
+quite at a loss to account for my escape.  Away from the valley, too, I
+should be utterly helpless.  I could not return to Lima, and without
+money there was little chance of making my way into Chili.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The two things that troubled me most were Jos�'s fate and my mother's
+unhappiness.  At first I had ventured to hope that my friend still
+lived; but as the weeks and months passed without any tidings, I began
+to look upon him as dead.  The Indians thought it certain I should
+never see him again.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+As to my mother, she would be in no particular uneasiness until the
+time came for the return of the <I>Aguila</I>; but I dreaded what would
+happen when Mr. Maxwell had to confess the schooner was overdue, and
+that nothing had been heard of her.  Many miserable hours I spent
+wandering about the valley, and thinking how my mother would watch and
+wait, hoping against hope for some tidings of the missing ship.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+One night&mdash;it was in the December of 1819&mdash;I had gone to bed early,
+when an unusual commotion in the valley caused me to get up.  My Indian
+host had already gone out, so, putting on my things, I followed.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Naturally my first thought was of the Spaniards; but the natives,
+though flocking towards the entrance to the valley, did not appear
+alarmed.  Several of them carried torches, and a strange picture was
+revealed by the lurid flames.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+On the ground lay a horse so weak and exhausted that it could barely
+struggle for breath.  Close by, supported in the arms of two Indians,
+was the rider, a short, rather stout man of brown complexion.  His eyes
+were glazed as if in death.  Blood gushed from his ears and nostrils,
+his head hung limply down: it was hard to believe that he lived.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The natives gabbled to each other, and I heard the words frequently
+repeated, "Sorillo's messenger!"  Then an old, old woman&mdash;the <I>mother</I>
+of the village&mdash;tottered feebly down the path.  In one hand she carried
+a small pitcher, and in the other a funnel, whose slender stem they
+inserted between the man's teeth.  In this way a little liquid was
+forced into his mouth, and presently his bared breast heaved
+slightly&mdash;so slightly that the motion was almost imperceptible.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+However, the old woman appeared satisfied, and at a sign from her the
+stricken man was carried slowly up the path.  One native attended to
+the horse, and the rest returned to their huts, talking excitedly of
+what had happened.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Is that a messenger from Raymon Sorillo, Quilca?" I asked my host.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Yes," said he, "and he has had a very narrow escape.  He has been
+caught in a sandstorm.  Perhaps he lost the track.  Perhaps the
+soldiers gave chase, and he went further round to baffle them.  Who
+knows?  But we shall hear to-morrow."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Then he is likely to recover?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Yes; the medicine saved him.  Didn't you see his chest move?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Yes," I replied, thinking that but a small thing to go on.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"That showed the medicine was in time," returned Quilca.  "It has begun
+its work, and all will be well."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Quilca spoke so confidently that, had I been the patient, I should have
+started on the road to recovery at once.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Will he stay here long?" I asked.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Who knows?" replied Quilca.  "The chief gives orders; the servants
+obey."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"But he will return at some time?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"It is likely."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"And will he take a message to my mother, do you think?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Oh yes," said the Indian; "I had forgotten.  Besides"&mdash;and he touched
+the cord supporting the silver key&mdash;"he is your servant, as I am."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+For three days the messenger was too weak to explain his errand; but
+the medicine worked wonders, and at the end of a week he sent for
+Quilca and the other leading men of the tribe.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+What orders he brought I did not learn; only my host told me that the
+rising to which they looked forward had been put off.  The Chilians
+were not ready, and could not be in Peru for at least another six
+months.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Quilca was dreadfully disappointed; but the chief had spoken, and his
+word was law.  Indeed, it was most extraordinary to see with what
+reverence his commands were treated.  Had it been his pleasure, I am
+sure his followers would have willingly gone to certain death.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+On the day following this I visited the messenger, who, on seeing the
+silver key, bowed low before me.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"What are my lord's commands?" asked he humbly.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"They are very simple," I replied.  "In a short time you are returning
+to your chief.  Say to him that Juan Crawford is safe in the Hidden
+Valley, and ask him to tell Se�ora Maria Dolores Crawford at Lima so.
+Can you remember that?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The blood mounted into the man's face as he said, "I will remember."
+Then he added in quick, eager tones, "Are you the son of Don Eduardo?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"He was my father."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+At that the man bent again and kissed my hand, saying,&mdash;
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Se�or, he was our best friend.  He loved our people, and when he was
+killed there was much weeping in the villages of the Indians."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"He gave his life for you," said I slowly.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"As we will give ours for his son," answered the man; and no one
+hearing him could have doubted the sincerity of his words.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+At the end of a fortnight he was strong enough to travel, and his last
+words as he struck into the narrow pass were, "I shall not forget,
+se�or."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+After his departure I felt much easier.  True, there was a terrible
+journey before him, which hardly one man in a thousand could hope to
+accomplish successfully; but he was a daring and plucky rider, used
+alike to desert and mountain.  Then, too, any Indian on the route would
+give him food and shelter, and warn him of any lurking soldiers.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+He would relate my story to Raymon Sorillo, and I knew that the
+gigantic chief would carry the news to my mother.  I no longer fretted
+at being shut up in the valley, but passed my time merrily with the
+boys and younger men of the tribe, learning their patois, riding, and
+practising shooting with the musket, and with bow and arrow.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+On my fifteenth birthday Quilca organized some sports, and though not
+gaining a first prize in any event, I performed so creditably that the
+Indians were delighted with my prowess.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"The young chief will make a warrior," said they, and I felt proud of
+their praise.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Let me try to give you a picture of myself at that time.  I was tall
+for my age, standing five feet five inches in height.  I had curly dark
+hair, cut rather short, and brown eyes.  My face was tanned through
+exposure to the weather and regular exercise had made my muscles hard
+as iron.  Like my companions, I wore a short woollen jacket, dark in
+colour, and breeches open at the knees, and caught up with strips of
+coloured cotton.  My cap was of wool gorgeously embroidered; dark
+woollen stockings without feet covered my legs, and in place of boots I
+had a pair of goatskin sandals.  Thrown over my left shoulder was a
+small poncho, which dangled like the cloak worn by some of our cavalry
+soldiers.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Some time during the month of April Sorillo's messenger returned,
+bringing me two letters&mdash;one from my mother, the other from the chief.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I need not say how eagerly I opened the first.  It was very long,
+consisting of several closely-written pages, but it did not contain a
+word too much.  I read it over and over again, until I could almost say
+it by heart.  No word had reached Lima of the wreck of the <I>Aguila</I>;
+but the British merchants, though bidding my mother be of good cheer,
+had put the schooner down for lost.  My message had shown their fears
+to be well grounded, but at the same time it had carried joy and
+thankfulness to my mother's breast.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I grieve for poor Jos�," she wrote, "but I thank God every hour for
+your safety."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The letter from Sorillo was brief.  After saying how glad he was to get
+my message, he went on,&mdash;
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"For the present, stay in the Hidden Valley; there is no safer place in
+Peru.  The fruit ripens slowly, and even yet is not ready for plucking.
+San Martin has not left Valparaiso, and little beyond skirmishing will
+be done this year."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Apparently, however, he had sent definite orders to the tribe, as from
+this date I noticed a great difference in our hitherto peaceful abode.
+Every man went armed day and night, scouts were posted on the
+mountains, and swift riders scoured the desert for miles.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Once, too, a band of horsemen, twenty strong, led by Quilca, left the
+valley at night.  I could not learn their business, because Quilca said
+they were acting under the secret orders of the great chief.  They were
+absent three days, and when, in the gray dawn of the fourth morning,
+they rode back up the valley, three were missing.  The leader had a
+bloodstained bandage round his head, and several men bore signs of a
+fierce conflict.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"You are hurt?" said I, as Quilca dismounted.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"It is nothing," replied he carelessly.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"And three of your followers have not returned!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"It cost six lives to kill them," he answered, with fierce
+satisfaction, passing into the hut.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+This expedition was followed by others, and from the talk in the valley
+I gathered that Sorillo had started the Indians on the war-trail.
+Already the Spaniards were safe only in large numbers, for on every
+weak and isolated detachment the fierce mountaineers swept down like
+hawks on their prey.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Now and again they were beaten off; but this did not happen often,
+because they knew the number of their enemy almost to a man, and had
+learned the most effective method of attack.  Generally speaking, the
+little body of Spanish soldiers had no chance whatever, either of
+flight or of victory.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+From time to time strange and startling rumours reached us.  In
+September we heard that the Chilian army had landed on the coast, and
+soon afterwards that the Englishman Cochrane had swept the Spanish
+fleet from the seas.  Jos� had often spoken of this daring sailor, who,
+after performing many glorious deeds in the British navy, had taken
+command of the Chilian fleet, and had done much to make Chili
+independent of Spain.  Now, with his ships and sailors, he was helping
+to do the same for Peru.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+On hearing these things I became impatient, not wishing to remain
+cooped up in the valley while the Liberating Army was marching on Lima.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+However, my deliverance, though slow in coming, came at length, but
+before that time I had a most startling surprise.  One morning, in the
+last week of January 1821, I had gone out very early, half expecting to
+see Quilca returning from one of his excursions.  Most of the Indians
+were astir, when suddenly a man came running from the mouth of the pass.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Here they are!" he cried; "here they are!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+We pushed down quickly to meet them, I in the very front.  Quilca
+appeared first, riding slowly, as if his horse were tired out.  His
+men, lolling on their animals, followed, some of them with closed eyes
+and half asleep.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Presently I caught sight of Sorillo's messenger, nearly at the end of
+the line; and then I opened my eyes wide, thinking they had played me
+false.  Was I awake, or was I dreaming?  Was I&mdash;
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Jack!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+That settled it!  The Indians stared in astonishment, as with a
+startled cry I ran past them to where in the rear a man had jumped from
+his horse to the ground.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Jos�!" I cried, "Jos�!" and for the life of me could say no more, but
+stood staring at him as if he had been some strange, unnatural animal.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Had I the skill of an artist, I should love to draw his face as he
+looked into mine.  It was strong and firm and purposeful, but the gray
+eyes softened into almost womanly tenderness.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Why, Jack," said he, shifting the reins and laying a hand on my
+shoulder, "you're quite a man!  Your mother would be proud of you!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Have you seen her?" I asked.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Yes; all's well at home.  But we'll talk of that later on.  So you've
+turned Indian, eh?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"It's better than living in a cell!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"So it is; and you didn't go down in the ship, after all?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"No; but I must tell you the story when you've had something to eat.
+Give your horse to this youngster, and now come on to Quilca's hut; you
+must be tired."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I was," replied he, "but the sight of you woke me up.  I wondered if
+you'd be waiting to see the braves come home.  That Quilca of yours is
+a born soldier.  He'd make a good general if they didn't train him!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+He rattled on, and I listened, glad just to hear the sound of his
+voice, without reference to what he said.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Quilca bade us welcome to the hut, and his womenfolk brought in the
+food and drink they had prepared.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Jos�, as I have said, knew the Indian patois, which during the meal, he
+used for the benefit of our host, whose Spanish was rather halting.  He
+talked of the war, and told how the Chilians had landed, and how the
+Royalists were broken up and in full retreat.  The campaign, he said,
+was as good as over, and San Martin could be President of Peru any day
+he chose.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+At that I was much astonished, for knowing the Spanish leaders, I had
+expected them to fight to the death; but it was pleasing news, all the
+same, and I began to speculate on how soon we should be in Lima.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+After breakfast Jos� had a long nap, and then I took him for a stroll
+in the valley, where we could talk without interruption.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I was anxious to hear about my mother, but first I told my own
+story&mdash;the rescue by the Spanish soldiers, the coming of General
+Barejo, and the power of the silver key, as also the escape by the
+underground passage, just as I have related it here.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Barejo's a dangerous man," remarked Jos� thoughtfully.  "He'll spend
+the last drop of blood in his body to keep this country for Spain.
+He's Loyalist and Royalist to the core.  It's a pity, too, because he
+is fighting for a lost cause."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"The more honour to him!" I answered warmly.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Just so," exclaimed Jos�, with a queer smile; "but, all the same, he
+makes things more difficult for us."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Well, put him on one side now.  Tell me your own adventures, and where
+you were when my message reached Lima."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"On the way there.  When the schooner foundered, I reckoned it was all
+over.  I went down to a great depth, but, as luck would have it, came
+up just clear of a broken mast.  One of the sailors was holding to it,
+and I joined him, though without any hope of being saved.  You know I'm
+pretty strong, but I was helpless in that wild sea.  The waves just
+flung me about anyhow.  The other chap lasted an hour or two, when down
+he went with a scream, and I heard no more of him.  But I needn't dwell
+on the horrors of that night; you had a strong taste of them yourself.
+About daybreak I was flung like a spent ball on to a sandy beach.  I
+had just strength to crawl a few yards further up, and then collapsed.
+It seems some Indians carried me away, and nursed me back to health,
+but for weeks I was wild as a loon.  They searched the coast, but found
+nothing, and I concluded you were at the bottom of the sea.  Then I got
+a passage to Pisco in a coasting brig, and from there made my way
+overland to Callao."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Where you heard I was alive?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Yes; I hardly know whether I stood on my head or my heels when I was
+told.  It was old Mr. Warren who informed me.  I went to him because I
+dared not go to your mother.  I was afraid that&mdash;"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"All right; I understand."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"So I went to Warren, and he began a long yarn; but as soon as he said
+you were alive, I was off like a shot to Lima."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Then he talked of my mother, repeating the messages she had given him,
+and I could have listened for hours.  As it was, I plied him with
+questions, asking this and that&mdash;if my pony was well; had he seen Rosa
+Montilla; was my mother less sad; and a hundred other things, many of
+them trivial enough, yet full of interest to me.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+At the end I asked how he had found his way to the Hidden Valley.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Oh!" replied he with a jolly laugh, "that was simple.  I hunted up
+your black-browed bandit, who passed me on to one of his band.  How he
+found the way I can't tell you, but he brought me along all right."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"And now what are we going to do?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Well, that depends.  If the Spaniards give in, we can just go quietly
+back home."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"And if they don't?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Well, in that case&mdash;"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"We must join General San Martin!" I exclaimed.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I suppose so," he said, half reluctantly.  "You're only a boy, but
+there are many youngsters of your age with the army, and you've a big
+stake in the country.  But we can afford to let that matter stand for a
+day or two longer."
+</P>
+
+<BR><BR><BR>
+
+<A NAME="chap06"></A>
+
+<H3 ALIGN="center">
+CHAPTER VI.
+</H3>
+
+<H3 ALIGN="center">
+WE LEAVE THE HIDDEN VALLEY
+</H3>
+
+<P>
+Now, before proceeding with my story, it will be well to mention here one
+piece of information which Jos�, not caring, perhaps, to add to my
+troubles, did not give me.  Indeed, very little was said about it at any
+time, for reasons which will be clear to any one who makes himself
+acquainted with this narrative.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+On the very morning after my flight from Lima, a servant of the
+government paid my mother a visit of official importance.  He brought
+with him a notable document full of curious legal phrases, which, put in
+simple language, meant that all my father's vast estates had been
+confiscated and given over to that loyal and worthy Spaniard Don Felipe
+Montilla.  As an act of mercy, my mother was permitted to retain the
+house and grounds at Lima during her lifetime.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+In presenting this famous letter, the messenger was, of course, only
+doing his duty, but it is certain that in some way he failed in the
+respect due to a noble lady.  He may have been one of those mean-spirited
+people who delight in trampling on the fallen.  There are, strange to
+say, many such in the world.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+My mother never alluded to the incident, which was related to me by Tomas
+Peraza, an old and faithful servant, next in importance to Jos� himself.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"The man had been with my lady nearly an hour," said he, in describing
+the event, "when her bell rang, and I went into the room.  She stood in
+the centre of the apartment, her cheeks very red, and her eyes flashing
+like summer stars.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"'Peraza,' she exclaimed, 'our house has fallen very low, but even so its
+members brook insolence from no man.  Bid my servants bring stout sticks
+and chastise this rude fellow back to the place from which he came!'
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"You may be sure that I lost no time in obeying.  The fellow drew his
+sword even in the presence of a lady; but it was knocked from his grasp,
+and we drove him from the grounds with blows and buffets.  It was a
+strange spectacle, and the people came flocking to us in crowds.  At
+first they would have interfered, but on hearing me cry, 'This for
+insulting the Donna Maria Crawford!' they desisted.  And in this way we
+pursued him right to the Government House, where he flung himself upon
+the protection of the soldiers."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+It was a harsh measure, perhaps; but then no man should be wanting in
+respect to a woman, and the fellow had but himself to blame.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Jos�, as I have said, withheld the news, or I should have gone at all
+risks to Lima.  As it was, I stayed contentedly in the valley, waiting
+until the Indians received the signal to move.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+From that time we heard rumours of hard fighting in various parts of the
+country, and about the middle of March 1821 a messenger arrived from
+Raymon Sorillo.  He brought the order for thirty men to march to Pisco,
+on the sea-coast, where a small patriot detachment had landed under the
+command of Colonel Miller.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"A countryman of ours, Jack," remarked Jos�, "and, from what I hear, one
+of the finest fellows in South America.  The patriots think almost as
+much of him as they do of the famous Lord Cochrane."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"What is he like?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I haven't seen him; but he is quite young&mdash;not twenty-four yet&mdash;though
+he has been soldiering for the last eight years.  He served under
+Wellington in Spain, fought all through the Chilian War, was Cochrane's
+right-hand man at the capture of Valdivia, and now he has come to help
+us.  He has been shipwrecked, taken prisoner, wounded times out of
+number, blown up by a powder explosion&mdash;after which he was confined for
+six weeks in a dark room and fed through a plaster mask&mdash;and nearly
+killed by fever.  I should say he has crowded as much excitement into his
+life as any man in the world."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"He seems to be a lively customer!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"He is," laughed Jos�; "and nothing will ever kill him, in my opinion!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Don't you think we might join him?" I asked, my blood being fired by
+Jos�'s description.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Well," said my companion, after a pause, "that's what I was about to
+suggest.  You must throw in somewhere, and I'm not over anxious for
+Sorillo to get hold of you.  He's a cruel fellow, though kind enough to
+us, and all the cut-throats in the country are likely to flock to him.
+I'm sorry for the Spaniards who fall into his hands!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Quilca was rather opposed to our plans, but finding us determined, he at
+last agreed that we should accompany him on the next expedition.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Day had but just broken when we rode from the valley and I turned to take
+a farewell glance at the place which had been my home so long.  I had not
+been altogether unhappy there, yet I was glad to go into the world again,
+to take the first step on the road to Lima and my mother.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The march to Pisco passed without incident.  We suffered horribly, it is
+true, from thirst, and from choking, blinding sandstorms; but there were
+no Spaniards in that desolate district to bar our way.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+A few hours' march from the town we fell in with some Indian scouts, and
+learned from them that the Patriots lay encamped in the Chincha Baja, a
+beautiful valley.  Our joy at these tidings was, however, soon dashed by
+the report that they were in a deplorable condition&mdash;suffering from fever
+and ague, and unable to move.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The gloomy picture was not overdrawn.  The valley was a hospital, but
+almost destitute of doctors and medicine.  The sentries, selected from
+the strongest of the troops, could barely stand, staggering even under
+the weight of their muskets.  Privates and officers alike were prostrate,
+and a score of strong men could have killed them all without effort.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+As it chanced, the enemy, stationed in an adjoining valley, though
+suffering less severely, were in no condition to make an attack, and the
+two parties could do no more than idly watch each other.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Ordering his men to dismount, Quilca went to find an officer, and soon
+returned with the startling intelligence that the colonel himself lay
+dangerously ill in one of the huts.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Not an encouraging start!" I remarked.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"A bad beginning often makes a good ending," answered Jos� cheerfully.
+"Let us go to see him."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The doctor, a Spaniard, was attending his patient when we entered the
+hut, and he beckoned us toward the bed.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I could not repress a start at the sight which met our eyes.  The colonel
+was turning restlessly but feebly from side to side; his eyes were
+unnaturally bright; his cheek bones stood out sharp and prominent.  He
+mumbled to himself in short snatches, but so faintly that only a word
+here and there reached us.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Once he smiled pleasantly, saying, "Yes, I see the steeple!  Dear old
+Wingham!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I did not at that time understand the allusion, but afterwards it became
+plain that he referred to his home, the home of his childhood, a place
+called Wingham, in Kent.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Do you know," said Jos� sharply, turning to the doctor, "that your
+patient is dying?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Perfectly; but what can I do?" replied he.  "He is suffering from the
+tertian ague; the valley is permeated with it."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"We must get him out of it," said Jos�, with decision.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"But where will you take him? the town is as bad."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"On shipboard, and give him a sea-breeze."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"The Chilian squadron is absent, cruising."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Then we must beg, borrow, or steal a trading-vessel; for go he must and
+shall."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+It was wonderful how the doctor brightened up at these words, and still
+more wonderful how he allowed himself to be commanded by a stranger.  But
+Jos� was a strong man though not often exerting his strength, and there
+was that in his face which made most men chary of coming to handgrips
+with him.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Come, Jack," said he, "let us go to the bay and find a ship, if we wish
+to save the colonel's life.  Another week of this pestilence and he will
+be dead, and Peru can't afford to lose him just yet."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"But suppose," said I, as we rode away from the valley, "that the
+authorities won't allow him to be moved?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Why, we'll move him in spite of them.  Quilca's men can be trusted to
+help us.  'Twill be a little campaign on our own account!" said he, with
+a jovial laugh.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Even Jos�, however, could not impress a vessel that had no existence, and
+the bay was empty.  A few boats only lay peacefully resting on the placid
+waters, but of a ship there was no sign.  We stood for an hour staring
+seaward, as if our will could conjure up a vessel, and then returned to
+the town.  We paid a visit to the governor, but he could not help us.  It
+was unlikely there would be a vessel, he said, until Lord Cochrane
+returned with the squadron from Callao.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"When will that be?" I asked.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The governor gave his shoulders an expressive shrug.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"The gallant Englishman does not confide in me," he replied.  "He may
+come to-day; he may not come for a twelvemonth."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+It was getting late now, and nothing further could be done till the
+following morning.  Jos� was disappointed, but in no way disheartened.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"If we can't get what we want," said he, "we must be satisfied with what
+we can get.  There's a fine bit of philosophy for you!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"And what can we get?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"A house at the seaside.  We'll look for a sheltered place on the beach
+to-morrow, bring down some men to build a hut, and have the colonel
+removed to it.  With the sea air filling his lungs, he may yet have a
+chance of recovery."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Instead of returning to camp, we slept that night at Pisco, and after an
+early breakfast went again to the beach.  Jos� had just selected an
+admirable spot for the hut, when we suddenly heard a shout of "Sail ho!
+sail ho! There's another&mdash;and another!  Why, it must be Cochrane's
+squadron!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+In an instant we were gazing seaward, and there, sure enough, rounding
+the corner of the bay, were several vessels, led by a stately ship.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+By this time a number of people had assembled, and more were coming in
+hot haste from the town.  They talked and gesticulated violently&mdash;the
+majority, I observed being doubtful if the incoming vessels were friends
+or foes.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+As they drew nearer, however, all misgiving vanished, every one agreeing
+that the leading ship was the <I>San Martin</I>, so named in honour of the
+great general.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"The luck's with us!" cried Jos� joyfully.  "Before nightfall we'll have
+the colonel on board one of those craft.  How beautifully the admiral's
+ship is handled! she comes sweeping in like a great sea-bird."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Hadn't we better get a couple of men to pull us out to her? she'll
+anchor soon."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"The very thing! we can't afford to lose time."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Our arrangements did not take long to make, and we were soon speeding
+across the bay, our crazy boat being propelled by two wiry Indians.  The
+whole squadron was now well within the bay, the smaller craft lying close
+in, and flying the Chilian colours; but Jos� directed the boatmen to pull
+for the flagship.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"<I>San Martin</I> ahoy!" he yelled, standing up in the stern and hailing the
+ship in what he believed to be sailor fashion.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Hullo!  Who are you?" came the answer.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Is Admiral Cochrane on board?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Well, he was a minute ago."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Throw a rope, will you? we're coming up."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+This conversation was carried on in English, for many officers in the
+Chilian navy were Englishmen; and now the man on the <I>San Martin</I>
+exclaimed, "Well, you're a cool customer anyhow!  Walt a bit while I tell
+the captain."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Hang the captain!" roared Jos�; "it's a matter of life and death."  And
+those on deck, seeing how terribly in earnest he was, flung over a rope,
+and we scrambled up the ship's side.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Now, my man," exclaimed a sharp voice, "what is it you are in such a
+tremendous hurry about?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I want to see Lord Cochrane immediately," said Jos�.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"His lordship is engaged in his cabin.  Give your message to me."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I prefer to manage my own business, thank you," replied Jos� coolly.
+"Tell the admiral I have come from Colonel Miller."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+As he finished speaking, a distinguished-looking officer, accompanied by
+several others, appeared on deck, and I knew instinctively that we were
+in the presence of the famous Admiral Cochrane, whose marvellous exploits
+had gained for him the admiration of the world.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Hearing the name of Miller, he stopped, and looking at us, said, "What is
+that about Colonel Miller?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"He is dying, sir!" exclaimed Jos�, as much at ease with an admiral as
+with a private sailor.  "His men are all down with ague, and the colonel
+will be dead inside a week unless you remove him at once."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Mr. Welsh," remarked the admiral to a handsome young fellow standing
+near, "this is your affair.  Do whatever you think best; but remember, I
+would rather lose a ship than Miller.  He's the one man we can rely upon
+ashore."  Then looking at us, he added, "You are not soldiers?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"This lad," replied Jos�, pointing to me, "is Jack Crawford.  His father
+was one of the largest landowners in Peru, and a great patriot.  The
+Spaniards shot him some time ago, and the boy has been hiding ever since.
+Yesterday we arrived at Pisco to join the detachment there, as
+volunteers, and found the colonel delirious with fever.  A few days
+longer in camp will finish him."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"He shall be removed at once," exclaimed the Admiral.&mdash;"Captain
+Wilkinson, will you order a boat to be lowered!" and then he began to
+question Jos� further concerning the condition of the troops.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Very quickly the boat was got ready, Mr. Welsh took his seat, and at his
+suggestion we followed, giving instructions to our own men to return to
+shore.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Are you a doctor?" asked Jos� of our companion.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Yes; I am Lord Cochrane's private surgeon, though, fortunately, he gives
+me but little work to do," and he laughed merrily.  I have said that he
+was a handsome fellow, with a boyish, fresh-coloured face, and bright,
+sparkling eyes.  He talked to us cheerfully about the campaign, and would
+not allow that Colonel Miller was in danger of dying.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"You don't know him as well as we do," he said, with a laugh.  "Most men
+who had been through what he has would be dead already; but Miller stands
+alone.  The last time we brought him from Pisco he had a ball in the
+right arm, another had smashed his left hand, while a third had gone
+through his chest, fractured a rib, and passed out at the back.  Of
+course we gave him up, but he pulled through comfortably."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Well, he is pretty bad now," said Jos� significantly.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"He'll be leading a bayonet charge in a month," laughed the young
+surgeon, "if the war lasts as long.  For my part, I expect it to be over
+sooner."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I had no idea," said I, "that the Spaniards would be beaten so easily."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"The odds are all against them, you see.  Lord Cochrane has scooped up
+their navy, San Martin is waiting to pounce on Lima, they have to watch
+General Bolivar in the north, and most of the people are in favour of the
+revolution.  Hullo! here we are!  I suppose you'll come with me to the
+camp?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Yes," said Jos�, "and back to the ship if you will let us.  We can do no
+good here."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"All right.  I daresay we can find you a berth."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The young surgeon came near to losing his self-possession when he saw the
+actual state of things.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Whew!" exclaimed he, "this will have to be altered.  Why, the men are
+dying on their feet!  And I suppose it's the same old story&mdash;not enough
+doctors, no proper attendants, and musty drugs.  Well, we'll clear the
+colonel out of it first, and then see what can be done for the others."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+While he attended to his patient, we had a litter made ready, in which
+the colonel was placed and carried to the water's edge, where the ship's
+boat was in waiting.  The sailors rowed steadily and well, and we soon
+had the satisfaction of seeing the sick man comfortably installed in one
+of the ship's cabins.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Lord Cochrane showed the greatest concern at his old friend's shocking
+condition, and did everything possible to help forward his recovery.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+As it chanced, I was much in the sick man's cabin; the doctor, to whom I
+had taken a singular liking, using me as a sort of assistant.  In the
+early evening he went ashore with the admiral, who also took Jos� with
+him, and together they visited the sick camp.  It was late when they
+returned, but our patient had suffered no hurt during their absence.
+Indeed he lay very still and quiet, while from time to time I wiped the
+sweat from his brow and gave him cooling drinks.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Jos� did not come into the cabin again, but I heard from the doctor that
+it had been decided to bring the soldiers on board, in the hope that a
+sea voyage would set up their strength.  Our own particular Indians
+returned to the Hidden Valley, but in the course of a day or two the rest
+of the troops were embarked on the flagship.  Then we stood out to sea,
+bearing southward, the other vessels of the squadron taking the opposite
+direction.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Thanks partly to the young surgeon's skill, but chiefly, perhaps, to his
+own marvellous constitution, the colonel began to mend slowly.  The fever
+abated, he was able to take some nourishing food, and at last a day came
+when we carried him on deck.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+It was extraordinary to behold the joy with which his appearance was
+greeted, not only by his own troops, but by every man on board.  Some of
+them knew him only by report, but most of the sailors had witnessed his
+daring deeds, while the marines had taken part in them.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The officers, too, from the admiral downward, came about him, and though
+too weak as yet for much talk, he acknowledged their kindness by a
+charming and fascinating smile.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+At the end of an hour the doctor gave orders that he should be carried
+back to his cabin, saying with a laugh, "That's enough excitement for the
+first day, colonel.  Mustn't overdo it, you know."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Whether it was the bracing effect of the fresh sea air, or the sight of
+his men's most obvious improvement, I know not, but from that day his
+strength increased with astonishing rapidity.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+During this period of convalescence he talked with me a good deal, and in
+the kindest manner, so that shortly I became as ardent a hero-worshipper
+as the others.  He sent for Jos�, too, thanked him for his prompt action,
+and declared that in a sense he was indebted to him for his life.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"But," said he, smiling, "I don't know yet who you are, or how you came
+to turn up at Pisco just at the right moment!"  Whereupon Jos� gave him
+an outline of our story.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+He listened attentively, and at the end said, "I have heard of your
+father, my boy, through General San Martin, who will be glad to make your
+acquaintance.  Meanwhile I shall charge myself with your welfare&mdash;that
+is, if you care to share my fortunes."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I ask for nothing better, sir," I replied, flushing with pleasure.
+"There is no leader I would rather choose to follow."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Then you shall have your wish," said he, "unless the general finds other
+work for you."
+</P>
+
+<BR><BR><BR>
+
+<A NAME="chap07"></A>
+
+<H3 ALIGN="center">
+CHAPTER VII.
+</H3>
+
+<H3 ALIGN="center">
+WHOM THE GODS LOVE DIE YOUNG.
+</H3>
+
+<P>
+It was, I believe, Lord Cochrane's desire to land his troops close to
+the port of Arica; but two unsuccessful attempts having been made, the
+plan was abandoned.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Colonel Miller, who had by this time resumed his duties, next
+transferred his men to two small schooners captured from the enemy, and
+having taken on board food and water sufficient for twenty-four hours,
+set sail for the Morro de Sama, a miserable port ten leagues north of
+Arica.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Jos� and I accompanied him, as did also, to my great delight, the young
+doctor.  Our two vessels were crazy craft: they had only temporary
+rudders, and it was impossible to steer with any degree of accuracy.
+Owing to this the trip occupied just double the calculated time, so
+that on landing we were half dead with hunger and thirst.  The soldiers
+still suffered somewhat from the effects of the ague: their legs
+tottered under them, and at first they could not march longer than half
+an hour at a time without lying down to rest.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+You must not, however, suppose that we were at all downhearted on this
+account.  The men had the greatest confidence in their leader, while
+the gaiety and high spirits of the young doctor acted as a fine tonic.
+He was full of quips and cranks, and his merry sayings brought a smile
+to the faces of even the most wearied.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+A winding path three miles in length brought us to the summit of a
+steep mountain, where we stopped awhile to rest, and to enjoy the
+refreshing breeze.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Well, Crawford," exclaimed the doctor cheerfully, when we once more
+resumed the march, "how do you like being on active service?  A
+pleasant change, isn't it, from being cooped up on board ship?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+At the moment I hardly agreed with him, but I made an effort to reply
+to his banter.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Only to a few of us was the really desperate nature of our expedition
+known.  Of the Spaniards we entertained no manner of fear; the sole
+terror lay in the route to be traversed.  We were already parched by
+thirst, and more than twenty miles of sandy desert lay between us and
+water.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Nor was this all.  Only one man knew the route, and years had gone by
+since he had last travelled over it.  If his strength or memory failed,
+it might well happen that the dreary desert would be our burial-place
+and the loose sand our winding-sheet.  It was not exactly a cheering
+prospect, but we made the best of it.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The colonel marched at the head of his men, the doctor at the rear, so
+that he might assist any unfortunate stragglers, while Jos� and I went
+forward with the guide.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+With frequent halts for rest we ploughed our way through the shifting
+sand, our eyes aching and our throats terribly dry.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+About midnight, as near as I could judge, the guide stopped
+irresolutely.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"What is it?" asked Jos�, in an excited whisper; "what is wrong?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+We could not see the fellow's face, but he seemed very agitated, and
+there was a break in his voice as he answered,&mdash;
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I don't know&mdash;I am not sure&mdash;but I can't be certain that we are on the
+right track."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The words sounded like a sentence of death, and I could hardly repress
+a cry of horror.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Be still!" whispered Jos�; "the men must not know.  Stay here a minute
+while I ask the colonel to halt.  That will give us a little
+breathing-space."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+He was soon back, and taking the guide's arm, he exclaimed,&mdash;
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Now come, get your wits about you, and let us see what can be done.
+Where do you think we ought to be?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I don't know," replied the guide helplessly.  "The saints preserve us,
+or we are lost!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Now look here," said Jos� sternly: "you are giving way, and that won't
+do.  Pluck up your courage, man, and remember that all our lives are in
+your hands."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I think, perhaps, this awful responsibility had much to do with
+breaking the guide down.  He wrung his hands and groaned, saying aloud
+that he had brought us to death.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"But we aren't dead yet," I remarked, "and needn't be if only you will
+collect your wits.  Come, let us cast about a bit; maybe you'll find
+some landmark that will help you."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"No, no," he cried; "we may be right now, and if we stray away we shall
+certainly be lost.  May the saints preserve us!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I think the fellow would be there yet, but for the click of Jos�'s
+pistol and the stern ring in his voice as he said sharply,&mdash;
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"This nonsense has to stop.&mdash;Take his arm, Jack.&mdash;Now go on without a
+word, until you can make up your mind one way or other about the route."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The next quarter of an hour was one of the worst in my life.  The man
+stumbled this way and that, now going in a straight line, again turning
+to right or left, and all the time the troops in our rear were resting
+in fancied security.  I shuddered to think what would happen if the
+guide failed to locate the track.  Suddenly he ran forward quickly,
+dragging me with him, and then uttered a joyful cry.  We were at the
+foot of a sandy hillock of peculiar shape, much like, as far as I could
+tell, a truncated cone.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+It was not high, but apparently of considerable circumference.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The guide laughed and wept like a man bereft of his senses, and then
+crying, "We are saved!" he straightway fell on his knees and offered up
+a prayer of thanksgiving.  The strangely-shaped hillock showed him that
+thus far he had led us correctly; and although during the night he had
+several further twinges of alarm, he did not lose his nerve again.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+As mile after mile was traversed our thirst became excruciatingly
+painful, and there was no chance of relief.  Between us and the valley
+of Sama no drop of water would be found.  Still we plodded on, parched
+and weary, until in the eastern sky the dawn rose slowly.  For just a
+brief period we felt the cold, damp, but refreshing breath of morning,
+and then the hot sun added to our misery.  Our heads were scorched by
+its burning rays, and we were almost blinded by the glare reflected
+from the deep, loose sand.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+It was nearly nine o'clock when the guide, extending his arm,
+exclaimed, "Sama&mdash;water!"  And looking ahead, we caught a glimpse of
+the cool green vegetation in the Sama valley.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Under other circumstances it would have been laughable to watch the
+effect produced by our near approach to the valley.  What semblance of
+order the colonel had kept on the march vanished.  Breaking their
+ranks, the men rushed forward eagerly in search of the welcome water.
+One who for the last mile had been crawling along, supported by the
+doctor, darted off like a champion runner, though he fell exhausted
+before covering half the distance.  On reaching the sparkling stream,
+we all, without exception, flung ourselves down by the margin, and
+lapped the water like thirsty dogs.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Here we remained till the next day, being supplied with food by the
+people from Sama, who also procured for us about a dozen horses, two of
+which, I am thankful to say, fell to Jos� and myself.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Most of the men, after eating and drinking, stretched themselves out on
+the grass, and were fast asleep in a moment; but our leader had much to
+do, and the cheery young doctor spent half his time in attending on the
+sick.  In this Jos� helped him.  I wished to do so, but in truth the
+long march, and the want of food and water, had worn me out.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Lie down and get some rest," said the doctor, "or you will be left
+behind to-morrow.  We have another twelve leagues or so before us yet."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Where are we going?" I asked.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"To a village called Tacna."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"We call it a town," laughed Jos�.  "Why, there are more than four
+thousand people living in it."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Dear me," exclaimed the doctor good-humouredly, "what a considerable
+place!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Attended by Jos�, he passed on laughing, and I curled up in the
+sheltered nook which I had selected as bed and bedchamber in one.  I
+know nothing of what happened after that until Jos�, shaking my arm,
+told me to rise.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+It was scarcely light; but the troops were already preparing their
+simple breakfast, for they had another long and tedious march before
+them.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"How do you feel, Jack?" asked Jos�.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"All right, thank you," said I, giving myself a shake, "but
+tremendously hungry.  I could eat a horse!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+At that he laughed, saying, "Before the campaign's over I daresay you
+will be glad to eat part of one"&mdash;a prophecy that was more than
+fulfilled.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Directly after breakfast the men were assembled, the colonel addressed
+them in a few stirring words, and the march began.  We did not
+anticipate an attack, but a few sturdy and well-mounted peasants from
+Sama rode ahead to make sure that the route was clear.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Outside Tacna we were met by the inhabitants, who escorted us, with
+much noise and cheering, in triumph to the town.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"These worthy people are good patriots, Crawford," said the doctor, who
+was riding next me.  "Hark how they cry 'Down with the Spaniards!'  It
+is lucky for them that we are not part of the Spanish army."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"As to that," I answered, "it is as easy to shout for one side as for
+the other.  It is only a matter of words, after all."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Well," he laughed, "if cheers were bullets, we need not go short of
+ammunition."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+We remained several days in Tacna, where I had the luck to be quartered
+on a wealthy Spanish merchant.  It was most amusing to be in his
+company, as he hated us like poison, and, in spite of himself, could
+hardly prevent his real sentiments from popping out at inconvenient
+times.  However, either from fear or from policy, he treated me well,
+and during our stay in the town I lived on the best of everything.
+This was an agreeable interlude in the making of war, and suited me
+admirably.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Like all good things, it came to an end much too soon, and very
+suddenly.  Jos�, the doctor, and I had been spending an evening with
+one of the principal inhabitants, and on coming away met the colonel.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I am pleased that you keep good hours," said he, with a smile.  "We
+march at dawn.  The Spaniards are moving in three detachments to
+intercept us; we must crush them one by one."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Well," exclaimed the doctor pleasantly, "we can't grumble; we have had
+a pleasant breathing-space."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+During our stay at Tacna we had received reinforcements, bringing our
+adventurous party up to four hundred and fifty, of which about a third
+part consisted of cavalry.  The few days' rest had recruited our
+strength, and we set out in high spirits for Buena Vista, a tiny hamlet
+at the foot of the Cordillera.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+As yet we had obtained no definite news of the enemy; but while we lay
+at Buena Vista, a native scout brought word that a strong Spanish force
+was stationed at Mirabe, a village some forty miles distant.  The
+colonel's resolution was instantly taken, and as soon as day broke we
+were once more moving.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+After we had left the valley, our route lay across a region where no
+blade of grass had ever grown.  As far as the eye reached, the scene
+was one of utter desolation.  The horses picked their steps gingerly,
+and the foot-soldiers stumbled along as best they could, tripping now
+and then over the stones and boulders that strewed the path.  All day
+long, with intervals for rest, we tramped, and the coming of night
+still found us pursuing the tedious journey.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The last part was worse than the first.  For six miles the road
+descended amidst steep rocks and mighty precipices.  The pass was so
+narrow that we had to march in single file, each horseman on foot and
+leading his animal.  Had the Spaniards caught us there, not a man would
+have escaped.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Slowly and carefully we descended in one long line, until at midnight
+we reached the rugged bank of the river which rushes through the Mirabe
+valley.  In a hollow on the opposite side lay the village, and behind
+the mud walls surrounding the cultivated grounds were the Spaniards,
+little dreaming of our proximity.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Now," exclaimed the colonel softly, "we have them in our power.  We
+have but to cross the river and fall upon their camp."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+He had already begun to give his orders, when the report of a
+pistol&mdash;fired, whether by accident or design, by one of our men&mdash;rang
+out, and all chance of a surprise vanished.  The Spaniards, in alarm,
+began firing rapidly, though they could not see us, a thick wood
+stretching between them and the river.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I'd hang that fellow," growled Jos�.  "He's either a fool or a rogue,
+and has completely spoiled the colonel's plans."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Never mind," said the colonel cheerfully; "we must make new ones," and
+he immediately dispatched two rocket parties&mdash;one to the right, the
+other to the left&mdash;in order to engage the enemy's attention.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Meanwhile each mounted man, taking up a foot-soldier behind him,
+crossed the river, and then returned for another, until in a short time
+all had safely effected a passage.  Then, unable to do more in the
+darkness, we lay down to wait for the coming of dawn.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Many of the men fell fast asleep in spite of the random firing, but my
+mind was busy with thoughts of the approaching fight.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+About two o'clock, Dr. Welsh, who had been assisting the regular army
+surgeons, came and lay down beside me.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Well, Crawford," said he, finding I was awake, "how do you like the
+music?  Rather alarming at first, eh?  But you'll get used to it.
+After hearing the bullets swish round your ears a time or two you'll
+think nothing of it."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"That may be," I replied, "but it is distinctly unpleasant just now."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+He laughed, saying the fight would be only a skirmish at the most, and
+not worth considering.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Are you going to stay with us?" I asked.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Oh no," said he; "this is only a run ashore, just to stretch my legs a
+bit, you know.  They get cramped on board ship.  By George, those
+fellows intend serenading us till daybreak.  Who's that on the other
+side of you&mdash;Craig?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Yes&mdash;sound asleep and snoring.  I wish I were."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Ah, no doubt he has a clear conscience.  Take pattern by him, my boy."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Thanks for the advice," said I, laughing; "it's very kind of you to
+offer it."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"It costs nothing," he answered banteringly; "which explains why so
+many people are willing to give it."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+After a time I fell asleep, and did not waken till, at the first streak
+of dawn, an order was quietly passed through the lines for every man to
+hold himself in readiness.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Jos� sat up, rubbed his eyes lazily, and declared that he could sleep
+another twenty-four hours.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"There's too much hurry and bustle about this kind of warfare," said
+he.  "Why don't both sides agree to meet at a certain place, and to
+fight it out?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"A famous plan, upon my word!" cried the doctor; "it would save no end
+of trouble."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"And get the business over quickly," said Jos�, who was saddling up.
+"Hullo, there goes the colonel!  I wonder if he ever gets tired?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"No," laughed the doctor merrily; "he's made of iron."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The dawn was broadening now; and moving from the shelter of the wood,
+we saw the Spaniards on a level piece of ground about half a mile wide.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"They're trying to gain the ridge on the left," cried Jos�; "that will
+give them the advantage."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+But the colonel had seen the manoeuvre also, and flung his small body
+of cavalry at them with such force that they drew back, trying to
+retreat by the winding track through the mountains.  Again they were
+intercepted, this time being forced to the edge of a precipitous cliff.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"By George," exclaimed the doctor, "they're in it now!  It's neck or
+nothing with them."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+All this time I had quietly sat on my horse, watching the phases of the
+fight.  The scene was to me so extraordinary that I had no sense of
+fear.  I was not upset even by the strange, wailing sounds made by the
+rushing bullets.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Jos� and I were with the reserve cavalry; Welsh was at the colonel's
+side.  The Spaniards fought with desperate courage, I could see that,
+and they pushed our men hard.  Fallen soldiers dotted the level tract
+of ground.  Some, raising themselves painfully, began to crawl back.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I make no pretence of giving an accurate description of the combat.  To
+me it was a confused medley of men and horses inextricably mixed; of
+shining swords, of blinding red flashes; and my ears were deafened with
+the fierce cries and shouts of men spending their lives recklessly
+under the rising sun.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+At last I saw the colonel raise his sword.  Then he shouted something
+in Spanish, whereat, gathering up the reins in my left hand, I spurred
+my horse, to keep company with the rest.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"A firm seat, Jack; keep a firm seat!" cried a familiar voice in my
+ear; and there was Jos�, riding as coolly as if taking a canter over
+the grounds of our park at home!
+</P>
+
+<P>
+We were riding at no great pace, but all well together, when again the
+colonel's voice rang out, and we broke instantly into a gallop.  Then
+in a flash I saw a body of Spanish cavalry drawn up to receive us,
+while from our left came a stinging hail of bullets.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+A man close to me dropped his sword with a cry of pain, and the next
+moment his horse, taking the bit between its teeth, rushed madly to the
+front.  I watched its progress with queer fascination.  On it went,
+right through the Spaniards, who edged aside to let it pass, straight
+to the brink of the precipice, over which it fell, still carrying its
+hapless rider.  It seemed to me that I heard his shriek, though that
+must have been fancy, as it could not have risen above the tumult of
+the fight.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Forward!" roared the colonel, waving his sword, and the next instant
+we were in the midst of the throng.  The young doctor was just in front
+of me, Jos� on my right hand, and the men pressing close behind.  I saw
+nothing of the fight save that part only which concerned myself.  Again
+and again the shining steel was within a hair's-breadth of me&mdash;now at
+my head, now at my heart&mdash;while I was almost suffocated in the press.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Inch by inch, by sheer force of steel, we threaded our way through,
+re-formed on the further side, and, still headed by the colonel, dashed
+once more into the fray.  This time the resistance was less obstinate.
+The Spaniards began to weary&mdash;to fall back, as if unable to hold their
+ground.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Hurrah!" cried the young doctor, "hurrah! they're done for!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I shall not easily forget the picture he made.  His handsome face was
+flushed with excitement, his beautiful eyes were ablaze with light; he
+sat his horse erect as a young sapling.  A handsomer or finer man could
+not have been.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I saw the tragedy from beginning to end, but could do nothing to
+prevent it.  It was over quick as a flash of summer lightning.  Before
+us rode a Spanish officer, calling fiercely on his men to come back.
+At the sound of the doctor's triumphant note he turned, and I saw his
+face black with anger.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Ah, Englishman!" he cried savagely; and even as he spoke his left arm
+rose, there was a flash, a report, and the doctor fell forward on his
+horse's neck.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"See to him, Crawford!" cried the colonel huskily; and as I clutched
+the animal's bridle, the troopers swept on in hurricane fury, while
+from all parts of the battlefield there rose a cry of triumph.
+</P>
+
+<BR><BR><BR>
+
+<A NAME="chap08"></A>
+
+<H3 ALIGN="center">
+CHAPTER VIII.
+</H3>
+
+<H3 ALIGN="center">
+A FRIENDLY OPPONENT.
+</H3>
+
+<P>
+I had known the young English doctor only a short time, but I had
+learned to love him as a dear friend.  In the fight he had shown
+himself brave and fearless, but quite apart from this, his qualities
+endeared him to every one.  He was always cheery and full of hope, even
+in our worst straits; he was tender-hearted as a child, and every sick
+or wounded soldier worshipped him for his unvarying attention and
+kindness.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+He was not dead when, slipping from my horse, I placed my arm round him
+as well as I could to support him.  I saw that his eyes were open, and
+that a beautiful smile lit up his face.  For a second or two he
+recognized me and tried to speak, but this was beyond his powers.  Then
+a change came swiftly and suddenly; the light faded from his eyes, his
+cheeks grew ashen gray, and though quite unfamiliar with death, I knew
+that his spirit had fled.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Some wounded Indians, staggering from the fight, helped me to place the
+lifeless body on the ground; and these poor, simple natives filled the
+air with their lamentations.  The death of the brilliant young surgeon
+had deprived them of a good friend, and they were quick to show their
+grief.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The fight was now over.  The majority of the Spaniards were either
+killed or captured; but no one took much pleasure in the well-earned
+little victory.  From the chief to the meanest soldier in the
+detachment, every one mourned sincerely the loss of a trusty comrade.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+On active service, however, one has not much time to spend in grieving.
+There were the dead to be buried, the wounded to be seen to, the
+prisoners to be secured, and then, after a short space for food and
+rest, we were marching in hot pursuit of the scanty remnant that had
+escaped.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"It's lucky," observed Jos�, with a laugh, "that the colonel managed to
+procure a few horses."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"His command would have been one short without them," I replied.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+We were by no means a smart-looking detachment.  The officers rode on
+horseback, and a number of mules had been obtained for the men, who
+followed the system of <I>ride and tie</I>.  Our clothes began to show signs
+of hard wear, we suffered much from hunger and thirst, and most of all
+from loss of sleep.  This last was really a terrible hardship, and I
+noticed more than one poor fellow fall from his mule in a kind of
+stupor as I rode along.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+However, by dint of pegging away, we arrived at the town of Moquegua
+just in time to capture most of the runaways, and then, utterly worn
+out and exhausted, gladly settled down for a few days' rest.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Jos� and I were billeted in a house near the colonel's quarters, and
+the people gave us a warm welcome.  They spread a good meal, to which
+we did ample justice, and then, although barely noon, we went straight
+to bed.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I hope," exclaimed Jos� as he lay down, "that we shan't be disturbed
+for a month.  I can easily do with a month's sleep."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"The chances are," said I gloomily, "that the colonel will be knocking
+us up before we have fairly begun to dream."  At which dismal prophecy
+Jos� threatened me with all sorts of pains and penalties unless I held
+my peace.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+As it happened, the colonel did not need us, and we actually slept
+without waking until nine o'clock the next morning, when, having made a
+hearty breakfast, we went to call upon the chief.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Why, Crawford," exclaimed the colonel, smiling, "I thought you were
+lost!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Only in dreams, sir," I replied.  "We've been catching up a little of
+our lost sleep.  We did not know how soon we might be on the march
+again."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"So you made the most of your opportunity?  Well, I don't blame you;
+but it is possible we shall make a long halt here."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Possible," remarked Jos� to me afterwards, "but not probable;" and
+events proved that, as far as we were concerned, he was right.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+That evening the colonel invited us to dinner; but we had scarcely sat
+down when he was called away to speak to a messenger who had brought
+important news.  He returned looking rather thoughtful, and, catching
+sight of Jos�, exclaimed,&mdash;
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Craig, you are pretty well acquainted with the Indian dialects, I
+believe?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Yes, sir," answered Jos� readily; "I can manage to talk with most of
+the natives."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Then you are the very man I want.  I'll tell you all about it after
+dinner.  Mustn't send you off without satisfying the inner man, eh?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Jos� glanced at me with a smile, as much as to say, "I wasn't very far
+out this morning;" while I was all curiosity as to what the business
+might be.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+As soon as we had finished, the colonel and Jos� had a very earnest and
+confidential talk, after which my companion rejoined me, and together
+we left the room.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"What is it?" I asked anxiously; "anything of importance?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Rather, unless the Indian has made a mistake.  La Hera is hiding with
+a few wounded men in the mountains, not a dozen miles away."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+This was the Spanish leader whom we had defeated at Mirabe.  He was a
+bold, dashing soldier, and a firm Loyalist, whose capture would deal
+the enemy a heavy blow.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Get the horses ready," said Jos�, "while I pick out a few men.  We
+mustn't make a mess of this affair, or the colonel won't trust us
+again.  And don't mention where we are going, up at the house.  I
+daresay the folks are all right, but what they don't know they can't
+tell."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Where shall I meet you?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Outside the colonel's quarters.  Now, off with you, we've no time to
+waste."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The horses had benefited by their unusually long rest, and having
+saddled them with the help of one of our host's servants, I led them
+into the street.  Jos� soon appeared with a dozen mounted men, wild,
+fierce-looking fellows, and all natives.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Presently the guide came out, and directly afterwards the colonel, who
+spoke a few words, telling us that we were bound on an important
+errand, which he trusted we should accomplish successfully.  Then the
+guide placed himself, on foot, beside Jos�'s horse, and we moved off.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+He led us at first, purposely, in a wrong direction, in case of prying
+eyes, turning back at the end of a mile or so, and then steering across
+a wild and lonely desert track.  Having covered nearly a dozen miles,
+we came to a tiny hamlet at the foot of the mountains.  Halting here,
+we left our horses in charge of two men and pressed forward on foot.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Fortunately, in one way though not in another, it was a moonlight
+night, and we could see where to step.  All around us towered huge
+mountains, grim and forbidding.  We marched in single file by the edge
+of steep precipices, so close sometimes that we seemed to hang over the
+awful abyss.  Further and further we penetrated into the dreary
+recesses.  We seemed to be a body of ghosts traversing a dreary world.
+No man spoke; we heard the cry neither of bird nor of animal.  The only
+sound to break the eerie silence was the occasional clatter of a stone,
+which, loosened by our passage, rolled over into the unknown depths.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I looked neither to right nor to left, but kept my gaze fixed on Jos�,
+who walked before me.  The track narrowed down so that it hardly
+afforded footing for one, and I prayed in my heart that we might soon
+come to a better vantage-ground.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I was no coward, and since leaving home had met with more than one
+adventure, but this was the most perilous of all.  Despite every effort
+to keep firm, my limbs trembled, my head grew dizzy; I was seized by a
+strong temptation to launch myself into space.  The fit passed as
+suddenly as it had come, but I felt the sweat trickling down my face.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Presently we emerged on to a broad platform, and Jos�, stopping, seized
+my hand.  He was trembling now, but it was at the thought of danger
+past.  One by one the men stole cautiously along while we waited,
+watching with fascinated eyes, and drawing a deep breath of relief as
+each stepped safely from the perilous path.  Whether they had also felt
+fearful I could not tell; their faces were wonderfully impassive, and,
+except when roused by savage anger, quite expressionless.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+At a sign from Jos� they dropped to the ground behind a group of
+boulders, and he, addressing them in some Indian dialect, issued his
+instructions.  I gathered very little from his speech; but presently
+the men disappeared, gliding like serpents along the side of the
+cliffs, and leaving me with Jos� and the guide.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I don't much like this, Jack," said Jos�.  "I almost wish you had
+stayed behind.  I hope the colonel can depend on this fellow."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"What is it?" I asked.  "I suppose we didn't come out just for the
+pleasure of exercising ourselves on that goat-track?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"No," said he; "though, to be sure, that was an uncommon diversion.
+The real thing is just about to begin, and this is the way of it.
+According to the guide, La Hera is in a cave close at hand."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"All the more chance of trapping him."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I'm not so sure of that.  The entrance to the cave is some sixty feet
+from the ground, in the side of a steep cliff."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Well, we've had some experience in mountain-climbing."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Yes, but not this sort.  The face of the cliff is as perpendicular as
+the side of a house."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"The other fellows got up."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"So they did, but it was in the daylight, and there was no one at the
+top waiting to pop them off with a bullet.  It seems the bandits have
+been in the habit of using this cave as a depot, and one of them guided
+La Hera there with the real object of betraying him."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Ugh!" said I; "these traitors make me sick."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Just so; but they are very useful.  Without the help of this one, for
+instance, we can't capture La Hera, unless we starve him out."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"What does he propose to do?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Well, there is a stout rope fixed in the cave which he will let down
+at the right moment.  Up this we shall have to climb by help of the
+niches that have been cut in the cliff."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Suppose La Hera finds it out, and is waiting to receive us?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"That," replied Jos�, with a shrug of the shoulders, "is just what is
+bothering me.  However, we shall soon discover.  Our men have had time
+to hide themselves, and the guide is getting fidgety.  But I say, Jack,
+I wish I hadn't brought you."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I'm rather pleased now that you have, though I wasn't half an hour
+ago."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"No; I thought you breathed too hard to be enjoying yourself."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+With that he ordered the native to proceed; and we all three crept
+along, keeping well in the shadow, though the enemy, feeling secure in
+possession of the rope, were hardly likely to have set a watch.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Coming to a halt, the guide pointed to a towering cliff, which, on that
+face at least, was in truth steep and smooth as the wall of a house.
+Our men lay close at hand, but completely concealed, watching for the
+lowering of the rope.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Now it seemed to me that we were running great risk when our object
+might have been gained with none at all.  Why not, as Jos� had remarked
+a short time previously, starve the inmates out?
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"No good," answered he, when I asked the question.  "The guide says
+there are stores in the cave sufficient to last a small party for
+months.  The war would be over before they had finished their
+provisions.  No; we must get them by surprise or not at all.  I should
+like to see that rope dangling."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+It was weary waiting, and a great strain on our nerves too, as every
+moment's delay gave us more time to appreciate the danger.  The longer
+I pondered the more I disliked the business, and doubted what would be
+the end of it.  La Hera was a bold man, and if he got an inkling of the
+truth, we should meet with an unpleasant reception.  He might not
+approve of such an unceremonious intrusion into his dwelling-place.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I was still thinking of these things when the Indian guide drew our
+attention to the cliff.  The time had come.  There, distinguishable in
+the pale moonlight, dangled the rope, and as we watched it descended
+lower and lower, very steadily, until the end of it was not higher than
+a man could grasp.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+It was the signal agreed upon to show that the enemy were asleep.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Calling softly to one of his men, Jos� said, "Stay here and watch.  If
+we are betrayed, take this man back to Colonel Miller.  If he tries to
+escape, kill him."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The Indian moved not a muscle, while his guard took his place beside
+him with drawn sword, for no muskets had been brought on the
+expedition.  Then word was quietly passed round to the others, and one
+by one we gathered close to the hanging rope.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+We could not communicate with the man at the top, lest we should be
+heard by the Spaniards, and we dared not make a sound.  Holding a knife
+between his teeth, Jos� clutched the rope firmly, planted one foot in a
+niche, and began to mount.  When he had reached half-way up, I began
+the ascent, bidding the men be ready to follow me.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I did not mind this part of the enterprise, dangerous though it was.
+The niches cut in the rock afforded decent foothold, while the rope was
+knotted at intervals.  The peril lay not so much in the climbing as in
+the chance of discovery.  If the Spaniards learned what was going
+forward, nothing could save us from certain death.  This was an
+unpleasant thought, which I hastened to put as far from me as possible.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Meanwhile Jos�'s head was on a level with the cave, and I felt that the
+best or the worst of the business would soon be known.  If the enemy
+were awake, it would go hard with him.  His foot left the last niche,
+he swung on the rope, and as I watched breathlessly he disappeared.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Casting a glance downward, I called softly to the troopers to hurry,
+and then went up hand over hand at a breakneck pace.  In a short time I
+was gazing at as strange a spectacle as I have ever seen.  The cavern
+was an immense apartment, with steep walls and exceedingly lofty roof.
+Near the centre was a fire, on which some one had hastily thrown a
+fresh supply of dry fuel, and the red flames were leaping high in long,
+thin tongues.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Just inside the entrance Jos� and the traitorous Indian stood over the
+windlass, by means of which the rope was worked, and as I ran to their
+side, one of the Spanish soldiers uttered a cry of alarm.  Instantly
+all was tumult and confusion.  Shots were fired at random, men shouted
+wildly, "We are betrayed!" while, above all, Jos�'s voice rang out high
+and clear, "Surrender! you are my prisoners."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+With a rush the Spaniards sprang at us, fighting with the fury of wild
+animals, while we had to guard not only ourselves but the rope up which
+our men were swarming.  If that were cut or loosened, our opponents
+would hold us at their mercy.  We fought against long odds, but for a
+time held our own, though once I was stricken almost to my knees, and
+felt the graze of a sharp blade across my cheeks.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Fortunately help came soon, or it would have gone badly with us.  With
+a wild shout a burly trooper sprang into the fray, and another soon
+joined him.  A third and a fourth followed quickly, and the issue was
+placed beyond doubt.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Now, although our Indians made splendid soldiers, they hated the
+Spaniards so much that it was difficult to restrain their passions.
+Some excuse may be found for them in the long years of misery and
+oppression they had endured; but, of course, Jos� set his face sternly
+against cruelties.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Thus it was in our enemies' own interest that I raised my voice,
+crying, "Surrender, and we will spare your lives!  You cannot escape!"
+And Jos� echoed my appeal.  He, too, dreaded the slaughter that must
+ensue if our Indians got out of hand.  Perhaps the Spaniards guessed
+our motive; at least they must have seen the futility of continuing the
+contest.  One by one they flung their weapons sullenly to the ground,
+and yielded themselves prisoners.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Torches!" cried Jos� quickly, "and let us examine our capture.  Where
+is Colonel La Hera?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+No one spoke, but several Indians plucked blazing brands from the fire
+and brought them to us.  By their light we saw one man lying dead near
+the windlass, and three wounded.  Six others, disarmed, stood round,
+for the most part black-browed and scowling.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Jos� repeated his question.  "Where is Colonel La Hera?" he asked.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Gone to get reinforcements to drive you into the sea," answered a calm
+voice.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Then he is not in this cave?" asked Jos� bluntly, but with a certain
+ring of admiration in his tone.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Now all this time I had been taking particular notice of this Spaniard.
+His uniform showed him to be a major, though he was quite young.  His
+face was frank and open; he had dark, expressive eyes, and a pleasant,
+musical voice, which somehow seemed familiar to me.  Where had I met
+this man before?  In a moment or two he himself supplied the answer.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Who is in command here?" asked Jos�.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I have the honour, and, as it seems, the misfortune also, of
+commanding these brave fellows.  I am Major Santiago Mariano, in the
+service of His Spanish Majesty, whom may God preserve!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I wish him no harm," replied Jos�; "only for the future he must not
+reckon Peru among his dominions.  Now, how am I to know that La Hera is
+not here?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Ask the man who betrayed us," said the major scornfully; and on
+questioning the Indian, it appeared he had mistaken Santiago for the
+famous colonel.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Well," muttered Jos�, "it's a disappointment; but it can't be helped.
+What are we to do with the wounded?  They can't go down the rope."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Let me stay with them," I suggested, "and you can send a doctor back."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Meanwhile," interrupted the major, "I have some little skill in
+surgery, and, with your permission, I will remain also.  You need not
+fear that I shall run away.  I will give my parole to come to Moquegua.
+After that, matters must shape their own course."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Very well," exclaimed Jos�; "the plan has its advantages.  I'll hurry
+along the first doctor I come across, Jack.  But you are hurt!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"It's only a scratch; nothing serious at all."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Jos� sent half a dozen of his men down the rope; then the dead Spaniard
+was lowered, the prisoners followed, and Jos� himself descended with
+the remainder of the troopers.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Haul up the rope, Jack," he cried in farewell, "and make sure of your
+visitors before dropping it again."
+</P>
+
+<BR><BR><BR>
+
+<A NAME="chap09"></A>
+
+<H3 ALIGN="center">
+CHAPTER IX.
+</H3>
+
+<H3 ALIGN="center">
+A GLEAM OF HOPE.
+</H3>
+
+<P>
+As soon as the party had disappeared, I turned to the major and said
+with a smile,&mdash;
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Now, my dear Santiago, let us attend to the needs of these poor
+fellows."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I was now standing full in the firelight, and he glanced at my face
+with a puzzled expression.  Then a half gleam of recognition shone in
+his eyes, and he exclaimed doubtfully&mdash;
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Surely you can't be the boy Crawford who vanished so mysteriously from
+the fort?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I am, though!" said I, laughing at his amazement.  "But we shall have
+time for a talk presently; let us do what we can for these poor fellows
+first.  Is there any water in the cave?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Yes; there is a spring at the far end.  I will fetch some.  Put some
+more wood on the fire; it smokes if allowed to go down."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Of the three wounded men only one was seriously hurt, and he, I feared,
+was beyond the aid of the most skilled surgeon.  However, we did our
+best for all the sufferers, gave them water to drink, arranged them
+comfortably on beds of straw, and bathed and bandaged their wounds.
+Then I washed the cut in my cheek, and Santiago smeared it with a
+native ointment, which he said possessed wonderful healing properties.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Now," said he, "I judge you are ready for late supper or early
+breakfast, whichever you may prefer to call it.  The provisions are
+homely, and I am an indifferent cook, but I can at least give you
+enough to eat.  Those brigands of yours have stored sufficient food
+here for an army."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Carrying a torch, I accompanied him round the cavern, gazing in wonder
+at the piles of Indian corn, the heaps of potatoes, and the strings of
+charqui, the last suspended from the walls.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Come," said I, "there is no need to starve in the midst of plenty.
+What shall we have?  Roast potatoes and jerked beef?  The potatoes will
+require the least attention."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"And they are not bad if you are downright hungry, as I was when we
+crept in here after the affair at Mirabe.  There's a smart soldier
+leading your men, Crawford."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Yes; he is an Englishman named Miller, and a very fine fellow.  But
+how come you to be here?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"We'll talk over these things presently.  Meanwhile, let us cook the
+potatoes.  Bring another handful; I daresay two of the men will be able
+to eat a little breakfast."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"If it is breakfast!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"It must be for us, because we had our supper before you paid us so
+unceremonious a visit.  Of course we were betrayed."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Well, as to that," I replied, "you must ask the colonel; I only acted
+under orders."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Just so.  Well, I am very pleased to see you, though I dislike the way
+in which you introduced yourself.  Cut this piece of beef up finely
+while I fetch some salt."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Have you any?" I asked, in some surprise.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Oh yes.  Your amiable brigands know how to stock a larder."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Two of the wounded men were able to eat, and they were very grateful
+for the food we took them.  Then we returned to the fire, piled up some
+sacks to serve as seats, and began our meal.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+It was all most strange to me and very delightful; it might have been a
+chapter lifted bodily from one of my favourite story-books.  There
+seemed to be a piratical flavour about the whole business.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Perhaps it is as well that I gave my parole," exclaimed the major
+thoughtfully, taking off another potato.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Why?" I asked.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I might have felt tempted to escape," he replied, looking at the coil
+of rope.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"You forget your jailer carries a pistol," I remarked, laughing.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"An empty one," he suggested, shrugging his shoulders.  "No, no, my
+boy; my parole is your only safeguard."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"It is a sufficient one, at any rate."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Yes," said he, rather dreamily, I thought.  "The honour of a Mariano
+is sacred; my father taught me that.  And yet&mdash;and yet, do you know,
+Crawford," he added, in a sharper tone, "I doubt if a parole given to
+brigands should be held to."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I did not at all like this turn in the conversation, the more
+especially as my pistol was really empty.  I had not dreamed of taking
+any precautions, trusting wholly in the Spanish officer's honour.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I looked up at him, and felt reassured; there could be no treachery
+hidden behind that frank, open countenance.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"It seems to me you are talking nonsense, Santiago," I said cheerfully.
+"A man's word is his bond in any case&mdash;that is, if he be a man."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+He took no notice of my remark, but sat musing, leaving half his food
+untouched.  As for me, I helped myself to some more beef, though I must
+confess the major's wild talk nearly destroyed my appetite.  His manner
+had changed so suddenly and abruptly that I knew not what to make of
+it.  I might perhaps have reloaded my pistol without his knowledge, but
+this would be a confession that I had lost faith in him.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Come," said I jocularly, pointing to his food, "you pay your cooking a
+poor compliment."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+To this he made no reply, but looking up after a time exclaimed,&mdash;
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I have news for you.  I had almost forgotten, but I must tell you
+before going."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Going?" I cried; "we cannot go before the doctor arrives."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"You cannot, but I can, and must.  My mind is made up.  Do not try to
+thwart me; I should be sorry if you got hurt.  Sit still, my boy; don't
+stir a finger, or I will kill you!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I looked at him in amazement.  His face was flushed, his eyes shone
+wildly; he spoke with a rapid and angry vehemence.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"By St. Philip," he cried, "I should be a cur to place honour before
+loyalty!  My duty is to my king, do you hear?  Shall I help a parcel of
+bandits to set the king at naught?  Shall I bring disgrace on a family
+that has stood by the throne for untold centuries?  My father died on
+the battlefield with the king's banner above his head, as did his
+father before him.  And I am to stay in a cage when the door is open!
+I am to let these upstarts trample on the king's rights!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The words swept from his lips in a sweeping, tempestuous torrent, and
+when they were done he leaped to his feet with an angry cry.  I sat in
+my place looking at him steadily, but making no movement.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I tell you it is monstrous!" he continued.  "I care nothing for
+myself, but I cannot desert the king!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"His Majesty must be greatly in need of friends," I remarked dryly, "to
+accept the aid of a perjured soldier."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+It was strong language.  I knew it would hurt him cruelly; but a
+desperate disease requires a desperate remedy.  I thought at first he
+would kill me.  His eyes blazed fiercely, and he sprang forward with
+uplifted hands.  Suddenly he paused, and returned abruptly to his seat.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Thinking it best not to disturb him, I rose and made the round of the
+wounded men.  I felt awfully sorry for the young major, and almost
+wished he had not passed his word to Jos�.  Having done so, he must, of
+course, abide by it, unless he cared to live with tarnished honour.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Presently, returning to the fire, I threw some more fuel on, and sat
+down again on my heap of sacks.  Santiago had covered his face with his
+hands, and was rocking himself gently to and fro, like a child in pain.
+Evidently the wild fit had passed, and he had overcome the temptation
+which had tried him so sorely.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+For nearly an hour we sat there, speaking no word, then looking me
+straight in the face, he said suddenly,&mdash;
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Crawford, I have acted like a madman, but there is nothing to be
+feared now."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Nor before," I answered cheerfully.  "You would not have gone a
+hundred yards.  Come, let us now dismiss the subject.  After all, it
+was no more than a bad dream."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"By St. Philip," he exclaimed, "it was a very ugly one.  However, I am
+in my right mind now, and as soon as we arrive at Moquegua I will
+withdraw my parole.  Then if a chance to escape comes, I can avail
+myself of it with an easy conscience.  You have not reloaded your
+pistol?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"No.  Why should I? there is no need of it."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Not now," he said.  "I am master of myself now," and he actually
+smiled.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"You were going to tell me some news," I observed, after a pause.  "Now
+that you have roused my curiosity, I hope you will satisfy it."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I spoke half jestingly, and more for the sake of keeping up the
+conversation than in the expectation of hearing any particular
+information.  It was unlikely, I considered, that Santiago could tell
+me anything of real interest.  In this I was much mistaken, as you will
+find.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I don't know," said he thoughtfully, "that it will be doing you any
+real kindness, yet it is only right that you should know.  Of course,
+you will understand that your escape occasioned some little stir among
+the garrison of the fort."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I am quite ready to believe it," I replied, chuckling at the
+remembrance.  "I have often laughed to think of your astonishment in
+the morning."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"It was no laughing matter to us, I can assure you.  The commandant was
+furious, and went about vowing vengeance against everybody.
+Search-parties scoured the neighbourhood in all directions, but with no
+result, and we at last concluded that by some means you had been taken
+off by ship."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Quite a wrong conclusion," I interposed.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"We could think of no other.  However, to get on with the story.  In
+the midst of the confusion Barejo turned up on his way back to Lima.
+He was simply furious, and threatened to put us all in irons, the
+commandant included; which, by the way, was absurd."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"It was paying me a very high compliment."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Don't be puffed up, or imagine the general was afraid of you," laughed
+Santiago.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Oh!" I exclaimed, affecting to feel disappointed, "that alters the
+case.  But why should he be angry at my escape?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Because he really wished to keep you out of mischief."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Then I have sadly misjudged him."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I think you have.  Of course, I don't profess to understand the
+matter, but it seems to be something in this way.  When we have crushed
+this rebellion, the estates of those who have borne arms against the
+king will be confiscated."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Spoils to the victors!" I laughed; "an old-fashioned principle."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"And, of course," continued Santiago, not heeding the interruption,
+"your father's estates will be among them.  Now, as far as I can
+gather, Barejo thought that by preventing you from joining the rebels
+something might be saved from the wreck."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"That was very kind of the general," I remarked.  "I had no idea that
+he took any interest in my affairs.  But isn't it possible, major, that
+you are going a trifle too fast?  Suppose, for instance, that the
+rebels, as you call us, should win?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The major tossed his head scornfully.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"That is utterly impossible!" he answered, with a short, quick snap.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"But let us suppose it, just for argument," I urged.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Well in that case," said he, "of which there is no possible
+likelihood, your father will keep his property."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+At first I thought he had forgotten, but something in his face held my
+attention, and brought the blood to my head with a rush.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Do you mean&mdash;  What is it?  Tell me quickly!  Is my father&mdash;"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Alive!  That is my news; but you must not build on it too greatly.  I
+can only tell you he was not slain that day in the mountains.  He was
+dangerously wounded, but was still living when the soldiers carried him
+away."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Where did they take him?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"That I do not know; neither, I think, does Barejo.  Perhaps, and in my
+opinion most likely, to the forts at Callao."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The major's news, as you may imagine, filled me with the liveliest
+astonishment and excitement.  My father alive!  I could hardly credit
+the statement.  What would my mother say?  How would she receive the
+startling information?  I rose from my seat and walked about the
+cavern, trying to think it over coolly.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Then it dawned upon me why Santiago had said he would not be doing me
+any real kindness in talking of the discovery.  After all, his
+information only reopened the old wounds.  More than two years had
+passed since my father's disappearance, and many things had happened in
+that time.  Not every one who entered the casemates of Callao came out
+alive.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"But," said I aloud, "some one must know the truth.  A man can't be
+shut up without authority, even in Peru."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I wish I could help you," replied the major.  "As soon as I escape
+from Moquegua I will make inquiries."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Thank you; but I fear it will be a long time to wait," I answered
+gloomily.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Not at all!  La Hera will return in a week or two, and your Miller
+will be too busy running away to look after prisoners.  Imitate me, my
+boy, and make Hope your best friend."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+In trying to cheer me he forgot his own distress.  The light returned
+to his eyes, the smile to his face, and he seemed to have banished all
+memory of his recent despair.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Come," said he cheerfully, "put your doubts and fears aside for the
+present.  Our wounded want attention; we must not neglect them."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I tried hard to act upon his advice, but all the time continued to
+wonder whether my father was alive or dead.  That was the one question
+that racked my brain, and to it I could give no answer.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+We had just made our patients comfortable, with the exception of one
+who was dying fast, when a shrill whistle sounded outside.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"The surgeon!" I exclaimed, running to the entrance.  "Yes, there he is
+with the guide and two soldiers."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Two bandits!" said Santiago banteringly.  "Give the men their proper
+name."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Soldiers or bandits, they know how to fight.  Help me to uncoil the
+rope, will you?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"That's almost as bad as asking a man to make the noose he is to hang
+in.  You forget that on leaving here I shall go straight to prison."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I had forgotten, major, and sorry enough I am to remember it.  Still,
+as La Hera returns so soon, it will be only a temporary inconvenience,
+and I'm sure Colonel Miller will treat you well."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Santiago laughed.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"You will make me fancy soon that imprisonment is a privilege worth
+paying for," he exclaimed.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Hardly that," I replied; "but, as Barejo said, it keeps one out of
+mischief."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+We lowered the rope, the guide attached the surgeon's instruments, and
+at a signal we hauled up.  Then the rope went down again, the two
+soldiers climbed to the cave, and the doctor followed unsteadily.  It
+was evident that this novel method of visiting patients found no favour
+in his eyes; he was obviously nervous, and twice during the ascent I
+quite expected to see him go headlong.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+He was a citizen of Moquegua, very young, and utterly unsuited for his
+present errand.  So great was his agitation that when he had planted
+his feet firmly on the floor of the cave his hands still clung like
+grim death to the rope.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"You're all right now," I said, leading him away from the mouth of the
+cave.  "Rather a queer way of getting into a house, isn't it?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"The saints preserve me!" he exclaimed, while his teeth chattered like
+castanets, "this is horrible.  A dozen times, coming up that rope, I
+wished I'd never been born.  But it's the last time I'll practise
+doctoring outside Moquegua."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"You did very creditably, I assure you, doctor," observed Santiago,
+whose eyes gleamed with fun; "such grace, such agility, is given to
+few.  I should have thought your life had been spent in scaling
+mountains."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The doctor looked from Santiago to me, hardly knowing what to make of
+such flattery.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Faith," exclaimed he at last, "I hope there is an easier way of
+getting down than of coming up."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"There is," said the major, "and much more expeditious.  You have but
+to step outside the cave, and there you are.  Most people, however,
+prefer to go down by the rope."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The doctor groaned.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I shall never do it," said he, "never!  I shall be shut up in this
+place for the rest of my life."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"There will be one advantage in that," remarked Santiago pleasantly:
+"your patients will always be able to find you.  Now I fear we must
+tear ourselves from your side."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Do your best with these poor fellows," I said.  "The one in the corner
+yonder will not trouble you long; the others are getting on nicely.
+You will find this cavern quite a comfortable dwelling-place.  There is
+plenty of food, a spring of clear water, and enough fuel to keep a fire
+going for weeks."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Meanwhile," observed Santiago, "we will ask the good folks of Moquegua
+to make a nice long ladder, so that you can get down without trouble."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+It was really very laughable to watch the doctor's face as the major
+prepared to descend.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"He will be killed," said he dolefully.  "It is a clear case of
+suicide.  Look, he has missed his foothold, and will be dashed to
+pieces!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Nonsense," I said, with a laugh; "there is no danger if you don't
+think about it.  See, it is nothing but going down a flight of steps
+backwards."  But he covered his face with his hands and shuddered.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+When the major had reached the ground, I grasped the rope, saying,&mdash;
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Farewell, doctor; I hope you will have a comfortable time.  And don't
+worry about coming down; you'll find it an easy matter enough."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Good-bye," answered he gloomily; "I shall never see you or any one
+else again.  I shall die up here for certain."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The fellow was so genuinely frightened that I assured him we would
+devise some plan to rescue him; on which he brightened up considerably,
+and I began the descent.  I asked the guide where he had left the
+horses.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"At the village, se�or," he replied, "on the other side of the
+mountain."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+In answer to a further question, he told us that the doctor would not
+cross the narrow track, and that they had, in consequence, been
+compelled to travel many miles out of their way.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I think he was right," exclaimed Santiago, when we reached the spot.
+"This is a far worse venture than climbing to the cavern by the rope."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+And indeed, seen in broad daylight, with every rock standing out
+pitilessly clear, and every chasm yawning wide, the place was enough to
+daunt the spirit of the bravest.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Familiarity had rendered the guide indifferent to the danger, but I
+felt as nervous as when crossing the previous evening.  However, I
+could not make a parade of my anxiety, so I set foot on the narrow path
+with a jaunty air but quaking heart.  Santiago smiled too, but I fancy
+he was by no means sorry when we gained the farther side without
+accident.  Then we jested about the past danger, talking lightly and as
+if it were an affair of no moment.  Nevertheless, I was thankful the
+heat of the sun provided an excuse for the perspiration that streamed
+down my face.
+</P>
+
+<BR><BR><BR>
+
+<A NAME="chap10"></A>
+
+<H3 ALIGN="center">
+CHAPTER X.
+</H3>
+
+<H3 ALIGN="center">
+A STORMY INTERVIEW.
+</H3>
+
+<P>
+On our march to the town, Santiago assumed a light-hearted carelessness
+that was far from his real feelings.  He laughed merrily, made joking
+remarks, and behaved generally as if the prospect of a spell of prison
+life was most agreeable.  This was, of course, mere outside show.  He
+was too proud to let his captors see his real distress; but his acting
+did not deceive me.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+We had reached the market-place, and I was wondering at the absence of
+the soldiers, when Jos� suddenly appeared, coming from the governor's
+house.  On seeing us, he approached, saying, "You have been a long
+time.  I began to think you had missed your way."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"The guide was late in the first place, as the doctor would not take
+the nearest way, and we did not hurry.  But where are the troops?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Off again!" said he, his eyes twinkling: "the colonel has gone for a
+little jaunt of ninety miles or so to intercept a Spanish column.
+Thank goodness, we have missed that!&mdash;How did you leave your men,
+major?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"One is dying, I fear," replied Santiago; "but the others will soon be
+all right, unless your doctor kills them!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I was sorry to send him," said Jos�, "but I had no choice.  He was the
+only one in the place available.  He didn't offer his services, I can
+assure you."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I can well believe it," laughed the major.  "The poor fellow was half
+dead with fright when he reached us, and vows he will never risk the
+danger of getting down again."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"We must have him tied to the rope, and lowered like a sack of
+potatoes.  Meanwhile, what is to be done with you?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"The only suggestion I can make is that you set me free!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Perhaps I had better report to the governor," observed Jos�
+thoughtfully.  "He is Colonel Miller's representative.  I daresay he
+will parole you till the chief comes."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"No, no!" cried the major hastily; "I've done with paroles!  From this
+moment I consider myself free to escape."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"To <I>try</I>," corrected Jos�.  "Well, the effort will fill up your time,
+and keep you from being idle.  Of course," he added, "it will change
+the position a little.  We can still remain on friendly terms, only I
+must not forget to load my pistol.  And now let us interview the
+governor."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+A sentry stood at the outside gate, and several soldiers were in the
+courtyard; but passing through, we entered the house, and found
+ourselves in the governor's presence.  He was a military-looking man,
+though holding no rank in the army&mdash;a Spaniard who had recently come
+over from the enemy.  Two or three officers were in the room, and a
+young man sat at a table, writing.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Jos� told his story briefly, concluding with a proposal that the
+prisoner should be left in his charge until Colonel Miller's return.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"There is a more agreeable way still," observed the governor, with a
+bland smile.&mdash;"Major Mariano, I am not unaware either of your name or
+your services.  I know you for a dashing and brilliant officer, far and
+away superior to those nominally above you.  I am not without the power
+to make you an offer.  The Spanish cause is lost; in a few months your
+armies will be crushed; Peru will be independent.  Until that time you
+will languish miserably in prison.  Afterwards I cannot pretend to
+prophesy your fate; but I offer you an opportunity to escape from the
+wreck.  Join the Patriot army, and I pledge my word that San Martin
+shall give you the rank of colonel at once.  In a year it will be your
+own fault if you are not a general.  Come, what do you say?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Only a few hours previously I had seen an outburst of temper on
+Santiago's part; now I beheld another, which by comparison made the
+first appear mild.  His eyes literally blazed with anger; his face was
+red; he actually quivered with passion.  Twice he endeavoured to speak,
+and the words choked in his throat.  Jos� laid a hand restrainingly on
+his shoulder; he flung it off passionately.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Dog of a traitor!" cried he at last, "do you think the blood of
+Santiago Mariano is as base as yours?  Do you imagine I am a rat like
+you to leave a sinking ship?  What! lend my sword to a parcel of
+beggarly cutthroats and vagabonds?  I would rather eat out my heart in
+the blackest dungeon of Peru!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Once a flush of shame overspread the governor's face, but he recovered
+himself promptly, and listened with a bitter smile till the end.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"You shall eat your words if not your heart," he exclaimed brutally;
+and turning to an officer, he added, "Rincona, bring in your men and
+the heaviest irons that can be found in the prison."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Santiago smiled scornfully; but Jos�, pushing forward, said quietly,
+"You cannot do that, se�or.  This man is my prisoner, for whom I am
+responsible to Colonel Miller alone.  Until the return of the colonel,
+therefore, I cannot let him go from my keeping."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+For a moment Rincona hesitated, but at the governor's second command he
+left the room, while the other officers clustered round their chief.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Jos� produced a pistol and cocked it, saying coolly, "The man who lays
+hands on my prisoner dies."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Santiago turned to him with a pleasant smile.  "Thanks, my friend," he
+said, "but I cannot let you suffer on my behalf.  Besides, there is
+Crawford to be considered.  The consequences may be fatal to him, as he
+is sure to stand by you."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Don't hesitate on my account, Jos�," said I.  But the major's words
+had made an impression, and a shadow of annoyance flitted across my
+companion's brow.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+However, there was little time for thinking.  We heard the tramp, tramp
+of marching feet, and presently Rincona entered, followed by about a
+dozen soldiers.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"The irons!" roared the governor, beside himself with passion; "where
+are the irons?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I have sent for them, sir," replied Rincona.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"You might have spared yourself the trouble," remarked Jos�; "they
+shall not be put on."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Yes, yes!" exclaimed Santiago; "what does it matter?  Better so than
+that you two should lose your lives."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I looked at Jos�.  His lips were set like a vice, and I knew that no
+power on earth could move him now.  The situation was decidedly
+unpleasant, and unfortunately there seemed to be no way out.  True, he
+might kill the governor, but that would only still further complicate
+matters.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The soldiers, as usual, stood with impassive faces; the affair was none
+of theirs, save so far as obeying orders went.  The officers were
+restless and uneasy, and one of them kept up a whispered conversation
+with the governor, who listened impatiently, and from time to time
+shook his head.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+At last two other men arrived, bearing a set of heavy irons, and once
+again Santiago turned appealingly, but without effect, to Jos�.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+One might have heard a pin drop when the governor, sheltering behind
+his officers, cried in a loud voice, "Put that man in irons!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Stand still!" said Jos�, raising his pistol, and speaking in the
+Indian dialect.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+How the dispute would have ended I cannot tell, but at that moment a
+happy inspiration flashed into my mind.  The soldiers were all Indians,
+and judging by their appearance, Indians of the mountains.  Was it
+possible that any of them acknowledged the authority of the Silver Key?
+If so, we were safe.  It was a poor chance, but there seemed to be no
+other.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Trembling with impatience, I opened my shirt at the neck, and drew
+forth the brigand chief's gift.  At first no one took any notice; but
+when I held the key to view, the Indians raised a shout of mingled joy
+and surprise.  Then I looked at Santiago and laughed, saying, "We are
+safe!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The Indians jabbered away in their own language, talking with one
+another, and pointing to the emblem of authority which hung from my
+neck.  The governor stood like a man in a dream; the officers gazed
+alternately at me and the native soldiers, as if doubting the evidence
+of their senses.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"How many of you are followers of the Silver Key, and of Raymon
+Sorillo?" I asked.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"All, all, master!" they cried.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"And those outside?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"All, all!" they again shouted.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I can trust you to help me?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"To the death, master!" they cried with one voice.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+At that I turned to the governor, saying with a smile, "The position is
+changed, se�or.  I have but to raise my hand, and you will feel the
+weight of your own irons.  But there is no need to quarrel.  Colonel
+Miller will be here in a few days, and he shall decide between us.
+Meanwhile we will guard the prisoner."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The governor nearly choked with anger, and threatened violently that as
+soon as the colonel returned he would have us all shot.  However, as it
+was evident that the soldiers would obey my orders, he raised no
+further objection to our taking Santiago away.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"By St. Philip," exclaimed the major, "the room was hot!  Are you a
+magician, Crawford?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Upon my word I begin to think so.  At any rate, I possess a magical
+key."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Which has saved our lives," observed Jos� grimly.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"And I suspect," laughed Santiago, "that once upon a time it unlocked
+the door of a prison cell!  But won't those natives suffer for this?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I don't think so.  They are too strong, and their chief has more power
+in Peru than the viceroy and San Martin combined."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"You know him, then?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Yes, and so does Jos�.  He has done me good service, for which I am
+grateful, though I could never like the man.  But here we are at the
+house.  The good folk will wonder at our bringing an uninvited guest."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Fortunately a room had been set apart for us, so we could talk at our
+ease.  I was burning to tell Jos� about my father, but first of all we
+had to come to an understanding with Santiago.  This time he made no
+demur at giving his parole.  "In fact," said he gaily, "you have forced
+my hand, and I have no choice."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"So much the better," remarked Jos�; "we may as well be comfortable
+together till the colonel arrives."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"And after that we may be hanged comfortably together!" laughed the
+major.  "How do you like the prospect?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I can trust Miller.  He is an honourable man, and will do what is
+right.  It is Crawford who will suffer for inciting the troops to
+mutiny."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Jos�," said I presently, "I haven't told you that Major Mariano is an
+old friend of mine."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"And at one time his jailer," interrupted Santiago.  "That ought to
+make him feel grateful."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Oh," exclaimed Jos�, "you are the captain Jack has often talked about!
+Well, I'm glad we have been able to do a little for you."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"This morning while we were waiting for your precious doctor," I
+continued, "he told me a very startling piece of news."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Yes?" said Jos�.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"About my father."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Jos� sprang to his feet, demanding fiercely, "What do you know of Se�or
+Crawford, major?  Don Eduardo came to his end by foul means: he was not
+slain by the government, but by some one who hoped to profit by his
+death."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"According to the major's information, he was not slain at all," I
+said, and proceeded to relate the story.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Jos� listened attentively to every word, and then asked Santiago
+innumerable questions.  Like myself, he displayed great excitement, but
+I judged from his expression that he entertained little hope of my
+father being still alive.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"The truth is," said he, "Don Eduardo had made numerous powerful
+enemies both in public and private life; and as we all know, any stick
+is good enough to beat a dog with.  Besides, he owned vast estates,
+and&mdash;"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Go on!" laughed Santiago as Jos� hesitated; "the king's party put him
+to death in order to seize them!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"No, no," said Jos� hotly; "I don't tar all Spaniards with the same
+brush.  Still, they aren't all saints either, and I say some of them
+killed him under cloak of the government.  And some day," he added, "I
+will prove it.  As to his being alive, I think there is small chance of
+it.&mdash;And Jack, my boy, I would not mention the matter to your mother."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"But," said I, clinging to my shred of hope, "he was not killed in the
+mountains, and we have heard nothing since."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Jos� let me talk, and listened kindly to my arguments, but I noticed
+that none of them made any impression.  At the best, he said, my father
+had been thrown into prison seriously hurt, and it was not likely that
+he had survived the confinement.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Have you ever seen the casemates at Callao, major?" he asked.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Yes," said Santiago, "and very unhealthy places they are.  But there
+are more prisons than those in Peru."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+It would be wearisome to repeat our conversation, for, after all, we
+were arguing in the dark, having only the major's imperfect story to go
+by.  Besides, as Jos� said, many events had happened during the last
+two years, and my father was by no means the only noted man in Peru to
+disappear.  So our talk travelled in a circle, leaving off at the
+starting-point, and for sole effect it extinguished the gleam of hope
+which the major's story had kindled.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+In the evening, at Jos�'s suggestion, I went into the streets to pick
+up any information concerning the governor's doings.  Everything seemed
+quiet; the sentries were at their posts as usual, while the soldiers
+off duty wandered about the town.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+They greeted me respectfully, raising their hands in salute and
+standing at attention, as if I had been an officer of high degree.
+Recognizing a sergeant who had been in the governor's room, I stopped
+to ask a few questions.  Greatly to my relief, I learned that, with the
+exception of a few Spanish officers, the troops in the town were all
+Indians from the mountains.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+As the man seemed smart and intelligent, I told him how matters stood,
+and that we depended entirely upon him and his comrades until the
+coming of the English colonel.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"You can trust us, master," he replied, and indeed his talk made it
+quite clear that the friend of Raymon Sorillo and the holder of the
+Silver Key might rely on the Indians in Moquegua even against Miller
+himself.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Jos�, I think, felt rather relieved on hearing my news; while Santiago
+laughed heartily, prophesying that, if the Spaniards were defeated, I
+should in a few years be king, or at least president, of Peru.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I had no idea," said he, "that you were so important a person.  No
+wonder Barejo wished to keep you shut up!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+That night we took it in turns to watch; but the governor attempted
+nothing against us, and the next day we walked openly in the street
+without molestation.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Colonel Miller had vanished into space, and for nearly a week we heard
+nothing of him; then one morning an Indian scout rode wearily into the
+town with the news that the Englishman was close at hand.  Immediately
+the people rushed out in hundreds to line the street, and to cheer the
+returning warriors.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Jos� stayed indoors with the major, but sent me out to get an early
+word with our leader.  Bright, alert, and cheery as ever, he rode at
+the head of his troops, smiling and bowing to the inhabitants as they
+greeted him with rousing cheers.  Then came the soldiers&mdash;the cavalry
+on dead-tired horses, the infantry on jaded mules&mdash;with a number of
+prisoners in the midst.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The animals were tired enough; but the men!  I can hardly describe
+their condition.  Their faces were haggard, their eyes heavy and
+bloodshot; some were nearly asleep, others had scarcely strength to sit
+upright.  Very little grass had grown under their feet.  As soon as
+they were dismissed, the citizens pounced on them, taking them into the
+houses, where food and drink were provided in abundance.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The governor had come out to meet the colonel, whom I expected to see
+return with him; but at the last moment he turned aside, and with a
+laughing exclamation went straight to his own quarters, whither I
+followed him.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Hullo, Crawford!" cried he.  "So you didn't get La Hera?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"No, sir; but we captured a major, and I wish to speak to you about
+him."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Won't it wait?" he asked, with a comical expression.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I am afraid not, sir.  The truth is, we've had a quarrel with the
+governor, and&mdash;"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"You want to get in your version first!  A very good plan.  Well, fire
+away, but don't make it long; I've a lot of things on hand."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+By this time we had entered his room, and going straight to the heart
+of the affair, I told my story in the fewest possible words.  The
+colonel listened with rather a grave face, and when I had finished he
+said, "It's an awkward mess, especially just now.  It's absolutely
+necessary to keep friends with the governor, and I don't like this
+tampering with the troops.  But, of course, I won't have the prisoner
+put in irons or treated differently from the rest.  Bring him here now,
+and I'll settle the matter at once."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Yes, sir," said I, thankful to get off so lightly.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The colonel had already begun some fresh work when I returned with Jos�
+and the major, but he rose from his seat and saluted the Spaniard
+courteously.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I understand it is useless to ask for your parole, major," he said.
+"Your mind is quite made up on the point?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Yes, sir," answered Santiago, smiling in his easy, graceful way.  "An
+opportunity to escape may not arise but if it does, I shall certainly
+seize it."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Quite right!" exclaimed the colonel; "but I fear you will be
+disappointed.  However, though guarding you rigidly, we shall put you
+to as little inconvenience as possible.  You will find half a dozen
+companions in misfortune in the prison.  Most of the captured rank and
+file have joined the Patriots."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The major's lip curled scornfully, but he only said, "I am obliged to
+you, colonel, for your kindness.  Some day perhaps I may be able to
+return it."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Not in the same way, I hope," laughed Colonel Miller.  "I have had a
+taste of Spanish prison life already, major.  But when the war is over
+I trust we may meet again."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Then he sent for an officer and a file of soldiers, and Santiago turned
+to bid us a cheery farewell.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Good-bye," said he brightly; "I have had a pleasant time with you.&mdash;If
+I do succeed in escaping, Crawford, I will inquire further into your
+father's story.&mdash;Ah, here is my escort!" and with a salute to the
+colonel and a nod to us, he took his place in front of the men, while
+the officer received his chief's instructions.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"He's a plucky fellow.  I should have liked to set him free," I said,
+as we strolled back to our quarters.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"To do more mischief!" growled Jos�.  "I'm sorry for him, in a way, but
+it's better for us that he should be under lock and key.  And that
+reminds me!  How did Colonel Miller take the Silver Key business?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Very badly; called it tampering with the troops."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"So it was, but it saved our lives, all the same.  I shall be rather
+pleased when we leave this district; the governor won't regard either
+of us too favourably."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"He can't hurt us now the colonel is here."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"No," replied Jos�, with a curious smile "but we might meet with a
+nasty accident.  Perhaps you remember my remark, made two years ago,
+that accidents are common in Peru.  It's as true now as then."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+As it chanced, Jos� was shortly to have his wish; for although we did
+not know it then, the colonel had decided to abandon Moquegua.  Many of
+the troops were down with the ague, the place was a difficult one to
+defend, unless against a weak attack, and La Hera was already on the
+march with a force far superior to ours.  This, however, we did not
+learn till two days later.
+</P>
+
+<BR><BR><BR>
+
+<A NAME="chap11"></A>
+
+<H3 ALIGN="center">
+CHAPTER XI.
+</H3>
+
+<H3 ALIGN="center">
+A NARROW ESCAPE.
+</H3>
+
+<P>
+"It is a great honour," exclaimed Jos�, "and you should feel proud."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I had just returned from an interview with the colonel, who had asked
+me to undertake for a short time the duties of his private secretary.
+It seemed a simple task then, but afterwards I regarded it differently.
+For the next three weeks I was attached to the colonel, who took me
+with him everywhere.  A secretary is generally supposed to write, but
+my work consisted in riding.  Day after day, from morning till night,
+we were on horseback, now travelling over sandy deserts to the
+seashore, again penetrating into the heart of the mountains&mdash;hungry,
+thirsty, and tired, and always in danger of falling into the hands of
+the enemy.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+As a measure of precaution our little force retired to Tacna, where,
+much to my satisfaction, the colonel received from Lima news of an
+armistice.  This, of course, extended to all parts of the country; but
+I was mistaken in thinking it would increase my leisure, as my time was
+still kept fully occupied.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+In one way this was a good thing, as it kept me from brooding over
+Santiago's story, though even at the busiest times the thought of my
+father's fate would creep into my mind.  I saw nothing of Jos�, who had
+been left behind with some Indians to hold a mountain pass, but
+occasionally I paid a brief visit to the Spanish prisoners for a chat
+with the friendly major.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+We had been at Tacna a month, when one evening Colonel Miller said
+abruptly: "Crawford, the armistice is at an end, and we must retreat.
+Tell Videla to send the stores and the sick to Arica the first thing in
+the morning; then carry this order to Ilo.  You will find three small
+brigs there; they are to sail at once for Arica.  Take Castro the guide
+with you, and rejoin me on the march to Arica."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Very good, sir," I replied, though my words belied my feelings.
+However, I went out, gave Videla the colonel's message, and hunted up
+the guide.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Castro was an educated Indian, trained by one of the missionaries, and
+a very decent fellow.  I found him sound asleep; but he rose at once,
+looked to see if his bag of coca was full, loaded his pistols, and
+saddled his horse.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"A pleasant night for a ride, lieutenant,"&mdash;the colonel had given me
+that rank,&mdash;"and every yard will take us further from the Spaniards.  I
+hear that La Hera is getting ready to swoop."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"He will find his pigeon a hawk if he comes too close," I answered,
+laughing.  "Bring your horse, and wait for me at the hospital."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The night was still young, and many people, civilians and military,
+were in the street, talking in excited whispers.  It was plain that
+they had heard of La Hera's approach, and were discussing what they
+knew of the colonel's plans.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Soon, however, the town was left behind, and we had fairly started on
+our journey.  There was no danger in it, except that of getting lost,
+which, with Castro for a guide, was not likely to happen.  He knew the
+district as well as, perhaps better than, I knew the streets of Lima.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+We jogged along quietly till midnight, not wishing to tire the animals,
+and then stopped near the edge of a sandy desert for an hour's rest.
+By this time I had begun to hate the very sight of sand; it seemed to
+me more dreary and pitiless than the stoniest of barren ground.  Castro
+did not mind in the least, but lay on his back looking at the starry
+sky and placidly chewing his coca.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Come, lieutenant," said he briskly at the end of an hour, "it is time
+to mount;" and we were soon plodding on as patiently as before.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+It was nine o'clock when we finally arrived at Ilo.  It may have been
+owing to my own tired state, but I thought I had never seen such a
+miserable and desolate spot in all my life.  The houses were wretched
+mud-built hovels, and the few people in the place looked woebegone
+beyond belief.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The three brigs were in keeping with the village, being old and
+worm-eaten, and the craziest craft imaginable.  I would not have sailed
+one across a pond.  However, I sought out the commander of this ragged
+squadron, and gave him the colonel's order.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+On reading it his face brightened, and he declared his intention of
+running out to sea that very afternoon.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"He doesn't look much of a hero," observed Castro; "but," with an
+expressive glance at the three floating coffins, "I imagine there are
+few braver men in Peru."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"One need not be brave to seize any chance of getting away from this
+depressing place," said I.  "I believe I could easily take the risk of
+being drowned if there were no other way of escape."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"You will have the risk, lieutenant, if we are to go afloat in these
+brigs; but my opinion is that the bottoms will drop out of them before
+they reach Arica."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"In that case we must either beat La Hera or be annihilated."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"That's what it looks like," replied Castro coolly.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+We stabled our horses in a tumble-down shed, fed and watered them, and,
+as it was impossible to leave till they were rested, lay down to snatch
+a brief sleep on the ground.  We were invited to use the floor of a
+hovel for a couch, but after glancing at it, declined with great
+politeness and many sonorous words of thanks.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+When we awoke the brigs had disappeared, and a roaring wind was
+sweeping down from the north.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"They'll never make headway against that," remarked Castro.  "We can
+return to the colonel and tell him his brigs are at the bottom of the
+sea.  There will be a pretty tune played presently, and La Hera will
+provide the music."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+To a sailor, perhaps, the danger would not have seemed formidable; but
+standing on that desolate beach, listening to the hurricane rush of the
+wind, I could not but think Castro was right.  And if indeed he had
+prophesied truly, then was our little force in sad straits.  Burdened
+with sick, hampered by fleeing patriots, encumbered by prisoners, with
+half his troops weakened as usual by ague, the English colonel could
+neither fight nor flee.  What, then, could he do?  By this time every
+one knew him too well to dream he would surrender.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Castro," said I, "we carry bad news, and bad news flies apace.  Let us
+keep up the reputation of the old proverb.  Half an hour or so may make
+all the difference in the world."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+He made a grimace as if to say that a few minutes more or less would
+matter little; but he saddled his horse promptly, nevertheless, and was
+ready to start as soon as I.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I reckon," he said, "that we may strike the road from Tacna to Arica
+by midnight to-morrow, unless our animals founder by the way.  Can you
+trust your horse?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"The colonel selected him."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"That ought to be sufficient warrant.  The chief knows a horse, though
+he will ride in the absurd English style."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+There were few men in the country who would have cared to cut
+themselves adrift as Castro did on this ride of ours to intercept the
+marching Patriots.  His only guides were those he could interpret from
+nature.  While daylight lasted, he steered by the sun; at night, by the
+stars and the faint wind that fanned our faces.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+For twenty-four hours, during which time we rested, of course, both for
+our own sakes and for the sakes of our animals, not one human being
+crossed our path, or even came within sight of us.  And during that
+time, also, we saw neither bird nor beast, nor any manner of living
+thing, save only ourselves and our animals.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+And then, quite unexpectedly to me, we came upon an oasis in the dreary
+desert&mdash;a little hamlet with mud-walled hovels, but better than those
+at Ilo, and having patches of cultivated ground enclosed.  The natives
+had reclaimed this piece of land by means of the waters of a
+moderate-sized stream, and lived in almost as great isolation as if
+they had been on Robinson Crusoe's island.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+They were neither Patriots nor Royalists, and I doubt much whether they
+knew of the struggle going forward; but they had kind hearts, and gave
+us a warm welcome, pressing upon us gifts of fruits and vegetables to
+the limits of their scanty stock.  They found ample forage, too, for
+the weary animals, and we stayed there a matter of three hours to rest
+Castro's horse, which had shown symptoms of breaking down.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I seized this opportunity to snatch an hour's sleep; but my guide was
+kept chattering by the natives, who listened with amazement to his
+news.  They knew no Spanish, and could not understand the native patois
+I spoke; neither could I understand a word of what they said.  As for
+Castro, I suppose no man in South America had the gift of so many
+Indian dialects.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"After all, lieutenant," exclaimed he, as we took leave of this simple
+community, "I doubt if these people have not the best of life.  They
+eat, drink, and are at peace, caring no more for a president than for a
+king."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"And doing nothing for either," I replied, laughing.  "How does the
+horse seem now?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I think he will do this journey.  But if I'm to ride with the colonel,
+he will have to provide me with another."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Throughout the evening we rode silently side by side, while all around
+us was the awful stillness of a dead world.  The sun went down, and
+presently the stars gleamed above us, throwing a ghostly light over the
+sea of sand.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Midnight found us still riding, and another hour passed before Castro
+drew rein at the broken track leading from Tacna to Arica.  Throwing
+the reins over his horse's neck, and jumping down, he examined the
+ground carefully, reading it as skilfully as the student reads a
+printed book.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+To and fro he went, casting off here and there like a hunting-dog, till
+he was satisfied.  Then he returned to me, saying, "Carts have gone by
+hours since, and the infantry quite recently, but I see no signs of
+cavalry."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"They would remain till the last minute, so as to deceive La Hera."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"That is so; but the question is, has the colonel stayed with them?  It
+is to him we want to give our information."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"The infantry can tell us."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"We shall waste time if he is in the rear, and time is precious."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Let us separate.  You go forward; I will ride toward Tacna."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"It is dangerous, se�or."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"You forget that I have been over this route."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Well, as you will.  If the colonel has not passed, I shall return.
+Keep to the track; do not wander from it either to right or to left."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"All right, Castro; I will take care."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+He vaulted to the saddle, wished me a safe journey, and rode off, while
+I turned my horse's head in the opposite direction.  Fortunately the
+night was clear, while the dawn was not far off, so that I had a great
+advantage in steering my way.  True, I rode at no great pace, being
+both afraid and unwilling to spur my jaded beast.  Now and again I even
+dismounted and walked at his head to give him some relief.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+It was perhaps about three o'clock in the morning.  A heavy fog had
+arisen, and I was riding with the greatest care, when suddenly I found
+a musket pointed straight at me, and heard the demand, "Halt, or I
+fire!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The man spoke in Spanish, but his accent showed him to be an Indian,
+and I hoped he was one of Miller's cavalry detachment.  Whistling
+softly, he was at once joined by a second and a third man, the last of
+whom sharply ordered me to dismount.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+At the sound of his voice I laughed aloud, saying, "You post your men
+well, Jos�, but they have not made a great capture this time.  Is the
+colonel here?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"We are all here," said Jos�, giving my hand a grip; "but I thought you
+had gone to Arica.  Is anything wrong?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"A good deal," I answered, speaking in English, so that the Indians
+might not understand.  "I must see Colonel Miller at once."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Jump down, then.  Leave your horse here, and I will take you to him.
+Mind where you step; the men are all tucked in and sound asleep."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+But for the fog, I could by this time have seen my way clearly; as it
+was, I could only just distinguish the ponchos enveloping the men's
+heads.  When the fog lifted, the light showed a more curious spectacle
+than most of you have perhaps ever seen.  It was the custom, whenever
+we halted in a sandy desert, for each man to scoop out for himself a
+shallow grave.  In this he lay, scraping the loose sand over his body
+for bed-clothes, and leaving his head, wrapped in his poncho, above
+ground.  It was, indeed, a most comfortable and delicious bed, as in
+those days, or rather nights, I often proved.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The colonel lay buried alive, as it were, like his men; but he slept
+lightly, and pushing off his sandy bed-clothes at our approach, he
+struggled to his feet.
+</P>
+
+<A NAME="img-151"></A>
+<CENTER>
+<IMG CLASS="imgcenter" SRC="images/img-151.jpg" ALT="Pushing off his sandy bed-clothes at our approach, he struggled to his feet." BORDER="2" WIDTH="408" HEIGHT="580">
+<H4 CLASS="h4center" STYLE="width: 408px">
+Pushing off his sandy bed-clothes at our approach, <BR>
+he struggled to his feet.
+</H4>
+</CENTER>
+
+<P>
+"Who is it?" he asked.  "Crawford, where is your guide?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Gone another way to look for you, colonel."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Have the brigs left Ilo?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Yes; but both Castro and I doubt if they will reach Arica.  They are
+altogether crazy, and as soon as they left the harbour a strong gale
+from the north, which will drive them out of their course, sprang up."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"You are rather a Job's comforter," laughed the colonel.  "I daresay
+they will arrive all right.  Still," he continued, speaking more to
+himself, "everything depends upon their safe arrival&mdash;everything!  Jump
+in, Crawford, and have a nap; I may want you presently."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+He went away with Jos�, while I got into his bed, pulled the sand over
+me, and was fast asleep before the two men had gone a dozen yards.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+For two whole hours I lay like a log; then a soldier pulled the poncho
+from my head, saying that the colonel waited for me at breakfast.  I
+rose quickly, made my toilet&mdash;not an elaborate proceeding, you may be
+sure&mdash;and waited on the colonel.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Sit down," said he, laughing; "it's early in the day for banqueting,
+but we must feast when we can.  I hope you are not blessed with too
+good an appetite?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I don't think I should feel greatly tempted to indulge much at
+present," I replied, with a grimace at the dried meat I was cutting.
+"Indigestion would only too surely follow."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Then," said he, and his eyes twinkled with merriment, "we will eat
+sparingly.  I am going straight to Arica, and you will ride with me."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I am afraid I shall have to get you to find me a fresh horse, as my
+own has broken down, colonel."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Turning to one of the soldiers near, he said, "Ask Major Videla to send
+me a good horse at once.&mdash;Take your time, Crawford; I am awaiting a
+messenger from Tacna."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Nearly an hour passed before he was ready, during which time I saddled
+my fresh mount, transferred my holsters, and had a chat with Jos�.  He
+told me they had been compelled to release their prisoners, Santiago
+among them.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I had no idea you were so hard pressed," I said.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"If La Hera doesn't blunder," answered Jos�, "he can sweep us all into
+his net.  The only thing that saves us now is Miller's skill and
+reputation.  Every one believes he is going to show fight somewhere
+between this and the coast."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Presently the colonel came along, accompanied by Major Videla, to whom
+he gave final directions; and then, bidding me follow, rode from the
+camp.  Four miles out we came upon Castro, walking, and leading his
+horse, which had fallen dead lame.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Have you been into Arica?" asked Miller.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"No, colonel; but I have learned some news.  There are four fine
+vessels in the roadstead; if you could get them, the troops would be
+safe."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Ah!" cried the colonel sharply; and telling Castro to wait for the
+cavalry, he rode off at a great pace towards Arica.  At four o'clock we
+staggered into the town, and were instantly met by the governor with a
+sorrowful tale.  He had secured the use of three vessels, but the
+commander of the fourth absolutely refused to be either coaxed or
+threatened into lending his assistance.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+There was not a moment to be lost, and Colonel Miller, with no other
+attendant than myself, ran down to the beach.  There we got on a balsa,
+or raft, which carried us to a launch, whose crew at once took us
+alongside a fine North American schooner.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Clambering on deck, we found the master, to whom the colonel applied
+for the loan of his vessel.  The sour old sea-dog turned a deaf ear.
+The colonel offered a sum of money that would have bought the schooner
+outright at market value; he would have none of it.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Now, it chanced that some of the crew were Englishmen who had served
+under Miller in the Chilian War; and though I did not know that, I
+could plainly see how interested they were in the discussion.  The
+colonel saw it too, and in a few simple but terse and vigorous words he
+laid the case before them.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+This produced a marked effect.  The men growled their approbation, and
+one sturdy fellow exclaimed stoutly, "I'm not going to see a countryman
+of mine hard pushed without helping him.  What's your sentiments,
+mates?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"The same!" cried they.&mdash;"We'll stand by you, colonel.  The Spaniards
+shan't cut you off if we can help it."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Thanks, men," replied Colonel Miller, "and I'll treat you fairly.
+Neither your master nor you shall have cause to complain."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The skipper, however, was not to be appeased.  He threw up his command
+and went ashore with us, leaving the mate to navigate the vessel.  It
+was rather a high-handed proceeding, perhaps, on the colonel's part,
+but he was saving his troops from an unavailing fight against
+overwhelming odds.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+All that night we worked like slaves.  The launches could not come
+close inshore, so that every one and everything had to be transported
+to them on balsas.  The colonel did not spare himself, and my position
+procured me the honour of standing beside him knee-deep in surf while
+he superintended the embarkation.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Most of the sick were got on board one or other of the four vessels,
+but the worst cases had to remain in hospital.  Then nearly a hundred
+people of the town, who had recently joined the Patriot cause,
+clamoured for protection, which was, of course, afforded.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+In the morning the colonel insisted I should take a rest, but the work
+continued all day, while from time to time scouts came in with the news
+that La Hera was advancing at full speed.  At length it was all done;
+only the colonel and I remained to go on board, and we had just reached
+the launch, when, with a yell and thunder of hoofs, the Royalist
+cavalry galloped down to the beach.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Just too late to take their passage," laughed Miller.  "What a pity!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"There's our late prisoner," I cried, standing up in the launch.  "Look
+at the rascal; he is shaking his sword at us, and laughing."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"He's a fine fellow," remarked the colonel.  "I don't grudge him his
+liberty."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Taking off my cap, I waved it vigorously; to which Santiago replied
+with a salute; and then, as pursuit was impossible, he led his men back
+into the town.
+</P>
+
+<BR><BR><BR>
+
+<A NAME="chap12"></A>
+
+<H3 ALIGN="center">
+CHAPTER XII.
+</H3>
+
+<H3 ALIGN="center">
+A STERN PURSUIT.
+</H3>
+
+<P>
+As soon as our vessels left the shelter of the bay, they felt the full
+force of the gale; and but for skilful handling on the part of their
+crews, would most likely have come to grief.  Even as it was, the more
+timid of the passengers began to think they would have done better in
+trusting to the mercy of the victorious Spaniards.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"It is lucky for us, lieutenant," exclaimed Castro, "that the brigs did
+not reach Arica."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I hope they are safe," I said doubtfully.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Safe enough by this time," he replied&mdash;"at the bottom of the ocean!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Whether or not he was right in his surmise I cannot say, but from that
+day to this I never again heard mention of the unfortunate vessels.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+After being at sea about a week, on reduced rations both of food and of
+water, we ran one night into the roadstead of Pisco, landed, and before
+daylight had made ourselves masters of the town, the Royalists
+hurriedly retreating.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+On board the schooner I had obtained a much-needed rest, but directly
+my feet touched the shore I was set to work again.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+There never was such a man for prompt and instant action as Colonel
+Miller.  As Jos� said more than once, he was always packing twenty-four
+hours' work into twelve, and no one within had ever had a chance to
+shirk his share.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"We must follow up the enemy&mdash;follow them up, and not give them a
+moment's rest!" said he, almost before the nose of our boat had touched
+the shore.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+First, however, it was necessary to obtain animals, and almost before
+day broke a dozen parties were dispatched to scour the surrounding
+district for horses.  The Royalists, however, had been beforehand, and
+it took three days to procure the needful supplies.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Fortunately a woman arrived from Lima with a drove of fifty mules,
+which our leader instantly pressed into the service, in spite of their
+lawful owner's protestations.  She was a fine, handsome, and remarkable
+woman, who traded on her own account like a man, and she made a sturdy
+fight for her property.  Directly the mules were seized she bounced
+into the colonel's room, her eyes ablaze.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Good-morning, madam," said he courteously.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"It's a bad morning for me," she replied.  "Do you know that your men
+have stolen my mules?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Not stolen, madam; only borrowed, by my orders, for the good of the
+Patriot cause."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I defy you to keep them!" she cried.  "See," and waving &amp; paper, added
+triumphantly, "that will make you less high and mighty, Se�or
+Englishman!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The paper was a passport and protection signed by San Martin himself;
+but it produced no effect on the stubborn colonel.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I am sorry, madam," he exclaimed, still courteously, "but my men need
+the mules.  They shall be paid for, handsomely, but I must have them."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The woman gasped with astonishment, and pushing the paper close to the
+colonel's face, cried, "Are you blind?  Can't you see General San
+Martin's name?  Don't you know that he can have you shot to-day if he
+pleases?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Not <I>to-day</I>, madam.  The swiftest messenger could not get here from
+Lima to-day; and thanks to your mules, which are really very fine
+animals, we shall begin to chase the Royalists at dawn."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Luckily she could not see my face as she broke into a torrent of abuse.
+She had a fine command of the Spanish language, which she used for his
+benefit, besides throwing in a number of odd phrases picked up from
+English sailors.  And all the while the colonel beamed upon her
+genially, as if she were paying him the highest compliments.  At length
+she announced, in high-pitched tones, that where her mules went there
+would she go also; she would not trust them to such a band of thieving
+scoundrels.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I am delighted, madam," said the colonel, bowing low; "your society
+will in some degree atone for the hardships of our journey."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Neither of us thought she would really carry out her threat; but early
+next morning she appeared mounted on one of her own mules, and attached
+herself to me.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Madam," said I gravely, trying to imitate the colonel, "this is a
+great pleasure for us; but even at the risk of losing your valued
+company, I must once more point out to you the real nature of this
+journey.  We shall be half starved, besides suffering torments from
+thirst; we shall be worn out by forced marches, and some of us, no
+doubt, will fall victims to the Spanish bullets."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I won't leave my mules," was her only reply.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"But why not sell them to the colonel? he will give you a fair price."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"And what about my profit?" she cried.  "Do you know why I came to
+Pisco?&mdash;to buy brandy at eight dollars a jar, which just now I could
+sell in Lima at eighty!  What do you think of that, young man?  Why, I
+should have cleared a handsome fortune by this trip!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"It is very sad, madam; but soldiers, you know&mdash;"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Soldiers?  Bah!  Look at them riding on my mules!  <I>My</I> mules, mark
+you!  And to think that each of the honest beasts might be carrying
+four jars of brandy at eight dollars a jar! It's a wicked waste of
+mule-flesh!  Eight from eighty leaves seventy-two; take twelve for
+expenses, there's still sixty, and four sixties are two hundred and
+forty&mdash;all clear profit from!  A dozen of your vagabonds would be dear
+at the price!  Look at that rascally fellow cutting my mule with a
+whip!  I will most certainly have your colonel shot!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I think not, madam; you have too tender a heart."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Yes," said she complacently, "that is the truth.  I am not stern
+enough.  But fancy"&mdash;and here she went all over her calculations again,
+winding up with the assertion that we were a set of common thieves and
+rogues.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+By degrees, however, her manner changed: the ill-humour wore off, and
+she became quite a Patriot, saying she would willingly lose her mules
+if the Royalists were hunted down.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+However, about nine o'clock in the morning I left the good lady to pour
+her grievances into more sympathetic ears, being ordered to push on
+with a small detachment of cavalry, guided by Castro.  Jos� was lucky
+enough to stay with the main body.  Captain Plaza was in command of our
+party, and he rode with the guide and me.  Our course to Ica, the first
+village on our route, lay over a burning desert of very loose sand,
+dotted at great intervals by clumps of stunted palms.  It was a
+horrible ride, and when we reached Ica, about four in the afternoon,
+neither men nor animals could go a step further.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The people received us kindly, provided food and drink, and fresh
+horses in place of our wearied animals.  Then we slept for an hour,
+and, thus refreshed, resumed the pursuit.  I have often wondered since
+how any of us survived the hardships of the next few days.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Now and again we obtained an hour's rest, but our leader halted only
+when our animals showed signs of exhaustion.  The Spaniards must have
+suffered as much as, if not more than, ourselves, as occasionally we
+came upon a dead horse or a dead man, killed by sheer fatigue.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+On the third night after leaving lea we had ample proof of their
+desperate straits.  We had left the sandy deserts behind, and were
+toiling along painfully, sustained only by Castro's assurance that he
+knew of a capital camping-ground.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"A fine wooded place," said he, "with grass for the horses, and a clear
+stream of water.  You will be tempted to stay there all night, captain."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Three hours," replied Plaza, "not a moment more.  We must be close on
+their heels now, and I don't mean Santalla to escape if I can help it."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Santalla was a Royalist colonel of whose cruelty I had heard many
+times.  He was a gigantic fellow, of enormous strength; but, according
+to all accounts, a pitiful coward in spite of his boasting.  Indeed,
+any leader of average bravery would have turned and struck a blow at
+the handful of tired riders which now pursued him.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Here we are!" exclaimed Castro presently, and I saw with satisfaction
+the trees on our left hand to which he pointed.  Every bone in my body
+was racked with pain, my lips were parched, my eyes ached, and for the
+last hour I had scarcely been able to keep my seat.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Halting his men, Plaza sent me on with the guide to investigate.
+Leaving our horses, we moved forward swiftly but quietly; there was
+just the possibility of a trap.  The place was almost like an enclosure
+on a large hacienda, but the fence was composed of trees, and we could
+hear the plashing waters of a stream.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Inside the ring was an open space, and there, to our astonishment, we
+beheld some twenty men lying on the grass in all manner of attitudes.
+Not one made the slightest movement, and at first I thought they must
+be dead.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Don't be too sure," whispered Castro, and stooping down he glided
+noiselessly to the nearest man, while I waited with breathless
+eagerness.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Poor beggars!" said he pityingly; "we must have pushed them hard.  I
+don't believe they would waken if a cannon were fired at them!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+This was an exaggeration, but indeed they slept so soundly that our
+men, surrounding them, took away most of their weapons before they
+understood what was going on.  Binding their arms, we pushed and
+dragged them close together, and then the captain placed his men round
+them in a circle.  Sentries were stationed at various places on the
+outer ring, and, much to my disgust, I was told off to visit them
+during the first hour.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Keep a sharp lookout," said the captain, "and go round regularly.
+They are likely to fall asleep if you don't,"&mdash;which I did not think at
+all surprising.  However, I had a good drink of water, and dipped my
+head in the stream, which freshened me somewhat.  Then I began what
+has, perhaps, been the very longest hour in my life.  Fortunately I had
+to walk, and I tried hard to keep my eyes open all the time.  As to the
+captain's "sharp look-out," I concluded he must have been joking.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The hour came to an end at last, and I was free to sleep.  I just lay
+down on the ground, drew my poncho over me, and was sound asleep.  I
+would not have undertaken another hour's duty just then for all the
+gold ever mined.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The capture of the small Spanish detachment was a benefit to us in one
+way: it prevented Plaza from moving so early, and gave us all an extra
+hour's sleep.  However, as soon as day broke, he told off half a dozen
+men to guard the prisoners until the colonel's arrival, and ordered the
+rest to be ready for starting in ten minutes.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"It's nothing to do with me," remarked Castro, as he and I rode out at
+the head of the men; "but the captain's overdoing it.  He's taking the
+heart out of his fellows, and just at the last pinch they'll fall to
+pieces.  There's nothing left in them for a dash at the end."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"We shouldn't shine in a cavalry charge," I admitted, laughing and
+looking at my horse, "unless, indeed, it were under Don Quixote's
+banner!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Well, Crawford," cried the captain, riding up, "something ought to
+happen soon now.  It's a pity we wasted that last hour this morning,
+though.  We must make up for it during the day.  One of the prisoners
+informed me that Santalla cannot be far ahead.  I have a good mind to
+push on with the men on the strongest horses, leaving you to follow.
+What do you think?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I think that you are going fast enough, captain.  Both men and horses
+are fagged now, and it's useless to catch up with Santalla just as we
+are all dead beat."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"But if we don't go ahead we shan't catch him at all.  The colonel did
+not send us on in front to sit down by the wayside."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"No, captain; but that's just what we shall be doing soon, whether we
+want to or not.  Most of the horses are nearly done for now."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Then we'll get fresh ones," cried he (which, by the way, there was no
+possible means of doing), "or continue the pursuit on foot.  Do you
+think if the colonel were in my place he would lag behind?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Of course I knew he would not, but then Miller was Miller, who had not,
+to my thinking, his equal in South America.  And Plaza wished to
+imitate his chief, forgetting he did not possess that marvellous
+personal influence over men which accounted so much for the English
+colonel's success.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+So we pushed on, till, at the end of the third mile or thereabout, a
+horse sank through sheer weariness to the ground, and had not
+sufficient strength to rise again.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Run on with the rest," said the captain to the rider; "we will ride
+and tie by turns."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The man saluted and came on, but the last I saw of him he was
+staggering from side to side of the track, as if he had completely lost
+control of his limbs.  After a time another horse fell, giving us
+another infantry-man, who in a short time was, I daresay, also left
+behind on the road.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"'Twill be a plain trail for the main body," remarked the guide; for we
+ourselves were continually passing broken weapons, mules that could not
+drag their limbs a step further, dead horses, and now and then a
+Royalist soldier curled up on the track fast asleep.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Where will Santalla make for?" I asked.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Arequipa.  But I don't think he can reach it.  The Indians bar the
+direct route, and his only way out, as far as I can see, is by taking
+to the mountains at Copari."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"My horse won't face a hill just now."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Castro smiled, saying, "The pass near Copari is too rugged for horses
+at any time; the climbing must all be done on foot," and he smiled
+again at my gesture of despair.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+At ten o'clock Plaza was compelled to halt, three-fourths of the men
+being tired as dogs, while several horses had foundered on the road.
+He was very excited, having heard from the last Spaniard picked up that
+Santalla, thoroughly worn out, was barely two hours' march in front.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+He glanced wrathfully at his tired troopers.  There they lay, five
+minutes after the order to halt, sleeping like dead men, and for the
+time being certainly of no greater use.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Caramba!" cried he, "it makes me wild!  Two hours, Crawford!  Do you
+hear?  And look at them!  The prize will slip through our fingers after
+all!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Hardly that, captain," I murmured sleepily, "as it has never been in
+our hands."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Santalla will have to rest as well," remarked the guide, "so the
+scales will balance."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"But I don't want them to balance!" cried Plaza testily.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+To give the captain his due, he was greatly in earnest, and willing to
+do himself all that he required of his men.  He showed this plainly two
+hours after we had resumed the pursuit, when his horse suddenly dropped
+from exhaustion.  A dozen troopers at once made as if to dismount, but
+he ordered them to keep their seats.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"No, no," he roared; "I take no advantage!" and he ran on, holding by
+the stirrup to the nearest horseman.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The fellows cheered him, and I think we got on better for the incident,
+though the halts became more frequent now, and our numbers lessened, as
+one man after another dropped exhausted to the ground.  Still we were
+gaining on the runaways, as a disagreeable episode presently made clear.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+It was about four o'clock in the afternoon, and we were straggling at
+no great speed through a narrow valley, when half a dozen bullets from
+the rocky sides dropped into our midst.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Ah!" exclaimed Castro, "now the Spaniards are playing the proper game.
+These fellows have been left to hold us in check while the main body
+escapes through the Copari Pass."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Push on there!" roared the captain, who after a spell of riding had
+just dismounted.  There was, indeed, nothing else to be done.  We must
+run the gauntlet, and trust to luck for some of us getting through.
+The Spaniards were well hidden, and could not be dislodged, unless,
+which was out of the question, we came to hand-grasps with them.  So
+urging our jaded beasts to a spurt, we quickened the pace, while now
+and again a groan and a thud told that a bullet had found its mark.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Those who were hit lay where they fell; the most of us reached the open
+country just in time to see a dozen or fifteen horsemen mount and ride
+off.  Evidently they had the pick of Santalla's animals, as they easily
+kept their distance, though allowing us to advance within range, when,
+discharging their muskets, they recommenced the retreat.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Plaza fumed like one distracted at the galling fire, which considerably
+delayed our advance, though we suffered in the loss of horses rather
+than of men.  He was riding again now, and well in front, with Castro
+and myself behind him.  Suddenly, after a scattering volley, I felt my
+horse slip, and the next instant the poor beast was sprawling on the
+ground with a bullet-hole in its chest.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Staggering to my feet, I ran on, but unsteadily, for in truth I was
+getting very near the end of my strength.  However, a husky shout from
+those in front encouraged me, and I saw that at last we had come fairly
+upon the runaways.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Just as Castro had foretold, they were taking to a mountain pass,
+eastward of Copari, and the main body was already toiling up the
+ascent.  Their stores lay about everywhere; horses and mules were
+abandoned; only a handful of horsemen, constituting the rearguard,
+preserved any appearance of order.  For a time they stoutly held the
+mouth of the pass, but at length, leaving their animals, they too
+disappeared.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Plaza went at the entrance like a bull at a gate, Castro followed, and
+I toiled after them with the men.  Up we went, some cheering, but the
+majority with closed lips, saving their breath.  In our fatigued state
+the climb was fearfully distressing: men sank to the ground gasping, or
+fell while trying to grasp the overhanging rocks with nerveless fingers.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+As for me, though straining every nerve, I could not keep pace with the
+leaders.  My eyes smarted and ached; my head seemed to spin round; more
+than once I should have fallen but for a friendly hand.  Presently I
+heard Plaza cheer; but he was out of sight, and the sound seemed to
+come from a long distance.  Then I was placed gently against a rock by
+a soldier, who pushed on after the rest.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Had I been hit?  I really did not know.  There was blood on my hands,
+but they had been gashed by the jagged rocks.  But hit or not, I must
+do my best to keep up; so trying to steady myself, I took another step
+forward.  The pass was filled with strange sounds and with strange
+shapes too.  Large birds hovered over my head, men and animals stood in
+my path; I had to dodge here and there in order to find a way through.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Suddenly a man placed his arm round my waist, and saying, "You must lie
+down, lieutenant," carried me a little distance, and then placed me on
+the ground.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"No, no," I murmured drowsily; "the captain is calling!  Don't you hear
+the captain calling?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Yes," said he: "the Spaniards have escaped, and the captain has
+sounded a halt."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I did not know then that the man was tricking me for my own good, so I
+answered innocently, "Thank goodness!  Now we shall have a little rest.
+Waken me when they return."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Never fear, sir," said he; "I will waken you," and even before he
+turned away I had lost all knowledge of the situation.
+</P>
+
+<BR><BR><BR>
+
+<A NAME="chap13"></A>
+
+<H3 ALIGN="center">
+CHAPTER XIII.
+</H3>
+
+<H3 ALIGN="center">
+HOME AGAIN.
+</H3>
+
+<P>
+Several days passed before I could recognize any one or anything, and
+then I found myself lying in bed in a strange room, but with Jos�
+sitting near me.  He rubbed his hands together and smiled when my eyes
+opened, but he would not talk beyond saying that we were back in Ica.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I felt weak, but in no pain; and in a day or two was able to dress, and
+with Jos�'s help to go for a stroll in the town.  Several acquaintances
+congratulated me on my recovery; but not seeing Captain Plaza, I asked
+Jos� if he had been hurt.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Oh no," he answered, with a smile; "the captain is sound in everything
+but temper.  Santalla spoiled that by getting clear off.  You won't
+forget that charming little trip in a hurry, Jack!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Oh, it was simply awful!  I wouldn't go through it again to be made
+commander-in-chief.  I wonder it didn't kill me."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"It did kill some, and knocked you all out except Plaza and the guide.
+There was precious little difficulty in finding the route you had
+taken.  One of the troopers showed me where you were.  'The lieutenant
+is a bit light-headed; said he; 'so I put him in a corner out of harm's
+way.  I told him the captain had stopped the pursuit.'"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I remember something about it.  I was tired out before my horse got
+hit, and the climb up the pass finished me."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"You weren't the only one to get knocked up.  However, the colonel
+obtained a light cart, and we brought you all back to Ica."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"So we had our trouble for nothing?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Not exactly.  Santalla escaped, but he left all his stores behind, and
+nearly a hundred of his men were captured.  Most of them, I think, were
+very glad of it.  We couldn't get them to keep their eyes open, they
+were so sleepy."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"What did the colonel say?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Oh, he laughed, and chaffed Plaza a bit, but I think he was very well
+satisfied.  Now we had better turn back."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I offered no objection, as even the short distance we had walked had
+fatigued me wonderfully.  By degrees, however, my strength returned,
+and at the end of another week I was able to resume my duties.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The colonel, as usual, was extremely busy, having to keep in order all
+the affairs of a huge district.  Though my services were very welcome,
+he would not let me do too much, saying kindly, "Take it easy, my lad.
+One mustn't spur the willing horse.  We are not chasing Santalla just
+at present."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Thank goodness!" I exclaimed.  "One can have too much of that sport."
+And the colonel indulged in one of his merry laughs.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The town at this time was very quiet.  There were no Spanish troops
+within many miles; our own men, through decent food and careful
+nursing, were rapidly recovering from the effects of their long forced
+marches; and fierce bands of our guerillas guarded the mountain passes.
+As far as our particular district was concerned, the war seemed to be
+over.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+One night as I sat making a fair copy of a proclamation, the colonel,
+looking up suddenly, exclaimed, "Crawford, would you like to go to
+Lima?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"To Lima, sir?" and I let the pen fall in my eagerness; "why, I'd give
+anything to go there!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Well, you can go for nothing, my boy, in a day or two.  Of course you
+know our friends have been for some time now in possession of the
+capital, and that San Martin is Protector of Peru?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Yes, sir, though I think 'tis but an empty title until the Royalists
+are thoroughly beaten."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"All in good time," said he pleasantly.  "That will come some day.  We
+shall be masters of Callao shortly; which will be a great step forward.
+I have received news this afternoon which impels me to make the journey
+to Lima; so if you think you're strong enough&mdash;"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I'm sure I am," I cried eagerly.  "I haven't an ache or pain in my
+whole body now, and&mdash;"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"All right!" interrupted the colonel; "I'll take you.  Now finish your
+copying, and don't fling the ink all over the place; it's wasteful."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+It was not only wasteful, but it gave me extra work, the copy being so
+smeared and blotted that I had to write it again on a fresh sheet.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Lima in a day or two!" I said softly to myself as my pen drove along
+the paper.  The words sounded like sweetest music to me, and I hummed
+them to myself over and over again.  I pictured the dear old home, the
+park, the pony I had ridden so often, the silvery pond, and the boats I
+had fashioned to sail on its waters.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+But above and beyond all I saw my mother, with eyes aglint and face
+suffused with joy.  The vision was so real that I stopped in my writing
+to view it more closely.  And when the colonel presently gave me leave
+for the remainder of the day, I rushed off to find Jos�, hardly knowing
+whether I ran or flew.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"What is it, Jack?" he exclaimed.  "Has Captain Plaza promised to take
+you on another trip?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+He laughed at his own joke, and I laughed too, being in the humour to
+see fun in anything.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"You aren't far out, Jos�," I replied, slapping him on the shoulder out
+of pure good humour.  "I am going on a trip, but not with Plaza!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Then it must be with the colonel."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Right this time.  But where are we going, Jos�? can you tell me that,
+eh?  No, you'll never guess, so I will tell you.  To <I>Lima</I>, my boy!
+what do you think of that?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I think that your mother will be very pleased to see you."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Fancy seeing her again, Jos�, after all these weary months!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"She will hardly know you," said he.  "You have grown so tall and
+strong and manly.  You are the image of what your father was at your
+age, Jack.  Are all the troops to be moved up?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I think not.  As far as I know, the colonel's only paying a flying
+visit to the capital.  Why are you laughing?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Because I'm rather doubtful of that.  If Miller goes to Lima, it's a
+proof there are hard knocks about.  And high time too!  According to
+the talk, the war should have been done with long ago."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Next day the colonel made his arrangements, and on the following
+morning he set out, leaving Major Videla in charge of the district.
+Rather to my surprise, Jos� formed one of the party, which consisted
+only of us three.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Under some circumstances the journey would have been tedious; but
+Colonel Miller was very agreeable, and told us many interesting stories
+of his adventurous career.  Thus the time passed pleasantly enough, and
+on the evening of September 11, 1821, we arrived in the neighbourhood
+of Lima.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The capital, as I have said, was in possession of the Patriots; but a
+Royalist garrison still held Callao, and the Royalist general,
+Canterac, with a small army, had just swooped down from the mountains
+to help his friends.  Our soldiers were chiefly stationed between the
+two towns; but the citizens of Lima had armed themselves, and swaggered
+about talking of the great deeds they were about to perform.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The colonel, aware of my anxiety, agreed that I should pay a visit to
+my mother at once.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I must see General San Martin," said he.  "He may give me a post here,
+and if so, I will send for you.  But you have earned a few days' rest,
+and I shall not omit to mention you favourably to the protector."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+As soon as he had gone, Jos� and I rode on quickly.  My heart beat
+fast, and my hands trembled so that I had to use both in holding the
+reins.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I suppose it is all right, Jos�," I remarked as we drew near the
+house.  "I suppose there is nothing wrong?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"No, no," replied he; "why should there be?  You are nervous, my boy,
+that's all.  Cheer up; in a short time you will be in your mother's
+arms."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+At the outer gate I drew back, leaving Jos� to accost the janitor, who
+greeted him heartily.  Then in silence we rode through the park to the
+courtyard, and in response to our knocking Antonio appeared.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+On seeing me the old man would have screamed with delight, but I
+checked him, saying softly, "Hush, Antonio; tell me quickly of your
+mistress, my mother.  Is she well?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"In health, se�or, but sad.  Ah, the house has been very lonely for
+many a long day!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Go you, Jos�," said I, "and prepare her."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Joy never kills," answered he, laughing; "but perhaps it will be as
+well for me to go in first."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I waited a few moments, and then dismounting, walked softly towards the
+entrance.  What would she say? what would she do?  My heart almost
+ceased beating as I stood in the shadow listening.  The door was wide
+open, and a stream of light came from the spacious hall.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Suddenly I heard a quick step, and then my mother's voice crying,
+"Juan! my Juan! where are you?"  And running forward, I threw myself
+joyfully into her arms.  She kissed me repeatedly, and then hand in
+hand we went inside.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Mother!" I cried, "mother!" and for a long time that was the only word
+spoken.  We sat down side by side, and her beautiful eyes, dimmed by
+very joy, looked into mine.  She pressed my hand, smoothed my cheeks,
+and brushed back the hair from my forehead, murmuring softly, "Juan, my
+Juan!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I think, perhaps, that great happiness, like great grief, kills speech.
+At least it was so with us, and we were content to sit there silently
+gazing into each loved face.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+At length the good old major-domo, knocking timidly at the door,
+announced that supper was served, when my mother with a sigh suffered
+me to leave her for a few minutes, in order to make myself more
+presentable for the table.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I would have had Jos� sit down with us, but he disappeared, and perhaps
+after all it was as well.  My mother made only a pretence at eating,
+and sat with her eyes fixed on me, as though fearful I should in some
+mysterious way suddenly disappear.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+After supper we returned to the drawing-room, where I related my
+adventures, telling her the story of the shipwreck, of my rescue and
+imprisonment in the fort, of my marvellous escape, and all the various
+incidents which had happened since I left home.  Of Santiago's
+information concerning my father I said nothing, though I longed
+greatly to do so.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I think General Barejo wished you well," she exclaimed after a pause.
+"He is not of our way of thinking, but he has a kind heart, and he was
+a true friend to me before these troubles came upon us."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Was he ever friendly with father?" I asked.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"He respected him much, though he thought him greatly mistaken.  You
+see, their ideas were altogether opposed, but in private life each
+esteemed the other."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Presently, remembering that the Royalists no longer held Lima, I said,
+"What has become of little Rosa?  I hope our people have not disturbed
+her, though it must be lonely for her living in that great house alone.
+Could she not have come to you?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"There was no need," and my mother's lips curled scornfully; "she is
+safe enough with her father."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"With her father?" I echoed, in astonishment.  "How can he take a
+delicate child like that into a rough camp?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"His house is not a rough camp, Juan!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The truth did not strike me at first, so I said innocently, "Oh, has he
+been wounded and obtained permission to be nursed at home?  Is he
+seriously hurt?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"He is quite well, I believe, and is one of us."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Felipe Montilla turned <I>Patriot</I>?" I cried in amazement.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Now let me not be misunderstood.  I honestly believed our cause just.
+In my small way I had ventured my life for the independence of Peru,
+and was quite ready to venture it again.  But this man had boasted his
+loyalty to the Spanish king, had fought under his flag, had taken high
+rank in his army!  He had accepted from him both honours and broad
+lands, and then at the first reverse in his fortunes had slunk away
+like a whipped cur.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"A fig for such Patriots!" cried I hotly.  "Were I San Martin, he
+should be whipped back to the men he has deserted.  Give me a loyal
+friend or a stout enemy, I care not which; but these <I>jellyfish</I>&mdash;bah!
+they are an abomination."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"You are young, my boy, and not quite wise enough to understand these
+things.  Is it not to Don Felipe's credit that he should openly confess
+his mistake?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"And save his estates into the bargain," said I wrathfully.  "Let the
+Spaniards get the upper hand, and you will find him back in their ranks
+quickly enough."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"A man must follow the guiding of his conscience, even if it lead to
+his advantage," remarked my mother quietly.  "But if you are indignant
+with Don Felipe, you will be equally delighted with Rosa.  She is still
+Loyalist to the core, and makes no secret of it.  She told San Martin
+the other day that he was a busybody, meddling in affairs that did not
+concern him, and that the people of Peru could settle their disputes
+without his interference."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Bravo, Rosa!" I cried, with a laugh; "there is nothing like speaking
+one's mind.  I'll wager San Martin prefers the girl to her father.
+Have you seen the general?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Yes; he paid me a friendly visit on purpose to show his admiration for
+your dear father.  He is a most remarkable man."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+It was not until the evening drew to a close that my mother spoke of
+what lay nearest her heart&mdash;our plans for the future.  She admitted
+with a sigh that I must in honour offer my services to San Martin.  I
+was still young, but there were many boys fighting in the ranks, and
+some had already sacrificed their lives for the cause.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"It is hard to let you go again," said she, pressing me fondly to her,
+"and yet I must.  God grant that the war may soon be brought to an end!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Amen to that!" I exclaimed fervently.  "Fighting is not to my liking,
+but I cannot stand idly by while others risk their lives for my
+benefit."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"No," said my mother, kissing me good-night; "you must do your duty, my
+boy.  Your father would have wished it."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+A few minutes later I went to my room, and was just closing the door
+when Jos� appeared.  He looked hot and flushed, and I asked where he
+had been.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"To the camp," said he, with a laugh, "to see what's going on.  I
+thought the colonel must have had some special news.  Unless San Martin
+holds his hand, the Spaniards are lost.  They can't stay at Callao, as
+there isn't food even for the garrison; they aren't strong enough to
+take Lima: they must retreat or starve."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Well?" I exclaimed questioningly.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Why, don't you see, directly they begin to retreat we shall crush
+them.  Already nearly two hundred of their men have deserted."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"More deserters?  Why, we shall soon be able to form a battalion of
+turncoats for Don Felipe to lead!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+It was now Jos�'s turn to look astonished, and his expression of
+amazement was so ludicrous that I laughed outright.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"What a poltroon!" he cried contemptuously.  "But I'll see you get no
+harm by this right-about face.  He is mistaken if he thinks his
+treachery will give him a hold on your estates."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"A hold on my estates, Jos�?  What do you mean?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Oh," said he, "I have not cared to speak of it, but I must now."  And
+he proceeded to inform me that all my father's property had passed into
+the possession of Don Felipe Montilla.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"But," I exclaimed, striving to appear calm, "that will be set aside
+now.  San Martin will never allow our property to be confiscated
+because my father died for the Patriot cause."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Montilla is a fox, Jack, and has made a good bargain for himself, no
+doubt.  I expect he obtained the general's written promise to confirm
+him in all his estates.  And if so," he concluded gloomily, "yours form
+part of them."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"He shall not keep them," I cried angrily, "whatever San Martin has
+promised!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"No; but we must not quarrel openly until the Spaniards are done with.
+Montilla has influence, and no doubt San Martin finds him useful.  But
+don't take it to heart, Jack; we will defeat him in the end."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"If we don't," said I grimly, "it will be because the son has followed
+the father.  And that reminds me, do you think Montilla knows what
+actually happened to my father?  It always seemed strange to me that
+Rosa should learn of that affair so quickly."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"You don't suspect&mdash;"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"That he had a hand in his death?  No, hardly that, though he is
+mean-spirited enough for it.  But it struck me that, being high in the
+viceroy's favour, he probably knew what was going on."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"That is possible at least."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Probable, I should say.  However, to-morrow I intend putting the
+question to him."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Do you mean that you are going to interview him on the subject?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Why not?  There can be no harm in asking a straightforward question."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Mind you don't lose your temper, my boy.  It's dangerous work rousing
+a venomous snake until its poison bag is extracted."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Never fear, Jos�.  I have learned how to take care of myself during
+the last few months.  Thanks to you and the colonel, I have done some
+hard practising.  And now turn in.  It will seem strange to sleep in
+one's own bed again, won't it?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Make the most of it," advised he laughingly.  "It may be a long time
+before you have another chance."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I felt very tired, and yet it was long before I fell asleep.  I was
+angry at Montilla's double-dealing, sorry for Rosa, my old playmate,
+and agitated by a thousand vague doubts and suspicions.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+In the morning I rose very little refreshed, had a simple breakfast in
+my room, and went to find Jos�.  He had already returned from an early
+visit to the camp, and brought word that matters were still in the same
+state.  The Spaniards remained sheltered under the guns of the
+fortress, and San Martin, knowing their provisions were almost
+exhausted, would not attack.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Presently we were joined by my mother, who made Jos� happy by praising
+him for his care of me.  Then we took a stroll round the grounds,
+looked in at my workshop, where my half-painted boat still lay, and
+paid a visit to the lake.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+After a while I asked Jos� to have my horse saddled, saying, "Excuse
+me, mother, for a short time, please.  You know the colonel may send
+for me at any moment, and I should like to see Rosa once more."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+This was only partly the truth, but I could not speak of my principal
+motive, for as yet, acting under Jos�'s advice, I had made no mention
+of Santiago's queer story.  It would have been cruel to raise hopes
+that might have no actual foundation.
+</P>
+
+<BR><BR><BR>
+
+<A NAME="chap14"></A>
+
+<H3 ALIGN="center">
+CHAPTER XIV
+</H3>
+
+<H3 ALIGN="center">
+FRIEND OR FOE!
+</H3>
+
+<P>
+I have before said that Don Felipe was our nearest neighbour; the
+grounds of his house, indeed, joined our own, and I might easily have
+gone there on foot.  Perhaps it was a touch of pride which induced me
+to go on horseback, as I was a good rider, and young enough to feel a
+certain satisfaction in my appearance.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I had grown beyond the recollection of the gatekeeper, who admitted me
+to the courtyard with a show of deference, saying that both his master
+and young mistress were at home.  Rosa's mother had been dead for some
+years.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Don Felipe had numerous servants, and to one of them I threw the reins,
+telling him to mind my horse.  Then going to the door, I inquired for
+Don Felipe.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The major-domo was showing me to a small room, when a girl, merrily
+humming a popular Royalist song, came tripping along the corridor.
+Suddenly she stopped, looked hard at me, and then came forward again,
+saying, "Juan!  Surely you are Juan Crawford?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I have sometimes laughed since at my stupidity, yet there might be
+found some excuse for it.  During my absence from Lima I had often
+thought of my little playmate, but it had never occurred to me that
+time would change her as well as myself.  And now, instead of the merry
+child with whom I had romped and played, there appeared a beautiful
+girl at whom I gazed in wonder.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Are you not Juan Crawford?" she asked again, speaking softly.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Yes," said I, "I am Juan; but you, se�orita?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Her face rippled with merry laughter; but pouting her lips, she said,&mdash;
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"What a poor compliment to your old friend, Juan!  Surely you have not
+forgotten Rosa!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Nay, that have I not; I have forgotten nothing.  But you are so
+changed, Rosa&mdash;so different!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"So are you; but I knew you at once.  When did you come home?  Have you
+come to see me?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Yes, and your father as well.  I have some business with him."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Oh!" cried she, tossing her head and frowning, "of course you and he
+are on the same side.  My father is a Patriot now, and cries, 'Down
+with the king!'  I suppose your meddlesome general has sent you with a
+message."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I did not undeceive her; and while the servant carried my name to his
+master, we entered one of the rooms and continued our conversation.  I
+saw she was troubled; yet with great skill and grace she put me at
+ease, and led me to talk of what had happened during the last two years.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"What a fire-eater you are, Juan!" she cried banteringly.  "I am quite
+afraid of you.  But what a fine sword you have!  Ah, if I were only a
+boy!  Can you guess what I would do?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"No," I replied, with a shake of the head.  "No one can guess what a
+girl will do."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"But I said a boy."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Ah! that would be altogether different."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I will tell you then," she said, standing up and speaking very
+earnestly.  "I would get a sword and pistols and join the king's
+friends.  I would be a loyal Spanish cavalier, Juan, if I were the only
+one in Peru!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Then it is lucky you are a girl, Rosa, or you would soon be killed.  I
+would not harm the king, even if he were here instead of being in
+Spain, thousands of miles away; but I have no love for those who rule
+in his name."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"No," said she, casting down her eyes, and I thought her voice sounded
+sad; "you have suffered at their hands.  But it is not the king's
+fault, Juan; he would have seen you righted."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"It is a long way from Peru to Spain," said I, trying to speak
+carelessly, "and it seems as if in these days one must right one's own
+wrongs."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+After that we sat speaking very little, each afraid lest the talk
+should drift into an awkward channel, for I felt sure that she knew how
+her father had robbed us of our estates.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+On the return of the servant she whispered earnestly, "My father has
+changed greatly.  I am sure he is unhappy.  If he should appear cross
+and irritable, you will bear with him, won't you, Juan?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I will do my best, Rosa.  But why should he be angry with me?  I am
+only going to ask him a question."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Don Felipe was truly much altered.  His dark hair was plentifully
+sprinkled with silver; there were deep lines in his forehead and around
+his lips; his eyes had become shifty, and there was a look of cunning
+in them.  He gave me just one swift, searching glance, and then looked
+away.  It was an awkward meeting, and I hardly knew what to say.
+Fortunately Don Felipe took the lead.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"You have grown almost out of knowledge, my young friend; and I notice
+you have obtained military rank," said he, with a covert sneer.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I have the honour to be a lieutenant in the army to which we both
+belong, se�or," I replied.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+He winced at that, and his eyes glowed angrily.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"If you have brought me a message from your general," said he, "will
+you at once deliver it?  I am very busy just now."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I will not take up more than five minutes of your valuable time,
+se�or.  My errand is an important one, though <I>at present</I> it has
+nothing to do with General San Martin."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Again he glanced at me sharply, and I thought he seemed slightly
+nervous.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I must ask you to be quick with it," he said coldly.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I only desire to ask you about the death of my father.  I am sure you
+will give me all the information in your power, as he died for the
+independence of Peru, which to-day both you and I are trying to secure."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+At that he started up, his eyes blazing, his hand on his sword.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Do you think I killed your father?" he roared furiously.  "He died
+through his own fault.  I warned him again and again that the time was
+not ripe, but he paid no heed to me."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Are you not mistaken?" I asked.  "According to the Indians' account,
+he was slain while trying to prevent them from rising."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Then the government was deceived.  No good can be done by digging up
+the dead past, but you shall hear all that I know of the story.  At
+that time there were three parties in the country.  One section, led by
+your father, resolved upon armed insurrection; another, composed of
+Royalists, determined that nothing should be changed; the third, to
+which I belonged, endeavoured to obtain reform by moderate means.  I
+need not say that your father was a marked man.  One day the viceroy
+received word that he had started for the mountains in order to rouse
+the Indians to revolt, and, to prevent mischief, it was arranged that
+he should be placed in prison.  As you may know, he refused to submit
+quietly, and, unfortunately, was shot in the fight which ensued."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Was his body brought back to Lima?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I never heard so.  Most probably it was left on the mountains.  I was
+sorry for him; but he was a headstrong man, and would not listen to
+reason."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"That was foolish of him," I remarked quietly.  "Had he waited till the
+proper time to declare his real opinions, he would not have lost his
+life, nor my mother her property.  It is possible, indeed, that our
+estates would have been largely added to."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"The estates were confiscated, it is true," said Don Felipe slowly,
+"but they fell into friendly hands."  Then, in quite a kindly tone, he
+added, "You feel bitter against me, Juan&mdash;I see it in your face.
+Perhaps it is natural; yet you really have no reason to do so.  I must
+not say more now, but all will come right in the end."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"So I intend," said I stoutly, yet feeling rather mystified.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The man's sudden change of manner puzzled me.  After all, I was only a
+boy, with little ability and no training to seek for things lying
+beneath the surface.  And Montilla seeing the state of my mind, played
+upon it with consummate skill.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I cannot truthfully say that he made any definite promise, but this was
+the impression I received:&mdash;Knowing that all my father's property was
+forfeit to the law, he had exerted his influence to secure it.  At that
+time he thought the trouble would be settled without fighting, and
+intended in a year or two to restore the estates.  When the war broke
+out, he endeavoured to bring the viceroy over to the cause of reform,
+but finding that impossible, was compelled reluctantly to join the
+Patriots.  Of course, in the matter of the estates, nothing could be
+done now till the war was over.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Thus," said he cheerfully, "the future is safe.  If the Patriots win,
+we can have the confiscation revoked; while, on the other hand, I count
+so many friends among the moderate Royalists that the viceroy would
+hardly care to thwart me."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"In any case," said I bluntly, though with no wish to vex him, "the
+Indians will see that I am not wronged!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Trust me," he answered, his voice sounding now like the purring of a
+cat; "Felipe Montilla never makes mistakes."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I had a stinging reply on my lips, but refraining from giving it
+utterance, I bade him farewell.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Come again, Juan," said he, "if the general can spare you!"  And
+though not overburdened with wits, I had a sense of being laughed at.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I was joined in the corridor by Rosa, who wanted to know why I was
+going so soon.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I really must," I answered, smiling.  "I have spent no time with my
+mother yet, and I may be sent for at any moment."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"But this will not be <I>good-bye</I>?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"On the contrary, I hope to see you often.  Your father has given me
+the kindest of invitations."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+At this she opened her eyes wide; but quickly recovering herself, she
+smiled pleasantly, and accompanied me to the hall.  As I rode by, she
+was standing at a window waving her hand.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I had much to think of during the short ride home, but I got little
+satisfaction from my thoughts.  Nothing had been gained by my visit to
+Montilla, and his story only went to confirm the truth of the reports
+of my father's death.  As to my faith in his startling promises, it
+grew weaker with every step my horse took.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I said nothing to my mother; but Jos�, to whom I related all that had
+passed, laughed loudly.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"The cunning old fox!" cried he; "he hasn't his equal for craft in
+Peru!  You will see that, whoever sinks, Don Felipe Montilla will swim."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Not at my expense," I exclaimed, "while I have strength to raise an
+arm."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The rest of that day I spent with my mother, forcing myself to forget
+that any trouble existed in the world.  It was only a brief spell of
+happiness, but we enjoyed every second of it, and by nightfall my
+mother's face had lost some of its sadness, and her eyes shone brightly
+as in the olden days.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Early next morning an order was brought to me to rejoin Colonel Miller,
+as it was arranged that, for a time at least, Jos� should remain behind
+to look after the affairs of the hacienda.  The servants assembled in
+the courtyard to see me off, and my mother came to the hall door.
+There she embraced me, and stood smiling bravely as I mounted.
+Whatever sorrow she felt was locked up tightly in her own breast.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Accompanied by the man who had brought the order, I rode briskly to
+Mirones, the headquarters of the Patriot army, and about a mile from
+Callao.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The colonel was with San Martin and a group of officers, watching the
+enemy's movements; but he turned to me at once, saying, "General, this
+is Lieutenant Crawford, of whom I spoke."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+San Martin, the Protector of Peru, was a tall man with black hair,
+bushy whiskers, and a deep olive complexion.  He had black, piercing
+eyes, fringed by long lashes and overhung by heavy brows and a high,
+straight forehead.  He was strong and muscular, with an erect, military
+carriage.  He looked every inch a soldier, and one, moreover, with an
+iron will that nothing could bend.  His voice was harsh and unmusical,
+but he spoke in a kindly, simple, and unaffected manner.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Colonel Miller has told me many things of you, lieutenant," said he,
+"and all to your credit.  I am glad to know that the son of Don Eduardo
+Crawford is following so well in his father's steps."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Thank you, general," I replied, bowing low.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I understand," he continued, "that Colonel Miller wishes to keep you
+with him.  It is certainly an honourable post; but I fancy you are
+likely to get many hard knocks," he concluded, with a laugh.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"He has had a strong taste of the service, general," observed Miller,
+with a merry smile.&mdash;"Are you willing to stay with me, Crawford?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Yes, certainly, sir, with the general's permission."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Very well," said San Martin.  "And, by the way, colonel, let him have
+on hour's sleep now and again,"&mdash;a little joke at which the group of
+officers, knowing the Englishman's habits, laughed heartily.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The general presently rode off to his quarters, the officers went to
+their several duties, and I accompanied Colonel Miller to that part of
+the field in which his men were stationed.  He had been appointed to
+the command of a column seven hundred strong, which was held in
+readiness to move at any moment.  The officers were unknown to me, but
+they seemed pleasant, genial fellows, and in a short time I felt quite
+at home with them.  The younger ones were grumbling because San Martin
+did not at once attack the enemy, saying that Canterac would slip away
+to the mountains in the night.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Then his army will break up of its own accord," remarked a grizzled
+major.  "He can't take his guns, and his troops are starving.  Hundreds
+will throw down their weapons on finding us close at their heels."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Better have a straight fight and have done with it," grumbled a
+youngster.  "There's no fun playing at hide-and-seek in the hills."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Should you live to be a man," said the major reprovingly, "you won't
+talk in such a light-hearted way of a battle."  And the boy's face
+flushed at the laugh which greeted the remark.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Don't be too sarcastic, Gamarra," cried another.  "The youngster's
+right in the main.  If Canterac escapes, the war may drag on for
+months, and will cost thousands of lives.  The mountains will kill more
+than a pitched battle would."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Canterac can't escape if we follow him up properly," said the major,
+"and Colonel Miller seems the man to do that."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"That is so; but he can't move without orders; and there's more than
+one man in high places who will prefer Lima to a pursuit."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Thus they talked during the afternoon, and early in the evening Colonel
+Miller ordered that every one not on duty should turn in at once; which
+we took to be a sign that something was going to happen shortly.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+At ten o'clock the column was roused.  The men assembled silently, and
+a whisper went round that Canterac had begun his retreat.  For more
+than an hour we awaited fresh orders, the colonel on horseback fuming
+impatiently, until at last the word came to march.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"An hour thrown away," muttered the colonel angrily.  "Canterac will
+laugh in our faces."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+To our disgust, we found that the column was attached to the main army,
+and that we had to move step by step to the will of the chief.  I knew
+very little about military tactics, but it was a strange kind of
+pursuit, and made me think of a tortoise chasing a hare.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I wonder what Captain Plaza would think of this performance?" said the
+colonel, rather bitterly, as we jogged along.  "This isn't the way he
+took you after Santalla, eh?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Indeed no, colonel!" I replied, laughing.  "The captain would have had
+us on the other side of Lima by now."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"It's like a funeral procession," he muttered impatiently; "and if they
+don't mind, 'twill be a funeral procession in reality.  We shall be
+burying the independence of Peru."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The ridiculous part of it was that our column had been formed of all
+the light companies on purpose to swoop down on the foe.  As far as I
+could judge, the swoop was much like that of a hawk whose wings had
+been carefully tied to its body.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+However, we tramped along throughout the night, halting at daybreak
+without getting a glimpse of the exulting Canterac.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Never mind," exclaimed the colonel, who hated to look on the dark side
+of things; "we may catch them during the day."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+In this he was disappointed, as we proceeded in the same leisurely
+manner, just as if we were out for a quiet stroll on a summer's day.
+Several times Miller rode off to the staff, but on each occasion he
+returned looking more dissatisfied than before.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The men wondered, and at each halt the officers talked pretty freely
+among themselves, giving their opinions with refreshing vigour.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Canterac has the start of us now," said one, "and we shall never
+overtake him.  We had the game in our hands, and have simply thrown it
+away."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The grizzled major remained optimistic, saying, "You may depend that
+San Martin has some scheme in his head."  But the rest of us were
+doubtful.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"If I had an enemy in a trap, my scheme would be to keep him there and
+not to let him walk out through an open door," laughed a young captain.
+"The war might have been finished to-day; now it's likely to go on for
+another twelvemonth."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Well," remarked one of his comrades, "it's a comfort to think we
+shan't kill ourselves through over-exertion."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+By degrees we pushed on to a place about nine leagues east of Lima,
+where it seemed as if the lumbering machine had broken down altogether.
+It was evening when we arrived and halted; the men ate the last morsel
+of their scanty rations; the chief officers, though no one could
+imagine what they found to discuss, held a conference, and presently it
+leaked out that the pursuit had been abandoned.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I don't profess to understand it," exclaimed Major Gamarra, "but you
+will find that there's some grand scheme in the air."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Ah!" interrupted another officer, in a sarcastic tone, "and no doubt
+it will stay there; most of these precious schemes do.  What I should
+like to see would be a little common sense."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Would you recognize it if you saw it?" put in the major quick as
+lightning; and all the others laughed.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Perhaps not.  I've had little opportunity of renewing my acquaintance
+with it since San Martin came to Peru."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+This was a dangerous remark, as we were a very mixed crowd.  Some had
+come from Buenos Ayres with San Martin; others were Chilians who had
+fought with him throughout the Chilian War; several, like myself, were
+natives of Peru; while two or three were Englishmen.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Fortunately, before the dispute had had time to become hot, the colonel
+returned from the conference, and joined us at the fire.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I don't know, gentlemen, that anything is likely to happen," said he;
+"but we may as well enjoy a night's rest while we can," and wrapping
+his cloak around him, he lay down, setting an example which most of us
+followed.
+</P>
+
+<BR><BR><BR>
+
+<A NAME="chap15"></A>
+
+<H3 ALIGN="center">
+CHAPTER XV.
+</H3>
+
+<H3 ALIGN="center">
+WE CATCH A TARTAR.
+</H3>
+
+<P>
+When I awoke at six o'clock in the morning, most of the officers and
+men were still sleeping, but the colonel had disappeared.  There was
+nothing to be done beyond feeding and grooming my horse, which I always
+made a point of doing myself.  As to my own breakfast, my haversack was
+empty, and I think there was hardly a pound of meat to be found among
+the whole column.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+After a short time the men were roused, and just after seven o'clock we
+saw the colonel come tearing along on horseback, as if pursued by a
+cavalry division.  Evidently he was in a great hurry, and his face was
+wreathed in smiles.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Good-morning, gentlemen," he cried.  "You will be glad to hear my
+news: we move in an hour's time.  The general has only a scanty stock
+of provisions, but there is sufficient to provide your men with
+breakfast.&mdash;Crawford, hunt up Lieutenant-Colonel O'Brien, and ask him
+to come to me at once."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+O'Brien was a famous Irishman who had served with San Martin all
+through the Chilian War.  He was a fine fellow, standing six feet six
+inches high, and well proportioned.  Every one loved him for his
+winning ways, his ready smile, his perfect honesty, and his absolute
+fearlessness.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Colonel Miller?" said he, on hearing my message.  "Faith, I'll come
+instantly."  And we rode back together.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"You're prompt, O'Brien," exclaimed the colonel, laughing; "Have you
+had enough of this slow-time business?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"More than enough, colonel.  What are your fellows looking so pleased
+about?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"First, the prospect of a breakfast; and then&mdash;"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"You've badgered the general into giving you a free hand!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Not quite that; but I have permission to push on.  I fear it's too
+late.  Canterac is a fine soldier, and will be ready for us now; but I
+am going to see if he has left any weak places.  Would you care to come
+with me?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"You're just a jewel, colonel," exclaimed the big Irishman
+enthusiastically, "and I'm eternally devoted to you.  When do we start?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Directly after breakfast.  Will you take some with me?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"That will I, colonel, and I'm as charmed with the second invitation as
+the first.  I dined with the general the day we left Mirones, and
+haven't had a decent meal since."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The colonel laughed, saying, "I'm afraid I can't say much for the
+quality of our food."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Never mind the quality, colonel; I think more of quantity just at
+present."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Well, that's on a par with the quality."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+This did not sound very promising; but we managed to satisfy our
+hunger, and the men, having eaten their scanty rations, were drawn up
+ready for the start.  At nine o'clock we left the camp, and a rapid
+march brought us to the village of Macas, which the enemy had just
+abandoned.  Here, to our great delight, we discovered a number of sheep
+dressed and ready for cooking; so, for once in a way, we enjoyed a
+really good meal, while cracking many jokes at the Spaniards' expense.
+Then having rested, we pushed on to the foot of the mountains, where
+the men bivouacked, being too tired to drag themselves any further.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I was just preparing to off-saddle when the colonel said, "Crawford, if
+you aren't too tired, you can come with me.  I am going just a little
+way up the mountain."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Very good, sir," I answered, climbing into the saddle again, but
+wishing that he had taken it into his head to sleep instead.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I should like to find out where Canterac is.  He is quite clever
+enough to set a very ugly trap for us."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+It was dark now, and the road was difficult; but we rode cautiously,
+listening for sounds, and keeping our eyes well open.  At the end of
+perhaps half a mile the colonel suddenly stopped, and said in a
+whisper, "Some one is coming towards us."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The position was very awkward.  We were on a narrow road with no
+hiding-place at hand, and must either retreat rapidly or plump
+ourselves right into the arms of the strangers.  In another minute we
+had no choice at all, as several dusky figures loomed up before us.
+Fortunately Colonel Miller favoured the practice of taking the bull by
+the horns, and levelling his pistol, he cried in a stern voice, "Halt!
+Who are you?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Taken by surprise, the men stopped, and we heard one of them say, "No,
+no; he's no Spaniard.  I can tell by his speech."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Quite right," cried the colonel.  "I'm an English officer in the
+Patriot army.  Who are you?  Make haste; we don't want to stay here all
+night."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"We're deserters from General Canterac's army," replied one boldly,
+"and want to give ourselves up."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Then you're just right.  We will return with you to the camp, or the
+sentries might shoot you.&mdash;Crawford, turn your horse round so that they
+can pass between us.&mdash;Now, my good fellows, march, and I hope for your
+own sakes that you've given a true account of yourselves."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Thus we journeyed back to the camp, where, beside a good fire, Colonel
+Miller examined the prisoners.  From them we learned that General
+Canterac had halted in a strong position halfway up the mountain; upon
+which I could see, by his restlessness, that the colonel was eager to
+resume the pursuit at once.  A glance at his wearied men, however,
+showed him the folly of such an enterprise.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"No," said he at last; "they couldn't stand it."  Which was quite true.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Having given the strangers into the charge of the guard, we unsaddled
+our horses, wrapped ourselves up, and lay down near the fire.  Two
+seconds later we were fast asleep.  At daybreak we were moving again,
+and I fancy the colonel felt glad he had not attempted to lead his men
+up the mountains in the darkness of night.  The road was simply
+horrible, and the pass might have been defended by a score of resolute
+men against an army.  Halfway up we received a check.  O'Brien, going
+forward with a handful of men, got in touch with the enemy, who
+immediately turned about and threatened to overwhelm us by a sudden
+attack.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Under some leaders we should most certainly have come to grief; but the
+colonel's cheery, smiling face kept the men at their posts.  Drawing
+them up in a strong position, he awaited the attack calmly.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"If you try to run away, my lads," he said pleasantly, "the Spaniards
+will make mincemeat of you; so it is wisest to stand firm."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+We watched three battalions come down from the height and halt just
+beyond musket-range.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I don't believe they're going to attack, after all!" exclaimed O'Brien
+excitedly.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Not until we move," answered the colonel, "and then they'll fall on us
+tooth and nail.  I expect they are just gaining time while the main
+body gets away.  It's aggravating, too, because they have the whip hand
+of us.  We aren't strong enough to turn them out."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+O'Brien shook his head, saying, "If the provisions would last, we might
+stand here staring at each other till doomsday."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Darkness found the position unchanged, while numerous watch-fires
+gleamed fitfully through the gloom.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I wonder," said the colonel thoughtfully, "if Canterac intends keeping
+his men there all night?  Those fires may be just a blind; he's quite
+equal to a dodge of that sort."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Let me find out," said O'Brien.&mdash;"Crawford, do you feel in trim for a
+stroll?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Oh, thanks! it's very kind of you to think of me."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Don't mention it, my dear fellow!  It's a weakness of mine to remember
+my friends.&mdash;We'll be back in an hour, colonel.&mdash;Take off your sword,
+Crawford; we must trust to our pistols.  Are you ready?  Come along,
+then."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Passing our outposts, we began to climb warily, keeping a keen lookout,
+and taking care to make no unnecessary noise.  It was possible&mdash;indeed
+I thought probable&mdash;that we should meet the enemy stealing down to
+surprise our camp by a night attack.  However, we kept steadily on our
+way, and had nearly reached the outer ring of fires, when, clutching
+O'Brien by the arm, I dragged him bodily to the ground.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"What's the matter?" he asked quietly.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"A sentry!  Listen!  He's talking to some one."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+We lay quite still, trying to hear what was said; but in this we were
+disappointed, and presently the two men separated, each walking slowly
+in opposite directions.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Now's our chance!" whispered O'Brien; and crawling on hands and knees,
+we passed quietly between the two.  Several yards away was a big fire,
+and a number of men had gathered round it, where they could easily be
+seen.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Then they haven't bolted, after all!" said O'Brien, in surprise.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"It doesn't look like it; but don't let us be too sure.  You stay in
+this hollow while I investigate.  You are not a good performer on
+all-fours."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"No," said he, chuckling, and I was afraid that, in spite of our
+danger, he would laugh aloud; "this is a sort of circus trick not
+taught at our school.  Can you judge where to find me again?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Easily, if they don't let the fires out;" and I crawled further into
+the camp, and in the direction of a second fire.  It looked very
+comfortable, but no one was there to take advantage of it, and the
+third and fourth I visited were equally deserted.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The trick was plain enough now.  After lighting the fires, the three
+battalions had marched off, leaving just sufficient men to tend them,
+and to act as sentries.  The sight of a soldier crossing the camp to
+throw fresh fuel on one of the fires changed suspicion into certainty,
+and I hastened back to O'Brien with my information.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"That's an old dodge," said he, "but a good one.  It almost always pays
+in this part of the world.  Now let us get back and tell the colonel."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Cautiously we crawled back, waited nearly an hour for a favourable
+chance to dodge the sentries, and then hurried down the pass.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Thanks," exclaimed the colonel, on hearing our report.  "We can afford
+now to let the men have a couple of hours' sleep; they need it."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"And I daresay some of the officers will lie down, if you press them,"
+laughed O'Brien.&mdash;"What do you say, Crawford?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Well, the colonel need not press me much," I replied.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Good boy!  I'm pleased you're so willing to do as you're told."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Well, he has certainly earned a rest," observed Miller.  "But we are
+moving sharp at daybreak, remember."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"There's nothing strange in that," said I sleepily; "the wonder would
+be if we didn't."  At which the colonel and O'Brien laughed heartily.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Next day we marched into the village of Puruchuco, on the eastern side
+of the mountain, and about six miles distant from the small town of
+Huamantanga, where the Royalists had halted.  Owing to the difficulty
+of obtaining food, Colonel Miller now sent most of our infantry back to
+Macas; the Indians were thrown forward to act as a screen in front;
+while the rest of us bivouacked in some meadows near the village.  The
+next day the colonel and I rode to within five hundred yards of
+Huamantanga, where we saw the enemy formed up in marching order.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"What restless fellows they are!" I exclaimed laughingly; "they're on
+the move again!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Yes; but this time, unless I'm much mistaken, they are moving
+backwards.  Ride round to the right, warn the Indians to be ready for
+an attack, and rejoin me at Puruchuco."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I had barely reached the village when the colonel's suspicions were
+verified.  Two thousand of the enemy, all picked men, as we afterwards
+discovered, rapidly descended the heights, drove the Indians back by
+sheer strength of numbers, and at last sent them flying pell-mell to
+seek safety in some of the numerous ravines.  We had barely three
+hundred regular soldiers, many of whom were young boys, and scarcely
+one had ever smelt powder in a real fight.  But Miller was a host in
+himself, and though the odds were so desperate, I did not despair of
+victory.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+O'Brien, with a picked detachment of infantry, occupied a strong
+position, and began firing as soon as the assailants came within range.
+The cavalry and the remainder of the infantry were posted lower down
+the mountain side.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Aim low, lads," said the colonel, "and don't waste your ammunition.
+If they reach you, give them a taste of the steel."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The flight of the Indians left us a great deal exposed, and in danger
+of being surrounded; but O'Brien had placed his men on a rocky
+platform, from which they kept one detachment in check.  Meanwhile, in
+our own quarter the fight raged furiously.  A large body of Spaniards,
+slipping past O'Brien, came on again and again.  We beat them back, but
+they gave us no rest.  Our men began to fall, and once I saw a shade of
+anxiety flit across the colonel's face.  It was gone in less than a
+second, but it confirmed my opinion that we could not hold our ground.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+For the most part, we contented ourselves with repelling the enemy's
+attacks; but twice our leader flung himself against their dragoons at
+the head of his cavalry.  We broke them easily, but could not pursue,
+and the experiment cost us a dozen in killed and wounded.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"This won't do," said he.  "They will eat us up.&mdash;Crawford, tell
+O'Brien to retire on us slowly.  I intend to retreat.&mdash;Captain Prieto,
+get your men posted in that ravine to the left, and hold it until you
+are told to withdraw."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I did not hear the captain's reply, being on my way to deliver the
+colonel's order.  I had left my horse behind, but even so, the journey
+was distinctly unpleasant, as my body was a prominent target for dozens
+of muskets.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Warm work, Crawford!" exclaimed O'Brien.  "I think the colonel is
+right.  We've caught a tartar this time, and no mistake.&mdash;Steady, my
+lads! we'll make them fight for every yard."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I stayed with the detachment, helping to carry a wounded man.  The
+cheering Spaniards pressed us closely; if they could break through our
+cordon, Miller's men were doomed.  But we returned shot for shot, and
+stopped their occasional rushes by steel.  Every moment of delay gave
+our brave fellows further down the pass a better chance of escape.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Well done, O'Brien!" cried the colonel, as we joined him where he
+stood with a few horsemen.&mdash;"Steady, my lads!  Captain Prieto holds the
+pass.  Don't lose your heads, and we shall come out all right."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+At the ravine the horsemen halted, while the infantry continued the
+retreat; first O'Brien's men, and afterwards those who had held the
+pass under Captain Prieto.  This was the fiercest part of the struggle.
+The fighting was at hand-grips now, and I wondered we were not swept
+away headlong.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Stand firm, my lads, stand firm; it's your only chance!" sang out
+Miller cheerfully, and his eyes brightened with the passing minutes, as
+he knew that the bulk of his command was rapidly getting out of danger.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+For half an hour we held the narrow way with sword and pistol, and then
+a body of Spaniards, who unseen by us had worked round to the right,
+appeared lower down the pass.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"We must cut our way through, and at once!" cried our leader.  "About
+face, lads, and into them.  Ride hard, and strike hard."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+We were in a trap now, and the only way to get out was by smashing the
+door.  The colonel led, the troopers followed as best they could, while
+O'Brien and I remained in the rear to help to check the rush of the
+enemy's main body.  There was a flash of swords, the sound of
+pistol-shots, an outburst of mocking laughter from the enemy, a "Viva!"
+from our own men, a vigorous "Hurrah!" from the colonel, and then we
+were through!
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Go on, my lads!" cried the colonel, dropping to the rear.  "Your
+comrades are at the foot of the mountain.&mdash;A narrow shave, O'Brien!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Yes! and we aren't clear yet," replied the Irishman, turning in his
+saddle to glance behind.  "There would be more chance for us if we
+could bring down that tall fellow who is leading."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Whiz! whiz!  The bullets were buzzing about our ears now, too close to
+be comfortable, and but for our horses, we must soon have been killed
+or captured.  At any other time I would not have ridden down that
+mountain side at a foot pace.  It was a succession of steep descents,
+which made one dizzy to look at; and how my animal managed to keep its
+feet I could not understand.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Push on!" cried the colonel suddenly, "and tell Prieto to line the
+mouth of the pass, in case these fellows chase us all the way."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+He and O'Brien had stopped, intending to try the effect of a shot or
+two, and in another minute I was out of sight.  Fifty yards further
+down the road forked, and fancying the branch to the right looked the
+easier, I turned into it.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"It may take a little longer to reach the bottom," I thought, "but it's
+a far less dangerous way.  I wonder if the others will think to turn
+down here."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+It often happens that we come to grief when feeling most secure, and it
+was so with me now.  I was riding at a swift gallop, and perhaps with
+less care than was necessary, when all at once my horse stumbled,
+failed to recover itself, and fell heavily.  Fortunately it lay still,
+and I was able to drag myself free, feeling dazed and bewildered.  Here
+was a pretty pickle!  What could I do?  In any case the colonel would
+reach the bottom first, and the retreat would be continued without me.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Getting up, I tried to help the animal to its feet; but the poor thing
+either could not or would not move.  It was clear that I must leave it,
+and though hating to do so, I walked a few paces down the narrow path.
+The fall had shaken me considerably.  My head ached, and I had much ado
+to grope my way along.  Three several times in the course of a short
+distance I stumbled, and the third time fell heavily to the ground,
+twisting my left foot underneath me.  I tried to rise, but could not.
+Now, what should I do?  I dared not call for help, lest the Spaniards
+should hear me.  For two hours I lay thus, wondering what would become
+of me.  The noise of the shouting and firing had now died away; the
+enemy had probably returned to their stronghold.  Not a sound broke the
+stillness, and the gloom of evening began to envelop the path.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+It was now only that I realized fully my frightful danger.  Unless some
+one passed that way by accident, I should die of hunger and exposure!
+The idea nerved me to a fresh effort.  Rising painfully, and steadying
+myself here and there by the rocks, I limped a short distance, though
+every step wrung from me a cry of agony.  Several times I stopped to
+rest, and to wipe the sweat from my brow; twice in less than five
+minutes I was obliged to sit down, and at last the pain in my foot
+became so excruciating that I could struggle no further.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"It's no good!" I exclaimed; "I must stay here till the morning, at
+least."  And finding a kind of recess in the rocks, I crept in.  Then
+it occurred to me to take off my boot; so opening my knife, I hacked at
+the leather till I succeeded in getting my foot free.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+This, after the first sudden rush of pain, was a great comfort.  I felt
+easier and brighter, and lay down to sleep in a happier frame of mind,
+intending to make a fresh start as soon as daylight appeared.
+</P>
+
+<BR><BR><BR>
+
+<A NAME="chap16"></A>
+
+<H3 ALIGN="center">
+CHAPTER XVI.
+</H3>
+
+<H3 ALIGN="center">
+GLORIOUS NEWS.
+</H3>
+
+<P>
+Many times during the night the pain and the cold wakened me; but I
+contrived to get some sleep, for which I fell much better in the
+morning.  To my dismay, however, I found it impossible to walk; my
+ankle had swollen considerably, and the pain of putting my foot to the
+ground made me cry out in anguish.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Yet, unless I wished to starve, something I must do.  Unbuckling my
+sword, and hiding it in the recess, I began to crawl along, trailing my
+injured foot carefully.  It was slow work, and I felt faint and dizzy,
+not only from my hurts, but also from want of food.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Feeling sure that the Spaniards had by this time retired, I ventured to
+call for help, though little expecting to obtain it.  I cried aloud,
+both in Spanish and in the native patois, but received no answer.
+Again I crawled on, but now even move slowly than at first; and when I
+again tried to shout, my voice seemed weak and quavering.  My strength
+was nearly exhausted, when suddenly, and rather to my astonishment, I
+caught sight of a man peering at me curiously from behind a rock.  He
+was evidently a Spaniard, and an ugly customer.  He wore a long beard,
+a half-healed scar disfigured one side of his face, and on his head was
+jauntily set a small cap decked with gay-coloured ribbons.  On his
+coming forward I saw that he was dressed in the most grotesque manner,
+and heavily armed.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"By St. Philip," I muttered softly, "I should have done better to give
+myself up to the soldiers!  Surely this fellow is the prince of
+ruffians."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+He stood a moment, leaning on his gun and regarding me with curiosity.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I don't know who you are," said I irritably, "but if you have a spark
+of human sympathy, you will give me what help you can."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Are you hurt?" he asked; and the cool tone in which he spoke made me
+angry beyond measure.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Then he drew a step nearer, saying, "Perhaps the se�or will give me his
+pistols; the mountain air makes one suspicious."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Take them," I cried, "and anything else you desire; but get me some
+food and drink, and I will pay you well."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Ah," exclaimed the fellow, with renewed interest, "the se�or has money
+on him!  I had better mind that also.  There are lawless people in the
+mountains," and he grinned knowingly at me.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I have no money here," I answered, "but I will pay you well to get me
+carried to Lima."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"That is a long way," he observed cautiously.  "No doubt the se�or has
+rings or some articles of jewellery?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I don't possess a single valuable except this," said I, producing the
+silver key, "and that I must not part with."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+On seeing the key the fellow's manner changed instantly.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"How did you get that?" he asked.  "Are you one of us?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The question could hardly be considered a compliment, but it assured me
+both of safety and of good treatment.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"If you belong to the Order of the Silver Key," I remarked, "and
+recognize the authority of Raymon Sorillo, all is well.  He is my
+friend, and will give me shelter."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"The chief is in the mountains, se�or, and not far off.  I will get
+help, and take you to him.  Meanwhile, eat a little coca; it will keep
+up your strength.  I shall not be long gone."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Thanks," said I, taking some of the coca, and chuckling to myself at
+this unexpected stroke of good fortune.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The fellow was as good as his word.  He returned shortly with three
+Indians, armed like himself, and dressed in the same grotesque way.
+They were all sturdy fellows, and two of them, raising me gently from
+the ground, carried me in their arms with the greatest ease.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Every step took me farther from the main track, and into a wilder part
+of the mountains, till at last my bearers stopped in a romantic ravine.
+There were several huts dotted about in an irregular ring, but most of
+the men were in the open, seated round a blazing fire.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Three-fourths of the band were pure Indians, some were mulattoes, while
+a few were Spaniards of the lowest type.  They looked what they were,
+bandits and outlaws, and I must say that my acquaintance of the morning
+was not the most villainous of them.  They formed a striking company,
+quite in keeping with the gloomy grandeur of their home, shut in on
+every side by overhanging rocks and towering mountains.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Who is that?" suddenly roared a deep voice, and I saw the gigantic
+leader stride from the ring of men.  Approaching us, he looked me full
+in the face.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"A stranger?" cried he.  "Why have you brought him here?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I must have changed much since we last met," I interposed.  "But if
+you don't remember me, you will doubtless remember the present you gave
+me," and I showed him the silver key.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+He looked at me again, and this time with a gleam of recognition.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I know you now!" he cried.&mdash;"Make way there.  Room for an honoured
+guest&mdash;room for the son of Don Eduardo!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The name carried no meaning to the Spanish brigands; but the Indians
+received it with a great shout, for they knew how greatly my father had
+suffered in his efforts to make their lives easier.  They would have
+pressed round me to touch my hand, but the chief waved them back,
+saying I wanted food and rest.  They made a space beside the fire, and
+Sorillo himself attended to my injuries.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"No bones broken," said he, after making an examination with as much
+skill as a surgeon.  "We have only to reduce this swelling of the
+ankle.  You can make yourself comfortable for a fortnight, at least.
+Now you must have some food, and then we'll talk."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Now, I have no wish to give you a false impression of Raymon Sorillo.
+He was a wild, lawless man, who had passed his life in fighting against
+the Spanish government.  He had extraordinary courage and ability, and
+no man of his band was ever known to question an order issued by him.
+He had himself founded the Order of the Silver Key, and it was always
+my father's opinion that, but for the coming of San Martin, he would in
+time have transformed Peru into an Indian kingdom.  I am at least
+certain that his ambition tended in that direction.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+When the war broke out, numerous desperadoes flocked to him, and he was
+held responsible for many acts of cruelty.  Whether he was deserving of
+blame I cannot say.  Jos� held him to be cruel, and he generally had
+that reputation.  Perhaps it was only a case of giving a dog a bad
+name.  However that may be, it is certain he had a high opinion of my
+father, and for his sake was exceedingly kind to me.  But for him I
+might have lain long enough in the Spanish fortress, or perished in the
+sandy coast deserts.  Another service he did, which we only heard of
+afterwards, and then by accident, was the guarding of my mother.  From
+the time of my escape till the withdrawal of the Royalists from Lima,
+several of his men, unknown to her, kept ward over the hacienda.  They
+had received strict orders to protect its mistress against every
+danger, even at the risk of their lives.  In case of anything
+occurring, one was to rouse the natives belonging to the order in Lima,
+while another rode post-haste to the chief.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Remembering these things, and others not here set down, I can hardly
+judge this remarkable man without bias; but even his most bitter
+enemies could not truly say he was wholly bad.  And it may be stated
+here that during my stay in the ravine I was treated like a prince.
+The best of everything was set before me, my slightest wish was law,
+and even the fiercest of the white men, forming a small minority of the
+band, were compelled to behave peaceably in my presence.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+After I had eaten and slept for a time, I told the chief the story I
+had heard from the young Spanish officer, Santiago Mariano, concerning
+my father, and asked his opinion.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I would build no hopes on that," said he, shaking his head
+thoughtfully.  "If your father is alive, we shall find him at Callao;
+but I doubt it."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"The governor was expected to capitulate when I left Lima last," I
+remarked.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Yes; his provisions must be gone by now.  Your San Martin is an old
+woman.  Why did he allow Canterac to escape?  My men and I have been
+marched about from place to place just where we could do no good.  I
+shall not trouble to obey orders any more.  We are not children to be
+treated thus."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Sorillo was very sore on the subject, and returned to it over and over
+again.  In the evening one of the band arrived with the information
+that Colonel Miller had sent out search-parties to look for me, and
+that three men were waiting at the entrance to the ravine.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Tell them," said the chief, "that Don Juan Crawford is with me.  He
+has sprained his ankle very badly, and cannot move for several days;
+otherwise he is unhurt.  As soon as he is well enough we will take him
+home."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I wish the colonel would let my mother know," said I; "she would be
+less anxious."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"That is a poor compliment to me," observed Sorillo, smiling.  "My
+messenger is already on his way to the hacienda with the news.  I have
+told him to say you are in absolutely no danger, so that your mother
+will not be alarmed."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Then I am more than ever in your debt," said I gratefully, for the
+chief's action showed a thoughtful consideration quite unexpected.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"We shall never pay all that is owing to the son of Don Eduardo
+Crawford," he answered gravely.  "And now let me carry you to my hut.
+A bed has been prepared there for you; it is a simple affair, but you
+will be comfortable."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I slept well that night.  The pain had considerably decreased, and I
+had no cause for fear or anxiety.  Sorillo slept in another corner of
+the hut, going out so quietly in the morning that he did not disturb
+me.  Indeed the sun was high in the heavens when I wakened.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The chief's messenger had not returned, and another day passed before
+he appeared; then, to my delight, he brought Jos� with him.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Well, Jack," exclaimed my old friend, on finding that I was really not
+much hurt, "you gave Miller a fine fright.  He thought you were either
+dead or carried off.  His troops are back in Lima.  It seems Canterac
+was too good for you."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"He flung half his army at us," I responded rather sulkily, for one
+does not like being reminded of a beating.  "It must have been a matter
+of ten to one.  But never mind that.  What news do you bring from Lima?
+How is my mother? and how are events moving there?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Your mother is well, and sends her love to you, and events are shaping
+just as we could wish them to.  We are masters of Callao."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Then the forts have fallen?  O Jos�, tell me quickly&mdash;I am burning
+with excitement&mdash;was my father there?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Keep cool!" said he, smiling; "I don't want you to throw yourself into
+a fever.  Yes, we found your father there."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Thank God for that!" I murmured reverently.  "You can tell me the rest
+at your leisure."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"There isn't much to tell," he replied.  "It seems that your father was
+suddenly surrounded in the mountains by a body of regulars, and ordered
+to submit.  Taken by surprise, there was nothing else to do; but while
+he stood hesitating, some one&mdash;not the captain in charge&mdash;shot him
+down, and he remembers nothing more till he found himself in Callao.
+The governor, La Mar, happens to be a kind-hearted fellow; so he had
+your father's wound dressed, gave him the most comfortable cell, and
+altogether treated him so well that, in spite of a long illness, he is
+entirely recovered."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"This is better and better, Jos�!  I hope we shall have a chance of
+doing La Mar a good turn."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Your father will be in a position to see to that, as San Martin has
+already made him a member of the government."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"That's all right then.&mdash;By-the-bye, have you seen Montilla?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Yes.  The old fox plays the game well.  He is delighted&mdash;so he
+says&mdash;to be able to hand over the estates, which he was keeping in
+trust for you, to the rightful owner."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Do you think my father believes him?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I can't say.  Your mother doesn't; neither do I."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Nor I."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+We remained silent for some minutes, when, Sorillo joining us, I told
+him the good news.  At first he did not seem to comprehend.  When he
+did, I thought he would take leave of his senses.  Even Jos�, who was
+not given to judging by outward show, was impressed by the man's
+genuine pleasure.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+But the grand event took place some days later, when my father himself
+came to remove me to Lima.  Sorillo marshalled his Indians at the mouth
+of the pass, and they escorted him up the ravine in a triumphal
+procession, amidst enthusiastic cries of "Long live Don Eduardo
+Crawford! long live the Indians' friend!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+There is not much to tell about our meeting.  It was all very simple,
+though I suppose there were not at that moment two happier people in
+Peru.  My father was exceptionally loving and kind-hearted, but he
+never made a fuss, while my English blood kept me from being too
+demonstrative.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Well, Jack, my boy," he exclaimed, giving me a warm grip of the hand,
+"I reckon you never expected to see me again?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Well, father, I had heard it was possible you were alive, but I hardly
+dared hope so."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+As Jos� said, he was looking very well, considering the circumstances.
+His cheeks were thinner, and had lost their colour; his hair had turned
+gray; he seemed less robust than formerly; but his mind was brisk and
+alert, and his eyes retained their old fire.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Sorillo would have kept him awhile as an honoured guest; but he was
+anxious to return, and the carriage waited at the foot of the
+mountains.  On one point, however, the guerilla chief would not be
+denied.  Leaving the Spaniards and mulattoes in the ravine, he insisted
+on accompanying us, with his Indians, to Lima, and my father did not
+like to refuse him.  From the ravine they carried me on a comfortable
+litter to the foot of the mountains, where Jos� had stayed with the
+carriage.  Then forming up in front, they marched along singing and
+cheering for Don Eduardo Crawford.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+We slept that night in a deserted hacienda, and arrived at our home
+next day.  Jos� had ridden forward to inform my mother of her coming
+visitors, so that she might be able to provide them with food and drink.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+It was a grand home-coming for me, and a great triumph for my father.
+Though not a vain man, the incident pleased him, because it showed that
+the people for whom he had suffered so much were grateful for his
+efforts to do them good.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+As the journey had made me rather excited, I took no part in the
+rejoicings which were kept up through the night; but after breakfast
+the Indians took their departure, and the noise of their cheering might
+have been heard at the other end of the town.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"It's rather rough on you, Jack," laughed my father, coming into my
+room; "but now you will have a chance of a little quiet."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I am not sure of that," observed my mother, who was looking from a
+window: "here are two cavaliers crossing the park.  By the way they
+ride, I should say they are Englishmen."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Is one a big, handsome man?" I asked.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Well, yes, he is certainly big!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"That is O'Brien, then; and the other most probably is the colonel."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I was not mistaken.  In a short time Colonel Miller and his friend were
+in the room, and each in turn shook me heartily by the hand.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"We hardly expected to see you again so soon," said the colonel,
+laughing.  "We thought Canterac had taken a fancy to your company.  I
+hope there is no permanent injury to the foot?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Oh no, colonel; only I shan't be able to do any more mountain climbing
+yet awhile."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"There's none to do," broke in O'Brien; "we've taken to dancing
+instead."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I shall not be able even to join in that for some time."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"No?  What a pity!  We are enjoying ourselves immensely, though it
+seems rather an odd way of carrying on a war."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"The general perhaps considers that his troops require rest," suggested
+my mother.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Even so, staying here is a great mistake," said the colonel.  "We are
+giving the Royalists time to recover their strength, and we shall
+suffer for it later on.  Unfortunately the general appears to think
+that Lima is Peru."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Not the general only," remarked my father; "many of his officers would
+be sorry to exchange Lima for the mountains."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"That is so," admitted O'Brien frankly.  "The truth of the matter is,
+the citizens have treated us too well.  They have made us so
+comfortable that we wish to stay here as long as possible."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"In that case," said my mother, smiling, "we must steel our hearts
+against you."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"And drive us into the wilderness again!" laughed O'Brien gaily.
+"Se�ora, you will not be so cruel?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I will not begin to-day," she replied merrily, "because I hope you
+will stay and dine with us.  To-morrow&mdash;"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Ah! let us think of to-morrow when it comes; to-day we will enjoy
+ourselves."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"A pleasant creed," remarked my father, "though more often than not it
+leads to ruin.  I shall begin to think you are falling a victim to our
+South American vice."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"What is that?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Never to do to-day what can be put off till to-morrow."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"That is exactly what we are doing," remarked the colonel, "and I quite
+agree with you that it is not a paying game, especially in time of war.
+A chance once missed never presents itself again."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"An excellent reason for accepting Donna Maria's gracious invitation,"
+laughed O'Brien.  "Colonel, I congratulate you on your powers of
+argument."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Although talking in this bantering way, it must not be thought that he
+was really in favour of remaining idle; but he was a soldier, and had
+to obey orders, however much he disliked them.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+My father, being a member of the government, was in a much worse
+position, as many held him responsible in a measure for the lazy way in
+which the war was being conducted.  Really he had no power over the
+army at all, and could not on his own authority have moved a section of
+recruits.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+O'Brien had spoken truly in saying that the officers had taken to
+dancing instead of climbing.  All the chief families opened their doors
+to them, and our neighbour, Montilla, who had so suddenly been
+converted to our side, gave a ball more brilliant than even the oldest
+inhabitant could remember.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Thus the days passed into weeks; my ankle grew strong and well, I was
+able to resume my duties, and still there was no sign of moving.  We
+held possession of Lima and Callao, but on the other side of the
+mountains the Royalists did as they pleased.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I hope," remarked my father more than once, "that when we wish to move
+we shall be able to do so."
+</P>
+
+<BR><BR><BR>
+
+<A NAME="chap17"></A>
+
+<H3 ALIGN="center">
+CHAPTER XVII.
+</H3>
+
+<H3 ALIGN="center">
+DUTY FIRST.
+</H3>
+
+<P>
+As far as we in Peru were concerned, the winter of 1821-22 passed
+without disturbance; but Colonel Miller busied himself in drilling the
+new regiment of Peruvians which had been placed under his command.  As
+he had made me his aid-de-camp, we were much together, and he paid
+frequent visits to our house, where he was always gladly welcomed.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Owing to my father's office, I saw a great deal at this time of the
+protector, who treated me with extreme kindness.  Although such a great
+soldier, he had no love for war, and planned to bring about the real
+independence of the country without fighting.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I do not wish the Peruvians to kill each other," he repeatedly
+declared.  "I wish them to live at peace with each other; and whenever
+they are ready to do that I will step aside, so that they may choose
+whatever kind of government they please."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+My father, who admired him greatly, several times pointed out the
+dangers that loomed ahead.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"You are reckoning without Bolivar," said he.  "He has already driven
+the Spaniards from Venezuela and Colombia, and is steadily pushing them
+into Peru.  He will follow them and mix himself up with our affairs.
+He is mad with ambition, and you will find there is not room enough for
+both of you in one country."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"In that case I will go away," answered San Martin, with a sad smile.
+"I am here, not for my own good, but for that of Peru."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"After bearing the heat and burden of the day, you will give up your
+just reward?  It is monstrous!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I seek no reward, Crawford; I seek only the happiness of Peru.  In
+order to gain that I shall willingly sacrifice myself."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"We will not permit it, general!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"You must, because it is your duty.  Having made South America
+independent of Spain, it would be sheer wickedness to turn and rend
+each other.  Let Bolivar have the glory.  I shall have a quiet
+conscience.  But it seems to me that we are giving substance to
+shadows.  Bolivar will join hands with me.  We shall establish a strong
+government in Peru; then having done our duty, each will retire."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+My father shook his head, saying, "You are mistaken; General Bolivar's
+ambition is to make all South America into one country, with himself at
+the head.  Nothing less than that will content him."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Then he will fail," answered San Martin.  "Let us hope he will not
+drag the country to ruin with him."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+About this time, March 1822, news reached us that our forces at Ica had
+met with a terrible defeat.  By a swift and daring march, the Spanish
+general, Canterac, had thrown his army against them with startling
+suddenness.  They tried to retreat, but, being attacked in the night,
+were cut to pieces, and an enormous quantity of stores passed into the
+hands of the Royalists.  The news cast a gloom over the city, and many
+weak-kneed Patriots lost their heads entirely.  Unless we could obtain
+help from General Bolivar, they cried, our cause was undone.  My father
+did not believe this; he distrusted Bolivar, and made no scruple of
+saying so.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Still we must find out just what he means to do," remarked San Martin
+one evening.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"His intentions are evident," replied my father, rather bitterly.  "He
+means to make himself master of the country, and to push you aside."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I think you misjudge him; but in any case I place the happiness of
+Peru before personal ambition.&mdash;By the way," he added, turning to me,
+"have you ever seen this remarkable man?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"No, general."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Would you like to do so?  Ah, I see you would.  Well, you shall.  I am
+going to meet him at Guayaquil; you shall go with me, unless your
+father objects."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I have no objection, general.  It will do him good, by opening his
+eyes!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Very well; let him be ready to-morrow morning.  I will let Colonel
+Miller know of the arrangement."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Jack," exclaimed my father when San Martin had gone, "this is a great
+honour for you.  I don't expect the protector will take any one else,
+except Guido, who goes with him everywhere.  I almost envy you, my boy,
+for San Martin and Bolivar are certainly the two most wonderful men in
+South America."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Will there be any danger?" asked my mother.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I think not; the visit is a friendly one."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The next day, having put on my gaudiest uniform, blue with red facings,
+white edging, and abundance of gold lace, I went over to Callao,
+meeting the general and his "aid" just as they were embarking on the
+schooner <I>Macedonia</I>.  As usual, the general looked grave and rather
+stern.  He was very silent too, and as the schooner slipped from her
+moorings he disappeared within his cabin.  Guido, who shared a cabin
+with me, was far less reserved than his chief.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"This is a fool's errand," said he brusquely.  "The protector is just
+playing into Bolivar's hands."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"He knows what he is doing, I think."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"That makes me the more angry.  But for him the Spaniards would still
+be in possession of Peru; and now, rather than make a bother, he'll let
+the other fellow take the prize."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"What would you have him do?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Do?" cried he excitedly; "why, stand his ground.  I would say, 'I have
+done all the hard work, I have made Peru free, and I am going to be
+master of the country.  Let Bolivar or any one else come here at his
+peril!'"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Then there would be a three-cornered fight, and the Spaniards would
+have the best of it!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"That wouldn't be San Martin's fault.  Do you think Bolivar cares how
+the country suffers as long as he comes out on top?  Not he!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"If that is so, San Martin is certainly playing the better part."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"The better part? a fig for the better part!  He can beat Bolivar and
+the Spanish put together if he chooses.  He is far and away the finest
+general in South America."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"And one of the best men, if he acts as you say he will."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+But Guido was much too angry to take that view.  When I added that
+without Bolivar's help we could hardly reduce the Spaniards to
+submission, he laughed scornfully and turned away.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+On the evening of July 25, 1822, the <I>Macedonia</I> dropped anchor in the
+harbour of Guayaquil, and immediately afterwards two of Bolivar's
+officers came on board with a friendly greeting from their chief.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Caramba!" muttered Guido beneath his breath, "it makes me mad!  It's
+like the old custom of garlanding a victim before offering him up as a
+sacrifice!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+That night we slept on the schooner, disembarking the next day.  The
+route was lined by Bolivar's soldiers, who saluted stiffly, and by
+thousands of people cheering wildly for their renowned visitor.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"There it is, you see," whispered Guido; "the people want San Martin.
+If they had their way, Guayaquil would be a part of Peru, with him as
+president."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"But they haven't," said I, "and Bolivar has; which makes all the
+difference."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Look!" exclaimed he contemptuously, as the carriage stopped; "isn't it
+like a circus show?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+In front of a house stood a group of officers dressed in the most
+magnificent and gorgeous uniforms.  As San Martin stepped from the
+carriage, one of them, moving a pace forward, embraced him.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"That's Bolivar!" whispered Guido, and I gazed at the great captain
+with intense interest.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Perhaps I was prejudiced against him, but he did not come up to my
+expectations.  He was short, thin, and narrow-chested, his skin was
+sallow, his high but narrow forehead was deeply lined.  His hair was
+black and curly; he had thick lips and beautiful white teeth, which he
+was fond of showing.  His eyes were large and black but deeply sunken;
+now bright and sparkling, again dull and glassy.  His features, to me
+at least, were harsh and unpleasing; but he was evidently a man of
+great energy, to whom action was as the breath of life.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Arm in arm the two leaders entered the house, Guido and I following
+with Bolivar's staff.  The saloon presented a striking scene, being
+filled with officers in brilliant uniforms and by beautifully-dressed
+ladies.  A young girl, stepping forward, greeted San Martin, and placed
+a laurel wreath of gold upon his head.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"What rubbish!" muttered Guido testily.  "Does she think he is as great
+a mummer as Bolivar?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Hush!" I whispered, not wishing his outspoken comments to be heard.
+"See, he is taking it off."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+We could not hear what he said, but he spoke pleasantly, and beckoning
+to Guido, placed the wreath in his hand.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Take great care of this," said he; "I value it highly for the sake of
+the giver."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Bolivar would have worn a dozen, one on top of the other," growled
+Guido.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Presently the two chiefs proceeded to an inner room, where they
+remained alone for nearly two hours, while we chatted with the Bolivian
+officers, several of whom were Englishmen.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+At length the door opened, the leaders came out, and San Martin
+accompanied Bolivar to the street, where they parted with a show of
+cordial friendship.  Directly afterwards the assembly dispersed, and we
+were left in peace.  The next day they had a much longer interview, and
+at its close I read in San Martin's face that he had resolved to
+sacrifice himself for the good of Peru.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Guido," said he quietly, "let the baggage be taken aboard.  They are
+giving a grand dinner in my honour this evening; as soon as I can get
+away, we sail for Callao."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The banquet, which was held in the house set apart for Bolivar, was on
+the most magnificent scale.  The room was bright with showy uniforms;
+every one appeared to be covered with stars and crosses and
+decorations.  I almost regretted that my silver key was not dangling
+outside my tunic.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+San Martin sat in the chair of honour at the right of our host.  Of all
+the good things set before him he ate and drank little, his thoughts
+being evidently far removed from the banqueting-room.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+This was the first time I had been at a public dinner, and but for
+anxiety on our leader's account, I should have enjoyed it immensely.
+Presently, when the servants had removed the dishes, Bolivar filled his
+glass with wine, and stood up.  Instantly the buzz of conversation
+ceased; the officers gazed intently at their chief, who was about to
+propose a toast.  I listened too, wondering if my ears were playing me
+false.  As to Guido, I thought that, in his scornful contempt, he would
+have kicked the table over.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Gentlemen," said our host, "to the two greatest men of South
+America&mdash;General San Martin and myself!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+There was a round of cheering, while Guido and I hardly dared look at
+each other, and not at all at our chief.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Soon afterward we adjourned to the ballroom, but did not stay long, San
+Martin saying, "Let us go; I cannot stand this riot!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Quietly bidding Bolivar farewell, we followed one of the high
+officials, who let us out through a private door, and escorted us to
+the quay.  There we boarded the schooner, which in less than an hour
+was under way.  The protector went straight to his cabin without
+speaking.  He was bitterly disappointed at the result of the interview,
+but all that passed his lips on the subject was, "Bolivar is not the
+man we took him to be."  These words were said as we paced the deck
+together next morning, and they were spoken more to himself than to us.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"It has happened as I predicted," remarked Guido that afternoon, "and
+the rest will follow.  As soon as he has put things in order, he will
+leave Peru to make room for Bolivar.  And he will not let people know
+the reason; he will even make Bolivar's path smoother."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"You would plant it thick with thorns, I suppose?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I would plant it with naked swords!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Ah, Guido," I cried, "that is not San Martin's teaching!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"No," said he surlily; "it's a lesson of my own composing."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The voyage passed uneventfully, and on the twentieth of August the
+<I>Macedonia</I> once more sailed into the Bay of Callao.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+During our absence a riot had taken place in Lima; but the people
+received San Martin enthusiastically, coming down in thousands to the
+port, and escorting him to his country house in triumph.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I said little of what had taken place to any one except my father, and
+he was able to judge of things by other signs.  The protector, who told
+him Bolivar had agreed to help Peru with troops, worked feverishly day
+and night, until the opening of the first Peruvian Congress.  Then
+removing his sash of authority, he resigned his office, and formally
+handed over the care of the country to the new Parliament.  That same
+evening my father and I called at his house, where we found Guido, ever
+faithful, waiting in the anteroom.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Where is the general?" asked my father.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Here, Crawford!" answered San Martin, opening the door of an inner
+room.  "Is anything wrong?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"No, general, but I fear there soon will be.  Do you know it is
+whispered in the town that you are about to leave Peru?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"The rumour is correct, my friend, as I have just been telling Guido.
+No, it is useless to talk; my mind is made up.  I can do the country no
+more good."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+For a long time both Guido and my father tried to prevail upon him to
+stay, but in vain.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"The world will regard you as a deserter!" urged Guido.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"What matters it as long as I know the truth?  I care not for the
+applause of the world, my friends, nor fear its frowns.  I leave my
+work unfinished, it is true, but others will finish it and reap the
+glory.  Besides, Peru will be the better for my absence."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"No, no!" exclaimed my father earnestly.  "The people love you and
+trust you.  They will uphold your authority."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+San Martin held out his hand, saying,&mdash;
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"You are a true friend, Crawford, but you are a true patriot and a
+shrewd man as well.  Now listen to me.  Without help it will take two
+years at least to subdue the Spaniards.  That will mean two years of
+misery.  Do you follow me?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Perfectly."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"With help the war can be brought to an end in six months.  The
+Chilians can do no more, and we can look only to Bolivar.  Now, do you
+imagine that he and I can run in double harness?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+My father shook his head sorrowfully.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Of course not.  Bolivar is a great man, a remarkable man; but he is
+ambitious, and will brook no rival.  Now, suppose I remain.  It will be
+difficult to avoid strife, and the country will be plunged back into
+its old condition of slavery.  Do you think that San Martin will give a
+day of delight to the common enemy?  No, my friend; if only Peru
+retains its independence, I care nothing for self.  Let men call me
+what they please.  The path of duty lies plain before me; I am going to
+walk in it.  Let Bolivar have the glory; it is but a breath.  I shall
+not say this publicly; neither will you.  I am broken in health; let
+that do for the present.  In years to come, perhaps, the world will
+recognize my good faith; if not, never mind!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Even after that my father endeavoured to dissuade him from going, but
+his efforts were useless.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Let me wish you good-bye, Crawford," said he.  "I need hardly counsel
+you to accept the help which Bolivar offers.  The man may not please
+you, but&mdash;country first!&mdash;Good-bye, my boy; if you make half as good a
+man as your father, you will not do amiss."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+We grasped his hand for the last time, and leaving Guido with him, went
+into the road, mounted our horses, and rode slowly homeward.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Next day it became known that San Martin had left Peru for ever, and
+instantly men's tongues were loosed in a babel of talk.  Some few
+judged him rightly; but for the most part his splendid services were
+forgotten, and with sickening haste people turned their gaze toward
+Bolivar, the new sun.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"There is a lesson for you, Jack, worth heeding," remarked my father.
+"If only these people knew the truth!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"They wouldn't understand it!" said I hotly.  "The idea of a man making
+such a sacrifice is beyond them.  You know I have sometimes thought the
+general made a big mistake in the conduct of the war, but he atoned for
+everything last night.  He looked simply splendid when he talked about
+giving up everything for duty."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Ah!" exclaimed my father thoughtfully, "with all his battles to look
+back upon, he never won a greater victory than he did last evening.  It
+must almost have broken his heart, Jack, but he did not whimper."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Few spoke in this strain, and I was disappointed that even Jos� took
+sides with the majority.  Sentiment, beyond his love for us, did not
+appeal to him; he looked only on the practical side of things.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I shouldn't have thought San Martin would have thrown up the sponge,"
+said he.  "I gave him credit for more pluck than that.  They do say in
+the town that he was keen on making himself king or emperor."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"A pack of rubbish!" I cried.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Well," said Jos�, "I would have seen the thing through, anyhow.  It
+won't be pleasant for your father, either, when Bolivar gets the
+whip-hand.  San Martin's friends will be in Bolivar's black books.
+I'll guarantee Montilla has written to him already."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"You aren't in a very good temper this morning, Jos�," said I, with a
+laugh.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"No; because I am looking a long way ahead, and see things.  Is your
+father going to keep in office?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I expect so.  He may be able to do the country a little good."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"And himself a lot of harm!  Shall you resign your commission?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"How can I? the Spaniards are still in the field."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"And will take a lot of beating yet!  'Twould have answered better if
+the Peruvians had done the job by themselves."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I might have mentioned that if they found it so difficult with the aid
+of others, they could hardly have done it alone; but dear old Jos� was
+too angry for argument, so I let the subject drop.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Among the officers opinion was divided, but no one had much to say on
+the matter.  It almost seemed as if they feared to express their real
+opinion in case of future trouble.  Colonel Miller, however, spoke his
+mind freely, and so did the other Englishmen with him.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I am sorry San Martin has gone," said he; "but my duty is plain.  I am
+an officer in the army of Peru, and must obey orders from the
+government.  If they give the chief command to Bolivar, why, I shall
+fight under him, just as I have done under San Martin.  That's one good
+thing about soldiering&mdash;you always know where you are."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Humph!" said Jos�, on hearing the remark, "I'm not so sure that the
+colonel's right.  In my opinion there's more than one soldier just at
+present wondering if he hadn't better join the other party again.
+Another affair like the one at Ica would send them flying to Canterac
+in scores.  The great thing with some of them is to be on the winning
+side."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+As soon as San Martin had left Peru, Bolivar sent a message, offering
+the aid of his troops; but the government declined all assistance.  A
+new spirit seemed to enter into the nation: the people declared the
+country would fight its own battles, and preparations to meet the
+Spaniards were eagerly pushed on.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+What came of them we shall shortly see.
+</P>
+
+<BR><BR><BR>
+
+<A NAME="chap18"></A>
+
+<H3 ALIGN="center">
+CHAPTER XVIII.
+</H3>
+
+<H3 ALIGN="center">
+DARK DAYS.
+</H3>
+
+<P>
+"I have decided to leave you in Lima, Crawford, to help Videla with the
+second battalion.  I have good reasons for doing so," continued the
+colonel, observing my disappointed look; "and, anyhow, you are well out
+of this expedition.  I don't expect much from it."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The expedition of which Colonel Miller spoke had been planned on a
+large scale for the purpose of crushing the enemy in the south, and the
+first battalion of the Peruvian Legion formed part of it.  Naturally I
+had quite looked forward to sailing with it, and was not at all
+pleased, therefore, to be left behind.  I had many friends, some of
+them not much older than myself, among the officers of the first
+battalion, and on the morning of the embarkation I went over to Callao
+to see them off.  They were delighted at the thought of active service,
+and of course chaffed me unmercifully.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Take care of the town, Juan," said one; "we shall want it when we come
+back."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Some day, when you are a man, we will take you with us," laughed
+Ensign Alzura, a merry, round-faced youngster of sixteen; "but we must
+have seasoned men for this trip, dear boy."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Should the Spaniards arrive while we're away, ask them to wait till
+our return," remarked another.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I don't wonder you are so excited," said I coolly; "I felt the same
+before I knew what a battle is really like."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Bravo, Crawford!" cried the colonel, who had joined us unperceived;
+"that's a round shot for them.  They haven't heard the whistle of the
+bullets yet, eh?  Well, good-bye; it's time you were getting ashore.
+You'll hear news of us from time to time."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Good news too, I hope, colonel.&mdash;Good-bye, Zuviria, Alzura, and all of
+you.  I hope you've shipped a schoolmaster," and with that parting shot
+I ran down to the quay.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The Peruvians were on board the <I>O'Higgins</I>; but there were several
+other vessels, and presently they all stood out of the bay amidst a
+regular salvo of cheering from the spectators.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I returned to Lima feeling rather gloomy, but Lieutenant-Colonel
+Videla, who commanded our second battalion, gave me little time for
+brooding.  Fresh recruits were coming in every day, and the work of
+attending to them kept me employed for weeks.  There was still a
+Patriot army encamped outside Lima, but it did nothing, though who was
+to blame I could not say.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+About the end of the year, vague yet disquieting rumours began to
+circulate in the city.  It was said that our troops in the south had
+met with defeat, had been cut to pieces and practically swept out of
+existence.  The victorious Spaniards, uniting all their forces, were
+making ready for a swoop on Lima.  Everything was lost!
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Don Felipe brought us the news, and it was easy to see, in spite of his
+talk, that it did not displease him.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"We shall have to call in Bolivar now," said he, "or make peace with
+the viceroy.  Of course you and I will suffer.  Our estates will be
+confiscated; we shall probably be thrown into prison; but we are good
+patriots, and will not shrink from our duty."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"If the others agree with me," replied my father, "we shall neither
+call in Bolivar nor make peace.  There is still an army left!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Just so, but we cannot trust it.  The troops are almost in open
+rebellion, and this news will not quiet them."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"We do not yet know that it is true."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I am sure of it," said our neighbour hastily.  "I have&mdash;that is to
+say, there can be no doubt of it."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+A week or two later&mdash;January 20, 1823, to be precise&mdash;there walked into
+the quarters of the second battalion a young officer.  His face was
+white and drawn, his eyes were sunken; he looked so pitifully weak and
+ill that at first I failed to recognize him.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Well, Crawford," he exclaimed, "am I as changed as all that?  Don't
+you know your old chum Alzura when you see him?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Alzura?" I echoed, aghast.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"All that is left of him."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Where is the first battalion?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Spreading his hands out dramatically, he said, "Haven't you heard?
+Don't you know what has happened at Torata and Moquegua?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I have heard nothing but some very dark rumours," I replied uneasily.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"They cannot be darker than the truth.  The army has been destroyed,
+and the battalion with it."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"And the colonel?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Oh, he was in another district with the light company.  But I'll tell
+you all about it.  We had a wretched voyage, and arrived at Arica half
+dead.  After that we sat down for three weeks doing nothing, when
+Alvarado, who was in chief command, sent the colonel north with the
+light company.  A lucky thing for them, too!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Go on!" said I impatiently.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Well, at last we moved, and marched as far as Torata.  Do you know the
+place at all?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Oh yes; it's a few miles from Moquegua, isn't it?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"That's it.  Well, the Spaniards were at Torata, and we tried to turn
+them out, but failed.  Then they attacked, and we were beaten.  It was
+simply awful.  The legion fought like a battalion of heroes.  Every one
+praised us; but praise won't bring the dead to life.  We broke two
+cavalry charges, and stood our ground till there wasn't a cartridge
+left."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Then you retreated?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Some of us did, not many!  We left fifteen of our officers there and
+three-fourths of the battalion, all dead or dangerously wounded.
+Alvarado took us back to Moquegua; but the Spaniards caught us again.
+The second defeat was worse than the first, and when the battle was
+over there was no army left.  As to the battalion&mdash;!  O Juan, isn't it
+awful?  La Rosa, Tarramona, Escobar, Rivero&mdash;all gone!  I should
+think," he added, with a bitter laugh, "I must have been senior
+officer."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+It was, indeed, a terrible story.  I could hardly realize that of all
+my high-spirited young friends who had sailed from Callao this was the
+only one to return.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"How did you get back?" I asked, after a time.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"With General Martinez.  We embarked at Ilo, while General Alvarado
+went on to Iquiqui.  The game's up in that part of the country, Juan!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Oh, nonsense!" I replied brusquely.  "We aren't going to lose heart
+over a couple of defeats."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Of course the news soon spread, and the people, especially the
+soldiers, were wild with anger.  They said it was the fault of the
+government, and called for fresh rulers.  Some advised sending for
+Bolivar, while a few prominent citizens even talked of coming to terms
+with the enemy.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+One morning, toward the end of February, Videla called a council of the
+officers belonging to his battalion.  He looked pale, but firm and
+determined, as if he had resolved on some particular course.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+When we had taken our seats, he rose and said, "Se�ors, I have called
+you together to discuss an important proposal.  Affairs, as you know,
+are in a bad state; the country is in disorder, and the enemy are
+triumphing everywhere.  Under these circumstances, the chiefs of the
+army have decided to force the hands of the government.  To-morrow the
+troops will march to Lima and demand that a president shall be
+appointed with full powers.  Now, I will have no part or lot in this
+matter.  I call it treason.  If the government choose to resign, well
+and good; if they resist, my sword, at least, is at their service."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+A round of cheering greeted his remarks, and one after another the
+officers sprang up, pledging themselves to support him.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Thank you," said he quietly; "I knew you would not fail me.  Nothing
+will be done until the morning.  Then, when the order to march is
+issued, I shall command you to stand still."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Suppose they use force, colonel?" I suggested.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+His face grew paler, but he answered steadily, "I trust they will not
+be so foolish.  Should they be, the battalion, will know how to defend
+itself."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Caramba!" exclaimed Alzura, when the meeting broke up, "it seems to me
+that the second battalion is likely to follow the first.  What can we
+do against an army?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"There will be no fighting," I answered cheerfully.  "They will simply
+march without us, and the government will agree to their demands."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I spoke as if my opinion were conclusive, but nevertheless I did not
+sleep comfortably that night.  The troops were wakened early, breakfast
+was hurried over, and then, to the sound of bugles, the various
+regiments paraded.  Presently they began to move, and a mounted officer
+dashed over to know why our battalion remained still.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"By my orders they remain.  I refuse to join in what my officers and I
+regard as an act of treason," calmly replied Videla.  "We will
+willingly march against the enemy, but not against our own government."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Bending over, the officer whispered something in his ear.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"We have counted the cost," replied our chief, "and are not to be
+frightened.  Let the men who are unwilling to obey me fall out; no harm
+will happen to them," said he, turning to the troop.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Not a man moved, the brave fellows stood in their ranks, firm as rocks.
+Again the officer whispered to Videla, and then dashed off at full
+speed.  It was, as Alzura afterwards remarked, a bad quarter of an hour
+for us.  If the chiefs endeavoured to force us into submission, there
+could be but one result.  Videla would not yield, and we could not
+desert him.  Perhaps the firmness of our bearing saved us; perhaps the
+chiefs feared the people, for the battalion was composed entirely of
+Peruvians; but whatever the reason, we remained unmolested, and the
+army marched off without us.  Then the men were dismissed, and we
+gathered in groups to chat over the incident.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"What will happen now?" asked one fellow.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"It is all decided," replied Videla.  "I heard last night that the
+government will yield.  Riva-Aguero is to be made president, and Santa
+Cruz commander-in-chief."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"And what shall we do, colonel?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Obey orders," he answered, smiling.  "We cannot fight for a government
+that has resigned its powers."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The evening proved Videla's words true.  The troops, having
+accomplished their object, returned to camp, rejoicing that the country
+had a new ruler.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Now," exclaimed Alzura, as we turned in for the night, "I suppose we
+shall see great things done!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"New brooms sweep clean," said I, laughing, "but unfortunately they
+soon become old ones."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+However, it really did seem as if the new general intended to push on
+the war in vigorous style.  Preparations were made for another
+expedition to the south; Bolivar was invited to Peru; and Sucre, his
+most brilliant general, had already come.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+At this time we knew nothing of Colonel Miller; but about the end of
+March he returned to Lima, having done more with his handful of men
+than all the southern army.  The stories told by officers who served
+with him filled us with envy.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Did you hear how we cleared the Royalists out of Arequipa?" asked
+Captain Plaza.  "That was a rich joke," and he laughed even at the
+recollection of it.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Let us hear it," said I.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Well, of course, it loses in the telling, but I'll do my best.  First
+of all, we caught a peasant and shut him up where he could hear all and
+see nothing.  The poor fellow imagined we were going to shoot him as a
+spy.  About every half-hour or so one of us would go to the colonel to
+report the arrival of fresh troops, and ask where they were to camp.
+Then we spread our few men about the valley and kindled dozens of
+blazing fires.  As soon as it was dark enough, the colonel ordered the
+man to be brought out."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"His face was a study," interrupted Cordova.  "He certainly expected to
+be shot."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"The colonel read him a lecture," continued Plaza, "and wound up by
+offering to spare his life on his promising to take a letter to the
+governor of Arequipa.  'But,' said the colonel sternly, 'you are not to
+tell what you have seen here.  I want him to think we are very few in
+number.  Do you understand?'  The fellow promised readily enough,
+placed the letter in his hat, mounted his horse, and rode down the
+valley, counting the fires as he went.  Of course he told every
+Royalist officer the truth as he believed it, and they cleared out of
+the district in double-quick time.  Then we forced the governor to
+supply us with forage for five hundred horses."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"But you didn't have five hundred!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"That was the joke.  We carted the stuff to some sandhills, where a
+part of the force was supposed to lie in ambush.  When the Royalists
+returned with large reinforcements, they wasted days, being afraid of
+falling into a trap.  It was very funny watching their manoeuvres."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Then there was the officer with the flag of truce near Chala," said
+Cordova.  "He carried back a pretty report to his chief!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Yes," said Plaza, laughing; "he believed we were just the
+advance-guard of a large force.  He stayed with us the night, but I'm
+afraid his slumbers were troubled ones.  The bustle was
+tremendous&mdash;soldiers coming and going every few minutes.  The colonel
+was giving all kinds of impossible orders; in fact, you would have
+thought we had quite a big army there.  Next morning I escorted the
+Royalist a mile or so on the road.  All our men were spread out, some
+in fatigue dress, to make him believe there were at least two
+regiments."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"That was a good trick," laughed Alzura.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"And the officers galloped about, shouting to the men to go to their
+camps in the rear.  Turning to me, the fellow exclaimed seriously, 'It
+is all very well for Miller to have a couple of battalions; but we have
+a couple as well as he!'
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"'Ah,' said I, trying to keep a straight face, 'you keep your eyes
+open, I see.  I warned the colonel not to let you see so much.'"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Did you really fool him?" asked half a dozen men in a breath.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Yes, and kept our position till the colonel was ready to move.  If I
+had my way, Miller should be commander-in-chief.  He is now the best
+man in the country for the post."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Bravo!" cried Cordova.  "As it is, I suppose we shall all be under
+Bolivar's thumb soon."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I don't much care who leads," said Alzura, "as long as we win; and
+it's about time something was done.  The Royalists are getting a strong
+following in the city again."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Bah!" exclaimed Plaza scornfully, "they're just weather-cocks,
+twisting about with every wind that blows&mdash;first Royalist, then
+Patriot, then Royalist again!  It's enough to take away one's breath.
+Did you hear about Camba?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"He was one of us," said Alzura, "went over to the Royalists, and came
+back again."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"And was appointed second in command of the Legion!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+There was a cry of amazement from every one in the room; but Plaza
+continued, "It's a fact; only Miller put his foot down.  'My officers
+are gentlemen,' said he.  'If you appoint this man over them they will
+break their swords, and I shall be the first to do so.'  That stopped
+the game, and Camba was pushed in somewhere else."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"It's a wonder he hasn't changed again," I said.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"He is only biding his time, like a good many others."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I know nearly a dozen myself," said Alzura, "and one of them is a
+neighbour of yours, Crawford."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Do you mean the fellow with the pretty daughter?" some one asked.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Yes.  I respect the girl.  She is an out-and-out Royalist, and makes
+no attempt to deny it; but the old man is a schemer&mdash;he runs with the
+hare and hunts with the hounds."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Don't vent your opinion too freely, my boy; Montilla has powerful
+influence in high quarters."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Well," said Alzura doggedly, "if he isn't working hard to bring back
+the Royalists, I am very much mistaken."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The young officer's words made me very uneasy.  I knew little of Don
+Felipe's proceedings, as, although he was an occasional visitor at our
+house, a certain coolness had sprung up between us.  For this feeling
+it would have been difficult, perhaps, to give any particular reason.
+To all appearance the man had acted fairly enough; indeed, according to
+his own account, he had always been my best friend.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Still, I had very little love for him, and no respect at all.  I was
+rather suspicious of a man who changed sides just when it best suited
+his interests.  With Rosa things were different.  She was a born
+Royalist, and though I thought her views mistaken, I admired her pluck
+in holding so stoutly to them.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+But the idea that her father was preparing to turn his coat again
+worried me.  True, he might win a big reward by helping the Spaniards;
+but in the event of discovery, he could hardly expect to escape death.
+I told myself the punishment would serve him right, and that the
+business was none of mine; yet somehow I could not get rid of the
+uneasy feeling.  If Alzura's suspicions were correct, the man might be
+taken and hanged at any moment.  I said again it would serve him right,
+but the justice of his sentence would not lessen Rosa's suffering.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+All that night I lay awake thinking.  I could not get the girl out of
+my head.  You see, I had known her so long; we had played together like
+brother and sister; she was so pretty and winsome that I hated the idea
+of trouble assailing her.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+In the morning I was inclined to laugh at my fears.  Every one knew
+there were many people in Lima willing to welcome the Royalists, and it
+had been openly stated more than once that Don Felipe Montilla had only
+changed sides to secure his property.  Doubtless Alzura, knowing this,
+had jumped to the conclusion that he would willingly return to his
+former allegiance.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"That is about all there is in it," said I, feeling a little more
+assured.  "It is marvellous what stories some men can build up from a
+word here and there!  If Alzura lives till the end of the war, he
+should be a novelist."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+At this time I was a great deal in Lima, being employed by Colonel
+Miller in connection with the new expedition which Santa Cruz was to
+lead south.  Several nights a week I slept at home, much to mother's
+satisfaction.  My father continued to be busy in public matters, though
+he had resigned his office as a protest against the invitation to
+Bolivar.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Now, it chanced, about a fortnight after young Alzura's disquieting
+talk, that I had occasion to go late at night to Callao, and Jos�
+offered to accompany me.  It is likely enough that my mother put the
+idea into his head, for though brave enough herself, she was always
+fearful on my account.  However, I was glad to avail myself of Jos�'s
+offer.  The night was fine, the sky was studded with stars, and the
+moon, nearly at the full, gave forth a splendid light.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"You may go to bed, Antonio," said I to the old janitor, as he opened
+the gate.  "We are not likely to return till morning."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Do you remember our first night ride to Callao?" asked Jos�.  "There
+was no need for any one to sit up for us then."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Yes, that I do.  And the voyage in the schooner," I added gaily.
+"That was an adventure, if you like! We were as near to death then,
+Jos�, as ever we have been since."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Yes," he said thoughtfully.  "I have often wondered how we managed to
+escape."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Passing through the outer gates of the park on to the highroad, we
+cantered our horses about a quarter of a mile, and then turned up a
+narrow lane which separated our property from that of Don Felipe
+Montilla.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Suddenly checking his horse, Jos� whispered, "See to your pistols, my
+boy; there are horsemen coming this way."
+</P>
+
+<BR><BR><BR>
+
+<A NAME="chap19"></A>
+
+<H3 ALIGN="center">
+CHAPTER XIX.
+</H3>
+
+<H3 ALIGN="center">
+FALSE PLAY, OR NOT?
+</H3>
+
+<P>
+There was no actual reason why we should feel alarmed; but Lima was an
+unsafe place in those days, and people who travelled at night generally
+went well armed.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+As yet the bend in the road prevented us from seeing any one, but
+listening intently, we distinctly heard the sounds of a horse's hoofs.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"There's only one, Jos�," I whispered; and he nodded.  I do not know
+that we should have taken any notice of the man, but for his efforts to
+conceal his identity.  We came upon him suddenly, while the moon shone
+full in his face, and before he had time either to draw his poncho
+closer or to pull the slouch hat over his eyes.  Both these things he
+did quickly, but meanwhile we had seen, and a look of keen surprise
+shot across Jos�'s face.  Recovering himself instantly, he said
+cheerfully,&mdash;
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Good-night, se�or.  Fine night for a ride."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"So you seem to think," replied the other surlily.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"You have come from the town, I see," said Jos�, for we lived eastward
+of Lima; "is all quiet there?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Why shouldn't it be?  Kindly allow me to pass; I am in a hurry,"
+responded our morose stranger.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Then 'twas lucky that you knew of this short cut," remarked Jos�,
+nothing daunted by the fellow's manner.  "Well, good-night, se�or.
+Pleasant ride!" and he drew his horse aside that the stranger might
+pass.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"He isn't any too polite!" I remarked, as digging his spurs into his
+horse the fellow galloped off.  "He's a fine horseman, though, and has
+the air of a military man, if I'm not mistaken."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Yes," agreed Jos�; "he certainly rides like a soldier."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"But he isn't in uniform."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"No; he has left his uniform at home, I expect."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"He must be pretty familiar with Lima to know this short cut."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I daresay he is.  But didn't you recognize him?  Well, I suppose it's
+hardly likely you would; you were only a little chap at the time, and
+perhaps never saw him.  He's a rascal to the marrow!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"But who is he?" I asked impatiently.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Pardo Lure�a."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Lure�a?  Haven't I heard my father speak of him?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Very likely.  He was one of the 'young bloods' of Peru, and, being a
+cadet of a wealthy family, able to do much as he pleased.  He was
+always a thorough ruffian, and the common people hated him like poison.
+His pranks, however, were hushed up by those in authority, until, for
+some offence more startling than usual, your father got him clapped in
+prison.  The Dons howled finely, but your father stood firm, and the
+people backed him up; so young Lure�a had a taste of prison life.
+There was great excitement over it at the time."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"What happened afterwards?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Lure�a left Lima.  He went from bad to worse, and finally joined the
+ranks.  Of course his relatives used their influence, and he was given
+a commission; but he never rose very high, I believe."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"What could he be doing in Lima to-night?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Something rascally, I'll be bound!  He may have been to the town, but
+I believe the last place he stopped at was over there," and Jos�
+pointed toward Don Felipe's house.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"You don't think there's some treachery afoot between them, do you?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Why not?  Once a traitor, always a traitor!  Montilla means to save
+his property at all costs, and to pick up as much as possible in the
+general scramble.  Should the Spaniards win, your father will say
+good-bye to his estates."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Isn't your prejudice making you a little unjust, Jos�?  Remember that
+we know nothing against Don Felipe."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Oh, don't we?  He got the estates into his hands once, and by hook or
+by crook he'll get them again!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I thought Jos� exaggerated the danger, but this meeting with Lure�a set
+me thinking.  The fellow was evidently a Royalist soldier, and on a
+secret errand.  If Jos�'s idea was correct, there could be only one
+object in his visiting Montilla.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+But our neighbour was not the man to compromise himself unless there
+was a distinct chance of success.  Had he learned any news favourable
+to the Royalist cause?  If so, that might account for his action.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Silently we rode through the sleeping town and along the road to
+Callao, where Jos� waited at an inn while I did the business which had
+brought me to the port.  The bay was filled with shipping, and men were
+hard at work fitting out the transports for the troops ordered south.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Isn't it rather risky to remove so many troops?" I asked the colonel.
+"Suppose the enemy should swoop down on the capital?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"They're quite welcome to do so," he replied, with a laugh.  "Lima is
+of no use to us really; it's Callao that matters."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Are you going with them, colonel?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"No; I stay behind with General Sucre."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+There was one question I wanted very much to ask, but it was long
+before I could muster the courage to do so.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Colonel," I said at length, "I want to ask a rather queer question,
+but I have reasons for it.  Do you think the war will end in favour of
+the Spaniards?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"That depends," he answered, looking at me in surprise.  "It certainly
+will do so if our people quarrel among themselves, which is what the
+enemy reckon on.  That is their sheet-anchor, in fact."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Would a clever man think they had a chance just now?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Why, yes," replied the colonel thoughtfully; "he might think they
+stand an excellent chance."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Thank you, sir," I said, and the incident of the preceding night
+loomed up larger and uglier than ever.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Day had fairly broken when I sought Jos� for the purpose of returning
+home.  I said nothing to him of my talk with the colonel, though the
+remembrance of it kept running through my mind.  On our return I found
+my father alone, so I told him my suspicions, and asked his advice.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"It certainly has an ugly look, Jack," said he; "yet it may be easy of
+explanation.  For Rosa's sake, I hope Montilla isn't playing false.  He
+is in our counsels, and knows everything that goes on, so that he could
+make the Spaniards pay high for his treachery."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"And if he is discovered?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"He will be shot."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"And you couldn't save him, if you would?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I couldn't and wouldn't.  A man may be a turncoat in good faith, but a
+traitor&mdash;bah!  But after all, my boy, it seems to me we are hunting a
+fox that hasn't broken cover.  This Lure�a, whom Jos� recognized, is no
+friend of mine; and though he was an ensign in the Royalist army years
+ago, it does not follow that he is a Royalist now.  Ah, I have it!"
+said he, in a tone of relief.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"What&mdash;an explanation?" I asked curiously.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Yes; and the right one, I'll wager!  It is through Lure�a we get our
+information of the enemy's doings!  No doubt Montilla employs him as a
+spy."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Then why was he so put out at meeting with us?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Well, naturally he would not want his secret known."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+My father's idea was feasible enough, but it did not altogether satisfy
+me; yet what could I do?  If Montilla were playing false, I seemed
+almost as guilty in not denouncing him.  But for Rosa's sake I could
+not bring myself to act; and after all, it was merely a matter of
+suspicion.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+About three days before the sailing of the expedition I rode home to
+spend the evening.  Jos� met me at the outer gate, and I saw in a
+moment that something had happened.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"What is it?" I asked.  "Have you come to meet me?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Yes.  Send your horse on; I want to talk to you."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+We walked across the park out of earshot, when Jos� said in a whisper,
+as if still fearful of being overheard,&mdash;
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"He is here again."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"He!" said I; "who?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Lure�a.  He went into Don Felipe's house half an hour ago."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Well, what of that?  You know what my father said."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I spoke boldly, as if there could be nothing in the business; but Jos�
+smiled grimly.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Look here, Jack," said he at length, "we can easily settle this
+affair.  If Montilla is innocent, there's no harm done; if he's
+guilty&mdash;well, better for one to suffer than thousands."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"What do you propose?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"To waylay this Lure�a.  He is almost certain to have papers on him
+which will tell all we wish to know."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I can't do it, Jos�.  Don Felipe is Rosa's father, and I am reluctant
+to bring trouble to her."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Would you rather sacrifice your own father and mother?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"How dare you ask such a question, Jos�?" I cried angrily.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I dare anything for my master," said he, unmoved.  "If the Spaniards
+win, your father is doomed, and you also, while your mother will be a
+beggar.  See, Jack, I have no right to speak thus, but I can't help it.
+With or without your help, I intend getting to the bottom of this
+matter."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I knew Jos� of old, and that once his mind was made up, no amount of
+threats or coaxing would turn him from his purpose.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"If your father is right," he continued, "so much the better&mdash;the
+knowledge will make our minds easy; but I can't and won't stand this
+suspense any longer."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+In a sense I was completely in his power.  Whether I went or not he
+would go, and by himself would most certainly proceed to extreme
+measures.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Very well, Jos�," I said reluctantly, after weighing the matter in my
+mind, "have your own way."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"There is no other," he replied.  "Come, let us go to the workshop and
+get a few tools."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I did not know his plan, but it was evident he had thought it all out.
+First he made a simple but effective gag; then he selected a long piece
+of thin but tough rope, several strips of hide, a large rug, and a tiny
+lantern.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Now," said he with a chuckle, "I think we shan't have much trouble
+with Mr. Lure�a."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+On our way to the lane he told me his plan, and gave me full directions
+as to my share in it.  The night was dark, but we moved quietly,
+speaking only in whispers, and straining our ears for the slightest
+sound.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+At the bend in the narrow lane Jos� unrolled the cord, and I, taking
+one end in my hand, sat down in the darkness, laying the gag and a
+strip or two of hide on the ground near me.  Jos� moved to the other
+side of the lane, and we let the rope lie slack across the road.  Then
+we waited in silence for the coming of Lure�a, feeling confident that
+he would not leave the house till the night was far spent.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+This adventure was not to my liking, and I could only hope that in some
+way my presence might be of use to Montilla.  Somehow I had not the
+slightest hope of my father's idea proving right.  My old distrust of
+the man returned in full force, and I dreaded what an examination of
+Lure�a's pockets would reveal.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Slowly, very slowly, the minutes passed; a whole hour went by, and
+still there was no sign of our intended victim.  Had he left the house
+by the front?  I almost hoped he had.  Yet, should he escape us this
+time, I knew that now Jos� had started his quarry he would run it to
+earth.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+A second hour passed.  He must come soon now or not at all.  My limbs
+were dreadfully cramped, and I began to get fidgety.  Once I coughed
+slightly, but a sharp pull at the rope warned me to be silent.  At last
+the hoof-beats of a horse could be distinctly heard.  From the way he
+rode, the horseman evidently knew the road well.  Nearer and nearer he
+came, while we, raising the rope, stretched it tight.  The figure of
+horse and man loomed up dimly, came close to us; there was a stumble, a
+low cry of surprise, and the next moment our man lay on the ground, his
+head enveloped in Jos�'s rug.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+A spectator might easily have mistaken us for professional thieves, we
+did the thing so neatly.  Almost in less time than it takes to tell, we
+had thrust the gag into our victim's mouth, and bound both his legs and
+arms.  Then, while I removed his weapons, Jos� lit the lantern, and we
+looked for the incriminating papers.  We searched minutely every
+article of his clothing and the trappings of his horse, but without
+result, except for a scrap of paper hidden in his girdle.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Jos� pounced on this like a hawk, and we examined it together by the
+light of the lantern.  I could have shouted for joy when at last we
+were able to read it: "To all good friends of Peru.  Pass the bearer
+without question."  It was signed by the president, Riva-Aguero, and
+bore the official seal.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"It seems you were right," whispered Jos� sulkily.  "Help me to raise
+the horse, and we will let the fellow go."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Fortunately the animal was unhurt, and very soon we had it on its feet.
+Then we unbound the man, removed the rug from his head, and slipped out
+the gag.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Mount and ride on," said Jos� sternly, disguising his voice.  "We wish
+you no harm."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Give me my pistols, you rascal!" cried Lure�a, stamping his foot
+angrily.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Mount!" repeated Jos�, and the click of his own pistol sounded
+ominously on the still air.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+There was nothing for it but to obey, and fuming with passion, the
+fellow clambered sullenly to the saddle.  Shaking his fist at us and
+vowing all manner of vengeance, he disappeared in the gloom.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I'm glad we came," said I, helping Jos� to pick up the things; "that
+bit of paper has removed a load from my mind.  I thought my father
+might be right, but must admit I was rather doubtful."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I am in no doubt whatever," responded Jos�.  "Either the fellow was
+too sharp for us, or we made our venture at an unlucky time.  If there
+was nothing wrong, why did he ride off so quickly?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Well," said I, laughing, "the click of a pistol in one's ears is not
+much of an inducement to stay.  I think he acted very wisely."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"If all were square and aboveboard, he would have shouted for help."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"And drawn more attention to himself!  That would have been foolish in
+any case.  No, no, Jos�; the case is clear, I think.  We have misjudged
+Montilla, and though I don't admire his methods, it is evident he is
+working on our side.  Let us be just, at least."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I wish it were possible," muttered Jos�, leaving me to conjecture what
+his words exactly meant.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Strangely enough, my distrust of Don Felipe was as strong as ever next
+day.  The incident of the spy should have removed any lingering doubt
+as to his fidelity, but it did not.  Perhaps it was owing to Jos�'s
+influence, but whatever the cause, I still found myself speculating
+keenly on our neighbour's honesty.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Now, mind you, I do not wish to be praised or blamed on false grounds.
+What I did afterwards may have been right or wrong&mdash;and much, perhaps,
+can be said on both sides&mdash;but it was not done through either love or
+hatred of Don Felipe.  True, the man was no friend of mine, but his
+daughter was, and I could not bear to think of her suffering through
+his misdeeds.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+On the very day that the troops for the south embarked, I met her quite
+by accident.  She had been for a gallop, and was returning home.  Her
+cheeks were flushed with the exercise, her eyes were bright and
+sparkling; I had never seen her look so beautiful.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Well, Juan," she cried saucily, "so you have sent away your band of
+ragamuffins?  I wonder how many of this lot will come back!  Upon my
+word, I feel half inclined to pity them."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+This, of course, she said to tease me; because, if our men lacked
+something in discipline, they were at least a match for the Spaniards
+in bravery.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"You are pleased to be merry," said I, riding with her to the gate,
+"but I hope you do not seriously think that the Spaniards have any
+chance of winning."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Why not?  It is you who live in a fool's paradise Juan.  Before long
+the king's flag will be floating over Lima again."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+She spoke so confidently that I looked at her uneasily.  Was there
+really a Royalist plot on foot, and did she know of it?
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Perhaps I acted foolishly, but what I did was done with a good motive.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Send your horse on," said I, "and let me walk with you to the house.
+There is something on which I wish to speak seriously to you."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Is it a penance for my sins?" she laughed, holding up her
+riding-habit.  "Please don't be too severe, Juan!  Now begin, and I
+will try to be good."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"To begin is not so easy as you think, Rosa; but first let me tell you
+one thing&mdash;the Spaniards will never again be masters of Peru."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Pouf!" cried she, tossing her head; "that is rubbish, and says little
+for your understanding, Juan."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I am sorry you don't believe it; yet it is true, nevertheless.  There
+are Royalists in Lima who hope otherwise, but they will be
+disappointed.  More than that, some of them who are working secretly
+against us will meet with just punishment."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"What is that to me?  I can't work for the king, being only a girl, but
+no one can accuse me of hiding my opinions."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I could have laughed at that had I been in the mood for merriment.  All
+Lima knew that Peru did not contain a stancher Royalist than Rosa
+Montilla.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"It is not of you I speak, but of the so-called Patriots, who are
+sedulously plotting for the enemy.  Already names have been mentioned,
+and before long some of these people will be shot."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I think it was then she first began to suspect my meaning.  Her eyes
+flashed fire, and looking me full in the face, she cried,&mdash;
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"What is all this to me?  What have I to do with your wretched story?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+My face was hot, my forehead clammy with perspiration.  I mumbled out
+my reply like a toothless old woman.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Don't be angry, Rosa," I said.  "I hate to give you pain,
+but&mdash;but&mdash;can't you understand?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"No," replied she calmly; "I understand nothing."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I wish to warn you," I continued desperately&mdash;"to put you on your
+guard.  There is a rumour&mdash;I heard it in camp, but I do not vouch for
+its truth&mdash;"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Come, make an end of this," she said haughtily, "or allow me to
+proceed to the house.  What is this rumour which seems to have tied
+your tongue so?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I will tell you.  It is said that the leader of the conspiracy is Don
+Felipe Montilla!  Let me&mdash;"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Thank you, Juan Crawford," said she, making a superb gesture of
+disdain.  "Now go!  If our friendship has given you the right to insult
+me thus, you have that excuse no longer.  Go, I say, before I call the
+servants to whip you from the place."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I tried in vain to offer some explanation.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Go, se�or, go!" she repeated, and at last I turned sorrowfully away.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I had done my best and failed.  I had lost my friend, and had effected
+no good, for I saw by her face that she would think it treason to
+mention the subject to her father.  And as I rode from the gate, I
+wondered whether, after all, we had been mistaken in our judgment.
+</P>
+
+<BR><BR><BR>
+
+<A NAME="chap20"></A>
+
+<H3 ALIGN="center">
+CHAPTER XX.
+</H3>
+
+<H3 ALIGN="center">
+"SAVE HIM, JUAN, SAVE HIM!"
+</H3>
+
+<P>
+"Aren't you coming, Juan?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Two days had passed since my interview with Rosa Montilla, and I was
+sitting in my room at the barracks, feeling at enmity with all the
+world.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"It's a pity we've nothing better to do than to make fools of
+ourselves," said I savagely, when young Alzura burst in on me excitedly.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+He was dressed to represent some hideous monster that never was known
+on sea or land, and in his hand he carried a grotesque mask.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Hullo!" he exclaimed; "some one been rubbing you down the wrong way?
+Caramba, you are in a towering rage!  Pray what has offended your Royal
+Highness?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Why, all this tomfoolery!  Fancy a masked ball with Canterac in the
+mountains ready to swoop down on us at any moment!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"The more reason why we should enjoy ourselves while we can.  Besides,
+you are as bad as the rest: you promised to go!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I have forgotten it, then."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Well, you did; so make haste&mdash;the carriage is waiting."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I have no dress ready," said I coldly.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"That doesn't matter in the least.  Go in your uniform; you look very
+well in it."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Thanks, I prefer to stay here."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"You forget the ball is given in our honour!  Colonel Miller won't be
+too pleased at finding you absent.  'Twill be a slight on our host and
+hostess."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Very well, if you put it that way, I'll join you in the messroom
+shortly," said I indifferently.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"That's right.  Slip your things on sharp; the animals will get
+restive."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Alzura was in high spirits.  He loved fun of all kinds, and this ball
+was just to his taste.  Plaza and Cordova shared our carriage, and both
+of them rallied me on my glum looks.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Crawford's a bloodthirsty fellow," cried Alzura banteringly&mdash;"never
+happy unless he's fighting!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"That's a libel!" said I warmly; "I'm sick of the whole thing.  When
+this war's over, I hope never to hear a shot fired again."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Be easy," laughed Cordova; "you'll be an old man by then, and too deaf
+to hear even the report of a pistol."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"There may be more truth in that than you think," I observed, bitterly.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Never mind, my boy," said Plaza; "you won't hear any shots fired
+to-night.  There's no great harm in enjoying ourselves for an hour or
+two.  Here we are!  What a crowd outside!&mdash;Put on your mask, Alzura;
+the people will like the fun."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+There was a roar of laughter from the spectators as Alzura, appeared,
+and we went into the hall amidst a round of cheering.  Most of the
+guests wore some fanciful costume, but several officers, Miller and
+O'Brien among them, were in uniform.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The magnificent <I>salons</I> were illuminated by thousands of lights; the
+guests were numerous, and represented most of the beauty and wealth of
+Lima.  My father and mother had not come, neither did I see Montilla.
+Rosa, of course, would have scorned to attend a ball given to the
+Patriots.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Despite the lights and the music and the striking gaiety of the scene,
+I could not banish my feeling of dread.  I felt, as people say, that
+"something was going to happen," and moved listlessly among the
+brilliant assembly, wondering what it would be.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"You look bored, Crawford," remarked O'Brien, coming across to me.  "Is
+anything the matter?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"No, thanks; I'm a bit off colour&mdash;that's all."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Would you rather be in the mountains?" asked Colonel Miller, who had
+joined us.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"It depends on circumstances, colonel," I replied, trying to smile.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+When they had left me, I fell back on my occupation of gazing
+indifferently at the brilliant scene.  I could take no interest in it,
+nor in the chaff and nonsense of my friends, who tried hard to make me
+more like myself.  It seemed that in some mysterious way I was waiting
+for something, though what I could not imagine.  When the summons
+actually came, I was not in the least surprised.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Alzura, who brought it me, had no idea he was assisting at a tragedy,
+but, with a merry laugh, exclaimed, "Crawford, there is a lady outside
+waiting to see you; she will not leave her carriage."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Who is it?" I asked.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I don't know; I haven't seen her.  A servant gave me the message, and
+I set off to find you."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Thanks," said I quietly, and crossing the brilliantly-lit <I>salon</I>,
+took my cap and went into the vast hall.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Who had come for me&mdash;my mother?  That was my first thought, but a
+moment's reflection showed that it was unlikely.  Had there been
+anything wrong at home, she would have sent Jos� on a swift horse.  The
+answer to my question came as I stood on the flight of steps leading to
+the hall.  The crowd of people had dispersed, and only a solitary
+carriage with its attendants stood at the door.  Recognizing the
+Montilla livery in an instant, I ran down the steps with a beating
+heart.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The carriage door was open, and the light from the hall fell full on
+the white face of Rosa.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"What has happened?" I cried.  "Why do you look so frightened?  Tell
+me, quick!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Her only answer was to bid me step inside.  The footman sprang to his
+place, the coachman gathered up the reins, the carriage turned with a
+swing, and almost before I realized it we were off at a gallop.  The
+girl's face was hidden now in darkness, but I had seen it for a moment,
+and could not forget it.  She was white and scared; her cheeks were
+tear-stained, and her eyes full of apprehension and grief.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Some terrible disaster had happened, but I could not learn what it was.
+To all my questions she replied, "Home! home!" and ordered the coachman
+to drive faster.  Then she burst into a fit of crying, uttering
+incoherent words, of which I could make nothing.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Is it your father, Rosa?" I asked.  "Has anything happened to him?"
+At which she cried still more, upbraiding me for I knew not what.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The gates of the hacienda were wide open.  We passed through at a
+gallop, and the trembling, foam-covered horses drew up at the front
+door.  As soon as the carriage came to a standstill, I jumped out and
+assisted Rosa to alight.  All the servants seemed to have gathered in
+the hall.  Their faces were white, their eyes wild with dread; some of
+them still shivered.  Evidently a great calamity had occurred.  What
+was it?
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Looking around, I noted the absence of Don Felipe.  That gave me a clue
+to the nature of the disaster.  Perhaps he lay dead in his room;
+perhaps the government, suspecting him of treachery, had torn him away.
+I did not hit on the exact truth, but my conjectures went very near it.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Rosa's wild fit had passed; she was no longer a weeping girl, but an
+imperious mistress.  Her tears were dried; she had banished her fear.
+There was a light of scorn and command in her eyes.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Away, cowards!" she cried.  "Do you call yourselves men, and would not
+try to save your master?  Begone!" and she stamped her foot in passion.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The servants slunk off abashed, and she led me along the corridor.  The
+door of her father's room was closed, but she opened it, and said,
+"Come in, Juan; see your friends' handiwork!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The apartment was in total disorder.  Chairs were overthrown; the table
+was stripped of its contents; all kinds of articles lay strewn about
+the floor: there were very evident signs of a fierce and prolonged
+struggle.  On one wall was the mark of a bullet, and a corner of the
+apartment was splashed with blood.  I gazed round eagerly for
+Montilla's body, but it was not there.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"See," said the girl, "he was sitting there when the ruffians burst in
+upon him.  He fought for his life like a cavalier of old Spain, but the
+cowards were too many.  They flung themselves upon him like a pack of
+wolves, and bore him to the ground."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"But who were they?" I asked in amazement.  "Who did it?  Tell me
+plainly what happened."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Need you ask?" she said coldly.  "The ruffians were your friends&mdash;your
+servants, for all I know."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Rosa, you are speaking wildly.  I do not wonder at it: this terrible
+affair has upset your nerves."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Then she turned upon me, her eyes blazing with angry scorn.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"What is it that you wear beneath your tunic, Juan Crawford?" she
+cried.  "Are you ashamed that it should be seen?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+At first I did not understand her meaning; then a glimmer of the truth
+began to dawn on me, and slowly I drew out the silver key.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Do you mean this?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Yes!  'The chief of the Silver Key'&mdash;that is what the black-browed
+ruffian called himself.  Fancy my father, a Spanish gentleman, the
+prisoner of a band of half-dressed savages&mdash;your friends, Juan
+Crawford!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"But I know nothing about it," I cried.  "These men take no orders from
+me.  The key was given me by the chief when I myself stood in need of
+protection."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Nevertheless they are your friends, and they have dragged my father
+from his home."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"But why?  Surely there must be a reason!  Tell me what they said.  Try
+to be calm, Rosa; your father's life may depend on your words."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I know nothing.  How should I?  I was in bed.  My father sat there
+writing when they broke into the house.  The servants fled, and hid
+themselves like frightened sheep.  The cowards!  I dressed and ran
+here.  My father had killed one ruffian, but&mdash;but he could not struggle
+against so many."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I'll wager that he showed himself a brave man."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"He did; but they overcame him," she continued, speaking more calmly.
+"They bound him with cords: he was helpless.  I begged the big bandit
+to release him; I would have gone on my knees&mdash;I, a daughter of the
+Montillas!" and she drew herself up proudly.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"But the chief, Rosa&mdash;what did he say?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"That my father was charged with a serious offence, and that he must be
+tried by the officers of the Silver Key.  Think of that, Juan
+Crawford!&mdash;my father tried for his life by those dirty bandits!  Oh,
+how I wish I was a man!  Then they took him away.  I was alone and
+friendless; I thought of you, and told the coachman to drive me to
+Lima.  Then I remembered you were one of these people, and would have
+turned back.  But my father's life is precious; I would beg it even of
+an enemy.  O Juan, Juan, save him for me!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+She broke down utterly.  I tried to comfort her, and failed.  She did
+nothing but cry, "Save him, Juan, save him!"
+</P>
+
+<A NAME="img-273"></A>
+<CENTER>
+<IMG CLASS="imgcenter" SRC="images/img-273.jpg" ALT="&quot;Save him, Juan, save him!&quot;" BORDER="2" WIDTH="426" HEIGHT="611">
+<H4 CLASS="h4center" STYLE="width: 426px">
+&quot;Save him, Juan, save him!&quot;
+</H4>
+</CENTER>
+
+<P>
+I had no faith in my power to help her, but I could not tell her so.
+Why Raymon Sorillo had done this I knew no more than she&mdash;unless,
+indeed, he had discovered Don Felipe conspiring with the Royalists.  In
+that case, perhaps, I might prevail on him to spare the prisoner's
+life, and to restore him to liberty when the war was over.  It was only
+a tiny spark of hope, but I made the most of it.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Listen, Rosa," I said cheerfully.  "I do not belong to this society of
+which you speak, but its chief will do much for me.  I will go to him
+now and use all my influence.  I will beg him earnestly to spare your
+father's life, and I think he may grant it me.  Cheer up, Rosa!  In a
+few days I shall return and bring your father with me, most likely."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"O Juan, how shall I ever thank you!  Forget the wild words I said to
+you.  I was distracted with fear and anger; I did not mean them, Juan!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"No, no," I answered soothingly; "I have forgotten them already.  Now
+go to bed; I must start at once.  I shall take a horse from your
+stables."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"You have no sword!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I shall not need one.  There is no danger for me in the mountains.
+The Indians will do me no harm."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+As soon as she had promised to go to her room I returned to the hall,
+and calling the servants, sent one to explain matters briefly to my
+father, and asking that my mother would come and stay with Rosa for a
+while.  Then going to the stables, I selected two good horses, and
+ordered a groom to help me to saddle them.  Sorillo might or might not
+listen to my request, but it would be as well to waste no time on the
+journey.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The thought of taking Jos� occurred to me, but I put it aside.  There
+was really no danger in the journey, while if Sorillo would not listen
+to an appeal made in my father's name, he was not likely to listen at
+all.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Leading the spare horse, I rode through the grounds, cantered down the
+narrow lane, struck the highroad, and turned in the direction of the
+mountains.  Just where Sorillo might be I could not tell, but I
+determined first of all to try the ravine where I had once spent
+several days.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I have said that I had little faith in the success of my mission.  Why
+the Indians had committed this outrage was a mystery, and I could think
+of nothing which would help me to solve it.  That Don Felipe had acted
+treacherously I could well believe; but why, in that case, did not
+Sorillo hand him over to the government?  Why should the officers of
+the Silver Key take it upon themselves to try him?
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I rode on gloomily till the sun was high in the heavens, halting at a
+solitary hut, where the woman gave me food and drink for myself and the
+animals.  She was kind enough in this matter, but to my questions she
+would return no answers.  She knew nothing about the war, except that
+the soldiers had slain her only son, and her husband had been absent
+for over a year.  He might be Royalist or Patriot, she did not know,
+only she wished people were allowed to live in peace, and to cultivate
+their little plots of land.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Giving her some money, I mounted and rode on, feeling refreshed by the
+brief halt.  The district was for the most part bare and uninhabited.
+Here and there were the remains of a ruined hut, and on the route I
+passed the deserted hacienda which had once afforded me a night's
+shelter.  I met no people, except occasionally a few women and little
+children; the men and growing boys were in the mountains or in the
+ranks of the army.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+It was evening when I reached the foot of the mountains.  My horses
+were tired out, and the worst part of the journey still lay before me.
+However, the light had not altogether faded, so I began the ascent,
+hoping to meet with some of Sorillo's men.  As it chanced, I had not
+long to wait.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+A sudden "Halt! who are you?" brought me to a stand, and I answered at
+random, "A friend of the Silver Key."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Are you alone?" asked the voice, with just a tinge of suspicion.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Yes," I replied.  "I am Juan Crawford, and am looking for Raymon
+Sorillo.  Can you take me to him?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+A man stepped from behind a rock, and eyeing me suspiciously,
+exclaimed, "Wait, se�or.  I cannot leave my post, but I will call for a
+guide;" and putting his hand to his mouth, he whistled softly.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The sound was answered by one from higher up, and presently a second
+Indian, armed to the teeth, came running down.  The two talked together
+in whispers, and at last the second man said, "Come this way, se�or; I
+will lead you to the chief.  He will be pleased to see the son of Don
+Eduardo."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Under the circumstances I thought this rather doubtful, but I followed
+him up the path.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Are you staying in the ravine?" I asked.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Yes, se�or, for the present."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Did you go with the chief to Lima?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Ah, the se�or knows of that!  The old crocodile showed fight, and
+killed a good man; but he is safe enough now."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"He has not been put to death?" I asked, my forehead clammy with
+perspiration.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Not yet, se�or; he must first be tried."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"But what have you discovered?" I asked, thinking the fellow might be
+able to give me some information as to the cause of Don Felipe's
+abduction.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+In this I was mistaken.  The man knew, or pretended to know, nothing
+about it.  The chief had given orders, but not reasons, and had, as
+usual, been obeyed unquestioningly.  At a word from him his men would
+have ridden into Lima and dragged the president from his palace.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+It almost seemed as if Sorillo expected his stronghold to be attacked.
+The path was guarded by sentries, and a score of men were stationed at
+the entrance to the ravine, They passed us through without trouble, and
+before long I found myself in the presence of the chief.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"You are surprised to see me?" I said briskly.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Yes; I thought you were in Lima."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I was there last night."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"You have made a wonderfully quick journey.  You must be tired and in
+need of refreshment.  Come; I can at least offer you a good supper."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Not yet, thank you.  I want to ask you a question first.  What have
+you done with Don Felipe Montilla?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"The dog is in the hut yonder."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+He spoke with both anger and contempt; his face underwent a sudden
+change; for the first time I saw how cruel it could look.  My heart
+sank as I realized the uselessness of any appeal to him for mercy.
+Then I thought of Rosa, and said,&mdash;
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"It is on Don Felipe's account I am here.  What has he done?  Why has
+he been brought here?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"If another dared question me like this, I would answer him with a
+pistol shot," he cried fiercely; "but I do not forget that you are the
+son of Don Eduardo Crawford.  Come, let us eat and forget this
+business."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Will you tell me afterwards?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I will tell you nothing, but you shall hear for yourself.  To-morrow
+the man will be tried, and if he is found guilty, not all South America
+shall save him.  But we will try him fairly, and you shall bear witness
+to our justice."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I want mercy!" said I.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"You do not know what you ask yet.  Wait till the morning.  And now
+come; you must not be able to accuse me of inhospitality."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The guerillas led away my horses, and I followed Sorillo to his own
+hut, where in a short time a plentiful meal was laid.  I was both
+hungry and thirsty, yet I had to force myself to eat and drink.
+Sorillo made no attempt at conversation, and I did not care to talk.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+When the things were removed, he had a bed made on the floor, and
+suggested I should lie down.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I am busy," said he.  "Most likely I shall be up all night, but that
+is no reason why you should not rest.  I will have you wakened in good
+time in the morning."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Thank you," I answered; and as he left the hut I lay down on the bed
+and closed my eyes.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Though tired out, hours passed before I was able to sleep.  In the
+darkness I could see Rosa's white face, and hear her pitiful cry, "Save
+him, Juan, save him for me!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+What had he done to make Sorillo so angry?  Surely he was not so bitter
+against every traitor?  He had hinted that even I would not beg for
+mercy when I knew the truth.  It would have to be something very
+dreadful, I thought, to make me forget my promise to Rosa.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+And what of Don Felipe?  How was he passing the night?  Did he know the
+charge to be brought against him in this most irregular court? and
+would he be able to clear himself?  I wondered.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+So thinking and dreaming, between sleep and wakefulness, I lay on the
+chief's bed, while the long hours rolled slowly away.
+</P>
+
+<BR><BR><BR>
+
+<A NAME="chap21"></A>
+
+<H3 ALIGN="center">
+CHAPTER XXI.
+</H3>
+
+<H3 ALIGN="center">
+ROUGH JUSTICE.
+</H3>
+
+<P>
+I did not take much rousing in the morning, and even before remembering
+the exact circumstances, felt oppressed by the weight of coming sorrow.
+I breakfasted alone, Sorillo sending a profuse apology for not being
+able to join me, though I was rather glad than otherwise at his absence.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Leaving the hut, I went into the ravine.  There were perhaps a hundred
+men in sight, all armed, and apparently waiting for some signal.  Their
+comrades, no doubt, had been dispatched on an errand, or were guarding
+the neighbouring passes.  In front of Don Felipe's hut stood a sentry,
+and, somewhat to my surprise, I now noticed a second hut, slightly
+lower down and similarly guarded.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Two prisoners!" I thought.  "I wonder who the other is?  Sorillo did
+not mention him."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Nearer the head of the ravine some soldiers were at work, and going
+towards them I beheld a strange and significant sight.  In the side of
+the hill was a natural platform, broad and spacious, while round it
+stretched in a semicircle a wide stone seat, which the men were
+covering with bright red cloth.  Below the platform stood a ring of
+soldiers with impassive faces.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I was still wondering what this might mean, when Sorillo, touching my
+arm, led me to the centre of the stone seat, saying, "Sit there; you
+shall be a witness that the people of the Silver Key treat their
+enemies justly."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Rather reluctantly I took the seat indicated.  Sorillo sat next me, and
+six officers, ascending the platform, took their places, three on
+either side of us.  That portion of the seat occupied by the chief was
+slightly raised; but this, of course, makes no difference to the story.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+At a signal from Sorillo the door of Don Felipe's hut was opened, and
+the prisoner came out escorted by two armed men.  The soldiers, opening
+to right and left, made way for him, and by means of the boulders,
+which served as steps, he climbed to the platform.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+In spite of my prejudice against the man, I rejoiced to see how boldly
+he held himself.  He appeared to have summoned to his aid all the pride
+of his dead-and-gone ancestors.  He glanced contemptuously at the
+gigantic Sorillo, and meeting my eyes, smiled defiantly.  As to the
+officers, he did not give them even a look.
+</P>
+
+<A NAME="img-281"></A>
+<CENTER>
+<IMG CLASS="imgcenter" SRC="images/img-281.jpg" ALT="He glanced contemptuously at the gigantic Sorillo." BORDER="2" WIDTH="406" HEIGHT="558">
+<H4 CLASS="h4center" STYLE="width: 406px">
+He glanced contemptuously at the gigantic Sorillo.
+</H4>
+</CENTER>
+
+<P>
+"Thank goodness," said I to myself, "no one can call Rosa's father a
+coward!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Then Sorillo began to speak, clearly and distinctly, but with no note
+of anger in his voice.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Don Felipe Montilla," he said, "you are brought here by order of the
+Society of the Silver Key."  Don Felipe's lips curled as if in
+amusement.  "It is charged against you that you, having taken the oath
+of loyalty to the government, have since been in traitorous
+communication with the Royalist leaders.  Do you deny or admit the
+charge?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Don Felipe shrugged his shoulders carelessly, saying, "A truce to your
+mummery!  Do you think I would plead for my life to a band of
+cut-throats?  What care I for your society?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I thought this outburst would provoke his captors beyond measure, but,
+as far as I could judge, it produced no effect at all.  They sat quite
+still, as if the remarks had been addressed to others.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"It is our custom," continued Sorillo, "to give those brought before us
+every chance to defend themselves.  We are not lawyers; we do not
+juggle with words; our one desire is to get at the truth."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"By St. Philip," muttered Montilla, "this is the last place I should
+have thought to find it in!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"For this reason," continued the chief, ignoring the sarcastic
+interruption, "the story shall be told plainly, and then you will
+understand exactly what you are charged with.  Three nights ago we
+stopped a man returning from Lima.  Many times he had gone to and fro
+unmolested, protected by a pass from Riva-Aguero.  At last he was
+recognized by one of our men as Pardo Lure�a, an utterly worthless man,
+who had already changed sides several times during the war."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"He would have made a good recruit for you," remarked Montilla.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Suspecting this man, we had him watched," continued the chief, again
+passing over the interruption, "and found that always he went to your
+house, se�or, returning under the cover of night.  We knew you to be an
+excellent Patriot, yet the circumstance made us uneasy.  At length we
+decided to ignore the president's passport.  Lure�a was stopped and
+searched, with this result," and he flourished a letter before the
+prisoner.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Don Felipe must have known by now how helpless his case was; but he
+only smiled.  In truth, at this crisis of his life he showed no want of
+pluck.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"There is much in this letter," said the chief mercilessly.  "It
+contains a full list of the troops just dispatched to the south, and of
+those still remaining in Lima, with an exact statement as to the
+quantity of their stores and ammunition.  It describes their position,
+and advises General Canterac how he can best enter Lima and seize
+Callao.  It provides also a list of those who will join him, and
+stipulates that the writer shall keep not only his own estates, but
+shall be given those of which he has lately been deprived."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+At this last revelation Don Felipe changed colour somewhat, and
+withdrew his eyes from my face.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"This letter," said Sorillo, "came from your house; it is signed F. M.,
+and I charge you with having written it.  Can you deny that it is in
+your handwriting?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The prisoner seemed to have regained self-possession, for looking
+steadily at Sorillo, he exclaimed, "A gentleman of Spain does not
+answer the questions of a mountain robber."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Passing the letter to me, Sorillo said, "You know this man's
+handwriting; perhaps you will satisfy yourself that he wrote this
+letter?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"No," said I coldly, thrusting the paper away; "I will be neither judge
+nor witness in this case."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Very well," answered the chief; "let the second prisoner be brought
+forward."  And two men immediately fetched Pardo Lure�a from his hut.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+He was still a young man, but looked old.  His eyes were shifty and
+cunning, his lips full and thick; he did not seem to be at all the kind
+of man to play so daring a game.  Don Felipe looked at him so
+scornfully that he turned away his face in confusion.  He gave his
+answers clearly, however, and told the story from beginning to end
+without a tremor.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+It was as Sorillo had said.  The fellow admitted being a Royalist spy
+employed in carrying messages between General Canterac and Montilla.
+The Don, he declared, had procured him the pass signed by Riva-Aguero,
+and had given him the letter now in the guerilla chief's possession.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Don Felipe never once interrupted him either by word or gesture; to
+look at him, one would have thought he was merely a spectator, with no
+interest in the matter one way or another.  But when at last the tale
+ended, and Sorillo called upon him to speak, his attitude changed.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Do your murders your own way," he cried defiantly.  "If the farce
+pleases you, play it.  What has it to do with me?  When I am accused of
+crime by the government of my country, I will answer."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Don Felipe is right, Sorillo," I interrupted.  "If he has done wrong,
+let him be brought before a proper tribunal.  Whether he be innocent or
+guilty, if you kill him you commit murder.  You and your followers have
+no right to punish him."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"In the case of a traitor we take the right," answered Sorillo
+drily.&mdash;"But there is a further charge, Don Felipe Montilla, more
+serious still.  You have been proved false to your country; I accuse
+you also of being false to your friend."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Hitherto, I am bound to admit, the guerilla chief had acted like a
+perfectly impartial judge; now there was a ring of anger in his voice
+and a dangerous glitter in his eyes.  As to Montilla, I could hardly
+suppress an exclamation of surprise at the change in his appearance.
+No longer boldly erect, he stood with drooping head, pale cheeks, and
+downcast eyes.  In the first act he had behaved like a man of spirit;
+the second he began like a craven.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Listen!" exclaimed Sorillo sternly, and his first words told me what
+would follow.  "For many years there has lived in Lima a man who loves
+the Indians.  He saw that they were treated as dogs, and because of his
+great pity he resolved to help them.  To this end he worked day and
+night, making many enemies among the rulers of the country.  They tried
+to turn him from his purpose, now with threats, again with offers of
+heavy bribes: he would not be moved.  So badly were the Indians treated
+that it mattered little whether they lived or died.  They banded
+together, procured arms and ammunition, and determined to fight for
+their liberty.  Their friend sent them word that the attempt was
+hopeless; but they were very angry, and would not listen.  Then he left
+his home to speak to them himself, and endeavour to dissuade them from
+their purpose."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Montilla had not once raised his head, and now his limbs quivered.  As
+for me, I sat listening with fascinated interest.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Side by side with this friend of the Indians," the chief continued,
+"there lived a Spanish gentleman, who told the viceroy falsely that his
+neighbour was going to the mountains to raise the standard of
+rebellion.  The viceroy, who was frightened, sent soldiers to seize
+him.  Second in command of the party was a lieutenant, young in years
+but old in crime.  To him this Spaniard went secretly.  'If this man
+should be killed in the scuffle,' said he, 'you can come to me for five
+thousand dollars.'
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"The lieutenant did his best to earn the money, and thought he had
+succeeded.  As it chanced, however, his victim did not die, but his
+estates were confiscated and given to the man who had betrayed him."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The speaker stopped.  All was still; save for the leaping waters of the
+torrent, no sound was to be heard.  I glanced at Montilla: he was
+deathly pale, and on his forehead stood great beads of perspiration,
+which, with his bound hands, he was unable to wipe away.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Shall I tell you who these men were?" asked Sorillo.  "One is Don
+Eduardo Crawford; the others stand here," and he pointed to the
+prisoners.  "Listen to your accomplice, Felipe Montilla, if you care to
+hear the story repeated."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Again Lure�a gave his evidence glibly.  I think he had no sense of
+shame, but only a strong desire to save his life.  He might not have
+committed the deed for the sake of the money alone, he said, but he
+hated my father for having cast him into prison.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+It was poor evidence on which to try a man for his life, yet no one
+doubted Montilla's guilt.  There he stood with trembling limbs and
+ashen face&mdash;truly a wretched figure for a cavalier of Spain!  His
+courage had broken down completely, and to all the questions put by his
+self-appointed judge he answered no word.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+At length Sorillo asked his officers for their verdict, and with one
+consent they pronounced him "Guilty!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"It is a true verdict," exclaimed Sorillo; "any other would be a
+lie.&mdash;And now, Felipe Montilla, listen to me for the last time.  You
+have been proved a traitor to your country, and that alone merits
+death; but this other crime touches the members of the Silver Key more
+closely.  When the great men of Peru called the Indians dogs, Don
+Eduardo was our friend.  He took our side openly, encouraged us,
+sympathized with us, pitied us.  And you tried to slay him! not in fair
+fight, mind you, and only because you coveted his possessions.  For
+that you die within forty-eight hours, as surely as the sun will rise
+to-morrow!"  And all his hearers applauded.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The condemned man still made no reply, uttered no appeal for mercy, but
+stood as one dazed.  But I thought of the daughter who loved him so
+well, and sprang to my feet.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Hear me!" I cried excitedly.  "If Don Felipe has done wrong, it is
+against my father.  Do you think he will thank you for killing his
+enemy?  Is that his teaching?  You know it is not; you know that he
+would forgive him freely&mdash;would beg his life from you on his bended
+knees.  If you really love my father, if you feel that he deserves your
+gratitude, spare this man's life.  If he has sinned he will repent.  I
+have come here for him.  Do not let me go back alone.  Am I to say to
+my father, 'You are foolish in thinking the Indians care for you; they
+care nothing!  I asked of them a boon in your name, and they refused
+it'?  Raymon Sorillo, I appeal to you, give me this man's life for my
+father's sake!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I looked at him earnestly, hoping to find a spark of mercy in his eyes.
+Alas, there was none!  He was hard as iron, cold as ice; on that day,
+at least, there was no pity in him.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"You are foolish," said he; "you are like a child who cries for the
+moon.  Set this man free and he will immediately begin his old games of
+deceit and trickery.  He cannot help himself.  It is his nature, as it
+is a spider's to weave its web.  Your father's happiness depends on
+this traitor's death."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I heard him patiently, and then renewed my appeal.  It was quite
+useless.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Remove the prisoners," said he; and at a sign the troops marched off,
+the officers dispersed, and none save we two remained on the platform.
+For a long time neither spoke.  I was thinking of Rosa anxiously
+awaiting my return.  I had bidden her hope, and there was no longer any
+hope.  I made no attempt to deceive myself in this respect.  Sorillo
+would do much for me, but this one thing he would not do.  I dreaded
+the thought of returning to Lima.  What would Rosa say and do when she
+heard of her father's shameful death?  Perhaps that part might be
+spared her; she need not learn the whole truth.  I must invent some
+story which would save her the knowledge of his double treachery.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+At last I turned to the chief, saying, "Will you allow me to speak with
+Don Felipe in private?  He has a daughter at home; he may wish to send
+her a last message."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"He is not worth your kindness; but do as you please."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I thanked him, and walked toward the hut in which Don Felipe was
+confined.  The sentry let me pass without protest, and opening the door
+I entered.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The sight before me was a pitiful one.  The wretched prisoner sat on a
+wooden bench in the dreary hovel.  His arms were bound, but he was free
+to walk about if he so wished.  At the click of the latch he raised his
+head, but seeing me dropped it again quickly, as if ashamed to meet my
+gaze.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Don Felipe," I began, "have you any message for your daughter?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Instead of answering my question, he himself asked one.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Will that brigand really put me to death?" he said.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I am afraid so.  I have begged hard for your life, but in vain."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Looking at me curiously, he exclaimed, "I cannot understand why you
+should wish to save me!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"For Rosa's sake!  When you were carried off, she came to me, and I
+promised if it were possible to bring you back with me."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Then you do not believe the story you heard to-day, about&mdash;about&mdash;"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"My father?  Yes, I believe it; but that is no reason why I should be
+unkind to Rosa.  Poor girl! 'twill be hard enough for her to lose you."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Is there no way of escape?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I shook my head.  "An armed sentry stands outside; a hundred soldiers
+are in the ravine; the path is closely watched.  I would help you if it
+were possible."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"It will be dark to-night."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"That would help us little.  Even if you escaped from the hut, you
+would be challenged at every dozen yards.  No, I can see no way out."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I think that at this time he began to fully realize the danger he was
+in.  He had a hunted look in his eyes, and again the perspiration stood
+on his forehead.  Fear was fast killing shame, and he seemed to care
+nothing that I was the son of the man whom he had tried to murder.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Juan," said he, "can't you make an excuse to visit me after dark?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I should think so," I replied.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"And will you cut these cords?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"If you think it will help you at all."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Leave that to me," said he, speaking almost hopefully.  "By St.
+Philip, I shall escape the ruffian yet!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+What his plan was he did not tell me, but it seemed to please him
+greatly.  He even laughed when I again mentioned Rosa, and said he
+would carry his message himself.  And with hope there came back to him
+something of the old cunning and smoothness of speech for which he was
+so noted.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I am sorry you were misled by that preposterous tale," said he softly.
+"Pardo Lure�a is a villain, but we will unmask him.  Of course, there
+was a little truth in his story, but so twisted and distorted that it
+could not be recognized.  Your father will understand, however, and
+even you will come to see that I am not greatly to blame.  A little
+thoughtlessness, Juan, and a desire to help a friend&mdash;no more; but that
+can wait.  You will be sure to come, Juan; you will not fail me?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I will do my very best, Don Felipe, for your daughter's sake."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Wishing him farewell, I returned to the chief's hut.  He was not there,
+so I lay down to think out the situation; but my head was in a hopeless
+muddle.  I went into the ravine again, and, watching the soldiers,
+wondered how the unhappy prisoner hoped to escape them.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+As it chanced, his plan was doomed to disappointment.  Toward the end
+of the afternoon I stood chatting with Sorillo and some of his
+officers, when a messenger rode up the ravine.  His horse had travelled
+far and fast, while he looked worn out with fatigue.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Springing to the ground, he saluted, while the chief cried, "What news,
+Sanchez? it should be worth hearing!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I think it is," replied the man, with a significant smile.  "General
+Canterac is marching on Lima at the head of a Spanish army."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"How many men has he?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Nine thousand, perhaps ten&mdash;horse, foot, and guns.  The advance-guard
+is not far off."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Thanks, Sanchez.&mdash;Let the men assemble, Barros: a dozen to stay here,
+the rest to follow me.  Has Cerde�a sent word to Lima?  Good.  He knows
+his business.&mdash;Juan, you will just have time to ride clear, and not
+much to spare.  No doubt Canterac has sent some of his troops by the
+near cut."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+All was bustle and activity in the ravine.  Officers issued commands,
+troopers saddled their horses, muskets were seen to, an extra supply of
+ammunition was served out, and in a very short time everybody save the
+few men left to guard the ravine was ready to march.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"What can your handful of men do against Canterac's army?" I asked
+Sorillo as we rode away.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Not much beyond cutting off a few stragglers," he replied, smiling;
+"but we shall obtain information of which our leaders in Lima seem to
+stand badly in need."
+</P>
+
+<BR><BR><BR>
+
+<A NAME="chap22"></A>
+
+<H3 ALIGN="center">
+CHAPTER XXII.
+</H3>
+
+<H3 ALIGN="center">
+THE "SILVER KEY" AGAIN.
+</H3>
+
+<P>
+Since these events happened I have asked myself many times whether I
+did right or wrong, and even now I scarcely know how to decide.  Those
+who blamed me said I was Sorillo's guest, and should not have abused
+his confidence.  Others urged that I was bound, if possible, to prevent
+him putting a man to death unlawfully.  All, however, agreed that none
+but a madman would have embarked on so preposterous an enterprise.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The idea occurred to me suddenly.  The guerillas, split up into groups,
+had gone, some this way, some that, to watch the movements of the
+Royalist troops.  Sorillo had kept me company till we cleared the pass,
+when he, too, with a word of farewell, rode away.  It was now dusk,
+and, as the chief had truly said, there was no time to waste; yet I did
+not move.  Right in my path, with outstretched arms and pitiful,
+beseeching face, stood Rosa Montilla.  I knew it was but the outcome of
+a fevered brain; yet the vision seemed intensely real.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The girl's eyes looked at me reproachfully, her lips moved as if in
+speech.  I fancied I could hear again her parting cry, "O Juan, save
+him!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I asked myself impatiently what more could be done.  I had tried my
+best and failed, and there was an end of it.  Besides, the words of the
+chief rang in my ears in ominous warning: Don Felipe could not be
+trusted!  To set him free was like giving liberty to a venomous snake;
+his hatred would now be all the more bitter in that he had struck and
+failed.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Why should I add to my father's danger?  The fellow had tried to slay
+him once; the next time he would make no mistake.  I would make no
+further effort to help such a traitor; I would ride on.  But again the
+beseeching face of the girl stopped me, and again I was moved to think
+how I could aid the miserable prisoner.  Like a flash of lightning I
+thought of the silver key.  <I>That</I> would unlock his prison door.
+Although I fully believed in Don Felipe's guilt, I remembered he made
+no effort to defend himself.  He would not admit Sorillo's right to try
+him.  Before a lawful judge he might be able to vindicate his actions
+in some way; at least he should have the chance to do so.  Thus
+thinking, I turned back in the direction of the ravine.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Half of the sentries, I knew, had been withdrawn to ride with their
+chief, but the number on guard mattered little; the silver key was an
+all-powerful talisman.  I rode slowly, not wishing to tire the horses,
+to whose speed and strength we might later be indebted for our lives.
+I thought, too, it would serve my purpose better to reach the ravine in
+the dead of night, when the men would be sleepy and less likely to ask
+inconvenient questions.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I was stopped at the entrance to the pass, but not for long.  The
+Indians who had seen me ride out with their chief had no suspicion of
+my object.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Where is the chief?" asked the officer.  "Have the Royalists got clear
+of the mountains?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"No; they are still in the defiles.  But I am in a hurry; I have come
+for the Spanish prisoner Montilla."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Fortunately this officer had not attended the trial of Don Felipe, and
+Sorillo was not the man to give reasons for his orders.  My main
+difficulty would lie with the sentry at the door of the hut, but I did
+not think he would disobey the authority of the Silver Key.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+In any case, boldness was my best policy; so I clattered up the ravine,
+stopping hardly a yard from the astonished sentry.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Quick, man!" I cried, springing to the ground; "are you asleep?  Open
+the door.  I have come back for the prisoner.  Is he still bound?
+Good.  Can you tie him to this horse so that he cannot escape?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Yes, se�or, if the chief wishes it.  But, pardon me, se�or, I have no
+orders."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Orders!" cried I angrily; "what would you?  I have but just left the
+chief; and is not this" (producing the silver key) "sufficient
+authority?  Am I to tell the chief that he must come himself for the
+prisoner?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"No, no, se�or; but I am only a simple soldier.  I must not open the
+door unless my officer bids me."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"He is below," I said; "we cannot pass without his permission.  And I
+must hurry, or it will be too late.  Quick, drag the fellow out and
+bind him firmly on the horse; then come with me."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The sentry had no inkling of the truth, and, never dreaming that his
+officer could be deceived, opened the door.  Then the prisoner, whether
+from fear or from cunning I could not tell, acted in such a manner that
+no one would think I was helping him to escape.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+He refused to stir an inch from his bench, and kicked vigorously when
+the sentry tried to seize him.  Then he yelled so loudly that the
+officer came running up in alarm.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"The bird has no wish to leave his cosy nest," laughed he.&mdash;"Give me
+the rope, Pedro, and get a gag; the chief won't want to hear that
+music.&mdash;Now, se�or, if you'll bear a hand we'll hoist him up.&mdash;Be
+still, you villain, or you'll get a knock on the head.&mdash;Had not one of
+my fellows better go with you to guard this wild beast, se�or?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Now, from the officer's point of view this was a very sensible
+proposal, and one which I dared not oppose for fear of exciting
+suspicion.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+So I answered carelessly, "A good thought, and I am obliged to you;
+though," with a laugh, "the prisoner won't be able to do much mischief
+when you have finished with him."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"No, indeed; he'll be pretty clever if he can get these knots undone,"
+replied the officer complacently.&mdash;"Now, the gag, Pedro.  Quick, or
+he'll spoil his voice in the night air.&mdash;There, my pretty bird! you
+shall sing later on."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+All this occupied time, and I was in dread lest dawn should break
+before we left the ravine.  Then we had to wait till Pedro had saddled
+his horse; and I watched the sky anxiously.  At last we were ready, and
+bidding Pedro ride in front, I took leave of the unsuspecting officer.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"A safe journey," he cried.  "I should like to know what Sorillo means
+to do with the fellow."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"You'll hear all about it when the troops return," said I, laughing and
+hurrying after Pedro.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Thus far the venture, with one exception, had succeeded admirably.  The
+prisoner was out of his cage, and would soon be clear of the pass.
+Then I should only have Pedro to deal with.  His company was a
+nuisance, but it must be borne with for the present; later I should
+have to find means to get rid of him.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+We rode slowly down the narrow path, Pedro in front, Don Felipe and I
+abreast.  The poor fellow was in a hapless plight.  The gag hurt his
+mouth, and the cords cut into his flesh.  Had we been alone, I should,
+of course, have done something to ease his pain; but as long as Pedro
+was there, this was out of the question.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Anyhow, it's better than being shot," I thought; "and really the
+wretch deserves it all."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+We passed the sentries without trouble; but at the bottom of the pass
+my difficulties began again.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I suppose the chief has gone to San Mateo, se�or?" said Pedro
+questioningly.  "That is the best place to watch from."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+This was an awkward question, as I had intended making a straight dash
+for Lima; but it would not do to arouse the man's suspicions.  We were
+too close to the mountains to run any unnecessary risks, and if Pedro
+showed fight there, our chance of escape was gone.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+So I answered, "Yes," and rode along, wondering what would come of it.
+Every step led us into greater danger.  We might run into the arms of
+the guerillas, in which event Don Felipe's fate was certain; or be
+stopped by the Royalists, when I should be made prisoner.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Day was now breaking, and with the strengthening light I began to see
+our position more clearly.  It was not promising.  We were farther from
+Lima than we had been when in the ravine, and were making straight for
+the mountains again.  Another half-hour's riding would cut us off from
+escape completely.  What could be done?  There was no time to lose, and
+I must hit on a plan at once.  The simplest and perhaps the only one
+likely to be successful I set aside without a moment's hesitation.  Not
+for a dozen men's lives, my own included, would I harm the unsuspecting
+man whom chance had thrown into my power.  I might, however, frighten
+him into obedience.  As far as I could see, it was that or nothing, and
+the attempt must be made at once.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+So, with beating heart and greatly doubting what would be the issue, I
+whipped out my pistol, and, levelling it at him, said quietly, "Move
+your hand to your musket, and you are a dead man! do as I bid you, and
+no harm will befall you.  Leave your gun, get down from the saddle, and
+hold your hands above your head."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+In the circumstances it was a risky experiment, because if the man
+should guess the truth I was entirely at his mercy.  For him there was
+no more danger than if my pistol were a piece of wood.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"But, se�or&mdash;" he began, staring at me in surprise.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Get down!" I repeated sternly.  "It is my order.  Don't waste time, or
+I shall be obliged to fire."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Pedro was a brave man; indeed, all the Indians in Sorillo's band held
+their lives cheap.  He did not exactly understand what was happening,
+yet he seemed to think that all was not right.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"The chief!" he exclaimed.  "Does he&mdash;"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Get down!" I cried once more, brandishing my weapon.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+With a thundering shout of "The Silver Key!  Help for the Silver Key!"
+he clubbed his musket and dashed straight at me, regardless of the
+levelled pistol.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+One moment's pressure on the trigger and he would have dropped to the
+ground helpless, but I refrained; instead, I pulled the rein, and my
+horse swerved sharply, though not in time.  The musket descended with a
+thud; the pistol slipped from my nerveless fingers; I seemed to be
+plunging down, down beneath a sea of angry waters.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+How long I lay thus, or what happened during that time, I do not know;
+but I awoke to find myself beside a roaring fire, and to hear the hum
+of many voices.  A soldier, hearing me move, came and looked into my
+face.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Where am I?" I asked anxiously.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Not far from Lima," said he.  "A few hours since you weren't far from
+the next world.  How did you get that broken head?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I tried hard to remember, but could not; the past was a total blank.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Well, well, never mind," exclaimed the man kindly.  "Try to sleep; you
+will be better in the morning."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+With the coming of dawn I saw that I was in the midst of a large camp.
+Thousands of soldiers wrapped in their ponchos lay motionless before
+smouldering fires.  Presently there was a blowing of bugles, and the
+still figures stirred to life.  Officers rode hither and thither
+issuing orders, the men ate their scanty rations, the cavalry groomed
+and fed their horses&mdash;there were all the sights and sounds connected
+with an army about to march.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Then the infantry formed in battalions, the horsemen mounted, bugles
+sounded in numerous places; there was a cracking of whips, the creaking
+of wheels, and all began to move slowly forward.  Soon but a few men
+remained, and it seemed that I had been forgotten.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+At length a man came to me.  He was dressed in uniform, but his words
+and actions proved him to be a surgeon.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Feel better?" he asked.  "Can you eat something?  I can only give you
+army food; but that will fill up the hollows.  Now let me look at the
+damage.  Faith, I compliment you on having a thick skull.  A thinner
+one would have cracked like an egg-shell.  Don't try to talk till
+you've had something to eat."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Just one question," I said faintly.  "Who are the soldiers just moved
+out?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Why, General Canterac's troops.  I see you belong to the other side.
+But don't worry; we shan't hurt you."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Then I am a prisoner?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"That's always the way&mdash;one question leads to a dozen, Yes, I suppose
+you are a prisoner; but that's nothing very terrible," and he hurried
+off to procure food and drink for me.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Later in the day he came to have another talk, and I learned something
+of what had happened.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"We crossed the mountains almost without a check," he began.  "The
+Indians did us some damage; but they were only a handful, and we saw
+none of your fellows."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"But how came I to be here?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Ah! that's a queer story.  A party of scouts screening our left flank
+had just reached the base of the mountains, when they heard a fellow
+yelling at the top of his voice.  By the time they got in sight, the
+man had evidently knocked you down, and was off at a mad gallop."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Alone?" I asked.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"No; that's the strange part of it.  He was leading a spare horse which
+carried something on its back.  Our men could not get a good view, but
+it looked like a full sack, or a big bundle of some sort.  They
+followed rapidly, and were wearing the runaway down when the Indians
+appeared in force on the hills.  Of course that stopped the pursuit,
+and after picking you up, they came on with the army."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+My memory returned now, and I understood what had happened.  Pedro had
+escaped, and carried Don Felipe with him to the Indians of the Silver
+Key.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Poor Rosa!" I sighed; "it is all over now.  She will never see her
+father again.  Sorillo will take care that he doesn't escape a second
+time."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+My thoughts dwelt so much on this that I took little interest in the
+rest of the doctor's conversation.  He was very jubilant, though, I
+remember, about his party's success, telling me that in a short time
+General Canterac would be master of Callao, and that the Patriots had
+nowhere the slightest chance of victory.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"What will be done with me?" I asked.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I shall send you with our sick to the hospital at Jauja.  The air
+there is bracing, and will help you to recover more quickly."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Thank you," I said, though really caring very little at that time
+where I was sent.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Next day I was placed with several Spanish soldiers in an open wagon,
+one of a number of vehicles guarded by an escort of troopers.  My
+friendly surgeon had gone to Lima; but I must say the Spaniards behaved
+very well, making no difference between me and their own people.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+As to the journey across the mountains, I remember little of it.  The
+worthy Pedro had made such good use of his musket that my head was
+racked with pain, and I could think of nothing.  Most of the sick
+soldiers were also in grievous plight, and it was a relief to us all
+when, after several days' travelling, the procession finally halted in
+Jauja.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Here we were lifted from the carts and carried to a long whitewashed
+building filled with beds.  They were made on the floor, and many of
+them were already occupied.  Accommodation was found for most of us,
+but several had to wait until some of the beds became vacant.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Two or three doctors examined the fresh patients, and one forced me to
+swallow a dose of medicine.  Why, I could not think, unless he wanted
+me to know what really vile stuff he was capable of concocting.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I shall pass quickly over this portion of my story.  For weeks I lay in
+that wretched room, where dozens of men struggled night and day against
+death.  Some snatched a victory in this terrible fight, but now and
+again I noticed a file of soldiers reverently carrying a silent figure
+from one of the low beds.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+By the end of September I was strong enough to get up, and the doctors
+pronouncing me out of danger, I was taken to another building.  This
+was used as a prison for captured officers of the Patriot forces, and
+the very first person to greet me as I stepped inside the room was the
+lively Alzura.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Juan Crawford," cried he, "by all that's wonderful!  From the ballroom
+to the prison-house!  There's a splendid subject for the moralist.
+Where have you been, Juan? your people think you are dead.  Miller is
+frantic; all your friends in Lima are in despair."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Do you know anything of Don Felipe Montilla?" I asked.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Montilla?  No; there is a mystery about him too.  It is given out that
+he was abducted by brigands, but some people whisper another story."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"What?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"That he fled to the Royalists, my boy, as I prophesied he would."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Then you were a false prophet."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Then I ask the worthy Don's pardon for suspecting him without cause.
+But how did you get here?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I was brought in a wagon."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Lucky dog!  Always lucky, Juan.  I had to walk," and he showed me his
+feet, naked, and scored with cuts.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+After sympathizing with him, I asked him how events were shaping.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Canterac did not capture Callao, as he hoped, and is now back in the
+highlands.  Many things have happened, however; let me be your
+chronicle.  Where shall I start?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"From the day that Canterac swooped down on Lima."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"That was nothing.  He sat down in the capital; we hugged the guns at
+Callao and looked at him.  When he got tired he took himself off, and
+we returned to our quarters."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Nothing very exciting in that."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"You are right, my boy.  Your judgment is marvellous.  But we had a day
+of excitement shortly before I came on this trip.  You should have been
+there.  Lima went stark mad!  The guns at Callao thundered for hours;
+the capital was decked with flags; the people cheered till they were
+hoarse; there was a very delirium of joy.  It was the greeting of Peru
+to her saviour&mdash;her second saviour, that is."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Why can't you speak plainly?  Do you mean Bolivar has come?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Your second question, Juan, shows there was little need for the first.
+Yes, Bolivar, the protector or emperor, or whatever name the new master
+of Peru cares to be known by.  The hero of South America has arrived;
+let the Spaniards tremble!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"For any sake give your tongue a rest.  What has Santa Cruz done?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"What has Santa Cruz done?  A very great deal, my boy, I assure you.
+He has lost his whole army&mdash;men and horses, guns and ammunition, wagons
+and stores.  What do you think of that, young man?  You will be
+compelled to swallow Bolivar after all."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Let us change the subject.  Tell me about yourself."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Ah," said he, "that is indeed a great subject!  Your discernment is
+worthy of praise.  I can talk on that topic for hours without tiring.
+Where shall I begin?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Where is the jailer?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Why?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"That I may ask him to send me back to the hospital."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Juan, you are a fraud!  But hark! that is the bell calling us to
+dinner.  Blessed sound!  Come with me to the banquet."
+</P>
+
+<BR><BR><BR>
+
+<A NAME="chap23"></A>
+
+<H3 ALIGN="center">
+CHAPTER XXIII.
+</H3>
+
+<H3 ALIGN="center">
+AN OPEN-AIR PRISON.
+</H3>
+
+<P>
+There were fifteen or sixteen Patriot officers of all ranks in the
+prison, and I found most of them jolly fellows.  We lived all together
+in two large rooms, one of which was used as a bedroom.  In addition,
+we were allowed at certain hours to walk up and down a long corridor,
+so that we got a fair amount of exercise.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Alzura and a few of the other youngsters spent much time in planning
+methods of escape, and they were glad of any suggestions I could offer.
+As a rule, our arrangements ended in talk.  The viceroy put his trust
+rather in keen-eyed sentries than in locks, bolts, and strong walls.
+An armed man stood on either side of the door leading to the corridor,
+which was itself guarded by a chain of soldiers.  At the yard-door,
+through which we were not permitted to pass, an officer with several
+men always stood on duty.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Three or four times every week, in the middle of the night, an
+inspecting officer would summon us to get up and answer our names.
+This was a great nuisance, as it disturbed our sleep, but fortunately
+it did not take long.  We slept on the floor fully dressed and wrapped
+in our ponchos, so there was no delay in making our toilets.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+We were given sufficient food&mdash;of a sort; but we had no amusements of
+any kind, and absolutely nothing to do.  Our sole occupation was
+walking round and round the room like caged bears, and chatting about
+the war.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Most of us voted Alzura a bore in this respect, but I think on the
+whole he did us good.  His was the first voice heard in the morning,
+and the last at night.  He was equally ready to talk with ensign or
+general, and on any subject under the sun.  He would jest or laugh, or,
+I really believe, weep with you at a moment's notice.  He would
+instruct the artillery officer in the management of guns, advise the
+cavalryman how to ride, and show the general the best way to order a
+battle.  Alzura was a genius, and most of us were only now beginning to
+find it out.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+When the talk turned to the best way of escaping, he was delightful.
+Never was there a fellow with such ingenious schemes; only, as it
+happened, they were not quite suitable to our circumstances.  Had we
+been in an underground cell, with massive walls and an iron door, he
+would have had us out in less than no time.  When I mentioned casually
+that we were not so placed, he would reply good-humouredly, "No, dear
+boy, but some day you may be, and then my instructions will come in
+handy.  But, as you say, the position at present is slightly different.
+First, we have to pass the sentry on this side of the door.  I suppose
+we are all agreed on that point?  Well, then, having got rid of him&mdash;"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"But we haven't got rid of him!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"No; quite true.  I can see him from here, and a very surly fellow he
+looks.  I wonder the officer doesn't give us some one with a more
+amiable face.  However, that's outside the argument.  Now, supposing we
+had disposed of this fellow, the question is, what to do next."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"But we haven't disposed of him!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Just so; but we ought to be prepared in case he is withdrawn, or
+anything of that sort, you know.  However, if you won't follow my
+advice, it's no use giving it.  It's simply folly to go on talking."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I felt convinced you would say something sensible before you had
+finished," laughed one of the youngsters gaily.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Alzura laughed too, and gave the fellow a playful tap on the head, for
+he loved a joke whoever chanced to be the victim.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+That same evening he told us of a fresh plan&mdash;for Alzura was as full of
+plans as an egg is of meat&mdash;and before he came to the end, we were
+laughing so uproariously that the sentry ordered us to make less noise.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I daresay you fellows have wasted the day as usual," he began; "that
+is the worst of having some one to do your thinking for you.  I really
+wish you wouldn't depend so much on me."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"That's the penalty of being so clever, my boy.  The world always
+overworks its greatest men.  It's quite reasonable, after all."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"But it's hard on me, nevertheless," observed Alzura; "though I suppose
+one ought not to complain of being a genius.  Well, I've been working
+my brains all day&mdash;"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Your what?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Oh, shut up, and let me speak!  I've hit on a lovely plan: it will
+work like a machine; it can't possibly fail.  We have been on the wrong
+tack, trying to meet force with force.  What we want is craft.  Do you
+follow me, boys?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Yes, yes; go on!  Let's hear the lovely plan."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"When you do hear it, you will wonder why no one thought of it before.
+It is simple beyond belief, almost."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"A true mark of genius, Alzura.  But we're waiting to hear this
+infallible plan."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Well, look here.  Just study that sentry's face a minute.  Who is he
+like?  Don't know?  Why, isn't he just like our friend Crawford?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The little group laughed with delight, while I said reproachfully, "Oh,
+come, Alzura!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Not so much the face, dear boy," said he, "but the figure.  He's just
+your height and build; you will admit that.  And his clothes will fit
+you, Juan.  Now, do you see?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I confessed to being still in a fog, so he continued his explanations.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"This is the idea," said he.  "You and Barriero&mdash;Barriero is
+wonderfully strong&mdash;stroll down to him presently.  Pretend you want to
+ask him a question.  That will put him off his guard.  What happens?
+You spring on him suddenly, clap a rag in his mouth, and with our help
+hold him so that he cannot struggle.  Then you exchange clothes and
+stand on guard.  When the relief comes you march away.  Understand?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Nothing could be simpler," I murmured, while we were all nearly
+choking with suppressed laughter.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Grand, isn't it?" said he.  "I knew you would be struck."&mdash;I
+was.&mdash;"Then we'll serve the next fellow the same way, and the next, and
+so on till we are all out.  After that we'll seize the viceroy&mdash;"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+But by this time we were convulsed with laughter, and the sentry, in no
+very gentle tones, advised us to be quiet.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"It's a great scheme, Alzura," I said presently, "a wonderful scheme,
+but it can't be carried out.  Suppose the trick was discovered after my
+escape, all you fellows would be punished sharply, and I shouldn't like
+that."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"No," said he, in a disappointed tone; "I thought your scruples might
+stand in the way."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Alzura's plan was still fresh in our minds when the Royalists showed us
+how to pass the sentry.  One morning, directly after breakfast, an
+officer entered the room with a number of soldiers, and we were ordered
+to stand in line.  Producing a paper, he read a list of the names, and
+each man, as he answered, was told to step forward.  Then we were
+marshalled in twos, the left arm of one man being tied to the right of
+the other.  My companion was Alzura, and very disgusted he looked at
+the treatment.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"What are they going to do with us?" he asked.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I don't know.  Perhaps they heard we wanted to get away, and are
+obliging us."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Silence!" roared a Royalist sergeant; "no talking!"  And Alzura
+groaned.  How was he to live if he had to keep his tongue still?
+</P>
+
+<P>
+A long strip of tough hide was now brought, and was knotted at
+intervals to the fastenings between each pair of prisoners.  It formed
+a sort of gigantic single rein, and I suggested in a whisper to Alzura
+that we were to be harnessed to the viceroy's chariot.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"'Twill save horseflesh, and we shall be doing something for our
+living," I added.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Some of the soldiers now went to the front of us, some to the rear; the
+door was flung wide open.  "March!" cried the officer, and into the
+corridor we marched, through the yard, and so into the open road.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Out at last," I remarked to Alzura.  "The Royalists have hit on an
+even simpler plan than yours."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Simple, but not clever.  There is no art in this kind of thing."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Oh, isn't there?" I laughed, giving the thongs a tug.  "The
+arrangement strikes me as unusually artistic."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"You are trying to be witty, dear boy.  Don't.  The Royalists will be
+revenged on us, and who shall blame them?  Hullo, they aren't taking us
+into the town!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"No; we're going for a pleasure trip somewhere, I expect.  How kind of
+them to think we need a change!&mdash;I say, Barriero, don't you think this
+is an improvement on Alzura's plan?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Barriero, who was one of the couple in front of us, laughed and said,
+"Well, I can't say yet.  I'll tell you when I know more about it."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+At the gate of the prison our escort had been strengthened by a number
+of horsemen, who now rode on either side of us, so that any hope of
+escaping was quite extinguished.  We knew nothing as to our
+destination, which I think the officer in charge did not make known
+even to his subordinates.  A few people stood at the outskirts of the
+town to watch us pass, but during the remainder of the day we saw no
+one except our guards.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The march was terribly painful and fatiguing, though I have no wish to
+suggest that we were ill-treated.  The fact was, the long confinement
+we had undergone made us keenly alive to the trials of a wearisome
+journey such as this.  About midday a halt was called, our fastenings
+were loosened, while we were allowed to sit down and eat a ration of
+meat which was served out to each of us.  Some of the soldiers rested;
+others stood on guard, with orders to shoot any man who made the
+slightest effort to escape.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"They needn't fear my running far," said Alzura ruefully, showing me
+his bleeding feet.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Caramba!" cried a soldier sitting near, "that won't do, se�or.  The
+rocks are sharp in this part of the country.  Wait; I have some green
+hides in my knapsack.  I'll make you some sandals if the colonel halts
+for an hour."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I shall be very grateful for your kindness," said Alzura; "the pain in
+my feet has kept me from admiring the scenery, and there are some grand
+views about here."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I've seen finer in Lima," muttered the man, who was already busy at
+his self-imposed task.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Give me some stuff," said one of his comrades; "I'll make one sandal
+while you make the other.  The youngster will have his feet cut to the
+bone.  He ought to be at school instead of marching about the country."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I'm not eager to march," laughed Alzura; "I'll stay behind willingly."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Ugh!" exclaimed the first soldier, "you would soon be dead in this
+wilderness.  We have seen some sights in this district&mdash;haven't we,
+Alonzo?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"That we have," replied his companion, "and I don't want to see any
+more of them."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The two worthy fellows worked so industriously that in less than half
+an hour the sandals were completed, the holes pierced, and the laces
+put in, all ready for use.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I don't know how to thank you," said Alzura earnestly, "but if we
+manage to live through this war, I may be able to pay you back.  At
+present you must take the will for the deed."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"It's all right, se�or; we could not see you suffer like that.  And our
+officer will say we did right.  Just in time, too!  There's the summons
+to assemble."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+At the evening halt we were again set free a short time, being
+refastened for the night.  After travelling for four days in this way,
+we saw from the top of a high hill the waters of a magnificent lake,
+studded with islets.  It seemed quite near; but several hours passed
+before we reached its border&mdash;a broad morass, through which ran devious
+tracks.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Our leader now stopped, and we saw a number of soldiers carefully
+crossing one of the tracks from the lake.  As soon as they reached us
+we were unbound and placed in single file, while the chief of the
+escort said, "The journey is ended.  Yonder is your home while the war
+lasts.  It is not a lively place, but you will be out of mischief.
+Follow your guides, and walk carefully; you will not enjoy sinking in
+the quagmires."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+We appreciated his advice more when, about half-way across, a stout
+middle-aged major, missing his footing, plunged into the liquid mud.
+In an instant he was immersed to the chin, and but for Barriero, who
+grasped his head, would have disappeared altogether.  As it was, he
+presented a miserable appearance, and showed us how terrible was the
+danger.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Several boats were moored at the edge of the lake, and an officer
+directed us to get in, one by one.  Barriero, Alzura, and I entered the
+same boat; which was fortunate, as the prisoners were divided into
+three groups and taken to different islets.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+There were six of us in our group, and twelve soldiers under the
+command of a non-commissioned officer.  The guard occupied comfortable
+quarters, while three mud huts were reserved for us.  The islet was
+quite bare of trees, and was so small that Alzura pretended he could
+not stretch his legs comfortably for fear of slipping into the water.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The men who had rowed us over did not land, but took the boats to
+another islet, much larger than ours, which we guessed to be the
+headquarters of this novel prison.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"The governor of this place is a clever warder," remarked Barriero;
+"there's no getting away from here."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Why not?" I asked.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"The risk is too great.  Just think for a minute.  First one would have
+to swim to the shore, and then cross the morass in the dark, as it
+would not be possible to escape in the daytime.  It's really waste of
+time to mount a guard over us."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"We must set our wits to work," observed Alzura gravely.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"No, no," I cried; "Barriero's is the only way, and a very poor one it
+is.  The swim is a trifle, but to cross the morass&mdash;"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Why not build a bridge?" suggested Alzura.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"And use our bodies as part of the foundations," said Barriero,
+laughing.  "If you make any more idiotic remarks, Alzura, I'll throw
+you into the lake."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"All right," said he.  "You'll be sorry when Crawford and I escape and
+leave you behind."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I've a long time to wait," replied Barriero, "so I'll pass some of it
+in sleep."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Alzura and I shared one of the huts between us.  There was no
+furniture; the floor was of mud, and so were the walls, while the roof
+was thatched with some dried vegetable matter.  The place was not
+exactly a palace, but it sheltered us, and for that we were thankful.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The sergeant in charge of the islet was a good-humoured fellow.
+Feeling sure that we could not escape, he treated us quite genially,
+though maintaining discipline at the same time.  He often talked of the
+war, giving us news now and again of events which never happened.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+On the third morning after our arrival, we saw several boats leave the
+main island and visit the various islets on which prisoners were kept.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"That's the governor making a tour of his kingdom," the sergeant
+explained.  "He is bringing us a week's provisions, and will no doubt
+have a peep at his new subjects."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The governor was a Spanish officer, quite old, but stiff and erect in
+spite of his many years.  He ordered us to draw up in line, called our
+names from the list, hoped we should be comfortable, ordered the
+sergeant to put in irons any man who disobeyed him, wished us all
+good-morning in courtly old-world style, stepped into his boat, and was
+rowed away.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Not a word about attempting to escape!" remarked Barriero.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The sergeant heard the remark, and said with a laugh, "It is needless,
+se�or.  No one ever got away from here.  Some have tried, and they are
+at the bottom of the morass.  Why, even I would not venture to cross
+that terrible place, except in broad daylight with a trusty guide.  If
+you think of trying, se�or, let me advise you to stay where you are.
+Here you can be comfortable; there&mdash;ugh!" and the man shuddered at the
+very thought of it.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Your advice is good, sergeant, and I intend to profit by it," cried
+Barriero.  "We saw one man slip when we were crossing, and I shan't
+forget his face in a hurry.  Caramba! it makes me shiver yet."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Besides," continued the sergeant, "suppose that by some miracle you
+cross the marsh, what would happen then?  You would die of hunger.  But
+I will grant you a further miracle.  You shall cross the mountains and
+join your friends.  Is the danger over?  It is but just beginning.  You
+will be killed in battle.  But your luck clings to you, and you still
+survive.  Well, then, the war comes to an end; you are hunted down,
+captured with arms on you, and shot as rebels."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"What a charming picture, sergeant!" laughed Alzura.  "It seems to me
+we are better off where we are."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I am glad for your own sake that you think so," said the officer
+gravely.  "I grow attached to my birds with their clipped wings, and
+only desire their welfare.  There was a young fellow here once, a
+pretty boy, se�or, like yourself"&mdash;Alzura bowed gracefully&mdash;"and I had
+grown to love him.  But he got tired of the place and the company, I
+suppose, and one night he slipped into the water.  I fired my musket,
+and a boat which is always kept ready started in pursuit.  He reached
+the morass first, and found a track.  My men followed cautiously.  They
+could not see him, but presently they knew there was no need to go
+further."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"How?" asked Alzura curiously.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"The shriek of the boy as he went to his death told them what had
+happened.  Ah, it was not the first time some of them had heard such a
+wail!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Sergeant," said Alzura, "you tell such lively stories that I wonder at
+any one becoming tired of your society!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"You are pleased to be merry," replied the man, "and I, too, can be the
+same, only not when speaking of the morass.  Come, let us forget it for
+a while.  Although you are my prisoners, you will not find me a harsh
+jailer."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+This was quite true, but not all his kindness could make up to us for
+loss of liberty.  Barriero and the other three prisoners seemed quite
+resigned to their fate, but Alzura was always hankering after the
+delights of Lima and home, while I, too, longed very much to see my
+parents and friends.  So we often sat for hours watching the margin of
+the lake, envying the men who went ashore.  They carried on their heads
+whatever bundles they had, and we carefully noted the landing-place, as
+well as the track across the morass which they appeared to take.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"It seems easy enough, doesn't it?" Alzura would say; "but in the dark
+it would be different!  Think of the quagmires, Juan!  Caramba! the
+sergeant was right.  We had better give up our dreams, Juan, eh?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I felt sure that this was wisely spoken, but somehow the next day we
+again went to look at the opposite shore and possible freedom.  That
+horrible morass had a wonderful fascination for us.  We thought of it
+by day and dreamed of it by night; but the weeks slipped away, and
+still we were prisoners on the islet.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The new year came, and in May 1824 we were joined by another captive.
+This was a treat for us, as he brought news from the outside world.  He
+told us there had been many disturbances, that Bolivar was now
+undisputed ruler and leader of the Patriots, but that the end of the
+war seemed as far off as ever.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"If they keep us till the country is at peace," said he, "we shall die
+of old age on this islet."
+</P>
+
+<BR><BR><BR>
+
+<A NAME="chap24"></A>
+
+<H3 ALIGN="center">
+CHAPTER XXIV.
+</H3>
+
+<H3 ALIGN="center">
+A DANGEROUS JOURNEY.
+</H3>
+
+<P>
+"I think," remarked Alzura, one day toward the end of June, "I'll get
+the sergeant to put me in irons."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Why?" I asked in surprise.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Because sitting here and looking at the land is driving me crazy."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Then don't look at it."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I can't help it, and that's the truth.  Wouldn't it be grand if we
+could only cross that morass safely!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"But we can't!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"No," said he; "but suppose we could?  Suppose there came a night when
+it was just dark enough to hide us, and yet light enough to show us the
+track?  Wouldn't it be a feather in our caps if we could get back
+safely to Miller?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"It would; but we should lose our nerve in that horrible swamp, even if
+we reached it."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Very likely; and our lives too.  Let's go back to the hut."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+We had often talked like this, but now there seemed more purpose and
+earnestness in my chum's manner.  I looked at him closely as we
+returned to our quarters, and wondered if he had decided to run the
+risk.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"A quarter of a mile isn't a long swim, is it?" he said, after a time.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Oh no!" I agreed cheerfully.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"And we might easily save sufficient food from our rations to last a
+long while."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Most likely we shouldn't need it long."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"It would be very useful if we did."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Look here, Alzura," said I, turning on him suddenly, "let's make an
+end of this business.  What are you driving at?  Are you going to risk
+your life in that morass?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I'm very tired of this place," he answered moodily.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"So am I; but that doesn't lessen the danger of the swamp.  Now, let us
+make no mistake.  There is, perhaps, one chance in a hundred.  Is it
+worth risking?  Death in a morass must be rather horrible.  Don't you
+think so?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Well, it can't be very pleasant; but you admit we stand a chance of
+getting across."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"One in a hundred, no more."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Ah, well," said he thoughtfully, "let us sleep on it."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I could not help thinking that my chum must want his freedom badly to
+even suggest such a venture.  Any hot-blooded enterprise, I knew well,
+appealed to him strongly; but this one required cool, dogged patience
+and nerves of iron.  Barriero was a brave fellow too, but he honestly
+admitted he would rather be shot than try to cross the morass in the
+dark.  As for me, I trembled at the thought of taking part in so
+hazardous an enterprise.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+However, it seemed to me that Alzura was making up his mind to go.
+Every day he let fall broad hints, and at last stated his intentions
+without reserve.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Juan," said he one evening, "I'm going.  The war may last a couple of
+years yet.  Are you coming with me?  Don't if you'd rather not risk it."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Have you counted the cost?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Yes.  I know it's a touch-and-go affair; that is why I won't press you
+to join me."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Two will stand a better chance than one," said I thoughtfully, "and
+you mustn't try it alone.  Shall we ask Barriero to come with us?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"May as well pass the compliment," answered Alzura, laughing.  "But he
+won't, I'm positive."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+And he was right; for Barriero, on being asked, said hotly,&mdash;
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"You're a pair of idiots, and I don't know which is the bigger."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"It must be neither or both, if we're a pair," chuckled Alzura.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Why can't you be satisfied?" growled Barriero.  "You've plenty of
+food, no work to do, and are well treated.  And there isn't one chance
+in a thousand of your getting through."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Crawford said one in a hundred!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Well, anyway, you're certain to lose your lives, and I shall be blamed
+for not stopping you.  It's my duty to inform the sergeant, and have
+you chained up."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"You can't," said Alzura&mdash;"you can't betray us."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"You're two lunatics&mdash;stark, staring lunatics&mdash;and I wish you had told
+me nothing of your mad scheme."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"It's awfully risky," said I, "but not so mad as you think.  We shall
+choose our night, and we know just where to land.  Then we shall take
+provisions to last us three or four days."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"You won't need them," interrupted Barriero, in a tone of conviction
+which was far from encouraging.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+But now that the affair had really been decided on, the dangers of the
+morass soon lost some of their terrors.  We were able to talk about
+them calmly, and thus grew familiar with them, at least in imagination.
+Every day we set aside a portion of the dried meat and biscuit which
+formed the chief part of our food, until at last we had as much as
+could be carried easily.  It would be stupid to load ourselves with too
+heavy a burden, as Barriero rather unkindly reminded us.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+We waited three whole weeks after coming to our decision before
+starting on the venture, and then, one favourable night, slipped down
+to the edge of the islet.  Barriero, who had kept the secret, came to
+wish us good-bye, and the poor old fellow shook like a timid child.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"It is a mad game," said he, "a downright mad game.  I shall never
+forgive myself for allowing you to go.  It isn't too late now to draw
+back.  Do take my advice, and don't risk it.  I shan't sleep a wink all
+night if you go."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Never mind, my boy," replied Alzura, laughing; "you'll have plenty of
+time afterwards for a nap.&mdash;Now, Juan, off with your clothes."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The other prisoners were sound asleep in their huts; so were the
+soldiers, with the exception of the two sentries.  These men were
+supposed to keep a sharp lookout, but nothing had happened for so long
+a time that their duty was mostly a matter of form.  However, Barriero
+kept watch while we each stripped and made a bundle of our food and
+clothes to carry on our heads.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Good-bye, old man," we said to him when we were quite ready; and he,
+gripping our hands, whispered back,&mdash;
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Good luck; but I wish you would not go.  Take care, and come back here
+rather than lose your lives, if you cannot find the track."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+We promised to do so, and then took quietly to the water.  The first
+part of the journey gave us no trouble whatever.  We were both good
+swimmers, and quickly arrived at the spot which we had selected as the
+landing-place.  Here we crouched on a patch of firm ground, undid our
+bundles, and proceeded to dress quickly.  A smothered exclamation from
+Alzura made me glance at him.  In his hurry he had whisked his shirt a
+yard or two away, and it had settled in the liquid mud.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"There's an end to that garment!" said he.  "Well, after all, it's no
+great loss; 'twas mostly made of holes.  What have you found, Juan?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"A stout staff tipped with iron, left here by the soldiers, most
+likely.  What a piece of luck, my boy!  Now we shall be able to test
+the ground."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Yes, the balance is on our side," said he happily, buttoning his
+tunic.  "Are you ready?  Give me the staff, and I'll go first."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Of course I could not let him do that; so turning it off with a laugh,
+I cried,&mdash;
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"No, thank you.  I'm not going to trust my life to your hands, or
+rather feet.  Now, follow me closely.  Walk just where I do, and if you
+see me disappearing, pull me back sharp.  We're on the track now, and
+must try to keep on."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Spoken with the wisdom of a sage!" said Alzura saucily.  "I say, Juan,
+how shall I know when you're moving?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+There was certainly reason for his sarcasm.  As often as not, when I
+raised my foot I brought it down in the same place again, or, according
+to Alzura, even went a step backward.  The night was not particularly
+dark&mdash;indeed, we had doubted whether it was dark enough for us to swim
+ashore unobserved&mdash;but the marsh was fearfully deceptive.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+In places the track was merely a dry hump here and there, for which I
+had to feel with the staff.  Twice, in spite of every precaution, I
+missed my footing, and the second time had sunk to the waist before
+Alzura could pull me out.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I can't see you very well, Juan," said he, laughing, "but I have an
+idea that you would cut a fine figure in a ballroom just now."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Especially if it were a fancy-dress affair," I replied in the same
+tone.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+We were in no merry humour, mind you; but the weakest joke was better
+than dwelling on the horrors which surrounded us.  Each of us knew
+that, but for Alzura's quickness, I should have disappeared for ever,
+leaving no trace behind me.  Twice before the break of day I had saved
+him from a similar fate.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+We left the islet about ten o'clock, and at midnight were still in the
+morass, unable to move.  Alzura had joined me on a piece of firm
+ground, just large enough for us to stand on, and no more.  It was
+darker now, so that we could see nothing clearly, while I failed to
+touch any solid substance, except that behind us, with my pole.
+Alzura's attempts were equally unsuccessful.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"You're a pretty guide!" said he.  "You've got off the track; we had
+better try back.  Give me the staff."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Be careful; mind how you turn.  Can you feel the ground where we stood
+just now?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Yes; here it is," and the next minute he stepped back to feel for the
+proper path, while I stood trembling lest he should slip in and be
+smothered before I could get to his assistance.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Can you find a place?" I asked.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Only towards the lake.  It's nothing but marsh to right and left.  I
+think I'll come to you again.  What is it?  Did I hurt you?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Oh no, not at all!&mdash;only crushed my toes a bit with the pole!  What
+are we going to do now?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I suppose it's too early for breakfast?" he began, and then in a
+different tone he added hastily, "Oh, I say, what a joke!  I've dropped
+my bundle of food somewhere.  Perhaps it's just as well; I shall walk
+lighter."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"But you'll want something to eat," I suggested.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Of course I shall.  How dense you are!  Don't you see how the accident
+will benefit us both?  There are two now instead of one to eat your
+rations, so you will have all the less to carry."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Oh," said I doubtfully, not quite appreciating the logic.  "Well, we
+don't want breakfast yet, and the question is, what are we to do?  The
+sergeant's bound to discover our escape at breakfast-time, and a
+search-party will be sent ashore immediately."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"It will be light in an hour or two," observed Alzura cheerfully&mdash;"at
+least light enough for us to find the track again.  Let us sit down; it
+won't be so tiring, and we can't make ourselves any wetter or dirtier.
+It's a good thing I didn't start on this journey alone; I should be
+with my provisions now."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"It's always pleasanter to have company," said I, shivering, and not
+noticing the absurdity till Alzura laughed.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+There was certainly very little pleasure in our position just then.  We
+were wet through, chilled to the marrow, and plastered with mud from
+head to foot.  Our limbs felt horribly cramped, yet we almost feared to
+stretch them, and the enforced delay was fast diminishing our chances
+of escape.  The dawning light might show us the route, but it would
+also set the soldiers on our heels.  Altogether, I was rather inclined
+to envy Barriero, sleeping peacefully in his hut.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+As soon as ever it became light enough, Alzura jumped up, saying,
+"Where is the pole?" and grasping it, he began trying to touch bottom.
+He poked long and vigorously in all directions, but without success,
+till it seemed as if our only plan was to return and give ourselves up.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Yet there must be a way out," said I impatiently.  "The track leads
+here plainly enough, and it wouldn't come to an end just in the middle
+of the morass."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I shouldn't think so," said Alzura.  "I wonder whether they've missed
+us yet.  How old Barriero will grin on seeing us back again!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"We aren't back yet," I replied.  "Look at that hump yonder.  It seems
+solid, doesn't it?  Lend me the pole.  Ah, too short!  What d'you
+think, Alzura?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"It looks all right," said he; "but appearances are often deceptive.
+Besides, we can't reach it."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"We can jump it, perhaps."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Yes," said he thoughtfully, "we might.  It's a big risk, though.  If
+it isn't firm ground, the one who jumps will go to his death."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I'll chance it," said L
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"No, you won't; it's my venture.  Stand aside, and give me room for a
+take-off.  Remember me to the others if I go down."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Wait," said I; "there's no need for you to go.  We can put it to the
+test without risking life," and I hastily unslung the packet of
+provisions which hung over my shoulder.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Bravo, Juan! that is a good dodge.  Mind your aim, though!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"All right," and raising the bundle, I swung it carefully to and fro,
+trying to gauge the distance.  Then giving it an upward sweep, I let it
+go, and we watched breathlessly as it fell plump on the spot.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Firm as a rock," cried Alzura.  "Viva! now for the jump, my boy; it's
+easy enough."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"As long as we come down in the proper place.  Stand back," and pulling
+myself together, I took the leap, landing close beside the bundle.
+This I picked up, and, telling Alzura to throw me the pole, proceeded
+to investigate.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Is it all right?" he cried softly.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Yes," said I, and stood back while he jumped across.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Caramba!" said he, "that's a nasty bit well over!" and I noticed that
+his limbs trembled.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"All's well that ends well," I replied.  "Come on, my boy; we've done
+the worst part, and the track's as plain as a pikestaff now.  If we can
+reach the hill we came down months ago, 'twill be an easy matter to
+hide."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I wonder if the sergeant has discovered anything yet?  According to
+his account, the guards will think us dead."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"So much the better for us; they'll give up the search sooner.  Hurrah!
+the ground's getting firmer at every step.  I believe we're out of the
+morass."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The words were hardly spoken, when, my foot catching in some coarse
+grass, I fell sprawling, face downwards.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Not quite," observed Alzura, pulling me up, while I tried to get the
+mud from my mouth and eyes.  "It's a lucky thing you didn't try that
+trick before.  Faith, Juan, you do look a picture!  I'd willingly give
+a hundred dollars to be able to pop you down in Lima!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Come along, and don't be idiotic, or we shall find ourselves back on
+the islet."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Yes," said he, still grinning all over his face; "we can't stay here
+laughing all day."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I'm not laughing," I cried indignantly.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Aren't you?  Well, you see, old fellow, it's rather difficult to tell
+what you're doing through that black mask.  I shouldn't try to rub it
+off.  Let it cake, and we'll chip it off with a stone."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"This way," said I gruffly, taking no notice of his attempts to be
+funny.  "We'd better make straight for the mountains and hide
+ourselves."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"We've need to," he replied, with a meaning laugh.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+We were now in a wide plain, dotted with numerous hillocks, and a good
+deal cut up by streams from the overflow of the lake.  The ground was
+damp, while here and there we plumped straight into a marsh.  By this
+time, however, we were in such a state that nothing mattered, and being
+unwilling to lose time, we took the shortest though not the most
+pleasant route.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+We had a good start of the soldiers, who, as it happened, were
+completely thrown off the scent through finding Alzura's bundle.
+Knowing the terrible nature of the morass, they concluded we were both
+dead, and returned to the island with the tidings.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+We learned this long afterwards from Barriero, who told us how he had
+mourned our sad fate, and blamed himself repeatedly for having let us
+go.  At the time, however, we expected every moment to hear the patter
+of feet behind us, and raced on till, breathless and panting, we
+reached the base of the mountain.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Here we stopped a few moments to recover breath, and then, climbing
+some distance, proceeded to search for a cavern.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"There ought to be several," said Alzura, "for the mountain has been
+mined.  Didn't you notice the <I>rodados</I> as we came down?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Those heaps of rubbish?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Yes.  All that refuse has been taken out of the mountain.  Here's a
+heap, and the mouth of the tunnel won't be far away.  Now, keep your
+eyes open."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I did my best; but Alzura found the cavern, and in a short time we were
+both inside.  The place was dark, and smelt dreadfully, the roof almost
+touched our heads, and the passage was very narrow.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"A nice trap!" I remarked.  "If the soldiers catch us here, there's an
+end to our freedom."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I'm not so sure of that.  The gallery may run a long way back, and
+perhaps communicate with another.  Shall we explore it?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Not now; I'm hungry and tired."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"So am I, and wet and cold too.  I wish we had a fire.  Better take
+your things off and wring them; you'll be a bit more comfortable."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I followed his advice, and then we sat down to feast on the dried beef
+and biscuits, which, happily, we had been able to keep in good
+condition.  It was not a brilliant banquet, but we were hungry, and our
+teeth were sharp.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I think it's a pity I lost my stock," remarked Alzura, lazily enjoying
+the food.  "That bit won't last long."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"You must eat less.  I shall put you on short rations in the morning."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Tell me that to-morrow; I'm sleepy now."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Aren't we going to keep watch?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I don't think it's worth while.  The soldiers aren't likely to look
+here for us, unless you attract their attention by snoring too loudly,"
+and the rascal chuckled himself off to sleep.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+In a few minutes I lay down beside him, and slept soundly till he
+wakened me by beating a tattoo on my ribs, and saying that he wanted
+his supper.  We had, in fact, slept through most of the day, and it was
+too late to think of making a fresh start till the first thing in the
+morning.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+However, as soon as day broke we set out with a hazy idea of making our
+way to Lima.  By dint of careful economy, our provisions would last for
+three days, and then we must trust to luck.  We had no notion how the
+war had gone, and I should not have been surprised to hear that the
+Royalists were again masters of the country.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+About noon on the third day of our journey we sat down beside a
+pleasant stream in a picturesque ravine.  There was sufficient food
+left for one meal, and Alzura voted for having it at once.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"It's a long time since breakfast," said he, "and this mountain air
+sharpens one's appetite.  Besides, it's good policy to make sure of a
+thing while one has the chance."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"All right," said I, laughing, and opening the bundle, "here you are.
+Don't grumble with me when we have to go to bed without supper."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"We may get a fresh supply before then; who knows?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I did not think it likely; but all the same I joined him in an attack
+on the provisions, which we devoured to the very last morsel.  Then we
+had another drink of water, and rose to resume our journey.  As if this
+were a signal, the rocks round about suddenly became alive with armed
+men, who yelled some orders which we could not understand.  Then
+clambering over the boulders, they surrounded us, and in a short time
+had bound our arms tightly with strips of hide.  They were
+fierce-looking fellows&mdash;Indians, never seen westward of the Andes&mdash;and
+apparently unfamiliar with the Spanish language.  I tried to question
+them, but they did not understand, while neither of us could make out a
+word of their patois.  It was clear, however, that they meant to take
+us with them; and as we marched off, Alzura said, with a laugh,&mdash;
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"What a lucky thing, Juan, that we ate our supper in good time!"
+</P>
+
+<BR><BR><BR>
+
+<A NAME="chap25"></A>
+
+<H3 ALIGN="center">
+CHAPTER XXV.
+</H3>
+
+<H3 ALIGN="center">
+BACK TO DUTY.
+</H3>
+
+<P>
+Since the beginning of the war I had seen a great deal of Indian
+endurance, but nothing to equal that of our new captors.  They marched
+along in a curious fashion at a kind of jog-trot pace, taking short
+steps and carrying their feet close to the ground.  Mile after mile was
+covered without apparent effort, and when at last a halt was called,
+not a man looked the least bit tired.  As for Alzura and me, we were
+exhausted, and lay down just as we were.  The Indians lit a fire,
+roasted some maize, and loosening our bonds, gave us a share of the
+food, a drink of water, and a little coca.  Whether they were friends
+or foes we could not tell, but despite their ferocious looks they did
+us no harm.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+While on the march I had resolved to try them with the charm of the
+silver key; but, to my dismay, I found it was no longer round my neck.
+A part of the chain was still there, but it had snapped off, and the
+key was gone, sunk probably in the dreadful morass.  However, turning
+to one of the fellows, I said, first in Spanish, then in the patois
+used by Sorillo's men, "We are officers in the Patriot army, and
+friends of Raymon Sorillo and the Silver Key; who are you?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+He shook his head solemnly, and looked at me with a blank stare.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Try him with English, Juan," laughed Alzura.  "I wonder where he lives
+when he's at home?  Perhaps he knows Portuguese.  I'll have a shot at
+him."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+If Alzura knew Portuguese&mdash;which I rather doubted&mdash;the Indian was
+ignorant of that language, and was quite unmoved by my comrade's flood
+of oratory.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Perhaps he thought Alzura was singing.  But my companion in adversity
+did not take the suggestion in good part; indeed it seemed to annoy him.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Never mind," said I cheerfully; "they can't march us about for ever.
+We are bound to meet with civilized beings some time or other."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"But these fellows may belong to the Royalists!  Many of the Indians on
+this side of the mountains do.  Then we shall be taken back to the
+island!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"We shall have guides across the morass, though; that's one thing to be
+thankful for."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"And be put in irons!  Perhaps you think that's a subject for
+cheerfulness?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"We shouldn't be able to risk our lives again, at all events."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Oh, go to sleep," exclaimed Alzura, "if you've nothing more sensible
+than that to say!" and he rolled a little nearer the fire.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The next morning the Indians resumed their journey, and after a weary
+tramp of many miles, encamped on the side of a mountain, where stood
+several huts in a half-ruined state.  One of these was set aside for
+us, and a sentry was placed at the door.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Here we remained for three weeks while our captors made frequent
+excursions, starting early in the morning and returning late at night,
+though of their object we had not the faintest idea.  At the end of
+that time we were taken with them; and from morn till night, for
+several days in succession, we roamed about those dreadful mountains,
+till every muscle in our bodies ached with fatigue.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"What is the use of it all?" I asked Alzura gloomily.  "What do they
+expect to gain by this continual tramp up and down?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"It's my belief that they can't help themselves," he replied.  "It's a
+disease, a form of madness, which keeps them continually on the move.
+Yesterday we climbed the same hill a dozen times, and finished at the
+starting-point.  Or perhaps it's some new kind of warfare they've
+invented."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"It's awfully ridiculous, anyhow, and I don't see that we've gained
+much by leaving the island&mdash;unless it's exercise."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"When the war is over, I'll give up walking altogether," said my chum
+resolutely.  "When I'm not on horseback, or in a carriage of some kind,
+I'll be carried about in a chair.  If this lasts much longer, my feet
+will be worn out."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+That evening the Indians lit their fire earlier than usual&mdash;a
+circumstance for which we were duly grateful.  We ate our supper, and
+sat chatting together cheerfully, being put in good humour by the
+warmth and brightness of the ruddy flames.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Suddenly we heard in the distance the long-drawn-out note of a night
+bird, repeated again and again, and each time nearer to us.  It was
+answered by our sentries; but the men round the fire made no movement,
+nor did they show the slightest interest when half a dozen horsemen
+rode up.  The leader, however, rose slowly and talked to the strangers,
+who, after seeing to their horses, came and sat down.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Juan," said Alzura, "these fellows belong to a different tribe.
+Perhaps we shall have a chance of making ourselves understood."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"They are looking at us very pointedly," I answered; and raising my
+voice, I said, "Can any of you talk Spanish?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Yes," cried several together, coming near to us; "what do you want?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"To make ourselves known," I replied.  "These worthy fellows can't
+understand us, and we're tired of playing hide-and-seek in the
+mountains."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Who are you?  Where do you come from?  Are you for the king?" asked
+one.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+This was treading on dangerous ground; but as we really were worn out,
+and there seemed no chance of escape, I thought it best to take the
+bull by the horns.  At the worst we should only be handed over to the
+enemy and sent back to prison.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+So I answered quietly, "No; we are Patriot officers who have escaped
+from the Spaniards.  If you are on our side, perhaps you will help us
+to return to our own people."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"You are with friends, se�or, if what you say is true," remarked one
+who seemed to have some sort of authority.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"<I>If?</I>" said I, trying to speak haughtily; "do you doubt it?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Well," said the fellow, with a knowing grin, "you don't look much like
+officers of any kind."  And he was right.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+We were, in fact, a pair of as dreary-looking objects as one would be
+likely to meet.  Our sandals were worn out, our clothes hung in rags,
+and the holes in Alzura's tunic made it painfully apparent that he did
+not indulge in the luxury of a shirt.  Whether we wore uniform, and if
+so what kind, would have been difficult to decide, as we were still
+plastered with mud from head to foot.  So I could not altogether blame
+the man for his distrust.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+However, I repeated my statement, told him we had fought under the
+Englishman Miller, and at last introduced the name of Raymon Sorillo.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"We know him well," I said in conclusion, "and are good friends of the
+Silver Key."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Apparently my words were interpreted for the benefit of our captors,
+who jabbered together for a considerable time, while Alzura and I
+anxiously awaited the result of the conference.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+At last the leader of the horsemen, turning to me, said, "Se�or, it is
+decided that I shall take you to the army, where your words can be
+proved.  If your story is not true, you will be shot as spies."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"All right; we agree!" I exclaimed joyfully, for it was a delightful
+thought that we were to escape the strange beings who spent their time
+in running about the rocks.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"We shall start early," he continued, "so you had better get some
+rest."  Which we did, as soon as our excited state permitted.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Bravo!" exclaimed Alzura, after breakfast the next morning; "this is
+an improvement.  Fancy being on horseback again!  This will be better
+than trudging on foot, Juan, eh?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"What about the men who have lent us their horses?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Oh," said he merrily, "I believe they would as soon walk as ride, and
+I'm sure they could keep up longer than the animals."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+By this talk you will understand we had been provided with a couple of
+horses; and taking leave of our original captors, we rode off with our
+new ones.  Of course, both Alzura and I were unarmed, and the leader,
+in a quiet way, so arranged that we were never very far from a man with
+a musket.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+He was rather a lively fellow for an Indian, and having made sure we
+could not escape, talked with us freely.  He told us the men we had
+just left were very useful, having already sent in a great deal of
+valuable information to the Patriot army.  He also said that Bolivar
+had crossed the Andes with a large army, and that a decisive battle was
+expected at any time.  He was very curious about our escape, and could
+barely credit that we had crossed the morass without assistance.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"It has been done before," he said, "but only once or twice, and then
+by natives."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"We shan't do it again," laughed Alzura.  "It nearly turned our hair
+white.  It was the nastiest experience I have ever had&mdash;worse than when
+the Royalists cut us up at Torata."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Were you in that battle, se�or?  Wasn't it terrible?" and the man
+looked at my comrade with renewed interest.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Indeed, from that time he treated us both with increased respect, and
+the journey passed quite pleasantly in his company.  During the second
+day we met several groups of mounted Indians, and a detachment of
+regular soldiers; which showed that we could not be far from the main
+encampment, on the plain between Rancas and Pasco.  Our guide expected
+to reach it that night, but we did not get in till after breakfast next
+morning.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The plain was a splendid place for a camp, though rather high up, being
+some twelve thousand feet above the level of the sea.  Surrounding it
+on all sides, huge mountains towered, their mighty summits hidden by
+the clouds.  The table-land itself was alive with soldiers, and
+presently I caught sight of the flag which had been presented to the
+Peruvian Legion.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Take us over there," I cried excitedly to the guide.&mdash;"There are our
+comrades, Alzura.  I see Plaza, and Cordova, and the sour-faced old
+major.  Viva! viva!" and I rose in the stirrups with delight.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+What explanation the Indian gave I do not know.  We were plucked from
+the saddles and bandied about from one fellow to another in less than
+no time, every one helping to keep up a running fire of remarks.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Now let the Royalists tremble!" exclaimed Plaza, striking a dramatic
+attitude, spoiled only by the fun and twinkle in his eyes.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Only think, our little Alzura has returned to us!" cried another; "let
+us embrace him."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Wait till he's been scrubbed a few times," suggested Plaza.  "The
+legion should be proud of these 'young bloods.'  What airs and graces!
+What remarkable and novel costumes!  What&mdash;"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Can any one lend me a shirt?" interrupted Alzura.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"A shirt?" exclaimed Cordova.  "My dear fellow, I have a dozen, quite
+clean and doing nothing, I shall be proud to let you and Crawford each
+have one."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Oh, thanks!" said Alzura.  "I thought something practical ought to
+come from all that talk.  Come on, my boy, let's have them at once.
+Where are they?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Just down in Lima.  You have only to&mdash;" but a roar of laughter drowned
+the end of the sentence.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"You really don't require one," remarked Plaza; "it would spoil the
+rest of your uniform&mdash;that is, if you have one under that dirt."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Every one was still enjoying the joke, when a number of officers in
+brilliant uniforms approached our quarter of the plain.  In the leader
+I recognized Bolivar; and, to my great satisfaction, Colonel Miller was
+one of his suite.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Your men seem to be enjoying themselves, colonel," we heard Bolivar
+remark; "what is it all about?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+At that moment Miller caught sight of us, and leaving the general's
+question unanswered, called us over, saying, "Alzura!  Crawford!  Where
+have you been, my boys?  We had quite given you up.&mdash;General, these are
+two of my young officers who have been missing for months."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Bolivar, who was in good humour that morning, made us stand by him and
+relate our adventures.  Then he complimented us on our pluck, and
+turning to an officer, said, "Take these youngsters to O'Brien, and ask
+him to supply them with decent clothing; they have at least earned
+that.  And I am very proud of you, boys; and so, no doubt, are your
+comrades."  At which Plaza led off a round of cheering.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I was very glad to see the great, big, jolly Irishman again, and he
+lost no time in getting us fresh uniforms from the stores, with an
+extra poncho apiece.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"You'll be glad of that at night," said he, "for up here the
+thermometer is generally below freezing-point.  I must come to see you,
+if there's time, and hear your story."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+O'Brien was quite right about the biting cold, but on that first night
+at least we hardly felt it.  Dressed in our new clothes, comfortably
+wrapped in our ponchos, seated close to a roaring fire, and surrounded
+by old friends, Alzura and I felt amply repaid for all our toils and
+privations.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+In honour of our arrival our brother officers had organized a grand
+supper, the greatest delicacy being a small loaf of white bread, which
+they insisted on sharing with Alzura and myself.  After supper, we had
+to give an account of our adventures; and many a laugh went up as I
+told of my chum's plans, of our disasters in crossing the morass, and
+of the strange Indians who had mistaken us for Royalists, which, Plaza
+unkindly remarked, was a poor compliment to the enemy.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"After all," he continued, "you haven't had such a very bad time.  Now,
+while you've been playing, we've been at work."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Oh," cried Alzura, smiling blandly, "that would be a change for you!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"We've made roads," said Cordova, with a solemn air, "built huts,
+collected fuel, carried corn, and driven cattle.  We've worked harder
+than the labourers on your father's estates."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Glad to hear it," laughed my chum.  "I thought Bolivar would make
+something of you.  A pity we weren't with you, though."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"A great pity!  With Crawford and you helping, there would have been
+little for us to do."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"It must have been rough work crossing the mountains," I observed.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Rough? rather! especially as Bolivar has turned us into cavalry," and
+he proceeded to give a graphic account of the passage.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"The shelving ledges on the mountain sides are so narrow that the
+troops were obliged to advance in single file.  The cavalry, of course,
+were greatly handicapped.  Each man rode a mule, and had a led horse,
+which he dragged after him by a lasso.  Sometimes a break in the track,
+caused by a deep gully or a waterfall, occurred, when the men had to
+dismount, and to lead their animals.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"But the worst of all was when night came while we were still on the
+march," said Plaza.  "We always walked then, and more than one fellow
+went tumbling down some frightful precipice.  We lost our way two or
+three times, though there were plenty of trumpeters stationed at
+intervals.  But Cordova will tell you about that," and there was a
+general laugh.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Oh," said Alzura, scenting a bit of fun, "order, please, for Cordova's
+story.&mdash;Now, my boy, out with it!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"'Twas nothing," replied Cordova airily.  "We missed our way, and had
+to return, that's all.  A mere accident, only these fellows make such a
+fuss about it."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Plaza, you tell the yarn," said I.  "Cordova's much too modest, and
+that's quite a new thing for him, too!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Well, it happened on the wildest night of the whole journey.  A
+terrific snowstorm came on, half blinding us.  We were wet through and
+tired as dogs, and the camping-place was still a long way off.  We
+couldn't see much, but there was plenty of noise.  The wind howled, the
+trumpeters blew loud enough to wake the dead, officers shouted to their
+men, horses neighed and mules brayed: it was a regular pandemonium!  To
+crown all, we were following the windings of a roaring torrent."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"And Cordova was leading," interrupted Major Gamarra.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Some one suggested we were on the wrong track, but our friend knew
+better.  'Follow me,' said he; 'I can guide you by the sounds of the
+trumpets.'  And we followed."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Like a flock of sheep," chimed in the major.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"We went on," continued Plaza, "till even Cordova admitted something
+was wrong; then we stopped."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Why didn't you turn back?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Out of the question, my boy.  We tried it, and lost half a dozen
+animals in the attempt.  The only thing possible was to advance till we
+reached an open spot.  When all our fellows were across we turned
+round, and began the march back."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Bravo, Cordova!" cried my chum, who was bubbling over with laughter.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Oh, come, wait a bit.  You haven't heard the best of the joke yet.  We
+had done nearly half the distance, when we met the head of another
+squadron that followed us.  'Go back,' we yelled; 'you've missed the
+proper path.'  'Go back yourselves,' they shouted in reply; 'we can't!'
+Well, you know, neither party dared move till daybreak; so we stood
+there, crouching against the rocks and holding on to the animals.  We
+could neither eat nor sleep.  The wind flung the snow at us in masses,
+and we were frozen to the marrow.  Some pretty things were said about
+Cordova before the morning, I can assure you."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"To hear them talk, one would think they were made of sugar!" grunted
+Cordova.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"It took us four hours the next day to get out of the mess," laughed
+Plaza, "and then we had to catch up with our division.  Altogether, it
+was a very pleasant incident, though the major here and a few others
+failed to see the fun."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"But how came Canterac to let you through the passes without a fight?"
+I asked.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"A case of pride going before a fall, I expect.  He thinks to serve us
+as he did at Torata.&mdash;By the way, Crawford, you gave Miller his wrong
+rank this morning.  He's a general now, and chief of all the Peruvian
+cavalry."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Bravo, that's grand news!  There isn't a better soldier in the army."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Only he's so fearfully energetic.  He'll keep one on the move for
+sixteen hours, and then suggest a little scouting as a titbit to wind
+up with," said Cordova.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"You've had a good rest now, anyway."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"We shall pay for it, though."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+And Cordova was not far wrong.  We had barely fallen asleep when the
+bugles sounded.  The troops rose, and mounted officers dashed about,
+carrying orders to different squadrons and battalions.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Breakfast at once; ready to march in an hour," were the commands, and
+we wondered what information Bolivar had obtained.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Some said one thing, some another, and very soon a fine crop of rumours
+sprang up.  Canterac was advancing with twenty thousand men; his troops
+had mutinied, and declared for the Patriots; he was retreating hot-foot
+for Cuzco; he was a prisoner in the hands of the mountain tribes.
+Every man suggested the event he fancied most, and seemed quite annoyed
+if one expressed any doubt of its accuracy.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Just our luck," grumbled Alzura.  "I did think we should have had a
+little rest."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"It's just because you're here that we're moving," laughed Plaza.
+"Directly Bolivar caught sight of you and Crawford yesterday morning,
+he determined to march.  'Canterac won't stand against those fellows,'
+he said."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Bolivar is a capable fellow and a good judge," said Alzura.  "I wonder
+where General Miller is."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Went off in the night, reconnoitring with a party of mountaineers.
+It's wonderful how those wild fellows have taken to him.  They'll go
+anywhere with him.  Come along; it's nearly time for us to move, and
+Bolivar doesn't like to be kept waiting."
+</P>
+
+<BR><BR><BR>
+
+<A NAME="chap26"></A>
+
+<H3 ALIGN="center">
+CHAPTER XXVI.
+</H3>
+
+<H3 ALIGN="center">
+THE HUSSARS OF JUNIN.
+</H3>
+
+<P>
+Contrary to custom, we moved off the ground slowly, marching along with
+swarms of Indians on our flanks and in front.  For once in a way
+Bolivar had adopted caution instead of the fiery recklessness he
+usually displayed, and seemed resolved on running no unnecessary risks.
+Our course lay southward, over very rough, broken ground, and a staff
+officer informed Plaza we were making for the plains of Junin, to the
+south of Lake Reyes.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"We shall catch Canterac there," said he, "or Canterac will catch us; I
+hardly know which at present."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Our bivouac that night was cheerless and uncomfortable.  The position
+was a very strong one, but Bolivar was evidently determined to leave
+nothing to chance.  The sentries were doubled and in some places
+trebled, so that most of us were unable to snatch more than a few
+hours' sleep.  Early in the morning the journey was resumed, and after
+a tedious march of fifteen miles through mountainous country we
+suddenly beheld the Royalist army crossing the plains at our feet.  The
+men, breaking into a thundering "Viva," waved their caps or swung their
+lances in the air, and the cavalry were ordered to shift their saddles
+from the mules to the led horses.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"'Twill be a cavalry action," said Plaza, vaulting into his saddle.
+"Here comes an 'aid' with orders."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"There goes Miller with a squadron," cried Alzura.  "We shall be out of
+it.  The Colombian Horse are moving too.  We shall be left behind with
+the infantry."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Not so fast," said Plaza, laughing, as Bolivar's messenger dashed up
+to Colonel Suares, who was in charge of our squadron.  "Now for it!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"You won't be quite so eager presently," growled the tough old major.
+"Look at the ground; see the defile between the swamp and the hills.
+Canterac can cut us to pieces there, and he's soldier enough to know
+it."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"No, no, major; his cavalry aren't a patch on ours.  We've never had a
+chance to show our mettle before."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Well, we shall have one now," said the major, as we began to descend
+to the plain.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Two Colombian squadrons were in front of us, while Miller was still
+further ahead and bearing to the left.  On the other side of the defile
+we caught a glimpse now and then of the Royalist cavalry forming up.
+The ground was so broken that we could only go at a foot-pace, and I
+began to think the major might be right.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+As we entered the defile there came a great shout of "Viva el Rey!"
+from the plains ahead, and the next instant the Royalist horsemen,
+thirteen hundred strong, and led by Canterac himself, dashed madly to
+the attack.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Viva! viva!" they yelled, cutting and thrusting with sabre and lance.
+The onset was like a mighty avalanche, and our men were for the most
+part overwhelmed.  A few of the strongest and best mounted cut their
+way through, but numbers were overthrown, and the rest came flying
+back, with the victorious Royalists slashing and cutting on all sides.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"By St. Philip," muttered Plaza, "we shall be swept away."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Our colonel, seeing the danger, manoeuvred us into an angle of the
+marsh, just as the mob of horsemen, friend and foe inextricably mixed,
+swarmed down, shouting, struggling, fighting.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Forward! forward!" yelled the exultant Royalists, sweeping past like a
+whirlwind.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Farther away on the left, another body was driving Miller's men into
+the swamp, and it seemed that the Patriot cavalry must be annihilated.
+But our squadron remained untouched, and leading us into the plain,
+Suares issued an order to charge the Royalists who were handling
+Miller's troops so roughly.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"We must win or die, my lads!" he cried; "the country depends on us."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The men cheered with a will and shook their sabres; we settled more
+firmly in our saddles; the colonel rode to the front; the squadron
+moved forward and broke into a trot.  Men and officers alike knew that
+our leader had spoken no more than the truth.  We must win or die!  On
+us alone hung the issue of the battle.  If we failed, hardly a man of
+the Patriot cavalry would leave the field alive; if we won, the
+Royalists must stop the pursuit in order to help their comrades.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+It was a heavy task, but one thought cheered and nerved us.  We were
+all Peruvians belonging to the Legion, and it was but fitting that the
+desperate venture should fall to us.  How our infantry battalion would
+cheer, how proudly they would greet us, should we return victorious!
+It would be glorious to show both friends and enemies that the
+Peruvians could strike a stout blow in their own defence.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Gallop!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+We received the order with a cheer, bent low in the saddle, and grasped
+our sabres firmly.  Suares knew his work, and led us across a wide
+stretch of smooth, firm ground, the very spot for a cavalry charge.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Finding themselves between two foes, the Royalists faced about and
+dashed at us.  The shock was tremendous: men and horses were bowled
+over like ninepins; great gaps appeared in the ranks; men went down and
+were trampled under foot in the furious fray; there was a ring of steel
+as sabre clashed with sabre, and the defiant shouts of the combatants
+mingled with the groans of the wounded.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Reeling and panting, I found myself on the other side of the press.
+Plaza was there, too, with a dozen of his men.  Alzura broke through
+smiling in spite of a nasty cut across the face, and was followed by
+many more.  Then above the din General Miller's voice was heard, and we
+flushed with pride.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Bravo, my boys!" he cried; "I'm proud of you!  All the army will sing
+your praises presently."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Freed from the Royalists, his men had got out of the swamp, and now
+came to join us.  The few Colombians who had cut their way through in
+the first attack galloped back, and inspirited by General Miller's
+stern "Hurrah!" we once more flung ourselves on the foe.  It was steel
+to steel now, and the Spaniards stood their ground well till they saw
+their comrades retreating from the defile.  Then, with the exception of
+a devoted few who stayed in a grim ring around the standard-bearer,
+they turned to flee.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"The flag!" cried the general; "have at the flag!"  And like a torrent
+in flood, we swept down on the little band.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Rally to the flag!" cried a voice I knew well, and the next instant I
+was crossing swords with Santiago Mariano.  I do not care much to dwell
+on this part of the fight.  These Royalists were the pick of their
+squadron, and it seemed as if each man would die where he fought rather
+than surrender the colours.  Three or four times the flag disappeared,
+but came up again the next instant, and presently I saw it borne aloft
+by Santiago, who had been forced away from me in the fierce turmoil.
+Hardly a dozen men remained with him now, and we were all round him.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Surrender!" cried the general.  "It is a pity to kill so brave a man!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Santiago laughed lightly, dug the spurs deep into his horse's sides,
+cleared a passage with his sabre, and wheeling his horse by the
+pressure of his knees, bounded away, crying defiantly,&mdash;
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Rally to the flag!  Viva el Rey!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+A young Colombian officer levelled his pistol; but Miller struck it up,
+saying,&mdash;
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"The odds are heavy enough now.  If you want the flag, get it with your
+sword."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The youngster's face flushed, but he kept his temper, and saluting the
+general, dashed after Santiago, crying,&mdash;
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"To me, Colombians!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+As Suares had foreseen, our action gave the beaten squadron a chance to
+rally; officers and men who had survived the crushing avalanche
+collected in groups, and the fight was proceeding fiercely on the open
+plain.  Ordering our squadron to re-form, the general placed himself at
+our head.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Meanwhile, I was watching the gallant Santiago and his handful of men.
+He was a superb rider, and able to guide his horse without using the
+reins, thus leaving both hands free.  His Royalist comrades, now
+reunited, were opposite the defile, and too far off to help, while
+several detachments of Patriot cavalry were hurrying to cut off his
+retreat.  Behind him, too, thundered the hot-headed Colombian officer
+with a dozen troopers.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"That plucky Royalist officer will be killed," said the general to
+Colonel Suares.  "He's a gallant fellow&mdash;eh, Crawford?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"He is, sir," I answered warmly; "and I'd give anything to see him get
+through safely."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Why, Crawford," returned the general, smiling, "that sounds very much
+like treason."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+By this time we ourselves were in motion, but as my place was on the
+flank, I had a good view of Santiago's desperate venture.  A body of
+Colombians, some twenty strong, had thrown themselves across his path;
+and though they were our allies, I could hardly keep from cheering as
+he dashed through them, losing, as far as could be seen, only one man
+of his little band.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Casting a backward glance to see how his followers fared, he waved the
+flag again, and I could guess at the defiant shout of "Viva el Rey!"
+that came from his lips.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"He's just splendid," said I, between my teeth.  But surely now his
+time was come!  Close on his heels rode the beaten Colombians, while in
+front another detachment, far stronger, awaited him.  What would he
+do&mdash;surrender?  That, I felt sure, would never enter his head.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+One chance of escape there was if he would take it.  By swerving
+sharply to the left he might avoid the hostile troopers, and gallop
+across the plain to the Royalist infantry.  It was evident he saw this
+way out; but his blood was up, and he made straight for the forest of
+lances.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Lost!" said I, with a groan.  "Poor old Santiago!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I counted eight men with him, and Royalist and Patriot troops combined
+held none braver.  It was magnificent, and yet terrible, to watch them
+spring at the massed troops, Santiago only slightly in advance of them.
+I held my breath as they leaped into the throng and were swallowed up.
+We were not near enough to distinguish the flag amidst the flashing
+sabres and the long-handled lances, but I feared it had fallen with its
+daring protector.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The tumult showed that some of the brave few still lived, and suddenly
+I heard General Miller, as if his feelings had surprised him into
+speech, say in English,&mdash;
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"By Jove, he's through!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+It was true.  There in the distance rode a man bare-headed, waving a
+flag defiantly, and for all we knew cheering for the king.  One by one
+four others joined him, and continued the gallop: their comrades lay
+dead on the plain.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Had half the Royalist cavalry possessed Santiago's pluck, the story of
+this affair at Junin would have had a different ending.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+As it was, the Spaniards began to waver.  They could barely hold their
+own against the reassembled squadrons from the defile, and our arrival
+had turned the scale.  They began to give ground slowly but surely, in
+spite of their officers' appeals.  I saw Santiago again; indeed he was
+the most conspicuous man, though not the highest officer, on the field.
+Wherever the troops seemed weakest, there he was, flag in hand,
+cheering them on and fighting desperately.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+When at last they could stand it no longer, but broke and fled, he got
+together another little band to protect the retreat.  But for him, I
+doubt whether Canterac would have saved a quarter of his cavalry.
+Once, when turning at bay to repel a fiercer rush than usual, he caught
+sight of me, and his face lit up with a smile.  He had been wounded,
+but not dangerously, and his sword-arm was vigorous as ever.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Again and again, with the aid of his choicest troopers, he stemmed the
+onset; but his efforts were vain&mdash;we were too many.  His men dropped
+one after another, and he was forced to continue the retreat, till the
+remnant of the Royalist horsemen found shelter behind the lines of
+their infantry, who greeted us with a scattering fire.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+It was now growing dusk, and we could not attack an army, though
+General Miller decided to hang on a little longer.  In the long pursuit
+our men had become scattered over the plain, and he dispatched various
+officers to collect them.  Then turning to me, he said,&mdash;
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Crawford, ride back, find General Bolivar, and tell him the Royalists
+are in full retreat.  If followed up strongly, I believe they would
+disperse."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Saluting, I turned my horse and rode back rapidly.  The scene was
+bewildering.  Officers galloped this way and that, shouting to their
+men; riderless horses careered madly about; slightly-wounded troopers
+were hobbling to the rear; others, more unfortunate, lay on the ground
+groaning and calling for water; while here and there mounted men were
+escorting groups of prisoners toward our infantry lines.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Several times I stopped to ask where General Bolivar was.  He had
+entered the defile with the cavalry; but from the time our first
+squadrons were routed I had seen nothing of him.  At last an officer
+told me that, seeing his horsemen overthrown, the general had galloped
+back to the infantry, which he had posted on a very high hill about a
+league away.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"He quite expected to be attacked," added my informant, "never dreaming
+we should recover ourselves.  The Peruvians saved us.  They are fine
+fellows!"  For in the gathering gloom he could not distinguish my
+uniform.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Thanks!" said I, laughing; "I'll repeat that compliment to my
+comrades," and rode on.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Bolivar was standing, or to be correct, walking about, on the brow of
+the hill, looking anxiously toward the plain.  Several messengers had
+brought him word of the varying fortunes of the fight, but none had
+arrived from Miller.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I passed close to the head of the Peruvian infantry, and the colonel
+shouted,&mdash;
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"What news, Crawford!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Good!" I replied, hurrying along; and reaching Bolivar, I jumped to
+the ground and saluted.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Where do you come from?" he cried.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"General Miller, sir.  The Royalists are in full retreat&mdash;horse, foot,
+and artillery.  The general wishes me to say that a vigorous pursuit
+would probably disperse them altogether."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Too late," said he; "tell General Miller I have ordered the cavalry to
+retire on me.&mdash;Caza," to one of his officers, "lend&mdash;"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Lieutenant Crawford, sir."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Lend Lieutenant Crawford your horse; his is done up.&mdash;Now ride as fast
+as you can, and give General Miller my message."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I saluted, sprang into the saddle, dashed past the Peruvian infantry,
+down the hill, and into the defile.  Here I found the main body of our
+cavalry retiring in accordance with Bolivar's command, and heard that
+Miller, with a squadron of Peruvians, was still following the Royalists.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+It was quite dark now, and the route was covered with hillocks; but I
+rode on swiftly, trusting to luck, and at length came up with the
+general, who had halted in his pursuit.  On receiving Bolivar's message
+he immediately gave orders to retire, and about seven o'clock we
+reached our camping-ground.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Fortunately we managed to collect a little fuel, for the night was so
+intensely cold that few of the seriously wounded, though receiving
+every possible attention, survived its rigours.  Even lying close to
+the fire and enveloped in our ponchos we shivered.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+A surgeon had sewn up the cut in Alzura's face, and we gave him the
+most sheltered place, and the one nearest the fire.  There was not much
+sleep for any of us that night; we were far too excited, and spent most
+of the time fighting the battle over again.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+To my delight, every one talked of Santiago and his magnificent bravery.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Didn't we take him prisoner once, down south?" asked Plaza.  "His face
+seemed familiar to me."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Yes," said I: "his name is Santiago Mariano, and at that time he was a
+major."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Faith," observed Alzura, looking up, "as far as fighting goes, he
+ought to be a commander-in-chief!  A wounded Colombian told me the
+fellow sprang on them like a lion falling on a herd of deer.  A lucky
+thing for us that the Marianos are in a minority among the Royalists."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Canterac nearly did the trick though," growled the major.  "I thought
+he would drop on us in that defile.  I tell you what it is: Bolivar can
+thank our colonel that he has any cavalry left."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Bravo, major!  I heard this evening that we saved the army."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"So we did," chuckled Plaza; "and we can say it without a word of
+boasting.  I don't care about praising my own men."  But the rest was
+drowned in good-humoured laughter, as every one knew that the finest
+troop in South America&mdash;and the world, too, for that matter&mdash;was
+Plaza's.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+However, it appeared that we really had done a smart thing: for the
+next morning Bolivar held a grand parade, and in presence of the whole
+army ordered that henceforth the regiment of which we formed part
+should be known as the "Hussars of Junin;" and General Miller publicly
+said that we deserved the honour.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+After the parade we marched into the town of Reyes, which had been
+sacked by the Royalists.  Bolivar occupied the only hut that had a
+roof, the rest consisting of nothing but bare walls.  The inhabitants
+had fled into the surrounding country, but now they returned, and did
+all they could to assist us, lighting fires, cooking our scanty
+rations, and erecting sheds to shelter us from the cold.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I suppose it's all right," said Alzura; "but I can't help thinking
+Bolivar has made a big blunder.  While we hang about here, Canterac is
+pulling himself together, and we shall have all the work to do over
+again.  If I were the general&mdash;"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I should join the other side immediately," laughed Plaza.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Please don't interrupt," said Cordova.  "It amuses me to hear these
+youngsters talk.  I'll wager Alzura would have finished the war two
+years ago, only the end might not have been as we anticipate."  At
+which there was a general laugh.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"What I don't like about Bolivar is his play-acting," I said.  "Have
+you seen his hut?  Have a look at it in the morning.  The doorway is
+hung with silver ornaments in place of laurel wreaths, which the
+Indians were unable to get."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"But he can't help the Indians idolizing him!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Nonsense!  Did you ever hear of such rubbish with San Martin?  And the
+Indians worshipped him!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Ah!" exclaimed Plaza, "you're a San Martin man, and jealous of the new
+sun!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"A new comet," said I, a bit testily perhaps, because Plaza had
+happened on an explanation very near the truth.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"At any rate," observed Cordova, "it's better to be here at our ease
+than tramping fruitlessly about the mountains.  I'm fairly tired of
+that fun.  I want a day or two at Lima."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+None of us guessed how much weary marching lay before us ere we
+returned to the capital.  However, for the time we were in
+comparatively good quarters, and though grumbling occasionally because
+Bolivar had not followed up the victory at Junin, were quite prepared
+to make the best of things.
+</P>
+
+<BR><BR><BR>
+
+<A NAME="chap27"></A>
+
+<H3 ALIGN="center">
+CHAPTER XXVII.
+</H3>
+
+<H3 ALIGN="center">
+A DISASTROUS RETREAT.
+</H3>
+
+<P>
+When General Canterac retreated from Junin, he fled from his own
+shadow.  Instead of pursuing him closely, we advanced in a leisurely
+way to Guamanga, and stayed there a month doing nothing.  Then we
+marched to Challuanca, where Bolivar, being needed at the capital, left
+us under the command of General Sucre, who had shown himself a very
+skilful soldier.  It seems we were not strong enough to proceed, and as
+the rainy season was at hand, no one thought the Royalists would return
+to the attack.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The Patriot army was spread across the country for many miles, our post
+being on a high tableland four leagues from Challuanca.  The weather
+was abominable.  Frequent storms swept through the district, the rain
+fell in torrents, the thunder pealed in reverberating claps among the
+mountains, and many animals and some men were killed by the lightning.
+It was bitterly cold, too, and our only shelter was a cluster of
+miserable Indian huts, where we passed all our time when not on duty.
+Often I returned to my cheerless quarters cold, shivering, and
+drenched, yet with no change of clothing.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+To add to our misfortunes, it was rumoured that the various Royalist
+armies, having united, were marching to attack us; so for days together
+we were kept on the alert, riding for hours over the desolate country
+and returning thoroughly exhausted.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+One evening early in November I got back after a twenty miles' ride
+with a small patrol, and found the camp in a state of confusion.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"What is it, Alzura? what's all the fuss about?" I asked, wearily
+getting off my mule&mdash;for we rode horses only when absolutely necessary.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Oh, my dear Juan, you will be delighted," he replied, his face
+brimming with fun.  "We are just going back to Challuanca.  The viceroy
+is somewhere in our rear with all his army, and we have to run for it."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"My animal is dead-beat," said I gloomily.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"You must walk, and lead both animals.  Never mind, dear boy; the
+excitement will keep you going," he answered, laughing.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Hullo! is it you, Crawford?  In luck's way again!  And I've been
+worrying about your being left behind," said Plaza, coming up.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I did not exactly see where the luck came in; but the sound of the
+bugle cut short my reply, and I took my place in the column.  That
+march was the longest twelve miles I remember.  Sometimes riding,
+sometimes walking, aching in every limb, and more than half asleep, I
+plodded along the rocky path, dreamily wondering at every step whether
+I could take another.  As soon as we arrived at Challuanca I just lay
+down on the bare ground, and was fast asleep in a second.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+It was daylight when the sounds of bugles awakened me, and I rose
+sleepily.  The army had disappeared, with the exception of our
+squadron, which I afterwards found formed part of the rearguard.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Come on, sleepy-head," sang out Alzura, "or you'll get no breakfast.
+I've seen to your animals.  A wonder they didn't kick you to death in
+the night!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"The poor beasts were too tired to have a kick left in them.  Where's
+General Sucre?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Going on to a place called Lambrama.  Do you know Miller is a
+prisoner?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"A prisoner?  I don't believe it."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"It's true, nevertheless.  His scouting party has returned without him.
+From what I can hear, we're in a tight fix."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+According to rumour, Alzura was right; but after a long and wearisome
+march we reached Lambrama, where General Sucre halted.  During the
+afternoon, while we rested in the valley, a great shout from the troops
+on our right brought us to our feet, and we saw a soldier on a
+beautiful white horse descending a pass into the valley.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"That's General Miller's horse!" I cried excitedly.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"And the general's on its back!" said Plaza.  "Viva! viva Miller!"  And
+the cry was taken and repeated by thousands of lusty throats.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I had witnessed San Martin's brilliant reception, and had seen Bolivar
+f�ted by his admirers; but this outburst was the most remarkable of
+all.  One would have thought the general was a personal friend of every
+man in the army.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Each battalion, as he passed it, broke into renewed cheering, the men
+flung their caps into the air, and the whole scene was one of amazing
+enthusiasm.  The general rode along slowly, and his smiling face showed
+how greatly he was touched by his reception.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"The man's a marvel!" exclaimed Plaza admiringly.  "Look at him!  One
+would think he had just come from a pleasure-trip instead of being
+hunted through the mountains.  I warrant the viceroy would count his
+capture cheap at half a million dollars."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Say a million, and it would still be cheap," said Alzura; and most of
+us agreed with him.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+General Miller apparently brought important information, as, shortly
+after his arrival, orders were issued for a fresh start.  I need not
+dwell long upon our sufferings during that disastrous retreat.  The
+Royalists had outmarched us, and, hoping to stop our advance, closed
+many of the defiles and destroyed the bridges by which we should have
+crossed the numerous rivers.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Several times we caught a glimpse of the enemy, and one night the
+hostile armies bivouacked within two miles of each other, but separated
+by a deep and rugged valley.  The terrible march was so weakening us
+that many officers hoped the enemy would attack at once.  But this the
+viceroy, who was a clever old soldier, would not do.  His plan was to
+wear us down by degrees and only fight at an advantage.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+For several days we remained watching each other, but on November 25th
+the Royalists disappeared, and Sucre immediately made preparations to
+cross the valley.  A swollen river lay in our path; the bridge was
+destroyed, and there was no material with which to build another.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The crossing was simply terrible.  The weather was intensely cold, and
+even at the ford the infantry were breast high in icy water.  It was
+death to remain behind, however, and though many men, numbed and
+exhausted, were swept down the stream, only two lives were lost.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+On the last night in November we reached a valley whose sides were
+clothed with enormous trees, and the order to encamp was gratefully
+received.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Thank goodness!" said Alzura.  "We shall have a comfortable night at
+last.  The trees will shelter us from the cold winds, and we shall be
+as cozy as in bed."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Humph!" said Gamarra testily; "much you know about it.  In half an
+hour you'll wish we had camped on the top of a mountain."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Why?" I asked curiously, for the valley seemed to me a very suitable
+camping-ground.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Wait!" growled the crusty old major; "you'll soon know."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+This sounded very mysterious, but in a short time the secret was out.
+We had just settled ourselves comfortably when Alzura started up, and
+some one said, in a tone of great disgust, "Mosquitoes!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+They were very fine specimens, and, I suppose, exceedingly angry at our
+invasion of their territory.  They came buzzing up in countless
+thousands, and though many were slain, the slaughter made no apparent
+difference in their numbers.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I had put on my gloves, and now hastily covered my face with a
+handkerchief.  The mosquitoes were by no means dismayed.  Thirsting for
+blood, they would not be denied, but drank deeply.  To any one
+mosquito-proof the scene would have been most laughable.  We made a
+desperate fight, but the victory was to the mosquitoes.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Our hands, necks, and faces were swollen from their venomous bites.
+Some of the men could hardly see; and though we were dreadfully
+fatigued, every one longed to hear the bugle-call to fall in.  No one
+wanted to remain in what Plaza christened "Alzura's paradise."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The welcome sound came at break of day, and we moved out quickly,
+abandoning the battlefield to our active and vigorous foes.  As soon as
+we reached the open country the rain began to fall, and continued in
+torrents all that day and the following night.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I don't exactly see how much better off we are than Barriero,"
+remarked Alzura, as we lay down to sleep in a muddy puddle.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"You should have stayed with him, then."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"It's all very well to say that now.  Why did you bring me away?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I was too much staggered by the audacity of the question to make a
+suitable reply.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Hungry, cold, and wet, we resumed the retreat, and soon began defiling
+into another valley.  Our squadron was right in the rear, and suddenly
+the sounds of firing and the cries of startled men were heard in front
+of us.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Mount!" cried the colonel; for we were still leading our horses, and
+most of our mules were dead.  "Forward!  Trot!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Some of the enemy have doubled and cut in on our flank!" said Plaza
+excitedly.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Gallop!" roared the colonel, as entering the valley we caught sight of
+what was going on.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Unperceived by us, a Royalist detachment had stolen down the valley and
+flung itself on the flank of our two rear battalions.  Taken by
+surprise, and outnumbered, our men were speedily overpowered, and
+before we had arrived on the scene they had dispersed in all directions.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+To the shouts of "Viva el Rey!" and encouraged by their officers, the
+Royalists were hotly chasing their beaten enemy.  The valley was in a
+state of terrible confusion.  The dead bodies of men lay scattered
+about; a few of the victors were dragging off an abandoned gun; others
+were carrying away stores and baggage.  The fight was a complete
+disaster for our side.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"We can't do any good," whispered Alzura, as the colonel halted us,
+"and I doubt if we aren't cut off ourselves."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Better charge at once," muttered Plaza; "the more we look at it the
+less we shall like it."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"My lads," cried the colonel, riding down the ranks, "there is a stiff
+bit of work before us.  Let us remember we are the Hussars of Junin."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The troopers responded with a ringing "Viva!" and as we got a firmer
+seat on our saddles, Alzura remarked,&mdash;
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"That's the way to talk, Juan.  These fellows will fight to the death
+now."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+There was something fresh happening on the other side, but we had no
+time to see what it was.  The bugle sounded, and with the colonel
+leading we dashed straight across the valley.  An infantry battalion
+peppered us from the right, and a squadron was drawn up right across
+our path.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Men began to fall.  Here and there a riderless horse, darting from the
+ranks, tore across the valley.  We were, as Alzura said, in a warm
+corner.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Bullets whizzed past our ears, but we noticed them not, riding straight
+as a die at the hostile cavalry.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"The major's down!" cried Plaza.  "Poor old major!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+That was his only epitaph.  We had no time to sorrow for any one just
+then, though we mourned for him sincerely enough afterwards.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Charge!" roared the colonel; and the sabres flashed as the horses
+bounded forward, thundering with their hoofs on the ground.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Caramba!" cried Plaza; "it's your old friend Mariano.  Well, friend or
+foe, this is his last fight if my blade can reach him."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Yes, the officer who had accomplished this daring flanking movement was
+none other than Santiago Mariano, who, with the flush of success on his
+handsome face, was again leading his men to the charge.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Viva el Rey!" he cried, and his voice rang high and clear above the
+din.  "Down with the bandits!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Crash!  We were into them, fighting our way through desperately.
+Horses pranced, and bit, and kicked.  Men shouted triumphantly, or went
+down with a cry of agony on their lips.  Here a gap was made and filled
+at once, as some daring fighter urged his way forward.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Alzura rode with the colonel, carrying the colours, and we pressed
+after them, knowing that our sole chance of safety was to get through
+the Royalist squadron.  On coming out at the other side we heard a
+voice crying, "Bravo! bravo, my bold hussars!" and there was General
+Miller, who seemed to scent a fight as a hound scents its quarry.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+By this time Santiago had re-formed his squadron, and was dashing at
+our rear, when from the rocks above us sprang a line of fire, and his
+horsemen, wheeling round, rapidly withdrew.  While we had been
+fighting, General Miller had rallied the beaten battalions and posted
+them in a commanding position to cover our ride through the pass.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+That night in bivouac we counted Santiago's venture had cost us more
+than two hundred men, all the spare horses, and a quantity of stores.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I hope you are proud of your Royalist friend," said Alzura to me.  "He
+has done us a nice bit of mischief."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"He's a smart soldier."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"He is that," agreed Plaza, "and a splendid swordsman.  I had a good
+bout with him, but could not pass his guard, though he was defending
+himself against three of us."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Did any one see the major after he fell?" I interrupted.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"No," said Alzura; "but I feel sure he is dead, as the bullet passed
+through his forehead.  He was a grim old fighter, and I'm sorry he's
+gone."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"So am I.  But he died a soldier's death, poor old chap," said Cordova.
+"We must have lost heavily since the retreat began.  I wonder what
+Sucre intends doing now."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Why, continuing the retreat."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"To Lima?  If so, he won't have a hundred men left by the time he
+reaches the capital."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Well, what can he do?  We can't stay here and starve, and he can't
+make the Royalists fight."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"As to starving," laughed Alzura, "I would as soon starve here as
+elsewhere.  I'm getting used to it."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"And I don't know," remarked Cordova, "that forcing a fight will be so
+very brilliant for us.  We have had one sample to-day."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Oh, go to sleep!  You might be a raven as far as croaking's concerned.
+One would think we were in a hole and couldn't get out.  Trust to Sucre
+and Miller; they'll pull us through all right."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I'm going to sleep," announced Alzura gravely.  "I had a beautiful
+dream last night, and want to go on where reveille interrupted it.  I
+dreamed we were in Lima, at a banquet given by the city to the Patriot
+officers.  There was a band to play during the feast; the hall was
+brilliantly lit; the table was laden with all kinds of good things.  We
+were just beginning when the band struck up, and I woke to hear
+Crawford saying, 'Are you going to sleep all day?'  It was a splendid
+feast, though.  Such a quantity of&mdash;"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Sit on him, Juan! stifle him with his own poncho!  Fancy talking of
+banquets now!  Cruelty to animals I call it."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Why, I thought you'd be delighted," grumbled Alzura.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+In a very short time we were all asleep.  We rose at dawn, hungry and
+shivering, to resume our journey.  On this day the enemy marched
+parallel with us, but on the other side of a deep gorge, and General
+Sucre tried in vain to draw them into an engagement.  Their leader was
+too crafty.  Why need he sacrifice his men?
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"It's a pity from our point of view," remarked Plaza, as we toiled
+along, "but they are playing the proper game.  We're like fruit
+ripening on a tree.  When thoroughly fit we shall just drop and be
+gathered without difficulty."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Who's croaking now?" asked Cordova,
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I'm simply stating facts," replied Plaza.  "Look at the road."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Thanks; I've seen more than enough of it already."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"We're half starved."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"That's less than a fact," laughed Alzura.  "You can put me down as
+three-quarters.  If decent food were set before me, I shouldn't know
+how to eat it."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"We're losing hundreds of men," continued Plaza quietly, "and we've one
+miserable field-gun."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Take a dose of your own medicine," said I, laughing.  "Trust to Sucre
+and Miller; they'll pull us through."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The captain's gloomy fit soon passed off, and he was as cheerful as
+ever; but there was no doubt of our being in a very awkward position.
+As far as fighting went, we could hold our own till doomsday; but we
+were bound to eat, and food did not grow on the mountains.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Bolivar was working with all his fiery energy to hurry up
+reinforcements from Colombia and Chili, but until they arrived he could
+not send them on.  Then, too, the viceroy had gained over several
+Indian tribes, and they had already cut one detachment to pieces.  As
+far as I could judge, the Royalists had the whip-hand, and unless they
+made a mistake we should very shortly be at their mercy.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+On the sixth of December we halted at a little village, and a thrill of
+joy went through the troops when it was rumoured that our leaders
+intended to attack the enemy at all risks.  Wearied men, who had thrown
+themselves exhausted on the ground, struggled to their feet; starving
+men forgot their pangs; the very invalids crawled into the ranks, some
+of them so weak that they could barely trail a musket.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Stand by your horses!" said the colonel, as the enemy were only three
+miles off, and we might be required at any moment.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+An hour passed and we still waited; the morning wore away; afternoon
+merged into evening, and we were ordered to encamp.  Something, we knew
+not what, had gone wrong.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I don't know if there was a chance to-day," observed Plaza, "but won't
+there be one to-morrow?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Why?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Because the Royalists will block the road along which we must retreat.
+Then we must either throw ourselves against a terribly strong position,
+or stay here and starve."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Events soon proved that he had not spoken at random.  Early next
+morning the enemy moved to an almost impregnable post.  Twice our
+number of strong men, flushed with victory and well equipped with guns,
+might well have hesitated to attack.  As for us, it was sheer madness.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Things had come to the worst now.  Further retreat was barred; our
+provisions, even if we subsisted on the shortest of short rations,
+would not last five days, while to move against the foe was simply to
+commit suicide.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Lucky Barriero, sitting in his little hut!" said Alzura; "no fighting,
+no starving!  The next time we're taken prisoners we'll make the best
+of it, Juan."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I doubt if the Spaniards will make many prisoners&mdash;that is, among the
+officers," growled Cordova.  "The men will be spared, but we shall be
+put out of the way of doing mischief."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I think myself Cordova exaggerated the danger; but his opinion was
+shared by the great majority of the Patriots, and it was this fear
+which made them resolve to fight to the bitter end rather than
+surrender.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+After breakfast we lounged about on the heights watching the Royalists,
+who had encamped just without gunshot, wondering what our leaders would
+decide to do.
+</P>
+
+<BR><BR><BR>
+
+<A NAME="chap28"></A>
+
+<H3 ALIGN="center">
+CHAPTER XXVIII.
+</H3>
+
+<H3 ALIGN="center">
+THE BATTLE OF THE GENERALS.
+</H3>
+
+<P>
+"They're coming down!" cried Alzura excitedly, rushing into our tent.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+It wanted two hours to sunset; we had done nothing all day, and tired
+of watching the enemy on the opposite heights, most of us had gone to
+sleep.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Alzura's announcement woke us up, and running forward, we glanced
+eagerly at the hill, which a battalion of infantry was descending.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Skirmishers, nothing more," said Plaza quietly.  "They fancy we might
+attempt a night attack.  Take my word for it, they won't be foolish
+enough to meet us on the plain."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Unless they try a rush in the dark."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"That's just possible, but not probable; they're sure of us without
+that."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"There goes a battalion of our light infantry in extended order,"
+remarked Cordova; "but there won't be any real fighting to-night.  I'm
+going back to bed."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"A very sensible proceeding, too," exclaimed a genial voice; and
+turning round we beheld General Miller.  "I should advise all of you
+not on duty to do the same," he added.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Are we going to fight, general?" I asked eagerly.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Hullo, Crawford!  I've been so busy that I've lost sight of you
+lately.  Well, I hardly know.  Perhaps the viceroy would be better able
+to tell you; he knows more about it than I do."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I don't think he'll abandon his strong position just to give us a
+better chance, sir," remarked Plaza.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Perhaps not," replied the general.  "But you mustn't think he's in
+clover up yonder.  His men are as hungry as ours, and that's saying
+much.  If it is a fight, however, 'twill be a fight to the finish, and
+the Hussars of Junin won't be missing!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Take us with you, sir!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"That's just what I've come to see the colonel about.  I intend to get
+all the regiment together and use it as a battering-ram."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"He thinks the Royalists will attack," said Alzura, as the general
+passed on.  "He has heard something important, you may depend.  And why
+shouldn't they? they're two to one, and have no end of guns."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I like his idea of using all the regiment," laughed Cordova.  "Nearly
+a half of the third squadron are mounted on baggage mules; their horses
+are all dead."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"They must get fresh ones from the enemy," I suggested.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Come," said Plaza; "there's nothing more to see here."  And we
+returned to the tent.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Anxious to have a good long night, Cordova soon fell asleep; but Alzura
+and I sat up chatting till within an hour or two of dawn.  We could
+hear the hostile skirmishers peppering away at each other at intervals,
+and somehow the sounds seemed to be the prelude to a coming battle.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Fortunately the morning dawned fair, but there was a nip in the air
+which impelled us to move about smartly.  Then the sun rose gloriously
+over the eastern peaks, and its genial warmth raised our drooping
+spirits.  I cannot account for the feeling, but somehow the whole army
+felt that a battle was imminent, and the faces of the troops wore a
+look of excited expectancy.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Directly after breakfast, or what we were pleased to call breakfast,
+the men began moving to their positions, each corps being formed in
+close column.  For the better understanding of what happened, I must
+try to describe our position.  We were drawn up on a nearly square
+tableland known as the Plain of Ayacucho, a league in circumference,
+and flanked right and left by rugged ravines.  We had the village at
+our backs, and the only road by which we could retreat was effectually
+blocked.  The Royalist army was perched just below the summit of a
+gigantic ridge called Condorcanqui, which formed the eastern boundary
+of the plain.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+At seven o'clock our regiment moved out, and the men of the third
+squadron, of whom Cordova had spoken, provoked much humour and
+good-natured chaff as they rode past on their baggage mules.  It was
+thought that they would help to make a show, but no one suspected that
+later on, when ordered to remain in the rear, they would answer firmly,
+"No, we will conquer or die with our comrades!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The cavalry, consisting of four regiments, was stationed in the centre,
+with an infantry division on either side, and a third in the rear as a
+reserve.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+About nine o'clock a great cheer rose from all parts of the plain: the
+Royalists were descending the craggy side of Condorcanqui.  Between the
+infantry of each division appeared the cavalry, the riders leading
+their horses and advancing with difficulty.  It was an impressive
+scene, and we stood watching with breathless interest.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Then our fellows renewed their cheering as General Sucre, riding along
+the line, addressed a few rousing words to each particular corps.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"A tough nut to crack," remarked Plaza, watching the Royalists form,
+"but we'll get at the kernel before the day's over."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"There's the beginning!" cried Alzura, as the infantry on our right
+slowly advanced.  "Hurrah! we're to help!" for an aid-de-camp from
+General Sucre had just dashed up to Miller with orders.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+We waited eagerly for the word to mount, but our turn had not yet come.
+Two cavalry regiments moved off with Miller, and left us gazing at the
+drama being unfolded before our eyes.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Our infantry columns marched to the attack like so many automatic
+machines; the Royalists waited firmly, as if confident of victory.  We
+stood holding our horses, and quivering with excitement.  Much would
+depend upon the result of that first encounter.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"They're stopping to fire," cried Alzura.  "Now they're moving again.
+Viva! they're going to charge.  Look at the sun on their bayonets."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Would the Royalists give way?  No; they stood firm as the rocky heights
+behind them&mdash;not a man moved.  It seemed to me that there was not even
+a tremor in the whole mass.  If our fellows charged and failed, they
+would be cut to pieces.  We were like spectators in a theatre, only the
+drama was a real one.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+A mighty "Viva!" floated back to us as our men broke into the charge.
+It was neck or nothing now&mdash;decisive victory or stern defeat.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"The Royalists will run," muttered Plaza; "they must."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+But they did not, and the next instant bayonet crossed bayonet in
+desperate conflict.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Excitement drove us well-nigh crazy.  We cheered and shouted and waved
+our sabres, as if by so doing we could help in the fight.  Our troops
+had met their match, and seemed to make no impression.  Unless they
+went forward shortly they must retreat.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"If they're driven back," remarked Plaza, "they are lost."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+How the struggle would have ended I cannot tell, but just then we broke
+into a cry of relief.  The two cavalry regiments which had made a wide
+detour were seen bearing down on the Royalists' flanks.  They swept
+along at hurricane speed.  Nothing could stand against the shock of
+their long lances.  A portion of the Royalists, facing about, delivered
+a telling volley at short range.  Men and horses went down with a
+crash, but the survivors were not checked.  A second volley crashed
+into them, making wide gaps, and then, with the force of a roaring
+torrent, they literally swept away the barrier of men and steel.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"That settles it," said Plaza, breathing deeply; "the bravest troops in
+the world couldn't recover from such a smashing blow.  It's a case of
+complete rout, in that part of the field at all events."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+He was right too.  The enemy would not, indeed could not rally.  Here
+and there small groups stood at bay, fighting desperately but vainly to
+stem the onset of their pursuers.  All they could do was to die
+fighting, in the hope that the sacrifice might save their comrades.
+Even those who reached the heights were not out of danger.  Whiz, whiz
+sped the bullets; and numbers of the fugitives rolled down the mountain
+side till their bodies were caught by crag or brushwood.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+So greatly was our attention absorbed by the scene that we had scarcely
+noticed what was happening on our left.  Suddenly, however, a heavy
+fire broke out, followed by the quick reports of hundreds of muskets.
+Our colonel glanced in the direction uneasily.  His orders were strict.
+He was on no account to move his regiment, and yet&mdash;
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Crawford," said he, looking round, "see what that firing means."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I sprang to the saddle and galloped off.  But for our success on the
+right, I should have felt inclined to take a gloomy view of things: our
+left had given way.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Two Royalist battalions were advancing in pursuit, while still further
+on the left a cavalry regiment was swooping down on one of our reserve
+battalions sent in support.  The crafty enemy had crossed a deep
+ravine, on the farther side of which a whole division was stationed.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+A mounted officer, with cap gone and cloak flying in the wind, pulled
+up on seeing me, and said rapidly, "Where is your regiment?  Take me to
+your colonel quickly.  We want cavalry; we must have cavalry, or our
+whole left will be rolled up!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"This way," I replied, and together we galloped towards the Hussars of
+Junin, reaching the colonel just as General Miller dashed up from the
+right.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"What is it?" he asked hastily.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"We are overpowered, sir.  The enemy have four field-guns across a
+ravine; our division has suffered terribly, and the troops are giving
+way.  The general requires a regiment of cavalry immediately."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Tell him it's coming," replied Miller.&mdash;"Now, colonel, here's a chance
+for your men to show their mettle.  We've smashed the enemy on the
+right; let the 'Hussars of Junin' do the same on the left."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+How we did cheer as our colonel led us out!  General Miller's face wore
+an anxious expression as he glanced over the field.  Everywhere the
+victorious Spaniards were driving back our left wing; we should only be
+just in time to repair the mischief.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Push those two infantry battalions across the ravine while I rally the
+fugitives," said Miller.  But he had barely spoken when the Royalist
+cavalry dashed down on the right flank.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Here's Crawford's friend again!" said Plaza.  "We might have guessed
+he had a hand in this business."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Santiago made a handsome picture as he tore along well in front of his
+regiment, and enemy though he was, I could not help feeling proud of
+him.  We turned to meet this vigorous onslaught, and though Santiago
+fought with all the traditional valour of his race, his men, already
+tired by their great exertions, could not stand against us.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Stopping their flight, our own infantry rallied, and advanced in
+support, while their loud cheers proclaimed the arrival of a second
+cavalry regiment.  Nothing daunted by his repulse, Santiago led his
+troopers against the new enemy, while we bore down on the hostile
+infantry.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Gallop!" cried our colonel; and neck by neck the horses flew over the
+ground, the men waving their sabres and cheering lustily.  We could see
+the glittering steel of the bayonets now, could almost look down the
+barrels of the muskets, when there came a blinding flash, the thud of
+falling bodies, and hoarse shrieks of pain.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Forward!" thundered the colonel, "forward; remember the 'Hussars of
+Junin!'"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Crash we went right into them before they could fire another volley,
+and then it was horseman against footman, sabre against bayonet.  To
+and fro we surged, striking parrying, thrusting, till at last the brave
+enemy, unable to continue the struggle longer, fled to the ravine,
+hotly pursued by our victorious regiment.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+In a calmer moment we should have pulled up, but there was no stopping
+now.  Some one raised a warning cry: it came too late.  Down the ravine
+we went, the horses slipping and scrambling&mdash;some rolling over and
+crushing their riders; the majority, keeping their feet somehow,
+reached the opposite bank.  A small detachment of the enemy halted to
+fire a scattering volley, which did some mischief.  A man close to me
+fell forward on his horse's neck.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Good-bye, Crawford!" said he faintly; "I am done for."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+It was Cordova; but there was no time to help him.  On we dashed
+straight at the guns, which the gunners dared not fire, so mixed up
+were friend and foe.  A cry of "Viva el Rey!" arose in our rear.
+Santiago was galloping back.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The Royalists could not stand.  Miller had brought up three battalions
+in double-quick time; the guns were ours; horse and foot we swept over
+the plain, driving the enemy pell-mell in all directions.  Only the
+regiment led by the undaunted Santiago endeavoured to cover the
+retreat, and at last it too fled.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Not so their brave leader; he remained on the field.  I found him
+later, with a hole in his side and a nasty gash across the face.  He
+was not dead, however, and with assistance I carried him to the
+village, where a surgeon dressed his wounds.  Then I returned to my
+regiment.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"It's all over!" cried Alzura exultantly.  "The viceroy is taken
+prisoner, and Canterac has come to sue for terms.  He is with Sucre
+now."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Where is Plaza?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Just gone to find poor Cordova.  It's hard lines to drop off in the
+moment of victory.  And the war is over now; the Royalists will never
+lift their heads again."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+This was not quite correct, as a few still held out in other parts of
+the country, but they were powerless to do any real mischief.  This
+battle of Ayacucho&mdash;or Battle of the Generals, as we called it&mdash;secured
+the independence of Peru.  Fourteen Spanish generals, some of them the
+most famous in South America, gave up their swords; nearly six hundred
+officers and most of the rank and file became prisoners of war.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Late that evening I went to see Santiago.  He lay on a bench in a
+miserable hut, where several wounded officers had been brought for
+shelter.  Two small earthen lamps gave a feeble light, barely
+sufficient for us to see each other's faces.  I bent over him, and
+choked back the sob that would rise in my throat.  We neither of us
+tried to gloze over the truth.  He was dying, and we both knew it.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I am glad you have come," he whispered.  "It will soon be over, and I
+am not sorry; I have tried to do my best."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Indeed you have, old fellow; friend and foe alike are loud in your
+praise."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I have been loyal to my king; I have done my duty," he continued, not
+heeding the interruption.  "Life is precious, Juan, but honour is the
+first thing.  My name is unstained.  I die as I have lived, a cavalier
+of Spain!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+That thought cheered him as he took his last and long journey.  He was
+young and handsome and well beloved; he had fair estates and hosts of
+friends; he might have risen high in the councils of his nation; but
+death, stern and unyielding, claimed him, and he braced himself to meet
+it.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Thank God!" he murmured; "I die with a clear conscience."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I stayed with him till nearly midnight, when he became unconscious.
+Then having work to do, I sorrowfully went away.  Next morning, on my
+way to the hut I met General Miller.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Poor fellow!" he said, when I told him of Santiago's state.  "I will
+come with you.  I remember him well."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Just as we were moving on, we met General Sucre accompanied by a
+Spanish officer, who on seeing Miller ran forward and embraced him.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I know you!" he cried.  "I am Vald�s.  You and I must be friends."
+Then turning to General Sucre, he added, "This Miller has often kept us
+on the move.  I am called active; but he was a regular wizard&mdash;here,
+there, everywhere, without giving a clue to his intentions until he
+dealt us some sly blow."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I looked at this celebrated Spanish general with a great deal of
+interest.  He was a small, spare man, with keen eyes and rough,
+weather-beaten face.  He wore a broad-brimmed beaver hat, a coarse gray
+surtout, and long brown worsted leggings.  He stooped slightly, and to
+judge by appearances, one would never have thought he was perhaps the
+finest soldier in the Spanish service.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Sucre left the two chatting, and presently Miller said, "I was just
+going to visit one of your men, a Colonel Mariano.  Do you know him?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Mariano?  He was my best cavalry officer.  It was he who helped me to
+cut up your rearguard some time ago, and to drive back your left wing
+yesterday.  I'll come with you."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"He will be very pleased to see you, no doubt.&mdash;You go first and show
+us the way, Crawford."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Santiago lay with closed eyes, breathing so faintly that at first we
+thought he was dead.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Santiago," I softly whispered, "do you know me?  I have brought you a
+visitor."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+His eyes opened slowly, and there was a fleeting smile in them, but he
+did not speak.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Colonel!" said Vald�s, stepping to the side of the bench.  The sound
+of that voice brought the poor fellow for a short time from the Valley
+of the Shadow.  By some extraordinary means he managed to sit up
+without assistance, raised his hand to the salute, and in a clear,
+ringing voice exclaimed, "At your service, general!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+It was the last act of his life.  On placing my arm round him to
+prevent him from falling, I found he was dead.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"A fine fellow," said General Miller quietly.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"A thorough soldier to the end!" cried the Spanish general.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I said nothing, but mourned none the less the true friend I had found
+in the ranks of our enemies.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+We were very quiet in camp that day.  The excitement of battle had
+passed, and we were counting the cost of our triumph.  Many familiar
+faces were missing, and the death of Cordova especially affected us.
+We had been through many perils together, had endured many hardships,
+and it seemed a pity that he should not have lived to taste the sweets
+of victory.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Shortly before sunset that same day I received a message from General
+Miller asking me to go to his quarters.  I found him expecting me, and
+he at once plunged into the subject upon which he wished to speak.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"The war is now over, Crawford," said he, "and General Sucre is able to
+release a large part of his force.  I am proceeding to Cuzco, but there
+is no need for you to do so.  You have done your share, and I intend
+sending you on special service to Lima."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Oh, thank you, general!" I answered, my eyes sparkling and my cheeks
+flushing with pleasure.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"The regiment will return in a few weeks at the most," he continued.
+"Be ready to start in the morning, and don't forget to remember me
+kindly to your parents.  Some day I hope to call upon them."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I am sure you will receive a very warm welcome when you come,
+general," I replied, taking the hand held out to me.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Well, dear boy," said Alzura, on my return to our quarters, "what is
+the news?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Good," said I, "though perhaps it's a bit selfish to say so.  I start
+to-morrow for Lima.  The regiment proceeds to Cuzco, but it will return
+to the capital in a few weeks."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"All right, old fellow.  I'm glad to hear of your good fortune, though
+I shall miss you awfully.  Mind you hunt up my people and tell them I'm
+all right and hoping to see them soon."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Of course I promised to do so, and then went to wish the others
+good-bye.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I hope you will find all your people well," exclaimed Plaza on hearing
+the news.  "After all, you're only a sort of advance courier, and we
+shall soon meet again."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"We shall expect you to give a ball to the officers of the regiment,
+and a feast to the men, when we reach the capital," cried Alzura
+merrily.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Meanwhile," said Plaza gravely, "take my advice, and have a good rest."
+</P>
+
+<BR><BR><BR>
+
+<A NAME="chap29"></A>
+
+<H3 ALIGN="center">
+CHAPTER XXIX.
+</H3>
+
+<H3 ALIGN="center">
+HOME AGAIN.
+</H3>
+
+<P>
+Home again!  The weary journey was at an end.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I had crossed the desolate mountains, and was riding into Lima.  The
+city was gay with flags and bunting; decorations abounded on all sides;
+joy-bells pealed, and the streets resounded with the merry laughter and
+chatter of the citizens.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+News of the brilliant victory at Ayacucho had evidently preceded me.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I longed to ride home at a gallop and throw myself into my mother's
+arms; I yearned eagerly for a glimpse of my father's face.  I was (do
+not think the confession weak) utterly homesick.  Duty, however,
+claimed me a while longer, and I turned my horse's head toward the
+Government House.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+It was not possible to move at more than a foot-pace.  The crowd surged
+around me; little children, garlanded with flowers, ran close to my
+horse's hoofs.  I was terribly afraid some of them would be trampled to
+death.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Many soldiers were there, too, their uniforms spick and span, and
+unspotted by the soil of the Andes.  Mine was dirty, bloodstained, and
+not altogether free from rents.  I rode carefully, but my eyes were
+heavy and my limbs ached with fatigue.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Darting suddenly from the throng, a man seized my bridle-rein and cried
+aloud, "A soldier from Ayacucho!  Here is one of our brave deliverers!"
+</P>
+
+<A NAME="img-390"></A>
+<CENTER>
+<IMG CLASS="imgcenter" SRC="images/img-390.jpg" ALT="&quot;A soldier from Ayacucho!  Here is one of our brave deliverers!&quot;" BORDER="2" WIDTH="414" HEIGHT="592">
+<H4 CLASS="h4center" STYLE="width: 450px">
+&quot;A soldier from Ayacucho!  Here is one of our brave deliverers!&quot;
+</H4>
+</CENTER>
+
+<P>
+Instantly I was surrounded by the crowd, which pressed me so closely
+that my horse could barely move.  Viva after viva rent the air;
+laughing girls and women half smothered me with flowers; men marched
+beside me or fell into line behind, forming a kind of triumphal
+procession.  One would have thought I was the saviour of the country&mdash;a
+second Bolivar!
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Thus, laughing, cheering, and singing, they escorted me to the
+Government House, where, leaving my astonished horse with the guards, I
+hurried inside.  An official, in all the glory of a gorgeous uniform,
+demanded my business, and remarked haughtily that the president was
+engaged.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Tell him," said I, "that a lieutenant of the Hussars of Junin is here
+with dispatches from General Sucre."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+After waiting a few minutes, I was conducted through the spacious hall
+to a room guarded by a file of soldiers.  My attendant knocked timidly
+at the door, which was immediately opened, and I entered the apartment.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Bolivar sat at a table dictating letters to his secretary and talking
+to several officers of high rank.  His complexion seemed sallower than
+ever, his dark hair had more of gray in it, but his eyes had lost none
+of their penetrating keenness.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I saluted and stood at attention, waiting for him to speak.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Ah," exclaimed he, in his loud, rasping voice, and turning his eyes
+askance as he usually did in conversation, "you are Lieutenant
+Crawford!  I have not forgotten you.  How is it that you still have
+only two stripes?" pointing to the stripes of silver lace round my
+cuff, which denoted the rank of lieutenant.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I do not know, general," I replied.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Your Excellency!" corrected one of the officers standing near.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Let him alone!" cried Bolivar; "he is a soldier, and 'general' comes
+more naturally to his lips.&mdash;Where are the dispatches?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I presented them.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Humph! enough work here for the rest of the day," said he on glancing
+through them.&mdash;"Garcia," turning to one of the officers, "countermand
+the reception; I shall be too busy.&mdash;Ah, here is a letter from Miller!
+I see he commends you very highly, young man, and desires to bring you
+to my notice.  There is nothing I like so much as rewarding true
+merit.&mdash;Garcia, make out Lieutenant Crawford's commission as captain in
+the Hussars of Junin, for bravery on the field.&mdash;I congratulate you,
+captain.  I see by your face you are anxious to go."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+After thanking him for my promotion, I said, "Yes, general; I have not
+seen my father and mother for a very long time."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Your father&mdash;ah, now I remember.  He is no friend to me&mdash;would be glad
+to see me out of Peru, in fact, eh?  Well, I shall go some day.  But he
+is a true man for all that, and an Englishman.  I love the English.
+Perhaps it is as well for your father that I do.  Tell him, Captain
+Crawford, that Bolivar has some good points."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"He has already recognized them, general," I answered.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"He conceals his discovery well, then.  But I will not keep you longer.
+Present yourself at my levee in the morning, and don't forget to wear
+that extra band of lace."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"There is no fear of that, general," said I, with a smile; "I am too
+proud of the honour."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Apparently the remark pleased him, as he was very gracious when I took
+my leave, though the officers-in-waiting looked at me as if I had been
+overbold.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Out again into the street.  The crowd had dispersed, and only a few
+people were about as I once more mounted my jaded animal.  Now for
+home!  Forward, good horse!  My spirits rose with every step; the tired
+feeling left me; I could have sung aloud for very joy.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The sight of the Montilla hacienda sobered my happiness somewhat.  The
+grounds were trim and well-kept, but the dwelling looked untenanted.
+What had become of Rosa?  Perhaps&mdash;yes, that must be it&mdash;she was
+staying with my mother.  I urged my horse into a spasmodic gallop, but
+the poor beast soon resumed his old pace.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+There was a horse behind me, though, that could gallop.  I turned
+quickly to see who the rider was, and laughed gaily.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Why, Jack!" cried the faithful Jos�, his eyes brimful of pleasure.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Captain Crawford, if you please!" I interrupted with assumed dignity.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Captain or general, it's all the same to me, as long as you're home
+again, Jack, with no scratch on you!  Hurrah! won't there be a fuss in
+the house to-night!" and away he went at breakneck speed toward the
+gate.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Better so," said I, jogging along.  "He'll be able to prepare them a
+little.&mdash;Come, old boy," to my horse, "can't you manage even a trot?
+Well, never mind; we're nearly there."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The gate of the park was wide open, and inside stood more than half of
+my father's servants.  They could not wait for me to reach the
+courtyard.  How they cheered, to be sure!  It was a pleasant foretaste
+of the welcome that awaited me.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Good old Antonio was at the little gate, so I dismounted and spoke a
+word with him, though my feet itched to be dashing along the courtyard.
+Then I sent my horse to the stables, with strict orders that it should
+be carefully groomed and fed, and made comfortable.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+At last!  My heart beat loudly; my head was dizzy; I could barely
+distinguish the figures in the hall.  But my mother's arms were round
+me, her lips pressed close to mine, in a fond embrace.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Then came my father's welcome, and presently, in the brilliantly-lit
+drawing-room, a young girl came forward and placed her hand in mine.
+She was dressed in black, and looked somewhat sad and careworn, as if
+life had not been particularly pleasant of late.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Welcome home, Juan," said she softly; and I saw by her face she was
+thinking of the night when I had ridden hurriedly away in the vain
+endeavour to save her father's life.  We did not speak of it then, and
+when, after changing my clothes, I returned to the drawing-room, Rosa
+was not there.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"She has gone to her own room," explained my mother, noticing my look
+of disappointment.  "It would have been difficult for the poor child to
+stay with us this first evening."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"She has heard of her father's death, then?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Yes," said my father, quickly and with a warning glance.  "She knows
+that the Indians shot him, thinking he had been in correspondence with
+the Royalists."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+I understood at once that my father was aware of the truth, but that,
+with his usual kindly thought, he had kept it from both the bereaved
+girl and my mother.  He never alluded to the miserable incident, nor
+did I; and Rosa was left in ignorance of the real reason for her
+father's untimely end.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Of course, we sat late talking over my adventures in the mountains, and
+of the terrible battle which had secured the independence of Peru.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Yes," said my father confidently, "whatever else happens, the
+Spaniards will never again rule over this country; their power is
+broken.  But we are not yet out of the wood: as a Peruvian, I still
+fear Bolivar's ambition."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Oh," I exclaimed gaily, "I had forgotten Bolivar!  He has made me a
+captain!" and I told them all about my interview with the celebrated
+general.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I admit his good points," laughed my father; "but I do not like to see
+one person invested with such tremendous power.  Still, there is no
+doubt we owe our liberty in great part to his wonderful energy,
+together with his determination never to acknowledge defeat.  He has
+toiled day and night like a slave."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I shall be glad when your regiment returns, Juan," said my mother.  "I
+am longing to see your brave friends, and especially Alzura.  I seem to
+know him quite well already."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"You are sure to like him, mother.  He is a delightful companion, full
+of fun, and always laughing and joking.  Plaza is older and more of a
+soldier, but I owe a great deal to his kindness."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"We will endeavour to repay it, my boy," said she brightly, kissing me
+good-night.  "Don't stay up too long.  Remember you have to attend the
+levee in the morning."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+When she had retired, I asked my father for news of Raymon Sorillo.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"He is still serving against the Royalists, but his band has sadly
+diminished.  He came here secretly one night, and informed me of your
+attempt to rescue Montilla.  I think he was very angry; but he said it
+was a daring act, and almost successful.  However, he bears no malice,
+and is as ready as ever to stand your friend."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Ugh!" said I, getting up with a shiver; "I hope I shall not need his
+assistance."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+The next day, after attending the levee, where Bolivar was particularly
+gracious, I obtained an indefinite leave of absence, and returned home.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Rosa was alone, and though rather dreading to be asked about the
+business of the silver key, I thought it best to get the interview
+over.  As it happened, I need not have worried myself at all.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I wanted to see you, Juan," she said, giving me her hand.  "It seems
+ages ago when I sent you out on that terrible errand.  I ought not to
+have done it; but my father's life was at stake, and I did not think of
+the danger to you."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Think no more of it, Rosa.  After all, the danger was trifling; the
+Indians would not have hurt me."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I don't quite understand the story," she said thoughtfully, "but I
+know you risked your life."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"There was little risk.  I had a slight chance to rescue your father
+from the Indians, and seized it.  Unfortunately the attempt failed, and
+I was captured by the Royalists.  So in one way you did me a good turn;
+for while the other fellows were starving and fighting in the
+mountains, I was pretty comfortably off."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"But you were in the great battle?"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"Yes, I was.  I escaped from prison chiefly to please a mad-brained
+young lieutenant of my regiment.  But it is all past now, Rosa, and
+there will be no more fighting."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I am sorry for his Majesty," she said simply, "and for the loyal
+gentlemen who have died for him."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"There were some splendid fellows amongst the Royalists," I said, and
+proceeded to tell her the story of the gallant Santiago Mariano.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"He must have been a brave man, Juan!"
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"He was, and he had equally brave comrades.  Now that the struggle is
+over, they will join us, and we shall all work together in peace for
+the prosperity of our common country.  The war has been a terrible
+evil, but I am hoping that much good may come from it.  I dream of a
+grand future for Peru, and of a time when the Land of the Sun shall
+recover its ancient glory."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I hope your dream will come true, Juan.  I am sure you will try to
+make it do so," she said.  "But you must not expect me to be pleased
+that we are no longer loyal subjects of the Spanish king."
+</P>
+
+<BR>
+<HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="center">
+<BR>
+
+<P>
+Here ends the story of my adventures during the War of Independence.
+The Spanish power was completely crushed; but, as my father had
+foretold, there were still many misfortunes in store for our unhappy
+country.  The men who had fought so hard for liberty quarrelled among
+themselves.  There were endless disputes and conspiracies, and many
+soldiers who had bravely faced death on the battlefield were executed
+by their fellow-countrymen.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+For two years Bolivar ruled at Lima.  He was at the height of his
+glory.  He had freed Venezuela, New Granada, and Ecuador from the
+Spaniards, and joined them into the one country of Colombia.  Upper
+Peru he had formed into another country called Bolivia, and he was the
+real master of Peru proper.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+His boundless ambition, however, overreached itself.  Enemies rose up
+against him on all sides.  He was driven from power, and seven years
+after the battle of Ayacucho died a broken-hearted man.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+After his departure from Lima, my father's Spanish friend, General La
+Mar, who had once been Governor of Callao, was elected president, and
+the country settled down into a state of something like order.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+There still remain a few personal matters to be recorded before my pen
+is finally laid aside.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Among those who opposed Bolivar's rule in Peru, none was more bitter or
+reckless than the guerilla chief, Raymon Sorillo.  Unfortunately for
+him, the war had greatly weakened the society of the Silver Key.  His
+bravest men and ablest lieutenants had died fighting, and he was left
+with only a shadow of his former power.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Undaunted by this, he openly defied Bolivar's authority.  For several
+months he held his own against the regular troops, but at last, being
+captured, was tried as a traitor, and condemned to death.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+My father made strenuous efforts to save him, and would have succeeded
+but for Sorillo himself.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"The man is a desperate ruffian," said Bolivar, in answer to my
+father's appeal for mercy; "but I will pardon him on condition that he
+takes the oath of allegiance and swears to obey the laws."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Overjoyed by his success, my father hurried to the prison where Sorillo
+was confined.  The doughty mountaineer refused the offer with scorn.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"I took up arms for the independence of Peru," said he, "not to
+exchange the tyranny of the Spaniards for that of a Venezuelan
+adventurer.  I thank you, se�or, from my heart, but I prefer death to
+these conditions."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+My father stayed with him nearly the whole day, but could not shake his
+resolve.  So in the early morning the redoubtable chief was led into
+the prison yard, and was placed near a wall.  Some of the soldiers
+wished to bandage his eyes, but he would not allow it.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+"No," said he; "I have looked in the face of death too closely and too
+often to fear it.  Fire!  I shall not tremble."
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Thus he died, and whatever else may be said, it cannot be denied that,
+in his own headstrong, obstinate way, he was faithful to the cause for
+which many better men had laid down their lives.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Of my friend Plaza it is only necessary to say that, through General
+Miller's influence as well as by his own merit, he rapidly advanced to
+high office, being made governor of one of the inland provinces.  He
+has paid me several visits since he left the hussars, and his sole
+regret is that Cordova did not live to share in the general good
+fortune.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+An old acquaintance, who has also since done well in the world, is
+Barriero.  When the victory at Ayacucho became known, the prisoners on
+the island rose in revolt, and overpowered their guards.  Barriero
+placed himself at their head, seized all the arms and ammunition, and
+formed the patriots into a company.  Then, assisted by some Indians, he
+crossed the morass and marched to Cuzco, where, to his joy and
+astonishment, he heard that Alzura and I had safely escaped across the
+dreaded swamp.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Alzura resigned his commission shortly after the regiment returned to
+Lima.  He succeeded to a fine estate near the capital, and is one of
+our most frequent visitors.  My father is very fond of him, and as for
+my mother, I sometimes say she thinks more of him than of myself;
+indeed, the dear fellow has almost become like a second son to her.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Jos� is still my father's right-hand man.  He has long since amassed a
+snug fortune; but I expect he will die in the old home, where he is an
+esteemed and valued and trusty friend.
+</P>
+
+<P>
+Felipe Montilla's hacienda no longer stands desolate.  Rosa has again
+taken up her residence there, but under the name of Crawford, and
+employs me, as my father jokingly says, to look after her estates.  She
+is still a Royalist at heart, but as the years pass she becomes more
+and more reconciled to the changes which have taken place since Peru
+obtained its independence
+</P>
+
+<H3 ALIGN="center">
+AT THE POINT OF THE SWORD.
+</H3>
+
+<BR><BR><BR>
+
+<P CLASS="finis">
+THE END.
+</P>
+
+<BR><BR><BR><BR>
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+<pre>
+
+
+
+
+
+End of Project Gutenberg's At the Point of the Sword, by Herbert Hayens
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK AT THE POINT OF THE SWORD ***
+
+***** This file should be named 22595-h.htm or 22595-h.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        https://www.gutenberg.org/2/2/5/9/22595/
+
+Produced by Al Haines
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+https://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+https://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including including checks, online payments and credit card
+donations.  To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+
+
+</pre>
+
+</BODY>
+
+</HTML>
+
diff --git a/22595-h/images/img-046.jpg b/22595-h/images/img-046.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..70fd6a1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22595-h/images/img-046.jpg
diff --git a/22595-h/images/img-151.jpg b/22595-h/images/img-151.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1d6114b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22595-h/images/img-151.jpg
diff --git a/22595-h/images/img-273.jpg b/22595-h/images/img-273.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..543db77
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22595-h/images/img-273.jpg
diff --git a/22595-h/images/img-281.jpg b/22595-h/images/img-281.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2bd8baf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22595-h/images/img-281.jpg
diff --git a/22595-h/images/img-390.jpg b/22595-h/images/img-390.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c342e7c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22595-h/images/img-390.jpg
diff --git a/22595.txt b/22595.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9d9b658
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22595.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,12394 @@
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of At the Point of the Sword, by Herbert Hayens
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: At the Point of the Sword
+
+Author: Herbert Hayens
+
+Release Date: September 14, 2007 [EBook #22595]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ASCII
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK AT THE POINT OF THE SWORD ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Al Haines
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+[Frontispiece: "In a short time they had bound our arms tightly with
+strips of hide."]
+
+[Transcriber's note: frontispiece missing from book.]
+
+
+
+
+
+
+At the Point of the Sword
+
+
+A Story for Boys
+
+
+By
+
+HERBERT HAYENS
+
+
+
+  Author of "Ye Mariners of England," "Under the Lone Star,"
+  "For the Colours," "A Captain of Irregulars,"
+  "In the Grip of the Spaniard,"
+  &c., &c.
+
+
+
+
+THOMAS NELSON & SONS, LTD.
+
+LONDON, EDINBURGH, AND NEW YORK
+
+1903
+
+
+
+
+CONTENTS.
+
+
+      I.  A BIRTHDAY EVE
+     II.  AN EXCITING VOYAGE
+    III.  THE END OF THE "AGUILA"
+     IV.  THE SILVER KEY
+      V.  IN THE HIDDEN VALLEY
+     VI.  WE LEAVE THE HIDDEN VALLEY
+    VII.  WHOM THE GODS LOVE DIE YOUNG
+   VIII.  A FRIENDLY OPPONENT
+     IX.  A GLEAM OF HOPE
+      X.  A STORMY INTERVIEW
+     XI.  A NARROW ESCAPE
+    XII.  A STERN PURSUIT
+   XIII.  HOME AGAIN
+    XIV.  FRIEND OR FOE?
+     XV.  WE CATCH A TARTAR
+    XVI.  GLORIOUS NEWS
+   XVII.  DUTY FIRST
+  XVIII.  DARK DAYS
+    XIX.  FALSE PLAY, OR NOT?
+     XX.  "SAVE HIM, JUAN, SAVE HIM!"
+    XXI.  ROUGH JUSTICE
+   XXII.  THE "SILVER KEY" AGAIN
+  XXIII.  AN OPEN-AIR PRISON
+   XXIV.  A DANGEROUS JOURNEY
+    XXV.  BACK TO DUTY
+   XXVI.  THE HUSSARS OF JUNIN
+  XXVII.  A DISASTROUS RETREAT
+ XXVIII.  THE BATTLE OF THE GENERALS
+   XXIX.  HOME AGAIN
+
+
+
+
+LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS.
+
+
+"IN A SHORT TIME THEY HAD BOUND OUR ARMS TIGHTLY
+  WITH STRIPS OF HIDE" . . . . . . _Frontispiece_
+
+"'HELP, HELP!' I EXCLAIMED FAINTLY; BUT HE HEARD ME,
+  AND I KNEW I WAS SAVED."
+
+"PUSHING OFF HIS SANDY BED-CLOTHES AT OUR APPROACH,
+  HE STRUGGLED TO HIS FEET."
+
+"'SAVE HIM, JUAN, SAVE HIM!'"
+
+"HE GLANCED CONTEMPTUOUSLY AT THE GIGANTIC SORILLO."
+
+"'A SOLDIER FROM AYACUCHO!  HERE IS ONE OF OUR BRAVE
+  DELIVERERS!'"
+
+
+
+
+AT THE POINT OF THE SWORD.
+
+
+CHAPTER I.
+
+A BIRTHDAY EVE.
+
+In spite of my English name--Jack Crawford--and my English blood, I
+have never set foot on that famous little island in the North Sea, and
+now it is quite unlikely that I ever shall do so.
+
+I was born in Peru, on the outskirts of beautiful Lima, where, until
+the year 1819, on the very eve of my fourteenth birthday, the days of
+my childhood were passed.
+
+I expect you know that in ancient days Peru was called the "Land of the
+Sun," because the sun was worshipped by the natives.  Their great city
+was Cuzco, built, it is said, in 1043 A.D., by Manco Capac, the first
+of the Incas, or Emperors of Peru.
+
+The natives believed Manco to be a child of the sun; but I have heard
+an old story that his father was a shipwrecked Englishman, who married
+the daughter of a Peruvian chief.  I do not think this tale correct,
+but it is full of interest.
+
+Most of the Incas ruled very wisely, and the remains of palaces,
+temples, and aqueducts show that the people were highly civilized; but
+in 1534 the Spaniards, under Pizarro, invaded the country, and swept
+away the glorious empire of the Incas.
+
+After that Peru became a part of Spanish America, and Pizarro founded
+the city of Lima, which he made the capital.
+
+My father, who settled in the country when quite a young man, married a
+Peruvian lady of wealthy and influential family.  The estate near Lima
+formed part of her marriage portion, and a beautiful place it was, with
+a fine park, and a lake which served me both for boating and bathing.
+I had several friends, chiefly Spaniards, but two English boys, whose
+fathers were merchants in Callao, often visited me, and many a pleasant
+game we had together.
+
+At this time Peru was a Spanish colony, but some people, among whom was
+my father, wanted to make it an independent country, having its own
+ruler.  Being still a boy, I did not hear much of these things, though,
+from certain talk, I understood that the country was in a most
+unsettled state, and that the Spanish governor had thrown many good men
+into prison for urging the people to free themselves.
+
+One evening, in March 1819, I was busy in my workshop painting a small
+boat.  My father had been absent for nearly a week, but he had promised
+to return for my birthday, and every moment I expected to see him
+crossing the courtyard.
+
+Presently, hearing old Antonio unfasten the wicket-gate, I put down my
+brush, wiped my hands, and ran out joyously.
+
+The happy welcome died on my lips.  It was not my father who had
+entered, but Rosa Montilla, the young daughter of a famous Spanish
+officer.  She was nearly a year younger than myself, and a frequent
+visitor at our house.  Often we had gone together for a row on the
+lake, or for a gallop on our ponies round the park.
+
+She was very pretty, with deep blue eyes and fair hair, quite unlike
+most Spanish girls, and generally full of fun and good spirits.  Now,
+however, she was very pale and looked frightened.  I noticed, too, that
+she had no covering on her head or shoulders, and that she had not
+changed the thin slippers worn in the house.
+
+These things made me curious and uneasy.  I feared some evil had
+befallen her father, and knew not how to act.  On seeing me she made a
+little run forward, and, bursting into tears, cried, "O Juan, Juan!"
+using, as also did my mother, the Spanish form of my name.
+
+Now, being only a boy, and being brought up for the most part among
+boys, I was but a clumsy comforter, though I would have done anything
+to lessen her grief.
+
+"What is it, Rosa?" I asked; "what has happened?"  But for answer she
+could only wring her hands and cry, "O Juan, Juan!"
+
+"Do not cry, Rosa!" I said, and then doing what I should have done in
+the first place, led her toward the drawing-room, where my mother was.
+"Mother will comfort you.  Tell her all about it," I said confidently,
+for it was to my mother I always turned when things went wrong.
+
+On this her tears fell faster, but she came with me, and together we
+entered the room.
+
+"Juan!" cried my mother.--"Rosa! what is the matter?  Why are you
+crying?  But come to me, darling;" and in another moment she was
+pressing the girl to her bosom.
+
+At a sign from her I left the room, but did not go far away.  Rosa's
+action was so odd that I waited with impatience to hear the reason.
+She must have left her home hurriedly and unobserved, since it was an
+unheard-of thing that the daughter of Don Felipe Montilla should be out
+on foot and unattended.  I was sure that should her father discover it
+he would be greatly annoyed.  The whole affair was so mysterious that I
+could make nothing of it.  The girl's sobs were more under control now,
+and she began to speak.  As she might not wish me to hear her story, I
+walked away, meaning to chat with Antonio at the gate, and to await my
+father's return.
+
+He might not come for hours yet, as it was still early evening, but I
+hoped he would, and the more so now on Rosa's account.  She might need
+help which I was not old enough to give; while, as it chanced, Joseph
+Craig, my father's trusty English servant, had gone that afternoon into
+Callao.  However, he also might be back at any moment now, and would
+not, in any case, be late.
+
+Half an hour had perhaps passed, and I was turning from the gate, when
+two horsemen dashed up at full speed.  One was Joseph Craig, or Jose as
+the Spaniards called him, and my feeling of uneasiness returned as I
+noticed that his face, too, wore a strange and startled look.
+
+Jose, as I have said, was my father's servant; but we all regarded him
+more as a friend, and treated him as one of ourselves.  He was a
+well-built man of medium height, with good features and keen gray eyes.
+He spoke English and Spanish fluently, and could make himself
+understood in several Indian dialects.  He kept the accounts of the
+estate, and might easily have obtained a more lucrative situation in
+any counting-house in Callao.  He excelled, too, in outdoor sports, and
+had taught me to fence, to shoot, and to ride straight.
+
+The second man I did not know.  He seemed to be an Indian of the
+mountains, and was of gigantic stature.  His dress was altogether
+different from that of the Spaniards, and in his cap he wore a plume of
+feathers.  His face was scarred by more than one sword-cut, his brows
+were lowering, and his massive jaw told of great animal strength.
+Jose's horse had galloped fast, but the one ridden by the stranger was
+flaked with foam.
+
+Antonio would have opened the big gate without question: but I,
+thinking of Rosa, forbade him, saying to Jose in English, "Does he mean
+harm to the girl?"
+
+You see, my head was full of the one idea, and I could think of nothing
+else.  I imagined that Rosa had run away from some peril, and that this
+man with the savage face and cruel eyes had tracked her to our gate.
+So I put the question to Jose, who looked at me wonderingly.
+
+"The girl?" he repeated slowly; "what girl?"
+
+"Rosa Montilla," I answered.
+
+We spoke in English; but at the mention of Rosa's name the mountaineer
+scowled savagely, and leaned forward as if to take part in the
+conversation.
+
+"The man has come from the mountains with a message for your mother,"
+said Jose; "I met him at the entrance to the park.  But if Rosa
+Montilla is here, the news is known already."
+
+His face was very pale, and he spoke haltingly, as if his words were
+burdensome, and there was a look in his eyes which I had never seen
+before.
+
+I motioned to Antonio, and the two passed through.  What message did
+they bring?  What news could link dainty little Rosa with this wild
+outlaw of the hills?
+
+Jose jumped to the ground and walked with me, laying a hand on my
+shoulder.  Until then I had no thought of the truth, but the touch of
+his fingers sent a shiver of fear through me, and I looked at his face
+in alarm.
+
+"What is it, Jose?" I asked; "what has happened?  Why did Rosa steal
+here alone and sob in my mother's arms as if her heart would break?"
+
+"The little maid has heard bad news," he answered quietly, "though how
+I do not know."
+
+"And as she had no mother, she came to mine for comfort," I said.  "It
+was a happy thought: mother will make her forget her trouble."
+
+Jose stopped, and looked searchingly in my face.
+
+"Poor boy!" he said.  "You have no idea of the truth, and how can I
+tell you?  The little maid did not weep for her own sorrow, but for
+yours and your mother's."
+
+At that I understood without further words, though I was to learn more
+soon.  The reason of it I guessed, though not the matter; but I knew
+that somewhere my dear father lay dead--killed by order of the Spanish
+viceroy.
+
+Jose saw from my face that I knew, and there was sympathy in the very
+touch of his hand.
+
+"It is true," he whispered.  "The Spaniards trapped him in the
+mountains, whither he had gone to meet the Indians.  They wished to
+rise against the government; but he knew it was madness just now, and
+thought to keep them quiet till his own plans were ready."
+
+"And the Spaniards slew him?"
+
+"Yes," replied Jose simply.  "Here," pointing to the mountaineer, "is
+our witness."
+
+"But how did Rosa hear of it? she was not in the mountains.  Ah, I
+forgot!  Her father stands high in the viceroy's favour.  And so my
+father is dead!"
+
+The thought unnerved me, and I could have cried aloud in my sorrow.
+
+"Hold up your head, boy!" exclaimed the harsh voice of the mountaineer.
+"Tears are for women and girls.  Years ago my father's head was cut
+off, but I did not cry.  I took my gun and went to the mountains," and
+he finished with a bitter laugh.
+
+"But my mother!" I said.  "The news will break her heart."
+
+"The world will not know it," he answered, and he spoke truly.
+
+"I am glad the little maid has told her," remarked Jose, giving his
+horse and that of the stranger to a serving-man.  "Jack, do you go in
+and prepare her for our coming."
+
+A single glance showed that Rosa had indeed told her story.  She sat on
+a lounge, looking very miserable.  My mother rose and came toward me.
+Taking my hands, she clasped them in her own.  She was a very beautiful
+woman, famous for her beauty even among the ladies of Lima.  She was
+tall and slightly built, with black hair and glorious dark eyes that
+shone like stars.  I have heard that at one time she was called the
+"Lady of the Stars," and I am not surprised.  They shone now, but all
+gentleness had gone from them, and was replaced by a hard, fierce
+glitter which half frightened me.  Her cheeks were white, and her lips
+bloodless; but as far as could be seen, she had not shed a tear.
+
+Still holding my hands, and looking into my face, she said, "You have
+heard the news, Juan?  You know that your father lies dead on the
+mountains, slain while carrying a message of peace to the fierce men
+who live there?"
+
+I bowed my head, but could utter no sound save the anguished cry of
+"Mother, mother!"
+
+"Hush!" she exclaimed; "it is no time for tears now.  I shall weep
+later in my own room, but not before the world, Juan.  Our grief is our
+own, my son, not the country's.  And there is little Rosa, brave little
+Rosa, who came to bring me the news; she must go back.  Let Miguel
+bring round the carriage, and see that half a dozen of the men ride in
+attendance.  Don Felipe's daughter must have an escort befitting her
+father's rank."
+
+I began to speak of the strange visitor outside; but Rosa was her first
+care, and she would see no one until Rosa had been attended to.  So I
+hurried Miguel, the coachman, and the men who were to ride on either
+side of the carriage, returning to the room only when all was ready.
+
+Mother had wrapped Rosa up warmly, and now, kissing her, she said,
+"Good-bye, my child.  You were very good to think of me, and I shall
+not forget.  Tell your father the truth; he will not mind now."
+
+Rosa kissed my mother in reply, and walked unsteadily to the coach.
+She was still sobbing, and the sight of her white face added to my
+misery.
+
+"Don't cry, Rosa," said I, as I helped her into the carriage and wished
+her good-bye, neither of us having any idea of the strange events which
+would happen before we met again.
+
+As soon as the carriage had gone, my mother directed that the stranger
+should be admitted, and he came in accompanied by Jose.  I would have
+left the room, but my mother stopped me, saying,--
+
+"No, Juan; your place is here.  An hour ago you were but a thoughtless
+boy; now you must learn to be a man.--Senor, you have brought news?
+You have come to announce the death of my husband; is it not so?"
+
+The mountaineer bowed almost to the ground.
+
+"It is a sad story, senora, but it will not take long to tell.  The
+Spaniards pretended he was stirring up our people to revolt; they
+waited for him in the passes, and shot him down like a dog."
+
+"Did you see him fall?"
+
+The fellow's eyes flashed with savage rage.  "Had I been there," he
+cried, "not a soldier of them all would have returned to his quarters!
+But they shall yet pay for it, senora.  My people are mad to rise.
+Only say the word, and send the son of the dead man to ride at their
+head, and Lima shall be in flames to-morrow."
+
+My mother made a gesture of dissent.
+
+"Don Eduardo liked not cruelty," she exclaimed; "and it would be but a
+poor revenge to slay the innocent.  But Juan shall take his father's
+place, and work for his country's freedom.  When the time comes to
+strike he shall be ready."
+
+"Before the time comes he will have disappeared," cried the
+mountaineer, with a harsh laugh.  "Do you think Don Eduardo's son will
+be allowed to live?  Accidents, senora, are common in Peru!"
+
+"It is true," remarked Jose; "Juan will never be out of danger."
+
+"But the country is not ready for revolt, and only harm can come from a
+rising now.  Should the Indians leave their mountain homes, the trained
+soldiers will annihilate them."
+
+"But Juan must be saved!"
+
+"Yes," assented my mother; "we must save Juan to take his father's
+place."
+
+After this there was silence for a time.  Then Jose spoke, "There is
+one way," said he slowly.  "He can find a refuge in Chili till San
+Martin is ready; but he must go at once."
+
+A spasm of fresh pain shot across my mother's face, but it disappeared
+instantly; even with this added grief she would not let people know how
+she suffered.  Only as her hand rested on mine I felt it tremble.
+
+"Let it be so, Jose," she said simply.  "I leave it to you."
+
+Then she thanked the mountaineer who had ridden so far to break the
+terrible news to her, and the two men went away, leaving us two
+together.
+
+"Mother," I said, "must I really leave you?"
+
+For answer she clasped me in her arms and kissed my face passionately.
+
+"But you will come back, my boy!" she cried; "you will come back.  Now
+that your father is no more, you are my only hope, the only joy of my
+life.  O Juan, Juan! it is hard to let you go; but Jose is right--there
+is no other way.  I will be brave, dear, and wait patiently for your
+return.  Follow in your father's footsteps.  Do the right, and fear not
+whatever may happen; be brave and gentle, and filled with love for your
+country, even as he was.  Keep his memory green in your heart, and you
+cannot stray from the path of honour."
+
+"I will try, mother."
+
+"And if--if we never meet again, my boy, I will try to be brave too."
+
+She wiped away the tears which veiled like a mist the brilliance of her
+starry eyes, and we sat quietly in the darkening room, while outside
+Jose was making preparations for our immediate departure.
+
+At last he knocked at the door, and without a tremor in her voice she
+bade him enter.
+
+"The horses are saddled, senora."
+
+"Yes; and your plan, what is it?" she asked.
+
+"It is very simple, senora.  Juan and I will ride straight to Mr.
+Warren at Callao.  He may have a vessel bound for Valparaiso; if not,
+he will find us one for my master's sake.  Once at sea, we shall be out
+of danger.  General San Martin will give us welcome, and there are many
+Peruvians in his army."
+
+Once my mother's wonderful nerve nearly failed her.  "You will take
+care of him, Jose," she said brokenly.
+
+"I will guard him with my life, senora!"
+
+"I know it, I am sure of it; and some day yon will bring him back to
+me.  God will reward you, Jose.--Good-bye, Juan, my boy.  Oh how
+reluctant I am to let you go!"
+
+I will not dwell on the sadness of that parting.  The horses were
+waiting in the courtyard, and after the last fond embrace I mounted.
+
+"Good-bye, mother!"
+
+"Farewell, my boy.  God keep you!" and as we moved away I saw her white
+handkerchief fluttering through the gloom.
+
+At the gate the Indian waited for us, and he followed a few paces in
+the rear.
+
+I thought this strange, and asked Jose about it.
+
+"It may be well to have a friend to guard our backs," he replied.
+
+So in the gathering darkness I stole away from my home, with my heart
+sore for my father's death and my mother's suffering.  And it was the
+eve of my birthday--the eve of the day to which I had looked forward
+with such delight!
+
+Being so young, I did not really understand the peril that surrounded
+me; but my faith in Jose was strong, and I felt confident that in
+taking me away he was acting for the best.
+
+Our path through the park led us near the lake, and I glanced
+sorrowfully at its calm waters and fern-fringed border.  I would have
+liked to linger a moment at its margin, dwelling on past joys; but Jose
+hurried me on, remarking there was no time to waste.
+
+Only, as the great gates swung open, he let me stop, so that I might
+bid a silent adieu to the beautiful home where my happy days of
+childhood had been passed.
+
+"Keep a brave heart," said he kindly; "we shall be back some day.  And
+now for a word of advice.  Ride carefully and keep your eyes open.  I
+don't want to frighten you, but the sooner we're clear of Lima the
+better I shall be pleased."
+
+With that he put spurs to his horse, and with the clanging of the gate
+in our ears we rode off on the road to Callao, while the gigantic
+Indian followed about twenty paces behind.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II.
+
+AN EXCITING VOYAGE.
+
+It may be that Jose's fears on my account had exaggerated the danger,
+as we reached Callao without interruption, and dismounted outside Mr.
+Warren's villa.  Here the Indian took leave of us, but before going he
+unfastened a silver key from the chain round his neck, and pressed it
+into my hand.
+
+"It may happen," said he, "that at some time or other you will need
+help.  That key and the name of Raymon Sorillo will obtain it for you
+from every patriot in the mountains of Peru.  For the present,
+farewell.  When you return from Chili we shall meet again."
+
+Without waiting for my thanks he bade adieu to Jose and then, spurring
+his horse into a gallop, he disappeared.
+
+From the man who opened the gate in answer to our summons we learned
+that my father's friend was at home, and leaving our horses, we went
+immediately into the house.  This English merchant had often been our
+guest, and it was soon abundantly evident that we had done right in
+trusting him.  He was a short, round-faced man, with a florid
+complexion, twinkling eyes, and sandy hair.  He was very restless and
+irritable, and had a queer habit of twiddling his thumbs backward and
+forward whenever his hands were unoccupied.
+
+"How do, Joseph?" exclaimed he, jumping up.  "Come to take that berth I
+offered you?  No?  Well, well, what a fool a man can be if he tries!
+Why, bless me, this is young Jack Crawford!  Eight miles from home, and
+at this time of night too!  Anything the matter?  Get it out, Joseph,
+and don't waste time."
+
+While Joseph was explaining the circumstances, the choleric little man
+danced about the room, exclaiming at intervals, "Ted Crawford gone?
+Dear, dear!  Not a better fellow in South America!  I'd shoot 'em all
+or string 'em up!  The country's going to the dogs, and a man isn't
+safe in his own house!  Eh?  What?  Hurt the boy?  What's the boy to do
+with it?  They can't punish him if his father had been fifty times a
+rebel!"
+
+"That is so, sir," remarked Jose; "but he might meet with an
+unfortunate accident, or vanish mysteriously, or something of that
+kind.  What's the use of making believe?  Those who have got rid of the
+father won't spare the son, should he happen to stand in their way."
+
+"Which he will," interrupted Mr. Warren.  "My poor friend was hand in
+glove with the Indians, and they'll rally round the boy."
+
+"There are other things, too, which need not be gone into now,
+however," said Jose; "but the long and the short of it is that Jack
+must be got out of the way at present."
+
+"And his mother?"
+
+"She has sent him to you."
+
+"But he can't be hidden here.  The rascally Dons will have him in the
+casemates before one can say 'Jack Robinson!'"
+
+"We don't mean to stay here, sir," replied Jose.  "Our idea is to go to
+Valparaiso, and we thought if you had a ship--"
+
+"The very thing, Joseph," and the thumbs went backward and forward
+taster than ever.  "Maxwell has a schooner leaving in the morning.  You
+can go on board to-night if you choose, but you had better have some
+supper first."
+
+As it happened, both Jose and I had been some time without food, so we
+were glad to have something to eat; after which Mr. Warren took us to
+the quay, where the schooner _Aguila_ lay moored.
+
+"There she is," he remarked; "let us go aboard.  Most likely we shall
+find Maxwell there.--Hi, you fellows, show a light!--Lazy dogs, aren't
+they?  Mind your foot there, and don't tumble into the harbour; you
+won't get to Valparaiso that way.--That you, Maxwell?  I have brought a
+couple of friends who are so charmed with your boat that they want to
+make a trip in her.  Where do you keep your cabin?  Let's go down
+there; we can't talk on deck."
+
+Mr. Maxwell was another English merchant at Callao, and as soon as he
+heard what had happened, he readily agreed to give us a passage in the
+_Aguila_.  We must be prepared to rough it, he said.  The schooner had
+no accommodation for passengers, but she was a sound boat, and the
+Chilian skipper was a trustworthy sailor.  Then he sent to his
+warehouse for some extra provisions, and afterwards introduced us to
+the captain, whose name was Montevo.
+
+As the schooner was to sail at daylight, our friends remained with us,
+and, sitting in the dingy cabin, chatted with Jose about the state of
+the country.  By listening to the talk I learned that General San
+Martin was a great soldier from Buenos Ayres, who, having overthrown
+the Spanish power in Chili, was collecting an army with which to drive
+the Spanish rulers from Peru.  At the same time another leader, General
+Bolivar, was freeing the northern provinces, and it was thought that
+the two generals, joining their forces, would sweep Peru from north to
+south.
+
+"And a good thing, too!" exclaimed Mr. Warren.  "Perhaps we shall have
+a little peace then!"
+
+"Pooh! stuff!" said his friend; "things will be worse than ever!  These
+people can't rule themselves.  They're like disorderly schoolboys, and
+need a firm master who knows how to use the birch.  I am all for a
+stern master."
+
+"So am I," agreed Jose, "if he's just, which the Spaniards aren't."
+
+"That is so," cried Mr. Warren.  "What would our property be worth if
+it wasn't for the British frigate lying in the harbour?  Tell me that,
+Maxwell; tell me that, sir!  They'd confiscate the whole lot, and clap
+us into prison for being paupers," and the thumbs revolved like the
+sails of a windmill.
+
+So the talk continued until daybreak, when the skipper, knocking at the
+cabin door, informed us that the schooner was ready to sail; so we all
+went on deck, where the kindly merchants bade us good-bye, and hoped we
+should have a pleasant voyage.
+
+"Keep the youngster out of mischief, Joseph.  There's plenty of food
+for powder without using him," were Mr. Warren's last words as he
+stepped ashore, followed by his friend.
+
+It was the first time I had been on board a ship, and I knew absolutely
+nothing of what the sailors were doing; but presently the boat began to
+move, the merchants, waving their hands, shouted a last good-bye, and
+very quickly we passed to the outer harbour.
+
+I have been in many dangers and suffered numerous hardships since then,
+some of which are narrated in this book, but I have never felt quite so
+wretched and miserable as on the morning of our departure from Callao.
+
+Wishing to divert my thoughts, Jose pointed out the beauties of the bay
+and the shore; but my gaze went far inland--to the lonely home where my
+mother sat with her grief, to the mighty cordillera where my father lay
+dead.  Time softened the pain, and brought back the pleasures of life,
+but just then it seemed as if I should never laugh or sing or be merry
+again.
+
+The first day or two on the _Aguila_ did not tend to make me more
+cheerful, though the skipper did what he could to make us comfortable.
+We slept in a dirty little box, which was really the mate's cabin, and
+had our meals, or at least Jose had, at the captain's table.
+
+By degrees, however, my sickness wore off, and on the fourth morning I
+began to take an interest in things.  By this time the land was out of
+sight; for miles and miles the blue water lay around us--an
+interminable stretch.  There was not a sail to be seen, and the utter
+loneliness impressed me with a feeling of awe.
+
+Jose was as ignorant of seafaring matters as myself; but the captain
+said we were making a good voyage, and with that we were content.  A
+stiff breeze blew the schooner along merrily, the blue sky was flecked
+only by the softest white clouds, and the swish, swish of the water
+against the vessel's sides sounded pleasantly in our ears.  I began to
+think there were worse ways of earning a living than by going to sea.
+
+That same evening I turned in early, leaving Jose on deck, but I was
+still awake when he entered the cabin.
+
+"There's an ugly storm brewing," said he, kicking off his boots, "and I
+don't think the skipper much likes the prospect of it.  He has all
+hands at work taking in the sails and getting things ready generally.
+Rather a lucky thing for us that the _Aguila_ is a stout boat.  Listen!
+That's the first blast!" as the schooner staggered and reeled.
+
+Above us we heard the captain shouting orders, the answering cries of
+the sailors, and the groaning of the timbers, as if the ship were a
+living being stretched on a rack.  Slipping out of my bunk and dressing
+quickly, I held on to a bar to steady myself.
+
+"Let us go on deck before they batten down the hatches," said Jose,
+putting on his boots again.  "I've no mind to stay in this hole.  If
+the ship sinks, we shall be drowned like rats in a trap."
+
+He climbed the steps, and I followed, shuddering at the picture his
+words had conjured up.  The scene was grand, but wild and awful in the
+extreme.  I hardly dared to watch the great waves thundering along as
+if seeking to devour our tiny craft.  Now the schooner hung poised for
+a moment on the edge of a mountainous wave; the next instant it seemed
+to be dashing headlong into a fathomless, black abyss.  The wind tore
+on with a fierce shriek, and we scudded before it under bare poles,
+flying for life.
+
+Two men were at the wheel; the captain, lashed aft, was yelling out
+orders which no one could understand, or, understanding, obey.  The
+night, as yet, was not particularly dark, and I shivered at sight of
+the white, scared faces of the crew.  They could do nothing more; in
+the face of such a gale they were helpless as babies; those at the
+wheel kept the ship's head straight by great effort, but beyond that,
+everything was unavailing.  Our fate was in the hands of God; He alone
+could determine whether it should be life or death.
+
+Once, above the fury of the storm, the howling of the wind, the
+straining of the timber, there rose an awful shriek; and though the
+tragedy was hidden from my sight, I knew it to be the cry of an unhappy
+sailor in his death-agony.  A huge wave, leaping like some ravenous
+animal to the deck, had caught him and was gone; while the spirit of
+the wind laughed in demoniacal glee as he was tossed from crest to
+crest, the sport of the cruel billows.
+
+The captain had seen, but was powerless to help.  The schooner was but
+the plaything of the waves, while to launch a boat--ah, how the
+storm-fiends would have laughed at the attempt!  So leaving the hapless
+sailor to his fate, we drove on through a blinding wall of rain into
+the dark night, waiting for the end.  No sky was visible, nor the light
+of any star, but the great cloud walls stood up thick on every side,
+and it seemed as if the boat were plunging through a dark and dreary
+tunnel.
+
+Close to me, where a lantern not yet douted [Transcriber's note:
+doused?] cast its fitful light, a man lay grovelling on the deck.  He
+was praying aloud in an agony of fear, but no sound could be heard from
+his moving lips.  Suddenly there came a crash as of a falling body, the
+light went out, and I saw the man no more.  How long the night lasted I
+cannot tell; to me it seemed an age, and no second of it was free from
+fear.  Whether we were driving north, south, east, or west no one knew,
+while the fury of the storm would have drowned the thunder of waves on
+a surf-beaten shore.  But the _Aguila_ was an English boat, built by
+honest English workmen, and her planks held firmly together despite the
+raging storm.
+
+For long hours, as I have said, we were swallowed up in darkness,
+feeling ourselves in the presence of death; but the light broke through
+at last, a cold gray light, and cheerless withal, which exactly suited
+our unhappy condition.  The wind, too, as though satisfied with its
+night's work, sank to rest, while by degrees the tossing of the angry
+billows subsided into a peaceful ripple.
+
+We looked at each other and at the schooner.  One man had been washed
+overboard; another, struck by a falling spar, still lay insensible; the
+rest were weary and exhausted.  Thanks to the skipper's foresight, the
+_Aguila_ had suffered less than we had expected, and he exclaimed
+cheerfully that the damage could soon be repaired.  But though our good
+ship remained sound, the storm had wrought a fearful calamity, which
+dazed the bravest, and blanched every face among us.
+
+The skipper brought the news when he joined us at breakfast, and his
+lips could scarcely frame the words.
+
+"The water-casks are stove in," he exclaimed, "and we have hardly a
+gallon of fresh water aboard!"
+
+"Then we must run for the nearest port," said Jose, trying to speak
+cheerily.
+
+The captain spread out his hands dramatically.
+
+"There is no port," he replied, in something of a hopeless tone, "and
+there is no wind.  The schooner lies like a log on the water."
+
+We went on deck, forgetting past dangers in the more terrifying one
+before us.  The captain had spoken truly: not a breath of air stirred,
+and the sea lay beneath us like a sheet of glass.  The dark clouds had
+rolled away, and though the sun was not visible, the thin haze between
+us and the sky was tinged blood-red.  It was such a sight as no man on
+board had seen, and the sailors gazed at it in awestruck silence.
+
+Hour after hour through the livelong day the _Aguila_ lay motionless,
+as if held by some invisible cable.  No ripple broke the glassy
+surface, no breath of wind fanned the idle sails, and the air we
+breathed was hot and stifling, as if proceeding from a furnace.
+
+The men lounged about listlessly, unable to forget their distress even
+in sleep.  The captain scanned the horizon eagerly, looking in vain for
+the tiniest cloud that might promise a break-up of the hideous weather.
+Jose and I lay under an awning, though this was no protection from the
+stifling atmosphere.
+
+Every one hoped that evening would bring relief, that a breeze might
+spring up, or that we might have a downpour of rain.  Evening came, but
+the situation was unchanged, and a great fear entered our hearts.  How
+long could we live like this--how long before death would release us
+from our misery? for misery it was now in downright, cruel earnest.
+
+Once Jose rose and walked to the vessel's side, but, returning shortly,
+lay face downward on the deck.
+
+"I must shut out the sight of the sea," he said, "or I shall go mad.
+What an awful thing to perish of thirst with water everywhere around
+us!"
+
+This was our second night of horror, but very different in its nature
+from the first.  Then, for long hours, we went in fear of the storm;
+now, we would have welcomed the most terrible tempest that ever blew,
+if only it brought us rain.
+
+Very slowly the night crept by, and again we were confronted by the
+gray haze, with its curious blood-red tint.  We could not escape from
+the vessel, as our boats had been smashed in the hurricane; we could
+only wait for what might happen in this sea of the dead.
+
+"Rain or death, it is one or the other!" remarked Jose, as, rising to
+our feet, we staggered across to the skipper.
+
+Rain or death!  Which would come first, I wondered.
+
+The captain could do nothing, though I must say he played his part like
+a man--encouraging the crew, foretelling a storm which should rise
+later in the day, and asserting that we were right in the track of
+ships.  We had only to hold on patiently, he said, and all would come
+right.
+
+Jose also spoke to the me cheerfully, trying to keep alive a glimmer of
+hope; but as the morning hours dragged wearily along, they were fain to
+give way to utter despair.  No ships could reach us, they said, while
+the calm lasted, and not the slightest sign of change could be seen.
+Our throats were parched, our lips cracked, our eyes bloodshot and
+staring.  One of the crew, a plump, chubby, round-faced man, began
+talking aloud in a rambling manner, and presently, with a scream of
+excitement, he sprang into the rigging.
+
+"Sail ho!" he cried, "sail ho!" and forgetting our weakness, we all
+jumped up to peer eagerly through the gauzy mist.
+
+"Where away?" exclaimed the captain.
+
+The sailor laughed in glee.  "Oho!  Here she comes!" cried he; "here
+she comes!" and, tearing off his shirt, waved it frantically.
+
+The action was so natural, the man seemed so much in earnest, that we
+hung over the schooner's side, anxiously scanning the horizon for our
+rescuer.  Again the fellow shouted, "Here she comes!" and then, with a
+frenzied laugh, flung himself into the glassy sea.
+
+A groan of despair burst from the crew, and for several seconds no one
+moved.  Then Jose, crying, "Throw me a rope!" jumped overboard, and
+swam to the spot where the man had gone down.
+
+"Come back!" cried the skipper hoarsely; "you will be drowned!  The
+poor fellow has lost his senses."  But Jose, unheeding the warning,
+clutched the man as he came to the surface a second time.
+
+We heard the demented laugh of the drowning sailor, and then the two
+disappeared--down, down into the depths together.
+
+"He has thrown his life away for a madman!" said the captain, and his
+words brought me to my senses.
+
+With a prayer in my heart I leaped into the sea, hoping that I might
+yet save the brave fellow.
+
+A cry from the schooner told me that he had reappeared, and soon I saw
+him alone, and well-nigh exhausted.  A dozen strokes took me to his
+side, and then, half supporting him, I turned toward the vessel.  The
+men flung us a rope, and willing hands hauled first Jose and then me
+aboard.
+
+"A brave act," said the skipper gruffly, "but foolhardy!"
+
+Jose smiled, and, still leaning on me, went below to the cabin, where,
+removing our wet things, we had a good rub down.
+
+"Thanks, my boy!" said Jose, "but for your help I doubt if I could have
+got back.  The poor beggar nearly throttled me, down under!" and I
+noticed on his throat the marks of fingers that must have pressed him
+like a vice.
+
+"Do you feel it now?" I asked.
+
+"Only here," touching his throat; "but for that, I should be all the
+better for the dip.  Let us go on deck again; I am stifling here.  And
+keep up your spirits, Jack.  Don't give way the least bit, or it will
+be all over with you.  We are in a fearful plight, but help may yet
+come."  And I promised him solemnly that I would do my best.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II.
+
+THE END OF THE "AGUILA."
+
+The drowning of the crazy sailor had a bad effect on the rest of the
+crew, and it became evident that they had abandoned all hope.  They
+hung about so listlessly that even the captain could not rouse them,
+and indeed there was nothing they could do.
+
+This utter inability to help ourselves was the worst evil of the case.
+Even I, though only a boy, wanted to do something, no matter what, if
+it would help in the struggle for life; but I, like the rest, could
+only wait--wait with throat like a furnace, peeling lips, smarting
+eyes, and aching head, till death or rain put an end to the misery.
+
+I tried not to think of it, tried to shut out the horrible end so close
+at hand; but in vain.  Jose sat beside me, endeavouring to rouse me.
+It must rain, he said, or the wind would spring up, and we should meet
+with a ship; but in his heart I think he had no hope.
+
+The day crawled on, afternoon came, and I fell into a troubled sleep.
+The pain of my throat directed my wandering thoughts perhaps, and
+conjured up horrible visions.  I was lashed to the wheel of the
+_Aguila_, and the schooner went drifting, drifting far away into an
+unknown sea.  All was still around me, though I was not alone.  Sailors
+walked the deck or huddled in the forecastle--sailors with skin of
+wrinkled parchment, with deep-set, burning yet unseeing eyes, with
+moving lips from which no sound came; and as we sailed away ever
+further and further into the darkness, the horror of it maddened me.  I
+struggled desperately to free myself, calling aloud to Jose to save me.
+Then a hand was laid softly on my forehead, and a kind, familiar voice
+whispered,--
+
+"Jack!  Jack!  Wake up.  You are dreaming!"  Opening my eyes I saw Jose
+bending over me, his face stricken with fear.  My head burned, but my
+face and limbs were wet as if I had just come from the sea.  "Get up,"
+said Jose sharply, "and walk about with me.  You must not dream again."
+
+It seems that in my sleep I had screamed aloud; but the sailors took no
+notice of me either then or afterwards.  They had troubles enough of
+their own, and were totally indifferent to those of others.
+
+The red tinge had now gone from the haze, leaving it cold and gray; the
+sea was dull and lifeless, no ripple breaking the stillness of its
+surface.
+
+"Is there any hope, Jose?" I asked in a whisper, and from his face,
+though not from his speech, learned there was none.
+
+The captain had stored two bottles of liquor in the cabin for his own
+use.  These he shared amongst us; but it was fiery stuff, and even at
+the first increased rather than allayed our thirst.  Most of the crew
+were lying down now; but one had climbed to the roof of the forecastle,
+and stood there singing in a weak, quavering voice.  Jose spoke to him
+soothingly; but he only laughed, and continued his weird song.  His
+face haunted me; even when darkness closed like a pall around us I
+could still see it.  He sang on and on in the gloom, and it appeared to
+me that he was wailing our death-chant.  Presently there was silence,
+followed by a slight shuffling sound as the man moved to another part
+of the deck; then the song began again, and was followed by a burst of
+uncanny laughter.  Suddenly it seemed as if the poor fellow realized
+his position, as he broke into a sob and called on God to save him.
+
+Making our way to the other side of the vessel, we found him sitting
+disconsolately on a coil of rope, and did our best to cheer him.  The
+skipper joined us, but no other man stirred hand or foot.  Apparently
+their terrible suffering had overpowered all feeling of sympathy.
+
+"Don't give way," said Jose brightly, laying a hand on his shoulder;
+"bear up, there's a good fellow.  Rain may fall at any moment now, and
+then we shall be saved."
+
+"Ah, senor," cried the poor fellow huskily, "my throat is parched,
+parched; my head is like a burning coal! but I will be quiet now and
+brave--if I can."
+
+"This is terrible," exclaimed the captain piteously, as after a time we
+turned away.
+
+"Hope must be our sheet-anchor," said Jose.  "Once cut ourselves adrift
+from that, and we shall go to ruin headlong."
+
+He spoke bravely, but his words came from the lips only, and this we
+all knew.  Sitting down on a coil of rope, we waited for the night to
+pass, longing for yet dreading the appearance of another dawn.  It was
+dreadfully silent, except when some poor fellow broke the stillness
+with his groans and cries of anguish.
+
+It was, as nearly as I could judge, about one o'clock in the morning,
+when Jose suddenly sprang to his feet with a cry of joy.
+
+"What is it?" I asked; and he, clapping his hands, exclaimed,--
+
+"Lightning!  See, there is another flash.--Get up, my hearties; the
+wind's rising.  There's a beautiful clap of thunder.  We shall have a
+fine storm presently!"
+
+One by one the men staggered to their feet.  They heard the crash of
+the thunder, and a broad sheet of lightning showed them banks of cloud
+gathering thick and black overhead.  Directed by the captain and helped
+by Jose, they spread every sail and awning that could be used,
+collected buckets and a spare cask, and awaited the rain eagerly and
+expectantly.  Would it come?  Fiery snakes played about the tops of the
+masts or leaped from sky to sea; the thunder pealed and pealed again
+through the air; the wind rose, the sails filled, the schooner moved
+through the water, but no rain fell.
+
+I cannot tell you a tithe of the hopes and fears which passed through
+our hearts during the next half-hour.  Now we exulted in the certainty
+of relief; again we were thrown into the abyss of despair.  We stood
+looking at the darkness, hoping, praying that the life-giving rain
+might fall speedily upon our upturned faces.
+
+Another terrific crash, and then--ah, how earnestly we gave thanks to
+God for His mercy--the raindrops came pattering to the deck, lightly at
+first, lightly and softly, like scouts sent forward to spy out the
+land, and afterwards the main body in a crowd beating fiercely, heavily
+upon us.  How we laughed as, making cups of our hands, we lapped the
+welcome water greedily!  What cries of delight ascended heavenward as
+we filled our spare cask and every vessel that would hold water!  The
+rain came down in a steady torrent, soaking us through; but we felt no
+discomfort, for it fed us with new life.
+
+Presently the captain got some of the men to work, while the others ate
+the food which had lain all day untasted, and then, doubly refreshed,
+they relieved their comrades.  Jose and I, too, ate sparingly of some
+food; but even this little, with the water, made new beings of us.
+
+As yet the wind was no more than a fair breeze, but by degrees it
+became boisterous, and the crew, still weak and now short of three men,
+could barely manage the schooner.  Jose and I knew nothing of
+seamanship, but we bore a hand here and there, straining at this rope
+or that as we were bidden, and encouraging the crew to the best of our
+ability.
+
+As yet we gave little thought to the new danger that menaced us, being
+full of thanks for our escape from a horrible death; but the fury of
+the storm increased, the wind battered against the schooner in howling
+gusts, and presently the topgallant mast fell with a crash to the deck.
+Fortunately no one was hurt, and we quickly cut the wreckage clear; but
+misfortune followed misfortune, and at length, with white, scared face,
+the carpenter announced that water was fast rising in the hold.
+
+Here, at least, Jose and I were of service.  Taking our places at the
+pumps, we toiled with might and main to keep the water down.  Thus the
+remainder of the night passed with every one working at the pumps or
+assisting the captain to manage the vessel.
+
+Morning brought no abatement of the storm, but the light enabled us to
+realize more clearly how near we were, a second time, to death.  The
+rain still poured down in torrents, the wind leaped at us with
+hurricane fury, the schooner tossed, a helpless wreck, in the midst of
+a mountainous sea.  The carpenter reported that, in spite of all our
+labours, the water was fast gaining on us.  The sailors now lost heart,
+and one of them left his post, saying sullenly they might as well drown
+first as last.  It was a dangerous example, but the skipper checked the
+mischief.  Running forward with loaded pistol, he shouted,--
+
+"Go back to the pumps, you coward, or I will shoot you down like a dog!
+Call yourself a man?  Why, that youngster there is worth fifty of you!"
+
+The fellow returned to his work; but as the hours passed we became more
+and more certain that no amount of pumping would save the ship.  Even
+now she was but a floating wreck, and soon she would be engulfed by the
+raging sea.
+
+While Jose and I were taking a rest, the captain told us that, even
+should the storm cease, the _Aguila_ must go down in less than
+twenty-four hours, and that he knew not whether we were close to the
+shore or a hundred leagues from it.  Jose received the news coolly.  He
+came of a race that does not believe in whimpering, and his only care
+was on my account.
+
+"I am sorry for your mother, Jack," said he, "and for you too.  We're
+in a fair hole, and I don't see any way of getting out; but for all
+that we will keep our heads cool.  Never go under without a fight for
+it--that's as good a motto as any other.  You heard the skipper say the
+schooner is bound to go down, and you know we have no boats--they
+wouldn't be any good if we had, while this storm lasts; but if the sea
+calms, a plank will keep you afloat a long time, and maybe a ship will
+come along handy.  Anyhow, make a fight for it, my boy.  Now we'll have
+a snack of something to eat, and then for another spell at the pumps."
+
+By this time a feeling of despair had seized the crew, and but for fear
+of the captain's pistol they would have stopped work in a body.
+However, he kept them at it, and towards noon the tempest ceased almost
+as suddenly as it had begun.  The gale dropped to a steady breeze, and
+the surface of the ocean became comparatively calm.
+
+The change cheered us; we looked on it as a good omen, and toiled at
+the pumps even harder than before.  We could not lessen the quantity of
+water, but for a time we kept it from gaining, and a germ of hope crept
+back into our hearts.  Every hour now was likely to be in our favour,
+as the captain judged the wind was blowing us to some part of the
+coast, where we might either fall in with a vessel or effect a landing.
+Thus, between hope and fear, the afternoon passed, and then we saw that
+the captain's judgment was correct.
+
+Straight before us, though far off as yet, appeared the dark line of
+coast with a barrier of mountains in the background, and in front a
+broad band of snow-white foam.
+
+Would the schooner cover the distance?  If so, would she escape being
+dashed to pieces in the thundering surf?  These were the questions
+which agitated our minds as, impelled by the breeze, she drove through
+the water.  We of ourselves could do nothing save work at the pumps and
+wait for what might happen.
+
+Afternoon merged into evening, and evening into night.  A few stars
+peeped forth in the sky, but were soon veiled by grayish clouds.  The
+broad white band along the shore was startlingly distinct, and still
+the issue was undecided.
+
+The end came with such unexpected suddenness that the men hardly had
+time to cry out.  Jose and I were resting at the moment, when the
+schooner lurched heavily, tried to right herself and failed, filled
+with water, and sank like a stone.
+
+I often think of that shipwreck as a horrible dream.  Down, down I
+went, holding my breath till it seemed impossible to stay longer
+without opening my mouth and swallowing the salt water.  By an effort I
+restrained myself till my head shot above the surface and once more I
+was free to breathe.
+
+The ship had disappeared entirely, and it was too dark to see such a
+small object as a man's head.  By great good fortune I managed to seize
+a floating spar, and, resting on it, called aloud for Jose.  The only
+answer was the anguished cry of a drowning man across the waste of
+waters.  Twice again it came, and then all was silent, though in
+imagination I still could hear that anguished cry.  The sea rolled in
+long surges, carrying me forward without effort and at a great rate
+toward the clear white line.  Live or die, I could not help myself now,
+but was entirely at the mercy of the waves.  I thought of Jose's advice
+to make a fight for it, but there was nothing to be done.  Clinging to
+my spar, I was tossed from crest to depth like a ball bandied about by
+boys.
+
+And now my ears were filled with a great roaring as I approached nearer
+to the crested foam; then feeling that the end was very near, I prayed
+silently yet fervently that God would comfort my mother in this her new
+trial, and prepared myself to die.
+
+From the top of a high wave I went down into the depths, rose again to
+the crest of a second huge roller, and then was flung with the velocity
+of lightning into the midst of the great sea-horses with their snowy
+manes.
+
+Of this part of the adventure I remember but little, only that for a
+moment I lay bruised and battered at the foot of a high rock.
+
+Once more Jose's advice sounded in my ear, and loosing my spar, I
+clambered, dizzy and half blind, to the top.  The ramping white horses
+raced after as if to drag me back, but finding that impossible, retired
+sullenly to spring yet once again.  Shrieking and hissing, the great
+white monsters tore along, dashing in fury and breaking in impotence
+against the immovable rocks.  The wild, weird scene, too, frightened
+me; for I was but a boy, remember, who up to this had never met with a
+more stirring adventure, perhaps, than a tussle with a high-spirited
+pony.  I was worn out, too, by hard toil, faint from loss of blood,
+saddened by the loss of my faithful Jose, and by the awful calamity
+that had overtaken the crew of the schooner.  Yet, in spite of all, so
+strong was the instinct to live, that, almost without thought, I
+clambered along the rocky ridge which jutted out from the mainland,
+while the baffled waves raced hungrily on either side of me, as if even
+now loath to abandon their expected prey.
+
+At length the line of white foam was at my back.  I found myself on a
+boulder-strewn beach, and for the time safe!  Although half dead with
+privation and exposure, I wandered some way along the beach, calling
+aloud on Jose and the sailors, forgetful that the roar of the surf
+drowned my voice.
+
+Presently I could go no further, the beach in that direction being
+walled in by a rocky cliff, steep and high, and but for a narrow
+fissure upon which I happily came, insurmountable.
+
+I say happily, for at the summit of the cliff I fancied I saw the flash
+of a lantern.  A lantern meant human beings, who on hearing my story
+would search the shore, and find, perhaps, that others besides myself
+had escaped from the wreck.  With this idea in my head, I began to
+climb, going very steadily; for, as I have said, the track was little
+more than a fissure in the rock, and my head was far from clear.  I
+toiled on, cutting my hands and legs with the jagged rocks, but making
+some progress, till at length I had covered the greater part of the
+distance; then I could do no more.  A tiny crevice gave me foothold,
+and I was able to rest my arms on a wide ledge, but had no strength to
+draw myself up to it.  Twice I tried and failed; then fearful lest my
+strength should give way, I strove no more, but, raising my voice,
+shouted loudly for help.  Very mournful the cry sounded in the silent
+night, as I hung there utterly helpless on the face of the cliff.
+
+Again and again I shouted with all my might, to be answered at first
+only by the roar of the surf below.  Presently, on the summit of the
+cliff, not far above me, a lantern flashed, then another, and another,
+and a voice hailed me through the darkness.
+
+"Help!" I cried, "help!" and my voice was full of despair, for my
+strength was fast ebbing.  I must soon lose my hold, and be dashed to
+pieces at the foot of the cliff.
+
+The lanterns flashed to and fro above me.  Would they never come
+nearer?  What was that?  A big stone bounding and bouncing from rock to
+rock whizzed past my head, and disappeared in the gloom below.
+Collecting all my strength, I shouted again, fearing that it must be
+for the last time.
+
+But now--oh, how sincerely I gave thanks to God!--a light had come over
+the edge of the cliff, and though moving slowly, it certainly advanced
+in my direction.  Yes, I saw a man's outline.  In one hand he carried a
+lantern, in the other a noosed rope, and he felt his way carefully.
+
+"Help! help!" I exclaimed, faintly enough now; but he heard me, and I
+knew I was saved.  Putting the lantern on the ledge and grasping the
+collar of my coat, he got the noose round my body under the arms, and
+those above drew me up.
+
+[Illustration: "Help! help!" I exclaimed, faintly; but he heard me, and
+I knew I was saved.]
+
+The lanterns showed a group of men in uniform, who crowded around me as
+I reached the top; but being uncertain how long my strength would last,
+I cried,--
+
+"A wreck!  Search the beach.  There may have been others washed ashore."
+
+Upon this there was much talking, and then two men carried me away,
+leaving their companions, as I hoped, to search for any chance
+survivors.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV.
+
+THE SILVER KEY.
+
+It would be hard for me to tell just what happened during the next day
+or two.  I did not lose consciousness altogether, but my nerves were so
+shattered that I mixed up fact and fancy, and could hardly separate my
+dreams from events which actually took place.
+
+On the third or fourth day my senses became clearer I lay on a bed in a
+small cell-like apartment.  In the opposite corner was a mattress, with
+a blanket and rug rolled neatly at the head; above it, on the wall,
+hung a sword and various military articles, as if the room belonged to
+a soldier.
+
+Presently, as I lay trying to recall things, the door was pushed open,
+and a man entered.  He was young; his face was frank and open, and he
+had fine dark eyes.  He was in undress uniform, and I judged, rightly
+as it turned out, that he was a Spanish officer.  Seeing me looking at
+him, he crossed to the bed, and exclaimed in the Spanish tongue, "Are
+you better this morning?"
+
+I nodded and smiled, but could not speak--my throat hurt me so.
+
+"All right!" he cried gaily.  "Don't worry; I understand," and at that
+he went out, coming back presently with the military doctor.
+
+Now I had no cause, then or afterwards, to love the Spaniards; but I
+hold it fair to give even an enemy his due, and it is only just to say
+that this young officer, Captain Santiago Mariano, treated me royally.
+In a sense I owed my life to him, and I have never forgotten his
+kindness.
+
+As my strength returned he often sat with me, talking of the wreck,
+from which I was apparently the only one rescued.  Three men, he said,
+had been washed ashore, but they were all dead.  Two were ordinary
+sailors, and from his description I easily recognized the third as
+Montevo, the skipper.
+
+There was a rumour, the young officer continued, that a man had been
+picked up by some Indians further along the coast; but no one really
+knew anything about it, and for his part he looked on it as an idle
+tale.
+
+There was small comfort in tills; yet, against my better judgment, I
+began to hope that Jose had somehow escaped from the sea.  He was a
+strong man and a stout swimmer, while for dogged courage I have rarely
+met his equal.
+
+One morning Santiago came into my room--or rather his--with a troubled
+expression on his face.  I was able to walk by this time, and stood by
+the little window, watching the soldiers at exercise in the courtyard.
+
+"Crawford," said he abruptly, "have you any reason to be afraid of
+General Barejo?"
+
+Now, until that moment I had not given a thought to the fact that in
+escaping one danger I had tumbled headlong into another; but this
+question made me uneasy.  As far as safety went, I might as well have
+stayed at my mother's side in Lima as have blundered into a far-off
+fortress garrisoned by Spanish soldiers.
+
+"I ought not to speak of this," continued Santiago, "but the warning
+may help you.  Did you hear the guns last night?"
+
+"Yes," said I, wondering.
+
+"It was the salute to the general, who is inspecting the forts along
+the coast."
+
+"I have heard my father speak of General Barejo."
+
+"Well, after dinner last evening the commandant happened to speak of
+your shipwreck, and the general was greatly interested.  'A boy named
+Crawford?' said he thoughtfully; 'is he in the fort now?' and on
+hearing you were, told the commandant he would see you in the morning.
+This is he crossing the courtyard.  He is coming here, I believe."
+
+I had only time to thank Santiago for his kindness when the general
+entered the room.  He was a short, spare man, with closely-cropped gray
+hair and a grizzled beard.  His face was tanned and wrinkled, but he
+held himself erect as a youth; and his profession was most pronounced.
+
+The young captain saluted, and, at a sign from the general, left the
+room.
+
+Barejo eyed me critically, and with a grim smile exclaimed, "By St.
+Philip, there's no need to ask.  You're the son of the Englishman
+Crawford, right enough."
+
+"Who was murdered by Spanish soldiers," said I, for his cool and
+somewhat contemptuous tone roused me to anger.
+
+He smiled at this outburst, and spread out his hands as if to say, "The
+boy's crazy;" but when he spoke, it was to ask why I had left Lima.
+
+"Because I had no wish to meet with my father's fate," I answered
+brusquely; and he laughed again.
+
+"Faith," he muttered, "the young cockerel ruffles his feathers early!"
+and then, again addressing me, he asked, "And where were you going?"
+
+"On a sea voyage, for the benefit of my health--and to be out of the
+way."
+
+To this he made no reply, but his brows puckered up as if he were in
+deep thought.  I stood by the window watching him, and wondering what
+would be the outcome of this visit.
+
+After a short time he said, slowly and deliberately, so that I might
+lose nothing of his speech, "Listen to me, young sir.  Though you are
+young, there are some things you can understand.  Your father tried,
+and tried hard, to wrest this country from its proper ruler, our
+honoured master, the King of Spain.  He failed; but others have taken
+his place, and though you are only a boy, they will endeavour to make
+use of you.  We shall crush the rebellion, and the leaders will lose
+their lives.  I am going to save you from their fate."
+
+I thought this display of kindness rather strange, but made no remark.
+
+"In this fortress," he continued, "you will be out of mischief, and
+here I intend you shall stay till the troubles are at an end."
+
+"That sounds very much as if you mean to keep me a prisoner!" I
+exclaimed hotly.
+
+"Exactly," said he; then turning on his heel he walked out.
+
+From the window I watched him cross the courtyard and enter the
+commandant's quarters.  Ten minutes afterwards Santiago appeared with a
+file of soldiers.
+
+"Very sorry, my boy," said the young captain, coming into the room,
+"but a soldier must obey orders.  You are my prisoner."
+
+"I couldn't wish for a better jailer," said I, laughing.
+
+"I'm glad you take it like that, but unfortunately you won't be under
+my care.  Have you all your things?  This way, then."
+
+We marched very solemnly side by side along the corridor, the soldiers
+a few paces in the rear.  At the end stood a half-dressed Indian,
+holding open the door of a cell.
+
+"Oh, come," said I, looking in, "it's not so bad."
+
+The cell was, indeed, almost a counterpart of Santiago's room, only the
+window was high up and heavily barred.  The furniture consisted of
+bedstead and rugs, a chair, small table, and one or two other articles.
+The floor was of earth, but quite dry; and altogether I was fairly
+satisfied with my new home.
+
+"You'll have decent food and sufficient exercise," said the captain,
+who had entered with me; "but"--and here he lowered his voice to a
+whisper--"don't be foolish and try to escape.  Barejo's orders are
+strict, and though it may not appear so, you will be closely guarded."
+
+"Thanks for the hint," said I as he turned away.
+
+The Indian shut the door, the bolts were shot, the footsteps of the
+soldiers grew fainter, and I was alone.
+
+I shall not dwell long on my prison life.  I had ample food, and twice
+a day was allowed to wander unmolested about the courtyard.  The
+general had gone, and most of the officers, including Santiago, showed
+me many acts of kindness, which, though trifling in themselves, did
+much towards keeping me cheerful.
+
+Several weeks passed without incident, and I began to get very tired of
+doing nothing.  There seemed to be little chance of escape, however.
+Every outlet was guarded by an armed sentry, and I was carefully
+watched.  One day I dragged my bedstead under the window, and making a
+ladder of the table and chair, climbed to the bars.  A single glance
+showed the folly of trying to escape that way without the aid of wings.
+That part of the fort stood on the brink of a frightful precipice which
+fell sheer away for hundreds of feet to the rocky coast.
+
+Of course I had no weapon of any kind, but the Spaniards had allowed me
+to keep the silver key, which hung around my neck by a thin, stout cord.
+
+I had almost forgotten the mountaineer's strange words, when a trifling
+incident brought them vividly to my mind.  One morning the Indian, as
+usual, brought in my breakfast, and was turning to go, when he suddenly
+stopped and stared at me with a look of intense surprise.  He was a
+short, stout, beardless man, with a bright brown complexion and rather
+intelligent features.
+
+"Well," I exclaimed, "what is it?  Have I altered much since yesterday?"
+
+The man bent one knee, and bowing low, exclaimed in great excitement,
+"It is the key!"
+
+Then I discovered that, my shirt collar being unfastened, the silver
+key had slipped outside, where it hung in full view.
+
+"Yes," said I, "it is the key right enough.  What of it?"
+
+His eyes were flashing now, and the glow in them lit up his whole face.
+
+"What is the master's name?" he whispered eagerly.
+
+Now this was an awkward question for me to answer.  In the first place,
+the man might or might not be trustworthy; and in the second, the only
+name I knew was that of the bandit chief.  However, I concluded the
+venture was worth making, and said, "Men call the owner of the key
+Raymon Sorillo."
+
+"Ah!" exclaimed the Indian, with a sigh of satisfaction, "he is a great
+chief.  Hide the key, senor, and wait.  A dog's kennel is no place for
+the friend of our chief."
+
+With that he went out, and the door clanged after him, while I stood
+lost in astonishment.  What did he mean?  Was it possible that he
+intended to help me?  Thrusting the mysterious key out of sight, I sat
+down to breakfast with what appetite I could muster.  All that day I
+was in a state of great excitement, though at exercise I took care to
+appear calm.  I waited with impatience for the evening meal, which, to
+my disgust, was brought by a strange soldier.
+
+"Hullo!" I exclaimed, "a change of jailers?  What has become of the
+other fellow?"
+
+"The dog of an Indian is ill," answered the man, who was evidently in a
+very bad temper, "and I have his work to do."
+
+Placing the things on the table, he went out, slamming the door behind
+him, and shooting the bolts viciously.  The next morning he came again,
+and indeed for four days in succession performed the sick man's duties.
+
+Now you may be sure I felt greatly interested in this sudden illness.
+It filled me with curiosity, and to a certain extent strengthened my
+hope that the Indian intended to help me to escape from the fort.  What
+his plans were, of course I could not conjecture.
+
+On the fifth night I undressed and lay down as usual.  It was quite
+dark in the cell, and the only sound that reached me was the periodical
+"All's well!" of the sentry stationed at the end of the corridor.  For
+a long time I lay puzzling over the strange situation, but at length
+dropped into a light sleep.
+
+Suddenly I was awakened by a queer sensation, and sat up in bed.  It
+was too dark to see anything, but I felt that some one was creeping
+stealthily across the floor.  Presently I heard a faint sound, and knew
+that the object, whatever it might be, was approaching nearer.  At the
+side of the bed it stopped, and a muffled voice whispered, "Senor, are
+you awake?"
+
+"Yes," said I.  "Who's there?"
+
+"A friend of the silver key.  Dress quickly and come with me; the way
+is open."
+
+"Where is the sentry?" I asked.
+
+"Gagged and insensible," replied the voice.  "Quick, while there is yet
+time."
+
+Perhaps it was rather venturesome thus to trust myself in the hands of
+an unknown man, but I slipped on my clothes, and keeping touch of his
+arm, accompanied him into the dimly-lighted corridor.
+
+Turning to the left, we glided along close to the wall.  At the end of
+this passage the body of the sentry lay on the ground, while near at
+hand crouched an Indian, keeping watch.
+
+This man joined us, and my guide immediately led the way into an empty
+room, the door of which was open.  As soon as we were inside he closed
+it softly.
+
+"Keep close to me," he whispered, and then said something to an unseen
+person in a patois I did not understand.
+
+Presently he stopped, and I could just distinguish the figure of a
+third man, who, grasping my hand, whispered, "The silver key has
+unlocked the door, senor."
+
+Before I could recover from my astonishment--for the man who spoke was
+the sick jailer--my guide let himself down through a trap-door, and
+called to me to follow.  I found myself on a flight of steep steps in a
+kind of shaft, very narrow, and so foul that breathing was difficult.
+At the bottom was a fair-sized chamber, with a lofty roof--at least I
+judged it so by the greater purity of the air--and here the guide
+stopped until his companion caught up with us.  The jailer, to my
+surprise, had remained in the fort, but there was no time for
+explanation.
+
+The exit from the chamber was by means of an aperture so low that we
+had to lie flat on the ground, and so narrow that even I found it hard
+work to wriggle through.
+
+Of all my adventures, this one impressed itself most strongly on my
+mind.  People are apt to smile when I speak of what one man called
+"crawling along a passage;" yet had the terrors of the journey been
+known beforehand, I think I could hardly have summoned the courage to
+face them.
+
+We went in Indian file, I being second, and my shoulders brushed the
+sides of what was apparently a stonework tube.  There was not a glimmer
+of light, and the foul air threatened suffocation at every yard.  I
+could breathe only with great difficulty, my throat seemed choked, I
+was bathed in perspiration, while loathsome creatures crawled or
+scampered over every part of me.
+
+Before half the distance was covered--and I make the confession without
+shame--I was truly and horribly afraid.  However, there was no turning
+back--indeed there was no turning at all--so I crawled on, hoping and
+praying for light and air.
+
+Presently I caught sight of a dull red glow like that from a burning
+torch, my breath came more easily, and at the end of another hundred
+yards the guide, rising to his feet, stood upright: we had arrived at
+the exit from the tunnel.  Clambering up, I once more found myself in
+the open air, and was instantly followed by the second Indian.  Two
+other men waited for us, and the four, with some difficulty, rearranged
+a huge boulder which effectually blocked the aperture.
+
+Then the light from the torch was quenched, and I was hurried off in
+the darkness.  For an hour perhaps we travelled, but in what direction
+I had no idea.  At first we had the roar of the thundering sea in our
+ears, but presently that grew faint, until the sound was completely
+lost.  The route was rocky, and I should say dangerous; for the guide
+clutched my arm tightly, and from time to time whispered a warning.
+
+At last he stopped and whistled softly.  The signal was heard and
+answered, and very soon I became aware of several dusky figures,
+including both men and horses.  No time was wasted in talk; a man
+brought me a horse, and a loose cloak with a hood in which to muffle my
+head.  I mounted, the others sprang to their cumbrous saddles, and at a
+word from the guide we set off.
+
+The route now lay over a desert of loose sand, in which the animals
+sank almost to their fetlocks; every puff of wind blew it around us in
+clouds, and but for the hood I think I must have been both blinded and
+choked.
+
+I have not the faintest idea how the leader found his way, unless it
+was by the direction of the wind, as there were no stars, and it was
+impossible to see beyond a few yards.
+
+Hour after hour passed; dawn broke cold and gray.  The choking sand was
+left behind, and we approached a narrow valley shut in by two gigantic
+ranges of hills.  Here a voice hailed us from the rocks, the guide
+answered the challenge, and the whole party passed through the defile
+to the valley beyond.
+
+It was now light enough to observe a number of Indian huts dotted about
+on both slopes; and the horsemen who had formed my escort quickly
+dispersed, leaving me with the guide.
+
+"We are home," said he, "and the dogs have lost their prey."
+
+Dismounting and leading the horses, we approached a hut set somewhat
+apart from the rest.  An Indian boy standing at the entrance took our
+animals away while we entered the hut.
+
+"Will you eat, senor, or sleep?" asked my rescuer.
+
+"Sleep," said I, "as soon as you have answered a question or two."
+
+I cannot repeat exactly what the man told me, as his Spanish was none
+of the best, and he mixed it up with a patois which I only half
+understood.  However, the outline of the story was plain enough, and
+will take but little telling.
+
+My late jailer belonged to the Order of the Silver Key, a powerful
+Indian society, acting under the leadership of Raymon Sorillo.  He had
+been placed in the fort both as a spy on the garrison and to assist
+comrades if at any time they endeavoured to capture the stronghold by
+way of the secret passage.  Only the commandant and his chief officer
+were supposed to know of its existence, but a strange accident had
+revealed it to the Indians some years previously.
+
+The jailer, of course, could have set me free, but in that case he must
+have joined in my flight.  The plan he adopted was to communicate with
+his friends, and then, by feigning illness, to divert suspicion from
+himself.  As soon as we descended the steps, he replaced the trap-door,
+removed all signs of disturbance, and crept cautiously back to his room.
+
+When the Indian had finished his explanation, I asked him to what place
+he had brought me.
+
+"The Hidden Valley," he replied, "where no Spaniard has ever set foot.
+Here you are quite safe, for all the armies of Peru could not tear you
+from this spot."
+
+"Does Sorillo ever come here?" I asked.
+
+"Rarely; but his messengers come and go at their pleasure."
+
+"That is good news," I remarked, thinking of my mother.  "I shall be
+able to get a message through to Lima.  And now, if you please, I will
+go to sleep."
+
+He spread a rug on the earth floor, covered me with another, and in a
+few minutes I was fast asleep, forgetful even of the dismal tunnel and
+its horrible associations.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V.
+
+IN THE HIDDEN VALLEY.
+
+Perhaps my Indian host overstated the case, but he could not have been
+far wrong in saying that no stranger had ever succeeded in finding the
+Hidden Valley.
+
+Let me describe the coast of Peru, and then you may be able to form
+some idea of the district between the Spanish fortress and my new home.
+The coast is a sandy desert studded with hills, and having in the
+background stupendous ranges of towering mountains.  From north to
+south the desert is cut at intervals by streams, which in the rainy
+season are converted into roaring rivers.  Little villages dot the
+banks of these streams, and here and there are patches of cultivated
+land.
+
+From one river to another the country is for the most part a dreary
+desert of sand, where rain never falls nor vegetation grows--a dead
+land, where the song of a bird is a thing unknown.  Sometimes after a
+sandstorm a cluster of dry bones may be seen--the sole remains of lost
+travellers and their animals.  At times even the most experienced
+guides lose the track, and then they are seen no more.  Over such a
+desert I had ridden from the fort, and the Indians assured me that,
+even in broad daylight, I could not go back safely without a guide.
+
+As for the valley itself, it was comparatively nothing but a slit in
+the mass of mountains.  A river ran through it, and the water was used
+by the Indians to irrigate the surrounding land.  Their live stock
+consisted chiefly of oxen and horses, and the principal vegetables
+cultivated were maize and coca.  You may not know that this coca is a
+plant something like the vine, and it grows to a height of six or eight
+feet.  The leaves are very carefully gathered one by one.  They are
+bitter to the taste, however, and as a rule strangers do not take
+kindly to coca.  The Indian is never without it.  It is the first thing
+he puts into his mouth in the morning, and the last thing that he takes
+out at night.  He carries a supply in a leathern pouch hung round his
+neck, and with this and a handful of roasted maize he will go a long
+day's journey.  I had never chewed coca before, but soon got into the
+habit of doing so, much to the delight of my new friends.
+
+My stay in the Hidden Valley, although lasting nearly two years, had
+little of interest in it.  The Indians treated me with every respect.
+I was lodged in the best house, and was given the best fare the valley
+produced.  Within the valley I was master, but I was not allowed to
+join any of their expeditions, and without their help it was
+impossible, as I have explained, to get away.
+
+Their advice to stay quietly in my hiding-place was indeed the best
+they could give.  I was quite safe, the Spanish soldiers in the fort
+being unable to follow me, and indeed, as we gathered from the spy,
+quite at a loss to account for my escape.  Away from the valley, too, I
+should be utterly helpless.  I could not return to Lima, and without
+money there was little chance of making my way into Chili.
+
+The two things that troubled me most were Jose's fate and my mother's
+unhappiness.  At first I had ventured to hope that my friend still
+lived; but as the weeks and months passed without any tidings, I began
+to look upon him as dead.  The Indians thought it certain I should
+never see him again.
+
+As to my mother, she would be in no particular uneasiness until the
+time came for the return of the _Aguila_; but I dreaded what would
+happen when Mr. Maxwell had to confess the schooner was overdue, and
+that nothing had been heard of her.  Many miserable hours I spent
+wandering about the valley, and thinking how my mother would watch and
+wait, hoping against hope for some tidings of the missing ship.
+
+One night--it was in the December of 1819--I had gone to bed early,
+when an unusual commotion in the valley caused me to get up.  My Indian
+host had already gone out, so, putting on my things, I followed.
+
+Naturally my first thought was of the Spaniards; but the natives,
+though flocking towards the entrance to the valley, did not appear
+alarmed.  Several of them carried torches, and a strange picture was
+revealed by the lurid flames.
+
+On the ground lay a horse so weak and exhausted that it could barely
+struggle for breath.  Close by, supported in the arms of two Indians,
+was the rider, a short, rather stout man of brown complexion.  His eyes
+were glazed as if in death.  Blood gushed from his ears and nostrils,
+his head hung limply down: it was hard to believe that he lived.
+
+The natives gabbled to each other, and I heard the words frequently
+repeated, "Sorillo's messenger!"  Then an old, old woman--the _mother_
+of the village--tottered feebly down the path.  In one hand she carried
+a small pitcher, and in the other a funnel, whose slender stem they
+inserted between the man's teeth.  In this way a little liquid was
+forced into his mouth, and presently his bared breast heaved
+slightly--so slightly that the motion was almost imperceptible.
+
+However, the old woman appeared satisfied, and at a sign from her the
+stricken man was carried slowly up the path.  One native attended to
+the horse, and the rest returned to their huts, talking excitedly of
+what had happened.
+
+"Is that a messenger from Raymon Sorillo, Quilca?" I asked my host.
+
+"Yes," said he, "and he has had a very narrow escape.  He has been
+caught in a sandstorm.  Perhaps he lost the track.  Perhaps the
+soldiers gave chase, and he went further round to baffle them.  Who
+knows?  But we shall hear to-morrow."
+
+"Then he is likely to recover?"
+
+"Yes; the medicine saved him.  Didn't you see his chest move?"
+
+"Yes," I replied, thinking that but a small thing to go on.
+
+"That showed the medicine was in time," returned Quilca.  "It has begun
+its work, and all will be well."
+
+Quilca spoke so confidently that, had I been the patient, I should have
+started on the road to recovery at once.
+
+"Will he stay here long?" I asked.
+
+"Who knows?" replied Quilca.  "The chief gives orders; the servants
+obey."
+
+"But he will return at some time?"
+
+"It is likely."
+
+"And will he take a message to my mother, do you think?"
+
+"Oh yes," said the Indian; "I had forgotten.  Besides"--and he touched
+the cord supporting the silver key--"he is your servant, as I am."
+
+For three days the messenger was too weak to explain his errand; but
+the medicine worked wonders, and at the end of a week he sent for
+Quilca and the other leading men of the tribe.
+
+What orders he brought I did not learn; only my host told me that the
+rising to which they looked forward had been put off.  The Chilians
+were not ready, and could not be in Peru for at least another six
+months.
+
+Quilca was dreadfully disappointed; but the chief had spoken, and his
+word was law.  Indeed, it was most extraordinary to see with what
+reverence his commands were treated.  Had it been his pleasure, I am
+sure his followers would have willingly gone to certain death.
+
+On the day following this I visited the messenger, who, on seeing the
+silver key, bowed low before me.
+
+"What are my lord's commands?" asked he humbly.
+
+"They are very simple," I replied.  "In a short time you are returning
+to your chief.  Say to him that Juan Crawford is safe in the Hidden
+Valley, and ask him to tell Senora Maria Dolores Crawford at Lima so.
+Can you remember that?"
+
+The blood mounted into the man's face as he said, "I will remember."
+Then he added in quick, eager tones, "Are you the son of Don Eduardo?"
+
+"He was my father."
+
+At that the man bent again and kissed my hand, saying,--
+
+"Senor, he was our best friend.  He loved our people, and when he was
+killed there was much weeping in the villages of the Indians."
+
+"He gave his life for you," said I slowly.
+
+"As we will give ours for his son," answered the man; and no one
+hearing him could have doubted the sincerity of his words.
+
+At the end of a fortnight he was strong enough to travel, and his last
+words as he struck into the narrow pass were, "I shall not forget,
+senor."
+
+After his departure I felt much easier.  True, there was a terrible
+journey before him, which hardly one man in a thousand could hope to
+accomplish successfully; but he was a daring and plucky rider, used
+alike to desert and mountain.  Then, too, any Indian on the route would
+give him food and shelter, and warn him of any lurking soldiers.
+
+He would relate my story to Raymon Sorillo, and I knew that the
+gigantic chief would carry the news to my mother.  I no longer fretted
+at being shut up in the valley, but passed my time merrily with the
+boys and younger men of the tribe, learning their patois, riding, and
+practising shooting with the musket, and with bow and arrow.
+
+On my fifteenth birthday Quilca organized some sports, and though not
+gaining a first prize in any event, I performed so creditably that the
+Indians were delighted with my prowess.
+
+"The young chief will make a warrior," said they, and I felt proud of
+their praise.
+
+Let me try to give you a picture of myself at that time.  I was tall
+for my age, standing five feet five inches in height.  I had curly dark
+hair, cut rather short, and brown eyes.  My face was tanned through
+exposure to the weather and regular exercise had made my muscles hard
+as iron.  Like my companions, I wore a short woollen jacket, dark in
+colour, and breeches open at the knees, and caught up with strips of
+coloured cotton.  My cap was of wool gorgeously embroidered; dark
+woollen stockings without feet covered my legs, and in place of boots I
+had a pair of goatskin sandals.  Thrown over my left shoulder was a
+small poncho, which dangled like the cloak worn by some of our cavalry
+soldiers.
+
+Some time during the month of April Sorillo's messenger returned,
+bringing me two letters--one from my mother, the other from the chief.
+
+I need not say how eagerly I opened the first.  It was very long,
+consisting of several closely-written pages, but it did not contain a
+word too much.  I read it over and over again, until I could almost say
+it by heart.  No word had reached Lima of the wreck of the _Aguila_;
+but the British merchants, though bidding my mother be of good cheer,
+had put the schooner down for lost.  My message had shown their fears
+to be well grounded, but at the same time it had carried joy and
+thankfulness to my mother's breast.
+
+"I grieve for poor Jose," she wrote, "but I thank God every hour for
+your safety."
+
+The letter from Sorillo was brief.  After saying how glad he was to get
+my message, he went on,--
+
+"For the present, stay in the Hidden Valley; there is no safer place in
+Peru.  The fruit ripens slowly, and even yet is not ready for plucking.
+San Martin has not left Valparaiso, and little beyond skirmishing will
+be done this year."
+
+Apparently, however, he had sent definite orders to the tribe, as from
+this date I noticed a great difference in our hitherto peaceful abode.
+Every man went armed day and night, scouts were posted on the
+mountains, and swift riders scoured the desert for miles.
+
+Once, too, a band of horsemen, twenty strong, led by Quilca, left the
+valley at night.  I could not learn their business, because Quilca said
+they were acting under the secret orders of the great chief.  They were
+absent three days, and when, in the gray dawn of the fourth morning,
+they rode back up the valley, three were missing.  The leader had a
+bloodstained bandage round his head, and several men bore signs of a
+fierce conflict.
+
+"You are hurt?" said I, as Quilca dismounted.
+
+"It is nothing," replied he carelessly.
+
+"And three of your followers have not returned!"
+
+"It cost six lives to kill them," he answered, with fierce
+satisfaction, passing into the hut.
+
+This expedition was followed by others, and from the talk in the valley
+I gathered that Sorillo had started the Indians on the war-trail.
+Already the Spaniards were safe only in large numbers, for on every
+weak and isolated detachment the fierce mountaineers swept down like
+hawks on their prey.
+
+Now and again they were beaten off; but this did not happen often,
+because they knew the number of their enemy almost to a man, and had
+learned the most effective method of attack.  Generally speaking, the
+little body of Spanish soldiers had no chance whatever, either of
+flight or of victory.
+
+From time to time strange and startling rumours reached us.  In
+September we heard that the Chilian army had landed on the coast, and
+soon afterwards that the Englishman Cochrane had swept the Spanish
+fleet from the seas.  Jose had often spoken of this daring sailor, who,
+after performing many glorious deeds in the British navy, had taken
+command of the Chilian fleet, and had done much to make Chili
+independent of Spain.  Now, with his ships and sailors, he was helping
+to do the same for Peru.
+
+On hearing these things I became impatient, not wishing to remain
+cooped up in the valley while the Liberating Army was marching on Lima.
+
+However, my deliverance, though slow in coming, came at length, but
+before that time I had a most startling surprise.  One morning, in the
+last week of January 1821, I had gone out very early, half expecting to
+see Quilca returning from one of his excursions.  Most of the Indians
+were astir, when suddenly a man came running from the mouth of the pass.
+
+"Here they are!" he cried; "here they are!"
+
+We pushed down quickly to meet them, I in the very front.  Quilca
+appeared first, riding slowly, as if his horse were tired out.  His
+men, lolling on their animals, followed, some of them with closed eyes
+and half asleep.
+
+Presently I caught sight of Sorillo's messenger, nearly at the end of
+the line; and then I opened my eyes wide, thinking they had played me
+false.  Was I awake, or was I dreaming?  Was I--
+
+"Jack!"
+
+That settled it!  The Indians stared in astonishment, as with a
+startled cry I ran past them to where in the rear a man had jumped from
+his horse to the ground.
+
+"Jose!" I cried, "Jose!" and for the life of me could say no more, but
+stood staring at him as if he had been some strange, unnatural animal.
+
+Had I the skill of an artist, I should love to draw his face as he
+looked into mine.  It was strong and firm and purposeful, but the gray
+eyes softened into almost womanly tenderness.
+
+"Why, Jack," said he, shifting the reins and laying a hand on my
+shoulder, "you're quite a man!  Your mother would be proud of you!"
+
+"Have you seen her?" I asked.
+
+"Yes; all's well at home.  But we'll talk of that later on.  So you've
+turned Indian, eh?"
+
+"It's better than living in a cell!"
+
+"So it is; and you didn't go down in the ship, after all?"
+
+"No; but I must tell you the story when you've had something to eat.
+Give your horse to this youngster, and now come on to Quilca's hut; you
+must be tired."
+
+"I was," replied he, "but the sight of you woke me up.  I wondered if
+you'd be waiting to see the braves come home.  That Quilca of yours is
+a born soldier.  He'd make a good general if they didn't train him!"
+
+He rattled on, and I listened, glad just to hear the sound of his
+voice, without reference to what he said.
+
+Quilca bade us welcome to the hut, and his womenfolk brought in the
+food and drink they had prepared.
+
+Jose, as I have said, knew the Indian patois, which during the meal, he
+used for the benefit of our host, whose Spanish was rather halting.  He
+talked of the war, and told how the Chilians had landed, and how the
+Royalists were broken up and in full retreat.  The campaign, he said,
+was as good as over, and San Martin could be President of Peru any day
+he chose.
+
+At that I was much astonished, for knowing the Spanish leaders, I had
+expected them to fight to the death; but it was pleasing news, all the
+same, and I began to speculate on how soon we should be in Lima.
+
+After breakfast Jose had a long nap, and then I took him for a stroll
+in the valley, where we could talk without interruption.
+
+I was anxious to hear about my mother, but first I told my own
+story--the rescue by the Spanish soldiers, the coming of General
+Barejo, and the power of the silver key, as also the escape by the
+underground passage, just as I have related it here.
+
+"Barejo's a dangerous man," remarked Jose thoughtfully.  "He'll spend
+the last drop of blood in his body to keep this country for Spain.
+He's Loyalist and Royalist to the core.  It's a pity, too, because he
+is fighting for a lost cause."
+
+"The more honour to him!" I answered warmly.
+
+"Just so," exclaimed Jose, with a queer smile; "but, all the same, he
+makes things more difficult for us."
+
+"Well, put him on one side now.  Tell me your own adventures, and where
+you were when my message reached Lima."
+
+"On the way there.  When the schooner foundered, I reckoned it was all
+over.  I went down to a great depth, but, as luck would have it, came
+up just clear of a broken mast.  One of the sailors was holding to it,
+and I joined him, though without any hope of being saved.  You know I'm
+pretty strong, but I was helpless in that wild sea.  The waves just
+flung me about anyhow.  The other chap lasted an hour or two, when down
+he went with a scream, and I heard no more of him.  But I needn't dwell
+on the horrors of that night; you had a strong taste of them yourself.
+About daybreak I was flung like a spent ball on to a sandy beach.  I
+had just strength to crawl a few yards further up, and then collapsed.
+It seems some Indians carried me away, and nursed me back to health,
+but for weeks I was wild as a loon.  They searched the coast, but found
+nothing, and I concluded you were at the bottom of the sea.  Then I got
+a passage to Pisco in a coasting brig, and from there made my way
+overland to Callao."
+
+"Where you heard I was alive?"
+
+"Yes; I hardly know whether I stood on my head or my heels when I was
+told.  It was old Mr. Warren who informed me.  I went to him because I
+dared not go to your mother.  I was afraid that--"
+
+"All right; I understand."
+
+"So I went to Warren, and he began a long yarn; but as soon as he said
+you were alive, I was off like a shot to Lima."
+
+Then he talked of my mother, repeating the messages she had given him,
+and I could have listened for hours.  As it was, I plied him with
+questions, asking this and that--if my pony was well; had he seen Rosa
+Montilla; was my mother less sad; and a hundred other things, many of
+them trivial enough, yet full of interest to me.
+
+At the end I asked how he had found his way to the Hidden Valley.
+
+"Oh!" replied he with a jolly laugh, "that was simple.  I hunted up
+your black-browed bandit, who passed me on to one of his band.  How he
+found the way I can't tell you, but he brought me along all right."
+
+"And now what are we going to do?"
+
+"Well, that depends.  If the Spaniards give in, we can just go quietly
+back home."
+
+"And if they don't?"
+
+"Well, in that case--"
+
+"We must join General San Martin!" I exclaimed.
+
+"I suppose so," he said, half reluctantly.  "You're only a boy, but
+there are many youngsters of your age with the army, and you've a big
+stake in the country.  But we can afford to let that matter stand for a
+day or two longer."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI.
+
+WE LEAVE THE HIDDEN VALLEY
+
+Now, before proceeding with my story, it will be well to mention here one
+piece of information which Jose, not caring, perhaps, to add to my
+troubles, did not give me.  Indeed, very little was said about it at any
+time, for reasons which will be clear to any one who makes himself
+acquainted with this narrative.
+
+On the very morning after my flight from Lima, a servant of the
+government paid my mother a visit of official importance.  He brought
+with him a notable document full of curious legal phrases, which, put in
+simple language, meant that all my father's vast estates had been
+confiscated and given over to that loyal and worthy Spaniard Don Felipe
+Montilla.  As an act of mercy, my mother was permitted to retain the
+house and grounds at Lima during her lifetime.
+
+In presenting this famous letter, the messenger was, of course, only
+doing his duty, but it is certain that in some way he failed in the
+respect due to a noble lady.  He may have been one of those mean-spirited
+people who delight in trampling on the fallen.  There are, strange to
+say, many such in the world.
+
+My mother never alluded to the incident, which was related to me by Tomas
+Peraza, an old and faithful servant, next in importance to Jose himself.
+
+"The man had been with my lady nearly an hour," said he, in describing
+the event, "when her bell rang, and I went into the room.  She stood in
+the centre of the apartment, her cheeks very red, and her eyes flashing
+like summer stars.
+
+"'Peraza,' she exclaimed, 'our house has fallen very low, but even so its
+members brook insolence from no man.  Bid my servants bring stout sticks
+and chastise this rude fellow back to the place from which he came!'
+
+"You may be sure that I lost no time in obeying.  The fellow drew his
+sword even in the presence of a lady; but it was knocked from his grasp,
+and we drove him from the grounds with blows and buffets.  It was a
+strange spectacle, and the people came flocking to us in crowds.  At
+first they would have interfered, but on hearing me cry, 'This for
+insulting the Donna Maria Crawford!' they desisted.  And in this way we
+pursued him right to the Government House, where he flung himself upon
+the protection of the soldiers."
+
+It was a harsh measure, perhaps; but then no man should be wanting in
+respect to a woman, and the fellow had but himself to blame.
+
+Jose, as I have said, withheld the news, or I should have gone at all
+risks to Lima.  As it was, I stayed contentedly in the valley, waiting
+until the Indians received the signal to move.
+
+From that time we heard rumours of hard fighting in various parts of the
+country, and about the middle of March 1821 a messenger arrived from
+Raymon Sorillo.  He brought the order for thirty men to march to Pisco,
+on the sea-coast, where a small patriot detachment had landed under the
+command of Colonel Miller.
+
+"A countryman of ours, Jack," remarked Jose, "and, from what I hear, one
+of the finest fellows in South America.  The patriots think almost as
+much of him as they do of the famous Lord Cochrane."
+
+"What is he like?"
+
+"I haven't seen him; but he is quite young--not twenty-four yet--though
+he has been soldiering for the last eight years.  He served under
+Wellington in Spain, fought all through the Chilian War, was Cochrane's
+right-hand man at the capture of Valdivia, and now he has come to help
+us.  He has been shipwrecked, taken prisoner, wounded times out of
+number, blown up by a powder explosion--after which he was confined for
+six weeks in a dark room and fed through a plaster mask--and nearly
+killed by fever.  I should say he has crowded as much excitement into his
+life as any man in the world."
+
+"He seems to be a lively customer!"
+
+"He is," laughed Jose; "and nothing will ever kill him, in my opinion!"
+
+"Don't you think we might join him?" I asked, my blood being fired by
+Jose's description.
+
+"Well," said my companion, after a pause, "that's what I was about to
+suggest.  You must throw in somewhere, and I'm not over anxious for
+Sorillo to get hold of you.  He's a cruel fellow, though kind enough to
+us, and all the cut-throats in the country are likely to flock to him.
+I'm sorry for the Spaniards who fall into his hands!"
+
+Quilca was rather opposed to our plans, but finding us determined, he at
+last agreed that we should accompany him on the next expedition.
+
+Day had but just broken when we rode from the valley and I turned to take
+a farewell glance at the place which had been my home so long.  I had not
+been altogether unhappy there, yet I was glad to go into the world again,
+to take the first step on the road to Lima and my mother.
+
+The march to Pisco passed without incident.  We suffered horribly, it is
+true, from thirst, and from choking, blinding sandstorms; but there were
+no Spaniards in that desolate district to bar our way.
+
+A few hours' march from the town we fell in with some Indian scouts, and
+learned from them that the Patriots lay encamped in the Chincha Baja, a
+beautiful valley.  Our joy at these tidings was, however, soon dashed by
+the report that they were in a deplorable condition--suffering from fever
+and ague, and unable to move.
+
+The gloomy picture was not overdrawn.  The valley was a hospital, but
+almost destitute of doctors and medicine.  The sentries, selected from
+the strongest of the troops, could barely stand, staggering even under
+the weight of their muskets.  Privates and officers alike were prostrate,
+and a score of strong men could have killed them all without effort.
+
+As it chanced, the enemy, stationed in an adjoining valley, though
+suffering less severely, were in no condition to make an attack, and the
+two parties could do no more than idly watch each other.
+
+Ordering his men to dismount, Quilca went to find an officer, and soon
+returned with the startling intelligence that the colonel himself lay
+dangerously ill in one of the huts.
+
+"Not an encouraging start!" I remarked.
+
+"A bad beginning often makes a good ending," answered Jose cheerfully.
+"Let us go to see him."
+
+The doctor, a Spaniard, was attending his patient when we entered the
+hut, and he beckoned us toward the bed.
+
+I could not repress a start at the sight which met our eyes.  The colonel
+was turning restlessly but feebly from side to side; his eyes were
+unnaturally bright; his cheek bones stood out sharp and prominent.  He
+mumbled to himself in short snatches, but so faintly that only a word
+here and there reached us.
+
+Once he smiled pleasantly, saying, "Yes, I see the steeple!  Dear old
+Wingham!"
+
+I did not at that time understand the allusion, but afterwards it became
+plain that he referred to his home, the home of his childhood, a place
+called Wingham, in Kent.
+
+"Do you know," said Jose sharply, turning to the doctor, "that your
+patient is dying?"
+
+"Perfectly; but what can I do?" replied he.  "He is suffering from the
+tertian ague; the valley is permeated with it."
+
+"We must get him out of it," said Jose, with decision.
+
+"But where will you take him? the town is as bad."
+
+"On shipboard, and give him a sea-breeze."
+
+"The Chilian squadron is absent, cruising."
+
+"Then we must beg, borrow, or steal a trading-vessel; for go he must and
+shall."
+
+It was wonderful how the doctor brightened up at these words, and still
+more wonderful how he allowed himself to be commanded by a stranger.  But
+Jose was a strong man though not often exerting his strength, and there
+was that in his face which made most men chary of coming to handgrips
+with him.
+
+"Come, Jack," said he, "let us go to the bay and find a ship, if we wish
+to save the colonel's life.  Another week of this pestilence and he will
+be dead, and Peru can't afford to lose him just yet."
+
+"But suppose," said I, as we rode away from the valley, "that the
+authorities won't allow him to be moved?"
+
+"Why, we'll move him in spite of them.  Quilca's men can be trusted to
+help us.  'Twill be a little campaign on our own account!" said he, with
+a jovial laugh.
+
+Even Jose, however, could not impress a vessel that had no existence, and
+the bay was empty.  A few boats only lay peacefully resting on the placid
+waters, but of a ship there was no sign.  We stood for an hour staring
+seaward, as if our will could conjure up a vessel, and then returned to
+the town.  We paid a visit to the governor, but he could not help us.  It
+was unlikely there would be a vessel, he said, until Lord Cochrane
+returned with the squadron from Callao.
+
+"When will that be?" I asked.
+
+The governor gave his shoulders an expressive shrug.
+
+"The gallant Englishman does not confide in me," he replied.  "He may
+come to-day; he may not come for a twelvemonth."
+
+It was getting late now, and nothing further could be done till the
+following morning.  Jose was disappointed, but in no way disheartened.
+
+"If we can't get what we want," said he, "we must be satisfied with what
+we can get.  There's a fine bit of philosophy for you!"
+
+"And what can we get?"
+
+"A house at the seaside.  We'll look for a sheltered place on the beach
+to-morrow, bring down some men to build a hut, and have the colonel
+removed to it.  With the sea air filling his lungs, he may yet have a
+chance of recovery."
+
+Instead of returning to camp, we slept that night at Pisco, and after an
+early breakfast went again to the beach.  Jose had just selected an
+admirable spot for the hut, when we suddenly heard a shout of "Sail ho!
+sail ho! There's another--and another!  Why, it must be Cochrane's
+squadron!"
+
+In an instant we were gazing seaward, and there, sure enough, rounding
+the corner of the bay, were several vessels, led by a stately ship.
+
+By this time a number of people had assembled, and more were coming in
+hot haste from the town.  They talked and gesticulated violently--the
+majority, I observed being doubtful if the incoming vessels were friends
+or foes.
+
+As they drew nearer, however, all misgiving vanished, every one agreeing
+that the leading ship was the _San Martin_, so named in honour of the
+great general.
+
+"The luck's with us!" cried Jose joyfully.  "Before nightfall we'll have
+the colonel on board one of those craft.  How beautifully the admiral's
+ship is handled! she comes sweeping in like a great sea-bird."
+
+"Hadn't we better get a couple of men to pull us out to her? she'll
+anchor soon."
+
+"The very thing! we can't afford to lose time."
+
+Our arrangements did not take long to make, and we were soon speeding
+across the bay, our crazy boat being propelled by two wiry Indians.  The
+whole squadron was now well within the bay, the smaller craft lying close
+in, and flying the Chilian colours; but Jose directed the boatmen to pull
+for the flagship.
+
+"_San Martin_ ahoy!" he yelled, standing up in the stern and hailing the
+ship in what he believed to be sailor fashion.
+
+"Hullo!  Who are you?" came the answer.
+
+"Is Admiral Cochrane on board?"
+
+"Well, he was a minute ago."
+
+"Throw a rope, will you? we're coming up."
+
+This conversation was carried on in English, for many officers in the
+Chilian navy were Englishmen; and now the man on the _San Martin_
+exclaimed, "Well, you're a cool customer anyhow!  Walt a bit while I tell
+the captain."
+
+"Hang the captain!" roared Jose; "it's a matter of life and death."  And
+those on deck, seeing how terribly in earnest he was, flung over a rope,
+and we scrambled up the ship's side.
+
+"Now, my man," exclaimed a sharp voice, "what is it you are in such a
+tremendous hurry about?"
+
+"I want to see Lord Cochrane immediately," said Jose.
+
+"His lordship is engaged in his cabin.  Give your message to me."
+
+"I prefer to manage my own business, thank you," replied Jose coolly.
+"Tell the admiral I have come from Colonel Miller."
+
+As he finished speaking, a distinguished-looking officer, accompanied by
+several others, appeared on deck, and I knew instinctively that we were
+in the presence of the famous Admiral Cochrane, whose marvellous exploits
+had gained for him the admiration of the world.
+
+Hearing the name of Miller, he stopped, and looking at us, said, "What is
+that about Colonel Miller?"
+
+"He is dying, sir!" exclaimed Jose, as much at ease with an admiral as
+with a private sailor.  "His men are all down with ague, and the colonel
+will be dead inside a week unless you remove him at once."
+
+"Mr. Welsh," remarked the admiral to a handsome young fellow standing
+near, "this is your affair.  Do whatever you think best; but remember, I
+would rather lose a ship than Miller.  He's the one man we can rely upon
+ashore."  Then looking at us, he added, "You are not soldiers?"
+
+
+"This lad," replied Jose, pointing to me, "is Jack Crawford.  His father
+was one of the largest landowners in Peru, and a great patriot.  The
+Spaniards shot him some time ago, and the boy has been hiding ever since.
+Yesterday we arrived at Pisco to join the detachment there, as
+volunteers, and found the colonel delirious with fever.  A few days
+longer in camp will finish him."
+
+"He shall be removed at once," exclaimed the Admiral.--"Captain
+Wilkinson, will you order a boat to be lowered!" and then he began to
+question Jose further concerning the condition of the troops.
+
+Very quickly the boat was got ready, Mr. Welsh took his seat, and at his
+suggestion we followed, giving instructions to our own men to return to
+shore.
+
+"Are you a doctor?" asked Jose of our companion.
+
+"Yes; I am Lord Cochrane's private surgeon, though, fortunately, he gives
+me but little work to do," and he laughed merrily.  I have said that he
+was a handsome fellow, with a boyish, fresh-coloured face, and bright,
+sparkling eyes.  He talked to us cheerfully about the campaign, and would
+not allow that Colonel Miller was in danger of dying.
+
+"You don't know him as well as we do," he said, with a laugh.  "Most men
+who had been through what he has would be dead already; but Miller stands
+alone.  The last time we brought him from Pisco he had a ball in the
+right arm, another had smashed his left hand, while a third had gone
+through his chest, fractured a rib, and passed out at the back.  Of
+course we gave him up, but he pulled through comfortably."
+
+"Well, he is pretty bad now," said Jose significantly.
+
+"He'll be leading a bayonet charge in a month," laughed the young
+surgeon, "if the war lasts as long.  For my part, I expect it to be over
+sooner."
+
+"I had no idea," said I, "that the Spaniards would be beaten so easily."
+
+"The odds are all against them, you see.  Lord Cochrane has scooped up
+their navy, San Martin is waiting to pounce on Lima, they have to watch
+General Bolivar in the north, and most of the people are in favour of the
+revolution.  Hullo! here we are!  I suppose you'll come with me to the
+camp?"
+
+"Yes," said Jose, "and back to the ship if you will let us.  We can do no
+good here."
+
+"All right.  I daresay we can find you a berth."
+
+The young surgeon came near to losing his self-possession when he saw the
+actual state of things.
+
+"Whew!" exclaimed he, "this will have to be altered.  Why, the men are
+dying on their feet!  And I suppose it's the same old story--not enough
+doctors, no proper attendants, and musty drugs.  Well, we'll clear the
+colonel out of it first, and then see what can be done for the others."
+
+While he attended to his patient, we had a litter made ready, in which
+the colonel was placed and carried to the water's edge, where the ship's
+boat was in waiting.  The sailors rowed steadily and well, and we soon
+had the satisfaction of seeing the sick man comfortably installed in one
+of the ship's cabins.
+
+Lord Cochrane showed the greatest concern at his old friend's shocking
+condition, and did everything possible to help forward his recovery.
+
+As it chanced, I was much in the sick man's cabin; the doctor, to whom I
+had taken a singular liking, using me as a sort of assistant.  In the
+early evening he went ashore with the admiral, who also took Jose with
+him, and together they visited the sick camp.  It was late when they
+returned, but our patient had suffered no hurt during their absence.
+Indeed he lay very still and quiet, while from time to time I wiped the
+sweat from his brow and gave him cooling drinks.
+
+Jose did not come into the cabin again, but I heard from the doctor that
+it had been decided to bring the soldiers on board, in the hope that a
+sea voyage would set up their strength.  Our own particular Indians
+returned to the Hidden Valley, but in the course of a day or two the rest
+of the troops were embarked on the flagship.  Then we stood out to sea,
+bearing southward, the other vessels of the squadron taking the opposite
+direction.
+
+Thanks partly to the young surgeon's skill, but chiefly, perhaps, to his
+own marvellous constitution, the colonel began to mend slowly.  The fever
+abated, he was able to take some nourishing food, and at last a day came
+when we carried him on deck.
+
+It was extraordinary to behold the joy with which his appearance was
+greeted, not only by his own troops, but by every man on board.  Some of
+them knew him only by report, but most of the sailors had witnessed his
+daring deeds, while the marines had taken part in them.
+
+The officers, too, from the admiral downward, came about him, and though
+too weak as yet for much talk, he acknowledged their kindness by a
+charming and fascinating smile.
+
+At the end of an hour the doctor gave orders that he should be carried
+back to his cabin, saying with a laugh, "That's enough excitement for the
+first day, colonel.  Mustn't overdo it, you know."
+
+Whether it was the bracing effect of the fresh sea air, or the sight of
+his men's most obvious improvement, I know not, but from that day his
+strength increased with astonishing rapidity.
+
+During this period of convalescence he talked with me a good deal, and in
+the kindest manner, so that shortly I became as ardent a hero-worshipper
+as the others.  He sent for Jose, too, thanked him for his prompt action,
+and declared that in a sense he was indebted to him for his life.
+
+"But," said he, smiling, "I don't know yet who you are, or how you came
+to turn up at Pisco just at the right moment!"  Whereupon Jose gave him
+an outline of our story.
+
+He listened attentively, and at the end said, "I have heard of your
+father, my boy, through General San Martin, who will be glad to make your
+acquaintance.  Meanwhile I shall charge myself with your welfare--that
+is, if you care to share my fortunes."
+
+"I ask for nothing better, sir," I replied, flushing with pleasure.
+"There is no leader I would rather choose to follow."
+
+"Then you shall have your wish," said he, "unless the general finds other
+work for you."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VII.
+
+WHOM THE GODS LOVE DIE YOUNG.
+
+It was, I believe, Lord Cochrane's desire to land his troops close to
+the port of Arica; but two unsuccessful attempts having been made, the
+plan was abandoned.
+
+Colonel Miller, who had by this time resumed his duties, next
+transferred his men to two small schooners captured from the enemy, and
+having taken on board food and water sufficient for twenty-four hours,
+set sail for the Morro de Sama, a miserable port ten leagues north of
+Arica.
+
+Jose and I accompanied him, as did also, to my great delight, the young
+doctor.  Our two vessels were crazy craft: they had only temporary
+rudders, and it was impossible to steer with any degree of accuracy.
+Owing to this the trip occupied just double the calculated time, so
+that on landing we were half dead with hunger and thirst.  The soldiers
+still suffered somewhat from the effects of the ague: their legs
+tottered under them, and at first they could not march longer than half
+an hour at a time without lying down to rest.
+
+You must not, however, suppose that we were at all downhearted on this
+account.  The men had the greatest confidence in their leader, while
+the gaiety and high spirits of the young doctor acted as a fine tonic.
+He was full of quips and cranks, and his merry sayings brought a smile
+to the faces of even the most wearied.
+
+A winding path three miles in length brought us to the summit of a
+steep mountain, where we stopped awhile to rest, and to enjoy the
+refreshing breeze.
+
+"Well, Crawford," exclaimed the doctor cheerfully, when we once more
+resumed the march, "how do you like being on active service?  A
+pleasant change, isn't it, from being cooped up on board ship?"
+
+At the moment I hardly agreed with him, but I made an effort to reply
+to his banter.
+
+Only to a few of us was the really desperate nature of our expedition
+known.  Of the Spaniards we entertained no manner of fear; the sole
+terror lay in the route to be traversed.  We were already parched by
+thirst, and more than twenty miles of sandy desert lay between us and
+water.
+
+Nor was this all.  Only one man knew the route, and years had gone by
+since he had last travelled over it.  If his strength or memory failed,
+it might well happen that the dreary desert would be our burial-place
+and the loose sand our winding-sheet.  It was not exactly a cheering
+prospect, but we made the best of it.
+
+The colonel marched at the head of his men, the doctor at the rear, so
+that he might assist any unfortunate stragglers, while Jose and I went
+forward with the guide.
+
+With frequent halts for rest we ploughed our way through the shifting
+sand, our eyes aching and our throats terribly dry.
+
+About midnight, as near as I could judge, the guide stopped
+irresolutely.
+
+"What is it?" asked Jose, in an excited whisper; "what is wrong?"
+
+We could not see the fellow's face, but he seemed very agitated, and
+there was a break in his voice as he answered,--
+
+"I don't know--I am not sure--but I can't be certain that we are on the
+right track."
+
+The words sounded like a sentence of death, and I could hardly repress
+a cry of horror.
+
+"Be still!" whispered Jose; "the men must not know.  Stay here a minute
+while I ask the colonel to halt.  That will give us a little
+breathing-space."
+
+He was soon back, and taking the guide's arm, he exclaimed,--
+
+"Now come, get your wits about you, and let us see what can be done.
+Where do you think we ought to be?"
+
+"I don't know," replied the guide helplessly.  "The saints preserve us,
+or we are lost!"
+
+"Now look here," said Jose sternly: "you are giving way, and that won't
+do.  Pluck up your courage, man, and remember that all our lives are in
+your hands."
+
+I think, perhaps, this awful responsibility had much to do with
+breaking the guide down.  He wrung his hands and groaned, saying aloud
+that he had brought us to death.
+
+"But we aren't dead yet," I remarked, "and needn't be if only you will
+collect your wits.  Come, let us cast about a bit; maybe you'll find
+some landmark that will help you."
+
+"No, no," he cried; "we may be right now, and if we stray away we shall
+certainly be lost.  May the saints preserve us!"
+
+I think the fellow would be there yet, but for the click of Jose's
+pistol and the stern ring in his voice as he said sharply,--
+
+"This nonsense has to stop.--Take his arm, Jack.--Now go on without a
+word, until you can make up your mind one way or other about the route."
+
+The next quarter of an hour was one of the worst in my life.  The man
+stumbled this way and that, now going in a straight line, again turning
+to right or left, and all the time the troops in our rear were resting
+in fancied security.  I shuddered to think what would happen if the
+guide failed to locate the track.  Suddenly he ran forward quickly,
+dragging me with him, and then uttered a joyful cry.  We were at the
+foot of a sandy hillock of peculiar shape, much like, as far as I could
+tell, a truncated cone.
+
+It was not high, but apparently of considerable circumference.
+
+The guide laughed and wept like a man bereft of his senses, and then
+crying, "We are saved!" he straightway fell on his knees and offered up
+a prayer of thanksgiving.  The strangely-shaped hillock showed him that
+thus far he had led us correctly; and although during the night he had
+several further twinges of alarm, he did not lose his nerve again.
+
+As mile after mile was traversed our thirst became excruciatingly
+painful, and there was no chance of relief.  Between us and the valley
+of Sama no drop of water would be found.  Still we plodded on, parched
+and weary, until in the eastern sky the dawn rose slowly.  For just a
+brief period we felt the cold, damp, but refreshing breath of morning,
+and then the hot sun added to our misery.  Our heads were scorched by
+its burning rays, and we were almost blinded by the glare reflected
+from the deep, loose sand.
+
+It was nearly nine o'clock when the guide, extending his arm,
+exclaimed, "Sama--water!"  And looking ahead, we caught a glimpse of
+the cool green vegetation in the Sama valley.
+
+Under other circumstances it would have been laughable to watch the
+effect produced by our near approach to the valley.  What semblance of
+order the colonel had kept on the march vanished.  Breaking their
+ranks, the men rushed forward eagerly in search of the welcome water.
+One who for the last mile had been crawling along, supported by the
+doctor, darted off like a champion runner, though he fell exhausted
+before covering half the distance.  On reaching the sparkling stream,
+we all, without exception, flung ourselves down by the margin, and
+lapped the water like thirsty dogs.
+
+Here we remained till the next day, being supplied with food by the
+people from Sama, who also procured for us about a dozen horses, two of
+which, I am thankful to say, fell to Jose and myself.
+
+Most of the men, after eating and drinking, stretched themselves out on
+the grass, and were fast asleep in a moment; but our leader had much to
+do, and the cheery young doctor spent half his time in attending on the
+sick.  In this Jose helped him.  I wished to do so, but in truth the
+long march, and the want of food and water, had worn me out.
+
+"Lie down and get some rest," said the doctor, "or you will be left
+behind to-morrow.  We have another twelve leagues or so before us yet."
+
+"Where are we going?" I asked.
+
+"To a village called Tacna."
+
+"We call it a town," laughed Jose.  "Why, there are more than four
+thousand people living in it."
+
+"Dear me," exclaimed the doctor good-humouredly, "what a considerable
+place!"
+
+Attended by Jose, he passed on laughing, and I curled up in the
+sheltered nook which I had selected as bed and bedchamber in one.  I
+know nothing of what happened after that until Jose, shaking my arm,
+told me to rise.
+
+It was scarcely light; but the troops were already preparing their
+simple breakfast, for they had another long and tedious march before
+them.
+
+"How do you feel, Jack?" asked Jose.
+
+"All right, thank you," said I, giving myself a shake, "but
+tremendously hungry.  I could eat a horse!"
+
+At that he laughed, saying, "Before the campaign's over I daresay you
+will be glad to eat part of one"--a prophecy that was more than
+fulfilled.
+
+Directly after breakfast the men were assembled, the colonel addressed
+them in a few stirring words, and the march began.  We did not
+anticipate an attack, but a few sturdy and well-mounted peasants from
+Sama rode ahead to make sure that the route was clear.
+
+Outside Tacna we were met by the inhabitants, who escorted us, with
+much noise and cheering, in triumph to the town.
+
+"These worthy people are good patriots, Crawford," said the doctor, who
+was riding next me.  "Hark how they cry 'Down with the Spaniards!'  It
+is lucky for them that we are not part of the Spanish army."
+
+"As to that," I answered, "it is as easy to shout for one side as for
+the other.  It is only a matter of words, after all."
+
+"Well," he laughed, "if cheers were bullets, we need not go short of
+ammunition."
+
+We remained several days in Tacna, where I had the luck to be quartered
+on a wealthy Spanish merchant.  It was most amusing to be in his
+company, as he hated us like poison, and, in spite of himself, could
+hardly prevent his real sentiments from popping out at inconvenient
+times.  However, either from fear or from policy, he treated me well,
+and during our stay in the town I lived on the best of everything.
+This was an agreeable interlude in the making of war, and suited me
+admirably.
+
+Like all good things, it came to an end much too soon, and very
+suddenly.  Jose, the doctor, and I had been spending an evening with
+one of the principal inhabitants, and on coming away met the colonel.
+
+"I am pleased that you keep good hours," said he, with a smile.  "We
+march at dawn.  The Spaniards are moving in three detachments to
+intercept us; we must crush them one by one."
+
+"Well," exclaimed the doctor pleasantly, "we can't grumble; we have had
+a pleasant breathing-space."
+
+During our stay at Tacna we had received reinforcements, bringing our
+adventurous party up to four hundred and fifty, of which about a third
+part consisted of cavalry.  The few days' rest had recruited our
+strength, and we set out in high spirits for Buena Vista, a tiny hamlet
+at the foot of the Cordillera.
+
+As yet we had obtained no definite news of the enemy; but while we lay
+at Buena Vista, a native scout brought word that a strong Spanish force
+was stationed at Mirabe, a village some forty miles distant.  The
+colonel's resolution was instantly taken, and as soon as day broke we
+were once more moving.
+
+After we had left the valley, our route lay across a region where no
+blade of grass had ever grown.  As far as the eye reached, the scene
+was one of utter desolation.  The horses picked their steps gingerly,
+and the foot-soldiers stumbled along as best they could, tripping now
+and then over the stones and boulders that strewed the path.  All day
+long, with intervals for rest, we tramped, and the coming of night
+still found us pursuing the tedious journey.
+
+The last part was worse than the first.  For six miles the road
+descended amidst steep rocks and mighty precipices.  The pass was so
+narrow that we had to march in single file, each horseman on foot and
+leading his animal.  Had the Spaniards caught us there, not a man would
+have escaped.
+
+Slowly and carefully we descended in one long line, until at midnight
+we reached the rugged bank of the river which rushes through the Mirabe
+valley.  In a hollow on the opposite side lay the village, and behind
+the mud walls surrounding the cultivated grounds were the Spaniards,
+little dreaming of our proximity.
+
+"Now," exclaimed the colonel softly, "we have them in our power.  We
+have but to cross the river and fall upon their camp."
+
+He had already begun to give his orders, when the report of a
+pistol--fired, whether by accident or design, by one of our men--rang
+out, and all chance of a surprise vanished.  The Spaniards, in alarm,
+began firing rapidly, though they could not see us, a thick wood
+stretching between them and the river.
+
+"I'd hang that fellow," growled Jose.  "He's either a fool or a rogue,
+and has completely spoiled the colonel's plans."
+
+"Never mind," said the colonel cheerfully; "we must make new ones," and
+he immediately dispatched two rocket parties--one to the right, the
+other to the left--in order to engage the enemy's attention.
+
+Meanwhile each mounted man, taking up a foot-soldier behind him,
+crossed the river, and then returned for another, until in a short time
+all had safely effected a passage.  Then, unable to do more in the
+darkness, we lay down to wait for the coming of dawn.
+
+Many of the men fell fast asleep in spite of the random firing, but my
+mind was busy with thoughts of the approaching fight.
+
+About two o'clock, Dr. Welsh, who had been assisting the regular army
+surgeons, came and lay down beside me.
+
+"Well, Crawford," said he, finding I was awake, "how do you like the
+music?  Rather alarming at first, eh?  But you'll get used to it.
+After hearing the bullets swish round your ears a time or two you'll
+think nothing of it."
+
+"That may be," I replied, "but it is distinctly unpleasant just now."
+
+He laughed, saying the fight would be only a skirmish at the most, and
+not worth considering.
+
+"Are you going to stay with us?" I asked.
+
+"Oh no," said he; "this is only a run ashore, just to stretch my legs a
+bit, you know.  They get cramped on board ship.  By George, those
+fellows intend serenading us till daybreak.  Who's that on the other
+side of you--Craig?"
+
+"Yes--sound asleep and snoring.  I wish I were."
+
+"Ah, no doubt he has a clear conscience.  Take pattern by him, my boy."
+
+"Thanks for the advice," said I, laughing; "it's very kind of you to
+offer it."
+
+"It costs nothing," he answered banteringly; "which explains why so
+many people are willing to give it."
+
+After a time I fell asleep, and did not waken till, at the first streak
+of dawn, an order was quietly passed through the lines for every man to
+hold himself in readiness.
+
+Jose sat up, rubbed his eyes lazily, and declared that he could sleep
+another twenty-four hours.
+
+"There's too much hurry and bustle about this kind of warfare," said
+he.  "Why don't both sides agree to meet at a certain place, and to
+fight it out?"
+
+"A famous plan, upon my word!" cried the doctor; "it would save no end
+of trouble."
+
+"And get the business over quickly," said Jose, who was saddling up.
+"Hullo, there goes the colonel!  I wonder if he ever gets tired?"
+
+"No," laughed the doctor merrily; "he's made of iron."
+
+The dawn was broadening now; and moving from the shelter of the wood,
+we saw the Spaniards on a level piece of ground about half a mile wide.
+
+"They're trying to gain the ridge on the left," cried Jose; "that will
+give them the advantage."
+
+But the colonel had seen the manoeuvre also, and flung his small body
+of cavalry at them with such force that they drew back, trying to
+retreat by the winding track through the mountains.  Again they were
+intercepted, this time being forced to the edge of a precipitous cliff.
+
+"By George," exclaimed the doctor, "they're in it now!  It's neck or
+nothing with them."
+
+All this time I had quietly sat on my horse, watching the phases of the
+fight.  The scene was to me so extraordinary that I had no sense of
+fear.  I was not upset even by the strange, wailing sounds made by the
+rushing bullets.
+
+Jose and I were with the reserve cavalry; Welsh was at the colonel's
+side.  The Spaniards fought with desperate courage, I could see that,
+and they pushed our men hard.  Fallen soldiers dotted the level tract
+of ground.  Some, raising themselves painfully, began to crawl back.
+
+I make no pretence of giving an accurate description of the combat.  To
+me it was a confused medley of men and horses inextricably mixed; of
+shining swords, of blinding red flashes; and my ears were deafened with
+the fierce cries and shouts of men spending their lives recklessly
+under the rising sun.
+
+At last I saw the colonel raise his sword.  Then he shouted something
+in Spanish, whereat, gathering up the reins in my left hand, I spurred
+my horse, to keep company with the rest.
+
+"A firm seat, Jack; keep a firm seat!" cried a familiar voice in my
+ear; and there was Jose, riding as coolly as if taking a canter over
+the grounds of our park at home!
+
+We were riding at no great pace, but all well together, when again the
+colonel's voice rang out, and we broke instantly into a gallop.  Then
+in a flash I saw a body of Spanish cavalry drawn up to receive us,
+while from our left came a stinging hail of bullets.
+
+A man close to me dropped his sword with a cry of pain, and the next
+moment his horse, taking the bit between its teeth, rushed madly to the
+front.  I watched its progress with queer fascination.  On it went,
+right through the Spaniards, who edged aside to let it pass, straight
+to the brink of the precipice, over which it fell, still carrying its
+hapless rider.  It seemed to me that I heard his shriek, though that
+must have been fancy, as it could not have risen above the tumult of
+the fight.
+
+"Forward!" roared the colonel, waving his sword, and the next instant
+we were in the midst of the throng.  The young doctor was just in front
+of me, Jose on my right hand, and the men pressing close behind.  I saw
+nothing of the fight save that part only which concerned myself.  Again
+and again the shining steel was within a hair's-breadth of me--now at
+my head, now at my heart--while I was almost suffocated in the press.
+
+Inch by inch, by sheer force of steel, we threaded our way through,
+re-formed on the further side, and, still headed by the colonel, dashed
+once more into the fray.  This time the resistance was less obstinate.
+The Spaniards began to weary--to fall back, as if unable to hold their
+ground.
+
+"Hurrah!" cried the young doctor, "hurrah! they're done for!"
+
+I shall not easily forget the picture he made.  His handsome face was
+flushed with excitement, his beautiful eyes were ablaze with light; he
+sat his horse erect as a young sapling.  A handsomer or finer man could
+not have been.
+
+I saw the tragedy from beginning to end, but could do nothing to
+prevent it.  It was over quick as a flash of summer lightning.  Before
+us rode a Spanish officer, calling fiercely on his men to come back.
+At the sound of the doctor's triumphant note he turned, and I saw his
+face black with anger.
+
+"Ah, Englishman!" he cried savagely; and even as he spoke his left arm
+rose, there was a flash, a report, and the doctor fell forward on his
+horse's neck.
+
+"See to him, Crawford!" cried the colonel huskily; and as I clutched
+the animal's bridle, the troopers swept on in hurricane fury, while
+from all parts of the battlefield there rose a cry of triumph.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VIII.
+
+A FRIENDLY OPPONENT.
+
+I had known the young English doctor only a short time, but I had
+learned to love him as a dear friend.  In the fight he had shown
+himself brave and fearless, but quite apart from this, his qualities
+endeared him to every one.  He was always cheery and full of hope, even
+in our worst straits; he was tender-hearted as a child, and every sick
+or wounded soldier worshipped him for his unvarying attention and
+kindness.
+
+He was not dead when, slipping from my horse, I placed my arm round him
+as well as I could to support him.  I saw that his eyes were open, and
+that a beautiful smile lit up his face.  For a second or two he
+recognized me and tried to speak, but this was beyond his powers.  Then
+a change came swiftly and suddenly; the light faded from his eyes, his
+cheeks grew ashen gray, and though quite unfamiliar with death, I knew
+that his spirit had fled.
+
+Some wounded Indians, staggering from the fight, helped me to place the
+lifeless body on the ground; and these poor, simple natives filled the
+air with their lamentations.  The death of the brilliant young surgeon
+had deprived them of a good friend, and they were quick to show their
+grief.
+
+The fight was now over.  The majority of the Spaniards were either
+killed or captured; but no one took much pleasure in the well-earned
+little victory.  From the chief to the meanest soldier in the
+detachment, every one mourned sincerely the loss of a trusty comrade.
+
+On active service, however, one has not much time to spend in grieving.
+There were the dead to be buried, the wounded to be seen to, the
+prisoners to be secured, and then, after a short space for food and
+rest, we were marching in hot pursuit of the scanty remnant that had
+escaped.
+
+"It's lucky," observed Jose, with a laugh, "that the colonel managed to
+procure a few horses."
+
+"His command would have been one short without them," I replied.
+
+We were by no means a smart-looking detachment.  The officers rode on
+horseback, and a number of mules had been obtained for the men, who
+followed the system of _ride and tie_.  Our clothes began to show signs
+of hard wear, we suffered much from hunger and thirst, and most of all
+from loss of sleep.  This last was really a terrible hardship, and I
+noticed more than one poor fellow fall from his mule in a kind of
+stupor as I rode along.
+
+However, by dint of pegging away, we arrived at the town of Moquegua
+just in time to capture most of the runaways, and then, utterly worn
+out and exhausted, gladly settled down for a few days' rest.
+
+Jose and I were billeted in a house near the colonel's quarters, and
+the people gave us a warm welcome.  They spread a good meal, to which
+we did ample justice, and then, although barely noon, we went straight
+to bed.
+
+"I hope," exclaimed Jose as he lay down, "that we shan't be disturbed
+for a month.  I can easily do with a month's sleep."
+
+"The chances are," said I gloomily, "that the colonel will be knocking
+us up before we have fairly begun to dream."  At which dismal prophecy
+Jose threatened me with all sorts of pains and penalties unless I held
+my peace.
+
+As it happened, the colonel did not need us, and we actually slept
+without waking until nine o'clock the next morning, when, having made a
+hearty breakfast, we went to call upon the chief.
+
+"Why, Crawford," exclaimed the colonel, smiling, "I thought you were
+lost!"
+
+"Only in dreams, sir," I replied.  "We've been catching up a little of
+our lost sleep.  We did not know how soon we might be on the march
+again."
+
+"So you made the most of your opportunity?  Well, I don't blame you;
+but it is possible we shall make a long halt here."
+
+"Possible," remarked Jose to me afterwards, "but not probable;" and
+events proved that, as far as we were concerned, he was right.
+
+That evening the colonel invited us to dinner; but we had scarcely sat
+down when he was called away to speak to a messenger who had brought
+important news.  He returned looking rather thoughtful, and, catching
+sight of Jose, exclaimed,--
+
+"Craig, you are pretty well acquainted with the Indian dialects, I
+believe?"
+
+"Yes, sir," answered Jose readily; "I can manage to talk with most of
+the natives."
+
+"Then you are the very man I want.  I'll tell you all about it after
+dinner.  Mustn't send you off without satisfying the inner man, eh?"
+
+Jose glanced at me with a smile, as much as to say, "I wasn't very far
+out this morning;" while I was all curiosity as to what the business
+might be.
+
+As soon as we had finished, the colonel and Jose had a very earnest and
+confidential talk, after which my companion rejoined me, and together
+we left the room.
+
+"What is it?" I asked anxiously; "anything of importance?"
+
+"Rather, unless the Indian has made a mistake.  La Hera is hiding with
+a few wounded men in the mountains, not a dozen miles away."
+
+This was the Spanish leader whom we had defeated at Mirabe.  He was a
+bold, dashing soldier, and a firm Loyalist, whose capture would deal
+the enemy a heavy blow.
+
+"Get the horses ready," said Jose, "while I pick out a few men.  We
+mustn't make a mess of this affair, or the colonel won't trust us
+again.  And don't mention where we are going, up at the house.  I
+daresay the folks are all right, but what they don't know they can't
+tell."
+
+"Where shall I meet you?"
+
+"Outside the colonel's quarters.  Now, off with you, we've no time to
+waste."
+
+The horses had benefited by their unusually long rest, and having
+saddled them with the help of one of our host's servants, I led them
+into the street.  Jose soon appeared with a dozen mounted men, wild,
+fierce-looking fellows, and all natives.
+
+Presently the guide came out, and directly afterwards the colonel, who
+spoke a few words, telling us that we were bound on an important
+errand, which he trusted we should accomplish successfully.  Then the
+guide placed himself, on foot, beside Jose's horse, and we moved off.
+
+He led us at first, purposely, in a wrong direction, in case of prying
+eyes, turning back at the end of a mile or so, and then steering across
+a wild and lonely desert track.  Having covered nearly a dozen miles,
+we came to a tiny hamlet at the foot of the mountains.  Halting here,
+we left our horses in charge of two men and pressed forward on foot.
+
+Fortunately, in one way though not in another, it was a moonlight
+night, and we could see where to step.  All around us towered huge
+mountains, grim and forbidding.  We marched in single file by the edge
+of steep precipices, so close sometimes that we seemed to hang over the
+awful abyss.  Further and further we penetrated into the dreary
+recesses.  We seemed to be a body of ghosts traversing a dreary world.
+No man spoke; we heard the cry neither of bird nor of animal.  The only
+sound to break the eerie silence was the occasional clatter of a stone,
+which, loosened by our passage, rolled over into the unknown depths.
+
+I looked neither to right nor to left, but kept my gaze fixed on Jose,
+who walked before me.  The track narrowed down so that it hardly
+afforded footing for one, and I prayed in my heart that we might soon
+come to a better vantage-ground.
+
+I was no coward, and since leaving home had met with more than one
+adventure, but this was the most perilous of all.  Despite every effort
+to keep firm, my limbs trembled, my head grew dizzy; I was seized by a
+strong temptation to launch myself into space.  The fit passed as
+suddenly as it had come, but I felt the sweat trickling down my face.
+
+Presently we emerged on to a broad platform, and Jose, stopping, seized
+my hand.  He was trembling now, but it was at the thought of danger
+past.  One by one the men stole cautiously along while we waited,
+watching with fascinated eyes, and drawing a deep breath of relief as
+each stepped safely from the perilous path.  Whether they had also felt
+fearful I could not tell; their faces were wonderfully impassive, and,
+except when roused by savage anger, quite expressionless.
+
+At a sign from Jose they dropped to the ground behind a group of
+boulders, and he, addressing them in some Indian dialect, issued his
+instructions.  I gathered very little from his speech; but presently
+the men disappeared, gliding like serpents along the side of the
+cliffs, and leaving me with Jose and the guide.
+
+"I don't much like this, Jack," said Jose.  "I almost wish you had
+stayed behind.  I hope the colonel can depend on this fellow."
+
+"What is it?" I asked.  "I suppose we didn't come out just for the
+pleasure of exercising ourselves on that goat-track?"
+
+"No," said he; "though, to be sure, that was an uncommon diversion.
+The real thing is just about to begin, and this is the way of it.
+According to the guide, La Hera is in a cave close at hand."
+
+"All the more chance of trapping him."
+
+"I'm not so sure of that.  The entrance to the cave is some sixty feet
+from the ground, in the side of a steep cliff."
+
+"Well, we've had some experience in mountain-climbing."
+
+"Yes, but not this sort.  The face of the cliff is as perpendicular as
+the side of a house."
+
+"The other fellows got up."
+
+"So they did, but it was in the daylight, and there was no one at the
+top waiting to pop them off with a bullet.  It seems the bandits have
+been in the habit of using this cave as a depot, and one of them guided
+La Hera there with the real object of betraying him."
+
+"Ugh!" said I; "these traitors make me sick."
+
+"Just so; but they are very useful.  Without the help of this one, for
+instance, we can't capture La Hera, unless we starve him out."
+
+"What does he propose to do?"
+
+"Well, there is a stout rope fixed in the cave which he will let down
+at the right moment.  Up this we shall have to climb by help of the
+niches that have been cut in the cliff."
+
+"Suppose La Hera finds it out, and is waiting to receive us?"
+
+"That," replied Jose, with a shrug of the shoulders, "is just what is
+bothering me.  However, we shall soon discover.  Our men have had time
+to hide themselves, and the guide is getting fidgety.  But I say, Jack,
+I wish I hadn't brought you."
+
+"I'm rather pleased now that you have, though I wasn't half an hour
+ago."
+
+"No; I thought you breathed too hard to be enjoying yourself."
+
+With that he ordered the native to proceed; and we all three crept
+along, keeping well in the shadow, though the enemy, feeling secure in
+possession of the rope, were hardly likely to have set a watch.
+
+Coming to a halt, the guide pointed to a towering cliff, which, on that
+face at least, was in truth steep and smooth as the wall of a house.
+Our men lay close at hand, but completely concealed, watching for the
+lowering of the rope.
+
+Now it seemed to me that we were running great risk when our object
+might have been gained with none at all.  Why not, as Jose had remarked
+a short time previously, starve the inmates out?
+
+"No good," answered he, when I asked the question.  "The guide says
+there are stores in the cave sufficient to last a small party for
+months.  The war would be over before they had finished their
+provisions.  No; we must get them by surprise or not at all.  I should
+like to see that rope dangling."
+
+It was weary waiting, and a great strain on our nerves too, as every
+moment's delay gave us more time to appreciate the danger.  The longer
+I pondered the more I disliked the business, and doubted what would be
+the end of it.  La Hera was a bold man, and if he got an inkling of the
+truth, we should meet with an unpleasant reception.  He might not
+approve of such an unceremonious intrusion into his dwelling-place.
+
+I was still thinking of these things when the Indian guide drew our
+attention to the cliff.  The time had come.  There, distinguishable in
+the pale moonlight, dangled the rope, and as we watched it descended
+lower and lower, very steadily, until the end of it was not higher than
+a man could grasp.
+
+It was the signal agreed upon to show that the enemy were asleep.
+
+Calling softly to one of his men, Jose said, "Stay here and watch.  If
+we are betrayed, take this man back to Colonel Miller.  If he tries to
+escape, kill him."
+
+The Indian moved not a muscle, while his guard took his place beside
+him with drawn sword, for no muskets had been brought on the
+expedition.  Then word was quietly passed round to the others, and one
+by one we gathered close to the hanging rope.
+
+We could not communicate with the man at the top, lest we should be
+heard by the Spaniards, and we dared not make a sound.  Holding a knife
+between his teeth, Jose clutched the rope firmly, planted one foot in a
+niche, and began to mount.  When he had reached half-way up, I began
+the ascent, bidding the men be ready to follow me.
+
+I did not mind this part of the enterprise, dangerous though it was.
+The niches cut in the rock afforded decent foothold, while the rope was
+knotted at intervals.  The peril lay not so much in the climbing as in
+the chance of discovery.  If the Spaniards learned what was going
+forward, nothing could save us from certain death.  This was an
+unpleasant thought, which I hastened to put as far from me as possible.
+
+Meanwhile Jose's head was on a level with the cave, and I felt that the
+best or the worst of the business would soon be known.  If the enemy
+were awake, it would go hard with him.  His foot left the last niche,
+he swung on the rope, and as I watched breathlessly he disappeared.
+
+Casting a glance downward, I called softly to the troopers to hurry,
+and then went up hand over hand at a breakneck pace.  In a short time I
+was gazing at as strange a spectacle as I have ever seen.  The cavern
+was an immense apartment, with steep walls and exceedingly lofty roof.
+Near the centre was a fire, on which some one had hastily thrown a
+fresh supply of dry fuel, and the red flames were leaping high in long,
+thin tongues.
+
+Just inside the entrance Jose and the traitorous Indian stood over the
+windlass, by means of which the rope was worked, and as I ran to their
+side, one of the Spanish soldiers uttered a cry of alarm.  Instantly
+all was tumult and confusion.  Shots were fired at random, men shouted
+wildly, "We are betrayed!" while, above all, Jose's voice rang out high
+and clear, "Surrender! you are my prisoners."
+
+With a rush the Spaniards sprang at us, fighting with the fury of wild
+animals, while we had to guard not only ourselves but the rope up which
+our men were swarming.  If that were cut or loosened, our opponents
+would hold us at their mercy.  We fought against long odds, but for a
+time held our own, though once I was stricken almost to my knees, and
+felt the graze of a sharp blade across my cheeks.
+
+Fortunately help came soon, or it would have gone badly with us.  With
+a wild shout a burly trooper sprang into the fray, and another soon
+joined him.  A third and a fourth followed quickly, and the issue was
+placed beyond doubt.
+
+Now, although our Indians made splendid soldiers, they hated the
+Spaniards so much that it was difficult to restrain their passions.
+Some excuse may be found for them in the long years of misery and
+oppression they had endured; but, of course, Jose set his face sternly
+against cruelties.
+
+Thus it was in our enemies' own interest that I raised my voice,
+crying, "Surrender, and we will spare your lives!  You cannot escape!"
+And Jose echoed my appeal.  He, too, dreaded the slaughter that must
+ensue if our Indians got out of hand.  Perhaps the Spaniards guessed
+our motive; at least they must have seen the futility of continuing the
+contest.  One by one they flung their weapons sullenly to the ground,
+and yielded themselves prisoners.
+
+"Torches!" cried Jose quickly, "and let us examine our capture.  Where
+is Colonel La Hera?"
+
+No one spoke, but several Indians plucked blazing brands from the fire
+and brought them to us.  By their light we saw one man lying dead near
+the windlass, and three wounded.  Six others, disarmed, stood round,
+for the most part black-browed and scowling.
+
+Jose repeated his question.  "Where is Colonel La Hera?" he asked.
+
+"Gone to get reinforcements to drive you into the sea," answered a calm
+voice.
+
+"Then he is not in this cave?" asked Jose bluntly, but with a certain
+ring of admiration in his tone.
+
+Now all this time I had been taking particular notice of this Spaniard.
+His uniform showed him to be a major, though he was quite young.  His
+face was frank and open; he had dark, expressive eyes, and a pleasant,
+musical voice, which somehow seemed familiar to me.  Where had I met
+this man before?  In a moment or two he himself supplied the answer.
+
+"Who is in command here?" asked Jose.
+
+"I have the honour, and, as it seems, the misfortune also, of
+commanding these brave fellows.  I am Major Santiago Mariano, in the
+service of His Spanish Majesty, whom may God preserve!"
+
+"I wish him no harm," replied Jose; "only for the future he must not
+reckon Peru among his dominions.  Now, how am I to know that La Hera is
+not here?"
+
+"Ask the man who betrayed us," said the major scornfully; and on
+questioning the Indian, it appeared he had mistaken Santiago for the
+famous colonel.
+
+"Well," muttered Jose, "it's a disappointment; but it can't be helped.
+What are we to do with the wounded?  They can't go down the rope."
+
+"Let me stay with them," I suggested, "and you can send a doctor back."
+
+"Meanwhile," interrupted the major, "I have some little skill in
+surgery, and, with your permission, I will remain also.  You need not
+fear that I shall run away.  I will give my parole to come to Moquegua.
+After that, matters must shape their own course."
+
+"Very well," exclaimed Jose; "the plan has its advantages.  I'll hurry
+along the first doctor I come across, Jack.  But you are hurt!"
+
+"It's only a scratch; nothing serious at all."
+
+Jose sent half a dozen of his men down the rope; then the dead Spaniard
+was lowered, the prisoners followed, and Jose himself descended with
+the remainder of the troopers.
+
+"Haul up the rope, Jack," he cried in farewell, "and make sure of your
+visitors before dropping it again."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IX.
+
+A GLEAM OF HOPE.
+
+As soon as the party had disappeared, I turned to the major and said
+with a smile,--
+
+"Now, my dear Santiago, let us attend to the needs of these poor
+fellows."
+
+I was now standing full in the firelight, and he glanced at my face
+with a puzzled expression.  Then a half gleam of recognition shone in
+his eyes, and he exclaimed doubtfully--
+
+"Surely you can't be the boy Crawford who vanished so mysteriously from
+the fort?"
+
+"I am, though!" said I, laughing at his amazement.  "But we shall have
+time for a talk presently; let us do what we can for these poor fellows
+first.  Is there any water in the cave?"
+
+"Yes; there is a spring at the far end.  I will fetch some.  Put some
+more wood on the fire; it smokes if allowed to go down."
+
+Of the three wounded men only one was seriously hurt, and he, I feared,
+was beyond the aid of the most skilled surgeon.  However, we did our
+best for all the sufferers, gave them water to drink, arranged them
+comfortably on beds of straw, and bathed and bandaged their wounds.
+Then I washed the cut in my cheek, and Santiago smeared it with a
+native ointment, which he said possessed wonderful healing properties.
+
+"Now," said he, "I judge you are ready for late supper or early
+breakfast, whichever you may prefer to call it.  The provisions are
+homely, and I am an indifferent cook, but I can at least give you
+enough to eat.  Those brigands of yours have stored sufficient food
+here for an army."
+
+Carrying a torch, I accompanied him round the cavern, gazing in wonder
+at the piles of Indian corn, the heaps of potatoes, and the strings of
+charqui, the last suspended from the walls.
+
+"Come," said I, "there is no need to starve in the midst of plenty.
+What shall we have?  Roast potatoes and jerked beef?  The potatoes will
+require the least attention."
+
+"And they are not bad if you are downright hungry, as I was when we
+crept in here after the affair at Mirabe.  There's a smart soldier
+leading your men, Crawford."
+
+"Yes; he is an Englishman named Miller, and a very fine fellow.  But
+how come you to be here?"
+
+"We'll talk over these things presently.  Meanwhile, let us cook the
+potatoes.  Bring another handful; I daresay two of the men will be able
+to eat a little breakfast."
+
+"If it is breakfast!"
+
+"It must be for us, because we had our supper before you paid us so
+unceremonious a visit.  Of course we were betrayed."
+
+"Well, as to that," I replied, "you must ask the colonel; I only acted
+under orders."
+
+"Just so.  Well, I am very pleased to see you, though I dislike the way
+in which you introduced yourself.  Cut this piece of beef up finely
+while I fetch some salt."
+
+"Have you any?" I asked, in some surprise.
+
+"Oh yes.  Your amiable brigands know how to stock a larder."
+
+Two of the wounded men were able to eat, and they were very grateful
+for the food we took them.  Then we returned to the fire, piled up some
+sacks to serve as seats, and began our meal.
+
+It was all most strange to me and very delightful; it might have been a
+chapter lifted bodily from one of my favourite story-books.  There
+seemed to be a piratical flavour about the whole business.
+
+"Perhaps it is as well that I gave my parole," exclaimed the major
+thoughtfully, taking off another potato.
+
+"Why?" I asked.
+
+"I might have felt tempted to escape," he replied, looking at the coil
+of rope.
+
+"You forget your jailer carries a pistol," I remarked, laughing.
+
+"An empty one," he suggested, shrugging his shoulders.  "No, no, my
+boy; my parole is your only safeguard."
+
+"It is a sufficient one, at any rate."
+
+"Yes," said he, rather dreamily, I thought.  "The honour of a Mariano
+is sacred; my father taught me that.  And yet--and yet, do you know,
+Crawford," he added, in a sharper tone, "I doubt if a parole given to
+brigands should be held to."
+
+I did not at all like this turn in the conversation, the more
+especially as my pistol was really empty.  I had not dreamed of taking
+any precautions, trusting wholly in the Spanish officer's honour.
+
+I looked up at him, and felt reassured; there could be no treachery
+hidden behind that frank, open countenance.
+
+"It seems to me you are talking nonsense, Santiago," I said cheerfully.
+"A man's word is his bond in any case--that is, if he be a man."
+
+He took no notice of my remark, but sat musing, leaving half his food
+untouched.  As for me, I helped myself to some more beef, though I must
+confess the major's wild talk nearly destroyed my appetite.  His manner
+had changed so suddenly and abruptly that I knew not what to make of
+it.  I might perhaps have reloaded my pistol without his knowledge, but
+this would be a confession that I had lost faith in him.
+
+"Come," said I jocularly, pointing to his food, "you pay your cooking a
+poor compliment."
+
+To this he made no reply, but looking up after a time exclaimed,--
+
+"I have news for you.  I had almost forgotten, but I must tell you
+before going."
+
+"Going?" I cried; "we cannot go before the doctor arrives."
+
+"You cannot, but I can, and must.  My mind is made up.  Do not try to
+thwart me; I should be sorry if you got hurt.  Sit still, my boy; don't
+stir a finger, or I will kill you!"
+
+I looked at him in amazement.  His face was flushed, his eyes shone
+wildly; he spoke with a rapid and angry vehemence.
+
+"By St. Philip," he cried, "I should be a cur to place honour before
+loyalty!  My duty is to my king, do you hear?  Shall I help a parcel of
+bandits to set the king at naught?  Shall I bring disgrace on a family
+that has stood by the throne for untold centuries?  My father died on
+the battlefield with the king's banner above his head, as did his
+father before him.  And I am to stay in a cage when the door is open!
+I am to let these upstarts trample on the king's rights!"
+
+The words swept from his lips in a sweeping, tempestuous torrent, and
+when they were done he leaped to his feet with an angry cry.  I sat in
+my place looking at him steadily, but making no movement.
+
+"I tell you it is monstrous!" he continued.  "I care nothing for
+myself, but I cannot desert the king!"
+
+"His Majesty must be greatly in need of friends," I remarked dryly, "to
+accept the aid of a perjured soldier."
+
+It was strong language.  I knew it would hurt him cruelly; but a
+desperate disease requires a desperate remedy.  I thought at first he
+would kill me.  His eyes blazed fiercely, and he sprang forward with
+uplifted hands.  Suddenly he paused, and returned abruptly to his seat.
+
+Thinking it best not to disturb him, I rose and made the round of the
+wounded men.  I felt awfully sorry for the young major, and almost
+wished he had not passed his word to Jose.  Having done so, he must, of
+course, abide by it, unless he cared to live with tarnished honour.
+
+Presently, returning to the fire, I threw some more fuel on, and sat
+down again on my heap of sacks.  Santiago had covered his face with his
+hands, and was rocking himself gently to and fro, like a child in pain.
+Evidently the wild fit had passed, and he had overcome the temptation
+which had tried him so sorely.
+
+For nearly an hour we sat there, speaking no word, then looking me
+straight in the face, he said suddenly,--
+
+"Crawford, I have acted like a madman, but there is nothing to be
+feared now."
+
+"Nor before," I answered cheerfully.  "You would not have gone a
+hundred yards.  Come, let us now dismiss the subject.  After all, it
+was no more than a bad dream."
+
+"By St. Philip," he exclaimed, "it was a very ugly one.  However, I am
+in my right mind now, and as soon as we arrive at Moquegua I will
+withdraw my parole.  Then if a chance to escape comes, I can avail
+myself of it with an easy conscience.  You have not reloaded your
+pistol?"
+
+"No.  Why should I? there is no need of it."
+
+"Not now," he said.  "I am master of myself now," and he actually
+smiled.
+
+"You were going to tell me some news," I observed, after a pause.  "Now
+that you have roused my curiosity, I hope you will satisfy it."
+
+I spoke half jestingly, and more for the sake of keeping up the
+conversation than in the expectation of hearing any particular
+information.  It was unlikely, I considered, that Santiago could tell
+me anything of real interest.  In this I was much mistaken, as you will
+find.
+
+"I don't know," said he thoughtfully, "that it will be doing you any
+real kindness, yet it is only right that you should know.  Of course,
+you will understand that your escape occasioned some little stir among
+the garrison of the fort."
+
+"I am quite ready to believe it," I replied, chuckling at the
+remembrance.  "I have often laughed to think of your astonishment in
+the morning."
+
+"It was no laughing matter to us, I can assure you.  The commandant was
+furious, and went about vowing vengeance against everybody.
+Search-parties scoured the neighbourhood in all directions, but with no
+result, and we at last concluded that by some means you had been taken
+off by ship."
+
+"Quite a wrong conclusion," I interposed.
+
+"We could think of no other.  However, to get on with the story.  In
+the midst of the confusion Barejo turned up on his way back to Lima.
+He was simply furious, and threatened to put us all in irons, the
+commandant included; which, by the way, was absurd."
+
+"It was paying me a very high compliment."
+
+"Don't be puffed up, or imagine the general was afraid of you," laughed
+Santiago.
+
+"Oh!" I exclaimed, affecting to feel disappointed, "that alters the
+case.  But why should he be angry at my escape?"
+
+"Because he really wished to keep you out of mischief."
+
+"Then I have sadly misjudged him."
+
+"I think you have.  Of course, I don't profess to understand the
+matter, but it seems to be something in this way.  When we have crushed
+this rebellion, the estates of those who have borne arms against the
+king will be confiscated."
+
+"Spoils to the victors!" I laughed; "an old-fashioned principle."
+
+"And, of course," continued Santiago, not heeding the interruption,
+"your father's estates will be among them.  Now, as far as I can
+gather, Barejo thought that by preventing you from joining the rebels
+something might be saved from the wreck."
+
+"That was very kind of the general," I remarked.  "I had no idea that
+he took any interest in my affairs.  But isn't it possible, major, that
+you are going a trifle too fast?  Suppose, for instance, that the
+rebels, as you call us, should win?"
+
+The major tossed his head scornfully.
+
+"That is utterly impossible!" he answered, with a short, quick snap.
+
+"But let us suppose it, just for argument," I urged.
+
+"Well in that case," said he, "of which there is no possible
+likelihood, your father will keep his property."
+
+At first I thought he had forgotten, but something in his face held my
+attention, and brought the blood to my head with a rush.
+
+"Do you mean--  What is it?  Tell me quickly!  Is my father--"
+
+"Alive!  That is my news; but you must not build on it too greatly.  I
+can only tell you he was not slain that day in the mountains.  He was
+dangerously wounded, but was still living when the soldiers carried him
+away."
+
+"Where did they take him?"
+
+"That I do not know; neither, I think, does Barejo.  Perhaps, and in my
+opinion most likely, to the forts at Callao."
+
+The major's news, as you may imagine, filled me with the liveliest
+astonishment and excitement.  My father alive!  I could hardly credit
+the statement.  What would my mother say?  How would she receive the
+startling information?  I rose from my seat and walked about the
+cavern, trying to think it over coolly.
+
+Then it dawned upon me why Santiago had said he would not be doing me
+any real kindness in talking of the discovery.  After all, his
+information only reopened the old wounds.  More than two years had
+passed since my father's disappearance, and many things had happened in
+that time.  Not every one who entered the casemates of Callao came out
+alive.
+
+"But," said I aloud, "some one must know the truth.  A man can't be
+shut up without authority, even in Peru."
+
+"I wish I could help you," replied the major.  "As soon as I escape
+from Moquegua I will make inquiries."
+
+"Thank you; but I fear it will be a long time to wait," I answered
+gloomily.
+
+"Not at all!  La Hera will return in a week or two, and your Miller
+will be too busy running away to look after prisoners.  Imitate me, my
+boy, and make Hope your best friend."
+
+In trying to cheer me he forgot his own distress.  The light returned
+to his eyes, the smile to his face, and he seemed to have banished all
+memory of his recent despair.
+
+"Come," said he cheerfully, "put your doubts and fears aside for the
+present.  Our wounded want attention; we must not neglect them."
+
+I tried hard to act upon his advice, but all the time continued to
+wonder whether my father was alive or dead.  That was the one question
+that racked my brain, and to it I could give no answer.
+
+We had just made our patients comfortable, with the exception of one
+who was dying fast, when a shrill whistle sounded outside.
+
+"The surgeon!" I exclaimed, running to the entrance.  "Yes, there he is
+with the guide and two soldiers."
+
+"Two bandits!" said Santiago banteringly.  "Give the men their proper
+name."
+
+"Soldiers or bandits, they know how to fight.  Help me to uncoil the
+rope, will you?"
+
+"That's almost as bad as asking a man to make the noose he is to hang
+in.  You forget that on leaving here I shall go straight to prison."
+
+"I had forgotten, major, and sorry enough I am to remember it.  Still,
+as La Hera returns so soon, it will be only a temporary inconvenience,
+and I'm sure Colonel Miller will treat you well."
+
+Santiago laughed.
+
+"You will make me fancy soon that imprisonment is a privilege worth
+paying for," he exclaimed.
+
+"Hardly that," I replied; "but, as Barejo said, it keeps one out of
+mischief."
+
+We lowered the rope, the guide attached the surgeon's instruments, and
+at a signal we hauled up.  Then the rope went down again, the two
+soldiers climbed to the cave, and the doctor followed unsteadily.  It
+was evident that this novel method of visiting patients found no favour
+in his eyes; he was obviously nervous, and twice during the ascent I
+quite expected to see him go headlong.
+
+He was a citizen of Moquegua, very young, and utterly unsuited for his
+present errand.  So great was his agitation that when he had planted
+his feet firmly on the floor of the cave his hands still clung like
+grim death to the rope.
+
+"You're all right now," I said, leading him away from the mouth of the
+cave.  "Rather a queer way of getting into a house, isn't it?"
+
+"The saints preserve me!" he exclaimed, while his teeth chattered like
+castanets, "this is horrible.  A dozen times, coming up that rope, I
+wished I'd never been born.  But it's the last time I'll practise
+doctoring outside Moquegua."
+
+"You did very creditably, I assure you, doctor," observed Santiago,
+whose eyes gleamed with fun; "such grace, such agility, is given to
+few.  I should have thought your life had been spent in scaling
+mountains."
+
+The doctor looked from Santiago to me, hardly knowing what to make of
+such flattery.
+
+"Faith," exclaimed he at last, "I hope there is an easier way of
+getting down than of coming up."
+
+"There is," said the major, "and much more expeditious.  You have but
+to step outside the cave, and there you are.  Most people, however,
+prefer to go down by the rope."
+
+The doctor groaned.
+
+"I shall never do it," said he, "never!  I shall be shut up in this
+place for the rest of my life."
+
+"There will be one advantage in that," remarked Santiago pleasantly:
+"your patients will always be able to find you.  Now I fear we must
+tear ourselves from your side."
+
+"Do your best with these poor fellows," I said.  "The one in the corner
+yonder will not trouble you long; the others are getting on nicely.
+You will find this cavern quite a comfortable dwelling-place.  There is
+plenty of food, a spring of clear water, and enough fuel to keep a fire
+going for weeks."
+
+"Meanwhile," observed Santiago, "we will ask the good folks of Moquegua
+to make a nice long ladder, so that you can get down without trouble."
+
+It was really very laughable to watch the doctor's face as the major
+prepared to descend.
+
+"He will be killed," said he dolefully.  "It is a clear case of
+suicide.  Look, he has missed his foothold, and will be dashed to
+pieces!"
+
+"Nonsense," I said, with a laugh; "there is no danger if you don't
+think about it.  See, it is nothing but going down a flight of steps
+backwards."  But he covered his face with his hands and shuddered.
+
+When the major had reached the ground, I grasped the rope, saying,--
+
+"Farewell, doctor; I hope you will have a comfortable time.  And don't
+worry about coming down; you'll find it an easy matter enough."
+
+"Good-bye," answered he gloomily; "I shall never see you or any one
+else again.  I shall die up here for certain."
+
+The fellow was so genuinely frightened that I assured him we would
+devise some plan to rescue him; on which he brightened up considerably,
+and I began the descent.  I asked the guide where he had left the
+horses.
+
+"At the village, senor," he replied, "on the other side of the
+mountain."
+
+In answer to a further question, he told us that the doctor would not
+cross the narrow track, and that they had, in consequence, been
+compelled to travel many miles out of their way.
+
+"I think he was right," exclaimed Santiago, when we reached the spot.
+"This is a far worse venture than climbing to the cavern by the rope."
+
+And indeed, seen in broad daylight, with every rock standing out
+pitilessly clear, and every chasm yawning wide, the place was enough to
+daunt the spirit of the bravest.
+
+Familiarity had rendered the guide indifferent to the danger, but I
+felt as nervous as when crossing the previous evening.  However, I
+could not make a parade of my anxiety, so I set foot on the narrow path
+with a jaunty air but quaking heart.  Santiago smiled too, but I fancy
+he was by no means sorry when we gained the farther side without
+accident.  Then we jested about the past danger, talking lightly and as
+if it were an affair of no moment.  Nevertheless, I was thankful the
+heat of the sun provided an excuse for the perspiration that streamed
+down my face.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER X.
+
+A STORMY INTERVIEW.
+
+On our march to the town, Santiago assumed a light-hearted carelessness
+that was far from his real feelings.  He laughed merrily, made joking
+remarks, and behaved generally as if the prospect of a spell of prison
+life was most agreeable.  This was, of course, mere outside show.  He
+was too proud to let his captors see his real distress; but his acting
+did not deceive me.
+
+We had reached the market-place, and I was wondering at the absence of
+the soldiers, when Jose suddenly appeared, coming from the governor's
+house.  On seeing us, he approached, saying, "You have been a long
+time.  I began to think you had missed your way."
+
+"The guide was late in the first place, as the doctor would not take
+the nearest way, and we did not hurry.  But where are the troops?"
+
+"Off again!" said he, his eyes twinkling: "the colonel has gone for a
+little jaunt of ninety miles or so to intercept a Spanish column.
+Thank goodness, we have missed that!--How did you leave your men,
+major?"
+
+"One is dying, I fear," replied Santiago; "but the others will soon be
+all right, unless your doctor kills them!"
+
+"I was sorry to send him," said Jose, "but I had no choice.  He was the
+only one in the place available.  He didn't offer his services, I can
+assure you."
+
+"I can well believe it," laughed the major.  "The poor fellow was half
+dead with fright when he reached us, and vows he will never risk the
+danger of getting down again."
+
+"We must have him tied to the rope, and lowered like a sack of
+potatoes.  Meanwhile, what is to be done with you?"
+
+"The only suggestion I can make is that you set me free!"
+
+"Perhaps I had better report to the governor," observed Jose
+thoughtfully.  "He is Colonel Miller's representative.  I daresay he
+will parole you till the chief comes."
+
+"No, no!" cried the major hastily; "I've done with paroles!  From this
+moment I consider myself free to escape."
+
+"To _try_," corrected Jose.  "Well, the effort will fill up your time,
+and keep you from being idle.  Of course," he added, "it will change
+the position a little.  We can still remain on friendly terms, only I
+must not forget to load my pistol.  And now let us interview the
+governor."
+
+A sentry stood at the outside gate, and several soldiers were in the
+courtyard; but passing through, we entered the house, and found
+ourselves in the governor's presence.  He was a military-looking man,
+though holding no rank in the army--a Spaniard who had recently come
+over from the enemy.  Two or three officers were in the room, and a
+young man sat at a table, writing.
+
+Jose told his story briefly, concluding with a proposal that the
+prisoner should be left in his charge until Colonel Miller's return.
+
+"There is a more agreeable way still," observed the governor, with a
+bland smile.--"Major Mariano, I am not unaware either of your name or
+your services.  I know you for a dashing and brilliant officer, far and
+away superior to those nominally above you.  I am not without the power
+to make you an offer.  The Spanish cause is lost; in a few months your
+armies will be crushed; Peru will be independent.  Until that time you
+will languish miserably in prison.  Afterwards I cannot pretend to
+prophesy your fate; but I offer you an opportunity to escape from the
+wreck.  Join the Patriot army, and I pledge my word that San Martin
+shall give you the rank of colonel at once.  In a year it will be your
+own fault if you are not a general.  Come, what do you say?"
+
+Only a few hours previously I had seen an outburst of temper on
+Santiago's part; now I beheld another, which by comparison made the
+first appear mild.  His eyes literally blazed with anger; his face was
+red; he actually quivered with passion.  Twice he endeavoured to speak,
+and the words choked in his throat.  Jose laid a hand restrainingly on
+his shoulder; he flung it off passionately.
+
+"Dog of a traitor!" cried he at last, "do you think the blood of
+Santiago Mariano is as base as yours?  Do you imagine I am a rat like
+you to leave a sinking ship?  What! lend my sword to a parcel of
+beggarly cutthroats and vagabonds?  I would rather eat out my heart in
+the blackest dungeon of Peru!"
+
+Once a flush of shame overspread the governor's face, but he recovered
+himself promptly, and listened with a bitter smile till the end.
+
+"You shall eat your words if not your heart," he exclaimed brutally;
+and turning to an officer, he added, "Rincona, bring in your men and
+the heaviest irons that can be found in the prison."
+
+Santiago smiled scornfully; but Jose, pushing forward, said quietly,
+"You cannot do that, senor.  This man is my prisoner, for whom I am
+responsible to Colonel Miller alone.  Until the return of the colonel,
+therefore, I cannot let him go from my keeping."
+
+For a moment Rincona hesitated, but at the governor's second command he
+left the room, while the other officers clustered round their chief.
+
+Jose produced a pistol and cocked it, saying coolly, "The man who lays
+hands on my prisoner dies."
+
+Santiago turned to him with a pleasant smile.  "Thanks, my friend," he
+said, "but I cannot let you suffer on my behalf.  Besides, there is
+Crawford to be considered.  The consequences may be fatal to him, as he
+is sure to stand by you."
+
+"Don't hesitate on my account, Jose," said I.  But the major's words
+had made an impression, and a shadow of annoyance flitted across my
+companion's brow.
+
+However, there was little time for thinking.  We heard the tramp, tramp
+of marching feet, and presently Rincona entered, followed by about a
+dozen soldiers.
+
+"The irons!" roared the governor, beside himself with passion; "where
+are the irons?"
+
+"I have sent for them, sir," replied Rincona.
+
+"You might have spared yourself the trouble," remarked Jose; "they
+shall not be put on."
+
+"Yes, yes!" exclaimed Santiago; "what does it matter?  Better so than
+that you two should lose your lives."
+
+I looked at Jose.  His lips were set like a vice, and I knew that no
+power on earth could move him now.  The situation was decidedly
+unpleasant, and unfortunately there seemed to be no way out.  True, he
+might kill the governor, but that would only still further complicate
+matters.
+
+The soldiers, as usual, stood with impassive faces; the affair was none
+of theirs, save so far as obeying orders went.  The officers were
+restless and uneasy, and one of them kept up a whispered conversation
+with the governor, who listened impatiently, and from time to time
+shook his head.
+
+At last two other men arrived, bearing a set of heavy irons, and once
+again Santiago turned appealingly, but without effect, to Jose.
+
+One might have heard a pin drop when the governor, sheltering behind
+his officers, cried in a loud voice, "Put that man in irons!"
+
+"Stand still!" said Jose, raising his pistol, and speaking in the
+Indian dialect.
+
+How the dispute would have ended I cannot tell, but at that moment a
+happy inspiration flashed into my mind.  The soldiers were all Indians,
+and judging by their appearance, Indians of the mountains.  Was it
+possible that any of them acknowledged the authority of the Silver Key?
+If so, we were safe.  It was a poor chance, but there seemed to be no
+other.
+
+Trembling with impatience, I opened my shirt at the neck, and drew
+forth the brigand chief's gift.  At first no one took any notice; but
+when I held the key to view, the Indians raised a shout of mingled joy
+and surprise.  Then I looked at Santiago and laughed, saying, "We are
+safe!"
+
+The Indians jabbered away in their own language, talking with one
+another, and pointing to the emblem of authority which hung from my
+neck.  The governor stood like a man in a dream; the officers gazed
+alternately at me and the native soldiers, as if doubting the evidence
+of their senses.
+
+"How many of you are followers of the Silver Key, and of Raymon
+Sorillo?" I asked.
+
+"All, all, master!" they cried.
+
+"And those outside?"
+
+"All, all!" they again shouted.
+
+"I can trust you to help me?"
+
+"To the death, master!" they cried with one voice.
+
+At that I turned to the governor, saying with a smile, "The position is
+changed, senor.  I have but to raise my hand, and you will feel the
+weight of your own irons.  But there is no need to quarrel.  Colonel
+Miller will be here in a few days, and he shall decide between us.
+Meanwhile we will guard the prisoner."
+
+The governor nearly choked with anger, and threatened violently that as
+soon as the colonel returned he would have us all shot.  However, as it
+was evident that the soldiers would obey my orders, he raised no
+further objection to our taking Santiago away.
+
+"By St. Philip," exclaimed the major, "the room was hot!  Are you a
+magician, Crawford?"
+
+"Upon my word I begin to think so.  At any rate, I possess a magical
+key."
+
+"Which has saved our lives," observed Jose grimly.
+
+"And I suspect," laughed Santiago, "that once upon a time it unlocked
+the door of a prison cell!  But won't those natives suffer for this?"
+
+"I don't think so.  They are too strong, and their chief has more power
+in Peru than the viceroy and San Martin combined."
+
+"You know him, then?"
+
+"Yes, and so does Jose.  He has done me good service, for which I am
+grateful, though I could never like the man.  But here we are at the
+house.  The good folk will wonder at our bringing an uninvited guest."
+
+Fortunately a room had been set apart for us, so we could talk at our
+ease.  I was burning to tell Jose about my father, but first of all we
+had to come to an understanding with Santiago.  This time he made no
+demur at giving his parole.  "In fact," said he gaily, "you have forced
+my hand, and I have no choice."
+
+"So much the better," remarked Jose; "we may as well be comfortable
+together till the colonel arrives."
+
+"And after that we may be hanged comfortably together!" laughed the
+major.  "How do you like the prospect?"
+
+"I can trust Miller.  He is an honourable man, and will do what is
+right.  It is Crawford who will suffer for inciting the troops to
+mutiny."
+
+"Jose," said I presently, "I haven't told you that Major Mariano is an
+old friend of mine."
+
+"And at one time his jailer," interrupted Santiago.  "That ought to
+make him feel grateful."
+
+"Oh," exclaimed Jose, "you are the captain Jack has often talked about!
+Well, I'm glad we have been able to do a little for you."
+
+"This morning while we were waiting for your precious doctor," I
+continued, "he told me a very startling piece of news."
+
+"Yes?" said Jose.
+
+"About my father."
+
+Jose sprang to his feet, demanding fiercely, "What do you know of Senor
+Crawford, major?  Don Eduardo came to his end by foul means: he was not
+slain by the government, but by some one who hoped to profit by his
+death."
+
+"According to the major's information, he was not slain at all," I
+said, and proceeded to relate the story.
+
+Jose listened attentively to every word, and then asked Santiago
+innumerable questions.  Like myself, he displayed great excitement, but
+I judged from his expression that he entertained little hope of my
+father being still alive.
+
+"The truth is," said he, "Don Eduardo had made numerous powerful
+enemies both in public and private life; and as we all know, any stick
+is good enough to beat a dog with.  Besides, he owned vast estates,
+and--"
+
+"Go on!" laughed Santiago as Jose hesitated; "the king's party put him
+to death in order to seize them!"
+
+"No, no," said Jose hotly; "I don't tar all Spaniards with the same
+brush.  Still, they aren't all saints either, and I say some of them
+killed him under cloak of the government.  And some day," he added, "I
+will prove it.  As to his being alive, I think there is small chance of
+it.--And Jack, my boy, I would not mention the matter to your mother."
+
+"But," said I, clinging to my shred of hope, "he was not killed in the
+mountains, and we have heard nothing since."
+
+Jose let me talk, and listened kindly to my arguments, but I noticed
+that none of them made any impression.  At the best, he said, my father
+had been thrown into prison seriously hurt, and it was not likely that
+he had survived the confinement.
+
+"Have you ever seen the casemates at Callao, major?" he asked.
+
+"Yes," said Santiago, "and very unhealthy places they are.  But there
+are more prisons than those in Peru."
+
+It would be wearisome to repeat our conversation, for, after all, we
+were arguing in the dark, having only the major's imperfect story to go
+by.  Besides, as Jose said, many events had happened during the last
+two years, and my father was by no means the only noted man in Peru to
+disappear.  So our talk travelled in a circle, leaving off at the
+starting-point, and for sole effect it extinguished the gleam of hope
+which the major's story had kindled.
+
+In the evening, at Jose's suggestion, I went into the streets to pick
+up any information concerning the governor's doings.  Everything seemed
+quiet; the sentries were at their posts as usual, while the soldiers
+off duty wandered about the town.
+
+They greeted me respectfully, raising their hands in salute and
+standing at attention, as if I had been an officer of high degree.
+Recognizing a sergeant who had been in the governor's room, I stopped
+to ask a few questions.  Greatly to my relief, I learned that, with the
+exception of a few Spanish officers, the troops in the town were all
+Indians from the mountains.
+
+As the man seemed smart and intelligent, I told him how matters stood,
+and that we depended entirely upon him and his comrades until the
+coming of the English colonel.
+
+"You can trust us, master," he replied, and indeed his talk made it
+quite clear that the friend of Raymon Sorillo and the holder of the
+Silver Key might rely on the Indians in Moquegua even against Miller
+himself.
+
+Jose, I think, felt rather relieved on hearing my news; while Santiago
+laughed heartily, prophesying that, if the Spaniards were defeated, I
+should in a few years be king, or at least president, of Peru.
+
+"I had no idea," said he, "that you were so important a person.  No
+wonder Barejo wished to keep you shut up!"
+
+That night we took it in turns to watch; but the governor attempted
+nothing against us, and the next day we walked openly in the street
+without molestation.
+
+Colonel Miller had vanished into space, and for nearly a week we heard
+nothing of him; then one morning an Indian scout rode wearily into the
+town with the news that the Englishman was close at hand.  Immediately
+the people rushed out in hundreds to line the street, and to cheer the
+returning warriors.
+
+Jose stayed indoors with the major, but sent me out to get an early
+word with our leader.  Bright, alert, and cheery as ever, he rode at
+the head of his troops, smiling and bowing to the inhabitants as they
+greeted him with rousing cheers.  Then came the soldiers--the cavalry
+on dead-tired horses, the infantry on jaded mules--with a number of
+prisoners in the midst.
+
+The animals were tired enough; but the men!  I can hardly describe
+their condition.  Their faces were haggard, their eyes heavy and
+bloodshot; some were nearly asleep, others had scarcely strength to sit
+upright.  Very little grass had grown under their feet.  As soon as
+they were dismissed, the citizens pounced on them, taking them into the
+houses, where food and drink were provided in abundance.
+
+The governor had come out to meet the colonel, whom I expected to see
+return with him; but at the last moment he turned aside, and with a
+laughing exclamation went straight to his own quarters, whither I
+followed him.
+
+"Hullo, Crawford!" cried he.  "So you didn't get La Hera?"
+
+"No, sir; but we captured a major, and I wish to speak to you about
+him."
+
+"Won't it wait?" he asked, with a comical expression.
+
+"I am afraid not, sir.  The truth is, we've had a quarrel with the
+governor, and--"
+
+"You want to get in your version first!  A very good plan.  Well, fire
+away, but don't make it long; I've a lot of things on hand."
+
+By this time we had entered his room, and going straight to the heart
+of the affair, I told my story in the fewest possible words.  The
+colonel listened with rather a grave face, and when I had finished he
+said, "It's an awkward mess, especially just now.  It's absolutely
+necessary to keep friends with the governor, and I don't like this
+tampering with the troops.  But, of course, I won't have the prisoner
+put in irons or treated differently from the rest.  Bring him here now,
+and I'll settle the matter at once."
+
+"Yes, sir," said I, thankful to get off so lightly.
+
+The colonel had already begun some fresh work when I returned with Jose
+and the major, but he rose from his seat and saluted the Spaniard
+courteously.
+
+"I understand it is useless to ask for your parole, major," he said.
+"Your mind is quite made up on the point?"
+
+"Yes, sir," answered Santiago, smiling in his easy, graceful way.  "An
+opportunity to escape may not arise but if it does, I shall certainly
+seize it."
+
+"Quite right!" exclaimed the colonel; "but I fear you will be
+disappointed.  However, though guarding you rigidly, we shall put you
+to as little inconvenience as possible.  You will find half a dozen
+companions in misfortune in the prison.  Most of the captured rank and
+file have joined the Patriots."
+
+The major's lip curled scornfully, but he only said, "I am obliged to
+you, colonel, for your kindness.  Some day perhaps I may be able to
+return it."
+
+"Not in the same way, I hope," laughed Colonel Miller.  "I have had a
+taste of Spanish prison life already, major.  But when the war is over
+I trust we may meet again."
+
+Then he sent for an officer and a file of soldiers, and Santiago turned
+to bid us a cheery farewell.
+
+"Good-bye," said he brightly; "I have had a pleasant time with you.--If
+I do succeed in escaping, Crawford, I will inquire further into your
+father's story.--Ah, here is my escort!" and with a salute to the
+colonel and a nod to us, he took his place in front of the men, while
+the officer received his chief's instructions.
+
+"He's a plucky fellow.  I should have liked to set him free," I said,
+as we strolled back to our quarters.
+
+"To do more mischief!" growled Jose.  "I'm sorry for him, in a way, but
+it's better for us that he should be under lock and key.  And that
+reminds me!  How did Colonel Miller take the Silver Key business?"
+
+"Very badly; called it tampering with the troops."
+
+"So it was, but it saved our lives, all the same.  I shall be rather
+pleased when we leave this district; the governor won't regard either
+of us too favourably."
+
+"He can't hurt us now the colonel is here."
+
+"No," replied Jose, with a curious smile "but we might meet with a
+nasty accident.  Perhaps you remember my remark, made two years ago,
+that accidents are common in Peru.  It's as true now as then."
+
+As it chanced, Jose was shortly to have his wish; for although we did
+not know it then, the colonel had decided to abandon Moquegua.  Many of
+the troops were down with the ague, the place was a difficult one to
+defend, unless against a weak attack, and La Hera was already on the
+march with a force far superior to ours.  This, however, we did not
+learn till two days later.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XI.
+
+A NARROW ESCAPE.
+
+"It is a great honour," exclaimed Jose, "and you should feel proud."
+
+I had just returned from an interview with the colonel, who had asked
+me to undertake for a short time the duties of his private secretary.
+It seemed a simple task then, but afterwards I regarded it differently.
+For the next three weeks I was attached to the colonel, who took me
+with him everywhere.  A secretary is generally supposed to write, but
+my work consisted in riding.  Day after day, from morning till night,
+we were on horseback, now travelling over sandy deserts to the
+seashore, again penetrating into the heart of the mountains--hungry,
+thirsty, and tired, and always in danger of falling into the hands of
+the enemy.
+
+As a measure of precaution our little force retired to Tacna, where,
+much to my satisfaction, the colonel received from Lima news of an
+armistice.  This, of course, extended to all parts of the country; but
+I was mistaken in thinking it would increase my leisure, as my time was
+still kept fully occupied.
+
+In one way this was a good thing, as it kept me from brooding over
+Santiago's story, though even at the busiest times the thought of my
+father's fate would creep into my mind.  I saw nothing of Jose, who had
+been left behind with some Indians to hold a mountain pass, but
+occasionally I paid a brief visit to the Spanish prisoners for a chat
+with the friendly major.
+
+We had been at Tacna a month, when one evening Colonel Miller said
+abruptly: "Crawford, the armistice is at an end, and we must retreat.
+Tell Videla to send the stores and the sick to Arica the first thing in
+the morning; then carry this order to Ilo.  You will find three small
+brigs there; they are to sail at once for Arica.  Take Castro the guide
+with you, and rejoin me on the march to Arica."
+
+"Very good, sir," I replied, though my words belied my feelings.
+However, I went out, gave Videla the colonel's message, and hunted up
+the guide.
+
+Castro was an educated Indian, trained by one of the missionaries, and
+a very decent fellow.  I found him sound asleep; but he rose at once,
+looked to see if his bag of coca was full, loaded his pistols, and
+saddled his horse.
+
+"A pleasant night for a ride, lieutenant,"--the colonel had given me
+that rank,--"and every yard will take us further from the Spaniards.  I
+hear that La Hera is getting ready to swoop."
+
+"He will find his pigeon a hawk if he comes too close," I answered,
+laughing.  "Bring your horse, and wait for me at the hospital."
+
+The night was still young, and many people, civilians and military,
+were in the street, talking in excited whispers.  It was plain that
+they had heard of La Hera's approach, and were discussing what they
+knew of the colonel's plans.
+
+Soon, however, the town was left behind, and we had fairly started on
+our journey.  There was no danger in it, except that of getting lost,
+which, with Castro for a guide, was not likely to happen.  He knew the
+district as well as, perhaps better than, I knew the streets of Lima.
+
+We jogged along quietly till midnight, not wishing to tire the animals,
+and then stopped near the edge of a sandy desert for an hour's rest.
+By this time I had begun to hate the very sight of sand; it seemed to
+me more dreary and pitiless than the stoniest of barren ground.  Castro
+did not mind in the least, but lay on his back looking at the starry
+sky and placidly chewing his coca.
+
+"Come, lieutenant," said he briskly at the end of an hour, "it is time
+to mount;" and we were soon plodding on as patiently as before.
+
+It was nine o'clock when we finally arrived at Ilo.  It may have been
+owing to my own tired state, but I thought I had never seen such a
+miserable and desolate spot in all my life.  The houses were wretched
+mud-built hovels, and the few people in the place looked woebegone
+beyond belief.
+
+The three brigs were in keeping with the village, being old and
+worm-eaten, and the craziest craft imaginable.  I would not have sailed
+one across a pond.  However, I sought out the commander of this ragged
+squadron, and gave him the colonel's order.
+
+On reading it his face brightened, and he declared his intention of
+running out to sea that very afternoon.
+
+"He doesn't look much of a hero," observed Castro; "but," with an
+expressive glance at the three floating coffins, "I imagine there are
+few braver men in Peru."
+
+"One need not be brave to seize any chance of getting away from this
+depressing place," said I.  "I believe I could easily take the risk of
+being drowned if there were no other way of escape."
+
+"You will have the risk, lieutenant, if we are to go afloat in these
+brigs; but my opinion is that the bottoms will drop out of them before
+they reach Arica."
+
+"In that case we must either beat La Hera or be annihilated."
+
+"That's what it looks like," replied Castro coolly.
+
+We stabled our horses in a tumble-down shed, fed and watered them, and,
+as it was impossible to leave till they were rested, lay down to snatch
+a brief sleep on the ground.  We were invited to use the floor of a
+hovel for a couch, but after glancing at it, declined with great
+politeness and many sonorous words of thanks.
+
+When we awoke the brigs had disappeared, and a roaring wind was
+sweeping down from the north.
+
+"They'll never make headway against that," remarked Castro.  "We can
+return to the colonel and tell him his brigs are at the bottom of the
+sea.  There will be a pretty tune played presently, and La Hera will
+provide the music."
+
+To a sailor, perhaps, the danger would not have seemed formidable; but
+standing on that desolate beach, listening to the hurricane rush of the
+wind, I could not but think Castro was right.  And if indeed he had
+prophesied truly, then was our little force in sad straits.  Burdened
+with sick, hampered by fleeing patriots, encumbered by prisoners, with
+half his troops weakened as usual by ague, the English colonel could
+neither fight nor flee.  What, then, could he do?  By this time every
+one knew him too well to dream he would surrender.
+
+"Castro," said I, "we carry bad news, and bad news flies apace.  Let us
+keep up the reputation of the old proverb.  Half an hour or so may make
+all the difference in the world."
+
+He made a grimace as if to say that a few minutes more or less would
+matter little; but he saddled his horse promptly, nevertheless, and was
+ready to start as soon as I.
+
+"I reckon," he said, "that we may strike the road from Tacna to Arica
+by midnight to-morrow, unless our animals founder by the way.  Can you
+trust your horse?"
+
+"The colonel selected him."
+
+"That ought to be sufficient warrant.  The chief knows a horse, though
+he will ride in the absurd English style."
+
+There were few men in the country who would have cared to cut
+themselves adrift as Castro did on this ride of ours to intercept the
+marching Patriots.  His only guides were those he could interpret from
+nature.  While daylight lasted, he steered by the sun; at night, by the
+stars and the faint wind that fanned our faces.
+
+For twenty-four hours, during which time we rested, of course, both for
+our own sakes and for the sakes of our animals, not one human being
+crossed our path, or even came within sight of us.  And during that
+time, also, we saw neither bird nor beast, nor any manner of living
+thing, save only ourselves and our animals.
+
+And then, quite unexpectedly to me, we came upon an oasis in the dreary
+desert--a little hamlet with mud-walled hovels, but better than those
+at Ilo, and having patches of cultivated ground enclosed.  The natives
+had reclaimed this piece of land by means of the waters of a
+moderate-sized stream, and lived in almost as great isolation as if
+they had been on Robinson Crusoe's island.
+
+They were neither Patriots nor Royalists, and I doubt much whether they
+knew of the struggle going forward; but they had kind hearts, and gave
+us a warm welcome, pressing upon us gifts of fruits and vegetables to
+the limits of their scanty stock.  They found ample forage, too, for
+the weary animals, and we stayed there a matter of three hours to rest
+Castro's horse, which had shown symptoms of breaking down.
+
+I seized this opportunity to snatch an hour's sleep; but my guide was
+kept chattering by the natives, who listened with amazement to his
+news.  They knew no Spanish, and could not understand the native patois
+I spoke; neither could I understand a word of what they said.  As for
+Castro, I suppose no man in South America had the gift of so many
+Indian dialects.
+
+"After all, lieutenant," exclaimed he, as we took leave of this simple
+community, "I doubt if these people have not the best of life.  They
+eat, drink, and are at peace, caring no more for a president than for a
+king."
+
+"And doing nothing for either," I replied, laughing.  "How does the
+horse seem now?"
+
+"I think he will do this journey.  But if I'm to ride with the colonel,
+he will have to provide me with another."
+
+Throughout the evening we rode silently side by side, while all around
+us was the awful stillness of a dead world.  The sun went down, and
+presently the stars gleamed above us, throwing a ghostly light over the
+sea of sand.
+
+Midnight found us still riding, and another hour passed before Castro
+drew rein at the broken track leading from Tacna to Arica.  Throwing
+the reins over his horse's neck, and jumping down, he examined the
+ground carefully, reading it as skilfully as the student reads a
+printed book.
+
+To and fro he went, casting off here and there like a hunting-dog, till
+he was satisfied.  Then he returned to me, saying, "Carts have gone by
+hours since, and the infantry quite recently, but I see no signs of
+cavalry."
+
+"They would remain till the last minute, so as to deceive La Hera."
+
+"That is so; but the question is, has the colonel stayed with them?  It
+is to him we want to give our information."
+
+"The infantry can tell us."
+
+"We shall waste time if he is in the rear, and time is precious."
+
+"Let us separate.  You go forward; I will ride toward Tacna."
+
+"It is dangerous, senor."
+
+"You forget that I have been over this route."
+
+"Well, as you will.  If the colonel has not passed, I shall return.
+Keep to the track; do not wander from it either to right or to left."
+
+"All right, Castro; I will take care."
+
+He vaulted to the saddle, wished me a safe journey, and rode off, while
+I turned my horse's head in the opposite direction.  Fortunately the
+night was clear, while the dawn was not far off, so that I had a great
+advantage in steering my way.  True, I rode at no great pace, being
+both afraid and unwilling to spur my jaded beast.  Now and again I even
+dismounted and walked at his head to give him some relief.
+
+It was perhaps about three o'clock in the morning.  A heavy fog had
+arisen, and I was riding with the greatest care, when suddenly I found
+a musket pointed straight at me, and heard the demand, "Halt, or I
+fire!"
+
+The man spoke in Spanish, but his accent showed him to be an Indian,
+and I hoped he was one of Miller's cavalry detachment.  Whistling
+softly, he was at once joined by a second and a third man, the last of
+whom sharply ordered me to dismount.
+
+At the sound of his voice I laughed aloud, saying, "You post your men
+well, Jose, but they have not made a great capture this time.  Is the
+colonel here?"
+
+"We are all here," said Jose, giving my hand a grip; "but I thought you
+had gone to Arica.  Is anything wrong?"
+
+"A good deal," I answered, speaking in English, so that the Indians
+might not understand.  "I must see Colonel Miller at once."
+
+"Jump down, then.  Leave your horse here, and I will take you to him.
+Mind where you step; the men are all tucked in and sound asleep."
+
+But for the fog, I could by this time have seen my way clearly; as it
+was, I could only just distinguish the ponchos enveloping the men's
+heads.  When the fog lifted, the light showed a more curious spectacle
+than most of you have perhaps ever seen.  It was the custom, whenever
+we halted in a sandy desert, for each man to scoop out for himself a
+shallow grave.  In this he lay, scraping the loose sand over his body
+for bed-clothes, and leaving his head, wrapped in his poncho, above
+ground.  It was, indeed, a most comfortable and delicious bed, as in
+those days, or rather nights, I often proved.
+
+The colonel lay buried alive, as it were, like his men; but he slept
+lightly, and pushing off his sandy bed-clothes at our approach, he
+struggled to his feet.
+
+[Illustration: Pushing off his sandy bed-clothes at our approach, he
+struggled to his feet.]
+
+"Who is it?" he asked.  "Crawford, where is your guide?"
+
+"Gone another way to look for you, colonel."
+
+"Have the brigs left Ilo?"
+
+"Yes; but both Castro and I doubt if they will reach Arica.  They are
+altogether crazy, and as soon as they left the harbour a strong gale
+from the north, which will drive them out of their course, sprang up."
+
+"You are rather a Job's comforter," laughed the colonel.  "I daresay
+they will arrive all right.  Still," he continued, speaking more to
+himself, "everything depends upon their safe arrival--everything!  Jump
+in, Crawford, and have a nap; I may want you presently."
+
+He went away with Jose, while I got into his bed, pulled the sand over
+me, and was fast asleep before the two men had gone a dozen yards.
+
+For two whole hours I lay like a log; then a soldier pulled the poncho
+from my head, saying that the colonel waited for me at breakfast.  I
+rose quickly, made my toilet--not an elaborate proceeding, you may be
+sure--and waited on the colonel.
+
+"Sit down," said he, laughing; "it's early in the day for banqueting,
+but we must feast when we can.  I hope you are not blessed with too
+good an appetite?"
+
+"I don't think I should feel greatly tempted to indulge much at
+present," I replied, with a grimace at the dried meat I was cutting.
+"Indigestion would only too surely follow."
+
+"Then," said he, and his eyes twinkled with merriment, "we will eat
+sparingly.  I am going straight to Arica, and you will ride with me."
+
+"I am afraid I shall have to get you to find me a fresh horse, as my
+own has broken down, colonel."
+
+Turning to one of the soldiers near, he said, "Ask Major Videla to send
+me a good horse at once.--Take your time, Crawford; I am awaiting a
+messenger from Tacna."
+
+Nearly an hour passed before he was ready, during which time I saddled
+my fresh mount, transferred my holsters, and had a chat with Jose.  He
+told me they had been compelled to release their prisoners, Santiago
+among them.
+
+"I had no idea you were so hard pressed," I said.
+
+"If La Hera doesn't blunder," answered Jose, "he can sweep us all into
+his net.  The only thing that saves us now is Miller's skill and
+reputation.  Every one believes he is going to show fight somewhere
+between this and the coast."
+
+Presently the colonel came along, accompanied by Major Videla, to whom
+he gave final directions; and then, bidding me follow, rode from the
+camp.  Four miles out we came upon Castro, walking, and leading his
+horse, which had fallen dead lame.
+
+"Have you been into Arica?" asked Miller.
+
+"No, colonel; but I have learned some news.  There are four fine
+vessels in the roadstead; if you could get them, the troops would be
+safe."
+
+"Ah!" cried the colonel sharply; and telling Castro to wait for the
+cavalry, he rode off at a great pace towards Arica.  At four o'clock we
+staggered into the town, and were instantly met by the governor with a
+sorrowful tale.  He had secured the use of three vessels, but the
+commander of the fourth absolutely refused to be either coaxed or
+threatened into lending his assistance.
+
+There was not a moment to be lost, and Colonel Miller, with no other
+attendant than myself, ran down to the beach.  There we got on a balsa,
+or raft, which carried us to a launch, whose crew at once took us
+alongside a fine North American schooner.
+
+Clambering on deck, we found the master, to whom the colonel applied
+for the loan of his vessel.  The sour old sea-dog turned a deaf ear.
+The colonel offered a sum of money that would have bought the schooner
+outright at market value; he would have none of it.
+
+Now, it chanced that some of the crew were Englishmen who had served
+under Miller in the Chilian War; and though I did not know that, I
+could plainly see how interested they were in the discussion.  The
+colonel saw it too, and in a few simple but terse and vigorous words he
+laid the case before them.
+
+This produced a marked effect.  The men growled their approbation, and
+one sturdy fellow exclaimed stoutly, "I'm not going to see a countryman
+of mine hard pushed without helping him.  What's your sentiments,
+mates?"
+
+"The same!" cried they.--"We'll stand by you, colonel.  The Spaniards
+shan't cut you off if we can help it."
+
+"Thanks, men," replied Colonel Miller, "and I'll treat you fairly.
+Neither your master nor you shall have cause to complain."
+
+The skipper, however, was not to be appeased.  He threw up his command
+and went ashore with us, leaving the mate to navigate the vessel.  It
+was rather a high-handed proceeding, perhaps, on the colonel's part,
+but he was saving his troops from an unavailing fight against
+overwhelming odds.
+
+All that night we worked like slaves.  The launches could not come
+close inshore, so that every one and everything had to be transported
+to them on balsas.  The colonel did not spare himself, and my position
+procured me the honour of standing beside him knee-deep in surf while
+he superintended the embarkation.
+
+Most of the sick were got on board one or other of the four vessels,
+but the worst cases had to remain in hospital.  Then nearly a hundred
+people of the town, who had recently joined the Patriot cause,
+clamoured for protection, which was, of course, afforded.
+
+In the morning the colonel insisted I should take a rest, but the work
+continued all day, while from time to time scouts came in with the news
+that La Hera was advancing at full speed.  At length it was all done;
+only the colonel and I remained to go on board, and we had just reached
+the launch, when, with a yell and thunder of hoofs, the Royalist
+cavalry galloped down to the beach.
+
+"Just too late to take their passage," laughed Miller.  "What a pity!"
+
+"There's our late prisoner," I cried, standing up in the launch.  "Look
+at the rascal; he is shaking his sword at us, and laughing."
+
+"He's a fine fellow," remarked the colonel.  "I don't grudge him his
+liberty."
+
+Taking off my cap, I waved it vigorously; to which Santiago replied
+with a salute; and then, as pursuit was impossible, he led his men back
+into the town.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XII.
+
+A STERN PURSUIT.
+
+As soon as our vessels left the shelter of the bay, they felt the full
+force of the gale; and but for skilful handling on the part of their
+crews, would most likely have come to grief.  Even as it was, the more
+timid of the passengers began to think they would have done better in
+trusting to the mercy of the victorious Spaniards.
+
+"It is lucky for us, lieutenant," exclaimed Castro, "that the brigs did
+not reach Arica."
+
+"I hope they are safe," I said doubtfully.
+
+"Safe enough by this time," he replied--"at the bottom of the ocean!"
+
+Whether or not he was right in his surmise I cannot say, but from that
+day to this I never again heard mention of the unfortunate vessels.
+
+After being at sea about a week, on reduced rations both of food and of
+water, we ran one night into the roadstead of Pisco, landed, and before
+daylight had made ourselves masters of the town, the Royalists
+hurriedly retreating.
+
+On board the schooner I had obtained a much-needed rest, but directly
+my feet touched the shore I was set to work again.
+
+There never was such a man for prompt and instant action as Colonel
+Miller.  As Jose said more than once, he was always packing twenty-four
+hours' work into twelve, and no one within had ever had a chance to
+shirk his share.
+
+"We must follow up the enemy--follow them up, and not give them a
+moment's rest!" said he, almost before the nose of our boat had touched
+the shore.
+
+First, however, it was necessary to obtain animals, and almost before
+day broke a dozen parties were dispatched to scour the surrounding
+district for horses.  The Royalists, however, had been beforehand, and
+it took three days to procure the needful supplies.
+
+Fortunately a woman arrived from Lima with a drove of fifty mules,
+which our leader instantly pressed into the service, in spite of their
+lawful owner's protestations.  She was a fine, handsome, and remarkable
+woman, who traded on her own account like a man, and she made a sturdy
+fight for her property.  Directly the mules were seized she bounced
+into the colonel's room, her eyes ablaze.
+
+"Good-morning, madam," said he courteously.
+
+"It's a bad morning for me," she replied.  "Do you know that your men
+have stolen my mules?"
+
+"Not stolen, madam; only borrowed, by my orders, for the good of the
+Patriot cause."
+
+"I defy you to keep them!" she cried.  "See," and waving & paper, added
+triumphantly, "that will make you less high and mighty, Senor
+Englishman!"
+
+The paper was a passport and protection signed by San Martin himself;
+but it produced no effect on the stubborn colonel.
+
+"I am sorry, madam," he exclaimed, still courteously, "but my men need
+the mules.  They shall be paid for, handsomely, but I must have them."
+
+The woman gasped with astonishment, and pushing the paper close to the
+colonel's face, cried, "Are you blind?  Can't you see General San
+Martin's name?  Don't you know that he can have you shot to-day if he
+pleases?"
+
+"Not _to-day_, madam.  The swiftest messenger could not get here from
+Lima to-day; and thanks to your mules, which are really very fine
+animals, we shall begin to chase the Royalists at dawn."
+
+Luckily she could not see my face as she broke into a torrent of abuse.
+She had a fine command of the Spanish language, which she used for his
+benefit, besides throwing in a number of odd phrases picked up from
+English sailors.  And all the while the colonel beamed upon her
+genially, as if she were paying him the highest compliments.  At length
+she announced, in high-pitched tones, that where her mules went there
+would she go also; she would not trust them to such a band of thieving
+scoundrels.
+
+"I am delighted, madam," said the colonel, bowing low; "your society
+will in some degree atone for the hardships of our journey."
+
+Neither of us thought she would really carry out her threat; but early
+next morning she appeared mounted on one of her own mules, and attached
+herself to me.
+
+"Madam," said I gravely, trying to imitate the colonel, "this is a
+great pleasure for us; but even at the risk of losing your valued
+company, I must once more point out to you the real nature of this
+journey.  We shall be half starved, besides suffering torments from
+thirst; we shall be worn out by forced marches, and some of us, no
+doubt, will fall victims to the Spanish bullets."
+
+"I won't leave my mules," was her only reply.
+
+"But why not sell them to the colonel? he will give you a fair price."
+
+"And what about my profit?" she cried.  "Do you know why I came to
+Pisco?--to buy brandy at eight dollars a jar, which just now I could
+sell in Lima at eighty!  What do you think of that, young man?  Why, I
+should have cleared a handsome fortune by this trip!"
+
+"It is very sad, madam; but soldiers, you know--"
+
+"Soldiers?  Bah!  Look at them riding on my mules!  _My_ mules, mark
+you!  And to think that each of the honest beasts might be carrying
+four jars of brandy at eight dollars a jar! It's a wicked waste of
+mule-flesh!  Eight from eighty leaves seventy-two; take twelve for
+expenses, there's still sixty, and four sixties are two hundred and
+forty--all clear profit from!  A dozen of your vagabonds would be dear
+at the price!  Look at that rascally fellow cutting my mule with a
+whip!  I will most certainly have your colonel shot!"
+
+"I think not, madam; you have too tender a heart."
+
+"Yes," said she complacently, "that is the truth.  I am not stern
+enough.  But fancy"--and here she went all over her calculations again,
+winding up with the assertion that we were a set of common thieves and
+rogues.
+
+By degrees, however, her manner changed: the ill-humour wore off, and
+she became quite a Patriot, saying she would willingly lose her mules
+if the Royalists were hunted down.
+
+However, about nine o'clock in the morning I left the good lady to pour
+her grievances into more sympathetic ears, being ordered to push on
+with a small detachment of cavalry, guided by Castro.  Jose was lucky
+enough to stay with the main body.  Captain Plaza was in command of our
+party, and he rode with the guide and me.  Our course to Ica, the first
+village on our route, lay over a burning desert of very loose sand,
+dotted at great intervals by clumps of stunted palms.  It was a
+horrible ride, and when we reached Ica, about four in the afternoon,
+neither men nor animals could go a step further.
+
+The people received us kindly, provided food and drink, and fresh
+horses in place of our wearied animals.  Then we slept for an hour,
+and, thus refreshed, resumed the pursuit.  I have often wondered since
+how any of us survived the hardships of the next few days.
+
+Now and again we obtained an hour's rest, but our leader halted only
+when our animals showed signs of exhaustion.  The Spaniards must have
+suffered as much as, if not more than, ourselves, as occasionally we
+came upon a dead horse or a dead man, killed by sheer fatigue.
+
+On the third night after leaving lea we had ample proof of their
+desperate straits.  We had left the sandy deserts behind, and were
+toiling along painfully, sustained only by Castro's assurance that he
+knew of a capital camping-ground.
+
+"A fine wooded place," said he, "with grass for the horses, and a clear
+stream of water.  You will be tempted to stay there all night, captain."
+
+"Three hours," replied Plaza, "not a moment more.  We must be close on
+their heels now, and I don't mean Santalla to escape if I can help it."
+
+Santalla was a Royalist colonel of whose cruelty I had heard many
+times.  He was a gigantic fellow, of enormous strength; but, according
+to all accounts, a pitiful coward in spite of his boasting.  Indeed,
+any leader of average bravery would have turned and struck a blow at
+the handful of tired riders which now pursued him.
+
+"Here we are!" exclaimed Castro presently, and I saw with satisfaction
+the trees on our left hand to which he pointed.  Every bone in my body
+was racked with pain, my lips were parched, my eyes ached, and for the
+last hour I had scarcely been able to keep my seat.
+
+Halting his men, Plaza sent me on with the guide to investigate.
+Leaving our horses, we moved forward swiftly but quietly; there was
+just the possibility of a trap.  The place was almost like an enclosure
+on a large hacienda, but the fence was composed of trees, and we could
+hear the plashing waters of a stream.
+
+Inside the ring was an open space, and there, to our astonishment, we
+beheld some twenty men lying on the grass in all manner of attitudes.
+Not one made the slightest movement, and at first I thought they must
+be dead.
+
+"Don't be too sure," whispered Castro, and stooping down he glided
+noiselessly to the nearest man, while I waited with breathless
+eagerness.
+
+"Poor beggars!" said he pityingly; "we must have pushed them hard.  I
+don't believe they would waken if a cannon were fired at them!"
+
+This was an exaggeration, but indeed they slept so soundly that our
+men, surrounding them, took away most of their weapons before they
+understood what was going on.  Binding their arms, we pushed and
+dragged them close together, and then the captain placed his men round
+them in a circle.  Sentries were stationed at various places on the
+outer ring, and, much to my disgust, I was told off to visit them
+during the first hour.
+
+"Keep a sharp lookout," said the captain, "and go round regularly.
+They are likely to fall asleep if you don't,"--which I did not think at
+all surprising.  However, I had a good drink of water, and dipped my
+head in the stream, which freshened me somewhat.  Then I began what
+has, perhaps, been the very longest hour in my life.  Fortunately I had
+to walk, and I tried hard to keep my eyes open all the time.  As to the
+captain's "sharp look-out," I concluded he must have been joking.
+
+The hour came to an end at last, and I was free to sleep.  I just lay
+down on the ground, drew my poncho over me, and was sound asleep.  I
+would not have undertaken another hour's duty just then for all the
+gold ever mined.
+
+The capture of the small Spanish detachment was a benefit to us in one
+way: it prevented Plaza from moving so early, and gave us all an extra
+hour's sleep.  However, as soon as day broke, he told off half a dozen
+men to guard the prisoners until the colonel's arrival, and ordered the
+rest to be ready for starting in ten minutes.
+
+"It's nothing to do with me," remarked Castro, as he and I rode out at
+the head of the men; "but the captain's overdoing it.  He's taking the
+heart out of his fellows, and just at the last pinch they'll fall to
+pieces.  There's nothing left in them for a dash at the end."
+
+"We shouldn't shine in a cavalry charge," I admitted, laughing and
+looking at my horse, "unless, indeed, it were under Don Quixote's
+banner!"
+
+"Well, Crawford," cried the captain, riding up, "something ought to
+happen soon now.  It's a pity we wasted that last hour this morning,
+though.  We must make up for it during the day.  One of the prisoners
+informed me that Santalla cannot be far ahead.  I have a good mind to
+push on with the men on the strongest horses, leaving you to follow.
+What do you think?"
+
+"I think that you are going fast enough, captain.  Both men and horses
+are fagged now, and it's useless to catch up with Santalla just as we
+are all dead beat."
+
+"But if we don't go ahead we shan't catch him at all.  The colonel did
+not send us on in front to sit down by the wayside."
+
+"No, captain; but that's just what we shall be doing soon, whether we
+want to or not.  Most of the horses are nearly done for now."
+
+"Then we'll get fresh ones," cried he (which, by the way, there was no
+possible means of doing), "or continue the pursuit on foot.  Do you
+think if the colonel were in my place he would lag behind?"
+
+Of course I knew he would not, but then Miller was Miller, who had not,
+to my thinking, his equal in South America.  And Plaza wished to
+imitate his chief, forgetting he did not possess that marvellous
+personal influence over men which accounted so much for the English
+colonel's success.
+
+So we pushed on, till, at the end of the third mile or thereabout, a
+horse sank through sheer weariness to the ground, and had not
+sufficient strength to rise again.
+
+"Run on with the rest," said the captain to the rider; "we will ride
+and tie by turns."
+
+The man saluted and came on, but the last I saw of him he was
+staggering from side to side of the track, as if he had completely lost
+control of his limbs.  After a time another horse fell, giving us
+another infantry-man, who in a short time was, I daresay, also left
+behind on the road.
+
+"'Twill be a plain trail for the main body," remarked the guide; for we
+ourselves were continually passing broken weapons, mules that could not
+drag their limbs a step further, dead horses, and now and then a
+Royalist soldier curled up on the track fast asleep.
+
+"Where will Santalla make for?" I asked.
+
+"Arequipa.  But I don't think he can reach it.  The Indians bar the
+direct route, and his only way out, as far as I can see, is by taking
+to the mountains at Copari."
+
+"My horse won't face a hill just now."
+
+Castro smiled, saying, "The pass near Copari is too rugged for horses
+at any time; the climbing must all be done on foot," and he smiled
+again at my gesture of despair.
+
+At ten o'clock Plaza was compelled to halt, three-fourths of the men
+being tired as dogs, while several horses had foundered on the road.
+He was very excited, having heard from the last Spaniard picked up that
+Santalla, thoroughly worn out, was barely two hours' march in front.
+
+He glanced wrathfully at his tired troopers.  There they lay, five
+minutes after the order to halt, sleeping like dead men, and for the
+time being certainly of no greater use.
+
+"Caramba!" cried he, "it makes me wild!  Two hours, Crawford!  Do you
+hear?  And look at them!  The prize will slip through our fingers after
+all!"
+
+"Hardly that, captain," I murmured sleepily, "as it has never been in
+our hands."
+
+"Santalla will have to rest as well," remarked the guide, "so the
+scales will balance."
+
+"But I don't want them to balance!" cried Plaza testily.
+
+To give the captain his due, he was greatly in earnest, and willing to
+do himself all that he required of his men.  He showed this plainly two
+hours after we had resumed the pursuit, when his horse suddenly dropped
+from exhaustion.  A dozen troopers at once made as if to dismount, but
+he ordered them to keep their seats.
+
+"No, no," he roared; "I take no advantage!" and he ran on, holding by
+the stirrup to the nearest horseman.
+
+The fellows cheered him, and I think we got on better for the incident,
+though the halts became more frequent now, and our numbers lessened, as
+one man after another dropped exhausted to the ground.  Still we were
+gaining on the runaways, as a disagreeable episode presently made clear.
+
+It was about four o'clock in the afternoon, and we were straggling at
+no great speed through a narrow valley, when half a dozen bullets from
+the rocky sides dropped into our midst.
+
+"Ah!" exclaimed Castro, "now the Spaniards are playing the proper game.
+These fellows have been left to hold us in check while the main body
+escapes through the Copari Pass."
+
+"Push on there!" roared the captain, who after a spell of riding had
+just dismounted.  There was, indeed, nothing else to be done.  We must
+run the gauntlet, and trust to luck for some of us getting through.
+The Spaniards were well hidden, and could not be dislodged, unless,
+which was out of the question, we came to hand-grasps with them.  So
+urging our jaded beasts to a spurt, we quickened the pace, while now
+and again a groan and a thud told that a bullet had found its mark.
+
+Those who were hit lay where they fell; the most of us reached the open
+country just in time to see a dozen or fifteen horsemen mount and ride
+off.  Evidently they had the pick of Santalla's animals, as they easily
+kept their distance, though allowing us to advance within range, when,
+discharging their muskets, they recommenced the retreat.
+
+Plaza fumed like one distracted at the galling fire, which considerably
+delayed our advance, though we suffered in the loss of horses rather
+than of men.  He was riding again now, and well in front, with Castro
+and myself behind him.  Suddenly, after a scattering volley, I felt my
+horse slip, and the next instant the poor beast was sprawling on the
+ground with a bullet-hole in its chest.
+
+Staggering to my feet, I ran on, but unsteadily, for in truth I was
+getting very near the end of my strength.  However, a husky shout from
+those in front encouraged me, and I saw that at last we had come fairly
+upon the runaways.
+
+Just as Castro had foretold, they were taking to a mountain pass,
+eastward of Copari, and the main body was already toiling up the
+ascent.  Their stores lay about everywhere; horses and mules were
+abandoned; only a handful of horsemen, constituting the rearguard,
+preserved any appearance of order.  For a time they stoutly held the
+mouth of the pass, but at length, leaving their animals, they too
+disappeared.
+
+Plaza went at the entrance like a bull at a gate, Castro followed, and
+I toiled after them with the men.  Up we went, some cheering, but the
+majority with closed lips, saving their breath.  In our fatigued state
+the climb was fearfully distressing: men sank to the ground gasping, or
+fell while trying to grasp the overhanging rocks with nerveless fingers.
+
+As for me, though straining every nerve, I could not keep pace with the
+leaders.  My eyes smarted and ached; my head seemed to spin round; more
+than once I should have fallen but for a friendly hand.  Presently I
+heard Plaza cheer; but he was out of sight, and the sound seemed to
+come from a long distance.  Then I was placed gently against a rock by
+a soldier, who pushed on after the rest.
+
+Had I been hit?  I really did not know.  There was blood on my hands,
+but they had been gashed by the jagged rocks.  But hit or not, I must
+do my best to keep up; so trying to steady myself, I took another step
+forward.  The pass was filled with strange sounds and with strange
+shapes too.  Large birds hovered over my head, men and animals stood in
+my path; I had to dodge here and there in order to find a way through.
+
+Suddenly a man placed his arm round my waist, and saying, "You must lie
+down, lieutenant," carried me a little distance, and then placed me on
+the ground.
+
+"No, no," I murmured drowsily; "the captain is calling!  Don't you hear
+the captain calling?"
+
+"Yes," said he: "the Spaniards have escaped, and the captain has
+sounded a halt."
+
+I did not know then that the man was tricking me for my own good, so I
+answered innocently, "Thank goodness!  Now we shall have a little rest.
+Waken me when they return."
+
+"Never fear, sir," said he; "I will waken you," and even before he
+turned away I had lost all knowledge of the situation.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIII.
+
+HOME AGAIN.
+
+Several days passed before I could recognize any one or anything, and
+then I found myself lying in bed in a strange room, but with Jose
+sitting near me.  He rubbed his hands together and smiled when my eyes
+opened, but he would not talk beyond saying that we were back in Ica.
+
+I felt weak, but in no pain; and in a day or two was able to dress, and
+with Jose's help to go for a stroll in the town.  Several acquaintances
+congratulated me on my recovery; but not seeing Captain Plaza, I asked
+Jose if he had been hurt.
+
+"Oh no," he answered, with a smile; "the captain is sound in everything
+but temper.  Santalla spoiled that by getting clear off.  You won't
+forget that charming little trip in a hurry, Jack!"
+
+"Oh, it was simply awful!  I wouldn't go through it again to be made
+commander-in-chief.  I wonder it didn't kill me."
+
+"It did kill some, and knocked you all out except Plaza and the guide.
+There was precious little difficulty in finding the route you had
+taken.  One of the troopers showed me where you were.  'The lieutenant
+is a bit light-headed; said he; 'so I put him in a corner out of harm's
+way.  I told him the captain had stopped the pursuit.'"
+
+"I remember something about it.  I was tired out before my horse got
+hit, and the climb up the pass finished me."
+
+"You weren't the only one to get knocked up.  However, the colonel
+obtained a light cart, and we brought you all back to Ica."
+
+"So we had our trouble for nothing?"
+
+"Not exactly.  Santalla escaped, but he left all his stores behind, and
+nearly a hundred of his men were captured.  Most of them, I think, were
+very glad of it.  We couldn't get them to keep their eyes open, they
+were so sleepy."
+
+"What did the colonel say?"
+
+"Oh, he laughed, and chaffed Plaza a bit, but I think he was very well
+satisfied.  Now we had better turn back."
+
+I offered no objection, as even the short distance we had walked had
+fatigued me wonderfully.  By degrees, however, my strength returned,
+and at the end of another week I was able to resume my duties.
+
+The colonel, as usual, was extremely busy, having to keep in order all
+the affairs of a huge district.  Though my services were very welcome,
+he would not let me do too much, saying kindly, "Take it easy, my lad.
+One mustn't spur the willing horse.  We are not chasing Santalla just
+at present."
+
+"Thank goodness!" I exclaimed.  "One can have too much of that sport."
+And the colonel indulged in one of his merry laughs.
+
+The town at this time was very quiet.  There were no Spanish troops
+within many miles; our own men, through decent food and careful
+nursing, were rapidly recovering from the effects of their long forced
+marches; and fierce bands of our guerillas guarded the mountain passes.
+As far as our particular district was concerned, the war seemed to be
+over.
+
+One night as I sat making a fair copy of a proclamation, the colonel,
+looking up suddenly, exclaimed, "Crawford, would you like to go to
+Lima?"
+
+"To Lima, sir?" and I let the pen fall in my eagerness; "why, I'd give
+anything to go there!"
+
+"Well, you can go for nothing, my boy, in a day or two.  Of course you
+know our friends have been for some time now in possession of the
+capital, and that San Martin is Protector of Peru?"
+
+"Yes, sir, though I think 'tis but an empty title until the Royalists
+are thoroughly beaten."
+
+"All in good time," said he pleasantly.  "That will come some day.  We
+shall be masters of Callao shortly; which will be a great step forward.
+I have received news this afternoon which impels me to make the journey
+to Lima; so if you think you're strong enough--"
+
+"I'm sure I am," I cried eagerly.  "I haven't an ache or pain in my
+whole body now, and--"
+
+"All right!" interrupted the colonel; "I'll take you.  Now finish your
+copying, and don't fling the ink all over the place; it's wasteful."
+
+It was not only wasteful, but it gave me extra work, the copy being so
+smeared and blotted that I had to write it again on a fresh sheet.
+
+"Lima in a day or two!" I said softly to myself as my pen drove along
+the paper.  The words sounded like sweetest music to me, and I hummed
+them to myself over and over again.  I pictured the dear old home, the
+park, the pony I had ridden so often, the silvery pond, and the boats I
+had fashioned to sail on its waters.
+
+But above and beyond all I saw my mother, with eyes aglint and face
+suffused with joy.  The vision was so real that I stopped in my writing
+to view it more closely.  And when the colonel presently gave me leave
+for the remainder of the day, I rushed off to find Jose, hardly knowing
+whether I ran or flew.
+
+"What is it, Jack?" he exclaimed.  "Has Captain Plaza promised to take
+you on another trip?"
+
+He laughed at his own joke, and I laughed too, being in the humour to
+see fun in anything.
+
+"You aren't far out, Jose," I replied, slapping him on the shoulder out
+of pure good humour.  "I am going on a trip, but not with Plaza!"
+
+"Then it must be with the colonel."
+
+"Right this time.  But where are we going, Jose? can you tell me that,
+eh?  No, you'll never guess, so I will tell you.  To _Lima_, my boy!
+what do you think of that?"
+
+"I think that your mother will be very pleased to see you."
+
+"Fancy seeing her again, Jose, after all these weary months!"
+
+"She will hardly know you," said he.  "You have grown so tall and
+strong and manly.  You are the image of what your father was at your
+age, Jack.  Are all the troops to be moved up?"
+
+"I think not.  As far as I know, the colonel's only paying a flying
+visit to the capital.  Why are you laughing?"
+
+"Because I'm rather doubtful of that.  If Miller goes to Lima, it's a
+proof there are hard knocks about.  And high time too!  According to
+the talk, the war should have been done with long ago."
+
+Next day the colonel made his arrangements, and on the following
+morning he set out, leaving Major Videla in charge of the district.
+Rather to my surprise, Jose formed one of the party, which consisted
+only of us three.
+
+Under some circumstances the journey would have been tedious; but
+Colonel Miller was very agreeable, and told us many interesting stories
+of his adventurous career.  Thus the time passed pleasantly enough, and
+on the evening of September 11, 1821, we arrived in the neighbourhood
+of Lima.
+
+The capital, as I have said, was in possession of the Patriots; but a
+Royalist garrison still held Callao, and the Royalist general,
+Canterac, with a small army, had just swooped down from the mountains
+to help his friends.  Our soldiers were chiefly stationed between the
+two towns; but the citizens of Lima had armed themselves, and swaggered
+about talking of the great deeds they were about to perform.
+
+The colonel, aware of my anxiety, agreed that I should pay a visit to
+my mother at once.
+
+"I must see General San Martin," said he.  "He may give me a post here,
+and if so, I will send for you.  But you have earned a few days' rest,
+and I shall not omit to mention you favourably to the protector."
+
+As soon as he had gone, Jose and I rode on quickly.  My heart beat
+fast, and my hands trembled so that I had to use both in holding the
+reins.
+
+"I suppose it is all right, Jose," I remarked as we drew near the
+house.  "I suppose there is nothing wrong?"
+
+"No, no," replied he; "why should there be?  You are nervous, my boy,
+that's all.  Cheer up; in a short time you will be in your mother's
+arms."
+
+At the outer gate I drew back, leaving Jose to accost the janitor, who
+greeted him heartily.  Then in silence we rode through the park to the
+courtyard, and in response to our knocking Antonio appeared.
+
+On seeing me the old man would have screamed with delight, but I
+checked him, saying softly, "Hush, Antonio; tell me quickly of your
+mistress, my mother.  Is she well?"
+
+"In health, senor, but sad.  Ah, the house has been very lonely for
+many a long day!"
+
+"Go you, Jose," said I, "and prepare her."
+
+"Joy never kills," answered he, laughing; "but perhaps it will be as
+well for me to go in first."
+
+I waited a few moments, and then dismounting, walked softly towards the
+entrance.  What would she say? what would she do?  My heart almost
+ceased beating as I stood in the shadow listening.  The door was wide
+open, and a stream of light came from the spacious hall.
+
+Suddenly I heard a quick step, and then my mother's voice crying,
+"Juan! my Juan! where are you?"  And running forward, I threw myself
+joyfully into her arms.  She kissed me repeatedly, and then hand in
+hand we went inside.
+
+"Mother!" I cried, "mother!" and for a long time that was the only word
+spoken.  We sat down side by side, and her beautiful eyes, dimmed by
+very joy, looked into mine.  She pressed my hand, smoothed my cheeks,
+and brushed back the hair from my forehead, murmuring softly, "Juan, my
+Juan!"
+
+I think, perhaps, that great happiness, like great grief, kills speech.
+At least it was so with us, and we were content to sit there silently
+gazing into each loved face.
+
+At length the good old major-domo, knocking timidly at the door,
+announced that supper was served, when my mother with a sigh suffered
+me to leave her for a few minutes, in order to make myself more
+presentable for the table.
+
+I would have had Jose sit down with us, but he disappeared, and perhaps
+after all it was as well.  My mother made only a pretence at eating,
+and sat with her eyes fixed on me, as though fearful I should in some
+mysterious way suddenly disappear.
+
+After supper we returned to the drawing-room, where I related my
+adventures, telling her the story of the shipwreck, of my rescue and
+imprisonment in the fort, of my marvellous escape, and all the various
+incidents which had happened since I left home.  Of Santiago's
+information concerning my father I said nothing, though I longed
+greatly to do so.
+
+"I think General Barejo wished you well," she exclaimed after a pause.
+"He is not of our way of thinking, but he has a kind heart, and he was
+a true friend to me before these troubles came upon us."
+
+"Was he ever friendly with father?" I asked.
+
+"He respected him much, though he thought him greatly mistaken.  You
+see, their ideas were altogether opposed, but in private life each
+esteemed the other."
+
+Presently, remembering that the Royalists no longer held Lima, I said,
+"What has become of little Rosa?  I hope our people have not disturbed
+her, though it must be lonely for her living in that great house alone.
+Could she not have come to you?"
+
+"There was no need," and my mother's lips curled scornfully; "she is
+safe enough with her father."
+
+"With her father?" I echoed, in astonishment.  "How can he take a
+delicate child like that into a rough camp?"
+
+"His house is not a rough camp, Juan!"
+
+The truth did not strike me at first, so I said innocently, "Oh, has he
+been wounded and obtained permission to be nursed at home?  Is he
+seriously hurt?"
+
+"He is quite well, I believe, and is one of us."
+
+"Felipe Montilla turned _Patriot_?" I cried in amazement.
+
+Now let me not be misunderstood.  I honestly believed our cause just.
+In my small way I had ventured my life for the independence of Peru,
+and was quite ready to venture it again.  But this man had boasted his
+loyalty to the Spanish king, had fought under his flag, had taken high
+rank in his army!  He had accepted from him both honours and broad
+lands, and then at the first reverse in his fortunes had slunk away
+like a whipped cur.
+
+"A fig for such Patriots!" cried I hotly.  "Were I San Martin, he
+should be whipped back to the men he has deserted.  Give me a loyal
+friend or a stout enemy, I care not which; but these _jellyfish_--bah!
+they are an abomination."
+
+"You are young, my boy, and not quite wise enough to understand these
+things.  Is it not to Don Felipe's credit that he should openly confess
+his mistake?"
+
+"And save his estates into the bargain," said I wrathfully.  "Let the
+Spaniards get the upper hand, and you will find him back in their ranks
+quickly enough."
+
+"A man must follow the guiding of his conscience, even if it lead to
+his advantage," remarked my mother quietly.  "But if you are indignant
+with Don Felipe, you will be equally delighted with Rosa.  She is still
+Loyalist to the core, and makes no secret of it.  She told San Martin
+the other day that he was a busybody, meddling in affairs that did not
+concern him, and that the people of Peru could settle their disputes
+without his interference."
+
+"Bravo, Rosa!" I cried, with a laugh; "there is nothing like speaking
+one's mind.  I'll wager San Martin prefers the girl to her father.
+Have you seen the general?"
+
+"Yes; he paid me a friendly visit on purpose to show his admiration for
+your dear father.  He is a most remarkable man."
+
+It was not until the evening drew to a close that my mother spoke of
+what lay nearest her heart--our plans for the future.  She admitted
+with a sigh that I must in honour offer my services to San Martin.  I
+was still young, but there were many boys fighting in the ranks, and
+some had already sacrificed their lives for the cause.
+
+"It is hard to let you go again," said she, pressing me fondly to her,
+"and yet I must.  God grant that the war may soon be brought to an end!"
+
+"Amen to that!" I exclaimed fervently.  "Fighting is not to my liking,
+but I cannot stand idly by while others risk their lives for my
+benefit."
+
+"No," said my mother, kissing me good-night; "you must do your duty, my
+boy.  Your father would have wished it."
+
+A few minutes later I went to my room, and was just closing the door
+when Jose appeared.  He looked hot and flushed, and I asked where he
+had been.
+
+"To the camp," said he, with a laugh, "to see what's going on.  I
+thought the colonel must have had some special news.  Unless San Martin
+holds his hand, the Spaniards are lost.  They can't stay at Callao, as
+there isn't food even for the garrison; they aren't strong enough to
+take Lima: they must retreat or starve."
+
+"Well?" I exclaimed questioningly.
+
+"Why, don't you see, directly they begin to retreat we shall crush
+them.  Already nearly two hundred of their men have deserted."
+
+"More deserters?  Why, we shall soon be able to form a battalion of
+turncoats for Don Felipe to lead!"
+
+It was now Jose's turn to look astonished, and his expression of
+amazement was so ludicrous that I laughed outright.
+
+"What a poltroon!" he cried contemptuously.  "But I'll see you get no
+harm by this right-about face.  He is mistaken if he thinks his
+treachery will give him a hold on your estates."
+
+"A hold on my estates, Jose?  What do you mean?"
+
+"Oh," said he, "I have not cared to speak of it, but I must now."  And
+he proceeded to inform me that all my father's property had passed into
+the possession of Don Felipe Montilla.
+
+"But," I exclaimed, striving to appear calm, "that will be set aside
+now.  San Martin will never allow our property to be confiscated
+because my father died for the Patriot cause."
+
+"Montilla is a fox, Jack, and has made a good bargain for himself, no
+doubt.  I expect he obtained the general's written promise to confirm
+him in all his estates.  And if so," he concluded gloomily, "yours form
+part of them."
+
+"He shall not keep them," I cried angrily, "whatever San Martin has
+promised!"
+
+"No; but we must not quarrel openly until the Spaniards are done with.
+Montilla has influence, and no doubt San Martin finds him useful.  But
+don't take it to heart, Jack; we will defeat him in the end."
+
+"If we don't," said I grimly, "it will be because the son has followed
+the father.  And that reminds me, do you think Montilla knows what
+actually happened to my father?  It always seemed strange to me that
+Rosa should learn of that affair so quickly."
+
+"You don't suspect--"
+
+"That he had a hand in his death?  No, hardly that, though he is
+mean-spirited enough for it.  But it struck me that, being high in the
+viceroy's favour, he probably knew what was going on."
+
+"That is possible at least."
+
+"Probable, I should say.  However, to-morrow I intend putting the
+question to him."
+
+"Do you mean that you are going to interview him on the subject?"
+
+"Why not?  There can be no harm in asking a straightforward question."
+
+"Mind you don't lose your temper, my boy.  It's dangerous work rousing
+a venomous snake until its poison bag is extracted."
+
+"Never fear, Jose.  I have learned how to take care of myself during
+the last few months.  Thanks to you and the colonel, I have done some
+hard practising.  And now turn in.  It will seem strange to sleep in
+one's own bed again, won't it?"
+
+"Make the most of it," advised he laughingly.  "It may be a long time
+before you have another chance."
+
+I felt very tired, and yet it was long before I fell asleep.  I was
+angry at Montilla's double-dealing, sorry for Rosa, my old playmate,
+and agitated by a thousand vague doubts and suspicions.
+
+In the morning I rose very little refreshed, had a simple breakfast in
+my room, and went to find Jose.  He had already returned from an early
+visit to the camp, and brought word that matters were still in the same
+state.  The Spaniards remained sheltered under the guns of the
+fortress, and San Martin, knowing their provisions were almost
+exhausted, would not attack.
+
+Presently we were joined by my mother, who made Jose happy by praising
+him for his care of me.  Then we took a stroll round the grounds,
+looked in at my workshop, where my half-painted boat still lay, and
+paid a visit to the lake.
+
+After a while I asked Jose to have my horse saddled, saying, "Excuse
+me, mother, for a short time, please.  You know the colonel may send
+for me at any moment, and I should like to see Rosa once more."
+
+This was only partly the truth, but I could not speak of my principal
+motive, for as yet, acting under Jose's advice, I had made no mention
+of Santiago's queer story.  It would have been cruel to raise hopes
+that might have no actual foundation.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIV
+
+FRIEND OR FOE!
+
+I have before said that Don Felipe was our nearest neighbour; the
+grounds of his house, indeed, joined our own, and I might easily have
+gone there on foot.  Perhaps it was a touch of pride which induced me
+to go on horseback, as I was a good rider, and young enough to feel a
+certain satisfaction in my appearance.
+
+I had grown beyond the recollection of the gatekeeper, who admitted me
+to the courtyard with a show of deference, saying that both his master
+and young mistress were at home.  Rosa's mother had been dead for some
+years.
+
+Don Felipe had numerous servants, and to one of them I threw the reins,
+telling him to mind my horse.  Then going to the door, I inquired for
+Don Felipe.
+
+The major-domo was showing me to a small room, when a girl, merrily
+humming a popular Royalist song, came tripping along the corridor.
+Suddenly she stopped, looked hard at me, and then came forward again,
+saying, "Juan!  Surely you are Juan Crawford?"
+
+I have sometimes laughed since at my stupidity, yet there might be
+found some excuse for it.  During my absence from Lima I had often
+thought of my little playmate, but it had never occurred to me that
+time would change her as well as myself.  And now, instead of the merry
+child with whom I had romped and played, there appeared a beautiful
+girl at whom I gazed in wonder.
+
+"Are you not Juan Crawford?" she asked again, speaking softly.
+
+"Yes," said I, "I am Juan; but you, senorita?"
+
+Her face rippled with merry laughter; but pouting her lips, she said,--
+
+"What a poor compliment to your old friend, Juan!  Surely you have not
+forgotten Rosa!"
+
+"Nay, that have I not; I have forgotten nothing.  But you are so
+changed, Rosa--so different!"
+
+"So are you; but I knew you at once.  When did you come home?  Have you
+come to see me?"
+
+"Yes, and your father as well.  I have some business with him."
+
+"Oh!" cried she, tossing her head and frowning, "of course you and he
+are on the same side.  My father is a Patriot now, and cries, 'Down
+with the king!'  I suppose your meddlesome general has sent you with a
+message."
+
+I did not undeceive her; and while the servant carried my name to his
+master, we entered one of the rooms and continued our conversation.  I
+saw she was troubled; yet with great skill and grace she put me at
+ease, and led me to talk of what had happened during the last two years.
+
+"What a fire-eater you are, Juan!" she cried banteringly.  "I am quite
+afraid of you.  But what a fine sword you have!  Ah, if I were only a
+boy!  Can you guess what I would do?"
+
+"No," I replied, with a shake of the head.  "No one can guess what a
+girl will do."
+
+"But I said a boy."
+
+"Ah! that would be altogether different."
+
+"I will tell you then," she said, standing up and speaking very
+earnestly.  "I would get a sword and pistols and join the king's
+friends.  I would be a loyal Spanish cavalier, Juan, if I were the only
+one in Peru!"
+
+"Then it is lucky you are a girl, Rosa, or you would soon be killed.  I
+would not harm the king, even if he were here instead of being in
+Spain, thousands of miles away; but I have no love for those who rule
+in his name."
+
+"No," said she, casting down her eyes, and I thought her voice sounded
+sad; "you have suffered at their hands.  But it is not the king's
+fault, Juan; he would have seen you righted."
+
+"It is a long way from Peru to Spain," said I, trying to speak
+carelessly, "and it seems as if in these days one must right one's own
+wrongs."
+
+After that we sat speaking very little, each afraid lest the talk
+should drift into an awkward channel, for I felt sure that she knew how
+her father had robbed us of our estates.
+
+On the return of the servant she whispered earnestly, "My father has
+changed greatly.  I am sure he is unhappy.  If he should appear cross
+and irritable, you will bear with him, won't you, Juan?"
+
+"I will do my best, Rosa.  But why should he be angry with me?  I am
+only going to ask him a question."
+
+Don Felipe was truly much altered.  His dark hair was plentifully
+sprinkled with silver; there were deep lines in his forehead and around
+his lips; his eyes had become shifty, and there was a look of cunning
+in them.  He gave me just one swift, searching glance, and then looked
+away.  It was an awkward meeting, and I hardly knew what to say.
+Fortunately Don Felipe took the lead.
+
+"You have grown almost out of knowledge, my young friend; and I notice
+you have obtained military rank," said he, with a covert sneer.
+
+"I have the honour to be a lieutenant in the army to which we both
+belong, senor," I replied.
+
+He winced at that, and his eyes glowed angrily.
+
+"If you have brought me a message from your general," said he, "will
+you at once deliver it?  I am very busy just now."
+
+"I will not take up more than five minutes of your valuable time,
+senor.  My errand is an important one, though _at present_ it has
+nothing to do with General San Martin."
+
+Again he glanced at me sharply, and I thought he seemed slightly
+nervous.
+
+"I must ask you to be quick with it," he said coldly.
+
+"I only desire to ask you about the death of my father.  I am sure you
+will give me all the information in your power, as he died for the
+independence of Peru, which to-day both you and I are trying to secure."
+
+At that he started up, his eyes blazing, his hand on his sword.
+
+"Do you think I killed your father?" he roared furiously.  "He died
+through his own fault.  I warned him again and again that the time was
+not ripe, but he paid no heed to me."
+
+"Are you not mistaken?" I asked.  "According to the Indians' account,
+he was slain while trying to prevent them from rising."
+
+"Then the government was deceived.  No good can be done by digging up
+the dead past, but you shall hear all that I know of the story.  At
+that time there were three parties in the country.  One section, led by
+your father, resolved upon armed insurrection; another, composed of
+Royalists, determined that nothing should be changed; the third, to
+which I belonged, endeavoured to obtain reform by moderate means.  I
+need not say that your father was a marked man.  One day the viceroy
+received word that he had started for the mountains in order to rouse
+the Indians to revolt, and, to prevent mischief, it was arranged that
+he should be placed in prison.  As you may know, he refused to submit
+quietly, and, unfortunately, was shot in the fight which ensued."
+
+"Was his body brought back to Lima?"
+
+"I never heard so.  Most probably it was left on the mountains.  I was
+sorry for him; but he was a headstrong man, and would not listen to
+reason."
+
+"That was foolish of him," I remarked quietly.  "Had he waited till the
+proper time to declare his real opinions, he would not have lost his
+life, nor my mother her property.  It is possible, indeed, that our
+estates would have been largely added to."
+
+"The estates were confiscated, it is true," said Don Felipe slowly,
+"but they fell into friendly hands."  Then, in quite a kindly tone, he
+added, "You feel bitter against me, Juan--I see it in your face.
+Perhaps it is natural; yet you really have no reason to do so.  I must
+not say more now, but all will come right in the end."
+
+"So I intend," said I stoutly, yet feeling rather mystified.
+
+The man's sudden change of manner puzzled me.  After all, I was only a
+boy, with little ability and no training to seek for things lying
+beneath the surface.  And Montilla seeing the state of my mind, played
+upon it with consummate skill.
+
+I cannot truthfully say that he made any definite promise, but this was
+the impression I received:--Knowing that all my father's property was
+forfeit to the law, he had exerted his influence to secure it.  At that
+time he thought the trouble would be settled without fighting, and
+intended in a year or two to restore the estates.  When the war broke
+out, he endeavoured to bring the viceroy over to the cause of reform,
+but finding that impossible, was compelled reluctantly to join the
+Patriots.  Of course, in the matter of the estates, nothing could be
+done now till the war was over.
+
+"Thus," said he cheerfully, "the future is safe.  If the Patriots win,
+we can have the confiscation revoked; while, on the other hand, I count
+so many friends among the moderate Royalists that the viceroy would
+hardly care to thwart me."
+
+"In any case," said I bluntly, though with no wish to vex him, "the
+Indians will see that I am not wronged!"
+
+"Trust me," he answered, his voice sounding now like the purring of a
+cat; "Felipe Montilla never makes mistakes."
+
+I had a stinging reply on my lips, but refraining from giving it
+utterance, I bade him farewell.
+
+"Come again, Juan," said he, "if the general can spare you!"  And
+though not overburdened with wits, I had a sense of being laughed at.
+
+I was joined in the corridor by Rosa, who wanted to know why I was
+going so soon.
+
+"I really must," I answered, smiling.  "I have spent no time with my
+mother yet, and I may be sent for at any moment."
+
+"But this will not be _good-bye_?"
+
+"On the contrary, I hope to see you often.  Your father has given me
+the kindest of invitations."
+
+At this she opened her eyes wide; but quickly recovering herself, she
+smiled pleasantly, and accompanied me to the hall.  As I rode by, she
+was standing at a window waving her hand.
+
+I had much to think of during the short ride home, but I got little
+satisfaction from my thoughts.  Nothing had been gained by my visit to
+Montilla, and his story only went to confirm the truth of the reports
+of my father's death.  As to my faith in his startling promises, it
+grew weaker with every step my horse took.
+
+I said nothing to my mother; but Jose, to whom I related all that had
+passed, laughed loudly.
+
+"The cunning old fox!" cried he; "he hasn't his equal for craft in
+Peru!  You will see that, whoever sinks, Don Felipe Montilla will swim."
+
+"Not at my expense," I exclaimed, "while I have strength to raise an
+arm."
+
+The rest of that day I spent with my mother, forcing myself to forget
+that any trouble existed in the world.  It was only a brief spell of
+happiness, but we enjoyed every second of it, and by nightfall my
+mother's face had lost some of its sadness, and her eyes shone brightly
+as in the olden days.
+
+Early next morning an order was brought to me to rejoin Colonel Miller,
+as it was arranged that, for a time at least, Jose should remain behind
+to look after the affairs of the hacienda.  The servants assembled in
+the courtyard to see me off, and my mother came to the hall door.
+There she embraced me, and stood smiling bravely as I mounted.
+Whatever sorrow she felt was locked up tightly in her own breast.
+
+Accompanied by the man who had brought the order, I rode briskly to
+Mirones, the headquarters of the Patriot army, and about a mile from
+Callao.
+
+The colonel was with San Martin and a group of officers, watching the
+enemy's movements; but he turned to me at once, saying, "General, this
+is Lieutenant Crawford, of whom I spoke."
+
+San Martin, the Protector of Peru, was a tall man with black hair,
+bushy whiskers, and a deep olive complexion.  He had black, piercing
+eyes, fringed by long lashes and overhung by heavy brows and a high,
+straight forehead.  He was strong and muscular, with an erect, military
+carriage.  He looked every inch a soldier, and one, moreover, with an
+iron will that nothing could bend.  His voice was harsh and unmusical,
+but he spoke in a kindly, simple, and unaffected manner.
+
+"Colonel Miller has told me many things of you, lieutenant," said he,
+"and all to your credit.  I am glad to know that the son of Don Eduardo
+Crawford is following so well in his father's steps."
+
+"Thank you, general," I replied, bowing low.
+
+"I understand," he continued, "that Colonel Miller wishes to keep you
+with him.  It is certainly an honourable post; but I fancy you are
+likely to get many hard knocks," he concluded, with a laugh.
+
+"He has had a strong taste of the service, general," observed Miller,
+with a merry smile.--"Are you willing to stay with me, Crawford?"
+
+"Yes, certainly, sir, with the general's permission."
+
+"Very well," said San Martin.  "And, by the way, colonel, let him have
+on hour's sleep now and again,"--a little joke at which the group of
+officers, knowing the Englishman's habits, laughed heartily.
+
+The general presently rode off to his quarters, the officers went to
+their several duties, and I accompanied Colonel Miller to that part of
+the field in which his men were stationed.  He had been appointed to
+the command of a column seven hundred strong, which was held in
+readiness to move at any moment.  The officers were unknown to me, but
+they seemed pleasant, genial fellows, and in a short time I felt quite
+at home with them.  The younger ones were grumbling because San Martin
+did not at once attack the enemy, saying that Canterac would slip away
+to the mountains in the night.
+
+"Then his army will break up of its own accord," remarked a grizzled
+major.  "He can't take his guns, and his troops are starving.  Hundreds
+will throw down their weapons on finding us close at their heels."
+
+"Better have a straight fight and have done with it," grumbled a
+youngster.  "There's no fun playing at hide-and-seek in the hills."
+
+"Should you live to be a man," said the major reprovingly, "you won't
+talk in such a light-hearted way of a battle."  And the boy's face
+flushed at the laugh which greeted the remark.
+
+"Don't be too sarcastic, Gamarra," cried another.  "The youngster's
+right in the main.  If Canterac escapes, the war may drag on for
+months, and will cost thousands of lives.  The mountains will kill more
+than a pitched battle would."
+
+"Canterac can't escape if we follow him up properly," said the major,
+"and Colonel Miller seems the man to do that."
+
+"That is so; but he can't move without orders; and there's more than
+one man in high places who will prefer Lima to a pursuit."
+
+Thus they talked during the afternoon, and early in the evening Colonel
+Miller ordered that every one not on duty should turn in at once; which
+we took to be a sign that something was going to happen shortly.
+
+At ten o'clock the column was roused.  The men assembled silently, and
+a whisper went round that Canterac had begun his retreat.  For more
+than an hour we awaited fresh orders, the colonel on horseback fuming
+impatiently, until at last the word came to march.
+
+"An hour thrown away," muttered the colonel angrily.  "Canterac will
+laugh in our faces."
+
+To our disgust, we found that the column was attached to the main army,
+and that we had to move step by step to the will of the chief.  I knew
+very little about military tactics, but it was a strange kind of
+pursuit, and made me think of a tortoise chasing a hare.
+
+"I wonder what Captain Plaza would think of this performance?" said the
+colonel, rather bitterly, as we jogged along.  "This isn't the way he
+took you after Santalla, eh?"
+
+"Indeed no, colonel!" I replied, laughing.  "The captain would have had
+us on the other side of Lima by now."
+
+"It's like a funeral procession," he muttered impatiently; "and if they
+don't mind, 'twill be a funeral procession in reality.  We shall be
+burying the independence of Peru."
+
+The ridiculous part of it was that our column had been formed of all
+the light companies on purpose to swoop down on the foe.  As far as I
+could judge, the swoop was much like that of a hawk whose wings had
+been carefully tied to its body.
+
+However, we tramped along throughout the night, halting at daybreak
+without getting a glimpse of the exulting Canterac.
+
+"Never mind," exclaimed the colonel, who hated to look on the dark side
+of things; "we may catch them during the day."
+
+In this he was disappointed, as we proceeded in the same leisurely
+manner, just as if we were out for a quiet stroll on a summer's day.
+Several times Miller rode off to the staff, but on each occasion he
+returned looking more dissatisfied than before.
+
+The men wondered, and at each halt the officers talked pretty freely
+among themselves, giving their opinions with refreshing vigour.
+
+"Canterac has the start of us now," said one, "and we shall never
+overtake him.  We had the game in our hands, and have simply thrown it
+away."
+
+The grizzled major remained optimistic, saying, "You may depend that
+San Martin has some scheme in his head."  But the rest of us were
+doubtful.
+
+"If I had an enemy in a trap, my scheme would be to keep him there and
+not to let him walk out through an open door," laughed a young captain.
+"The war might have been finished to-day; now it's likely to go on for
+another twelvemonth."
+
+"Well," remarked one of his comrades, "it's a comfort to think we
+shan't kill ourselves through over-exertion."
+
+By degrees we pushed on to a place about nine leagues east of Lima,
+where it seemed as if the lumbering machine had broken down altogether.
+It was evening when we arrived and halted; the men ate the last morsel
+of their scanty rations; the chief officers, though no one could
+imagine what they found to discuss, held a conference, and presently it
+leaked out that the pursuit had been abandoned.
+
+"I don't profess to understand it," exclaimed Major Gamarra, "but you
+will find that there's some grand scheme in the air."
+
+"Ah!" interrupted another officer, in a sarcastic tone, "and no doubt
+it will stay there; most of these precious schemes do.  What I should
+like to see would be a little common sense."
+
+"Would you recognize it if you saw it?" put in the major quick as
+lightning; and all the others laughed.
+
+"Perhaps not.  I've had little opportunity of renewing my acquaintance
+with it since San Martin came to Peru."
+
+This was a dangerous remark, as we were a very mixed crowd.  Some had
+come from Buenos Ayres with San Martin; others were Chilians who had
+fought with him throughout the Chilian War; several, like myself, were
+natives of Peru; while two or three were Englishmen.
+
+Fortunately, before the dispute had had time to become hot, the colonel
+returned from the conference, and joined us at the fire.
+
+"I don't know, gentlemen, that anything is likely to happen," said he;
+"but we may as well enjoy a night's rest while we can," and wrapping
+his cloak around him, he lay down, setting an example which most of us
+followed.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XV.
+
+WE CATCH A TARTAR.
+
+When I awoke at six o'clock in the morning, most of the officers and
+men were still sleeping, but the colonel had disappeared.  There was
+nothing to be done beyond feeding and grooming my horse, which I always
+made a point of doing myself.  As to my own breakfast, my haversack was
+empty, and I think there was hardly a pound of meat to be found among
+the whole column.
+
+After a short time the men were roused, and just after seven o'clock we
+saw the colonel come tearing along on horseback, as if pursued by a
+cavalry division.  Evidently he was in a great hurry, and his face was
+wreathed in smiles.
+
+"Good-morning, gentlemen," he cried.  "You will be glad to hear my
+news: we move in an hour's time.  The general has only a scanty stock
+of provisions, but there is sufficient to provide your men with
+breakfast.--Crawford, hunt up Lieutenant-Colonel O'Brien, and ask him
+to come to me at once."
+
+O'Brien was a famous Irishman who had served with San Martin all
+through the Chilian War.  He was a fine fellow, standing six feet six
+inches high, and well proportioned.  Every one loved him for his
+winning ways, his ready smile, his perfect honesty, and his absolute
+fearlessness.
+
+"Colonel Miller?" said he, on hearing my message.  "Faith, I'll come
+instantly."  And we rode back together.
+
+"You're prompt, O'Brien," exclaimed the colonel, laughing; "Have you
+had enough of this slow-time business?"
+
+"More than enough, colonel.  What are your fellows looking so pleased
+about?"
+
+"First, the prospect of a breakfast; and then--"
+
+"You've badgered the general into giving you a free hand!"
+
+"Not quite that; but I have permission to push on.  I fear it's too
+late.  Canterac is a fine soldier, and will be ready for us now; but I
+am going to see if he has left any weak places.  Would you care to come
+with me?"
+
+"You're just a jewel, colonel," exclaimed the big Irishman
+enthusiastically, "and I'm eternally devoted to you.  When do we start?"
+
+"Directly after breakfast.  Will you take some with me?"
+
+"That will I, colonel, and I'm as charmed with the second invitation as
+the first.  I dined with the general the day we left Mirones, and
+haven't had a decent meal since."
+
+The colonel laughed, saying, "I'm afraid I can't say much for the
+quality of our food."
+
+"Never mind the quality, colonel; I think more of quantity just at
+present."
+
+"Well, that's on a par with the quality."
+
+This did not sound very promising; but we managed to satisfy our
+hunger, and the men, having eaten their scanty rations, were drawn up
+ready for the start.  At nine o'clock we left the camp, and a rapid
+march brought us to the village of Macas, which the enemy had just
+abandoned.  Here, to our great delight, we discovered a number of sheep
+dressed and ready for cooking; so, for once in a way, we enjoyed a
+really good meal, while cracking many jokes at the Spaniards' expense.
+Then having rested, we pushed on to the foot of the mountains, where
+the men bivouacked, being too tired to drag themselves any further.
+
+I was just preparing to off-saddle when the colonel said, "Crawford, if
+you aren't too tired, you can come with me.  I am going just a little
+way up the mountain."
+
+"Very good, sir," I answered, climbing into the saddle again, but
+wishing that he had taken it into his head to sleep instead.
+
+"I should like to find out where Canterac is.  He is quite clever
+enough to set a very ugly trap for us."
+
+It was dark now, and the road was difficult; but we rode cautiously,
+listening for sounds, and keeping our eyes well open.  At the end of
+perhaps half a mile the colonel suddenly stopped, and said in a
+whisper, "Some one is coming towards us."
+
+The position was very awkward.  We were on a narrow road with no
+hiding-place at hand, and must either retreat rapidly or plump
+ourselves right into the arms of the strangers.  In another minute we
+had no choice at all, as several dusky figures loomed up before us.
+Fortunately Colonel Miller favoured the practice of taking the bull by
+the horns, and levelling his pistol, he cried in a stern voice, "Halt!
+Who are you?"
+
+Taken by surprise, the men stopped, and we heard one of them say, "No,
+no; he's no Spaniard.  I can tell by his speech."
+
+"Quite right," cried the colonel.  "I'm an English officer in the
+Patriot army.  Who are you?  Make haste; we don't want to stay here all
+night."
+
+"We're deserters from General Canterac's army," replied one boldly,
+"and want to give ourselves up."
+
+"Then you're just right.  We will return with you to the camp, or the
+sentries might shoot you.--Crawford, turn your horse round so that they
+can pass between us.--Now, my good fellows, march, and I hope for your
+own sakes that you've given a true account of yourselves."
+
+Thus we journeyed back to the camp, where, beside a good fire, Colonel
+Miller examined the prisoners.  From them we learned that General
+Canterac had halted in a strong position halfway up the mountain; upon
+which I could see, by his restlessness, that the colonel was eager to
+resume the pursuit at once.  A glance at his wearied men, however,
+showed him the folly of such an enterprise.
+
+"No," said he at last; "they couldn't stand it."  Which was quite true.
+
+Having given the strangers into the charge of the guard, we unsaddled
+our horses, wrapped ourselves up, and lay down near the fire.  Two
+seconds later we were fast asleep.  At daybreak we were moving again,
+and I fancy the colonel felt glad he had not attempted to lead his men
+up the mountains in the darkness of night.  The road was simply
+horrible, and the pass might have been defended by a score of resolute
+men against an army.  Halfway up we received a check.  O'Brien, going
+forward with a handful of men, got in touch with the enemy, who
+immediately turned about and threatened to overwhelm us by a sudden
+attack.
+
+Under some leaders we should most certainly have come to grief; but the
+colonel's cheery, smiling face kept the men at their posts.  Drawing
+them up in a strong position, he awaited the attack calmly.
+
+"If you try to run away, my lads," he said pleasantly, "the Spaniards
+will make mincemeat of you; so it is wisest to stand firm."
+
+We watched three battalions come down from the height and halt just
+beyond musket-range.
+
+"I don't believe they're going to attack, after all!" exclaimed O'Brien
+excitedly.
+
+"Not until we move," answered the colonel, "and then they'll fall on us
+tooth and nail.  I expect they are just gaining time while the main
+body gets away.  It's aggravating, too, because they have the whip hand
+of us.  We aren't strong enough to turn them out."
+
+O'Brien shook his head, saying, "If the provisions would last, we might
+stand here staring at each other till doomsday."
+
+Darkness found the position unchanged, while numerous watch-fires
+gleamed fitfully through the gloom.
+
+"I wonder," said the colonel thoughtfully, "if Canterac intends keeping
+his men there all night?  Those fires may be just a blind; he's quite
+equal to a dodge of that sort."
+
+"Let me find out," said O'Brien.--"Crawford, do you feel in trim for a
+stroll?"
+
+"Oh, thanks! it's very kind of you to think of me."
+
+"Don't mention it, my dear fellow!  It's a weakness of mine to remember
+my friends.--We'll be back in an hour, colonel.--Take off your sword,
+Crawford; we must trust to our pistols.  Are you ready?  Come along,
+then."
+
+Passing our outposts, we began to climb warily, keeping a keen lookout,
+and taking care to make no unnecessary noise.  It was possible--indeed
+I thought probable--that we should meet the enemy stealing down to
+surprise our camp by a night attack.  However, we kept steadily on our
+way, and had nearly reached the outer ring of fires, when, clutching
+O'Brien by the arm, I dragged him bodily to the ground.
+
+"What's the matter?" he asked quietly.
+
+"A sentry!  Listen!  He's talking to some one."
+
+We lay quite still, trying to hear what was said; but in this we were
+disappointed, and presently the two men separated, each walking slowly
+in opposite directions.
+
+"Now's our chance!" whispered O'Brien; and crawling on hands and knees,
+we passed quietly between the two.  Several yards away was a big fire,
+and a number of men had gathered round it, where they could easily be
+seen.
+
+"Then they haven't bolted, after all!" said O'Brien, in surprise.
+
+"It doesn't look like it; but don't let us be too sure.  You stay in
+this hollow while I investigate.  You are not a good performer on
+all-fours."
+
+"No," said he, chuckling, and I was afraid that, in spite of our
+danger, he would laugh aloud; "this is a sort of circus trick not
+taught at our school.  Can you judge where to find me again?"
+
+"Easily, if they don't let the fires out;" and I crawled further into
+the camp, and in the direction of a second fire.  It looked very
+comfortable, but no one was there to take advantage of it, and the
+third and fourth I visited were equally deserted.
+
+The trick was plain enough now.  After lighting the fires, the three
+battalions had marched off, leaving just sufficient men to tend them,
+and to act as sentries.  The sight of a soldier crossing the camp to
+throw fresh fuel on one of the fires changed suspicion into certainty,
+and I hastened back to O'Brien with my information.
+
+"That's an old dodge," said he, "but a good one.  It almost always pays
+in this part of the world.  Now let us get back and tell the colonel."
+
+Cautiously we crawled back, waited nearly an hour for a favourable
+chance to dodge the sentries, and then hurried down the pass.
+
+"Thanks," exclaimed the colonel, on hearing our report.  "We can afford
+now to let the men have a couple of hours' sleep; they need it."
+
+"And I daresay some of the officers will lie down, if you press them,"
+laughed O'Brien.--"What do you say, Crawford?"
+
+"Well, the colonel need not press me much," I replied.
+
+"Good boy!  I'm pleased you're so willing to do as you're told."
+
+"Well, he has certainly earned a rest," observed Miller.  "But we are
+moving sharp at daybreak, remember."
+
+"There's nothing strange in that," said I sleepily; "the wonder would
+be if we didn't."  At which the colonel and O'Brien laughed heartily.
+
+Next day we marched into the village of Puruchuco, on the eastern side
+of the mountain, and about six miles distant from the small town of
+Huamantanga, where the Royalists had halted.  Owing to the difficulty
+of obtaining food, Colonel Miller now sent most of our infantry back to
+Macas; the Indians were thrown forward to act as a screen in front;
+while the rest of us bivouacked in some meadows near the village.  The
+next day the colonel and I rode to within five hundred yards of
+Huamantanga, where we saw the enemy formed up in marching order.
+
+"What restless fellows they are!" I exclaimed laughingly; "they're on
+the move again!"
+
+"Yes; but this time, unless I'm much mistaken, they are moving
+backwards.  Ride round to the right, warn the Indians to be ready for
+an attack, and rejoin me at Puruchuco."
+
+I had barely reached the village when the colonel's suspicions were
+verified.  Two thousand of the enemy, all picked men, as we afterwards
+discovered, rapidly descended the heights, drove the Indians back by
+sheer strength of numbers, and at last sent them flying pell-mell to
+seek safety in some of the numerous ravines.  We had barely three
+hundred regular soldiers, many of whom were young boys, and scarcely
+one had ever smelt powder in a real fight.  But Miller was a host in
+himself, and though the odds were so desperate, I did not despair of
+victory.
+
+O'Brien, with a picked detachment of infantry, occupied a strong
+position, and began firing as soon as the assailants came within range.
+The cavalry and the remainder of the infantry were posted lower down
+the mountain side.
+
+"Aim low, lads," said the colonel, "and don't waste your ammunition.
+If they reach you, give them a taste of the steel."
+
+The flight of the Indians left us a great deal exposed, and in danger
+of being surrounded; but O'Brien had placed his men on a rocky
+platform, from which they kept one detachment in check.  Meanwhile, in
+our own quarter the fight raged furiously.  A large body of Spaniards,
+slipping past O'Brien, came on again and again.  We beat them back, but
+they gave us no rest.  Our men began to fall, and once I saw a shade of
+anxiety flit across the colonel's face.  It was gone in less than a
+second, but it confirmed my opinion that we could not hold our ground.
+
+For the most part, we contented ourselves with repelling the enemy's
+attacks; but twice our leader flung himself against their dragoons at
+the head of his cavalry.  We broke them easily, but could not pursue,
+and the experiment cost us a dozen in killed and wounded.
+
+"This won't do," said he.  "They will eat us up.--Crawford, tell
+O'Brien to retire on us slowly.  I intend to retreat.--Captain Prieto,
+get your men posted in that ravine to the left, and hold it until you
+are told to withdraw."
+
+I did not hear the captain's reply, being on my way to deliver the
+colonel's order.  I had left my horse behind, but even so, the journey
+was distinctly unpleasant, as my body was a prominent target for dozens
+of muskets.
+
+"Warm work, Crawford!" exclaimed O'Brien.  "I think the colonel is
+right.  We've caught a tartar this time, and no mistake.--Steady, my
+lads! we'll make them fight for every yard."
+
+I stayed with the detachment, helping to carry a wounded man.  The
+cheering Spaniards pressed us closely; if they could break through our
+cordon, Miller's men were doomed.  But we returned shot for shot, and
+stopped their occasional rushes by steel.  Every moment of delay gave
+our brave fellows further down the pass a better chance of escape.
+
+"Well done, O'Brien!" cried the colonel, as we joined him where he
+stood with a few horsemen.--"Steady, my lads!  Captain Prieto holds the
+pass.  Don't lose your heads, and we shall come out all right."
+
+At the ravine the horsemen halted, while the infantry continued the
+retreat; first O'Brien's men, and afterwards those who had held the
+pass under Captain Prieto.  This was the fiercest part of the struggle.
+The fighting was at hand-grips now, and I wondered we were not swept
+away headlong.
+
+"Stand firm, my lads, stand firm; it's your only chance!" sang out
+Miller cheerfully, and his eyes brightened with the passing minutes, as
+he knew that the bulk of his command was rapidly getting out of danger.
+
+For half an hour we held the narrow way with sword and pistol, and then
+a body of Spaniards, who unseen by us had worked round to the right,
+appeared lower down the pass.
+
+"We must cut our way through, and at once!" cried our leader.  "About
+face, lads, and into them.  Ride hard, and strike hard."
+
+We were in a trap now, and the only way to get out was by smashing the
+door.  The colonel led, the troopers followed as best they could, while
+O'Brien and I remained in the rear to help to check the rush of the
+enemy's main body.  There was a flash of swords, the sound of
+pistol-shots, an outburst of mocking laughter from the enemy, a "Viva!"
+from our own men, a vigorous "Hurrah!" from the colonel, and then we
+were through!
+
+"Go on, my lads!" cried the colonel, dropping to the rear.  "Your
+comrades are at the foot of the mountain.--A narrow shave, O'Brien!"
+
+"Yes! and we aren't clear yet," replied the Irishman, turning in his
+saddle to glance behind.  "There would be more chance for us if we
+could bring down that tall fellow who is leading."
+
+Whiz! whiz!  The bullets were buzzing about our ears now, too close to
+be comfortable, and but for our horses, we must soon have been killed
+or captured.  At any other time I would not have ridden down that
+mountain side at a foot pace.  It was a succession of steep descents,
+which made one dizzy to look at; and how my animal managed to keep its
+feet I could not understand.
+
+"Push on!" cried the colonel suddenly, "and tell Prieto to line the
+mouth of the pass, in case these fellows chase us all the way."
+
+He and O'Brien had stopped, intending to try the effect of a shot or
+two, and in another minute I was out of sight.  Fifty yards further
+down the road forked, and fancying the branch to the right looked the
+easier, I turned into it.
+
+"It may take a little longer to reach the bottom," I thought, "but it's
+a far less dangerous way.  I wonder if the others will think to turn
+down here."
+
+It often happens that we come to grief when feeling most secure, and it
+was so with me now.  I was riding at a swift gallop, and perhaps with
+less care than was necessary, when all at once my horse stumbled,
+failed to recover itself, and fell heavily.  Fortunately it lay still,
+and I was able to drag myself free, feeling dazed and bewildered.  Here
+was a pretty pickle!  What could I do?  In any case the colonel would
+reach the bottom first, and the retreat would be continued without me.
+
+Getting up, I tried to help the animal to its feet; but the poor thing
+either could not or would not move.  It was clear that I must leave it,
+and though hating to do so, I walked a few paces down the narrow path.
+The fall had shaken me considerably.  My head ached, and I had much ado
+to grope my way along.  Three several times in the course of a short
+distance I stumbled, and the third time fell heavily to the ground,
+twisting my left foot underneath me.  I tried to rise, but could not.
+Now, what should I do?  I dared not call for help, lest the Spaniards
+should hear me.  For two hours I lay thus, wondering what would become
+of me.  The noise of the shouting and firing had now died away; the
+enemy had probably returned to their stronghold.  Not a sound broke the
+stillness, and the gloom of evening began to envelop the path.
+
+It was now only that I realized fully my frightful danger.  Unless some
+one passed that way by accident, I should die of hunger and exposure!
+The idea nerved me to a fresh effort.  Rising painfully, and steadying
+myself here and there by the rocks, I limped a short distance, though
+every step wrung from me a cry of agony.  Several times I stopped to
+rest, and to wipe the sweat from my brow; twice in less than five
+minutes I was obliged to sit down, and at last the pain in my foot
+became so excruciating that I could struggle no further.
+
+"It's no good!" I exclaimed; "I must stay here till the morning, at
+least."  And finding a kind of recess in the rocks, I crept in.  Then
+it occurred to me to take off my boot; so opening my knife, I hacked at
+the leather till I succeeded in getting my foot free.
+
+This, after the first sudden rush of pain, was a great comfort.  I felt
+easier and brighter, and lay down to sleep in a happier frame of mind,
+intending to make a fresh start as soon as daylight appeared.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVI.
+
+GLORIOUS NEWS.
+
+Many times during the night the pain and the cold wakened me; but I
+contrived to get some sleep, for which I fell much better in the
+morning.  To my dismay, however, I found it impossible to walk; my
+ankle had swollen considerably, and the pain of putting my foot to the
+ground made me cry out in anguish.
+
+Yet, unless I wished to starve, something I must do.  Unbuckling my
+sword, and hiding it in the recess, I began to crawl along, trailing my
+injured foot carefully.  It was slow work, and I felt faint and dizzy,
+not only from my hurts, but also from want of food.
+
+Feeling sure that the Spaniards had by this time retired, I ventured to
+call for help, though little expecting to obtain it.  I cried aloud,
+both in Spanish and in the native patois, but received no answer.
+Again I crawled on, but now even move slowly than at first; and when I
+again tried to shout, my voice seemed weak and quavering.  My strength
+was nearly exhausted, when suddenly, and rather to my astonishment, I
+caught sight of a man peering at me curiously from behind a rock.  He
+was evidently a Spaniard, and an ugly customer.  He wore a long beard,
+a half-healed scar disfigured one side of his face, and on his head was
+jauntily set a small cap decked with gay-coloured ribbons.  On his
+coming forward I saw that he was dressed in the most grotesque manner,
+and heavily armed.
+
+"By St. Philip," I muttered softly, "I should have done better to give
+myself up to the soldiers!  Surely this fellow is the prince of
+ruffians."
+
+He stood a moment, leaning on his gun and regarding me with curiosity.
+
+"I don't know who you are," said I irritably, "but if you have a spark
+of human sympathy, you will give me what help you can."
+
+"Are you hurt?" he asked; and the cool tone in which he spoke made me
+angry beyond measure.
+
+Then he drew a step nearer, saying, "Perhaps the senor will give me his
+pistols; the mountain air makes one suspicious."
+
+"Take them," I cried, "and anything else you desire; but get me some
+food and drink, and I will pay you well."
+
+"Ah," exclaimed the fellow, with renewed interest, "the senor has money
+on him!  I had better mind that also.  There are lawless people in the
+mountains," and he grinned knowingly at me.
+
+"I have no money here," I answered, "but I will pay you well to get me
+carried to Lima."
+
+"That is a long way," he observed cautiously.  "No doubt the senor has
+rings or some articles of jewellery?"
+
+"I don't possess a single valuable except this," said I, producing the
+silver key, "and that I must not part with."
+
+On seeing the key the fellow's manner changed instantly.
+
+"How did you get that?" he asked.  "Are you one of us?"
+
+The question could hardly be considered a compliment, but it assured me
+both of safety and of good treatment.
+
+"If you belong to the Order of the Silver Key," I remarked, "and
+recognize the authority of Raymon Sorillo, all is well.  He is my
+friend, and will give me shelter."
+
+"The chief is in the mountains, senor, and not far off.  I will get
+help, and take you to him.  Meanwhile, eat a little coca; it will keep
+up your strength.  I shall not be long gone."
+
+"Thanks," said I, taking some of the coca, and chuckling to myself at
+this unexpected stroke of good fortune.
+
+The fellow was as good as his word.  He returned shortly with three
+Indians, armed like himself, and dressed in the same grotesque way.
+They were all sturdy fellows, and two of them, raising me gently from
+the ground, carried me in their arms with the greatest ease.
+
+Every step took me farther from the main track, and into a wilder part
+of the mountains, till at last my bearers stopped in a romantic ravine.
+There were several huts dotted about in an irregular ring, but most of
+the men were in the open, seated round a blazing fire.
+
+Three-fourths of the band were pure Indians, some were mulattoes, while
+a few were Spaniards of the lowest type.  They looked what they were,
+bandits and outlaws, and I must say that my acquaintance of the morning
+was not the most villainous of them.  They formed a striking company,
+quite in keeping with the gloomy grandeur of their home, shut in on
+every side by overhanging rocks and towering mountains.
+
+"Who is that?" suddenly roared a deep voice, and I saw the gigantic
+leader stride from the ring of men.  Approaching us, he looked me full
+in the face.
+
+"A stranger?" cried he.  "Why have you brought him here?"
+
+"I must have changed much since we last met," I interposed.  "But if
+you don't remember me, you will doubtless remember the present you gave
+me," and I showed him the silver key.
+
+He looked at me again, and this time with a gleam of recognition.
+
+"I know you now!" he cried.--"Make way there.  Room for an honoured
+guest--room for the son of Don Eduardo!"
+
+The name carried no meaning to the Spanish brigands; but the Indians
+received it with a great shout, for they knew how greatly my father had
+suffered in his efforts to make their lives easier.  They would have
+pressed round me to touch my hand, but the chief waved them back,
+saying I wanted food and rest.  They made a space beside the fire, and
+Sorillo himself attended to my injuries.
+
+"No bones broken," said he, after making an examination with as much
+skill as a surgeon.  "We have only to reduce this swelling of the
+ankle.  You can make yourself comfortable for a fortnight, at least.
+Now you must have some food, and then we'll talk."
+
+Now, I have no wish to give you a false impression of Raymon Sorillo.
+He was a wild, lawless man, who had passed his life in fighting against
+the Spanish government.  He had extraordinary courage and ability, and
+no man of his band was ever known to question an order issued by him.
+He had himself founded the Order of the Silver Key, and it was always
+my father's opinion that, but for the coming of San Martin, he would in
+time have transformed Peru into an Indian kingdom.  I am at least
+certain that his ambition tended in that direction.
+
+When the war broke out, numerous desperadoes flocked to him, and he was
+held responsible for many acts of cruelty.  Whether he was deserving of
+blame I cannot say.  Jose held him to be cruel, and he generally had
+that reputation.  Perhaps it was only a case of giving a dog a bad
+name.  However that may be, it is certain he had a high opinion of my
+father, and for his sake was exceedingly kind to me.  But for him I
+might have lain long enough in the Spanish fortress, or perished in the
+sandy coast deserts.  Another service he did, which we only heard of
+afterwards, and then by accident, was the guarding of my mother.  From
+the time of my escape till the withdrawal of the Royalists from Lima,
+several of his men, unknown to her, kept ward over the hacienda.  They
+had received strict orders to protect its mistress against every
+danger, even at the risk of their lives.  In case of anything
+occurring, one was to rouse the natives belonging to the order in Lima,
+while another rode post-haste to the chief.
+
+Remembering these things, and others not here set down, I can hardly
+judge this remarkable man without bias; but even his most bitter
+enemies could not truly say he was wholly bad.  And it may be stated
+here that during my stay in the ravine I was treated like a prince.
+The best of everything was set before me, my slightest wish was law,
+and even the fiercest of the white men, forming a small minority of the
+band, were compelled to behave peaceably in my presence.
+
+After I had eaten and slept for a time, I told the chief the story I
+had heard from the young Spanish officer, Santiago Mariano, concerning
+my father, and asked his opinion.
+
+"I would build no hopes on that," said he, shaking his head
+thoughtfully.  "If your father is alive, we shall find him at Callao;
+but I doubt it."
+
+"The governor was expected to capitulate when I left Lima last," I
+remarked.
+
+"Yes; his provisions must be gone by now.  Your San Martin is an old
+woman.  Why did he allow Canterac to escape?  My men and I have been
+marched about from place to place just where we could do no good.  I
+shall not trouble to obey orders any more.  We are not children to be
+treated thus."
+
+Sorillo was very sore on the subject, and returned to it over and over
+again.  In the evening one of the band arrived with the information
+that Colonel Miller had sent out search-parties to look for me, and
+that three men were waiting at the entrance to the ravine.
+
+"Tell them," said the chief, "that Don Juan Crawford is with me.  He
+has sprained his ankle very badly, and cannot move for several days;
+otherwise he is unhurt.  As soon as he is well enough we will take him
+home."
+
+"I wish the colonel would let my mother know," said I; "she would be
+less anxious."
+
+"That is a poor compliment to me," observed Sorillo, smiling.  "My
+messenger is already on his way to the hacienda with the news.  I have
+told him to say you are in absolutely no danger, so that your mother
+will not be alarmed."
+
+"Then I am more than ever in your debt," said I gratefully, for the
+chief's action showed a thoughtful consideration quite unexpected.
+
+"We shall never pay all that is owing to the son of Don Eduardo
+Crawford," he answered gravely.  "And now let me carry you to my hut.
+A bed has been prepared there for you; it is a simple affair, but you
+will be comfortable."
+
+I slept well that night.  The pain had considerably decreased, and I
+had no cause for fear or anxiety.  Sorillo slept in another corner of
+the hut, going out so quietly in the morning that he did not disturb
+me.  Indeed the sun was high in the heavens when I wakened.
+
+The chief's messenger had not returned, and another day passed before
+he appeared; then, to my delight, he brought Jose with him.
+
+"Well, Jack," exclaimed my old friend, on finding that I was really not
+much hurt, "you gave Miller a fine fright.  He thought you were either
+dead or carried off.  His troops are back in Lima.  It seems Canterac
+was too good for you."
+
+"He flung half his army at us," I responded rather sulkily, for one
+does not like being reminded of a beating.  "It must have been a matter
+of ten to one.  But never mind that.  What news do you bring from Lima?
+How is my mother? and how are events moving there?"
+
+"Your mother is well, and sends her love to you, and events are shaping
+just as we could wish them to.  We are masters of Callao."
+
+"Then the forts have fallen?  O Jose, tell me quickly--I am burning
+with excitement--was my father there?"
+
+"Keep cool!" said he, smiling; "I don't want you to throw yourself into
+a fever.  Yes, we found your father there."
+
+"Thank God for that!" I murmured reverently.  "You can tell me the rest
+at your leisure."
+
+"There isn't much to tell," he replied.  "It seems that your father was
+suddenly surrounded in the mountains by a body of regulars, and ordered
+to submit.  Taken by surprise, there was nothing else to do; but while
+he stood hesitating, some one--not the captain in charge--shot him
+down, and he remembers nothing more till he found himself in Callao.
+The governor, La Mar, happens to be a kind-hearted fellow; so he had
+your father's wound dressed, gave him the most comfortable cell, and
+altogether treated him so well that, in spite of a long illness, he is
+entirely recovered."
+
+"This is better and better, Jose!  I hope we shall have a chance of
+doing La Mar a good turn."
+
+"Your father will be in a position to see to that, as San Martin has
+already made him a member of the government."
+
+"That's all right then.--By-the-bye, have you seen Montilla?"
+
+"Yes.  The old fox plays the game well.  He is delighted--so he
+says--to be able to hand over the estates, which he was keeping in
+trust for you, to the rightful owner."
+
+"Do you think my father believes him?"
+
+"I can't say.  Your mother doesn't; neither do I."
+
+"Nor I."
+
+We remained silent for some minutes, when, Sorillo joining us, I told
+him the good news.  At first he did not seem to comprehend.  When he
+did, I thought he would take leave of his senses.  Even Jose, who was
+not given to judging by outward show, was impressed by the man's
+genuine pleasure.
+
+But the grand event took place some days later, when my father himself
+came to remove me to Lima.  Sorillo marshalled his Indians at the mouth
+of the pass, and they escorted him up the ravine in a triumphal
+procession, amidst enthusiastic cries of "Long live Don Eduardo
+Crawford! long live the Indians' friend!"
+
+There is not much to tell about our meeting.  It was all very simple,
+though I suppose there were not at that moment two happier people in
+Peru.  My father was exceptionally loving and kind-hearted, but he
+never made a fuss, while my English blood kept me from being too
+demonstrative.
+
+"Well, Jack, my boy," he exclaimed, giving me a warm grip of the hand,
+"I reckon you never expected to see me again?"
+
+"Well, father, I had heard it was possible you were alive, but I hardly
+dared hope so."
+
+As Jose said, he was looking very well, considering the circumstances.
+His cheeks were thinner, and had lost their colour; his hair had turned
+gray; he seemed less robust than formerly; but his mind was brisk and
+alert, and his eyes retained their old fire.
+
+Sorillo would have kept him awhile as an honoured guest; but he was
+anxious to return, and the carriage waited at the foot of the
+mountains.  On one point, however, the guerilla chief would not be
+denied.  Leaving the Spaniards and mulattoes in the ravine, he insisted
+on accompanying us, with his Indians, to Lima, and my father did not
+like to refuse him.  From the ravine they carried me on a comfortable
+litter to the foot of the mountains, where Jose had stayed with the
+carriage.  Then forming up in front, they marched along singing and
+cheering for Don Eduardo Crawford.
+
+We slept that night in a deserted hacienda, and arrived at our home
+next day.  Jose had ridden forward to inform my mother of her coming
+visitors, so that she might be able to provide them with food and drink.
+
+It was a grand home-coming for me, and a great triumph for my father.
+Though not a vain man, the incident pleased him, because it showed that
+the people for whom he had suffered so much were grateful for his
+efforts to do them good.
+
+As the journey had made me rather excited, I took no part in the
+rejoicings which were kept up through the night; but after breakfast
+the Indians took their departure, and the noise of their cheering might
+have been heard at the other end of the town.
+
+"It's rather rough on you, Jack," laughed my father, coming into my
+room; "but now you will have a chance of a little quiet."
+
+"I am not sure of that," observed my mother, who was looking from a
+window: "here are two cavaliers crossing the park.  By the way they
+ride, I should say they are Englishmen."
+
+"Is one a big, handsome man?" I asked.
+
+"Well, yes, he is certainly big!"
+
+"That is O'Brien, then; and the other most probably is the colonel."
+
+I was not mistaken.  In a short time Colonel Miller and his friend were
+in the room, and each in turn shook me heartily by the hand.
+
+"We hardly expected to see you again so soon," said the colonel,
+laughing.  "We thought Canterac had taken a fancy to your company.  I
+hope there is no permanent injury to the foot?"
+
+"Oh no, colonel; only I shan't be able to do any more mountain climbing
+yet awhile."
+
+"There's none to do," broke in O'Brien; "we've taken to dancing
+instead."
+
+"I shall not be able even to join in that for some time."
+
+"No?  What a pity!  We are enjoying ourselves immensely, though it
+seems rather an odd way of carrying on a war."
+
+"The general perhaps considers that his troops require rest," suggested
+my mother.
+
+"Even so, staying here is a great mistake," said the colonel.  "We are
+giving the Royalists time to recover their strength, and we shall
+suffer for it later on.  Unfortunately the general appears to think
+that Lima is Peru."
+
+"Not the general only," remarked my father; "many of his officers would
+be sorry to exchange Lima for the mountains."
+
+"That is so," admitted O'Brien frankly.  "The truth of the matter is,
+the citizens have treated us too well.  They have made us so
+comfortable that we wish to stay here as long as possible."
+
+"In that case," said my mother, smiling, "we must steel our hearts
+against you."
+
+"And drive us into the wilderness again!" laughed O'Brien gaily.
+"Senora, you will not be so cruel?"
+
+"I will not begin to-day," she replied merrily, "because I hope you
+will stay and dine with us.  To-morrow--"
+
+"Ah! let us think of to-morrow when it comes; to-day we will enjoy
+ourselves."
+
+"A pleasant creed," remarked my father, "though more often than not it
+leads to ruin.  I shall begin to think you are falling a victim to our
+South American vice."
+
+"What is that?"
+
+"Never to do to-day what can be put off till to-morrow."
+
+"That is exactly what we are doing," remarked the colonel, "and I quite
+agree with you that it is not a paying game, especially in time of war.
+A chance once missed never presents itself again."
+
+"An excellent reason for accepting Donna Maria's gracious invitation,"
+laughed O'Brien.  "Colonel, I congratulate you on your powers of
+argument."
+
+Although talking in this bantering way, it must not be thought that he
+was really in favour of remaining idle; but he was a soldier, and had
+to obey orders, however much he disliked them.
+
+My father, being a member of the government, was in a much worse
+position, as many held him responsible in a measure for the lazy way in
+which the war was being conducted.  Really he had no power over the
+army at all, and could not on his own authority have moved a section of
+recruits.
+
+O'Brien had spoken truly in saying that the officers had taken to
+dancing instead of climbing.  All the chief families opened their doors
+to them, and our neighbour, Montilla, who had so suddenly been
+converted to our side, gave a ball more brilliant than even the oldest
+inhabitant could remember.
+
+Thus the days passed into weeks; my ankle grew strong and well, I was
+able to resume my duties, and still there was no sign of moving.  We
+held possession of Lima and Callao, but on the other side of the
+mountains the Royalists did as they pleased.
+
+"I hope," remarked my father more than once, "that when we wish to move
+we shall be able to do so."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVII.
+
+DUTY FIRST.
+
+As far as we in Peru were concerned, the winter of 1821-22 passed
+without disturbance; but Colonel Miller busied himself in drilling the
+new regiment of Peruvians which had been placed under his command.  As
+he had made me his aid-de-camp, we were much together, and he paid
+frequent visits to our house, where he was always gladly welcomed.
+
+Owing to my father's office, I saw a great deal at this time of the
+protector, who treated me with extreme kindness.  Although such a great
+soldier, he had no love for war, and planned to bring about the real
+independence of the country without fighting.
+
+"I do not wish the Peruvians to kill each other," he repeatedly
+declared.  "I wish them to live at peace with each other; and whenever
+they are ready to do that I will step aside, so that they may choose
+whatever kind of government they please."
+
+My father, who admired him greatly, several times pointed out the
+dangers that loomed ahead.
+
+"You are reckoning without Bolivar," said he.  "He has already driven
+the Spaniards from Venezuela and Colombia, and is steadily pushing them
+into Peru.  He will follow them and mix himself up with our affairs.
+He is mad with ambition, and you will find there is not room enough for
+both of you in one country."
+
+"In that case I will go away," answered San Martin, with a sad smile.
+"I am here, not for my own good, but for that of Peru."
+
+"After bearing the heat and burden of the day, you will give up your
+just reward?  It is monstrous!"
+
+"I seek no reward, Crawford; I seek only the happiness of Peru.  In
+order to gain that I shall willingly sacrifice myself."
+
+"We will not permit it, general!"
+
+"You must, because it is your duty.  Having made South America
+independent of Spain, it would be sheer wickedness to turn and rend
+each other.  Let Bolivar have the glory.  I shall have a quiet
+conscience.  But it seems to me that we are giving substance to
+shadows.  Bolivar will join hands with me.  We shall establish a strong
+government in Peru; then having done our duty, each will retire."
+
+My father shook his head, saying, "You are mistaken; General Bolivar's
+ambition is to make all South America into one country, with himself at
+the head.  Nothing less than that will content him."
+
+"Then he will fail," answered San Martin.  "Let us hope he will not
+drag the country to ruin with him."
+
+About this time, March 1822, news reached us that our forces at Ica had
+met with a terrible defeat.  By a swift and daring march, the Spanish
+general, Canterac, had thrown his army against them with startling
+suddenness.  They tried to retreat, but, being attacked in the night,
+were cut to pieces, and an enormous quantity of stores passed into the
+hands of the Royalists.  The news cast a gloom over the city, and many
+weak-kneed Patriots lost their heads entirely.  Unless we could obtain
+help from General Bolivar, they cried, our cause was undone.  My father
+did not believe this; he distrusted Bolivar, and made no scruple of
+saying so.
+
+"Still we must find out just what he means to do," remarked San Martin
+one evening.
+
+"His intentions are evident," replied my father, rather bitterly.  "He
+means to make himself master of the country, and to push you aside."
+
+"I think you misjudge him; but in any case I place the happiness of
+Peru before personal ambition.--By the way," he added, turning to me,
+"have you ever seen this remarkable man?"
+
+"No, general."
+
+"Would you like to do so?  Ah, I see you would.  Well, you shall.  I am
+going to meet him at Guayaquil; you shall go with me, unless your
+father objects."
+
+"I have no objection, general.  It will do him good, by opening his
+eyes!"
+
+"Very well; let him be ready to-morrow morning.  I will let Colonel
+Miller know of the arrangement."
+
+"Jack," exclaimed my father when San Martin had gone, "this is a great
+honour for you.  I don't expect the protector will take any one else,
+except Guido, who goes with him everywhere.  I almost envy you, my boy,
+for San Martin and Bolivar are certainly the two most wonderful men in
+South America."
+
+"Will there be any danger?" asked my mother.
+
+"I think not; the visit is a friendly one."
+
+The next day, having put on my gaudiest uniform, blue with red facings,
+white edging, and abundance of gold lace, I went over to Callao,
+meeting the general and his "aid" just as they were embarking on the
+schooner _Macedonia_.  As usual, the general looked grave and rather
+stern.  He was very silent too, and as the schooner slipped from her
+moorings he disappeared within his cabin.  Guido, who shared a cabin
+with me, was far less reserved than his chief.
+
+"This is a fool's errand," said he brusquely.  "The protector is just
+playing into Bolivar's hands."
+
+"He knows what he is doing, I think."
+
+"That makes me the more angry.  But for him the Spaniards would still
+be in possession of Peru; and now, rather than make a bother, he'll let
+the other fellow take the prize."
+
+"What would you have him do?"
+
+"Do?" cried he excitedly; "why, stand his ground.  I would say, 'I have
+done all the hard work, I have made Peru free, and I am going to be
+master of the country.  Let Bolivar or any one else come here at his
+peril!'"
+
+"Then there would be a three-cornered fight, and the Spaniards would
+have the best of it!"
+
+"That wouldn't be San Martin's fault.  Do you think Bolivar cares how
+the country suffers as long as he comes out on top?  Not he!"
+
+"If that is so, San Martin is certainly playing the better part."
+
+"The better part? a fig for the better part!  He can beat Bolivar and
+the Spanish put together if he chooses.  He is far and away the finest
+general in South America."
+
+"And one of the best men, if he acts as you say he will."
+
+But Guido was much too angry to take that view.  When I added that
+without Bolivar's help we could hardly reduce the Spaniards to
+submission, he laughed scornfully and turned away.
+
+On the evening of July 25, 1822, the _Macedonia_ dropped anchor in the
+harbour of Guayaquil, and immediately afterwards two of Bolivar's
+officers came on board with a friendly greeting from their chief.
+
+"Caramba!" muttered Guido beneath his breath, "it makes me mad!  It's
+like the old custom of garlanding a victim before offering him up as a
+sacrifice!"
+
+That night we slept on the schooner, disembarking the next day.  The
+route was lined by Bolivar's soldiers, who saluted stiffly, and by
+thousands of people cheering wildly for their renowned visitor.
+
+"There it is, you see," whispered Guido; "the people want San Martin.
+If they had their way, Guayaquil would be a part of Peru, with him as
+president."
+
+"But they haven't," said I, "and Bolivar has; which makes all the
+difference."
+
+"Look!" exclaimed he contemptuously, as the carriage stopped; "isn't it
+like a circus show?"
+
+In front of a house stood a group of officers dressed in the most
+magnificent and gorgeous uniforms.  As San Martin stepped from the
+carriage, one of them, moving a pace forward, embraced him.
+
+"That's Bolivar!" whispered Guido, and I gazed at the great captain
+with intense interest.
+
+Perhaps I was prejudiced against him, but he did not come up to my
+expectations.  He was short, thin, and narrow-chested, his skin was
+sallow, his high but narrow forehead was deeply lined.  His hair was
+black and curly; he had thick lips and beautiful white teeth, which he
+was fond of showing.  His eyes were large and black but deeply sunken;
+now bright and sparkling, again dull and glassy.  His features, to me
+at least, were harsh and unpleasing; but he was evidently a man of
+great energy, to whom action was as the breath of life.
+
+Arm in arm the two leaders entered the house, Guido and I following
+with Bolivar's staff.  The saloon presented a striking scene, being
+filled with officers in brilliant uniforms and by beautifully-dressed
+ladies.  A young girl, stepping forward, greeted San Martin, and placed
+a laurel wreath of gold upon his head.
+
+"What rubbish!" muttered Guido testily.  "Does she think he is as great
+a mummer as Bolivar?"
+
+"Hush!" I whispered, not wishing his outspoken comments to be heard.
+"See, he is taking it off."
+
+We could not hear what he said, but he spoke pleasantly, and beckoning
+to Guido, placed the wreath in his hand.
+
+"Take great care of this," said he; "I value it highly for the sake of
+the giver."
+
+"Bolivar would have worn a dozen, one on top of the other," growled
+Guido.
+
+Presently the two chiefs proceeded to an inner room, where they
+remained alone for nearly two hours, while we chatted with the Bolivian
+officers, several of whom were Englishmen.
+
+At length the door opened, the leaders came out, and San Martin
+accompanied Bolivar to the street, where they parted with a show of
+cordial friendship.  Directly afterwards the assembly dispersed, and we
+were left in peace.  The next day they had a much longer interview, and
+at its close I read in San Martin's face that he had resolved to
+sacrifice himself for the good of Peru.
+
+"Guido," said he quietly, "let the baggage be taken aboard.  They are
+giving a grand dinner in my honour this evening; as soon as I can get
+away, we sail for Callao."
+
+The banquet, which was held in the house set apart for Bolivar, was on
+the most magnificent scale.  The room was bright with showy uniforms;
+every one appeared to be covered with stars and crosses and
+decorations.  I almost regretted that my silver key was not dangling
+outside my tunic.
+
+San Martin sat in the chair of honour at the right of our host.  Of all
+the good things set before him he ate and drank little, his thoughts
+being evidently far removed from the banqueting-room.
+
+This was the first time I had been at a public dinner, and but for
+anxiety on our leader's account, I should have enjoyed it immensely.
+Presently, when the servants had removed the dishes, Bolivar filled his
+glass with wine, and stood up.  Instantly the buzz of conversation
+ceased; the officers gazed intently at their chief, who was about to
+propose a toast.  I listened too, wondering if my ears were playing me
+false.  As to Guido, I thought that, in his scornful contempt, he would
+have kicked the table over.
+
+"Gentlemen," said our host, "to the two greatest men of South
+America--General San Martin and myself!"
+
+There was a round of cheering, while Guido and I hardly dared look at
+each other, and not at all at our chief.
+
+Soon afterward we adjourned to the ballroom, but did not stay long, San
+Martin saying, "Let us go; I cannot stand this riot!"
+
+Quietly bidding Bolivar farewell, we followed one of the high
+officials, who let us out through a private door, and escorted us to
+the quay.  There we boarded the schooner, which in less than an hour
+was under way.  The protector went straight to his cabin without
+speaking.  He was bitterly disappointed at the result of the interview,
+but all that passed his lips on the subject was, "Bolivar is not the
+man we took him to be."  These words were said as we paced the deck
+together next morning, and they were spoken more to himself than to us.
+
+"It has happened as I predicted," remarked Guido that afternoon, "and
+the rest will follow.  As soon as he has put things in order, he will
+leave Peru to make room for Bolivar.  And he will not let people know
+the reason; he will even make Bolivar's path smoother."
+
+"You would plant it thick with thorns, I suppose?"
+
+"I would plant it with naked swords!"
+
+"Ah, Guido," I cried, "that is not San Martin's teaching!"
+
+"No," said he surlily; "it's a lesson of my own composing."
+
+The voyage passed uneventfully, and on the twentieth of August the
+_Macedonia_ once more sailed into the Bay of Callao.
+
+During our absence a riot had taken place in Lima; but the people
+received San Martin enthusiastically, coming down in thousands to the
+port, and escorting him to his country house in triumph.
+
+I said little of what had taken place to any one except my father, and
+he was able to judge of things by other signs.  The protector, who told
+him Bolivar had agreed to help Peru with troops, worked feverishly day
+and night, until the opening of the first Peruvian Congress.  Then
+removing his sash of authority, he resigned his office, and formally
+handed over the care of the country to the new Parliament.  That same
+evening my father and I called at his house, where we found Guido, ever
+faithful, waiting in the anteroom.
+
+"Where is the general?" asked my father.
+
+"Here, Crawford!" answered San Martin, opening the door of an inner
+room.  "Is anything wrong?"
+
+"No, general, but I fear there soon will be.  Do you know it is
+whispered in the town that you are about to leave Peru?"
+
+"The rumour is correct, my friend, as I have just been telling Guido.
+No, it is useless to talk; my mind is made up.  I can do the country no
+more good."
+
+For a long time both Guido and my father tried to prevail upon him to
+stay, but in vain.
+
+"The world will regard you as a deserter!" urged Guido.
+
+"What matters it as long as I know the truth?  I care not for the
+applause of the world, my friends, nor fear its frowns.  I leave my
+work unfinished, it is true, but others will finish it and reap the
+glory.  Besides, Peru will be the better for my absence."
+
+"No, no!" exclaimed my father earnestly.  "The people love you and
+trust you.  They will uphold your authority."
+
+San Martin held out his hand, saying,--
+
+"You are a true friend, Crawford, but you are a true patriot and a
+shrewd man as well.  Now listen to me.  Without help it will take two
+years at least to subdue the Spaniards.  That will mean two years of
+misery.  Do you follow me?"
+
+"Perfectly."
+
+"With help the war can be brought to an end in six months.  The
+Chilians can do no more, and we can look only to Bolivar.  Now, do you
+imagine that he and I can run in double harness?"
+
+My father shook his head sorrowfully.
+
+"Of course not.  Bolivar is a great man, a remarkable man; but he is
+ambitious, and will brook no rival.  Now, suppose I remain.  It will be
+difficult to avoid strife, and the country will be plunged back into
+its old condition of slavery.  Do you think that San Martin will give a
+day of delight to the common enemy?  No, my friend; if only Peru
+retains its independence, I care nothing for self.  Let men call me
+what they please.  The path of duty lies plain before me; I am going to
+walk in it.  Let Bolivar have the glory; it is but a breath.  I shall
+not say this publicly; neither will you.  I am broken in health; let
+that do for the present.  In years to come, perhaps, the world will
+recognize my good faith; if not, never mind!"
+
+Even after that my father endeavoured to dissuade him from going, but
+his efforts were useless.
+
+"Let me wish you good-bye, Crawford," said he.  "I need hardly counsel
+you to accept the help which Bolivar offers.  The man may not please
+you, but--country first!--Good-bye, my boy; if you make half as good a
+man as your father, you will not do amiss."
+
+We grasped his hand for the last time, and leaving Guido with him, went
+into the road, mounted our horses, and rode slowly homeward.
+
+Next day it became known that San Martin had left Peru for ever, and
+instantly men's tongues were loosed in a babel of talk.  Some few
+judged him rightly; but for the most part his splendid services were
+forgotten, and with sickening haste people turned their gaze toward
+Bolivar, the new sun.
+
+"There is a lesson for you, Jack, worth heeding," remarked my father.
+"If only these people knew the truth!"
+
+"They wouldn't understand it!" said I hotly.  "The idea of a man making
+such a sacrifice is beyond them.  You know I have sometimes thought the
+general made a big mistake in the conduct of the war, but he atoned for
+everything last night.  He looked simply splendid when he talked about
+giving up everything for duty."
+
+"Ah!" exclaimed my father thoughtfully, "with all his battles to look
+back upon, he never won a greater victory than he did last evening.  It
+must almost have broken his heart, Jack, but he did not whimper."
+
+Few spoke in this strain, and I was disappointed that even Jose took
+sides with the majority.  Sentiment, beyond his love for us, did not
+appeal to him; he looked only on the practical side of things.
+
+"I shouldn't have thought San Martin would have thrown up the sponge,"
+said he.  "I gave him credit for more pluck than that.  They do say in
+the town that he was keen on making himself king or emperor."
+
+"A pack of rubbish!" I cried.
+
+"Well," said Jose, "I would have seen the thing through, anyhow.  It
+won't be pleasant for your father, either, when Bolivar gets the
+whip-hand.  San Martin's friends will be in Bolivar's black books.
+I'll guarantee Montilla has written to him already."
+
+"You aren't in a very good temper this morning, Jose," said I, with a
+laugh.
+
+"No; because I am looking a long way ahead, and see things.  Is your
+father going to keep in office?"
+
+"I expect so.  He may be able to do the country a little good."
+
+"And himself a lot of harm!  Shall you resign your commission?"
+
+"How can I? the Spaniards are still in the field."
+
+"And will take a lot of beating yet!  'Twould have answered better if
+the Peruvians had done the job by themselves."
+
+I might have mentioned that if they found it so difficult with the aid
+of others, they could hardly have done it alone; but dear old Jose was
+too angry for argument, so I let the subject drop.
+
+Among the officers opinion was divided, but no one had much to say on
+the matter.  It almost seemed as if they feared to express their real
+opinion in case of future trouble.  Colonel Miller, however, spoke his
+mind freely, and so did the other Englishmen with him.
+
+"I am sorry San Martin has gone," said he; "but my duty is plain.  I am
+an officer in the army of Peru, and must obey orders from the
+government.  If they give the chief command to Bolivar, why, I shall
+fight under him, just as I have done under San Martin.  That's one good
+thing about soldiering--you always know where you are."
+
+"Humph!" said Jose, on hearing the remark, "I'm not so sure that the
+colonel's right.  In my opinion there's more than one soldier just at
+present wondering if he hadn't better join the other party again.
+Another affair like the one at Ica would send them flying to Canterac
+in scores.  The great thing with some of them is to be on the winning
+side."
+
+As soon as San Martin had left Peru, Bolivar sent a message, offering
+the aid of his troops; but the government declined all assistance.  A
+new spirit seemed to enter into the nation: the people declared the
+country would fight its own battles, and preparations to meet the
+Spaniards were eagerly pushed on.
+
+What came of them we shall shortly see.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVIII.
+
+DARK DAYS.
+
+"I have decided to leave you in Lima, Crawford, to help Videla with the
+second battalion.  I have good reasons for doing so," continued the
+colonel, observing my disappointed look; "and, anyhow, you are well out
+of this expedition.  I don't expect much from it."
+
+The expedition of which Colonel Miller spoke had been planned on a
+large scale for the purpose of crushing the enemy in the south, and the
+first battalion of the Peruvian Legion formed part of it.  Naturally I
+had quite looked forward to sailing with it, and was not at all
+pleased, therefore, to be left behind.  I had many friends, some of
+them not much older than myself, among the officers of the first
+battalion, and on the morning of the embarkation I went over to Callao
+to see them off.  They were delighted at the thought of active service,
+and of course chaffed me unmercifully.
+
+"Take care of the town, Juan," said one; "we shall want it when we come
+back."
+
+"Some day, when you are a man, we will take you with us," laughed
+Ensign Alzura, a merry, round-faced youngster of sixteen; "but we must
+have seasoned men for this trip, dear boy."
+
+"Should the Spaniards arrive while we're away, ask them to wait till
+our return," remarked another.
+
+"I don't wonder you are so excited," said I coolly; "I felt the same
+before I knew what a battle is really like."
+
+"Bravo, Crawford!" cried the colonel, who had joined us unperceived;
+"that's a round shot for them.  They haven't heard the whistle of the
+bullets yet, eh?  Well, good-bye; it's time you were getting ashore.
+You'll hear news of us from time to time."
+
+"Good news too, I hope, colonel.--Good-bye, Zuviria, Alzura, and all of
+you.  I hope you've shipped a schoolmaster," and with that parting shot
+I ran down to the quay.
+
+The Peruvians were on board the _O'Higgins_; but there were several
+other vessels, and presently they all stood out of the bay amidst a
+regular salvo of cheering from the spectators.
+
+I returned to Lima feeling rather gloomy, but Lieutenant-Colonel
+Videla, who commanded our second battalion, gave me little time for
+brooding.  Fresh recruits were coming in every day, and the work of
+attending to them kept me employed for weeks.  There was still a
+Patriot army encamped outside Lima, but it did nothing, though who was
+to blame I could not say.
+
+About the end of the year, vague yet disquieting rumours began to
+circulate in the city.  It was said that our troops in the south had
+met with defeat, had been cut to pieces and practically swept out of
+existence.  The victorious Spaniards, uniting all their forces, were
+making ready for a swoop on Lima.  Everything was lost!
+
+Don Felipe brought us the news, and it was easy to see, in spite of his
+talk, that it did not displease him.
+
+"We shall have to call in Bolivar now," said he, "or make peace with
+the viceroy.  Of course you and I will suffer.  Our estates will be
+confiscated; we shall probably be thrown into prison; but we are good
+patriots, and will not shrink from our duty."
+
+"If the others agree with me," replied my father, "we shall neither
+call in Bolivar nor make peace.  There is still an army left!"
+
+"Just so, but we cannot trust it.  The troops are almost in open
+rebellion, and this news will not quiet them."
+
+"We do not yet know that it is true."
+
+"I am sure of it," said our neighbour hastily.  "I have--that is to
+say, there can be no doubt of it."
+
+A week or two later--January 20, 1823, to be precise--there walked into
+the quarters of the second battalion a young officer.  His face was
+white and drawn, his eyes were sunken; he looked so pitifully weak and
+ill that at first I failed to recognize him.
+
+"Well, Crawford," he exclaimed, "am I as changed as all that?  Don't
+you know your old chum Alzura when you see him?"
+
+"Alzura?" I echoed, aghast.
+
+"All that is left of him."
+
+"Where is the first battalion?"
+
+Spreading his hands out dramatically, he said, "Haven't you heard?
+Don't you know what has happened at Torata and Moquegua?"
+
+"I have heard nothing but some very dark rumours," I replied uneasily.
+
+"They cannot be darker than the truth.  The army has been destroyed,
+and the battalion with it."
+
+"And the colonel?"
+
+"Oh, he was in another district with the light company.  But I'll tell
+you all about it.  We had a wretched voyage, and arrived at Arica half
+dead.  After that we sat down for three weeks doing nothing, when
+Alvarado, who was in chief command, sent the colonel north with the
+light company.  A lucky thing for them, too!"
+
+"Go on!" said I impatiently.
+
+"Well, at last we moved, and marched as far as Torata.  Do you know the
+place at all?"
+
+"Oh yes; it's a few miles from Moquegua, isn't it?"
+
+"That's it.  Well, the Spaniards were at Torata, and we tried to turn
+them out, but failed.  Then they attacked, and we were beaten.  It was
+simply awful.  The legion fought like a battalion of heroes.  Every one
+praised us; but praise won't bring the dead to life.  We broke two
+cavalry charges, and stood our ground till there wasn't a cartridge
+left."
+
+"Then you retreated?"
+
+"Some of us did, not many!  We left fifteen of our officers there and
+three-fourths of the battalion, all dead or dangerously wounded.
+Alvarado took us back to Moquegua; but the Spaniards caught us again.
+The second defeat was worse than the first, and when the battle was
+over there was no army left.  As to the battalion--!  O Juan, isn't it
+awful?  La Rosa, Tarramona, Escobar, Rivero--all gone!  I should
+think," he added, with a bitter laugh, "I must have been senior
+officer."
+
+It was, indeed, a terrible story.  I could hardly realize that of all
+my high-spirited young friends who had sailed from Callao this was the
+only one to return.
+
+"How did you get back?" I asked, after a time.
+
+"With General Martinez.  We embarked at Ilo, while General Alvarado
+went on to Iquiqui.  The game's up in that part of the country, Juan!"
+
+"Oh, nonsense!" I replied brusquely.  "We aren't going to lose heart
+over a couple of defeats."
+
+Of course the news soon spread, and the people, especially the
+soldiers, were wild with anger.  They said it was the fault of the
+government, and called for fresh rulers.  Some advised sending for
+Bolivar, while a few prominent citizens even talked of coming to terms
+with the enemy.
+
+One morning, toward the end of February, Videla called a council of the
+officers belonging to his battalion.  He looked pale, but firm and
+determined, as if he had resolved on some particular course.
+
+When we had taken our seats, he rose and said, "Senors, I have called
+you together to discuss an important proposal.  Affairs, as you know,
+are in a bad state; the country is in disorder, and the enemy are
+triumphing everywhere.  Under these circumstances, the chiefs of the
+army have decided to force the hands of the government.  To-morrow the
+troops will march to Lima and demand that a president shall be
+appointed with full powers.  Now, I will have no part or lot in this
+matter.  I call it treason.  If the government choose to resign, well
+and good; if they resist, my sword, at least, is at their service."
+
+A round of cheering greeted his remarks, and one after another the
+officers sprang up, pledging themselves to support him.
+
+"Thank you," said he quietly; "I knew you would not fail me.  Nothing
+will be done until the morning.  Then, when the order to march is
+issued, I shall command you to stand still."
+
+"Suppose they use force, colonel?" I suggested.
+
+His face grew paler, but he answered steadily, "I trust they will not
+be so foolish.  Should they be, the battalion, will know how to defend
+itself."
+
+"Caramba!" exclaimed Alzura, when the meeting broke up, "it seems to me
+that the second battalion is likely to follow the first.  What can we
+do against an army?"
+
+"There will be no fighting," I answered cheerfully.  "They will simply
+march without us, and the government will agree to their demands."
+
+I spoke as if my opinion were conclusive, but nevertheless I did not
+sleep comfortably that night.  The troops were wakened early, breakfast
+was hurried over, and then, to the sound of bugles, the various
+regiments paraded.  Presently they began to move, and a mounted officer
+dashed over to know why our battalion remained still.
+
+"By my orders they remain.  I refuse to join in what my officers and I
+regard as an act of treason," calmly replied Videla.  "We will
+willingly march against the enemy, but not against our own government."
+
+Bending over, the officer whispered something in his ear.
+
+"We have counted the cost," replied our chief, "and are not to be
+frightened.  Let the men who are unwilling to obey me fall out; no harm
+will happen to them," said he, turning to the troop.
+
+Not a man moved, the brave fellows stood in their ranks, firm as rocks.
+Again the officer whispered to Videla, and then dashed off at full
+speed.  It was, as Alzura afterwards remarked, a bad quarter of an hour
+for us.  If the chiefs endeavoured to force us into submission, there
+could be but one result.  Videla would not yield, and we could not
+desert him.  Perhaps the firmness of our bearing saved us; perhaps the
+chiefs feared the people, for the battalion was composed entirely of
+Peruvians; but whatever the reason, we remained unmolested, and the
+army marched off without us.  Then the men were dismissed, and we
+gathered in groups to chat over the incident.
+
+"What will happen now?" asked one fellow.
+
+"It is all decided," replied Videla.  "I heard last night that the
+government will yield.  Riva-Aguero is to be made president, and Santa
+Cruz commander-in-chief."
+
+"And what shall we do, colonel?"
+
+"Obey orders," he answered, smiling.  "We cannot fight for a government
+that has resigned its powers."
+
+The evening proved Videla's words true.  The troops, having
+accomplished their object, returned to camp, rejoicing that the country
+had a new ruler.
+
+"Now," exclaimed Alzura, as we turned in for the night, "I suppose we
+shall see great things done!"
+
+"New brooms sweep clean," said I, laughing, "but unfortunately they
+soon become old ones."
+
+However, it really did seem as if the new general intended to push on
+the war in vigorous style.  Preparations were made for another
+expedition to the south; Bolivar was invited to Peru; and Sucre, his
+most brilliant general, had already come.
+
+At this time we knew nothing of Colonel Miller; but about the end of
+March he returned to Lima, having done more with his handful of men
+than all the southern army.  The stories told by officers who served
+with him filled us with envy.
+
+"Did you hear how we cleared the Royalists out of Arequipa?" asked
+Captain Plaza.  "That was a rich joke," and he laughed even at the
+recollection of it.
+
+"Let us hear it," said I.
+
+"Well, of course, it loses in the telling, but I'll do my best.  First
+of all, we caught a peasant and shut him up where he could hear all and
+see nothing.  The poor fellow imagined we were going to shoot him as a
+spy.  About every half-hour or so one of us would go to the colonel to
+report the arrival of fresh troops, and ask where they were to camp.
+Then we spread our few men about the valley and kindled dozens of
+blazing fires.  As soon as it was dark enough, the colonel ordered the
+man to be brought out."
+
+"His face was a study," interrupted Cordova.  "He certainly expected to
+be shot."
+
+"The colonel read him a lecture," continued Plaza, "and wound up by
+offering to spare his life on his promising to take a letter to the
+governor of Arequipa.  'But,' said the colonel sternly, 'you are not to
+tell what you have seen here.  I want him to think we are very few in
+number.  Do you understand?'  The fellow promised readily enough,
+placed the letter in his hat, mounted his horse, and rode down the
+valley, counting the fires as he went.  Of course he told every
+Royalist officer the truth as he believed it, and they cleared out of
+the district in double-quick time.  Then we forced the governor to
+supply us with forage for five hundred horses."
+
+"But you didn't have five hundred!"
+
+"That was the joke.  We carted the stuff to some sandhills, where a
+part of the force was supposed to lie in ambush.  When the Royalists
+returned with large reinforcements, they wasted days, being afraid of
+falling into a trap.  It was very funny watching their manoeuvres."
+
+"Then there was the officer with the flag of truce near Chala," said
+Cordova.  "He carried back a pretty report to his chief!"
+
+"Yes," said Plaza, laughing; "he believed we were just the
+advance-guard of a large force.  He stayed with us the night, but I'm
+afraid his slumbers were troubled ones.  The bustle was
+tremendous--soldiers coming and going every few minutes.  The colonel
+was giving all kinds of impossible orders; in fact, you would have
+thought we had quite a big army there.  Next morning I escorted the
+Royalist a mile or so on the road.  All our men were spread out, some
+in fatigue dress, to make him believe there were at least two
+regiments."
+
+"That was a good trick," laughed Alzura.
+
+"And the officers galloped about, shouting to the men to go to their
+camps in the rear.  Turning to me, the fellow exclaimed seriously, 'It
+is all very well for Miller to have a couple of battalions; but we have
+a couple as well as he!'
+
+"'Ah,' said I, trying to keep a straight face, 'you keep your eyes
+open, I see.  I warned the colonel not to let you see so much.'"
+
+"Did you really fool him?" asked half a dozen men in a breath.
+
+"Yes, and kept our position till the colonel was ready to move.  If I
+had my way, Miller should be commander-in-chief.  He is now the best
+man in the country for the post."
+
+"Bravo!" cried Cordova.  "As it is, I suppose we shall all be under
+Bolivar's thumb soon."
+
+"I don't much care who leads," said Alzura, "as long as we win; and
+it's about time something was done.  The Royalists are getting a strong
+following in the city again."
+
+"Bah!" exclaimed Plaza scornfully, "they're just weather-cocks,
+twisting about with every wind that blows--first Royalist, then
+Patriot, then Royalist again!  It's enough to take away one's breath.
+Did you hear about Camba?"
+
+"He was one of us," said Alzura, "went over to the Royalists, and came
+back again."
+
+"And was appointed second in command of the Legion!"
+
+There was a cry of amazement from every one in the room; but Plaza
+continued, "It's a fact; only Miller put his foot down.  'My officers
+are gentlemen,' said he.  'If you appoint this man over them they will
+break their swords, and I shall be the first to do so.'  That stopped
+the game, and Camba was pushed in somewhere else."
+
+"It's a wonder he hasn't changed again," I said.
+
+"He is only biding his time, like a good many others."
+
+"I know nearly a dozen myself," said Alzura, "and one of them is a
+neighbour of yours, Crawford."
+
+"Do you mean the fellow with the pretty daughter?" some one asked.
+
+"Yes.  I respect the girl.  She is an out-and-out Royalist, and makes
+no attempt to deny it; but the old man is a schemer--he runs with the
+hare and hunts with the hounds."
+
+"Don't vent your opinion too freely, my boy; Montilla has powerful
+influence in high quarters."
+
+"Well," said Alzura doggedly, "if he isn't working hard to bring back
+the Royalists, I am very much mistaken."
+
+The young officer's words made me very uneasy.  I knew little of Don
+Felipe's proceedings, as, although he was an occasional visitor at our
+house, a certain coolness had sprung up between us.  For this feeling
+it would have been difficult, perhaps, to give any particular reason.
+To all appearance the man had acted fairly enough; indeed, according to
+his own account, he had always been my best friend.
+
+Still, I had very little love for him, and no respect at all.  I was
+rather suspicious of a man who changed sides just when it best suited
+his interests.  With Rosa things were different.  She was a born
+Royalist, and though I thought her views mistaken, I admired her pluck
+in holding so stoutly to them.
+
+But the idea that her father was preparing to turn his coat again
+worried me.  True, he might win a big reward by helping the Spaniards;
+but in the event of discovery, he could hardly expect to escape death.
+I told myself the punishment would serve him right, and that the
+business was none of mine; yet somehow I could not get rid of the
+uneasy feeling.  If Alzura's suspicions were correct, the man might be
+taken and hanged at any moment.  I said again it would serve him right,
+but the justice of his sentence would not lessen Rosa's suffering.
+
+All that night I lay awake thinking.  I could not get the girl out of
+my head.  You see, I had known her so long; we had played together like
+brother and sister; she was so pretty and winsome that I hated the idea
+of trouble assailing her.
+
+In the morning I was inclined to laugh at my fears.  Every one knew
+there were many people in Lima willing to welcome the Royalists, and it
+had been openly stated more than once that Don Felipe Montilla had only
+changed sides to secure his property.  Doubtless Alzura, knowing this,
+had jumped to the conclusion that he would willingly return to his
+former allegiance.
+
+"That is about all there is in it," said I, feeling a little more
+assured.  "It is marvellous what stories some men can build up from a
+word here and there!  If Alzura lives till the end of the war, he
+should be a novelist."
+
+At this time I was a great deal in Lima, being employed by Colonel
+Miller in connection with the new expedition which Santa Cruz was to
+lead south.  Several nights a week I slept at home, much to mother's
+satisfaction.  My father continued to be busy in public matters, though
+he had resigned his office as a protest against the invitation to
+Bolivar.
+
+Now, it chanced, about a fortnight after young Alzura's disquieting
+talk, that I had occasion to go late at night to Callao, and Jose
+offered to accompany me.  It is likely enough that my mother put the
+idea into his head, for though brave enough herself, she was always
+fearful on my account.  However, I was glad to avail myself of Jose's
+offer.  The night was fine, the sky was studded with stars, and the
+moon, nearly at the full, gave forth a splendid light.
+
+"You may go to bed, Antonio," said I to the old janitor, as he opened
+the gate.  "We are not likely to return till morning."
+
+"Do you remember our first night ride to Callao?" asked Jose.  "There
+was no need for any one to sit up for us then."
+
+"Yes, that I do.  And the voyage in the schooner," I added gaily.
+"That was an adventure, if you like! We were as near to death then,
+Jose, as ever we have been since."
+
+"Yes," he said thoughtfully.  "I have often wondered how we managed to
+escape."
+
+Passing through the outer gates of the park on to the highroad, we
+cantered our horses about a quarter of a mile, and then turned up a
+narrow lane which separated our property from that of Don Felipe
+Montilla.
+
+Suddenly checking his horse, Jose whispered, "See to your pistols, my
+boy; there are horsemen coming this way."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIX.
+
+FALSE PLAY, OR NOT?
+
+There was no actual reason why we should feel alarmed; but Lima was an
+unsafe place in those days, and people who travelled at night generally
+went well armed.
+
+As yet the bend in the road prevented us from seeing any one, but
+listening intently, we distinctly heard the sounds of a horse's hoofs.
+
+"There's only one, Jose," I whispered; and he nodded.  I do not know
+that we should have taken any notice of the man, but for his efforts to
+conceal his identity.  We came upon him suddenly, while the moon shone
+full in his face, and before he had time either to draw his poncho
+closer or to pull the slouch hat over his eyes.  Both these things he
+did quickly, but meanwhile we had seen, and a look of keen surprise
+shot across Jose's face.  Recovering himself instantly, he said
+cheerfully,--
+
+"Good-night, senor.  Fine night for a ride."
+
+"So you seem to think," replied the other surlily.
+
+"You have come from the town, I see," said Jose, for we lived eastward
+of Lima; "is all quiet there?"
+
+"Why shouldn't it be?  Kindly allow me to pass; I am in a hurry,"
+responded our morose stranger.
+
+"Then 'twas lucky that you knew of this short cut," remarked Jose,
+nothing daunted by the fellow's manner.  "Well, good-night, senor.
+Pleasant ride!" and he drew his horse aside that the stranger might
+pass.
+
+"He isn't any too polite!" I remarked, as digging his spurs into his
+horse the fellow galloped off.  "He's a fine horseman, though, and has
+the air of a military man, if I'm not mistaken."
+
+"Yes," agreed Jose; "he certainly rides like a soldier."
+
+"But he isn't in uniform."
+
+"No; he has left his uniform at home, I expect."
+
+"He must be pretty familiar with Lima to know this short cut."
+
+"I daresay he is.  But didn't you recognize him?  Well, I suppose it's
+hardly likely you would; you were only a little chap at the time, and
+perhaps never saw him.  He's a rascal to the marrow!"
+
+"But who is he?" I asked impatiently.
+
+"Pardo Lurena."
+
+"Lurena?  Haven't I heard my father speak of him?"
+
+"Very likely.  He was one of the 'young bloods' of Peru, and, being a
+cadet of a wealthy family, able to do much as he pleased.  He was
+always a thorough ruffian, and the common people hated him like poison.
+His pranks, however, were hushed up by those in authority, until, for
+some offence more startling than usual, your father got him clapped in
+prison.  The Dons howled finely, but your father stood firm, and the
+people backed him up; so young Lurena had a taste of prison life.
+There was great excitement over it at the time."
+
+"What happened afterwards?"
+
+"Lurena left Lima.  He went from bad to worse, and finally joined the
+ranks.  Of course his relatives used their influence, and he was given
+a commission; but he never rose very high, I believe."
+
+"What could he be doing in Lima to-night?"
+
+"Something rascally, I'll be bound!  He may have been to the town, but
+I believe the last place he stopped at was over there," and Jose
+pointed toward Don Felipe's house.
+
+"You don't think there's some treachery afoot between them, do you?"
+
+"Why not?  Once a traitor, always a traitor!  Montilla means to save
+his property at all costs, and to pick up as much as possible in the
+general scramble.  Should the Spaniards win, your father will say
+good-bye to his estates."
+
+"Isn't your prejudice making you a little unjust, Jose?  Remember that
+we know nothing against Don Felipe."
+
+"Oh, don't we?  He got the estates into his hands once, and by hook or
+by crook he'll get them again!"
+
+I thought Jose exaggerated the danger, but this meeting with Lurena set
+me thinking.  The fellow was evidently a Royalist soldier, and on a
+secret errand.  If Jose's idea was correct, there could be only one
+object in his visiting Montilla.
+
+But our neighbour was not the man to compromise himself unless there
+was a distinct chance of success.  Had he learned any news favourable
+to the Royalist cause?  If so, that might account for his action.
+
+Silently we rode through the sleeping town and along the road to
+Callao, where Jose waited at an inn while I did the business which had
+brought me to the port.  The bay was filled with shipping, and men were
+hard at work fitting out the transports for the troops ordered south.
+
+"Isn't it rather risky to remove so many troops?" I asked the colonel.
+"Suppose the enemy should swoop down on the capital?"
+
+"They're quite welcome to do so," he replied, with a laugh.  "Lima is
+of no use to us really; it's Callao that matters."
+
+"Are you going with them, colonel?"
+
+"No; I stay behind with General Sucre."
+
+There was one question I wanted very much to ask, but it was long
+before I could muster the courage to do so.
+
+"Colonel," I said at length, "I want to ask a rather queer question,
+but I have reasons for it.  Do you think the war will end in favour of
+the Spaniards?"
+
+"That depends," he answered, looking at me in surprise.  "It certainly
+will do so if our people quarrel among themselves, which is what the
+enemy reckon on.  That is their sheet-anchor, in fact."
+
+"Would a clever man think they had a chance just now?"
+
+"Why, yes," replied the colonel thoughtfully; "he might think they
+stand an excellent chance."
+
+"Thank you, sir," I said, and the incident of the preceding night
+loomed up larger and uglier than ever.
+
+Day had fairly broken when I sought Jose for the purpose of returning
+home.  I said nothing to him of my talk with the colonel, though the
+remembrance of it kept running through my mind.  On our return I found
+my father alone, so I told him my suspicions, and asked his advice.
+
+"It certainly has an ugly look, Jack," said he; "yet it may be easy of
+explanation.  For Rosa's sake, I hope Montilla isn't playing false.  He
+is in our counsels, and knows everything that goes on, so that he could
+make the Spaniards pay high for his treachery."
+
+"And if he is discovered?"
+
+"He will be shot."
+
+"And you couldn't save him, if you would?"
+
+"I couldn't and wouldn't.  A man may be a turncoat in good faith, but a
+traitor--bah!  But after all, my boy, it seems to me we are hunting a
+fox that hasn't broken cover.  This Lurena, whom Jose recognized, is no
+friend of mine; and though he was an ensign in the Royalist army years
+ago, it does not follow that he is a Royalist now.  Ah, I have it!"
+said he, in a tone of relief.
+
+"What--an explanation?" I asked curiously.
+
+"Yes; and the right one, I'll wager!  It is through Lurena we get our
+information of the enemy's doings!  No doubt Montilla employs him as a
+spy."
+
+"Then why was he so put out at meeting with us?"
+
+"Well, naturally he would not want his secret known."
+
+My father's idea was feasible enough, but it did not altogether satisfy
+me; yet what could I do?  If Montilla were playing false, I seemed
+almost as guilty in not denouncing him.  But for Rosa's sake I could
+not bring myself to act; and after all, it was merely a matter of
+suspicion.
+
+About three days before the sailing of the expedition I rode home to
+spend the evening.  Jose met me at the outer gate, and I saw in a
+moment that something had happened.
+
+"What is it?" I asked.  "Have you come to meet me?"
+
+"Yes.  Send your horse on; I want to talk to you."
+
+We walked across the park out of earshot, when Jose said in a whisper,
+as if still fearful of being overheard,--
+
+"He is here again."
+
+"He!" said I; "who?"
+
+"Lurena.  He went into Don Felipe's house half an hour ago."
+
+"Well, what of that?  You know what my father said."
+
+I spoke boldly, as if there could be nothing in the business; but Jose
+smiled grimly.
+
+"Look here, Jack," said he at length, "we can easily settle this
+affair.  If Montilla is innocent, there's no harm done; if he's
+guilty--well, better for one to suffer than thousands."
+
+"What do you propose?"
+
+"To waylay this Lurena.  He is almost certain to have papers on him
+which will tell all we wish to know."
+
+"I can't do it, Jose.  Don Felipe is Rosa's father, and I am reluctant
+to bring trouble to her."
+
+"Would you rather sacrifice your own father and mother?"
+
+"How dare you ask such a question, Jose?" I cried angrily.
+
+"I dare anything for my master," said he, unmoved.  "If the Spaniards
+win, your father is doomed, and you also, while your mother will be a
+beggar.  See, Jack, I have no right to speak thus, but I can't help it.
+With or without your help, I intend getting to the bottom of this
+matter."
+
+I knew Jose of old, and that once his mind was made up, no amount of
+threats or coaxing would turn him from his purpose.
+
+"If your father is right," he continued, "so much the better--the
+knowledge will make our minds easy; but I can't and won't stand this
+suspense any longer."
+
+In a sense I was completely in his power.  Whether I went or not he
+would go, and by himself would most certainly proceed to extreme
+measures.
+
+"Very well, Jose," I said reluctantly, after weighing the matter in my
+mind, "have your own way."
+
+"There is no other," he replied.  "Come, let us go to the workshop and
+get a few tools."
+
+I did not know his plan, but it was evident he had thought it all out.
+First he made a simple but effective gag; then he selected a long piece
+of thin but tough rope, several strips of hide, a large rug, and a tiny
+lantern.
+
+"Now," said he with a chuckle, "I think we shan't have much trouble
+with Mr. Lurena."
+
+On our way to the lane he told me his plan, and gave me full directions
+as to my share in it.  The night was dark, but we moved quietly,
+speaking only in whispers, and straining our ears for the slightest
+sound.
+
+At the bend in the narrow lane Jose unrolled the cord, and I, taking
+one end in my hand, sat down in the darkness, laying the gag and a
+strip or two of hide on the ground near me.  Jose moved to the other
+side of the lane, and we let the rope lie slack across the road.  Then
+we waited in silence for the coming of Lurena, feeling confident that
+he would not leave the house till the night was far spent.
+
+This adventure was not to my liking, and I could only hope that in some
+way my presence might be of use to Montilla.  Somehow I had not the
+slightest hope of my father's idea proving right.  My old distrust of
+the man returned in full force, and I dreaded what an examination of
+Lurena's pockets would reveal.
+
+Slowly, very slowly, the minutes passed; a whole hour went by, and
+still there was no sign of our intended victim.  Had he left the house
+by the front?  I almost hoped he had.  Yet, should he escape us this
+time, I knew that now Jose had started his quarry he would run it to
+earth.
+
+A second hour passed.  He must come soon now or not at all.  My limbs
+were dreadfully cramped, and I began to get fidgety.  Once I coughed
+slightly, but a sharp pull at the rope warned me to be silent.  At last
+the hoof-beats of a horse could be distinctly heard.  From the way he
+rode, the horseman evidently knew the road well.  Nearer and nearer he
+came, while we, raising the rope, stretched it tight.  The figure of
+horse and man loomed up dimly, came close to us; there was a stumble, a
+low cry of surprise, and the next moment our man lay on the ground, his
+head enveloped in Jose's rug.
+
+A spectator might easily have mistaken us for professional thieves, we
+did the thing so neatly.  Almost in less time than it takes to tell, we
+had thrust the gag into our victim's mouth, and bound both his legs and
+arms.  Then, while I removed his weapons, Jose lit the lantern, and we
+looked for the incriminating papers.  We searched minutely every
+article of his clothing and the trappings of his horse, but without
+result, except for a scrap of paper hidden in his girdle.
+
+Jose pounced on this like a hawk, and we examined it together by the
+light of the lantern.  I could have shouted for joy when at last we
+were able to read it: "To all good friends of Peru.  Pass the bearer
+without question."  It was signed by the president, Riva-Aguero, and
+bore the official seal.
+
+"It seems you were right," whispered Jose sulkily.  "Help me to raise
+the horse, and we will let the fellow go."
+
+Fortunately the animal was unhurt, and very soon we had it on its feet.
+Then we unbound the man, removed the rug from his head, and slipped out
+the gag.
+
+"Mount and ride on," said Jose sternly, disguising his voice.  "We wish
+you no harm."
+
+"Give me my pistols, you rascal!" cried Lurena, stamping his foot
+angrily.
+
+"Mount!" repeated Jose, and the click of his own pistol sounded
+ominously on the still air.
+
+There was nothing for it but to obey, and fuming with passion, the
+fellow clambered sullenly to the saddle.  Shaking his fist at us and
+vowing all manner of vengeance, he disappeared in the gloom.
+
+"I'm glad we came," said I, helping Jose to pick up the things; "that
+bit of paper has removed a load from my mind.  I thought my father
+might be right, but must admit I was rather doubtful."
+
+"I am in no doubt whatever," responded Jose.  "Either the fellow was
+too sharp for us, or we made our venture at an unlucky time.  If there
+was nothing wrong, why did he ride off so quickly?"
+
+"Well," said I, laughing, "the click of a pistol in one's ears is not
+much of an inducement to stay.  I think he acted very wisely."
+
+"If all were square and aboveboard, he would have shouted for help."
+
+"And drawn more attention to himself!  That would have been foolish in
+any case.  No, no, Jose; the case is clear, I think.  We have misjudged
+Montilla, and though I don't admire his methods, it is evident he is
+working on our side.  Let us be just, at least."
+
+"I wish it were possible," muttered Jose, leaving me to conjecture what
+his words exactly meant.
+
+Strangely enough, my distrust of Don Felipe was as strong as ever next
+day.  The incident of the spy should have removed any lingering doubt
+as to his fidelity, but it did not.  Perhaps it was owing to Jose's
+influence, but whatever the cause, I still found myself speculating
+keenly on our neighbour's honesty.
+
+Now, mind you, I do not wish to be praised or blamed on false grounds.
+What I did afterwards may have been right or wrong--and much, perhaps,
+can be said on both sides--but it was not done through either love or
+hatred of Don Felipe.  True, the man was no friend of mine, but his
+daughter was, and I could not bear to think of her suffering through
+his misdeeds.
+
+On the very day that the troops for the south embarked, I met her quite
+by accident.  She had been for a gallop, and was returning home.  Her
+cheeks were flushed with the exercise, her eyes were bright and
+sparkling; I had never seen her look so beautiful.
+
+"Well, Juan," she cried saucily, "so you have sent away your band of
+ragamuffins?  I wonder how many of this lot will come back!  Upon my
+word, I feel half inclined to pity them."
+
+This, of course, she said to tease me; because, if our men lacked
+something in discipline, they were at least a match for the Spaniards
+in bravery.
+
+"You are pleased to be merry," said I, riding with her to the gate,
+"but I hope you do not seriously think that the Spaniards have any
+chance of winning."
+
+"Why not?  It is you who live in a fool's paradise Juan.  Before long
+the king's flag will be floating over Lima again."
+
+She spoke so confidently that I looked at her uneasily.  Was there
+really a Royalist plot on foot, and did she know of it?
+
+Perhaps I acted foolishly, but what I did was done with a good motive.
+
+"Send your horse on," said I, "and let me walk with you to the house.
+There is something on which I wish to speak seriously to you."
+
+"Is it a penance for my sins?" she laughed, holding up her
+riding-habit.  "Please don't be too severe, Juan!  Now begin, and I
+will try to be good."
+
+"To begin is not so easy as you think, Rosa; but first let me tell you
+one thing--the Spaniards will never again be masters of Peru."
+
+"Pouf!" cried she, tossing her head; "that is rubbish, and says little
+for your understanding, Juan."
+
+"I am sorry you don't believe it; yet it is true, nevertheless.  There
+are Royalists in Lima who hope otherwise, but they will be
+disappointed.  More than that, some of them who are working secretly
+against us will meet with just punishment."
+
+"What is that to me?  I can't work for the king, being only a girl, but
+no one can accuse me of hiding my opinions."
+
+I could have laughed at that had I been in the mood for merriment.  All
+Lima knew that Peru did not contain a stancher Royalist than Rosa
+Montilla.
+
+"It is not of you I speak, but of the so-called Patriots, who are
+sedulously plotting for the enemy.  Already names have been mentioned,
+and before long some of these people will be shot."
+
+I think it was then she first began to suspect my meaning.  Her eyes
+flashed fire, and looking me full in the face, she cried,--
+
+"What is all this to me?  What have I to do with your wretched story?"
+
+My face was hot, my forehead clammy with perspiration.  I mumbled out
+my reply like a toothless old woman.
+
+"Don't be angry, Rosa," I said.  "I hate to give you pain,
+but--but--can't you understand?"
+
+"No," replied she calmly; "I understand nothing."
+
+"I wish to warn you," I continued desperately--"to put you on your
+guard.  There is a rumour--I heard it in camp, but I do not vouch for
+its truth--"
+
+"Come, make an end of this," she said haughtily, "or allow me to
+proceed to the house.  What is this rumour which seems to have tied
+your tongue so?"
+
+"I will tell you.  It is said that the leader of the conspiracy is Don
+Felipe Montilla!  Let me--"
+
+"Thank you, Juan Crawford," said she, making a superb gesture of
+disdain.  "Now go!  If our friendship has given you the right to insult
+me thus, you have that excuse no longer.  Go, I say, before I call the
+servants to whip you from the place."
+
+I tried in vain to offer some explanation.
+
+"Go, senor, go!" she repeated, and at last I turned sorrowfully away.
+
+I had done my best and failed.  I had lost my friend, and had effected
+no good, for I saw by her face that she would think it treason to
+mention the subject to her father.  And as I rode from the gate, I
+wondered whether, after all, we had been mistaken in our judgment.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XX.
+
+"SAVE HIM, JUAN, SAVE HIM!"
+
+"Aren't you coming, Juan?"
+
+Two days had passed since my interview with Rosa Montilla, and I was
+sitting in my room at the barracks, feeling at enmity with all the
+world.
+
+"It's a pity we've nothing better to do than to make fools of
+ourselves," said I savagely, when young Alzura burst in on me excitedly.
+
+He was dressed to represent some hideous monster that never was known
+on sea or land, and in his hand he carried a grotesque mask.
+
+"Hullo!" he exclaimed; "some one been rubbing you down the wrong way?
+Caramba, you are in a towering rage!  Pray what has offended your Royal
+Highness?"
+
+"Why, all this tomfoolery!  Fancy a masked ball with Canterac in the
+mountains ready to swoop down on us at any moment!"
+
+"The more reason why we should enjoy ourselves while we can.  Besides,
+you are as bad as the rest: you promised to go!"
+
+"I have forgotten it, then."
+
+"Well, you did; so make haste--the carriage is waiting."
+
+"I have no dress ready," said I coldly.
+
+"That doesn't matter in the least.  Go in your uniform; you look very
+well in it."
+
+"Thanks, I prefer to stay here."
+
+"You forget the ball is given in our honour!  Colonel Miller won't be
+too pleased at finding you absent.  'Twill be a slight on our host and
+hostess."
+
+"Very well, if you put it that way, I'll join you in the messroom
+shortly," said I indifferently.
+
+"That's right.  Slip your things on sharp; the animals will get
+restive."
+
+Alzura was in high spirits.  He loved fun of all kinds, and this ball
+was just to his taste.  Plaza and Cordova shared our carriage, and both
+of them rallied me on my glum looks.
+
+"Crawford's a bloodthirsty fellow," cried Alzura banteringly--"never
+happy unless he's fighting!"
+
+"That's a libel!" said I warmly; "I'm sick of the whole thing.  When
+this war's over, I hope never to hear a shot fired again."
+
+"Be easy," laughed Cordova; "you'll be an old man by then, and too deaf
+to hear even the report of a pistol."
+
+"There may be more truth in that than you think," I observed, bitterly.
+
+"Never mind, my boy," said Plaza; "you won't hear any shots fired
+to-night.  There's no great harm in enjoying ourselves for an hour or
+two.  Here we are!  What a crowd outside!--Put on your mask, Alzura;
+the people will like the fun."
+
+There was a roar of laughter from the spectators as Alzura, appeared,
+and we went into the hall amidst a round of cheering.  Most of the
+guests wore some fanciful costume, but several officers, Miller and
+O'Brien among them, were in uniform.
+
+The magnificent _salons_ were illuminated by thousands of lights; the
+guests were numerous, and represented most of the beauty and wealth of
+Lima.  My father and mother had not come, neither did I see Montilla.
+Rosa, of course, would have scorned to attend a ball given to the
+Patriots.
+
+Despite the lights and the music and the striking gaiety of the scene,
+I could not banish my feeling of dread.  I felt, as people say, that
+"something was going to happen," and moved listlessly among the
+brilliant assembly, wondering what it would be.
+
+"You look bored, Crawford," remarked O'Brien, coming across to me.  "Is
+anything the matter?"
+
+"No, thanks; I'm a bit off colour--that's all."
+
+"Would you rather be in the mountains?" asked Colonel Miller, who had
+joined us.
+
+"It depends on circumstances, colonel," I replied, trying to smile.
+
+When they had left me, I fell back on my occupation of gazing
+indifferently at the brilliant scene.  I could take no interest in it,
+nor in the chaff and nonsense of my friends, who tried hard to make me
+more like myself.  It seemed that in some mysterious way I was waiting
+for something, though what I could not imagine.  When the summons
+actually came, I was not in the least surprised.
+
+Alzura, who brought it me, had no idea he was assisting at a tragedy,
+but, with a merry laugh, exclaimed, "Crawford, there is a lady outside
+waiting to see you; she will not leave her carriage."
+
+"Who is it?" I asked.
+
+"I don't know; I haven't seen her.  A servant gave me the message, and
+I set off to find you."
+
+"Thanks," said I quietly, and crossing the brilliantly-lit _salon_,
+took my cap and went into the vast hall.
+
+Who had come for me--my mother?  That was my first thought, but a
+moment's reflection showed that it was unlikely.  Had there been
+anything wrong at home, she would have sent Jose on a swift horse.  The
+answer to my question came as I stood on the flight of steps leading to
+the hall.  The crowd of people had dispersed, and only a solitary
+carriage with its attendants stood at the door.  Recognizing the
+Montilla livery in an instant, I ran down the steps with a beating
+heart.
+
+The carriage door was open, and the light from the hall fell full on
+the white face of Rosa.
+
+"What has happened?" I cried.  "Why do you look so frightened?  Tell
+me, quick!"
+
+Her only answer was to bid me step inside.  The footman sprang to his
+place, the coachman gathered up the reins, the carriage turned with a
+swing, and almost before I realized it we were off at a gallop.  The
+girl's face was hidden now in darkness, but I had seen it for a moment,
+and could not forget it.  She was white and scared; her cheeks were
+tear-stained, and her eyes full of apprehension and grief.
+
+Some terrible disaster had happened, but I could not learn what it was.
+To all my questions she replied, "Home! home!" and ordered the coachman
+to drive faster.  Then she burst into a fit of crying, uttering
+incoherent words, of which I could make nothing.
+
+"Is it your father, Rosa?" I asked.  "Has anything happened to him?"
+At which she cried still more, upbraiding me for I knew not what.
+
+The gates of the hacienda were wide open.  We passed through at a
+gallop, and the trembling, foam-covered horses drew up at the front
+door.  As soon as the carriage came to a standstill, I jumped out and
+assisted Rosa to alight.  All the servants seemed to have gathered in
+the hall.  Their faces were white, their eyes wild with dread; some of
+them still shivered.  Evidently a great calamity had occurred.  What
+was it?
+
+Looking around, I noted the absence of Don Felipe.  That gave me a clue
+to the nature of the disaster.  Perhaps he lay dead in his room;
+perhaps the government, suspecting him of treachery, had torn him away.
+I did not hit on the exact truth, but my conjectures went very near it.
+
+Rosa's wild fit had passed; she was no longer a weeping girl, but an
+imperious mistress.  Her tears were dried; she had banished her fear.
+There was a light of scorn and command in her eyes.
+
+"Away, cowards!" she cried.  "Do you call yourselves men, and would not
+try to save your master?  Begone!" and she stamped her foot in passion.
+
+The servants slunk off abashed, and she led me along the corridor.  The
+door of her father's room was closed, but she opened it, and said,
+"Come in, Juan; see your friends' handiwork!"
+
+The apartment was in total disorder.  Chairs were overthrown; the table
+was stripped of its contents; all kinds of articles lay strewn about
+the floor: there were very evident signs of a fierce and prolonged
+struggle.  On one wall was the mark of a bullet, and a corner of the
+apartment was splashed with blood.  I gazed round eagerly for
+Montilla's body, but it was not there.
+
+"See," said the girl, "he was sitting there when the ruffians burst in
+upon him.  He fought for his life like a cavalier of old Spain, but the
+cowards were too many.  They flung themselves upon him like a pack of
+wolves, and bore him to the ground."
+
+"But who were they?" I asked in amazement.  "Who did it?  Tell me
+plainly what happened."
+
+"Need you ask?" she said coldly.  "The ruffians were your friends--your
+servants, for all I know."
+
+"Rosa, you are speaking wildly.  I do not wonder at it: this terrible
+affair has upset your nerves."
+
+Then she turned upon me, her eyes blazing with angry scorn.
+
+"What is it that you wear beneath your tunic, Juan Crawford?" she
+cried.  "Are you ashamed that it should be seen?"
+
+At first I did not understand her meaning; then a glimmer of the truth
+began to dawn on me, and slowly I drew out the silver key.
+
+"Do you mean this?"
+
+"Yes!  'The chief of the Silver Key'--that is what the black-browed
+ruffian called himself.  Fancy my father, a Spanish gentleman, the
+prisoner of a band of half-dressed savages--your friends, Juan
+Crawford!"
+
+"But I know nothing about it," I cried.  "These men take no orders from
+me.  The key was given me by the chief when I myself stood in need of
+protection."
+
+"Nevertheless they are your friends, and they have dragged my father
+from his home."
+
+"But why?  Surely there must be a reason!  Tell me what they said.  Try
+to be calm, Rosa; your father's life may depend on your words."
+
+"I know nothing.  How should I?  I was in bed.  My father sat there
+writing when they broke into the house.  The servants fled, and hid
+themselves like frightened sheep.  The cowards!  I dressed and ran
+here.  My father had killed one ruffian, but--but he could not struggle
+against so many."
+
+"I'll wager that he showed himself a brave man."
+
+"He did; but they overcame him," she continued, speaking more calmly.
+"They bound him with cords: he was helpless.  I begged the big bandit
+to release him; I would have gone on my knees--I, a daughter of the
+Montillas!" and she drew herself up proudly.
+
+"But the chief, Rosa--what did he say?"
+
+"That my father was charged with a serious offence, and that he must be
+tried by the officers of the Silver Key.  Think of that, Juan
+Crawford!--my father tried for his life by those dirty bandits!  Oh,
+how I wish I was a man!  Then they took him away.  I was alone and
+friendless; I thought of you, and told the coachman to drive me to
+Lima.  Then I remembered you were one of these people, and would have
+turned back.  But my father's life is precious; I would beg it even of
+an enemy.  O Juan, Juan, save him for me!"
+
+She broke down utterly.  I tried to comfort her, and failed.  She did
+nothing but cry, "Save him, Juan, save him!"
+
+[Illustration: "Save him, Juan, save him!"]
+
+I had no faith in my power to help her, but I could not tell her so.
+Why Raymon Sorillo had done this I knew no more than she--unless,
+indeed, he had discovered Don Felipe conspiring with the Royalists.  In
+that case, perhaps, I might prevail on him to spare the prisoner's
+life, and to restore him to liberty when the war was over.  It was only
+a tiny spark of hope, but I made the most of it.
+
+"Listen, Rosa," I said cheerfully.  "I do not belong to this society of
+which you speak, but its chief will do much for me.  I will go to him
+now and use all my influence.  I will beg him earnestly to spare your
+father's life, and I think he may grant it me.  Cheer up, Rosa!  In a
+few days I shall return and bring your father with me, most likely."
+
+"O Juan, how shall I ever thank you!  Forget the wild words I said to
+you.  I was distracted with fear and anger; I did not mean them, Juan!"
+
+"No, no," I answered soothingly; "I have forgotten them already.  Now
+go to bed; I must start at once.  I shall take a horse from your
+stables."
+
+"You have no sword!"
+
+"I shall not need one.  There is no danger for me in the mountains.
+The Indians will do me no harm."
+
+As soon as she had promised to go to her room I returned to the hall,
+and calling the servants, sent one to explain matters briefly to my
+father, and asking that my mother would come and stay with Rosa for a
+while.  Then going to the stables, I selected two good horses, and
+ordered a groom to help me to saddle them.  Sorillo might or might not
+listen to my request, but it would be as well to waste no time on the
+journey.
+
+The thought of taking Jose occurred to me, but I put it aside.  There
+was really no danger in the journey, while if Sorillo would not listen
+to an appeal made in my father's name, he was not likely to listen at
+all.
+
+Leading the spare horse, I rode through the grounds, cantered down the
+narrow lane, struck the highroad, and turned in the direction of the
+mountains.  Just where Sorillo might be I could not tell, but I
+determined first of all to try the ravine where I had once spent
+several days.
+
+I have said that I had little faith in the success of my mission.  Why
+the Indians had committed this outrage was a mystery, and I could think
+of nothing which would help me to solve it.  That Don Felipe had acted
+treacherously I could well believe; but why, in that case, did not
+Sorillo hand him over to the government?  Why should the officers of
+the Silver Key take it upon themselves to try him?
+
+I rode on gloomily till the sun was high in the heavens, halting at a
+solitary hut, where the woman gave me food and drink for myself and the
+animals.  She was kind enough in this matter, but to my questions she
+would return no answers.  She knew nothing about the war, except that
+the soldiers had slain her only son, and her husband had been absent
+for over a year.  He might be Royalist or Patriot, she did not know,
+only she wished people were allowed to live in peace, and to cultivate
+their little plots of land.
+
+Giving her some money, I mounted and rode on, feeling refreshed by the
+brief halt.  The district was for the most part bare and uninhabited.
+Here and there were the remains of a ruined hut, and on the route I
+passed the deserted hacienda which had once afforded me a night's
+shelter.  I met no people, except occasionally a few women and little
+children; the men and growing boys were in the mountains or in the
+ranks of the army.
+
+It was evening when I reached the foot of the mountains.  My horses
+were tired out, and the worst part of the journey still lay before me.
+However, the light had not altogether faded, so I began the ascent,
+hoping to meet with some of Sorillo's men.  As it chanced, I had not
+long to wait.
+
+A sudden "Halt! who are you?" brought me to a stand, and I answered at
+random, "A friend of the Silver Key."
+
+"Are you alone?" asked the voice, with just a tinge of suspicion.
+
+"Yes," I replied.  "I am Juan Crawford, and am looking for Raymon
+Sorillo.  Can you take me to him?"
+
+A man stepped from behind a rock, and eyeing me suspiciously,
+exclaimed, "Wait, senor.  I cannot leave my post, but I will call for a
+guide;" and putting his hand to his mouth, he whistled softly.
+
+The sound was answered by one from higher up, and presently a second
+Indian, armed to the teeth, came running down.  The two talked together
+in whispers, and at last the second man said, "Come this way, senor; I
+will lead you to the chief.  He will be pleased to see the son of Don
+Eduardo."
+
+Under the circumstances I thought this rather doubtful, but I followed
+him up the path.
+
+"Are you staying in the ravine?" I asked.
+
+"Yes, senor, for the present."
+
+"Did you go with the chief to Lima?"
+
+"Ah, the senor knows of that!  The old crocodile showed fight, and
+killed a good man; but he is safe enough now."
+
+"He has not been put to death?" I asked, my forehead clammy with
+perspiration.
+
+"Not yet, senor; he must first be tried."
+
+"But what have you discovered?" I asked, thinking the fellow might be
+able to give me some information as to the cause of Don Felipe's
+abduction.
+
+In this I was mistaken.  The man knew, or pretended to know, nothing
+about it.  The chief had given orders, but not reasons, and had, as
+usual, been obeyed unquestioningly.  At a word from him his men would
+have ridden into Lima and dragged the president from his palace.
+
+It almost seemed as if Sorillo expected his stronghold to be attacked.
+The path was guarded by sentries, and a score of men were stationed at
+the entrance to the ravine, They passed us through without trouble, and
+before long I found myself in the presence of the chief.
+
+"You are surprised to see me?" I said briskly.
+
+"Yes; I thought you were in Lima."
+
+"I was there last night."
+
+"You have made a wonderfully quick journey.  You must be tired and in
+need of refreshment.  Come; I can at least offer you a good supper."
+
+"Not yet, thank you.  I want to ask you a question first.  What have
+you done with Don Felipe Montilla?"
+
+"The dog is in the hut yonder."
+
+He spoke with both anger and contempt; his face underwent a sudden
+change; for the first time I saw how cruel it could look.  My heart
+sank as I realized the uselessness of any appeal to him for mercy.
+Then I thought of Rosa, and said,--
+
+"It is on Don Felipe's account I am here.  What has he done?  Why has
+he been brought here?"
+
+"If another dared question me like this, I would answer him with a
+pistol shot," he cried fiercely; "but I do not forget that you are the
+son of Don Eduardo Crawford.  Come, let us eat and forget this
+business."
+
+"Will you tell me afterwards?"
+
+"I will tell you nothing, but you shall hear for yourself.  To-morrow
+the man will be tried, and if he is found guilty, not all South America
+shall save him.  But we will try him fairly, and you shall bear witness
+to our justice."
+
+"I want mercy!" said I.
+
+"You do not know what you ask yet.  Wait till the morning.  And now
+come; you must not be able to accuse me of inhospitality."
+
+The guerillas led away my horses, and I followed Sorillo to his own
+hut, where in a short time a plentiful meal was laid.  I was both
+hungry and thirsty, yet I had to force myself to eat and drink.
+Sorillo made no attempt at conversation, and I did not care to talk.
+
+When the things were removed, he had a bed made on the floor, and
+suggested I should lie down.
+
+"I am busy," said he.  "Most likely I shall be up all night, but that
+is no reason why you should not rest.  I will have you wakened in good
+time in the morning."
+
+"Thank you," I answered; and as he left the hut I lay down on the bed
+and closed my eyes.
+
+Though tired out, hours passed before I was able to sleep.  In the
+darkness I could see Rosa's white face, and hear her pitiful cry, "Save
+him, Juan, save him for me!"
+
+What had he done to make Sorillo so angry?  Surely he was not so bitter
+against every traitor?  He had hinted that even I would not beg for
+mercy when I knew the truth.  It would have to be something very
+dreadful, I thought, to make me forget my promise to Rosa.
+
+And what of Don Felipe?  How was he passing the night?  Did he know the
+charge to be brought against him in this most irregular court? and
+would he be able to clear himself?  I wondered.
+
+So thinking and dreaming, between sleep and wakefulness, I lay on the
+chief's bed, while the long hours rolled slowly away.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXI.
+
+ROUGH JUSTICE.
+
+I did not take much rousing in the morning, and even before remembering
+the exact circumstances, felt oppressed by the weight of coming sorrow.
+I breakfasted alone, Sorillo sending a profuse apology for not being
+able to join me, though I was rather glad than otherwise at his absence.
+
+Leaving the hut, I went into the ravine.  There were perhaps a hundred
+men in sight, all armed, and apparently waiting for some signal.  Their
+comrades, no doubt, had been dispatched on an errand, or were guarding
+the neighbouring passes.  In front of Don Felipe's hut stood a sentry,
+and, somewhat to my surprise, I now noticed a second hut, slightly
+lower down and similarly guarded.
+
+"Two prisoners!" I thought.  "I wonder who the other is?  Sorillo did
+not mention him."
+
+Nearer the head of the ravine some soldiers were at work, and going
+towards them I beheld a strange and significant sight.  In the side of
+the hill was a natural platform, broad and spacious, while round it
+stretched in a semicircle a wide stone seat, which the men were
+covering with bright red cloth.  Below the platform stood a ring of
+soldiers with impassive faces.
+
+I was still wondering what this might mean, when Sorillo, touching my
+arm, led me to the centre of the stone seat, saying, "Sit there; you
+shall be a witness that the people of the Silver Key treat their
+enemies justly."
+
+Rather reluctantly I took the seat indicated.  Sorillo sat next me, and
+six officers, ascending the platform, took their places, three on
+either side of us.  That portion of the seat occupied by the chief was
+slightly raised; but this, of course, makes no difference to the story.
+
+At a signal from Sorillo the door of Don Felipe's hut was opened, and
+the prisoner came out escorted by two armed men.  The soldiers, opening
+to right and left, made way for him, and by means of the boulders,
+which served as steps, he climbed to the platform.
+
+In spite of my prejudice against the man, I rejoiced to see how boldly
+he held himself.  He appeared to have summoned to his aid all the pride
+of his dead-and-gone ancestors.  He glanced contemptuously at the
+gigantic Sorillo, and meeting my eyes, smiled defiantly.  As to the
+officers, he did not give them even a look.
+
+[Illustration: He glanced contemptuously at the gigantic Sorillo.]
+
+"Thank goodness," said I to myself, "no one can call Rosa's father a
+coward!"
+
+Then Sorillo began to speak, clearly and distinctly, but with no note
+of anger in his voice.
+
+"Don Felipe Montilla," he said, "you are brought here by order of the
+Society of the Silver Key."  Don Felipe's lips curled as if in
+amusement.  "It is charged against you that you, having taken the oath
+of loyalty to the government, have since been in traitorous
+communication with the Royalist leaders.  Do you deny or admit the
+charge?"
+
+Don Felipe shrugged his shoulders carelessly, saying, "A truce to your
+mummery!  Do you think I would plead for my life to a band of
+cut-throats?  What care I for your society?"
+
+I thought this outburst would provoke his captors beyond measure, but,
+as far as I could judge, it produced no effect at all.  They sat quite
+still, as if the remarks had been addressed to others.
+
+"It is our custom," continued Sorillo, "to give those brought before us
+every chance to defend themselves.  We are not lawyers; we do not
+juggle with words; our one desire is to get at the truth."
+
+"By St. Philip," muttered Montilla, "this is the last place I should
+have thought to find it in!"
+
+"For this reason," continued the chief, ignoring the sarcastic
+interruption, "the story shall be told plainly, and then you will
+understand exactly what you are charged with.  Three nights ago we
+stopped a man returning from Lima.  Many times he had gone to and fro
+unmolested, protected by a pass from Riva-Aguero.  At last he was
+recognized by one of our men as Pardo Lurena, an utterly worthless man,
+who had already changed sides several times during the war."
+
+"He would have made a good recruit for you," remarked Montilla.
+
+"Suspecting this man, we had him watched," continued the chief, again
+passing over the interruption, "and found that always he went to your
+house, senor, returning under the cover of night.  We knew you to be an
+excellent Patriot, yet the circumstance made us uneasy.  At length we
+decided to ignore the president's passport.  Lurena was stopped and
+searched, with this result," and he flourished a letter before the
+prisoner.
+
+Don Felipe must have known by now how helpless his case was; but he
+only smiled.  In truth, at this crisis of his life he showed no want of
+pluck.
+
+"There is much in this letter," said the chief mercilessly.  "It
+contains a full list of the troops just dispatched to the south, and of
+those still remaining in Lima, with an exact statement as to the
+quantity of their stores and ammunition.  It describes their position,
+and advises General Canterac how he can best enter Lima and seize
+Callao.  It provides also a list of those who will join him, and
+stipulates that the writer shall keep not only his own estates, but
+shall be given those of which he has lately been deprived."
+
+At this last revelation Don Felipe changed colour somewhat, and
+withdrew his eyes from my face.
+
+"This letter," said Sorillo, "came from your house; it is signed F. M.,
+and I charge you with having written it.  Can you deny that it is in
+your handwriting?"
+
+The prisoner seemed to have regained self-possession, for looking
+steadily at Sorillo, he exclaimed, "A gentleman of Spain does not
+answer the questions of a mountain robber."
+
+Passing the letter to me, Sorillo said, "You know this man's
+handwriting; perhaps you will satisfy yourself that he wrote this
+letter?"
+
+"No," said I coldly, thrusting the paper away; "I will be neither judge
+nor witness in this case."
+
+"Very well," answered the chief; "let the second prisoner be brought
+forward."  And two men immediately fetched Pardo Lurena from his hut.
+
+He was still a young man, but looked old.  His eyes were shifty and
+cunning, his lips full and thick; he did not seem to be at all the kind
+of man to play so daring a game.  Don Felipe looked at him so
+scornfully that he turned away his face in confusion.  He gave his
+answers clearly, however, and told the story from beginning to end
+without a tremor.
+
+It was as Sorillo had said.  The fellow admitted being a Royalist spy
+employed in carrying messages between General Canterac and Montilla.
+The Don, he declared, had procured him the pass signed by Riva-Aguero,
+and had given him the letter now in the guerilla chief's possession.
+
+Don Felipe never once interrupted him either by word or gesture; to
+look at him, one would have thought he was merely a spectator, with no
+interest in the matter one way or another.  But when at last the tale
+ended, and Sorillo called upon him to speak, his attitude changed.
+
+"Do your murders your own way," he cried defiantly.  "If the farce
+pleases you, play it.  What has it to do with me?  When I am accused of
+crime by the government of my country, I will answer."
+
+"Don Felipe is right, Sorillo," I interrupted.  "If he has done wrong,
+let him be brought before a proper tribunal.  Whether he be innocent or
+guilty, if you kill him you commit murder.  You and your followers have
+no right to punish him."
+
+"In the case of a traitor we take the right," answered Sorillo
+drily.--"But there is a further charge, Don Felipe Montilla, more
+serious still.  You have been proved false to your country; I accuse
+you also of being false to your friend."
+
+Hitherto, I am bound to admit, the guerilla chief had acted like a
+perfectly impartial judge; now there was a ring of anger in his voice
+and a dangerous glitter in his eyes.  As to Montilla, I could hardly
+suppress an exclamation of surprise at the change in his appearance.
+No longer boldly erect, he stood with drooping head, pale cheeks, and
+downcast eyes.  In the first act he had behaved like a man of spirit;
+the second he began like a craven.
+
+"Listen!" exclaimed Sorillo sternly, and his first words told me what
+would follow.  "For many years there has lived in Lima a man who loves
+the Indians.  He saw that they were treated as dogs, and because of his
+great pity he resolved to help them.  To this end he worked day and
+night, making many enemies among the rulers of the country.  They tried
+to turn him from his purpose, now with threats, again with offers of
+heavy bribes: he would not be moved.  So badly were the Indians treated
+that it mattered little whether they lived or died.  They banded
+together, procured arms and ammunition, and determined to fight for
+their liberty.  Their friend sent them word that the attempt was
+hopeless; but they were very angry, and would not listen.  Then he left
+his home to speak to them himself, and endeavour to dissuade them from
+their purpose."
+
+Montilla had not once raised his head, and now his limbs quivered.  As
+for me, I sat listening with fascinated interest.
+
+"Side by side with this friend of the Indians," the chief continued,
+"there lived a Spanish gentleman, who told the viceroy falsely that his
+neighbour was going to the mountains to raise the standard of
+rebellion.  The viceroy, who was frightened, sent soldiers to seize
+him.  Second in command of the party was a lieutenant, young in years
+but old in crime.  To him this Spaniard went secretly.  'If this man
+should be killed in the scuffle,' said he, 'you can come to me for five
+thousand dollars.'
+
+"The lieutenant did his best to earn the money, and thought he had
+succeeded.  As it chanced, however, his victim did not die, but his
+estates were confiscated and given to the man who had betrayed him."
+
+The speaker stopped.  All was still; save for the leaping waters of the
+torrent, no sound was to be heard.  I glanced at Montilla: he was
+deathly pale, and on his forehead stood great beads of perspiration,
+which, with his bound hands, he was unable to wipe away.
+
+"Shall I tell you who these men were?" asked Sorillo.  "One is Don
+Eduardo Crawford; the others stand here," and he pointed to the
+prisoners.  "Listen to your accomplice, Felipe Montilla, if you care to
+hear the story repeated."
+
+Again Lurena gave his evidence glibly.  I think he had no sense of
+shame, but only a strong desire to save his life.  He might not have
+committed the deed for the sake of the money alone, he said, but he
+hated my father for having cast him into prison.
+
+It was poor evidence on which to try a man for his life, yet no one
+doubted Montilla's guilt.  There he stood with trembling limbs and
+ashen face--truly a wretched figure for a cavalier of Spain!  His
+courage had broken down completely, and to all the questions put by his
+self-appointed judge he answered no word.
+
+At length Sorillo asked his officers for their verdict, and with one
+consent they pronounced him "Guilty!"
+
+"It is a true verdict," exclaimed Sorillo; "any other would be a
+lie.--And now, Felipe Montilla, listen to me for the last time.  You
+have been proved a traitor to your country, and that alone merits
+death; but this other crime touches the members of the Silver Key more
+closely.  When the great men of Peru called the Indians dogs, Don
+Eduardo was our friend.  He took our side openly, encouraged us,
+sympathized with us, pitied us.  And you tried to slay him! not in fair
+fight, mind you, and only because you coveted his possessions.  For
+that you die within forty-eight hours, as surely as the sun will rise
+to-morrow!"  And all his hearers applauded.
+
+The condemned man still made no reply, uttered no appeal for mercy, but
+stood as one dazed.  But I thought of the daughter who loved him so
+well, and sprang to my feet.
+
+"Hear me!" I cried excitedly.  "If Don Felipe has done wrong, it is
+against my father.  Do you think he will thank you for killing his
+enemy?  Is that his teaching?  You know it is not; you know that he
+would forgive him freely--would beg his life from you on his bended
+knees.  If you really love my father, if you feel that he deserves your
+gratitude, spare this man's life.  If he has sinned he will repent.  I
+have come here for him.  Do not let me go back alone.  Am I to say to
+my father, 'You are foolish in thinking the Indians care for you; they
+care nothing!  I asked of them a boon in your name, and they refused
+it'?  Raymon Sorillo, I appeal to you, give me this man's life for my
+father's sake!"
+
+I looked at him earnestly, hoping to find a spark of mercy in his eyes.
+Alas, there was none!  He was hard as iron, cold as ice; on that day,
+at least, there was no pity in him.
+
+"You are foolish," said he; "you are like a child who cries for the
+moon.  Set this man free and he will immediately begin his old games of
+deceit and trickery.  He cannot help himself.  It is his nature, as it
+is a spider's to weave its web.  Your father's happiness depends on
+this traitor's death."
+
+I heard him patiently, and then renewed my appeal.  It was quite
+useless.
+
+"Remove the prisoners," said he; and at a sign the troops marched off,
+the officers dispersed, and none save we two remained on the platform.
+For a long time neither spoke.  I was thinking of Rosa anxiously
+awaiting my return.  I had bidden her hope, and there was no longer any
+hope.  I made no attempt to deceive myself in this respect.  Sorillo
+would do much for me, but this one thing he would not do.  I dreaded
+the thought of returning to Lima.  What would Rosa say and do when she
+heard of her father's shameful death?  Perhaps that part might be
+spared her; she need not learn the whole truth.  I must invent some
+story which would save her the knowledge of his double treachery.
+
+At last I turned to the chief, saying, "Will you allow me to speak with
+Don Felipe in private?  He has a daughter at home; he may wish to send
+her a last message."
+
+"He is not worth your kindness; but do as you please."
+
+I thanked him, and walked toward the hut in which Don Felipe was
+confined.  The sentry let me pass without protest, and opening the door
+I entered.
+
+The sight before me was a pitiful one.  The wretched prisoner sat on a
+wooden bench in the dreary hovel.  His arms were bound, but he was free
+to walk about if he so wished.  At the click of the latch he raised his
+head, but seeing me dropped it again quickly, as if ashamed to meet my
+gaze.
+
+"Don Felipe," I began, "have you any message for your daughter?"
+
+Instead of answering my question, he himself asked one.
+
+"Will that brigand really put me to death?" he said.
+
+"I am afraid so.  I have begged hard for your life, but in vain."
+
+Looking at me curiously, he exclaimed, "I cannot understand why you
+should wish to save me!"
+
+"For Rosa's sake!  When you were carried off, she came to me, and I
+promised if it were possible to bring you back with me."
+
+"Then you do not believe the story you heard to-day, about--about--"
+
+"My father?  Yes, I believe it; but that is no reason why I should be
+unkind to Rosa.  Poor girl! 'twill be hard enough for her to lose you."
+
+"Is there no way of escape?"
+
+I shook my head.  "An armed sentry stands outside; a hundred soldiers
+are in the ravine; the path is closely watched.  I would help you if it
+were possible."
+
+"It will be dark to-night."
+
+"That would help us little.  Even if you escaped from the hut, you
+would be challenged at every dozen yards.  No, I can see no way out."
+
+I think that at this time he began to fully realize the danger he was
+in.  He had a hunted look in his eyes, and again the perspiration stood
+on his forehead.  Fear was fast killing shame, and he seemed to care
+nothing that I was the son of the man whom he had tried to murder.
+
+"Juan," said he, "can't you make an excuse to visit me after dark?"
+
+"I should think so," I replied.
+
+"And will you cut these cords?"
+
+"If you think it will help you at all."
+
+"Leave that to me," said he, speaking almost hopefully.  "By St.
+Philip, I shall escape the ruffian yet!"
+
+What his plan was he did not tell me, but it seemed to please him
+greatly.  He even laughed when I again mentioned Rosa, and said he
+would carry his message himself.  And with hope there came back to him
+something of the old cunning and smoothness of speech for which he was
+so noted.
+
+"I am sorry you were misled by that preposterous tale," said he softly.
+"Pardo Lurena is a villain, but we will unmask him.  Of course, there
+was a little truth in his story, but so twisted and distorted that it
+could not be recognized.  Your father will understand, however, and
+even you will come to see that I am not greatly to blame.  A little
+thoughtlessness, Juan, and a desire to help a friend--no more; but that
+can wait.  You will be sure to come, Juan; you will not fail me?"
+
+"I will do my very best, Don Felipe, for your daughter's sake."
+
+Wishing him farewell, I returned to the chief's hut.  He was not there,
+so I lay down to think out the situation; but my head was in a hopeless
+muddle.  I went into the ravine again, and, watching the soldiers,
+wondered how the unhappy prisoner hoped to escape them.
+
+As it chanced, his plan was doomed to disappointment.  Toward the end
+of the afternoon I stood chatting with Sorillo and some of his
+officers, when a messenger rode up the ravine.  His horse had travelled
+far and fast, while he looked worn out with fatigue.
+
+Springing to the ground, he saluted, while the chief cried, "What news,
+Sanchez? it should be worth hearing!"
+
+"I think it is," replied the man, with a significant smile.  "General
+Canterac is marching on Lima at the head of a Spanish army."
+
+"How many men has he?"
+
+"Nine thousand, perhaps ten--horse, foot, and guns.  The advance-guard
+is not far off."
+
+"Thanks, Sanchez.--Let the men assemble, Barros: a dozen to stay here,
+the rest to follow me.  Has Cerdena sent word to Lima?  Good.  He knows
+his business.--Juan, you will just have time to ride clear, and not
+much to spare.  No doubt Canterac has sent some of his troops by the
+near cut."
+
+All was bustle and activity in the ravine.  Officers issued commands,
+troopers saddled their horses, muskets were seen to, an extra supply of
+ammunition was served out, and in a very short time everybody save the
+few men left to guard the ravine was ready to march.
+
+"What can your handful of men do against Canterac's army?" I asked
+Sorillo as we rode away.
+
+"Not much beyond cutting off a few stragglers," he replied, smiling;
+"but we shall obtain information of which our leaders in Lima seem to
+stand badly in need."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXII.
+
+THE "SILVER KEY" AGAIN.
+
+Since these events happened I have asked myself many times whether I
+did right or wrong, and even now I scarcely know how to decide.  Those
+who blamed me said I was Sorillo's guest, and should not have abused
+his confidence.  Others urged that I was bound, if possible, to prevent
+him putting a man to death unlawfully.  All, however, agreed that none
+but a madman would have embarked on so preposterous an enterprise.
+
+The idea occurred to me suddenly.  The guerillas, split up into groups,
+had gone, some this way, some that, to watch the movements of the
+Royalist troops.  Sorillo had kept me company till we cleared the pass,
+when he, too, with a word of farewell, rode away.  It was now dusk,
+and, as the chief had truly said, there was no time to waste; yet I did
+not move.  Right in my path, with outstretched arms and pitiful,
+beseeching face, stood Rosa Montilla.  I knew it was but the outcome of
+a fevered brain; yet the vision seemed intensely real.
+
+The girl's eyes looked at me reproachfully, her lips moved as if in
+speech.  I fancied I could hear again her parting cry, "O Juan, save
+him!"
+
+I asked myself impatiently what more could be done.  I had tried my
+best and failed, and there was an end of it.  Besides, the words of the
+chief rang in my ears in ominous warning: Don Felipe could not be
+trusted!  To set him free was like giving liberty to a venomous snake;
+his hatred would now be all the more bitter in that he had struck and
+failed.
+
+Why should I add to my father's danger?  The fellow had tried to slay
+him once; the next time he would make no mistake.  I would make no
+further effort to help such a traitor; I would ride on.  But again the
+beseeching face of the girl stopped me, and again I was moved to think
+how I could aid the miserable prisoner.  Like a flash of lightning I
+thought of the silver key.  _That_ would unlock his prison door.
+Although I fully believed in Don Felipe's guilt, I remembered he made
+no effort to defend himself.  He would not admit Sorillo's right to try
+him.  Before a lawful judge he might be able to vindicate his actions
+in some way; at least he should have the chance to do so.  Thus
+thinking, I turned back in the direction of the ravine.
+
+Half of the sentries, I knew, had been withdrawn to ride with their
+chief, but the number on guard mattered little; the silver key was an
+all-powerful talisman.  I rode slowly, not wishing to tire the horses,
+to whose speed and strength we might later be indebted for our lives.
+I thought, too, it would serve my purpose better to reach the ravine in
+the dead of night, when the men would be sleepy and less likely to ask
+inconvenient questions.
+
+I was stopped at the entrance to the pass, but not for long.  The
+Indians who had seen me ride out with their chief had no suspicion of
+my object.
+
+"Where is the chief?" asked the officer.  "Have the Royalists got clear
+of the mountains?"
+
+"No; they are still in the defiles.  But I am in a hurry; I have come
+for the Spanish prisoner Montilla."
+
+Fortunately this officer had not attended the trial of Don Felipe, and
+Sorillo was not the man to give reasons for his orders.  My main
+difficulty would lie with the sentry at the door of the hut, but I did
+not think he would disobey the authority of the Silver Key.
+
+In any case, boldness was my best policy; so I clattered up the ravine,
+stopping hardly a yard from the astonished sentry.
+
+"Quick, man!" I cried, springing to the ground; "are you asleep?  Open
+the door.  I have come back for the prisoner.  Is he still bound?
+Good.  Can you tie him to this horse so that he cannot escape?"
+
+"Yes, senor, if the chief wishes it.  But, pardon me, senor, I have no
+orders."
+
+"Orders!" cried I angrily; "what would you?  I have but just left the
+chief; and is not this" (producing the silver key) "sufficient
+authority?  Am I to tell the chief that he must come himself for the
+prisoner?"
+
+"No, no, senor; but I am only a simple soldier.  I must not open the
+door unless my officer bids me."
+
+"He is below," I said; "we cannot pass without his permission.  And I
+must hurry, or it will be too late.  Quick, drag the fellow out and
+bind him firmly on the horse; then come with me."
+
+The sentry had no inkling of the truth, and, never dreaming that his
+officer could be deceived, opened the door.  Then the prisoner, whether
+from fear or from cunning I could not tell, acted in such a manner that
+no one would think I was helping him to escape.
+
+He refused to stir an inch from his bench, and kicked vigorously when
+the sentry tried to seize him.  Then he yelled so loudly that the
+officer came running up in alarm.
+
+"The bird has no wish to leave his cosy nest," laughed he.--"Give me
+the rope, Pedro, and get a gag; the chief won't want to hear that
+music.--Now, senor, if you'll bear a hand we'll hoist him up.--Be
+still, you villain, or you'll get a knock on the head.--Had not one of
+my fellows better go with you to guard this wild beast, senor?"
+
+Now, from the officer's point of view this was a very sensible
+proposal, and one which I dared not oppose for fear of exciting
+suspicion.
+
+So I answered carelessly, "A good thought, and I am obliged to you;
+though," with a laugh, "the prisoner won't be able to do much mischief
+when you have finished with him."
+
+"No, indeed; he'll be pretty clever if he can get these knots undone,"
+replied the officer complacently.--"Now, the gag, Pedro.  Quick, or
+he'll spoil his voice in the night air.--There, my pretty bird! you
+shall sing later on."
+
+All this occupied time, and I was in dread lest dawn should break
+before we left the ravine.  Then we had to wait till Pedro had saddled
+his horse; and I watched the sky anxiously.  At last we were ready, and
+bidding Pedro ride in front, I took leave of the unsuspecting officer.
+
+"A safe journey," he cried.  "I should like to know what Sorillo means
+to do with the fellow."
+
+"You'll hear all about it when the troops return," said I, laughing and
+hurrying after Pedro.
+
+Thus far the venture, with one exception, had succeeded admirably.  The
+prisoner was out of his cage, and would soon be clear of the pass.
+Then I should only have Pedro to deal with.  His company was a
+nuisance, but it must be borne with for the present; later I should
+have to find means to get rid of him.
+
+We rode slowly down the narrow path, Pedro in front, Don Felipe and I
+abreast.  The poor fellow was in a hapless plight.  The gag hurt his
+mouth, and the cords cut into his flesh.  Had we been alone, I should,
+of course, have done something to ease his pain; but as long as Pedro
+was there, this was out of the question.
+
+"Anyhow, it's better than being shot," I thought; "and really the
+wretch deserves it all."
+
+We passed the sentries without trouble; but at the bottom of the pass
+my difficulties began again.
+
+"I suppose the chief has gone to San Mateo, senor?" said Pedro
+questioningly.  "That is the best place to watch from."
+
+This was an awkward question, as I had intended making a straight dash
+for Lima; but it would not do to arouse the man's suspicions.  We were
+too close to the mountains to run any unnecessary risks, and if Pedro
+showed fight there, our chance of escape was gone.
+
+So I answered, "Yes," and rode along, wondering what would come of it.
+Every step led us into greater danger.  We might run into the arms of
+the guerillas, in which event Don Felipe's fate was certain; or be
+stopped by the Royalists, when I should be made prisoner.
+
+Day was now breaking, and with the strengthening light I began to see
+our position more clearly.  It was not promising.  We were farther from
+Lima than we had been when in the ravine, and were making straight for
+the mountains again.  Another half-hour's riding would cut us off from
+escape completely.  What could be done?  There was no time to lose, and
+I must hit on a plan at once.  The simplest and perhaps the only one
+likely to be successful I set aside without a moment's hesitation.  Not
+for a dozen men's lives, my own included, would I harm the unsuspecting
+man whom chance had thrown into my power.  I might, however, frighten
+him into obedience.  As far as I could see, it was that or nothing, and
+the attempt must be made at once.
+
+So, with beating heart and greatly doubting what would be the issue, I
+whipped out my pistol, and, levelling it at him, said quietly, "Move
+your hand to your musket, and you are a dead man! do as I bid you, and
+no harm will befall you.  Leave your gun, get down from the saddle, and
+hold your hands above your head."
+
+In the circumstances it was a risky experiment, because if the man
+should guess the truth I was entirely at his mercy.  For him there was
+no more danger than if my pistol were a piece of wood.
+
+"But, senor--" he began, staring at me in surprise.
+
+"Get down!" I repeated sternly.  "It is my order.  Don't waste time, or
+I shall be obliged to fire."
+
+Pedro was a brave man; indeed, all the Indians in Sorillo's band held
+their lives cheap.  He did not exactly understand what was happening,
+yet he seemed to think that all was not right.
+
+"The chief!" he exclaimed.  "Does he--"
+
+"Get down!" I cried once more, brandishing my weapon.
+
+With a thundering shout of "The Silver Key!  Help for the Silver Key!"
+he clubbed his musket and dashed straight at me, regardless of the
+levelled pistol.
+
+One moment's pressure on the trigger and he would have dropped to the
+ground helpless, but I refrained; instead, I pulled the rein, and my
+horse swerved sharply, though not in time.  The musket descended with a
+thud; the pistol slipped from my nerveless fingers; I seemed to be
+plunging down, down beneath a sea of angry waters.
+
+How long I lay thus, or what happened during that time, I do not know;
+but I awoke to find myself beside a roaring fire, and to hear the hum
+of many voices.  A soldier, hearing me move, came and looked into my
+face.
+
+"Where am I?" I asked anxiously.
+
+"Not far from Lima," said he.  "A few hours since you weren't far from
+the next world.  How did you get that broken head?"
+
+I tried hard to remember, but could not; the past was a total blank.
+
+"Well, well, never mind," exclaimed the man kindly.  "Try to sleep; you
+will be better in the morning."
+
+With the coming of dawn I saw that I was in the midst of a large camp.
+Thousands of soldiers wrapped in their ponchos lay motionless before
+smouldering fires.  Presently there was a blowing of bugles, and the
+still figures stirred to life.  Officers rode hither and thither
+issuing orders, the men ate their scanty rations, the cavalry groomed
+and fed their horses--there were all the sights and sounds connected
+with an army about to march.
+
+Then the infantry formed in battalions, the horsemen mounted, bugles
+sounded in numerous places; there was a cracking of whips, the creaking
+of wheels, and all began to move slowly forward.  Soon but a few men
+remained, and it seemed that I had been forgotten.
+
+At length a man came to me.  He was dressed in uniform, but his words
+and actions proved him to be a surgeon.
+
+"Feel better?" he asked.  "Can you eat something?  I can only give you
+army food; but that will fill up the hollows.  Now let me look at the
+damage.  Faith, I compliment you on having a thick skull.  A thinner
+one would have cracked like an egg-shell.  Don't try to talk till
+you've had something to eat."
+
+"Just one question," I said faintly.  "Who are the soldiers just moved
+out?"
+
+"Why, General Canterac's troops.  I see you belong to the other side.
+But don't worry; we shan't hurt you."
+
+"Then I am a prisoner?"
+
+"That's always the way--one question leads to a dozen, Yes, I suppose
+you are a prisoner; but that's nothing very terrible," and he hurried
+off to procure food and drink for me.
+
+Later in the day he came to have another talk, and I learned something
+of what had happened.
+
+"We crossed the mountains almost without a check," he began.  "The
+Indians did us some damage; but they were only a handful, and we saw
+none of your fellows."
+
+"But how came I to be here?"
+
+"Ah! that's a queer story.  A party of scouts screening our left flank
+had just reached the base of the mountains, when they heard a fellow
+yelling at the top of his voice.  By the time they got in sight, the
+man had evidently knocked you down, and was off at a mad gallop."
+
+"Alone?" I asked.
+
+"No; that's the strange part of it.  He was leading a spare horse which
+carried something on its back.  Our men could not get a good view, but
+it looked like a full sack, or a big bundle of some sort.  They
+followed rapidly, and were wearing the runaway down when the Indians
+appeared in force on the hills.  Of course that stopped the pursuit,
+and after picking you up, they came on with the army."
+
+My memory returned now, and I understood what had happened.  Pedro had
+escaped, and carried Don Felipe with him to the Indians of the Silver
+Key.
+
+"Poor Rosa!" I sighed; "it is all over now.  She will never see her
+father again.  Sorillo will take care that he doesn't escape a second
+time."
+
+My thoughts dwelt so much on this that I took little interest in the
+rest of the doctor's conversation.  He was very jubilant, though, I
+remember, about his party's success, telling me that in a short time
+General Canterac would be master of Callao, and that the Patriots had
+nowhere the slightest chance of victory.
+
+"What will be done with me?" I asked.
+
+"I shall send you with our sick to the hospital at Jauja.  The air
+there is bracing, and will help you to recover more quickly."
+
+"Thank you," I said, though really caring very little at that time
+where I was sent.
+
+Next day I was placed with several Spanish soldiers in an open wagon,
+one of a number of vehicles guarded by an escort of troopers.  My
+friendly surgeon had gone to Lima; but I must say the Spaniards behaved
+very well, making no difference between me and their own people.
+
+As to the journey across the mountains, I remember little of it.  The
+worthy Pedro had made such good use of his musket that my head was
+racked with pain, and I could think of nothing.  Most of the sick
+soldiers were also in grievous plight, and it was a relief to us all
+when, after several days' travelling, the procession finally halted in
+Jauja.
+
+Here we were lifted from the carts and carried to a long whitewashed
+building filled with beds.  They were made on the floor, and many of
+them were already occupied.  Accommodation was found for most of us,
+but several had to wait until some of the beds became vacant.
+
+Two or three doctors examined the fresh patients, and one forced me to
+swallow a dose of medicine.  Why, I could not think, unless he wanted
+me to know what really vile stuff he was capable of concocting.
+
+I shall pass quickly over this portion of my story.  For weeks I lay in
+that wretched room, where dozens of men struggled night and day against
+death.  Some snatched a victory in this terrible fight, but now and
+again I noticed a file of soldiers reverently carrying a silent figure
+from one of the low beds.
+
+By the end of September I was strong enough to get up, and the doctors
+pronouncing me out of danger, I was taken to another building.  This
+was used as a prison for captured officers of the Patriot forces, and
+the very first person to greet me as I stepped inside the room was the
+lively Alzura.
+
+"Juan Crawford," cried he, "by all that's wonderful!  From the ballroom
+to the prison-house!  There's a splendid subject for the moralist.
+Where have you been, Juan? your people think you are dead.  Miller is
+frantic; all your friends in Lima are in despair."
+
+"Do you know anything of Don Felipe Montilla?" I asked.
+
+"Montilla?  No; there is a mystery about him too.  It is given out that
+he was abducted by brigands, but some people whisper another story."
+
+"What?"
+
+"That he fled to the Royalists, my boy, as I prophesied he would."
+
+"Then you were a false prophet."
+
+"Then I ask the worthy Don's pardon for suspecting him without cause.
+But how did you get here?"
+
+"I was brought in a wagon."
+
+"Lucky dog!  Always lucky, Juan.  I had to walk," and he showed me his
+feet, naked, and scored with cuts.
+
+After sympathizing with him, I asked him how events were shaping.
+
+"Canterac did not capture Callao, as he hoped, and is now back in the
+highlands.  Many things have happened, however; let me be your
+chronicle.  Where shall I start?"
+
+"From the day that Canterac swooped down on Lima."
+
+"That was nothing.  He sat down in the capital; we hugged the guns at
+Callao and looked at him.  When he got tired he took himself off, and
+we returned to our quarters."
+
+"Nothing very exciting in that."
+
+"You are right, my boy.  Your judgment is marvellous.  But we had a day
+of excitement shortly before I came on this trip.  You should have been
+there.  Lima went stark mad!  The guns at Callao thundered for hours;
+the capital was decked with flags; the people cheered till they were
+hoarse; there was a very delirium of joy.  It was the greeting of Peru
+to her saviour--her second saviour, that is."
+
+"Why can't you speak plainly?  Do you mean Bolivar has come?"
+
+"Your second question, Juan, shows there was little need for the first.
+Yes, Bolivar, the protector or emperor, or whatever name the new master
+of Peru cares to be known by.  The hero of South America has arrived;
+let the Spaniards tremble!"
+
+"For any sake give your tongue a rest.  What has Santa Cruz done?"
+
+"What has Santa Cruz done?  A very great deal, my boy, I assure you.
+He has lost his whole army--men and horses, guns and ammunition, wagons
+and stores.  What do you think of that, young man?  You will be
+compelled to swallow Bolivar after all."
+
+"Let us change the subject.  Tell me about yourself."
+
+"Ah," said he, "that is indeed a great subject!  Your discernment is
+worthy of praise.  I can talk on that topic for hours without tiring.
+Where shall I begin?"
+
+"Where is the jailer?"
+
+"Why?"
+
+"That I may ask him to send me back to the hospital."
+
+"Juan, you are a fraud!  But hark! that is the bell calling us to
+dinner.  Blessed sound!  Come with me to the banquet."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIII.
+
+AN OPEN-AIR PRISON.
+
+There were fifteen or sixteen Patriot officers of all ranks in the
+prison, and I found most of them jolly fellows.  We lived all together
+in two large rooms, one of which was used as a bedroom.  In addition,
+we were allowed at certain hours to walk up and down a long corridor,
+so that we got a fair amount of exercise.
+
+Alzura and a few of the other youngsters spent much time in planning
+methods of escape, and they were glad of any suggestions I could offer.
+As a rule, our arrangements ended in talk.  The viceroy put his trust
+rather in keen-eyed sentries than in locks, bolts, and strong walls.
+An armed man stood on either side of the door leading to the corridor,
+which was itself guarded by a chain of soldiers.  At the yard-door,
+through which we were not permitted to pass, an officer with several
+men always stood on duty.
+
+Three or four times every week, in the middle of the night, an
+inspecting officer would summon us to get up and answer our names.
+This was a great nuisance, as it disturbed our sleep, but fortunately
+it did not take long.  We slept on the floor fully dressed and wrapped
+in our ponchos, so there was no delay in making our toilets.
+
+We were given sufficient food--of a sort; but we had no amusements of
+any kind, and absolutely nothing to do.  Our sole occupation was
+walking round and round the room like caged bears, and chatting about
+the war.
+
+Most of us voted Alzura a bore in this respect, but I think on the
+whole he did us good.  His was the first voice heard in the morning,
+and the last at night.  He was equally ready to talk with ensign or
+general, and on any subject under the sun.  He would jest or laugh, or,
+I really believe, weep with you at a moment's notice.  He would
+instruct the artillery officer in the management of guns, advise the
+cavalryman how to ride, and show the general the best way to order a
+battle.  Alzura was a genius, and most of us were only now beginning to
+find it out.
+
+When the talk turned to the best way of escaping, he was delightful.
+Never was there a fellow with such ingenious schemes; only, as it
+happened, they were not quite suitable to our circumstances.  Had we
+been in an underground cell, with massive walls and an iron door, he
+would have had us out in less than no time.  When I mentioned casually
+that we were not so placed, he would reply good-humouredly, "No, dear
+boy, but some day you may be, and then my instructions will come in
+handy.  But, as you say, the position at present is slightly different.
+First, we have to pass the sentry on this side of the door.  I suppose
+we are all agreed on that point?  Well, then, having got rid of him--"
+
+"But we haven't got rid of him!"
+
+"No; quite true.  I can see him from here, and a very surly fellow he
+looks.  I wonder the officer doesn't give us some one with a more
+amiable face.  However, that's outside the argument.  Now, supposing we
+had disposed of this fellow, the question is, what to do next."
+
+"But we haven't disposed of him!"
+
+"Just so; but we ought to be prepared in case he is withdrawn, or
+anything of that sort, you know.  However, if you won't follow my
+advice, it's no use giving it.  It's simply folly to go on talking."
+
+"I felt convinced you would say something sensible before you had
+finished," laughed one of the youngsters gaily.
+
+Alzura laughed too, and gave the fellow a playful tap on the head, for
+he loved a joke whoever chanced to be the victim.
+
+That same evening he told us of a fresh plan--for Alzura was as full of
+plans as an egg is of meat--and before he came to the end, we were
+laughing so uproariously that the sentry ordered us to make less noise.
+
+"I daresay you fellows have wasted the day as usual," he began; "that
+is the worst of having some one to do your thinking for you.  I really
+wish you wouldn't depend so much on me."
+
+"That's the penalty of being so clever, my boy.  The world always
+overworks its greatest men.  It's quite reasonable, after all."
+
+"But it's hard on me, nevertheless," observed Alzura; "though I suppose
+one ought not to complain of being a genius.  Well, I've been working
+my brains all day--"
+
+"Your what?"
+
+"Oh, shut up, and let me speak!  I've hit on a lovely plan: it will
+work like a machine; it can't possibly fail.  We have been on the wrong
+tack, trying to meet force with force.  What we want is craft.  Do you
+follow me, boys?"
+
+"Yes, yes; go on!  Let's hear the lovely plan."
+
+"When you do hear it, you will wonder why no one thought of it before.
+It is simple beyond belief, almost."
+
+"A true mark of genius, Alzura.  But we're waiting to hear this
+infallible plan."
+
+"Well, look here.  Just study that sentry's face a minute.  Who is he
+like?  Don't know?  Why, isn't he just like our friend Crawford?"
+
+The little group laughed with delight, while I said reproachfully, "Oh,
+come, Alzura!"
+
+"Not so much the face, dear boy," said he, "but the figure.  He's just
+your height and build; you will admit that.  And his clothes will fit
+you, Juan.  Now, do you see?"
+
+I confessed to being still in a fog, so he continued his explanations.
+
+"This is the idea," said he.  "You and Barriero--Barriero is
+wonderfully strong--stroll down to him presently.  Pretend you want to
+ask him a question.  That will put him off his guard.  What happens?
+You spring on him suddenly, clap a rag in his mouth, and with our help
+hold him so that he cannot struggle.  Then you exchange clothes and
+stand on guard.  When the relief comes you march away.  Understand?"
+
+"Nothing could be simpler," I murmured, while we were all nearly
+choking with suppressed laughter.
+
+"Grand, isn't it?" said he.  "I knew you would be struck."--I
+was.--"Then we'll serve the next fellow the same way, and the next, and
+so on till we are all out.  After that we'll seize the viceroy--"
+
+But by this time we were convulsed with laughter, and the sentry, in no
+very gentle tones, advised us to be quiet.
+
+"It's a great scheme, Alzura," I said presently, "a wonderful scheme,
+but it can't be carried out.  Suppose the trick was discovered after my
+escape, all you fellows would be punished sharply, and I shouldn't like
+that."
+
+"No," said he, in a disappointed tone; "I thought your scruples might
+stand in the way."
+
+Alzura's plan was still fresh in our minds when the Royalists showed us
+how to pass the sentry.  One morning, directly after breakfast, an
+officer entered the room with a number of soldiers, and we were ordered
+to stand in line.  Producing a paper, he read a list of the names, and
+each man, as he answered, was told to step forward.  Then we were
+marshalled in twos, the left arm of one man being tied to the right of
+the other.  My companion was Alzura, and very disgusted he looked at
+the treatment.
+
+"What are they going to do with us?" he asked.
+
+"I don't know.  Perhaps they heard we wanted to get away, and are
+obliging us."
+
+"Silence!" roared a Royalist sergeant; "no talking!"  And Alzura
+groaned.  How was he to live if he had to keep his tongue still?
+
+A long strip of tough hide was now brought, and was knotted at
+intervals to the fastenings between each pair of prisoners.  It formed
+a sort of gigantic single rein, and I suggested in a whisper to Alzura
+that we were to be harnessed to the viceroy's chariot.
+
+"'Twill save horseflesh, and we shall be doing something for our
+living," I added.
+
+Some of the soldiers now went to the front of us, some to the rear; the
+door was flung wide open.  "March!" cried the officer, and into the
+corridor we marched, through the yard, and so into the open road.
+
+"Out at last," I remarked to Alzura.  "The Royalists have hit on an
+even simpler plan than yours."
+
+"Simple, but not clever.  There is no art in this kind of thing."
+
+"Oh, isn't there?" I laughed, giving the thongs a tug.  "The
+arrangement strikes me as unusually artistic."
+
+"You are trying to be witty, dear boy.  Don't.  The Royalists will be
+revenged on us, and who shall blame them?  Hullo, they aren't taking us
+into the town!"
+
+"No; we're going for a pleasure trip somewhere, I expect.  How kind of
+them to think we need a change!--I say, Barriero, don't you think this
+is an improvement on Alzura's plan?"
+
+Barriero, who was one of the couple in front of us, laughed and said,
+"Well, I can't say yet.  I'll tell you when I know more about it."
+
+At the gate of the prison our escort had been strengthened by a number
+of horsemen, who now rode on either side of us, so that any hope of
+escaping was quite extinguished.  We knew nothing as to our
+destination, which I think the officer in charge did not make known
+even to his subordinates.  A few people stood at the outskirts of the
+town to watch us pass, but during the remainder of the day we saw no
+one except our guards.
+
+The march was terribly painful and fatiguing, though I have no wish to
+suggest that we were ill-treated.  The fact was, the long confinement
+we had undergone made us keenly alive to the trials of a wearisome
+journey such as this.  About midday a halt was called, our fastenings
+were loosened, while we were allowed to sit down and eat a ration of
+meat which was served out to each of us.  Some of the soldiers rested;
+others stood on guard, with orders to shoot any man who made the
+slightest effort to escape.
+
+"They needn't fear my running far," said Alzura ruefully, showing me
+his bleeding feet.
+
+"Caramba!" cried a soldier sitting near, "that won't do, senor.  The
+rocks are sharp in this part of the country.  Wait; I have some green
+hides in my knapsack.  I'll make you some sandals if the colonel halts
+for an hour."
+
+"I shall be very grateful for your kindness," said Alzura; "the pain in
+my feet has kept me from admiring the scenery, and there are some grand
+views about here."
+
+"I've seen finer in Lima," muttered the man, who was already busy at
+his self-imposed task.
+
+"Give me some stuff," said one of his comrades; "I'll make one sandal
+while you make the other.  The youngster will have his feet cut to the
+bone.  He ought to be at school instead of marching about the country."
+
+"I'm not eager to march," laughed Alzura; "I'll stay behind willingly."
+
+"Ugh!" exclaimed the first soldier, "you would soon be dead in this
+wilderness.  We have seen some sights in this district--haven't we,
+Alonzo?"
+
+"That we have," replied his companion, "and I don't want to see any
+more of them."
+
+The two worthy fellows worked so industriously that in less than half
+an hour the sandals were completed, the holes pierced, and the laces
+put in, all ready for use.
+
+"I don't know how to thank you," said Alzura earnestly, "but if we
+manage to live through this war, I may be able to pay you back.  At
+present you must take the will for the deed."
+
+"It's all right, senor; we could not see you suffer like that.  And our
+officer will say we did right.  Just in time, too!  There's the summons
+to assemble."
+
+At the evening halt we were again set free a short time, being
+refastened for the night.  After travelling for four days in this way,
+we saw from the top of a high hill the waters of a magnificent lake,
+studded with islets.  It seemed quite near; but several hours passed
+before we reached its border--a broad morass, through which ran devious
+tracks.
+
+Our leader now stopped, and we saw a number of soldiers carefully
+crossing one of the tracks from the lake.  As soon as they reached us
+we were unbound and placed in single file, while the chief of the
+escort said, "The journey is ended.  Yonder is your home while the war
+lasts.  It is not a lively place, but you will be out of mischief.
+Follow your guides, and walk carefully; you will not enjoy sinking in
+the quagmires."
+
+We appreciated his advice more when, about half-way across, a stout
+middle-aged major, missing his footing, plunged into the liquid mud.
+In an instant he was immersed to the chin, and but for Barriero, who
+grasped his head, would have disappeared altogether.  As it was, he
+presented a miserable appearance, and showed us how terrible was the
+danger.
+
+Several boats were moored at the edge of the lake, and an officer
+directed us to get in, one by one.  Barriero, Alzura, and I entered the
+same boat; which was fortunate, as the prisoners were divided into
+three groups and taken to different islets.
+
+There were six of us in our group, and twelve soldiers under the
+command of a non-commissioned officer.  The guard occupied comfortable
+quarters, while three mud huts were reserved for us.  The islet was
+quite bare of trees, and was so small that Alzura pretended he could
+not stretch his legs comfortably for fear of slipping into the water.
+
+The men who had rowed us over did not land, but took the boats to
+another islet, much larger than ours, which we guessed to be the
+headquarters of this novel prison.
+
+"The governor of this place is a clever warder," remarked Barriero;
+"there's no getting away from here."
+
+"Why not?" I asked.
+
+"The risk is too great.  Just think for a minute.  First one would have
+to swim to the shore, and then cross the morass in the dark, as it
+would not be possible to escape in the daytime.  It's really waste of
+time to mount a guard over us."
+
+"We must set our wits to work," observed Alzura gravely.
+
+"No, no," I cried; "Barriero's is the only way, and a very poor one it
+is.  The swim is a trifle, but to cross the morass--"
+
+"Why not build a bridge?" suggested Alzura.
+
+"And use our bodies as part of the foundations," said Barriero,
+laughing.  "If you make any more idiotic remarks, Alzura, I'll throw
+you into the lake."
+
+"All right," said he.  "You'll be sorry when Crawford and I escape and
+leave you behind."
+
+"I've a long time to wait," replied Barriero, "so I'll pass some of it
+in sleep."
+
+Alzura and I shared one of the huts between us.  There was no
+furniture; the floor was of mud, and so were the walls, while the roof
+was thatched with some dried vegetable matter.  The place was not
+exactly a palace, but it sheltered us, and for that we were thankful.
+
+The sergeant in charge of the islet was a good-humoured fellow.
+Feeling sure that we could not escape, he treated us quite genially,
+though maintaining discipline at the same time.  He often talked of the
+war, giving us news now and again of events which never happened.
+
+On the third morning after our arrival, we saw several boats leave the
+main island and visit the various islets on which prisoners were kept.
+
+"That's the governor making a tour of his kingdom," the sergeant
+explained.  "He is bringing us a week's provisions, and will no doubt
+have a peep at his new subjects."
+
+The governor was a Spanish officer, quite old, but stiff and erect in
+spite of his many years.  He ordered us to draw up in line, called our
+names from the list, hoped we should be comfortable, ordered the
+sergeant to put in irons any man who disobeyed him, wished us all
+good-morning in courtly old-world style, stepped into his boat, and was
+rowed away.
+
+"Not a word about attempting to escape!" remarked Barriero.
+
+The sergeant heard the remark, and said with a laugh, "It is needless,
+senor.  No one ever got away from here.  Some have tried, and they are
+at the bottom of the morass.  Why, even I would not venture to cross
+that terrible place, except in broad daylight with a trusty guide.  If
+you think of trying, senor, let me advise you to stay where you are.
+Here you can be comfortable; there--ugh!" and the man shuddered at the
+very thought of it.
+
+"Your advice is good, sergeant, and I intend to profit by it," cried
+Barriero.  "We saw one man slip when we were crossing, and I shan't
+forget his face in a hurry.  Caramba! it makes me shiver yet."
+
+"Besides," continued the sergeant, "suppose that by some miracle you
+cross the marsh, what would happen then?  You would die of hunger.  But
+I will grant you a further miracle.  You shall cross the mountains and
+join your friends.  Is the danger over?  It is but just beginning.  You
+will be killed in battle.  But your luck clings to you, and you still
+survive.  Well, then, the war comes to an end; you are hunted down,
+captured with arms on you, and shot as rebels."
+
+"What a charming picture, sergeant!" laughed Alzura.  "It seems to me
+we are better off where we are."
+
+"I am glad for your own sake that you think so," said the officer
+gravely.  "I grow attached to my birds with their clipped wings, and
+only desire their welfare.  There was a young fellow here once, a
+pretty boy, senor, like yourself"--Alzura bowed gracefully--"and I had
+grown to love him.  But he got tired of the place and the company, I
+suppose, and one night he slipped into the water.  I fired my musket,
+and a boat which is always kept ready started in pursuit.  He reached
+the morass first, and found a track.  My men followed cautiously.  They
+could not see him, but presently they knew there was no need to go
+further."
+
+"How?" asked Alzura curiously.
+
+"The shriek of the boy as he went to his death told them what had
+happened.  Ah, it was not the first time some of them had heard such a
+wail!"
+
+"Sergeant," said Alzura, "you tell such lively stories that I wonder at
+any one becoming tired of your society!"
+
+"You are pleased to be merry," replied the man, "and I, too, can be the
+same, only not when speaking of the morass.  Come, let us forget it for
+a while.  Although you are my prisoners, you will not find me a harsh
+jailer."
+
+This was quite true, but not all his kindness could make up to us for
+loss of liberty.  Barriero and the other three prisoners seemed quite
+resigned to their fate, but Alzura was always hankering after the
+delights of Lima and home, while I, too, longed very much to see my
+parents and friends.  So we often sat for hours watching the margin of
+the lake, envying the men who went ashore.  They carried on their heads
+whatever bundles they had, and we carefully noted the landing-place, as
+well as the track across the morass which they appeared to take.
+
+"It seems easy enough, doesn't it?" Alzura would say; "but in the dark
+it would be different!  Think of the quagmires, Juan!  Caramba! the
+sergeant was right.  We had better give up our dreams, Juan, eh?"
+
+I felt sure that this was wisely spoken, but somehow the next day we
+again went to look at the opposite shore and possible freedom.  That
+horrible morass had a wonderful fascination for us.  We thought of it
+by day and dreamed of it by night; but the weeks slipped away, and
+still we were prisoners on the islet.
+
+The new year came, and in May 1824 we were joined by another captive.
+This was a treat for us, as he brought news from the outside world.  He
+told us there had been many disturbances, that Bolivar was now
+undisputed ruler and leader of the Patriots, but that the end of the
+war seemed as far off as ever.
+
+"If they keep us till the country is at peace," said he, "we shall die
+of old age on this islet."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIV.
+
+A DANGEROUS JOURNEY.
+
+"I think," remarked Alzura, one day toward the end of June, "I'll get
+the sergeant to put me in irons."
+
+"Why?" I asked in surprise.
+
+"Because sitting here and looking at the land is driving me crazy."
+
+"Then don't look at it."
+
+"I can't help it, and that's the truth.  Wouldn't it be grand if we
+could only cross that morass safely!"
+
+"But we can't!"
+
+"No," said he; "but suppose we could?  Suppose there came a night when
+it was just dark enough to hide us, and yet light enough to show us the
+track?  Wouldn't it be a feather in our caps if we could get back
+safely to Miller?"
+
+"It would; but we should lose our nerve in that horrible swamp, even if
+we reached it."
+
+"Very likely; and our lives too.  Let's go back to the hut."
+
+We had often talked like this, but now there seemed more purpose and
+earnestness in my chum's manner.  I looked at him closely as we
+returned to our quarters, and wondered if he had decided to run the
+risk.
+
+"A quarter of a mile isn't a long swim, is it?" he said, after a time.
+
+"Oh no!" I agreed cheerfully.
+
+"And we might easily save sufficient food from our rations to last a
+long while."
+
+"Most likely we shouldn't need it long."
+
+"It would be very useful if we did."
+
+"Look here, Alzura," said I, turning on him suddenly, "let's make an
+end of this business.  What are you driving at?  Are you going to risk
+your life in that morass?"
+
+"I'm very tired of this place," he answered moodily.
+
+"So am I; but that doesn't lessen the danger of the swamp.  Now, let us
+make no mistake.  There is, perhaps, one chance in a hundred.  Is it
+worth risking?  Death in a morass must be rather horrible.  Don't you
+think so?"
+
+"Well, it can't be very pleasant; but you admit we stand a chance of
+getting across."
+
+"One in a hundred, no more."
+
+"Ah, well," said he thoughtfully, "let us sleep on it."
+
+I could not help thinking that my chum must want his freedom badly to
+even suggest such a venture.  Any hot-blooded enterprise, I knew well,
+appealed to him strongly; but this one required cool, dogged patience
+and nerves of iron.  Barriero was a brave fellow too, but he honestly
+admitted he would rather be shot than try to cross the morass in the
+dark.  As for me, I trembled at the thought of taking part in so
+hazardous an enterprise.
+
+However, it seemed to me that Alzura was making up his mind to go.
+Every day he let fall broad hints, and at last stated his intentions
+without reserve.
+
+"Juan," said he one evening, "I'm going.  The war may last a couple of
+years yet.  Are you coming with me?  Don't if you'd rather not risk it."
+
+"Have you counted the cost?"
+
+"Yes.  I know it's a touch-and-go affair; that is why I won't press you
+to join me."
+
+"Two will stand a better chance than one," said I thoughtfully, "and
+you mustn't try it alone.  Shall we ask Barriero to come with us?"
+
+"May as well pass the compliment," answered Alzura, laughing.  "But he
+won't, I'm positive."
+
+And he was right; for Barriero, on being asked, said hotly,--
+
+"You're a pair of idiots, and I don't know which is the bigger."
+
+"It must be neither or both, if we're a pair," chuckled Alzura.
+
+"Why can't you be satisfied?" growled Barriero.  "You've plenty of
+food, no work to do, and are well treated.  And there isn't one chance
+in a thousand of your getting through."
+
+"Crawford said one in a hundred!"
+
+"Well, anyway, you're certain to lose your lives, and I shall be blamed
+for not stopping you.  It's my duty to inform the sergeant, and have
+you chained up."
+
+"You can't," said Alzura--"you can't betray us."
+
+"You're two lunatics--stark, staring lunatics--and I wish you had told
+me nothing of your mad scheme."
+
+"It's awfully risky," said I, "but not so mad as you think.  We shall
+choose our night, and we know just where to land.  Then we shall take
+provisions to last us three or four days."
+
+"You won't need them," interrupted Barriero, in a tone of conviction
+which was far from encouraging.
+
+But now that the affair had really been decided on, the dangers of the
+morass soon lost some of their terrors.  We were able to talk about
+them calmly, and thus grew familiar with them, at least in imagination.
+Every day we set aside a portion of the dried meat and biscuit which
+formed the chief part of our food, until at last we had as much as
+could be carried easily.  It would be stupid to load ourselves with too
+heavy a burden, as Barriero rather unkindly reminded us.
+
+We waited three whole weeks after coming to our decision before
+starting on the venture, and then, one favourable night, slipped down
+to the edge of the islet.  Barriero, who had kept the secret, came to
+wish us good-bye, and the poor old fellow shook like a timid child.
+
+"It is a mad game," said he, "a downright mad game.  I shall never
+forgive myself for allowing you to go.  It isn't too late now to draw
+back.  Do take my advice, and don't risk it.  I shan't sleep a wink all
+night if you go."
+
+"Never mind, my boy," replied Alzura, laughing; "you'll have plenty of
+time afterwards for a nap.--Now, Juan, off with your clothes."
+
+The other prisoners were sound asleep in their huts; so were the
+soldiers, with the exception of the two sentries.  These men were
+supposed to keep a sharp lookout, but nothing had happened for so long
+a time that their duty was mostly a matter of form.  However, Barriero
+kept watch while we each stripped and made a bundle of our food and
+clothes to carry on our heads.
+
+"Good-bye, old man," we said to him when we were quite ready; and he,
+gripping our hands, whispered back,--
+
+"Good luck; but I wish you would not go.  Take care, and come back here
+rather than lose your lives, if you cannot find the track."
+
+We promised to do so, and then took quietly to the water.  The first
+part of the journey gave us no trouble whatever.  We were both good
+swimmers, and quickly arrived at the spot which we had selected as the
+landing-place.  Here we crouched on a patch of firm ground, undid our
+bundles, and proceeded to dress quickly.  A smothered exclamation from
+Alzura made me glance at him.  In his hurry he had whisked his shirt a
+yard or two away, and it had settled in the liquid mud.
+
+"There's an end to that garment!" said he.  "Well, after all, it's no
+great loss; 'twas mostly made of holes.  What have you found, Juan?"
+
+"A stout staff tipped with iron, left here by the soldiers, most
+likely.  What a piece of luck, my boy!  Now we shall be able to test
+the ground."
+
+"Yes, the balance is on our side," said he happily, buttoning his
+tunic.  "Are you ready?  Give me the staff, and I'll go first."
+
+Of course I could not let him do that; so turning it off with a laugh,
+I cried,--
+
+"No, thank you.  I'm not going to trust my life to your hands, or
+rather feet.  Now, follow me closely.  Walk just where I do, and if you
+see me disappearing, pull me back sharp.  We're on the track now, and
+must try to keep on."
+
+"Spoken with the wisdom of a sage!" said Alzura saucily.  "I say, Juan,
+how shall I know when you're moving?"
+
+There was certainly reason for his sarcasm.  As often as not, when I
+raised my foot I brought it down in the same place again, or, according
+to Alzura, even went a step backward.  The night was not particularly
+dark--indeed, we had doubted whether it was dark enough for us to swim
+ashore unobserved--but the marsh was fearfully deceptive.
+
+In places the track was merely a dry hump here and there, for which I
+had to feel with the staff.  Twice, in spite of every precaution, I
+missed my footing, and the second time had sunk to the waist before
+Alzura could pull me out.
+
+"I can't see you very well, Juan," said he, laughing, "but I have an
+idea that you would cut a fine figure in a ballroom just now."
+
+"Especially if it were a fancy-dress affair," I replied in the same
+tone.
+
+We were in no merry humour, mind you; but the weakest joke was better
+than dwelling on the horrors which surrounded us.  Each of us knew
+that, but for Alzura's quickness, I should have disappeared for ever,
+leaving no trace behind me.  Twice before the break of day I had saved
+him from a similar fate.
+
+We left the islet about ten o'clock, and at midnight were still in the
+morass, unable to move.  Alzura had joined me on a piece of firm
+ground, just large enough for us to stand on, and no more.  It was
+darker now, so that we could see nothing clearly, while I failed to
+touch any solid substance, except that behind us, with my pole.
+Alzura's attempts were equally unsuccessful.
+
+"You're a pretty guide!" said he.  "You've got off the track; we had
+better try back.  Give me the staff."
+
+"Be careful; mind how you turn.  Can you feel the ground where we stood
+just now?"
+
+"Yes; here it is," and the next minute he stepped back to feel for the
+proper path, while I stood trembling lest he should slip in and be
+smothered before I could get to his assistance.
+
+"Can you find a place?" I asked.
+
+"Only towards the lake.  It's nothing but marsh to right and left.  I
+think I'll come to you again.  What is it?  Did I hurt you?"
+
+"Oh no, not at all!--only crushed my toes a bit with the pole!  What
+are we going to do now?"
+
+"I suppose it's too early for breakfast?" he began, and then in a
+different tone he added hastily, "Oh, I say, what a joke!  I've dropped
+my bundle of food somewhere.  Perhaps it's just as well; I shall walk
+lighter."
+
+"But you'll want something to eat," I suggested.
+
+"Of course I shall.  How dense you are!  Don't you see how the accident
+will benefit us both?  There are two now instead of one to eat your
+rations, so you will have all the less to carry."
+
+"Oh," said I doubtfully, not quite appreciating the logic.  "Well, we
+don't want breakfast yet, and the question is, what are we to do?  The
+sergeant's bound to discover our escape at breakfast-time, and a
+search-party will be sent ashore immediately."
+
+"It will be light in an hour or two," observed Alzura cheerfully--"at
+least light enough for us to find the track again.  Let us sit down; it
+won't be so tiring, and we can't make ourselves any wetter or dirtier.
+It's a good thing I didn't start on this journey alone; I should be
+with my provisions now."
+
+"It's always pleasanter to have company," said I, shivering, and not
+noticing the absurdity till Alzura laughed.
+
+There was certainly very little pleasure in our position just then.  We
+were wet through, chilled to the marrow, and plastered with mud from
+head to foot.  Our limbs felt horribly cramped, yet we almost feared to
+stretch them, and the enforced delay was fast diminishing our chances
+of escape.  The dawning light might show us the route, but it would
+also set the soldiers on our heels.  Altogether, I was rather inclined
+to envy Barriero, sleeping peacefully in his hut.
+
+As soon as ever it became light enough, Alzura jumped up, saying,
+"Where is the pole?" and grasping it, he began trying to touch bottom.
+He poked long and vigorously in all directions, but without success,
+till it seemed as if our only plan was to return and give ourselves up.
+
+"Yet there must be a way out," said I impatiently.  "The track leads
+here plainly enough, and it wouldn't come to an end just in the middle
+of the morass."
+
+"I shouldn't think so," said Alzura.  "I wonder whether they've missed
+us yet.  How old Barriero will grin on seeing us back again!"
+
+"We aren't back yet," I replied.  "Look at that hump yonder.  It seems
+solid, doesn't it?  Lend me the pole.  Ah, too short!  What d'you
+think, Alzura?"
+
+"It looks all right," said he; "but appearances are often deceptive.
+Besides, we can't reach it."
+
+"We can jump it, perhaps."
+
+"Yes," said he thoughtfully, "we might.  It's a big risk, though.  If
+it isn't firm ground, the one who jumps will go to his death."
+
+"I'll chance it," said L
+
+"No, you won't; it's my venture.  Stand aside, and give me room for a
+take-off.  Remember me to the others if I go down."
+
+"Wait," said I; "there's no need for you to go.  We can put it to the
+test without risking life," and I hastily unslung the packet of
+provisions which hung over my shoulder.
+
+"Bravo, Juan! that is a good dodge.  Mind your aim, though!"
+
+"All right," and raising the bundle, I swung it carefully to and fro,
+trying to gauge the distance.  Then giving it an upward sweep, I let it
+go, and we watched breathlessly as it fell plump on the spot.
+
+"Firm as a rock," cried Alzura.  "Viva! now for the jump, my boy; it's
+easy enough."
+
+"As long as we come down in the proper place.  Stand back," and pulling
+myself together, I took the leap, landing close beside the bundle.
+This I picked up, and, telling Alzura to throw me the pole, proceeded
+to investigate.
+
+"Is it all right?" he cried softly.
+
+"Yes," said I, and stood back while he jumped across.
+
+"Caramba!" said he, "that's a nasty bit well over!" and I noticed that
+his limbs trembled.
+
+"All's well that ends well," I replied.  "Come on, my boy; we've done
+the worst part, and the track's as plain as a pikestaff now.  If we can
+reach the hill we came down months ago, 'twill be an easy matter to
+hide."
+
+"I wonder if the sergeant has discovered anything yet?  According to
+his account, the guards will think us dead."
+
+"So much the better for us; they'll give up the search sooner.  Hurrah!
+the ground's getting firmer at every step.  I believe we're out of the
+morass."
+
+The words were hardly spoken, when, my foot catching in some coarse
+grass, I fell sprawling, face downwards.
+
+"Not quite," observed Alzura, pulling me up, while I tried to get the
+mud from my mouth and eyes.  "It's a lucky thing you didn't try that
+trick before.  Faith, Juan, you do look a picture!  I'd willingly give
+a hundred dollars to be able to pop you down in Lima!"
+
+"Come along, and don't be idiotic, or we shall find ourselves back on
+the islet."
+
+"Yes," said he, still grinning all over his face; "we can't stay here
+laughing all day."
+
+"I'm not laughing," I cried indignantly.
+
+"Aren't you?  Well, you see, old fellow, it's rather difficult to tell
+what you're doing through that black mask.  I shouldn't try to rub it
+off.  Let it cake, and we'll chip it off with a stone."
+
+"This way," said I gruffly, taking no notice of his attempts to be
+funny.  "We'd better make straight for the mountains and hide
+ourselves."
+
+"We've need to," he replied, with a meaning laugh.
+
+We were now in a wide plain, dotted with numerous hillocks, and a good
+deal cut up by streams from the overflow of the lake.  The ground was
+damp, while here and there we plumped straight into a marsh.  By this
+time, however, we were in such a state that nothing mattered, and being
+unwilling to lose time, we took the shortest though not the most
+pleasant route.
+
+We had a good start of the soldiers, who, as it happened, were
+completely thrown off the scent through finding Alzura's bundle.
+Knowing the terrible nature of the morass, they concluded we were both
+dead, and returned to the island with the tidings.
+
+We learned this long afterwards from Barriero, who told us how he had
+mourned our sad fate, and blamed himself repeatedly for having let us
+go.  At the time, however, we expected every moment to hear the patter
+of feet behind us, and raced on till, breathless and panting, we
+reached the base of the mountain.
+
+Here we stopped a few moments to recover breath, and then, climbing
+some distance, proceeded to search for a cavern.
+
+"There ought to be several," said Alzura, "for the mountain has been
+mined.  Didn't you notice the _rodados_ as we came down?"
+
+"Those heaps of rubbish?"
+
+"Yes.  All that refuse has been taken out of the mountain.  Here's a
+heap, and the mouth of the tunnel won't be far away.  Now, keep your
+eyes open."
+
+I did my best; but Alzura found the cavern, and in a short time we were
+both inside.  The place was dark, and smelt dreadfully, the roof almost
+touched our heads, and the passage was very narrow.
+
+"A nice trap!" I remarked.  "If the soldiers catch us here, there's an
+end to our freedom."
+
+"I'm not so sure of that.  The gallery may run a long way back, and
+perhaps communicate with another.  Shall we explore it?"
+
+"Not now; I'm hungry and tired."
+
+"So am I, and wet and cold too.  I wish we had a fire.  Better take
+your things off and wring them; you'll be a bit more comfortable."
+
+I followed his advice, and then we sat down to feast on the dried beef
+and biscuits, which, happily, we had been able to keep in good
+condition.  It was not a brilliant banquet, but we were hungry, and our
+teeth were sharp.
+
+"I think it's a pity I lost my stock," remarked Alzura, lazily enjoying
+the food.  "That bit won't last long."
+
+"You must eat less.  I shall put you on short rations in the morning."
+
+"Tell me that to-morrow; I'm sleepy now."
+
+"Aren't we going to keep watch?"
+
+"I don't think it's worth while.  The soldiers aren't likely to look
+here for us, unless you attract their attention by snoring too loudly,"
+and the rascal chuckled himself off to sleep.
+
+In a few minutes I lay down beside him, and slept soundly till he
+wakened me by beating a tattoo on my ribs, and saying that he wanted
+his supper.  We had, in fact, slept through most of the day, and it was
+too late to think of making a fresh start till the first thing in the
+morning.
+
+However, as soon as day broke we set out with a hazy idea of making our
+way to Lima.  By dint of careful economy, our provisions would last for
+three days, and then we must trust to luck.  We had no notion how the
+war had gone, and I should not have been surprised to hear that the
+Royalists were again masters of the country.
+
+About noon on the third day of our journey we sat down beside a
+pleasant stream in a picturesque ravine.  There was sufficient food
+left for one meal, and Alzura voted for having it at once.
+
+"It's a long time since breakfast," said he, "and this mountain air
+sharpens one's appetite.  Besides, it's good policy to make sure of a
+thing while one has the chance."
+
+"All right," said I, laughing, and opening the bundle, "here you are.
+Don't grumble with me when we have to go to bed without supper."
+
+"We may get a fresh supply before then; who knows?"
+
+I did not think it likely; but all the same I joined him in an attack
+on the provisions, which we devoured to the very last morsel.  Then we
+had another drink of water, and rose to resume our journey.  As if this
+were a signal, the rocks round about suddenly became alive with armed
+men, who yelled some orders which we could not understand.  Then
+clambering over the boulders, they surrounded us, and in a short time
+had bound our arms tightly with strips of hide.  They were
+fierce-looking fellows--Indians, never seen westward of the Andes--and
+apparently unfamiliar with the Spanish language.  I tried to question
+them, but they did not understand, while neither of us could make out a
+word of their patois.  It was clear, however, that they meant to take
+us with them; and as we marched off, Alzura said, with a laugh,--
+
+"What a lucky thing, Juan, that we ate our supper in good time!"
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXV.
+
+BACK TO DUTY.
+
+Since the beginning of the war I had seen a great deal of Indian
+endurance, but nothing to equal that of our new captors.  They marched
+along in a curious fashion at a kind of jog-trot pace, taking short
+steps and carrying their feet close to the ground.  Mile after mile was
+covered without apparent effort, and when at last a halt was called,
+not a man looked the least bit tired.  As for Alzura and me, we were
+exhausted, and lay down just as we were.  The Indians lit a fire,
+roasted some maize, and loosening our bonds, gave us a share of the
+food, a drink of water, and a little coca.  Whether they were friends
+or foes we could not tell, but despite their ferocious looks they did
+us no harm.
+
+While on the march I had resolved to try them with the charm of the
+silver key; but, to my dismay, I found it was no longer round my neck.
+A part of the chain was still there, but it had snapped off, and the
+key was gone, sunk probably in the dreadful morass.  However, turning
+to one of the fellows, I said, first in Spanish, then in the patois
+used by Sorillo's men, "We are officers in the Patriot army, and
+friends of Raymon Sorillo and the Silver Key; who are you?"
+
+He shook his head solemnly, and looked at me with a blank stare.
+
+"Try him with English, Juan," laughed Alzura.  "I wonder where he lives
+when he's at home?  Perhaps he knows Portuguese.  I'll have a shot at
+him."
+
+If Alzura knew Portuguese--which I rather doubted--the Indian was
+ignorant of that language, and was quite unmoved by my comrade's flood
+of oratory.
+
+Perhaps he thought Alzura was singing.  But my companion in adversity
+did not take the suggestion in good part; indeed it seemed to annoy him.
+
+"Never mind," said I cheerfully; "they can't march us about for ever.
+We are bound to meet with civilized beings some time or other."
+
+"But these fellows may belong to the Royalists!  Many of the Indians on
+this side of the mountains do.  Then we shall be taken back to the
+island!"
+
+"We shall have guides across the morass, though; that's one thing to be
+thankful for."
+
+"And be put in irons!  Perhaps you think that's a subject for
+cheerfulness?"
+
+"We shouldn't be able to risk our lives again, at all events."
+
+"Oh, go to sleep," exclaimed Alzura, "if you've nothing more sensible
+than that to say!" and he rolled a little nearer the fire.
+
+The next morning the Indians resumed their journey, and after a weary
+tramp of many miles, encamped on the side of a mountain, where stood
+several huts in a half-ruined state.  One of these was set aside for
+us, and a sentry was placed at the door.
+
+Here we remained for three weeks while our captors made frequent
+excursions, starting early in the morning and returning late at night,
+though of their object we had not the faintest idea.  At the end of
+that time we were taken with them; and from morn till night, for
+several days in succession, we roamed about those dreadful mountains,
+till every muscle in our bodies ached with fatigue.
+
+"What is the use of it all?" I asked Alzura gloomily.  "What do they
+expect to gain by this continual tramp up and down?"
+
+"It's my belief that they can't help themselves," he replied.  "It's a
+disease, a form of madness, which keeps them continually on the move.
+Yesterday we climbed the same hill a dozen times, and finished at the
+starting-point.  Or perhaps it's some new kind of warfare they've
+invented."
+
+"It's awfully ridiculous, anyhow, and I don't see that we've gained
+much by leaving the island--unless it's exercise."
+
+"When the war is over, I'll give up walking altogether," said my chum
+resolutely.  "When I'm not on horseback, or in a carriage of some kind,
+I'll be carried about in a chair.  If this lasts much longer, my feet
+will be worn out."
+
+That evening the Indians lit their fire earlier than usual--a
+circumstance for which we were duly grateful.  We ate our supper, and
+sat chatting together cheerfully, being put in good humour by the
+warmth and brightness of the ruddy flames.
+
+Suddenly we heard in the distance the long-drawn-out note of a night
+bird, repeated again and again, and each time nearer to us.  It was
+answered by our sentries; but the men round the fire made no movement,
+nor did they show the slightest interest when half a dozen horsemen
+rode up.  The leader, however, rose slowly and talked to the strangers,
+who, after seeing to their horses, came and sat down.
+
+"Juan," said Alzura, "these fellows belong to a different tribe.
+Perhaps we shall have a chance of making ourselves understood."
+
+"They are looking at us very pointedly," I answered; and raising my
+voice, I said, "Can any of you talk Spanish?"
+
+"Yes," cried several together, coming near to us; "what do you want?"
+
+"To make ourselves known," I replied.  "These worthy fellows can't
+understand us, and we're tired of playing hide-and-seek in the
+mountains."
+
+"Who are you?  Where do you come from?  Are you for the king?" asked
+one.
+
+This was treading on dangerous ground; but as we really were worn out,
+and there seemed no chance of escape, I thought it best to take the
+bull by the horns.  At the worst we should only be handed over to the
+enemy and sent back to prison.
+
+So I answered quietly, "No; we are Patriot officers who have escaped
+from the Spaniards.  If you are on our side, perhaps you will help us
+to return to our own people."
+
+"You are with friends, senor, if what you say is true," remarked one
+who seemed to have some sort of authority.
+
+"_If?_" said I, trying to speak haughtily; "do you doubt it?"
+
+"Well," said the fellow, with a knowing grin, "you don't look much like
+officers of any kind."  And he was right.
+
+We were, in fact, a pair of as dreary-looking objects as one would be
+likely to meet.  Our sandals were worn out, our clothes hung in rags,
+and the holes in Alzura's tunic made it painfully apparent that he did
+not indulge in the luxury of a shirt.  Whether we wore uniform, and if
+so what kind, would have been difficult to decide, as we were still
+plastered with mud from head to foot.  So I could not altogether blame
+the man for his distrust.
+
+However, I repeated my statement, told him we had fought under the
+Englishman Miller, and at last introduced the name of Raymon Sorillo.
+
+"We know him well," I said in conclusion, "and are good friends of the
+Silver Key."
+
+Apparently my words were interpreted for the benefit of our captors,
+who jabbered together for a considerable time, while Alzura and I
+anxiously awaited the result of the conference.
+
+At last the leader of the horsemen, turning to me, said, "Senor, it is
+decided that I shall take you to the army, where your words can be
+proved.  If your story is not true, you will be shot as spies."
+
+"All right; we agree!" I exclaimed joyfully, for it was a delightful
+thought that we were to escape the strange beings who spent their time
+in running about the rocks.
+
+"We shall start early," he continued, "so you had better get some
+rest."  Which we did, as soon as our excited state permitted.
+
+"Bravo!" exclaimed Alzura, after breakfast the next morning; "this is
+an improvement.  Fancy being on horseback again!  This will be better
+than trudging on foot, Juan, eh?"
+
+"What about the men who have lent us their horses?"
+
+"Oh," said he merrily, "I believe they would as soon walk as ride, and
+I'm sure they could keep up longer than the animals."
+
+By this talk you will understand we had been provided with a couple of
+horses; and taking leave of our original captors, we rode off with our
+new ones.  Of course, both Alzura and I were unarmed, and the leader,
+in a quiet way, so arranged that we were never very far from a man with
+a musket.
+
+He was rather a lively fellow for an Indian, and having made sure we
+could not escape, talked with us freely.  He told us the men we had
+just left were very useful, having already sent in a great deal of
+valuable information to the Patriot army.  He also said that Bolivar
+had crossed the Andes with a large army, and that a decisive battle was
+expected at any time.  He was very curious about our escape, and could
+barely credit that we had crossed the morass without assistance.
+
+"It has been done before," he said, "but only once or twice, and then
+by natives."
+
+"We shan't do it again," laughed Alzura.  "It nearly turned our hair
+white.  It was the nastiest experience I have ever had--worse than when
+the Royalists cut us up at Torata."
+
+"Were you in that battle, senor?  Wasn't it terrible?" and the man
+looked at my comrade with renewed interest.
+
+Indeed, from that time he treated us both with increased respect, and
+the journey passed quite pleasantly in his company.  During the second
+day we met several groups of mounted Indians, and a detachment of
+regular soldiers; which showed that we could not be far from the main
+encampment, on the plain between Rancas and Pasco.  Our guide expected
+to reach it that night, but we did not get in till after breakfast next
+morning.
+
+The plain was a splendid place for a camp, though rather high up, being
+some twelve thousand feet above the level of the sea.  Surrounding it
+on all sides, huge mountains towered, their mighty summits hidden by
+the clouds.  The table-land itself was alive with soldiers, and
+presently I caught sight of the flag which had been presented to the
+Peruvian Legion.
+
+"Take us over there," I cried excitedly to the guide.--"There are our
+comrades, Alzura.  I see Plaza, and Cordova, and the sour-faced old
+major.  Viva! viva!" and I rose in the stirrups with delight.
+
+What explanation the Indian gave I do not know.  We were plucked from
+the saddles and bandied about from one fellow to another in less than
+no time, every one helping to keep up a running fire of remarks.
+
+"Now let the Royalists tremble!" exclaimed Plaza, striking a dramatic
+attitude, spoiled only by the fun and twinkle in his eyes.
+
+"Only think, our little Alzura has returned to us!" cried another; "let
+us embrace him."
+
+"Wait till he's been scrubbed a few times," suggested Plaza.  "The
+legion should be proud of these 'young bloods.'  What airs and graces!
+What remarkable and novel costumes!  What--"
+
+"Can any one lend me a shirt?" interrupted Alzura.
+
+"A shirt?" exclaimed Cordova.  "My dear fellow, I have a dozen, quite
+clean and doing nothing, I shall be proud to let you and Crawford each
+have one."
+
+"Oh, thanks!" said Alzura.  "I thought something practical ought to
+come from all that talk.  Come on, my boy, let's have them at once.
+Where are they?"
+
+"Just down in Lima.  You have only to--" but a roar of laughter drowned
+the end of the sentence.
+
+"You really don't require one," remarked Plaza; "it would spoil the
+rest of your uniform--that is, if you have one under that dirt."
+
+Every one was still enjoying the joke, when a number of officers in
+brilliant uniforms approached our quarter of the plain.  In the leader
+I recognized Bolivar; and, to my great satisfaction, Colonel Miller was
+one of his suite.
+
+"Your men seem to be enjoying themselves, colonel," we heard Bolivar
+remark; "what is it all about?"
+
+At that moment Miller caught sight of us, and leaving the general's
+question unanswered, called us over, saying, "Alzura!  Crawford!  Where
+have you been, my boys?  We had quite given you up.--General, these are
+two of my young officers who have been missing for months."
+
+Bolivar, who was in good humour that morning, made us stand by him and
+relate our adventures.  Then he complimented us on our pluck, and
+turning to an officer, said, "Take these youngsters to O'Brien, and ask
+him to supply them with decent clothing; they have at least earned
+that.  And I am very proud of you, boys; and so, no doubt, are your
+comrades."  At which Plaza led off a round of cheering.
+
+I was very glad to see the great, big, jolly Irishman again, and he
+lost no time in getting us fresh uniforms from the stores, with an
+extra poncho apiece.
+
+"You'll be glad of that at night," said he, "for up here the
+thermometer is generally below freezing-point.  I must come to see you,
+if there's time, and hear your story."
+
+O'Brien was quite right about the biting cold, but on that first night
+at least we hardly felt it.  Dressed in our new clothes, comfortably
+wrapped in our ponchos, seated close to a roaring fire, and surrounded
+by old friends, Alzura and I felt amply repaid for all our toils and
+privations.
+
+In honour of our arrival our brother officers had organized a grand
+supper, the greatest delicacy being a small loaf of white bread, which
+they insisted on sharing with Alzura and myself.  After supper, we had
+to give an account of our adventures; and many a laugh went up as I
+told of my chum's plans, of our disasters in crossing the morass, and
+of the strange Indians who had mistaken us for Royalists, which, Plaza
+unkindly remarked, was a poor compliment to the enemy.
+
+"After all," he continued, "you haven't had such a very bad time.  Now,
+while you've been playing, we've been at work."
+
+"Oh," cried Alzura, smiling blandly, "that would be a change for you!"
+
+"We've made roads," said Cordova, with a solemn air, "built huts,
+collected fuel, carried corn, and driven cattle.  We've worked harder
+than the labourers on your father's estates."
+
+"Glad to hear it," laughed my chum.  "I thought Bolivar would make
+something of you.  A pity we weren't with you, though."
+
+"A great pity!  With Crawford and you helping, there would have been
+little for us to do."
+
+"It must have been rough work crossing the mountains," I observed.
+
+"Rough? rather! especially as Bolivar has turned us into cavalry," and
+he proceeded to give a graphic account of the passage.
+
+"The shelving ledges on the mountain sides are so narrow that the
+troops were obliged to advance in single file.  The cavalry, of course,
+were greatly handicapped.  Each man rode a mule, and had a led horse,
+which he dragged after him by a lasso.  Sometimes a break in the track,
+caused by a deep gully or a waterfall, occurred, when the men had to
+dismount, and to lead their animals.
+
+"But the worst of all was when night came while we were still on the
+march," said Plaza.  "We always walked then, and more than one fellow
+went tumbling down some frightful precipice.  We lost our way two or
+three times, though there were plenty of trumpeters stationed at
+intervals.  But Cordova will tell you about that," and there was a
+general laugh.
+
+"Oh," said Alzura, scenting a bit of fun, "order, please, for Cordova's
+story.--Now, my boy, out with it!"
+
+"'Twas nothing," replied Cordova airily.  "We missed our way, and had
+to return, that's all.  A mere accident, only these fellows make such a
+fuss about it."
+
+"Plaza, you tell the yarn," said I.  "Cordova's much too modest, and
+that's quite a new thing for him, too!"
+
+"Well, it happened on the wildest night of the whole journey.  A
+terrific snowstorm came on, half blinding us.  We were wet through and
+tired as dogs, and the camping-place was still a long way off.  We
+couldn't see much, but there was plenty of noise.  The wind howled, the
+trumpeters blew loud enough to wake the dead, officers shouted to their
+men, horses neighed and mules brayed: it was a regular pandemonium!  To
+crown all, we were following the windings of a roaring torrent."
+
+"And Cordova was leading," interrupted Major Gamarra.
+
+"Some one suggested we were on the wrong track, but our friend knew
+better.  'Follow me,' said he; 'I can guide you by the sounds of the
+trumpets.'  And we followed."
+
+"Like a flock of sheep," chimed in the major.
+
+"We went on," continued Plaza, "till even Cordova admitted something
+was wrong; then we stopped."
+
+"Why didn't you turn back?"
+
+"Out of the question, my boy.  We tried it, and lost half a dozen
+animals in the attempt.  The only thing possible was to advance till we
+reached an open spot.  When all our fellows were across we turned
+round, and began the march back."
+
+"Bravo, Cordova!" cried my chum, who was bubbling over with laughter.
+
+"Oh, come, wait a bit.  You haven't heard the best of the joke yet.  We
+had done nearly half the distance, when we met the head of another
+squadron that followed us.  'Go back,' we yelled; 'you've missed the
+proper path.'  'Go back yourselves,' they shouted in reply; 'we can't!'
+Well, you know, neither party dared move till daybreak; so we stood
+there, crouching against the rocks and holding on to the animals.  We
+could neither eat nor sleep.  The wind flung the snow at us in masses,
+and we were frozen to the marrow.  Some pretty things were said about
+Cordova before the morning, I can assure you."
+
+"To hear them talk, one would think they were made of sugar!" grunted
+Cordova.
+
+"It took us four hours the next day to get out of the mess," laughed
+Plaza, "and then we had to catch up with our division.  Altogether, it
+was a very pleasant incident, though the major here and a few others
+failed to see the fun."
+
+"But how came Canterac to let you through the passes without a fight?"
+I asked.
+
+"A case of pride going before a fall, I expect.  He thinks to serve us
+as he did at Torata.--By the way, Crawford, you gave Miller his wrong
+rank this morning.  He's a general now, and chief of all the Peruvian
+cavalry."
+
+"Bravo, that's grand news!  There isn't a better soldier in the army."
+
+"Only he's so fearfully energetic.  He'll keep one on the move for
+sixteen hours, and then suggest a little scouting as a titbit to wind
+up with," said Cordova.
+
+"You've had a good rest now, anyway."
+
+"We shall pay for it, though."
+
+And Cordova was not far wrong.  We had barely fallen asleep when the
+bugles sounded.  The troops rose, and mounted officers dashed about,
+carrying orders to different squadrons and battalions.
+
+"Breakfast at once; ready to march in an hour," were the commands, and
+we wondered what information Bolivar had obtained.
+
+Some said one thing, some another, and very soon a fine crop of rumours
+sprang up.  Canterac was advancing with twenty thousand men; his troops
+had mutinied, and declared for the Patriots; he was retreating hot-foot
+for Cuzco; he was a prisoner in the hands of the mountain tribes.
+Every man suggested the event he fancied most, and seemed quite annoyed
+if one expressed any doubt of its accuracy.
+
+"Just our luck," grumbled Alzura.  "I did think we should have had a
+little rest."
+
+"It's just because you're here that we're moving," laughed Plaza.
+"Directly Bolivar caught sight of you and Crawford yesterday morning,
+he determined to march.  'Canterac won't stand against those fellows,'
+he said."
+
+"Bolivar is a capable fellow and a good judge," said Alzura.  "I wonder
+where General Miller is."
+
+"Went off in the night, reconnoitring with a party of mountaineers.
+It's wonderful how those wild fellows have taken to him.  They'll go
+anywhere with him.  Come along; it's nearly time for us to move, and
+Bolivar doesn't like to be kept waiting."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXVI.
+
+THE HUSSARS OF JUNIN.
+
+Contrary to custom, we moved off the ground slowly, marching along with
+swarms of Indians on our flanks and in front.  For once in a way
+Bolivar had adopted caution instead of the fiery recklessness he
+usually displayed, and seemed resolved on running no unnecessary risks.
+Our course lay southward, over very rough, broken ground, and a staff
+officer informed Plaza we were making for the plains of Junin, to the
+south of Lake Reyes.
+
+"We shall catch Canterac there," said he, "or Canterac will catch us; I
+hardly know which at present."
+
+Our bivouac that night was cheerless and uncomfortable.  The position
+was a very strong one, but Bolivar was evidently determined to leave
+nothing to chance.  The sentries were doubled and in some places
+trebled, so that most of us were unable to snatch more than a few
+hours' sleep.  Early in the morning the journey was resumed, and after
+a tedious march of fifteen miles through mountainous country we
+suddenly beheld the Royalist army crossing the plains at our feet.  The
+men, breaking into a thundering "Viva," waved their caps or swung their
+lances in the air, and the cavalry were ordered to shift their saddles
+from the mules to the led horses.
+
+"'Twill be a cavalry action," said Plaza, vaulting into his saddle.
+"Here comes an 'aid' with orders."
+
+"There goes Miller with a squadron," cried Alzura.  "We shall be out of
+it.  The Colombian Horse are moving too.  We shall be left behind with
+the infantry."
+
+"Not so fast," said Plaza, laughing, as Bolivar's messenger dashed up
+to Colonel Suares, who was in charge of our squadron.  "Now for it!"
+
+"You won't be quite so eager presently," growled the tough old major.
+"Look at the ground; see the defile between the swamp and the hills.
+Canterac can cut us to pieces there, and he's soldier enough to know
+it."
+
+"No, no, major; his cavalry aren't a patch on ours.  We've never had a
+chance to show our mettle before."
+
+"Well, we shall have one now," said the major, as we began to descend
+to the plain.
+
+Two Colombian squadrons were in front of us, while Miller was still
+further ahead and bearing to the left.  On the other side of the defile
+we caught a glimpse now and then of the Royalist cavalry forming up.
+The ground was so broken that we could only go at a foot-pace, and I
+began to think the major might be right.
+
+As we entered the defile there came a great shout of "Viva el Rey!"
+from the plains ahead, and the next instant the Royalist horsemen,
+thirteen hundred strong, and led by Canterac himself, dashed madly to
+the attack.
+
+"Viva! viva!" they yelled, cutting and thrusting with sabre and lance.
+The onset was like a mighty avalanche, and our men were for the most
+part overwhelmed.  A few of the strongest and best mounted cut their
+way through, but numbers were overthrown, and the rest came flying
+back, with the victorious Royalists slashing and cutting on all sides.
+
+"By St. Philip," muttered Plaza, "we shall be swept away."
+
+Our colonel, seeing the danger, manoeuvred us into an angle of the
+marsh, just as the mob of horsemen, friend and foe inextricably mixed,
+swarmed down, shouting, struggling, fighting.
+
+"Forward! forward!" yelled the exultant Royalists, sweeping past like a
+whirlwind.
+
+Farther away on the left, another body was driving Miller's men into
+the swamp, and it seemed that the Patriot cavalry must be annihilated.
+But our squadron remained untouched, and leading us into the plain,
+Suares issued an order to charge the Royalists who were handling
+Miller's troops so roughly.
+
+"We must win or die, my lads!" he cried; "the country depends on us."
+
+The men cheered with a will and shook their sabres; we settled more
+firmly in our saddles; the colonel rode to the front; the squadron
+moved forward and broke into a trot.  Men and officers alike knew that
+our leader had spoken no more than the truth.  We must win or die!  On
+us alone hung the issue of the battle.  If we failed, hardly a man of
+the Patriot cavalry would leave the field alive; if we won, the
+Royalists must stop the pursuit in order to help their comrades.
+
+It was a heavy task, but one thought cheered and nerved us.  We were
+all Peruvians belonging to the Legion, and it was but fitting that the
+desperate venture should fall to us.  How our infantry battalion would
+cheer, how proudly they would greet us, should we return victorious!
+It would be glorious to show both friends and enemies that the
+Peruvians could strike a stout blow in their own defence.
+
+"Gallop!"
+
+We received the order with a cheer, bent low in the saddle, and grasped
+our sabres firmly.  Suares knew his work, and led us across a wide
+stretch of smooth, firm ground, the very spot for a cavalry charge.
+
+Finding themselves between two foes, the Royalists faced about and
+dashed at us.  The shock was tremendous: men and horses were bowled
+over like ninepins; great gaps appeared in the ranks; men went down and
+were trampled under foot in the furious fray; there was a ring of steel
+as sabre clashed with sabre, and the defiant shouts of the combatants
+mingled with the groans of the wounded.
+
+Reeling and panting, I found myself on the other side of the press.
+Plaza was there, too, with a dozen of his men.  Alzura broke through
+smiling in spite of a nasty cut across the face, and was followed by
+many more.  Then above the din General Miller's voice was heard, and we
+flushed with pride.
+
+"Bravo, my boys!" he cried; "I'm proud of you!  All the army will sing
+your praises presently."
+
+Freed from the Royalists, his men had got out of the swamp, and now
+came to join us.  The few Colombians who had cut their way through in
+the first attack galloped back, and inspirited by General Miller's
+stern "Hurrah!" we once more flung ourselves on the foe.  It was steel
+to steel now, and the Spaniards stood their ground well till they saw
+their comrades retreating from the defile.  Then, with the exception of
+a devoted few who stayed in a grim ring around the standard-bearer,
+they turned to flee.
+
+"The flag!" cried the general; "have at the flag!"  And like a torrent
+in flood, we swept down on the little band.
+
+"Rally to the flag!" cried a voice I knew well, and the next instant I
+was crossing swords with Santiago Mariano.  I do not care much to dwell
+on this part of the fight.  These Royalists were the pick of their
+squadron, and it seemed as if each man would die where he fought rather
+than surrender the colours.  Three or four times the flag disappeared,
+but came up again the next instant, and presently I saw it borne aloft
+by Santiago, who had been forced away from me in the fierce turmoil.
+Hardly a dozen men remained with him now, and we were all round him.
+
+"Surrender!" cried the general.  "It is a pity to kill so brave a man!"
+
+Santiago laughed lightly, dug the spurs deep into his horse's sides,
+cleared a passage with his sabre, and wheeling his horse by the
+pressure of his knees, bounded away, crying defiantly,--
+
+"Rally to the flag!  Viva el Rey!"
+
+A young Colombian officer levelled his pistol; but Miller struck it up,
+saying,--
+
+"The odds are heavy enough now.  If you want the flag, get it with your
+sword."
+
+The youngster's face flushed, but he kept his temper, and saluting the
+general, dashed after Santiago, crying,--
+
+"To me, Colombians!"
+
+As Suares had foreseen, our action gave the beaten squadron a chance to
+rally; officers and men who had survived the crushing avalanche
+collected in groups, and the fight was proceeding fiercely on the open
+plain.  Ordering our squadron to re-form, the general placed himself at
+our head.
+
+Meanwhile, I was watching the gallant Santiago and his handful of men.
+He was a superb rider, and able to guide his horse without using the
+reins, thus leaving both hands free.  His Royalist comrades, now
+reunited, were opposite the defile, and too far off to help, while
+several detachments of Patriot cavalry were hurrying to cut off his
+retreat.  Behind him, too, thundered the hot-headed Colombian officer
+with a dozen troopers.
+
+"That plucky Royalist officer will be killed," said the general to
+Colonel Suares.  "He's a gallant fellow--eh, Crawford?"
+
+"He is, sir," I answered warmly; "and I'd give anything to see him get
+through safely."
+
+"Why, Crawford," returned the general, smiling, "that sounds very much
+like treason."
+
+By this time we ourselves were in motion, but as my place was on the
+flank, I had a good view of Santiago's desperate venture.  A body of
+Colombians, some twenty strong, had thrown themselves across his path;
+and though they were our allies, I could hardly keep from cheering as
+he dashed through them, losing, as far as could be seen, only one man
+of his little band.
+
+Casting a backward glance to see how his followers fared, he waved the
+flag again, and I could guess at the defiant shout of "Viva el Rey!"
+that came from his lips.
+
+"He's just splendid," said I, between my teeth.  But surely now his
+time was come!  Close on his heels rode the beaten Colombians, while in
+front another detachment, far stronger, awaited him.  What would he
+do--surrender?  That, I felt sure, would never enter his head.
+
+One chance of escape there was if he would take it.  By swerving
+sharply to the left he might avoid the hostile troopers, and gallop
+across the plain to the Royalist infantry.  It was evident he saw this
+way out; but his blood was up, and he made straight for the forest of
+lances.
+
+"Lost!" said I, with a groan.  "Poor old Santiago!"
+
+I counted eight men with him, and Royalist and Patriot troops combined
+held none braver.  It was magnificent, and yet terrible, to watch them
+spring at the massed troops, Santiago only slightly in advance of them.
+I held my breath as they leaped into the throng and were swallowed up.
+We were not near enough to distinguish the flag amidst the flashing
+sabres and the long-handled lances, but I feared it had fallen with its
+daring protector.
+
+The tumult showed that some of the brave few still lived, and suddenly
+I heard General Miller, as if his feelings had surprised him into
+speech, say in English,--
+
+"By Jove, he's through!"
+
+It was true.  There in the distance rode a man bare-headed, waving a
+flag defiantly, and for all we knew cheering for the king.  One by one
+four others joined him, and continued the gallop: their comrades lay
+dead on the plain.
+
+Had half the Royalist cavalry possessed Santiago's pluck, the story of
+this affair at Junin would have had a different ending.
+
+As it was, the Spaniards began to waver.  They could barely hold their
+own against the reassembled squadrons from the defile, and our arrival
+had turned the scale.  They began to give ground slowly but surely, in
+spite of their officers' appeals.  I saw Santiago again; indeed he was
+the most conspicuous man, though not the highest officer, on the field.
+Wherever the troops seemed weakest, there he was, flag in hand,
+cheering them on and fighting desperately.
+
+When at last they could stand it no longer, but broke and fled, he got
+together another little band to protect the retreat.  But for him, I
+doubt whether Canterac would have saved a quarter of his cavalry.
+Once, when turning at bay to repel a fiercer rush than usual, he caught
+sight of me, and his face lit up with a smile.  He had been wounded,
+but not dangerously, and his sword-arm was vigorous as ever.
+
+Again and again, with the aid of his choicest troopers, he stemmed the
+onset; but his efforts were vain--we were too many.  His men dropped
+one after another, and he was forced to continue the retreat, till the
+remnant of the Royalist horsemen found shelter behind the lines of
+their infantry, who greeted us with a scattering fire.
+
+It was now growing dusk, and we could not attack an army, though
+General Miller decided to hang on a little longer.  In the long pursuit
+our men had become scattered over the plain, and he dispatched various
+officers to collect them.  Then turning to me, he said,--
+
+"Crawford, ride back, find General Bolivar, and tell him the Royalists
+are in full retreat.  If followed up strongly, I believe they would
+disperse."
+
+Saluting, I turned my horse and rode back rapidly.  The scene was
+bewildering.  Officers galloped this way and that, shouting to their
+men; riderless horses careered madly about; slightly-wounded troopers
+were hobbling to the rear; others, more unfortunate, lay on the ground
+groaning and calling for water; while here and there mounted men were
+escorting groups of prisoners toward our infantry lines.
+
+Several times I stopped to ask where General Bolivar was.  He had
+entered the defile with the cavalry; but from the time our first
+squadrons were routed I had seen nothing of him.  At last an officer
+told me that, seeing his horsemen overthrown, the general had galloped
+back to the infantry, which he had posted on a very high hill about a
+league away.
+
+"He quite expected to be attacked," added my informant, "never dreaming
+we should recover ourselves.  The Peruvians saved us.  They are fine
+fellows!"  For in the gathering gloom he could not distinguish my
+uniform.
+
+"Thanks!" said I, laughing; "I'll repeat that compliment to my
+comrades," and rode on.
+
+Bolivar was standing, or to be correct, walking about, on the brow of
+the hill, looking anxiously toward the plain.  Several messengers had
+brought him word of the varying fortunes of the fight, but none had
+arrived from Miller.
+
+I passed close to the head of the Peruvian infantry, and the colonel
+shouted,--
+
+"What news, Crawford!"
+
+"Good!" I replied, hurrying along; and reaching Bolivar, I jumped to
+the ground and saluted.
+
+"Where do you come from?" he cried.
+
+"General Miller, sir.  The Royalists are in full retreat--horse, foot,
+and artillery.  The general wishes me to say that a vigorous pursuit
+would probably disperse them altogether."
+
+"Too late," said he; "tell General Miller I have ordered the cavalry to
+retire on me.--Caza," to one of his officers, "lend--"
+
+"Lieutenant Crawford, sir."
+
+"Lend Lieutenant Crawford your horse; his is done up.--Now ride as fast
+as you can, and give General Miller my message."
+
+I saluted, sprang into the saddle, dashed past the Peruvian infantry,
+down the hill, and into the defile.  Here I found the main body of our
+cavalry retiring in accordance with Bolivar's command, and heard that
+Miller, with a squadron of Peruvians, was still following the Royalists.
+
+It was quite dark now, and the route was covered with hillocks; but I
+rode on swiftly, trusting to luck, and at length came up with the
+general, who had halted in his pursuit.  On receiving Bolivar's message
+he immediately gave orders to retire, and about seven o'clock we
+reached our camping-ground.
+
+Fortunately we managed to collect a little fuel, for the night was so
+intensely cold that few of the seriously wounded, though receiving
+every possible attention, survived its rigours.  Even lying close to
+the fire and enveloped in our ponchos we shivered.
+
+A surgeon had sewn up the cut in Alzura's face, and we gave him the
+most sheltered place, and the one nearest the fire.  There was not much
+sleep for any of us that night; we were far too excited, and spent most
+of the time fighting the battle over again.
+
+To my delight, every one talked of Santiago and his magnificent bravery.
+
+"Didn't we take him prisoner once, down south?" asked Plaza.  "His face
+seemed familiar to me."
+
+"Yes," said I: "his name is Santiago Mariano, and at that time he was a
+major."
+
+"Faith," observed Alzura, looking up, "as far as fighting goes, he
+ought to be a commander-in-chief!  A wounded Colombian told me the
+fellow sprang on them like a lion falling on a herd of deer.  A lucky
+thing for us that the Marianos are in a minority among the Royalists."
+
+"Canterac nearly did the trick though," growled the major.  "I thought
+he would drop on us in that defile.  I tell you what it is: Bolivar can
+thank our colonel that he has any cavalry left."
+
+"Bravo, major!  I heard this evening that we saved the army."
+
+"So we did," chuckled Plaza; "and we can say it without a word of
+boasting.  I don't care about praising my own men."  But the rest was
+drowned in good-humoured laughter, as every one knew that the finest
+troop in South America--and the world, too, for that matter--was
+Plaza's.
+
+However, it appeared that we really had done a smart thing: for the
+next morning Bolivar held a grand parade, and in presence of the whole
+army ordered that henceforth the regiment of which we formed part
+should be known as the "Hussars of Junin;" and General Miller publicly
+said that we deserved the honour.
+
+After the parade we marched into the town of Reyes, which had been
+sacked by the Royalists.  Bolivar occupied the only hut that had a
+roof, the rest consisting of nothing but bare walls.  The inhabitants
+had fled into the surrounding country, but now they returned, and did
+all they could to assist us, lighting fires, cooking our scanty
+rations, and erecting sheds to shelter us from the cold.
+
+"I suppose it's all right," said Alzura; "but I can't help thinking
+Bolivar has made a big blunder.  While we hang about here, Canterac is
+pulling himself together, and we shall have all the work to do over
+again.  If I were the general--"
+
+"I should join the other side immediately," laughed Plaza.
+
+"Please don't interrupt," said Cordova.  "It amuses me to hear these
+youngsters talk.  I'll wager Alzura would have finished the war two
+years ago, only the end might not have been as we anticipate."  At
+which there was a general laugh.
+
+"What I don't like about Bolivar is his play-acting," I said.  "Have
+you seen his hut?  Have a look at it in the morning.  The doorway is
+hung with silver ornaments in place of laurel wreaths, which the
+Indians were unable to get."
+
+"But he can't help the Indians idolizing him!"
+
+"Nonsense!  Did you ever hear of such rubbish with San Martin?  And the
+Indians worshipped him!"
+
+"Ah!" exclaimed Plaza, "you're a San Martin man, and jealous of the new
+sun!"
+
+"A new comet," said I, a bit testily perhaps, because Plaza had
+happened on an explanation very near the truth.
+
+"At any rate," observed Cordova, "it's better to be here at our ease
+than tramping fruitlessly about the mountains.  I'm fairly tired of
+that fun.  I want a day or two at Lima."
+
+None of us guessed how much weary marching lay before us ere we
+returned to the capital.  However, for the time we were in
+comparatively good quarters, and though grumbling occasionally because
+Bolivar had not followed up the victory at Junin, were quite prepared
+to make the best of things.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXVII.
+
+A DISASTROUS RETREAT.
+
+When General Canterac retreated from Junin, he fled from his own
+shadow.  Instead of pursuing him closely, we advanced in a leisurely
+way to Guamanga, and stayed there a month doing nothing.  Then we
+marched to Challuanca, where Bolivar, being needed at the capital, left
+us under the command of General Sucre, who had shown himself a very
+skilful soldier.  It seems we were not strong enough to proceed, and as
+the rainy season was at hand, no one thought the Royalists would return
+to the attack.
+
+The Patriot army was spread across the country for many miles, our post
+being on a high tableland four leagues from Challuanca.  The weather
+was abominable.  Frequent storms swept through the district, the rain
+fell in torrents, the thunder pealed in reverberating claps among the
+mountains, and many animals and some men were killed by the lightning.
+It was bitterly cold, too, and our only shelter was a cluster of
+miserable Indian huts, where we passed all our time when not on duty.
+Often I returned to my cheerless quarters cold, shivering, and
+drenched, yet with no change of clothing.
+
+To add to our misfortunes, it was rumoured that the various Royalist
+armies, having united, were marching to attack us; so for days together
+we were kept on the alert, riding for hours over the desolate country
+and returning thoroughly exhausted.
+
+One evening early in November I got back after a twenty miles' ride
+with a small patrol, and found the camp in a state of confusion.
+
+"What is it, Alzura? what's all the fuss about?" I asked, wearily
+getting off my mule--for we rode horses only when absolutely necessary.
+
+"Oh, my dear Juan, you will be delighted," he replied, his face
+brimming with fun.  "We are just going back to Challuanca.  The viceroy
+is somewhere in our rear with all his army, and we have to run for it."
+
+"My animal is dead-beat," said I gloomily.
+
+"You must walk, and lead both animals.  Never mind, dear boy; the
+excitement will keep you going," he answered, laughing.
+
+"Hullo! is it you, Crawford?  In luck's way again!  And I've been
+worrying about your being left behind," said Plaza, coming up.
+
+I did not exactly see where the luck came in; but the sound of the
+bugle cut short my reply, and I took my place in the column.  That
+march was the longest twelve miles I remember.  Sometimes riding,
+sometimes walking, aching in every limb, and more than half asleep, I
+plodded along the rocky path, dreamily wondering at every step whether
+I could take another.  As soon as we arrived at Challuanca I just lay
+down on the bare ground, and was fast asleep in a second.
+
+It was daylight when the sounds of bugles awakened me, and I rose
+sleepily.  The army had disappeared, with the exception of our
+squadron, which I afterwards found formed part of the rearguard.
+
+"Come on, sleepy-head," sang out Alzura, "or you'll get no breakfast.
+I've seen to your animals.  A wonder they didn't kick you to death in
+the night!"
+
+"The poor beasts were too tired to have a kick left in them.  Where's
+General Sucre?"
+
+"Going on to a place called Lambrama.  Do you know Miller is a
+prisoner?"
+
+"A prisoner?  I don't believe it."
+
+"It's true, nevertheless.  His scouting party has returned without him.
+From what I can hear, we're in a tight fix."
+
+According to rumour, Alzura was right; but after a long and wearisome
+march we reached Lambrama, where General Sucre halted.  During the
+afternoon, while we rested in the valley, a great shout from the troops
+on our right brought us to our feet, and we saw a soldier on a
+beautiful white horse descending a pass into the valley.
+
+"That's General Miller's horse!" I cried excitedly.
+
+"And the general's on its back!" said Plaza.  "Viva! viva Miller!"  And
+the cry was taken and repeated by thousands of lusty throats.
+
+I had witnessed San Martin's brilliant reception, and had seen Bolivar
+feted by his admirers; but this outburst was the most remarkable of
+all.  One would have thought the general was a personal friend of every
+man in the army.
+
+Each battalion, as he passed it, broke into renewed cheering, the men
+flung their caps into the air, and the whole scene was one of amazing
+enthusiasm.  The general rode along slowly, and his smiling face showed
+how greatly he was touched by his reception.
+
+"The man's a marvel!" exclaimed Plaza admiringly.  "Look at him!  One
+would think he had just come from a pleasure-trip instead of being
+hunted through the mountains.  I warrant the viceroy would count his
+capture cheap at half a million dollars."
+
+"Say a million, and it would still be cheap," said Alzura; and most of
+us agreed with him.
+
+General Miller apparently brought important information, as, shortly
+after his arrival, orders were issued for a fresh start.  I need not
+dwell long upon our sufferings during that disastrous retreat.  The
+Royalists had outmarched us, and, hoping to stop our advance, closed
+many of the defiles and destroyed the bridges by which we should have
+crossed the numerous rivers.
+
+Several times we caught a glimpse of the enemy, and one night the
+hostile armies bivouacked within two miles of each other, but separated
+by a deep and rugged valley.  The terrible march was so weakening us
+that many officers hoped the enemy would attack at once.  But this the
+viceroy, who was a clever old soldier, would not do.  His plan was to
+wear us down by degrees and only fight at an advantage.
+
+For several days we remained watching each other, but on November 25th
+the Royalists disappeared, and Sucre immediately made preparations to
+cross the valley.  A swollen river lay in our path; the bridge was
+destroyed, and there was no material with which to build another.
+
+The crossing was simply terrible.  The weather was intensely cold, and
+even at the ford the infantry were breast high in icy water.  It was
+death to remain behind, however, and though many men, numbed and
+exhausted, were swept down the stream, only two lives were lost.
+
+On the last night in November we reached a valley whose sides were
+clothed with enormous trees, and the order to encamp was gratefully
+received.
+
+"Thank goodness!" said Alzura.  "We shall have a comfortable night at
+last.  The trees will shelter us from the cold winds, and we shall be
+as cozy as in bed."
+
+"Humph!" said Gamarra testily; "much you know about it.  In half an
+hour you'll wish we had camped on the top of a mountain."
+
+"Why?" I asked curiously, for the valley seemed to me a very suitable
+camping-ground.
+
+"Wait!" growled the crusty old major; "you'll soon know."
+
+This sounded very mysterious, but in a short time the secret was out.
+We had just settled ourselves comfortably when Alzura started up, and
+some one said, in a tone of great disgust, "Mosquitoes!"
+
+They were very fine specimens, and, I suppose, exceedingly angry at our
+invasion of their territory.  They came buzzing up in countless
+thousands, and though many were slain, the slaughter made no apparent
+difference in their numbers.
+
+I had put on my gloves, and now hastily covered my face with a
+handkerchief.  The mosquitoes were by no means dismayed.  Thirsting for
+blood, they would not be denied, but drank deeply.  To any one
+mosquito-proof the scene would have been most laughable.  We made a
+desperate fight, but the victory was to the mosquitoes.
+
+Our hands, necks, and faces were swollen from their venomous bites.
+Some of the men could hardly see; and though we were dreadfully
+fatigued, every one longed to hear the bugle-call to fall in.  No one
+wanted to remain in what Plaza christened "Alzura's paradise."
+
+The welcome sound came at break of day, and we moved out quickly,
+abandoning the battlefield to our active and vigorous foes.  As soon as
+we reached the open country the rain began to fall, and continued in
+torrents all that day and the following night.
+
+"I don't exactly see how much better off we are than Barriero,"
+remarked Alzura, as we lay down to sleep in a muddy puddle.
+
+"You should have stayed with him, then."
+
+"It's all very well to say that now.  Why did you bring me away?"
+
+I was too much staggered by the audacity of the question to make a
+suitable reply.
+
+Hungry, cold, and wet, we resumed the retreat, and soon began defiling
+into another valley.  Our squadron was right in the rear, and suddenly
+the sounds of firing and the cries of startled men were heard in front
+of us.
+
+"Mount!" cried the colonel; for we were still leading our horses, and
+most of our mules were dead.  "Forward!  Trot!"
+
+"Some of the enemy have doubled and cut in on our flank!" said Plaza
+excitedly.
+
+"Gallop!" roared the colonel, as entering the valley we caught sight of
+what was going on.
+
+Unperceived by us, a Royalist detachment had stolen down the valley and
+flung itself on the flank of our two rear battalions.  Taken by
+surprise, and outnumbered, our men were speedily overpowered, and
+before we had arrived on the scene they had dispersed in all directions.
+
+To the shouts of "Viva el Rey!" and encouraged by their officers, the
+Royalists were hotly chasing their beaten enemy.  The valley was in a
+state of terrible confusion.  The dead bodies of men lay scattered
+about; a few of the victors were dragging off an abandoned gun; others
+were carrying away stores and baggage.  The fight was a complete
+disaster for our side.
+
+"We can't do any good," whispered Alzura, as the colonel halted us,
+"and I doubt if we aren't cut off ourselves."
+
+"Better charge at once," muttered Plaza; "the more we look at it the
+less we shall like it."
+
+"My lads," cried the colonel, riding down the ranks, "there is a stiff
+bit of work before us.  Let us remember we are the Hussars of Junin."
+
+The troopers responded with a ringing "Viva!" and as we got a firmer
+seat on our saddles, Alzura remarked,--
+
+"That's the way to talk, Juan.  These fellows will fight to the death
+now."
+
+There was something fresh happening on the other side, but we had no
+time to see what it was.  The bugle sounded, and with the colonel
+leading we dashed straight across the valley.  An infantry battalion
+peppered us from the right, and a squadron was drawn up right across
+our path.
+
+Men began to fall.  Here and there a riderless horse, darting from the
+ranks, tore across the valley.  We were, as Alzura said, in a warm
+corner.
+
+Bullets whizzed past our ears, but we noticed them not, riding straight
+as a die at the hostile cavalry.
+
+"The major's down!" cried Plaza.  "Poor old major!"
+
+That was his only epitaph.  We had no time to sorrow for any one just
+then, though we mourned for him sincerely enough afterwards.
+
+"Charge!" roared the colonel; and the sabres flashed as the horses
+bounded forward, thundering with their hoofs on the ground.
+
+"Caramba!" cried Plaza; "it's your old friend Mariano.  Well, friend or
+foe, this is his last fight if my blade can reach him."
+
+Yes, the officer who had accomplished this daring flanking movement was
+none other than Santiago Mariano, who, with the flush of success on his
+handsome face, was again leading his men to the charge.
+
+"Viva el Rey!" he cried, and his voice rang high and clear above the
+din.  "Down with the bandits!"
+
+Crash!  We were into them, fighting our way through desperately.
+Horses pranced, and bit, and kicked.  Men shouted triumphantly, or went
+down with a cry of agony on their lips.  Here a gap was made and filled
+at once, as some daring fighter urged his way forward.
+
+Alzura rode with the colonel, carrying the colours, and we pressed
+after them, knowing that our sole chance of safety was to get through
+the Royalist squadron.  On coming out at the other side we heard a
+voice crying, "Bravo! bravo, my bold hussars!" and there was General
+Miller, who seemed to scent a fight as a hound scents its quarry.
+
+By this time Santiago had re-formed his squadron, and was dashing at
+our rear, when from the rocks above us sprang a line of fire, and his
+horsemen, wheeling round, rapidly withdrew.  While we had been
+fighting, General Miller had rallied the beaten battalions and posted
+them in a commanding position to cover our ride through the pass.
+
+That night in bivouac we counted Santiago's venture had cost us more
+than two hundred men, all the spare horses, and a quantity of stores.
+
+"I hope you are proud of your Royalist friend," said Alzura to me.  "He
+has done us a nice bit of mischief."
+
+"He's a smart soldier."
+
+"He is that," agreed Plaza, "and a splendid swordsman.  I had a good
+bout with him, but could not pass his guard, though he was defending
+himself against three of us."
+
+"Did any one see the major after he fell?" I interrupted.
+
+"No," said Alzura; "but I feel sure he is dead, as the bullet passed
+through his forehead.  He was a grim old fighter, and I'm sorry he's
+gone."
+
+"So am I.  But he died a soldier's death, poor old chap," said Cordova.
+"We must have lost heavily since the retreat began.  I wonder what
+Sucre intends doing now."
+
+"Why, continuing the retreat."
+
+"To Lima?  If so, he won't have a hundred men left by the time he
+reaches the capital."
+
+"Well, what can he do?  We can't stay here and starve, and he can't
+make the Royalists fight."
+
+"As to starving," laughed Alzura, "I would as soon starve here as
+elsewhere.  I'm getting used to it."
+
+"And I don't know," remarked Cordova, "that forcing a fight will be so
+very brilliant for us.  We have had one sample to-day."
+
+"Oh, go to sleep!  You might be a raven as far as croaking's concerned.
+One would think we were in a hole and couldn't get out.  Trust to Sucre
+and Miller; they'll pull us through all right."
+
+"I'm going to sleep," announced Alzura gravely.  "I had a beautiful
+dream last night, and want to go on where reveille interrupted it.  I
+dreamed we were in Lima, at a banquet given by the city to the Patriot
+officers.  There was a band to play during the feast; the hall was
+brilliantly lit; the table was laden with all kinds of good things.  We
+were just beginning when the band struck up, and I woke to hear
+Crawford saying, 'Are you going to sleep all day?'  It was a splendid
+feast, though.  Such a quantity of--"
+
+"Sit on him, Juan! stifle him with his own poncho!  Fancy talking of
+banquets now!  Cruelty to animals I call it."
+
+"Why, I thought you'd be delighted," grumbled Alzura.
+
+In a very short time we were all asleep.  We rose at dawn, hungry and
+shivering, to resume our journey.  On this day the enemy marched
+parallel with us, but on the other side of a deep gorge, and General
+Sucre tried in vain to draw them into an engagement.  Their leader was
+too crafty.  Why need he sacrifice his men?
+
+"It's a pity from our point of view," remarked Plaza, as we toiled
+along, "but they are playing the proper game.  We're like fruit
+ripening on a tree.  When thoroughly fit we shall just drop and be
+gathered without difficulty."
+
+"Who's croaking now?" asked Cordova,
+
+"I'm simply stating facts," replied Plaza.  "Look at the road."
+
+"Thanks; I've seen more than enough of it already."
+
+"We're half starved."
+
+"That's less than a fact," laughed Alzura.  "You can put me down as
+three-quarters.  If decent food were set before me, I shouldn't know
+how to eat it."
+
+"We're losing hundreds of men," continued Plaza quietly, "and we've one
+miserable field-gun."
+
+"Take a dose of your own medicine," said I, laughing.  "Trust to Sucre
+and Miller; they'll pull us through."
+
+The captain's gloomy fit soon passed off, and he was as cheerful as
+ever; but there was no doubt of our being in a very awkward position.
+As far as fighting went, we could hold our own till doomsday; but we
+were bound to eat, and food did not grow on the mountains.
+
+Bolivar was working with all his fiery energy to hurry up
+reinforcements from Colombia and Chili, but until they arrived he could
+not send them on.  Then, too, the viceroy had gained over several
+Indian tribes, and they had already cut one detachment to pieces.  As
+far as I could judge, the Royalists had the whip-hand, and unless they
+made a mistake we should very shortly be at their mercy.
+
+On the sixth of December we halted at a little village, and a thrill of
+joy went through the troops when it was rumoured that our leaders
+intended to attack the enemy at all risks.  Wearied men, who had thrown
+themselves exhausted on the ground, struggled to their feet; starving
+men forgot their pangs; the very invalids crawled into the ranks, some
+of them so weak that they could barely trail a musket.
+
+"Stand by your horses!" said the colonel, as the enemy were only three
+miles off, and we might be required at any moment.
+
+An hour passed and we still waited; the morning wore away; afternoon
+merged into evening, and we were ordered to encamp.  Something, we knew
+not what, had gone wrong.
+
+"I don't know if there was a chance to-day," observed Plaza, "but won't
+there be one to-morrow?"
+
+"Why?"
+
+"Because the Royalists will block the road along which we must retreat.
+Then we must either throw ourselves against a terribly strong position,
+or stay here and starve."
+
+Events soon proved that he had not spoken at random.  Early next
+morning the enemy moved to an almost impregnable post.  Twice our
+number of strong men, flushed with victory and well equipped with guns,
+might well have hesitated to attack.  As for us, it was sheer madness.
+
+Things had come to the worst now.  Further retreat was barred; our
+provisions, even if we subsisted on the shortest of short rations,
+would not last five days, while to move against the foe was simply to
+commit suicide.
+
+"Lucky Barriero, sitting in his little hut!" said Alzura; "no fighting,
+no starving!  The next time we're taken prisoners we'll make the best
+of it, Juan."
+
+"I doubt if the Spaniards will make many prisoners--that is, among the
+officers," growled Cordova.  "The men will be spared, but we shall be
+put out of the way of doing mischief."
+
+I think myself Cordova exaggerated the danger; but his opinion was
+shared by the great majority of the Patriots, and it was this fear
+which made them resolve to fight to the bitter end rather than
+surrender.
+
+After breakfast we lounged about on the heights watching the Royalists,
+who had encamped just without gunshot, wondering what our leaders would
+decide to do.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXVIII.
+
+THE BATTLE OF THE GENERALS.
+
+"They're coming down!" cried Alzura excitedly, rushing into our tent.
+
+It wanted two hours to sunset; we had done nothing all day, and tired
+of watching the enemy on the opposite heights, most of us had gone to
+sleep.
+
+Alzura's announcement woke us up, and running forward, we glanced
+eagerly at the hill, which a battalion of infantry was descending.
+
+"Skirmishers, nothing more," said Plaza quietly.  "They fancy we might
+attempt a night attack.  Take my word for it, they won't be foolish
+enough to meet us on the plain."
+
+"Unless they try a rush in the dark."
+
+"That's just possible, but not probable; they're sure of us without
+that."
+
+"There goes a battalion of our light infantry in extended order,"
+remarked Cordova; "but there won't be any real fighting to-night.  I'm
+going back to bed."
+
+"A very sensible proceeding, too," exclaimed a genial voice; and
+turning round we beheld General Miller.  "I should advise all of you
+not on duty to do the same," he added.
+
+"Are we going to fight, general?" I asked eagerly.
+
+"Hullo, Crawford!  I've been so busy that I've lost sight of you
+lately.  Well, I hardly know.  Perhaps the viceroy would be better able
+to tell you; he knows more about it than I do."
+
+"I don't think he'll abandon his strong position just to give us a
+better chance, sir," remarked Plaza.
+
+"Perhaps not," replied the general.  "But you mustn't think he's in
+clover up yonder.  His men are as hungry as ours, and that's saying
+much.  If it is a fight, however, 'twill be a fight to the finish, and
+the Hussars of Junin won't be missing!"
+
+"Take us with you, sir!"
+
+"That's just what I've come to see the colonel about.  I intend to get
+all the regiment together and use it as a battering-ram."
+
+"He thinks the Royalists will attack," said Alzura, as the general
+passed on.  "He has heard something important, you may depend.  And why
+shouldn't they? they're two to one, and have no end of guns."
+
+"I like his idea of using all the regiment," laughed Cordova.  "Nearly
+a half of the third squadron are mounted on baggage mules; their horses
+are all dead."
+
+"They must get fresh ones from the enemy," I suggested.
+
+"Come," said Plaza; "there's nothing more to see here."  And we
+returned to the tent.
+
+Anxious to have a good long night, Cordova soon fell asleep; but Alzura
+and I sat up chatting till within an hour or two of dawn.  We could
+hear the hostile skirmishers peppering away at each other at intervals,
+and somehow the sounds seemed to be the prelude to a coming battle.
+
+Fortunately the morning dawned fair, but there was a nip in the air
+which impelled us to move about smartly.  Then the sun rose gloriously
+over the eastern peaks, and its genial warmth raised our drooping
+spirits.  I cannot account for the feeling, but somehow the whole army
+felt that a battle was imminent, and the faces of the troops wore a
+look of excited expectancy.
+
+Directly after breakfast, or what we were pleased to call breakfast,
+the men began moving to their positions, each corps being formed in
+close column.  For the better understanding of what happened, I must
+try to describe our position.  We were drawn up on a nearly square
+tableland known as the Plain of Ayacucho, a league in circumference,
+and flanked right and left by rugged ravines.  We had the village at
+our backs, and the only road by which we could retreat was effectually
+blocked.  The Royalist army was perched just below the summit of a
+gigantic ridge called Condorcanqui, which formed the eastern boundary
+of the plain.
+
+At seven o'clock our regiment moved out, and the men of the third
+squadron, of whom Cordova had spoken, provoked much humour and
+good-natured chaff as they rode past on their baggage mules.  It was
+thought that they would help to make a show, but no one suspected that
+later on, when ordered to remain in the rear, they would answer firmly,
+"No, we will conquer or die with our comrades!"
+
+The cavalry, consisting of four regiments, was stationed in the centre,
+with an infantry division on either side, and a third in the rear as a
+reserve.
+
+About nine o'clock a great cheer rose from all parts of the plain: the
+Royalists were descending the craggy side of Condorcanqui.  Between the
+infantry of each division appeared the cavalry, the riders leading
+their horses and advancing with difficulty.  It was an impressive
+scene, and we stood watching with breathless interest.
+
+Then our fellows renewed their cheering as General Sucre, riding along
+the line, addressed a few rousing words to each particular corps.
+
+"A tough nut to crack," remarked Plaza, watching the Royalists form,
+"but we'll get at the kernel before the day's over."
+
+"There's the beginning!" cried Alzura, as the infantry on our right
+slowly advanced.  "Hurrah! we're to help!" for an aid-de-camp from
+General Sucre had just dashed up to Miller with orders.
+
+We waited eagerly for the word to mount, but our turn had not yet come.
+Two cavalry regiments moved off with Miller, and left us gazing at the
+drama being unfolded before our eyes.
+
+Our infantry columns marched to the attack like so many automatic
+machines; the Royalists waited firmly, as if confident of victory.  We
+stood holding our horses, and quivering with excitement.  Much would
+depend upon the result of that first encounter.
+
+"They're stopping to fire," cried Alzura.  "Now they're moving again.
+Viva! they're going to charge.  Look at the sun on their bayonets."
+
+Would the Royalists give way?  No; they stood firm as the rocky heights
+behind them--not a man moved.  It seemed to me that there was not even
+a tremor in the whole mass.  If our fellows charged and failed, they
+would be cut to pieces.  We were like spectators in a theatre, only the
+drama was a real one.
+
+A mighty "Viva!" floated back to us as our men broke into the charge.
+It was neck or nothing now--decisive victory or stern defeat.
+
+"The Royalists will run," muttered Plaza; "they must."
+
+But they did not, and the next instant bayonet crossed bayonet in
+desperate conflict.
+
+Excitement drove us well-nigh crazy.  We cheered and shouted and waved
+our sabres, as if by so doing we could help in the fight.  Our troops
+had met their match, and seemed to make no impression.  Unless they
+went forward shortly they must retreat.
+
+"If they're driven back," remarked Plaza, "they are lost."
+
+How the struggle would have ended I cannot tell, but just then we broke
+into a cry of relief.  The two cavalry regiments which had made a wide
+detour were seen bearing down on the Royalists' flanks.  They swept
+along at hurricane speed.  Nothing could stand against the shock of
+their long lances.  A portion of the Royalists, facing about, delivered
+a telling volley at short range.  Men and horses went down with a
+crash, but the survivors were not checked.  A second volley crashed
+into them, making wide gaps, and then, with the force of a roaring
+torrent, they literally swept away the barrier of men and steel.
+
+"That settles it," said Plaza, breathing deeply; "the bravest troops in
+the world couldn't recover from such a smashing blow.  It's a case of
+complete rout, in that part of the field at all events."
+
+He was right too.  The enemy would not, indeed could not rally.  Here
+and there small groups stood at bay, fighting desperately but vainly to
+stem the onset of their pursuers.  All they could do was to die
+fighting, in the hope that the sacrifice might save their comrades.
+Even those who reached the heights were not out of danger.  Whiz, whiz
+sped the bullets; and numbers of the fugitives rolled down the mountain
+side till their bodies were caught by crag or brushwood.
+
+So greatly was our attention absorbed by the scene that we had scarcely
+noticed what was happening on our left.  Suddenly, however, a heavy
+fire broke out, followed by the quick reports of hundreds of muskets.
+Our colonel glanced in the direction uneasily.  His orders were strict.
+He was on no account to move his regiment, and yet--
+
+"Crawford," said he, looking round, "see what that firing means."
+
+I sprang to the saddle and galloped off.  But for our success on the
+right, I should have felt inclined to take a gloomy view of things: our
+left had given way.
+
+Two Royalist battalions were advancing in pursuit, while still further
+on the left a cavalry regiment was swooping down on one of our reserve
+battalions sent in support.  The crafty enemy had crossed a deep
+ravine, on the farther side of which a whole division was stationed.
+
+A mounted officer, with cap gone and cloak flying in the wind, pulled
+up on seeing me, and said rapidly, "Where is your regiment?  Take me to
+your colonel quickly.  We want cavalry; we must have cavalry, or our
+whole left will be rolled up!"
+
+"This way," I replied, and together we galloped towards the Hussars of
+Junin, reaching the colonel just as General Miller dashed up from the
+right.
+
+"What is it?" he asked hastily.
+
+"We are overpowered, sir.  The enemy have four field-guns across a
+ravine; our division has suffered terribly, and the troops are giving
+way.  The general requires a regiment of cavalry immediately."
+
+"Tell him it's coming," replied Miller.--"Now, colonel, here's a chance
+for your men to show their mettle.  We've smashed the enemy on the
+right; let the 'Hussars of Junin' do the same on the left."
+
+How we did cheer as our colonel led us out!  General Miller's face wore
+an anxious expression as he glanced over the field.  Everywhere the
+victorious Spaniards were driving back our left wing; we should only be
+just in time to repair the mischief.
+
+"Push those two infantry battalions across the ravine while I rally the
+fugitives," said Miller.  But he had barely spoken when the Royalist
+cavalry dashed down on the right flank.
+
+"Here's Crawford's friend again!" said Plaza.  "We might have guessed
+he had a hand in this business."
+
+Santiago made a handsome picture as he tore along well in front of his
+regiment, and enemy though he was, I could not help feeling proud of
+him.  We turned to meet this vigorous onslaught, and though Santiago
+fought with all the traditional valour of his race, his men, already
+tired by their great exertions, could not stand against us.
+
+Stopping their flight, our own infantry rallied, and advanced in
+support, while their loud cheers proclaimed the arrival of a second
+cavalry regiment.  Nothing daunted by his repulse, Santiago led his
+troopers against the new enemy, while we bore down on the hostile
+infantry.
+
+"Gallop!" cried our colonel; and neck by neck the horses flew over the
+ground, the men waving their sabres and cheering lustily.  We could see
+the glittering steel of the bayonets now, could almost look down the
+barrels of the muskets, when there came a blinding flash, the thud of
+falling bodies, and hoarse shrieks of pain.
+
+"Forward!" thundered the colonel, "forward; remember the 'Hussars of
+Junin!'"
+
+Crash we went right into them before they could fire another volley,
+and then it was horseman against footman, sabre against bayonet.  To
+and fro we surged, striking parrying, thrusting, till at last the brave
+enemy, unable to continue the struggle longer, fled to the ravine,
+hotly pursued by our victorious regiment.
+
+In a calmer moment we should have pulled up, but there was no stopping
+now.  Some one raised a warning cry: it came too late.  Down the ravine
+we went, the horses slipping and scrambling--some rolling over and
+crushing their riders; the majority, keeping their feet somehow,
+reached the opposite bank.  A small detachment of the enemy halted to
+fire a scattering volley, which did some mischief.  A man close to me
+fell forward on his horse's neck.
+
+"Good-bye, Crawford!" said he faintly; "I am done for."
+
+It was Cordova; but there was no time to help him.  On we dashed
+straight at the guns, which the gunners dared not fire, so mixed up
+were friend and foe.  A cry of "Viva el Rey!" arose in our rear.
+Santiago was galloping back.
+
+The Royalists could not stand.  Miller had brought up three battalions
+in double-quick time; the guns were ours; horse and foot we swept over
+the plain, driving the enemy pell-mell in all directions.  Only the
+regiment led by the undaunted Santiago endeavoured to cover the
+retreat, and at last it too fled.
+
+Not so their brave leader; he remained on the field.  I found him
+later, with a hole in his side and a nasty gash across the face.  He
+was not dead, however, and with assistance I carried him to the
+village, where a surgeon dressed his wounds.  Then I returned to my
+regiment.
+
+"It's all over!" cried Alzura exultantly.  "The viceroy is taken
+prisoner, and Canterac has come to sue for terms.  He is with Sucre
+now."
+
+"Where is Plaza?"
+
+"Just gone to find poor Cordova.  It's hard lines to drop off in the
+moment of victory.  And the war is over now; the Royalists will never
+lift their heads again."
+
+This was not quite correct, as a few still held out in other parts of
+the country, but they were powerless to do any real mischief.  This
+battle of Ayacucho--or Battle of the Generals, as we called it--secured
+the independence of Peru.  Fourteen Spanish generals, some of them the
+most famous in South America, gave up their swords; nearly six hundred
+officers and most of the rank and file became prisoners of war.
+
+Late that evening I went to see Santiago.  He lay on a bench in a
+miserable hut, where several wounded officers had been brought for
+shelter.  Two small earthen lamps gave a feeble light, barely
+sufficient for us to see each other's faces.  I bent over him, and
+choked back the sob that would rise in my throat.  We neither of us
+tried to gloze over the truth.  He was dying, and we both knew it.
+
+"I am glad you have come," he whispered.  "It will soon be over, and I
+am not sorry; I have tried to do my best."
+
+"Indeed you have, old fellow; friend and foe alike are loud in your
+praise."
+
+"I have been loyal to my king; I have done my duty," he continued, not
+heeding the interruption.  "Life is precious, Juan, but honour is the
+first thing.  My name is unstained.  I die as I have lived, a cavalier
+of Spain!"
+
+That thought cheered him as he took his last and long journey.  He was
+young and handsome and well beloved; he had fair estates and hosts of
+friends; he might have risen high in the councils of his nation; but
+death, stern and unyielding, claimed him, and he braced himself to meet
+it.
+
+"Thank God!" he murmured; "I die with a clear conscience."
+
+I stayed with him till nearly midnight, when he became unconscious.
+Then having work to do, I sorrowfully went away.  Next morning, on my
+way to the hut I met General Miller.
+
+"Poor fellow!" he said, when I told him of Santiago's state.  "I will
+come with you.  I remember him well."
+
+Just as we were moving on, we met General Sucre accompanied by a
+Spanish officer, who on seeing Miller ran forward and embraced him.
+
+"I know you!" he cried.  "I am Valdes.  You and I must be friends."
+Then turning to General Sucre, he added, "This Miller has often kept us
+on the move.  I am called active; but he was a regular wizard--here,
+there, everywhere, without giving a clue to his intentions until he
+dealt us some sly blow."
+
+I looked at this celebrated Spanish general with a great deal of
+interest.  He was a small, spare man, with keen eyes and rough,
+weather-beaten face.  He wore a broad-brimmed beaver hat, a coarse gray
+surtout, and long brown worsted leggings.  He stooped slightly, and to
+judge by appearances, one would never have thought he was perhaps the
+finest soldier in the Spanish service.
+
+Sucre left the two chatting, and presently Miller said, "I was just
+going to visit one of your men, a Colonel Mariano.  Do you know him?"
+
+"Mariano?  He was my best cavalry officer.  It was he who helped me to
+cut up your rearguard some time ago, and to drive back your left wing
+yesterday.  I'll come with you."
+
+"He will be very pleased to see you, no doubt.--You go first and show
+us the way, Crawford."
+
+Santiago lay with closed eyes, breathing so faintly that at first we
+thought he was dead.
+
+"Santiago," I softly whispered, "do you know me?  I have brought you a
+visitor."
+
+His eyes opened slowly, and there was a fleeting smile in them, but he
+did not speak.
+
+"Colonel!" said Valdes, stepping to the side of the bench.  The sound
+of that voice brought the poor fellow for a short time from the Valley
+of the Shadow.  By some extraordinary means he managed to sit up
+without assistance, raised his hand to the salute, and in a clear,
+ringing voice exclaimed, "At your service, general!"
+
+It was the last act of his life.  On placing my arm round him to
+prevent him from falling, I found he was dead.
+
+"A fine fellow," said General Miller quietly.
+
+"A thorough soldier to the end!" cried the Spanish general.
+
+I said nothing, but mourned none the less the true friend I had found
+in the ranks of our enemies.
+
+We were very quiet in camp that day.  The excitement of battle had
+passed, and we were counting the cost of our triumph.  Many familiar
+faces were missing, and the death of Cordova especially affected us.
+We had been through many perils together, had endured many hardships,
+and it seemed a pity that he should not have lived to taste the sweets
+of victory.
+
+Shortly before sunset that same day I received a message from General
+Miller asking me to go to his quarters.  I found him expecting me, and
+he at once plunged into the subject upon which he wished to speak.
+
+"The war is now over, Crawford," said he, "and General Sucre is able to
+release a large part of his force.  I am proceeding to Cuzco, but there
+is no need for you to do so.  You have done your share, and I intend
+sending you on special service to Lima."
+
+"Oh, thank you, general!" I answered, my eyes sparkling and my cheeks
+flushing with pleasure.
+
+"The regiment will return in a few weeks at the most," he continued.
+"Be ready to start in the morning, and don't forget to remember me
+kindly to your parents.  Some day I hope to call upon them."
+
+"I am sure you will receive a very warm welcome when you come,
+general," I replied, taking the hand held out to me.
+
+"Well, dear boy," said Alzura, on my return to our quarters, "what is
+the news?"
+
+"Good," said I, "though perhaps it's a bit selfish to say so.  I start
+to-morrow for Lima.  The regiment proceeds to Cuzco, but it will return
+to the capital in a few weeks."
+
+"All right, old fellow.  I'm glad to hear of your good fortune, though
+I shall miss you awfully.  Mind you hunt up my people and tell them I'm
+all right and hoping to see them soon."
+
+Of course I promised to do so, and then went to wish the others
+good-bye.
+
+"I hope you will find all your people well," exclaimed Plaza on hearing
+the news.  "After all, you're only a sort of advance courier, and we
+shall soon meet again."
+
+"We shall expect you to give a ball to the officers of the regiment,
+and a feast to the men, when we reach the capital," cried Alzura
+merrily.
+
+"Meanwhile," said Plaza gravely, "take my advice, and have a good rest."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIX.
+
+HOME AGAIN.
+
+Home again!  The weary journey was at an end.
+
+I had crossed the desolate mountains, and was riding into Lima.  The
+city was gay with flags and bunting; decorations abounded on all sides;
+joy-bells pealed, and the streets resounded with the merry laughter and
+chatter of the citizens.
+
+News of the brilliant victory at Ayacucho had evidently preceded me.
+
+I longed to ride home at a gallop and throw myself into my mother's
+arms; I yearned eagerly for a glimpse of my father's face.  I was (do
+not think the confession weak) utterly homesick.  Duty, however,
+claimed me a while longer, and I turned my horse's head toward the
+Government House.
+
+It was not possible to move at more than a foot-pace.  The crowd surged
+around me; little children, garlanded with flowers, ran close to my
+horse's hoofs.  I was terribly afraid some of them would be trampled to
+death.
+
+Many soldiers were there, too, their uniforms spick and span, and
+unspotted by the soil of the Andes.  Mine was dirty, bloodstained, and
+not altogether free from rents.  I rode carefully, but my eyes were
+heavy and my limbs ached with fatigue.
+
+Darting suddenly from the throng, a man seized my bridle-rein and cried
+aloud, "A soldier from Ayacucho!  Here is one of our brave deliverers!"
+
+[Illustration: "A soldier from Ayacucho!  Here is one of our brave
+deliverers!"]
+
+Instantly I was surrounded by the crowd, which pressed me so closely
+that my horse could barely move.  Viva after viva rent the air;
+laughing girls and women half smothered me with flowers; men marched
+beside me or fell into line behind, forming a kind of triumphal
+procession.  One would have thought I was the saviour of the country--a
+second Bolivar!
+
+Thus, laughing, cheering, and singing, they escorted me to the
+Government House, where, leaving my astonished horse with the guards, I
+hurried inside.  An official, in all the glory of a gorgeous uniform,
+demanded my business, and remarked haughtily that the president was
+engaged.
+
+"Tell him," said I, "that a lieutenant of the Hussars of Junin is here
+with dispatches from General Sucre."
+
+After waiting a few minutes, I was conducted through the spacious hall
+to a room guarded by a file of soldiers.  My attendant knocked timidly
+at the door, which was immediately opened, and I entered the apartment.
+
+Bolivar sat at a table dictating letters to his secretary and talking
+to several officers of high rank.  His complexion seemed sallower than
+ever, his dark hair had more of gray in it, but his eyes had lost none
+of their penetrating keenness.
+
+I saluted and stood at attention, waiting for him to speak.
+
+"Ah," exclaimed he, in his loud, rasping voice, and turning his eyes
+askance as he usually did in conversation, "you are Lieutenant
+Crawford!  I have not forgotten you.  How is it that you still have
+only two stripes?" pointing to the stripes of silver lace round my
+cuff, which denoted the rank of lieutenant.
+
+"I do not know, general," I replied.
+
+"Your Excellency!" corrected one of the officers standing near.
+
+"Let him alone!" cried Bolivar; "he is a soldier, and 'general' comes
+more naturally to his lips.--Where are the dispatches?"
+
+I presented them.
+
+"Humph! enough work here for the rest of the day," said he on glancing
+through them.--"Garcia," turning to one of the officers, "countermand
+the reception; I shall be too busy.--Ah, here is a letter from Miller!
+I see he commends you very highly, young man, and desires to bring you
+to my notice.  There is nothing I like so much as rewarding true
+merit.--Garcia, make out Lieutenant Crawford's commission as captain in
+the Hussars of Junin, for bravery on the field.--I congratulate you,
+captain.  I see by your face you are anxious to go."
+
+After thanking him for my promotion, I said, "Yes, general; I have not
+seen my father and mother for a very long time."
+
+"Your father--ah, now I remember.  He is no friend to me--would be glad
+to see me out of Peru, in fact, eh?  Well, I shall go some day.  But he
+is a true man for all that, and an Englishman.  I love the English.
+Perhaps it is as well for your father that I do.  Tell him, Captain
+Crawford, that Bolivar has some good points."
+
+"He has already recognized them, general," I answered.
+
+"He conceals his discovery well, then.  But I will not keep you longer.
+Present yourself at my levee in the morning, and don't forget to wear
+that extra band of lace."
+
+"There is no fear of that, general," said I, with a smile; "I am too
+proud of the honour."
+
+Apparently the remark pleased him, as he was very gracious when I took
+my leave, though the officers-in-waiting looked at me as if I had been
+overbold.
+
+Out again into the street.  The crowd had dispersed, and only a few
+people were about as I once more mounted my jaded animal.  Now for
+home!  Forward, good horse!  My spirits rose with every step; the tired
+feeling left me; I could have sung aloud for very joy.
+
+The sight of the Montilla hacienda sobered my happiness somewhat.  The
+grounds were trim and well-kept, but the dwelling looked untenanted.
+What had become of Rosa?  Perhaps--yes, that must be it--she was
+staying with my mother.  I urged my horse into a spasmodic gallop, but
+the poor beast soon resumed his old pace.
+
+There was a horse behind me, though, that could gallop.  I turned
+quickly to see who the rider was, and laughed gaily.
+
+"Why, Jack!" cried the faithful Jose, his eyes brimful of pleasure.
+
+"Captain Crawford, if you please!" I interrupted with assumed dignity.
+
+"Captain or general, it's all the same to me, as long as you're home
+again, Jack, with no scratch on you!  Hurrah! won't there be a fuss in
+the house to-night!" and away he went at breakneck speed toward the
+gate.
+
+"Better so," said I, jogging along.  "He'll be able to prepare them a
+little.--Come, old boy," to my horse, "can't you manage even a trot?
+Well, never mind; we're nearly there."
+
+The gate of the park was wide open, and inside stood more than half of
+my father's servants.  They could not wait for me to reach the
+courtyard.  How they cheered, to be sure!  It was a pleasant foretaste
+of the welcome that awaited me.
+
+Good old Antonio was at the little gate, so I dismounted and spoke a
+word with him, though my feet itched to be dashing along the courtyard.
+Then I sent my horse to the stables, with strict orders that it should
+be carefully groomed and fed, and made comfortable.
+
+At last!  My heart beat loudly; my head was dizzy; I could barely
+distinguish the figures in the hall.  But my mother's arms were round
+me, her lips pressed close to mine, in a fond embrace.
+
+Then came my father's welcome, and presently, in the brilliantly-lit
+drawing-room, a young girl came forward and placed her hand in mine.
+She was dressed in black, and looked somewhat sad and careworn, as if
+life had not been particularly pleasant of late.
+
+"Welcome home, Juan," said she softly; and I saw by her face she was
+thinking of the night when I had ridden hurriedly away in the vain
+endeavour to save her father's life.  We did not speak of it then, and
+when, after changing my clothes, I returned to the drawing-room, Rosa
+was not there.
+
+"She has gone to her own room," explained my mother, noticing my look
+of disappointment.  "It would have been difficult for the poor child to
+stay with us this first evening."
+
+"She has heard of her father's death, then?"
+
+"Yes," said my father, quickly and with a warning glance.  "She knows
+that the Indians shot him, thinking he had been in correspondence with
+the Royalists."
+
+I understood at once that my father was aware of the truth, but that,
+with his usual kindly thought, he had kept it from both the bereaved
+girl and my mother.  He never alluded to the miserable incident, nor
+did I; and Rosa was left in ignorance of the real reason for her
+father's untimely end.
+
+Of course, we sat late talking over my adventures in the mountains, and
+of the terrible battle which had secured the independence of Peru.
+
+"Yes," said my father confidently, "whatever else happens, the
+Spaniards will never again rule over this country; their power is
+broken.  But we are not yet out of the wood: as a Peruvian, I still
+fear Bolivar's ambition."
+
+"Oh," I exclaimed gaily, "I had forgotten Bolivar!  He has made me a
+captain!" and I told them all about my interview with the celebrated
+general.
+
+"I admit his good points," laughed my father; "but I do not like to see
+one person invested with such tremendous power.  Still, there is no
+doubt we owe our liberty in great part to his wonderful energy,
+together with his determination never to acknowledge defeat.  He has
+toiled day and night like a slave."
+
+"I shall be glad when your regiment returns, Juan," said my mother.  "I
+am longing to see your brave friends, and especially Alzura.  I seem to
+know him quite well already."
+
+"You are sure to like him, mother.  He is a delightful companion, full
+of fun, and always laughing and joking.  Plaza is older and more of a
+soldier, but I owe a great deal to his kindness."
+
+"We will endeavour to repay it, my boy," said she brightly, kissing me
+good-night.  "Don't stay up too long.  Remember you have to attend the
+levee in the morning."
+
+When she had retired, I asked my father for news of Raymon Sorillo.
+
+"He is still serving against the Royalists, but his band has sadly
+diminished.  He came here secretly one night, and informed me of your
+attempt to rescue Montilla.  I think he was very angry; but he said it
+was a daring act, and almost successful.  However, he bears no malice,
+and is as ready as ever to stand your friend."
+
+"Ugh!" said I, getting up with a shiver; "I hope I shall not need his
+assistance."
+
+The next day, after attending the levee, where Bolivar was particularly
+gracious, I obtained an indefinite leave of absence, and returned home.
+
+Rosa was alone, and though rather dreading to be asked about the
+business of the silver key, I thought it best to get the interview
+over.  As it happened, I need not have worried myself at all.
+
+"I wanted to see you, Juan," she said, giving me her hand.  "It seems
+ages ago when I sent you out on that terrible errand.  I ought not to
+have done it; but my father's life was at stake, and I did not think of
+the danger to you."
+
+"Think no more of it, Rosa.  After all, the danger was trifling; the
+Indians would not have hurt me."
+
+"I don't quite understand the story," she said thoughtfully, "but I
+know you risked your life."
+
+"There was little risk.  I had a slight chance to rescue your father
+from the Indians, and seized it.  Unfortunately the attempt failed, and
+I was captured by the Royalists.  So in one way you did me a good turn;
+for while the other fellows were starving and fighting in the
+mountains, I was pretty comfortably off."
+
+"But you were in the great battle?"
+
+"Yes, I was.  I escaped from prison chiefly to please a mad-brained
+young lieutenant of my regiment.  But it is all past now, Rosa, and
+there will be no more fighting."
+
+"I am sorry for his Majesty," she said simply, "and for the loyal
+gentlemen who have died for him."
+
+"There were some splendid fellows amongst the Royalists," I said, and
+proceeded to tell her the story of the gallant Santiago Mariano.
+
+"He must have been a brave man, Juan!"
+
+"He was, and he had equally brave comrades.  Now that the struggle is
+over, they will join us, and we shall all work together in peace for
+the prosperity of our common country.  The war has been a terrible
+evil, but I am hoping that much good may come from it.  I dream of a
+grand future for Peru, and of a time when the Land of the Sun shall
+recover its ancient glory."
+
+"I hope your dream will come true, Juan.  I am sure you will try to
+make it do so," she said.  "But you must not expect me to be pleased
+that we are no longer loyal subjects of the Spanish king."
+
+      *      *      *      *      *      *
+
+Here ends the story of my adventures during the War of Independence.
+The Spanish power was completely crushed; but, as my father had
+foretold, there were still many misfortunes in store for our unhappy
+country.  The men who had fought so hard for liberty quarrelled among
+themselves.  There were endless disputes and conspiracies, and many
+soldiers who had bravely faced death on the battlefield were executed
+by their fellow-countrymen.
+
+For two years Bolivar ruled at Lima.  He was at the height of his
+glory.  He had freed Venezuela, New Granada, and Ecuador from the
+Spaniards, and joined them into the one country of Colombia.  Upper
+Peru he had formed into another country called Bolivia, and he was the
+real master of Peru proper.
+
+His boundless ambition, however, overreached itself.  Enemies rose up
+against him on all sides.  He was driven from power, and seven years
+after the battle of Ayacucho died a broken-hearted man.
+
+After his departure from Lima, my father's Spanish friend, General La
+Mar, who had once been Governor of Callao, was elected president, and
+the country settled down into a state of something like order.
+
+There still remain a few personal matters to be recorded before my pen
+is finally laid aside.
+
+Among those who opposed Bolivar's rule in Peru, none was more bitter or
+reckless than the guerilla chief, Raymon Sorillo.  Unfortunately for
+him, the war had greatly weakened the society of the Silver Key.  His
+bravest men and ablest lieutenants had died fighting, and he was left
+with only a shadow of his former power.
+
+Undaunted by this, he openly defied Bolivar's authority.  For several
+months he held his own against the regular troops, but at last, being
+captured, was tried as a traitor, and condemned to death.
+
+My father made strenuous efforts to save him, and would have succeeded
+but for Sorillo himself.
+
+"The man is a desperate ruffian," said Bolivar, in answer to my
+father's appeal for mercy; "but I will pardon him on condition that he
+takes the oath of allegiance and swears to obey the laws."
+
+Overjoyed by his success, my father hurried to the prison where Sorillo
+was confined.  The doughty mountaineer refused the offer with scorn.
+
+"I took up arms for the independence of Peru," said he, "not to
+exchange the tyranny of the Spaniards for that of a Venezuelan
+adventurer.  I thank you, senor, from my heart, but I prefer death to
+these conditions."
+
+My father stayed with him nearly the whole day, but could not shake his
+resolve.  So in the early morning the redoubtable chief was led into
+the prison yard, and was placed near a wall.  Some of the soldiers
+wished to bandage his eyes, but he would not allow it.
+
+"No," said he; "I have looked in the face of death too closely and too
+often to fear it.  Fire!  I shall not tremble."
+
+Thus he died, and whatever else may be said, it cannot be denied that,
+in his own headstrong, obstinate way, he was faithful to the cause for
+which many better men had laid down their lives.
+
+Of my friend Plaza it is only necessary to say that, through General
+Miller's influence as well as by his own merit, he rapidly advanced to
+high office, being made governor of one of the inland provinces.  He
+has paid me several visits since he left the hussars, and his sole
+regret is that Cordova did not live to share in the general good
+fortune.
+
+An old acquaintance, who has also since done well in the world, is
+Barriero.  When the victory at Ayacucho became known, the prisoners on
+the island rose in revolt, and overpowered their guards.  Barriero
+placed himself at their head, seized all the arms and ammunition, and
+formed the patriots into a company.  Then, assisted by some Indians, he
+crossed the morass and marched to Cuzco, where, to his joy and
+astonishment, he heard that Alzura and I had safely escaped across the
+dreaded swamp.
+
+Alzura resigned his commission shortly after the regiment returned to
+Lima.  He succeeded to a fine estate near the capital, and is one of
+our most frequent visitors.  My father is very fond of him, and as for
+my mother, I sometimes say she thinks more of him than of myself;
+indeed, the dear fellow has almost become like a second son to her.
+
+Jose is still my father's right-hand man.  He has long since amassed a
+snug fortune; but I expect he will die in the old home, where he is an
+esteemed and valued and trusty friend.
+
+Felipe Montilla's hacienda no longer stands desolate.  Rosa has again
+taken up her residence there, but under the name of Crawford, and
+employs me, as my father jokingly says, to look after her estates.  She
+is still a Royalist at heart, but as the years pass she becomes more
+and more reconciled to the changes which have taken place since Peru
+obtained its independence
+
+    AT THE POINT OF THE SWORD.
+
+
+
+
+THE END.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+End of Project Gutenberg's At the Point of the Sword, by Herbert Hayens
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK AT THE POINT OF THE SWORD ***
+
+***** This file should be named 22595.txt or 22595.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        https://www.gutenberg.org/2/2/5/9/22595/
+
+Produced by Al Haines
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+https://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+https://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including including checks, online payments and credit card
+donations.  To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
diff --git a/22595.zip b/22595.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..76ea804
--- /dev/null
+++ b/22595.zip
diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6312041
--- /dev/null
+++ b/LICENSE.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements,
+metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be
+in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES.
+
+Procedures for determining public domain status are described in
+the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org.
+
+No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in
+jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize
+this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright
+status under the laws that apply to them.
diff --git a/README.md b/README.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6c491bb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/README.md
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for
+eBook #22595 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/22595)